SpaceLogic - Hardware Reference Guide

SpaceLogic™
Hardware
Reference Guide
04-40001-01-en
December 2021
SpaceLogic™
Hardware
Reference Guide
04-40001-01-en
December 2021
Copyright © 2021 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
The Schneider Electric brand and any registered trademarks of Schneider Electric Industries SAS referred to in this guide are the sole property of
Schneider Electric SA and its subsidiaries. They may not be used for any purpose without the owner's permission, given in writing. This guide and its
content are protected, within the meaning of the French intellectual property code (Code de la propriété intellectuelle français, referred to hereafter as
"the Code"), under the laws of copyright covering texts, drawings and models, as well as by trademark law. You agree not to reproduce, other than for
your own personal, non-commercial use as defined in the Code, all or part of this guide on any medium whatsoever without Schneider Electric's
permission, given in writing. You also agree not to establish any hypertext links to this guide or its content. Schneider Electric does not grant any right or
license for the personal and non-commercial use of the guide or its content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your
own risk. All other rights are reserved.
Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Contents
Introduction
1 About This Guide ........................................................ 43
1.1 Purpose of This Guide ............................................................... 45
1.2 How This Guide is Organized ..................................................... 46
1.3 Safety Information ...................................................................... 47
1.3.1 Important Information ............................................................... 47
1.3.2 Cybersecurity Safety Notice ..................................................... 48
1.4 Consignes de sécurité ............................................................... 49
2 Additional Information ................................................. 51

2.1 Where to Find Additional Information ......................................... 53
Reference
3 Hardware .................................................................... 57
3.1 Hardware Overview ................................................................... 59
3.1.1 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 59
3.1.2 PS-24V Power Supplies ........................................................... 59
3.1.3 AS-P Servers ........................................................................... 59
3.1.4 Central IO Modules .................................................................. 59
3.1.5 AS-B Servers ........................................................................... 60
3.1.6 MP-C Controllers ..................................................................... 60
3.1.7 MP-V Controllers ...................................................................... 60
3.1.8 IP-IO Modules .......................................................................... 60
3.1.9 RP-C Controllers ...................................................................... 61
3.1.10 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors .............. 61
3.1.11 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules ............................... 61
3.1.12 Remote Control ........................................................................ 61
3.1.13 KNX Modbus Gateway ............................................................. 61
3.1.14 SpaceLogic Sensors ................................................................ 62
3.1.15 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter ................................................ 62
3.1.16 SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter ..................................................... 62
3.1.17 AD v1 ....................................................................................... 62
3.1.18 AD v2 ....................................................................................... 62
3.1.19 AD v3 ....................................................................................... 62
04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

5
3.1.20 Operator Display ...................................................................... 63
3.1.21 Wiring ...................................................................................... 63
4 Terminal Bases ........................................................... 65

4.1 Terminal Bases .......................................................................... 67
4.1.1 Backplane Board ...................................................................... 68
4.1.2 Device Addressing ................................................................... 68
4.1.3 Device Installation .................................................................... 68
4.1.4 I/O Bus ..................................................................................... 68
4.2 Backplane Board ....................................................................... 69
4.2.1 2x5 Connector .......................................................................... 69
4.2.2 2x6 Connector .......................................................................... 70
4.2.3 Address Logic Circuitry ........................................................... 71
4.2.4 Central IO Module Address Calculation ................................... 71
4.2.5 Device Label ............................................................................ 72
4.3 Device Addressing ..................................................................... 73
4.4 Device Installation ...................................................................... 75
4.4.1 DIN Rail Installation ................................................................. 76
4.4.2 Device Order ............................................................................ 79
4.5 Installing a Terminal Base on a DIN-rail ..................................... 81
4.6 Connecting Terminal Bases ....................................................... 82
4.7 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus .......................................... 83
4.8 Wiring a Terminal Base .............................................................. 84
4.9 Installing an Electronics Module on a Terminal Base ................. 85
4.10 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels .................................... 87
4.11 Powering Up a Device ................................................................ 88
4.12 I/O Bus ....................................................................................... 89
4.12.1 I/O Bus Parts ............................................................................ 89
4.12.2 I/O Bus Restrictions ................................................................. 89
4.13 I/O Bus Parts .............................................................................. 90
4.14 I/O Bus Restrictions ................................................................... 92
5 Power Supplies ........................................................... 93

5.1 PS-24V Power Supplies ............................................................. 95
5.1.1 Electronics Modules ................................................................. 95
5.1.2 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 96
5.1.3 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs .................................................... 96
5.1.4 Power Budget .......................................................................... 96
5.1.5 ................................................................................................. 96
5.1.6 Internal Configuration ............................................................... 98
5.2 Electronics Modules ................................................................... 99
5.3 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 101
5.3.1 Backplane Board .................................................................... 102
5.3.2 Device Addressing ................................................................. 102
5.3.3 Device Installation .................................................................. 102
5.3.4 I/O Bus ................................................................................... 102
5.4 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs .................................................... 103
Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

6
5.4.1 Main Power LED .................................................................... 103
5.4.2 Status LED ............................................................................. 104
5.5 Power Budget .......................................................................... 105
6 AS-P Servers ............................................................ 107

6.1 AS-P Servers ........................................................................... 109
6.1.1 Electronics Modules ............................................................... 109
6.1.2 Terminal Bases ...................................................................... 109
6.1.3 AS-P Server Models .............................................................. 110
6.1.4 Memory .................................................................................. 110
6.1.5 Supported Building Standards ............................................... 110
6.1.6 AS-P Server Communication Ports ........................................ 111
6.1.7 AS-P Server Screw Terminals ............................................... 111
6.1.8 AS-P Server LEDs ................................................................. 111
6.1.9 Reset Functions ..................................................................... 111
6.1.10 Communication Port Wiring ................................................... 112
6.1.11 AS-P Server Software ............................................................ 112
6.1.12 Automation Server Replacement Using Restore ................... 112
6.1.13 ............................................................................................... 112
6.1.14 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 114
6.2 Electronics Modules ................................................................. 116
6.3 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 118
6.3.1 Backplane Board .................................................................... 119
6.3.4 I/O Bus ................................................................................... 119
6.4 AS-P Server Communication Ports .......................................... 120
6.5 AS-P Server Screw Terminals ................................................. 121
6.6 AS-P Server LEDs ................................................................... 124
6.6.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 125
6.6.2 RS-485 LEDs ......................................................................... 125
6.6.3 Ethernet LEDs ........................................................................ 126
6.6.4 LON LEDs .............................................................................. 126
7 Central IO Modules ................................................... 127

7.1 Central IO Modules .................................................................. 129
7.1.1 Electronics Modules ............................................................... 129
7.1.2 Terminal Bases ...................................................................... 130
7.1.3 Central IO Module LEDs ........................................................ 130
7.1.4 Override Switches and Potentiometers .................................. 130
7.1.5 External Device Connections ................................................. 130
7.1.6 Grounding and Power ............................................................ 130
7.1.7 Input Modules ........................................................................ 131
7.1.8 Output Modules ...................................................................... 131
7.1.9 Mixed Modules ....................................................................... 131
7.2 Electronics Modules ................................................................. 132
7.3 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 134

7
7.3.1 Backplane Board .................................................................... 135
7.3.4 I/O Bus ................................................................................... 135
7.4 Central IO Module LEDs .......................................................... 136
7.4.1 Central IO Module Status LED ............................................... 136
7.4.2 I/O Channel Status LEDs ....................................................... 137
7.5 Override Switches and Potentiometers .................................... 138
7.5.1 Override Switches .................................................................. 138
7.5.2 Potentiometers ...................................................................... 140
7.6 Input Modules .......................................................................... 141
7.6.1 DI-16 Central IO Module ........................................................ 141
7.6.2 UI-16 Central IO Module ........................................................ 141
7.6.3 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module ................................................ 142
7.7 DI-16 Central IO Module .......................................................... 143
7.7.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 143
7.7.2 ............................................................................................... 145
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module .......................................................... 147
7.8.1 Universal inputs ..................................................................... 147
7.8.2 ............................................................................................... 153
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module ................................................. 157
7.9.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 157
7.9.2 ............................................................................................... 162
7.10 Output Modules ....................................................................... 166
7.10.1 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules ................... 166
7.10.2 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules ...................... 166
7.10.3 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules ................................... 166
7.10.4 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules ............................ 167
7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules ..................... 168
7.11.1 Digital outputs ........................................................................ 168
7.11.2 ............................................................................................... 169
7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules ........................ 172
7.12.1 Digital outputs ........................................................................ 172
7.12.2 ............................................................................................... 173
7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules ..................................... 176
7.13.1 Analog outputs ....................................................................... 176
7.13.2 ............................................................................................... 178
7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules ............................. 181
7.14.1 Analog outputs ....................................................................... 181
7.14.2 ............................................................................................... 182
7.15 Mixed Modules ......................................................................... 185
7.15.1 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules ....... 185
7.15.2 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules ................... 185
7.15.3 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules ............ 186
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules ......... 187
7.16.2 Digital outputs ........................................................................ 193

8
7.16.3 ............................................................................................... 193
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules ..................... 198
7.17.2 Analog outputs ....................................................................... 204
7.17.3 ............................................................................................... 205
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules .............. 210
7.18.2 Analog outputs ....................................................................... 216
7.18.3 ............................................................................................... 216
8 AS-B Servers ............................................................ 221

8.1 AS-B Servers ........................................................................... 223
8.1.1 AS-B Server Models .............................................................. 223
8.1.2 AS-B Server Onboard I/O ...................................................... 224
8.1.3 Output Override Function ....................................................... 224
8.1.4 Built-in Power Supply ............................................................. 224
8.1.5 Memory .................................................................................. 224
8.1.6 Supported Building Standards ............................................... 224
8.1.7 AS-B Server Communication Ports ........................................ 225
8.1.8 AS-B Server Screw Terminals ............................................... 225
8.1.9 AS-B Server LEDs ................................................................. 225
8.1.10 Reset Functions ..................................................................... 225
8.1.12 Wiring .................................................................................... 226
8.1.13 AS-B Server Software ............................................................ 226
8.1.14 Server Replacement Using Restore ....................................... 226
8.1.15 ............................................................................................... 226
8.2 AS-B Server Communication Ports .......................................... 230
8.3 AS-B Server Screw Terminals ................................................. 231
8.3.1 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points ............ 231
8.3.2 Screw Terminals for AS-B servers with 36 I/O Points ............ 231
8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points .............. 232
8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points .............. 236
8.6 AS-B Server LEDs ................................................................... 241
8.6.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 241
8.6.2 RS-485 LEDs ......................................................................... 242
8.6.3 Ethernet LEDs ........................................................................ 242
8.7 AS-B Server Onboard I/O ........................................................ 243
8.7.1 Universal Inputs/Outputs ........................................................ 243
8.7.2 Digital Inputs .......................................................................... 243
8.7.3 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 243
8.7.4 Triac Outputs ......................................................................... 243
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs ......................................................... 244
8.8.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 244
8.8.2 Outputs .................................................................................. 250
8.8.3 ............................................................................................... 250

9
8.9 Digital Inputs ............................................................................ 254
8.9.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 254
8.9.2 ............................................................................................... 255
8.10 Relay Outputs .......................................................................... 256
8.10.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 256
8.10.2 ............................................................................................... 256
8.11 Triac Outputs ........................................................................... 258
8.11.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 258
8.11.2 ............................................................................................... 258
8.12 AS-B Server Device Installation ............................................... 260
8.13 Installing an AS-B Server on a DIN Rail ................................... 263
8.14 Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server ......................... 264
8.15 Removing a Terminal Block from an AS-B Server ................... 266
8.16 Wiring a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server ............................. 267
8.17 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus ........................................ 268
8.18 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels .................................. 269
8.19 Powering Up an AS-B Server ................................................... 270
9 SpaceLogic Device General Information .................. 271

9.1 Status LEDs ............................................................................. 273
9.1.1 Automation Server Status LED .............................................. 273
9.1.2 Central IO Module Status LED ............................................... 274
9.1.3 PS-24V Power Supply Status LED ........................................ 274
9.1.4 MP Controller Status LED ...................................................... 274
9.1.5 IP-IO Module Status LED ....................................................... 275
9.1.6 RP Controller Status LED ...................................................... 275
9.2 Automation Server Reset Functions ........................................ 277
9.2.1 Retain Levels for Variables .................................................... 278
9.2.2 Configuration and Historic Database ..................................... 279
9.2.3 DFU Mode .............................................................................. 279
9.3 Resetting a Automation Server to DFU Mode .......................... 280
10 MP-C Controllers ...................................................... 281

10.1 MP-C Controllers ..................................................................... 283
10.1.1 MP-C Models ......................................................................... 283
10.1.2 MP-C Onboard I/O ................................................................. 284
10.1.3 Output Override Function (Optional) ...................................... 284
10.1.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply ................................................... 284
10.1.5 BACnet/IP Device Memory .................................................... 284
10.1.6 BACnet/IP Controller Supported Building Standards ............. 284
10.1.7 MP Controller Communication Ports ...................................... 284
10.1.8 BACnet/IP Controller Sensor Bus .......................................... 285
10.1.9 MP-C Screw Terminals .......................................................... 285
10.1.10 MP Controller LEDs ............................................................... 285
10.1.11 MP Controller Reset Modes ................................................... 285
10.1.12 MP-C Device Installation ........................................................ 285
10.1.13 Wiring .................................................................................... 285

10
10.1.14 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 286
10.1.15 ............................................................................................... 286
10.2 MP-C Models ........................................................................... 290
10.3 MP-C Onboard I/O ................................................................... 291
10.3.2 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 291
10.3.3 High Power Relay Outputs ..................................................... 291
10.3.4 Triac Outputs ......................................................................... 292
10.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply ..................................................... 293
10.5 MP-C Screw Terminals ............................................................ 294
10.5.1 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals .................................................. 294
10.5.3 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals .................................................. 294
10.6 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 296
10.8 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals ..................................................... 302
10.11 MP-C Device Installation .......................................................... 315
10.12 Installing MP-C on a DIN Rail ................................................... 319
10.13 Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface ............................................. 320
10.14 Installing MP-C Display ............................................................ 324
10.15 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-C ........................................ 327
10.16 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-C ................................... 329
10.17 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C ............................................ 330
10.18 Powering Up MP-C .................................................................. 331
10.19.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 333
10.19.2 Outputs .................................................................................. 338
10.19.3 ............................................................................................... 339
10.20 Relay Outputs .......................................................................... 343
10.20.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 343
10.20.2 ............................................................................................... 343
10.21 High Power Relay Outputs ....................................................... 345
10.21.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 345
10.21.2 ............................................................................................... 345
10.22 Triac Outputs ........................................................................... 347
10.22.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 347
10.22.2 ............................................................................................... 348
11 MP-V Controllers ...................................................... 349

11.1 MP-V Controllers ..................................................................... 351
11.1.1 MP-V Models ......................................................................... 351
11.1.2 MP-V Onboard I/O ................................................................. 351

11
11.1.3 MP-V Damper Actuator .......................................................... 352
11.1.4 MP-V Air Flow Sensor ............................................................ 352
11.1.5 MP-V Built-in Power Supply ................................................... 352
11.1.6 BACnet/IP Device Memory .................................................... 352
11.1.8 MP Controller Communication Ports ...................................... 353
11.1.9 BACnet/IP Controller Sensor Bus ......................................... 353
11.1.10 MP-V Screw Terminals .......................................................... 353
11.1.11 MP Controller LEDs ............................................................... 353
11.1.12 MP Controller Reset Modes ................................................... 353
11.1.13 MP-V Device Installation ........................................................ 353
11.1.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 354
11.1.16 ............................................................................................... 354
11.2 MP-V Models ........................................................................... 358
11.3 MP-V Onboard I/O ................................................................... 359
11.3.1 Universal Inputs ..................................................................... 359
11.3.2 Triac Outputs ......................................................................... 359
11.3.3 Analog Outputs ...................................................................... 359
11.4 MP-V Damper Actuator ............................................................ 360
11.5 MP-V Air Flow Sensor .............................................................. 361
11.6 MP-V Built-in Power Supply ..................................................... 362
11.7 MP-V Screw Terminals ............................................................ 363
11.7.1 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 363
11.7.2 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 363
11.8 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals ....................................................... 364
11.9 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals ....................................................... 366
11.10 MP-V Device Installation .......................................................... 368
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to
Open ........................................................................................ 372
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise
(CCW) to Open ........................................................................ 378
11.13 Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting Screws to the Alternative
Positions .................................................................................. 384
11.14 Installing an AM-135 Shaft Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch)
Diameter Damper Shaft ........................................................... 386
11.15 Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the MP-V Air Flow
Sensor ..................................................................................... 387
11.16 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-V ........................................ 389
11.17 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-V ................................... 391
11.18 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V ............................................ 392
11.19 Powering Up MP-V .................................................................. 393
11.20 Universal Inputs ....................................................................... 395
11.20.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 395
11.20.2 ............................................................................................... 400
11.21 Triac Outputs ........................................................................... 403
11.21.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 403

12
11.21.2 ............................................................................................... 404
11.22 Analog Outputs ........................................................................ 405
11.22.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 405
11.22.2 ............................................................................................... 406
12 MP Controller General Information ........................... 407

12.1 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory ...................................... 409
12.2 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards ................ 410
12.3 MP Controller Communication Ports ........................................ 411
12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus ........................................................ 412
12.5 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP Controller ............ 417
12.6 MP Controller LEDs ................................................................. 419
12.6.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 419
12.6.2 Sensor Bus LEDs ................................................................... 420
12.6.3 Ethernet LEDs ........................................................................ 420
12.7 MP Controller Reset Modes ..................................................... 421
12.7.1 Factory Reset ......................................................................... 422
12.7.3 Value Retention on Restarts Using Command Priority
Levels .................................................................................... 423
13 Output Override ........................................................ 425

13.1 Output Override Function ......................................................... 427
13.1.1 User Experience .................................................................... 427
13.1.2 Keys ....................................................................................... 427
13.1.3 Basic Operation ..................................................................... 427
13.1.4 Override Outputs .................................................................... 428
13.1.5 View Inputs and Outputs ........................................................ 428
13.1.6 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use ................. 428
13.1.7 ............................................................................................... 428
13.2 User Experience ...................................................................... 429
13.3 Keys ......................................................................................... 431
13.4 Basic Operation ....................................................................... 432
13.4.1 Highlight an Option ................................................................ 432
13.4.2 Select an Option .................................................................... 432
13.4.3 Change a Value ..................................................................... 433
13.5 Override Outputs ..................................................................... 435
13.5.1 Override Analog Outputs ....................................................... 435
13.5.2 Override Digital Outputs ......................................................... 435
13.5.3 Override Digital Pulsed Outputs ............................................. 435
13.5.4 Override Tristate Outputs ....................................................... 436
13.5.5 Override Tristate Pulsed Outputs ........................................... 436
13.6 Overriding an Analog Output .................................................... 437
13.7 Overriding a Digital Output ....................................................... 440
13.8 Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output ........................................... 442
13.9 Overriding Tristate Outputs ...................................................... 445
13.10 Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs .......................................... 447
13.11 Removing an Override for an Output ....................................... 450

13
13.12 View Inputs and Outputs .......................................................... 452
13.13 Viewing Inputs and Outputs ..................................................... 453
13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use ................... 454
13.14.1 Configure a Universal Input/Output ........................................ 454
13.14.2 Configure a Digital Output ...................................................... 456
13.14.3 Configure a Digital Input ......................................................... 457
13.15 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Ua or Ub Type as an
Analog Output .......................................................................... 458
13.16 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Uc Type as an Analog
Output ...................................................................................... 460
13.17 Configuring a Universal Input/Output as an Input ..................... 462
13.18 Configuring a Digital Output ..................................................... 465
13.19 Configuring a Digital Input ........................................................ 467
13.20 Removing a Configuration for an Input or Output ..................... 469
13.21 Exiting Configuration Mode ...................................................... 471
14 Output Override User Interface ................................. 473

14.1 Icons ........................................................................................ 475
14.2 Home Screen on AS-B Servers ................................................ 477
14.3 Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module .................................. 478
14.4 I/O Filter Screen ....................................................................... 479
14.5 I/O List Screen ......................................................................... 480
14.6 Output Override Screen ........................................................... 481
14.7 I/O Configuration Screen ......................................................... 482
14.8 I/O Selection Screen ................................................................ 483
14.9 Digital Output Configuration Screen ......................................... 484
14.10 Pulse Period Configuration Screen .......................................... 485
14.11 Digital Input Configuration Screen ........................................... 486
14.12 Analog Output Configuration Screen ....................................... 487
14.13 Universal Input/Output Configuration Screen ........................... 488
14.14 Temperature Input Configuration Screen ................................. 489
14.15 Supervised Input Configuration Screen ................................... 490
14.16 Supervised Resistor Configuration Screen .............................. 491
14.17 Status Screen on AS-B Servers ............................................... 492
14.18 About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display .................................. 493
14.19 About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module .................................. 494
15 IP-IO Modules ........................................................... 495

15.1 IP-IO Modules .......................................................................... 497
15.1.1 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types ............................. 497
15.1.2 Output Override Function (Optional) ...................................... 497
15.1.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply ....................................... 498
15.1.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory .................................... 498
15.1.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards ......................... 498
15.1.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports ....................................... 498
15.1.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals .............................................. 498
15.1.8 IP-IO Module LEDs ................................................................ 499
15.1.9 IP-IO Module Reset Modes .................................................... 499

14
15.1.10 IP-IO Module Device Installation ............................................ 499
15.1.11 Wiring .................................................................................... 499
15.1.13 ............................................................................................... 500
15.2 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types ............................... 503
15.2.1 Digital Inputs .......................................................................... 503
15.2.3 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 504
15.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply ......................................... 505
15.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards ........................... 507
15.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports ......................................... 508
15.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals ................................................ 509
15.7.1 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals .................................................. 509
15.7.2 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals ............................................... 509
15.7.3 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals ..................................... 509
15.8 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals .................................................... 510
15.9 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals ................................................. 512
15.10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals ....................................... 515
15.11 IP-IO Module LEDs .................................................................. 518
15.11.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 518
15.11.2 Ethernet LEDs ........................................................................ 519
15.12 IP-IO Module Reset Modes ...................................................... 520
15.12.1 Factory Reset ......................................................................... 521
Levels .................................................................................... 522
15.13 IP-IO Module Device Installation .............................................. 523
15.14 Installing an IP-IO Module on a DIN Rail .................................. 527
15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface ............................ 528
15.16 Installing MP-C Display ............................................................ 532
15.17 Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module ....................... 535
15.18 Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-IO Module .................. 537
15.19 Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module ........................... 539
15.20 Powering Up an IP-IO Module .................................................. 541
15.21 Digital Inputs ............................................................................ 543
15.21.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 543
15.21.2 ............................................................................................... 543
15.22.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 545
15.22.2 Outputs .................................................................................. 550
15.22.3 ............................................................................................... 551
15.23 Relay Outputs .......................................................................... 554
15.23.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 554
15.23.2 ............................................................................................... 554

15
15.24.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 556
15.24.2 ............................................................................................... 556
16 RP-C Controllers ....................................................... 559

16.1 RP-C Controllers ...................................................................... 561
16.1.1 RP-C Models .......................................................................... 561
16.1.2 RP-C Onboard I/O ................................................................. 561
16.1.3 RP-C Built-in Power Supply ................................................... 562
16.1.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory .................................... 562
16.1.6 RP-C Wireless Connectivity ................................................... 562
16.1.7 RP-C Communication Ports ................................................... 562
16.1.8 RP-C Sensor Bus ................................................................... 563
16.1.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 563
16.1.10 RP-C Modbus ........................................................................ 563
16.1.11 RP-C Screw Terminals .......................................................... 563
16.1.12 RP-C LEDs ............................................................................ 563
16.1.13 RP Controller Reset Modes ................................................... 563
16.1.14 RP-C Device Installation ........................................................ 564
16.1.15 24 VAC Output on RP-C-16A Model ...................................... 564
16.1.16 Wiring .................................................................................... 564
16.1.17 BACnet/IP Controller Device Firmware Management ............ 564
16.1.18 RP-C Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ........................ 564
16.1.19 ............................................................................................... 565
16.2 RP-C Models ............................................................................ 570
16.3 RP-C Onboard I/O ................................................................... 571
16.3.2 Solid-state Relay (SSR) Outputs ............................................ 571
16.3.3 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 571
16.4 RP-C Built-in Power Supply ..................................................... 573
16.4.1 RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C Models (24 VAC/DC) .................. 573
16.4.2 RP-C-16A Model (230 VAC) .................................................. 573
16.6 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards ................ 575
16.7 RP-C Wireless Connectivity ..................................................... 576
16.8 RP-C Communication Ports ..................................................... 578
16.8.1 Ethernet Ports ........................................................................ 578
16.8.2 USB Ports .............................................................................. 578
16.8.3 RS-485 Ports ......................................................................... 578
16.9 RP-C Sensor Bus ..................................................................... 580
16.10 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensor Devices to an RP-C Controller
................................................................................................. 584
16.11 RP-C Room Bus ....................................................................... 586
16.12 RP-C Modbus .......................................................................... 589

16
16.13 RP-C Screw Terminals ............................................................ 592
16.13.1 RP-C-12A Screw Terminals ................................................... 592
16.13.2 RP-C-12B Screw Terminals ................................................... 592
16.13.3 RP-C-12C Screw Terminals ................................................... 592
16.13.4 RP-C-16A Screw Terminals ................................................... 592
16.14 RP-C-12A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 593
16.15 RP-C-12B Screw Terminals ..................................................... 596
16.16 RP-C-12C Screw Terminals ..................................................... 599
16.17 RP-C-16A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 602
16.18 RP-C LEDs .............................................................................. 605
16.18.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 605
16.19 RP Controller Reset Modes ..................................................... 607
16.19.1 Factory Reset ......................................................................... 608
Levels .................................................................................... 609
16.20 RP-C Device Installation .......................................................... 610
16.21 Installing RP-C on a DIN Rail ................................................... 615
16.22 Installing RP-C on a Flat Surface ............................................. 616
16.23 Wiring a Screw Terminal on RP-C ........................................... 620
16.24 Powering Up an RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C Controller .............. 621
16.25 Powering Up an RP-C-16A Controller ...................................... 622
16.26 Installing the Optional Covers on the RP-C .............................. 623
16.27 Removing an Optional Cover from the RP-C ........................... 625
16.28 24 VAC Output on the RP-C-16A Controller ............................ 626
16.29.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 628
16.29.2 Outputs .................................................................................. 634
16.29.3 ............................................................................................... 634
16.30 Solid-state Relay (SSR) Outputs ............................................. 638
16.30.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 638
16.30.2 ............................................................................................... 638
16.31 Relay Outputs .......................................................................... 640
16.31.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 640
16.31.2 ............................................................................................... 640
16.32.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 642
16.32.2 ............................................................................................... 642
16.33 RP-C Regulatory Compliance and Approvals .......................... 644
16.33.1 CE - European Union (EU) ..................................................... 644
16.33.2 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ........................ 644
16.33.3 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED) .................................................................................... 645
16.33.4 eu.bac .................................................................................... 646
17 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-

sensors ..................................................................... 647

17
17.1 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors .............. 651
17.1.1 Light Modules ......................................................................... 652
17.1.2 Blind Modules ........................................................................ 652
17.1.3 Relay Modules ....................................................................... 652
17.1.4 Multi-sensor ........................................................................... 652
17.1.5 Remote Control ...................................................................... 652
17.2 Light Modules .......................................................................... 653
17.2.1 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD .......................................................... 653
17.2.2 RP-C-EXT-DALI .................................................................... 653
17.2.3 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD ......................................................... 653
17.2.4 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 ................................................................ 653
17.3 Blind Modules .......................................................................... 654
17.3.1 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD ................................................. 654
17.3.2 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD ................................................. 654
17.3.3 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD ........................................................ 654
17.3.4 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD ......................................................... 654
17.4 Relay Modules ......................................................................... 655
17.4.1 RP-C-EXT-REL-4 .................................................................. 655
17.4.2 CRS-HH-REL-10 ................................................................... 655
17.5 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD ............................................................ 656
17.5.1 DALI Inputs/Outputs with Power Distribution ......................... 656
17.5.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 657
17.5.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply ........ 657
17.5.4 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering ................ 657
17.5.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 657
17.5.6 DALI Light Module Supported Building Standards ................. 658
17.5.7 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 658
17.5.8 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 658
17.5.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 658
17.5.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ...... 658
17.5.11 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 659
17.5.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 659
17.5.13 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 659
17.5.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 659
17.5.15 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 659
17.5.17 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 660
17.5.18 ............................................................................................... 660
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD ............................................................ 664
17.6.1 0-10V Light Outputs with Power Distribution ......................... 664

18
17.6.6 0-10V Light Module Supported Building Standards ............... 665
Switch .................................................................................... 666
17.6.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 666
17.6.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 666
17.6.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 667
Modes .................................................................................... 667
Approvals ............................................................................... 668
17.6.18 ............................................................................................... 668
17.7 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD ........................................................... 672
17.7.1 High-Voltage Blind Outputs .................................................... 672
Switch .................................................................................... 673
17.7.7 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 673
17.7.12 Wiring .................................................................................... 674
Modes .................................................................................... 675
Approvals ............................................................................... 675
17.7.16 ............................................................................................... 675
17.8 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD ........................................................... 679
17.8.1 Low-Voltage Blind Outputs .................................................... 679

19
Switch .................................................................................... 680
17.8.8 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 681
17.8.13 Wiring .................................................................................... 682
Modes .................................................................................... 682
Approvals ............................................................................... 682
17.8.17 ............................................................................................... 683
17.9 RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE ................................................................. 687
17.9.1 Motion Detection .................................................................... 687
17.9.2 Luminosity Measurement ....................................................... 688
17.9.4 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Wireless Connectivity 688
Switch .................................................................................... 688
17.9.7 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 688
17.9.8 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED ........................... 689
17.9.9 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Set Button ................. 689
17.9.10 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Device Installation ..... 689
17.9.11 Wiring .................................................................................... 689
Modes .................................................................................... 689
17.9.14 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Regulatory Compliance
and Approvals ........................................................................ 690
17.9.15 ............................................................................................... 690
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI ....................................................................... 694
17.10.1 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power Distribution .................... 694
17.10.5 DALI Light Module Supported Building Standards ................. 695
Switch .................................................................................... 696
17.10.8 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 696

20
17.10.9 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ...... 696
17.10.13 Wiring .................................................................................... 697
Modes .................................................................................... 697
Approvals ............................................................................... 698
17.10.17 ............................................................................................... 698
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 .................................................................. 702
17.11.1 0-10V Light Outputs without Power Distribution .................... 702
17.11.5 0-10V Light Module Supported Building Standards ............... 703
Switch .................................................................................... 703
17.11.8 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 704
17.11.13 Wiring .................................................................................... 705
Modes .................................................................................... 705
Approvals ............................................................................... 705
17.11.17 ............................................................................................... 706
17.12 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD ................................................... 709
17.12.1 SMI Blind Outputs .................................................................. 709
17.12.6 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building Standards ................. 710
Switch .................................................................................... 711
17.12.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 711

21
17.12.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 712
Modes .................................................................................... 712
Approvals ............................................................................... 713
17.12.18 ............................................................................................... 713
17.13 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD .................................................... 717
17.13.1 SMI LoVo Blind Outputs ......................................................... 717
17.13.6 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building Standards ................. 718
Switch .................................................................................... 719
17.13.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 719
17.13.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 720
Modes .................................................................................... 720
Approvals ............................................................................... 721
17.13.18 ............................................................................................... 721
17.14 RP-C-EXT-REL-4 .................................................................... 725
17.14.1 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 725
Switch .................................................................................... 726
17.14.7 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 726

22
17.14.12 Wiring .................................................................................... 727
Modes .................................................................................... 728
Approvals ............................................................................... 728
17.14.16 ............................................................................................... 728
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10 ..................................................................... 732
17.15.1 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 732
17.15.2 Digital Inputs .......................................................................... 732
Switch .................................................................................... 733
17.15.6 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 733
17.15.11 Wiring .................................................................................... 734
Modes .................................................................................... 734
Approvals ............................................................................... 735
17.15.15 Supported Types of Blind Motors ........................................... 735
17.15.16 ............................................................................................... 735
17.16 DALI Inputs/Outputs with Power Distribution ........................... 739
17.16.1 ............................................................................................... 740
17.17 0-10V Light Outputs with Power Distribution ............................ 742
17.17.1 ............................................................................................... 743
17.18 High-Voltage Blind Outputs ...................................................... 744
17.18.1 ............................................................................................... 746
17.19 Low-Voltage Blind Outputs ...................................................... 747
17.19.1 ............................................................................................... 748
17.20 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power Distribution ...................... 749
17.20.1 ............................................................................................... 750
17.21 0-10V Light Outputs without Power Distribution ....................... 751
17.21.1 ............................................................................................... 752
17.22 SMI Blind Outputs .................................................................... 753
17.22.1 ............................................................................................... 755
17.23 SMI LoVo Blind Outputs ........................................................... 756
17.23.1 ............................................................................................... 758
17.24 Relay Outputs on RP-C-EXT-REL-4 ........................................ 759

23
17.24.1 ............................................................................................... 761
17.25 Relay Outputs on CRS-HH-REL-10 ......................................... 762
17.25.1 ............................................................................................... 766
17.26 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ....................... 767
17.26.1 ............................................................................................... 768
17.27 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply .......... 769
17.27.1 DALI Light Modules ............................................................... 769
17.27.2 0-10V Light Modules ............................................................. 769
17.27.3 Low-voltage Blind Modules ................................................... 769
17.27.4 SMI Low-voltage Blind Modules ............................................. 769
17.27.5 SMI High-voltage Blind Modules ............................................ 769
17.28 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering .................. 770
17.29 Luminosity Measurement ......................................................... 772
17.30 Motion Detection ...................................................................... 773
17.31 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .... 775
17.32 DALI Light Module Supported Building Standards .................. 776
17.33 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building Standards .................. 777
17.34 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Wireless Connectivity .. 778
17.35 RP-C Room Bus ....................................................................... 779
17.36 Connecting RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors
to RP-C .................................................................................... 782
17.37 Configuring the Room Bus Address for an RP Controller
Expansion Module ................................................................... 785
17.38 Configuring the Room Bus Address for an RP Controller
Expansion Multi-sensor ........................................................... 786
17.39 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ........ 787
17.39.1 Light Modules, Blind Modules, and RP-C-EXT-REL-4 Relay
Module ................................................................................... 787
17.39.2 CRS-HH-REL-10 Relay Module ............................................. 788
17.40 Plugging an External Connector into an RP Controller Expansion
Module ..................................................................................... 790
17.41 Removing an External Connector from an RP Controller
Expansion Module ................................................................... 791
17.42 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................... 793
17.42.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 793
17.42.2 Light Status LEDs .................................................................. 795
17.42.3 Blind Status LEDs .................................................................. 795
17.42.4 Relay Status LEDs ................................................................. 796
17.43 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED ............................. 797
17.43.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 797
17.44 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ........................... 799
17.45 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Set Button .................... 800
17.46 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............... 801
17.47 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Module on a DIN Rail ... 806
17.48 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Module on a Flat
Surface .................................................................................... 807
17.49 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Light Module .......... 811
17.50 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Blind Module .......... 813

24
17.51 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Relay Module ......... 815
17.52 Wiring a Screw Terminal on CRS-HH-REL-10 ......................... 817
17.53 Powering Up an CRS-HH-REL-10 Relay Module .................... 818
17.54 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Device Installation ....... 819
17.55 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor into a Dropped
Ceiling Using the Mounting Springs ......................................... 822
17.56 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor on an Octagon
Junction Box Using the Mounting Ring .................................... 824
17.57 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor on a Ceiling
Using the Mounting Ring .......................................................... 827
17.58 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes ...................................................................................... 832
17.59 Configuring an RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor
into Online Maintenance Mode ................................................ 833
17.60 RP Controller Expansion Modules Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ................................................................................. 834
17.60.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK) ................................................ 834
(ISED) .................................................................................... 835
17.61 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ................................................................................. 836
(ISED) .................................................................................... 837
17.62 Types of Blind Motors Supported by CRS-HH-REL-10 ............ 839
18 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules ................ 843

18.1 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules ............................... 845
18.1.1 RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI ............................................................... 845
18.1.2 RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V ............................................................. 846
18.2 RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI ................................................................. 847
18.2.1 Zigbee DALI Light Output and Power Output ......................... 847
18.2.2 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution ....................................... 847
18.2.3 Zigbee Modules Memory ....................................................... 848
18.2.4 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity .................................. 848
18.2.5 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals .......................................... 848
18.2.6 Zigbee Modules LED ............................................................. 848
18.2.7 Zigbee Modules Reset Button ................................................ 848
18.2.8 Zigbee Modules Device Installation ....................................... 848
18.2.9 Wiring .................................................................................... 849
18.2.11 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ....... 849
18.2.12 ............................................................................................... 849
18.3 RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V ............................................................... 852
18.3.1 Zigbee 0-10V Light Output ..................................................... 852

25
18.3.2 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution ....................................... 852
18.3.3 Zigbee Modules Memory ....................................................... 852
18.3.4 Zigbee 0-10V Module Supported Building Standards ............ 853
18.3.5 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity .................................. 853
18.3.6 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals .......................................... 853
18.3.7 Zigbee Modules LED ............................................................. 853
18.3.8 Zigbee Modules Reset Button ................................................ 853
18.3.9 Zigbee Modules Device Installation ....................................... 853
18.3.10 Wiring .................................................................................... 854
18.3.12 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ....... 854
18.3.13 ............................................................................................... 854
18.4 Zigbee DALI Light Output and Power Output ........................... 857
18.4.1 ............................................................................................... 858
18.5 Zigbee 0-10V Light Output and Power Output ......................... 860
18.5.1 ............................................................................................... 861
18.6 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution ......................................... 862
18.6.1 ............................................................................................... 862
18.7 Zigbee Modules Memory .......................................................... 864
18.8 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity .................................... 865
18.9 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals ............................................ 866
18.9.1 Zigbee DALI Module Screw Terminals ................................... 866
18.9.2 Zigbee 0-10V Module Screw Terminals ................................. 866
18.10 Zigbee DALI Module Screw Terminals ..................................... 867
18.11 Zigbee 0-10V Module Screw Terminals ................................... 869
18.12 Zigbee Modules LED ............................................................... 871
18.12.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 871
18.13 Zigbee Modules Reset Button .................................................. 872
18.14 Zigbee Modules Device Installation ......................................... 873
18.15 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Module on a
Ceiling ...................................................................................... 876
18.16 Wiring a Screw Terminal on an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee
Module ..................................................................................... 879
18.17 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management .............................. 882
18.17.1 Hosting Different Firmware Versions ..................................... 882
18.17.2 Firmware Upgrade Guidelines ............................................... 883
18.17.3 Active and Inactive Memory for Firmware .............................. 884
18.17.4 Firmware Recovery ................................................................ 884
18.17.5 Impact of a Factory Reset on BACnet/IP Controller
Firmware ................................................................................ 885
18.17.6 Firmware Compression for Transmission ............................. 886
18.18 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ......... 887
19 Remote Control ......................................................... 889

19.1 RP-C-RC-BLE .......................................................................... 891
19.1.1 Remote Control Safety Information ........................................ 891

26
19.1.2 Remote Control Wireless Connectivity ................................... 892
19.1.3 Remote Control Device Installation ........................................ 892
19.1.4 Remote Control User Interface .............................................. 892
19.1.5 Remote Control Commissioning ............................................ 892
19.1.6 Remote Control Firmware Upgrade ....................................... 892
19.1.7 Remote Control Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ........ 892
19.1.8 ............................................................................................... 893
19.2 Remote Control Safety Information .......................................... 895
19.3 RP Controller Expansion Remote Control Wireless
Connectivity ............................................................................. 897
19.4 RP Controller Expansion Remote Control Device Installation .. 898
19.5 Installing a Remote Control on a Wall ...................................... 899
19.6 Remote Control User Interface ................................................ 902
19.6.1 ............................................................................................... 903
19.7 Remote Control Regulatory Compliance and Approvals .......... 904
(ISED) .................................................................................... 905
20 KNX Modbus Gateway .............................................. 907

20.1 KNX Modbus Gateway RP-C-EXT-KNX .................................. 909
20.1.1 RP-C Modbus ........................................................................ 910
20.1.2 KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals and Connector ....... 910
20.1.3 KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs ................................................. 910
20.1.4 KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons .............................................. 911
20.1.5 KNX Modbus Gateway Programming Mode .......................... 911
20.1.6 KNX Modbus Gateway Manual Operation Mode ................... 911
20.1.7 KNX Modbus Gateway Device Installation ............................. 911
20.1.8 Wiring .................................................................................... 911
20.1.9 KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 912
20.1.10 ............................................................................................... 912
20.2 RP-C Modbus .......................................................................... 914
20.3 KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals and Connector ......... 917
20.4 KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs ................................................... 919
20.4.1 Programming LED ................................................................. 920
20.4.2 KNX LED ................................................................................ 920
20.4.3 Mode LED .............................................................................. 920
20.4.4 RTU LED ................................................................................ 921
20.5 KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons ................................................ 922
20.6 KNX Modbus Gateway Programming Mode ............................ 925
20.7 KNX Modbus Gateway Manual Operation Mode ..................... 926
20.8 KNX Modbus Gateway Device Installation ............................... 927
20.9 Installing a KNX Modbus Gateway on a DIN Rail ..................... 929
20.10 Performing a Factory Reset of the KNX Modbus Gateway ..... 930

27
20.11 KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ................................................................................. 931
21 SpaceLogic Sensors ................................................. 933

21.1 SpaceLogic Sensors ................................................................ 935
21.1.1 SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and Covers .................... 935
21.1.2 SpaceLogic Sensor Models ................................................... 935
21.1.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Display Properties .................................. 936
21.1.4 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................. 936
21.1.5 Replacement ......................................................................... 937
21.1.6 Addressing ............................................................................. 937
21.1.7 SpaceLogic Sensor Operation and Calibration Modes .......... 938
21.1.8 SpaceLogic Sensor Display Scene Configuration .................. 938
21.1.9 Application and Scene Association ........................................ 938
21.1.10 SpaceLogic Sensor HMI References ..................................... 938
21.2 SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and Covers ...................... 939
21.2.1 Sensor Bus Configuration ...................................................... 943
21.2.2 Key Sensor Base and Cover Combinations ........................... 943
21.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Models ..................................................... 944
21.3.1 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-button Cover Model ............................ 944
21.3.2 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model ........... 944
21.3.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model ................... 945
22 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model ............... 947

22.1 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model .............................. 949
22.1.1 Discover Setpoint and Occupancy Override Settings ............ 950
22.1.2 Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover
Model ..................................................................................... 950
22.1.3 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface ............. 950
22.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint ....................................... 951
22.3 Overriding the Occupancy Setting ........................................... 952
22.4 Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model 953
22.5 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface .............. 954
23 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor

Model ........................................................................ 955
23.1 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model ............. 957
23.1.1 Display Object Setting Control ............................................... 957
23.1.2 Watch Window Property Monitoring ....................................... 958
23.3 Changing the Fan Speed ......................................................... 960
23.4 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings ........................ 962
23.5 Changing the Degree Type ..................................................... 964
23.6 Changing the Occupancy Mode ............................................... 965
23.7 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Home
Screen ..................................................................................... 966

28
23.8 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Default
Screen ..................................................................................... 967
23.9 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Fan Speed
Screen ..................................................................................... 968
23.10 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Heating
and Cooling Mode Screen ........................................................ 969
23.11 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Degree
Type Screen ............................................................................. 970
23.12 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Occupancy
Mode Screen ............................................................................ 971
24 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model ...... 973

24.1 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model ..................... 975
24.1.1 Display Object ........................................................................ 975
24.1.2 Script Program Property Configuration .................................. 976
24.1.3 Integrator Menu Pages .......................................................... 977
24.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted Display .... 980
24.4 Selecting the Fan Speed ......................................................... 982
24.5 Selecting the Degree Type ...................................................... 984
24.6 Changing the Occupancy Mode .............................................. 986
24.7 Changing the Heating and Cooling Mode ................................ 988
24.8 Accessing the Integrator Menu ................................................ 990
24.9 Turning the Lights On and Off .................................................. 992
24.10 Dimming the Lights ................................................................. 994
24.11 Fully Opening and Closing the Blinds ...................................... 996
24.12 Incrementally Adjusting the Blinds .......................................... 998
24.13 Selecting the Scenes Menu ..................................................... 999
24.14 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Front Menu
Screen ................................................................................... 1001
24.15 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Functions Menu
Screen ................................................................................... 1003
24.16 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Setpoint
Adjustment Submenu ............................................................. 1005
24.17 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Integrator Menu
Pages ..................................................................................... 1007
25 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter ............................... 1011

25.1 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter .............................................. 1013
25.1.1 ............................................................................................. 1015
25.2 Installing SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter on a SpaceLogic
Sensor ................................................................................... 1017
25.3 Attaching a Lanyard to SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter .......... 1019
25.4 Connecting to a Controller with the SpaceLogic Bluetooth
Adapter .................................................................................. 1020
26 Zigbee Adapter ....................................................... 1023

26.1 SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter ................................................... 1025
26.1.1 ............................................................................................. 1026
26.2 Supported Wireless Devices .................................................. 1030

29
26.3 Installing Zigbee Adapter on an Enclosure Exterior ............... 1036
26.4 Installing Zigbee Adapter in a Dropped Ceiling ...................... 1040
26.5 Installing Zigbee Adapter on a Wall ........................................ 1043
26.6 Zigbee Adapter Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ........ 1047
26.6.1 CE - European Union (EU) ................................................... 1047
26.6.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK) .............................................. 1047
26.6.3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ...................... 1047
(ISED) .................................................................................. 1048
27 AD v1 ...................................................................... 1049
27.1 AD v1 ..................................................................................... 1051
27.1.1 Stationary HMI Terminal ...................................................... 1051
27.1.2 Kiosk Mode .......................................................................... 1051
27.1.3 AD v1 Bundle ....................................................................... 1051
27.1.4 Installation Options .............................................................. 1052
27.1.5 AD v1 Communication and Power ....................................... 1052
27.1.6 Preinstalled Apps ................................................................. 1052
27.1.7 ............................................................................................. 1052
27.2 AD v1 Communication and Power ......................................... 1054
27.2.1 Communication over a USB Connection .............................. 1054
27.2.2 Communication over a Wireless Connection ....................... 1054
27.3 Installing the AD v1 Base on a Cabinet .................................. 1056
27.4 Installing the AD v1 Base on a Wall ....................................... 1058
27.5 Installing the AD v1 Tablet and Frame ................................... 1059
27.6 Connecting Advanced Display to a Power Adapter ................ 1061
27.7 Connecting an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B
server ..................................................................................... 1062
28 AD v2 ...................................................................... 1063
28.1 AD v2 ..................................................................................... 1065
28.1.1 AD v2 ................................................................................... 1065
28.1.2 Kiosk Mode .......................................................................... 1065
28.1.3 AD v2 Bundle ....................................................................... 1065
28.1.4 Installation Options .............................................................. 1066
28.1.6 Preinstalled Software ........................................................... 1066
28.1.7 ............................................................................................. 1066
28.2.1 Communication over a USB Connection .............................. 1068
28.3 Installing the AD v2 Base on a Cabinet .................................. 1069
28.4 Installing the AD v2 Base on a Wall ....................................... 1071
28.5 Installing the AD v2 Tablet and Frame ................................... 1072
28.6 Connecting Advanced Display to a Power Adapter ................ 1075
28.7 Connecting an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B
server ..................................................................................... 1076
29 AD v3 ...................................................................... 1077

30
29.1 AD v3 ..................................................................................... 1079
29.1.1 Kiosk Mode .......................................................................... 1079
29.1.2 AD v3 Bundle ....................................................................... 1079
29.1.3 AD v3 Safety Information ..................................................... 1080
29.1.4 AD v3 Installation ................................................................. 1080
29.1.6 Preinstalled Software ........................................................... 1080
29.1.7 AD v3 Power Button ............................................................. 1080
29.1.8 AD v3 Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ..................... 1080
29.1.9 ............................................................................................. 1081
29.2 AD v3 Safety Information ....................................................... 1083
29.3 AD v3 Installation ................................................................... 1085
29.4 Installing AD v3 on a Cabinet ................................................. 1087
29.5.1 Communication over a Wired (USB) Connection ................. 1090
29.6 Connecting AD v3 to an Automation Server and a 24 VDC Power
Supply .................................................................................... 1091
29.7 AD v3 Power Button ............................................................... 1092
29.8 Performing a Recovery (Factory Reset) of AD v3 .................. 1094
29.9 AD v3 Regulatory and Agency Compliance and Approvals ... 1095
(ISED) .................................................................................. 1096
29.9.4 UL ........................................................................................ 1096
30 Operator Display ..................................................... 1097

30.1 Operator Display .................................................................... 1099
30.1.1 Operator Display Bundle ...................................................... 1099
30.1.2 Operator Display Safety Information .................................... 1100
30.1.3 Operator Display LED .......................................................... 1100
30.1.4 Operator Display Communication Ports ............................... 1100
30.1.5 Operator Display Hardening ................................................ 1100
30.1.6 Operator Display Installation ................................................ 1100
30.1.7 Wiring .................................................................................. 1100
30.1.8 Operator Display Regulatory Compliance and Approvals .... 1101
30.1.9 ............................................................................................. 1101
30.2 Operator Display Safety Information ...................................... 1104
30.3 Operator Display LED ............................................................ 1106
30.4 Operator Display Communication Ports ................................. 1107
30.4.1 Ethernet Ports ...................................................................... 1108
30.4.2 USB Ports ............................................................................ 1108
30.4.3 RS-232C Port ....................................................................... 1109
30.4.4 RS-485 Port ......................................................................... 1109
30.5 Operator Display Hardening .................................................. 1110
30.5.1 Hardening Specifics ............................................................. 1110
30.5.2 Product Defense in Depth .................................................... 1110

31
30.5.3 System Defense in Depth .................................................... 1110
30.6 Operator Display Installation .................................................. 1112
30.6.1 Installation Requirements .................................................... 1112
30.7 Installing Operator Display on a Panel ................................... 1115
30.8 Connecting Operator Display to a 24 VDC Power Supply ...... 1118
30.9 Removing Operator Display ................................................... 1119
30.10 Replacing the Installation Gasket on Operator Display ......... 1121
30.11 Replacing the Battery on Operator Display ............................ 1123
30.12 Operator Display Regulatory and Agency Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 1125
30.12.2 WEEE - European Union (EU) ............................................. 1125
(ISED) .................................................................................. 1126
30.12.5 UL ........................................................................................ 1126
30.12.6 UK Conformity Assessed ..................................................... 1126
31 Wiring ...................................................................... 1127

31.1 Wiring ..................................................................................... 1129
31.1.1 I/O Wiring ............................................................................. 1129
31.1.2 Communication Port Wiring ................................................. 1129
31.2 I/O Wiring ............................................................................... 1130
31.2.1 Shielded Wires ..................................................................... 1130
31.2.2 Grounding and Power .......................................................... 1130
31.2.3 External Device Connections ............................................... 1131
31.2.4 Wire Sizes and Lengths ....................................................... 1131
31.2.5 Required External Connectors for the RP Controller Expansion
Modules ............................................................................... 1131
31.3 Grounding and Power ............................................................ 1132
31.3.1 Grounding and Power for Systems with Central IO Modules and
PS-24V Units ....................................................................... 1132
31.3.2 Grounding and Power for Systems with AS-B Servers ........ 1132
31.3.3 Grounding and Power for Systems with MP Controllers ...... 1132
31.3.4 Grounding and Power for Systems with IP-IO Modules ....... 1132
31.3.5 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C
Controllers ........................................................................... 1133
31.3.6 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A
Controller ............................................................................. 1133
31.3.7 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A and
Expansion Modules .............................................................. 1133
31.3.8 Grounding and Power for Systems with Operator Display ... 1133
31.4 Grounding and Power for Systems with Central IO Modules and
PS-24V Units ......................................................................... 1134
31.5 Grounding and Power for Systems with AS-B Servers .......... 1136
31.6 Grounding and Power for Systems with MP Controllers ........ 1138
31.7 Grounding and Power for Systems with IP-IO Modules ......... 1141
31.8 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C
Controllers ............................................................................. 1143

32
31.9 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A
Controller ............................................................................... 1146
31.10 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A and Expansion
Modules ................................................................................. 1148
31.11 Grounding and Power for Systems with Operator Display ..... 1151
31.11.1 DC Power Cord Connection ................................................. 1151
31.11.2 DC Power Cord Preparation ................................................ 1151
31.11.3 DC Power Supply Connector Specifications ........................ 1152
31.11.4 DC Power Supply Connection .............................................. 1152
31.11.5 Grounding ............................................................................ 1154
31.12 External Device Connections ................................................. 1155
31.12.1 Thermistors .......................................................................... 1155
31.12.2 Contacts .............................................................................. 1155
31.12.3 Actuators ............................................................................. 1156
31.12.4 Transmitters ......................................................................... 1157
31.12.5 Loads Such as Relays ......................................................... 1159
31.13 Wire Sizes and Lengths ......................................................... 1160
31.13.1 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C
Controllers ........................................................................... 1160
31.13.2 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A Controller ......... 1160
31.13.3 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital Inputs of the RP Controller
Expansion Modules .............................................................. 1160
31.13.4 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the RP Controller
Expansion DALI Light Modules ............................................ 1160
31.13.5 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI Interface of the RP
Controller Expansion SMI Blind Modules ............................. 1161
31.13.6 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP Controller Expansion Zigbee
Modules ............................................................................... 1161
31.13.7 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the Zigbee DALI
Module ................................................................................. 1161
31.14 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C
Controllers ............................................................................. 1162
31.15 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A Controller ............ 1164
31.16 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital Inputs of the RP Controller
Expansion Modules ................................................................ 1166
31.17 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the RP Controller
Expansion DALI Light Modules .............................................. 1167
31.18 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI Interface of the RP Controller
Expansion SMI Blind Modules ............................................... 1168
31.19 Required External Connectors for the RP Controller Expansion
Modules ................................................................................. 1169
31.19.1 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD ........................................................ 1169
31.19.2 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD ...................................................... 1170
31.19.3 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD ....................................................... 1170
31.19.4 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD ....................................................... 1171
31.19.5 RP-C-EXT-DALI .................................................................. 1171
31.19.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 .............................................................. 1172
31.19.7 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD ............................................... 1172
31.19.8 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD ............................................... 1173

33
31.19.9 RP-C-EXT-REL-4 ................................................................ 1173
31.20 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP Controller Expansion Zigbee
Modules ................................................................................. 1174
31.21 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the Zigbee DALI
Module ................................................................................... 1175
31.22 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the KNX Modbus Gateway ........ 1176
31.23 Communication Port Wiring ................................................... 1177
31.23.1 RS-485 Communications ..................................................... 1177
31.23.2 LonWorks Communications ................................................. 1177
31.23.3 USB Connections ................................................................. 1177
31.23.4 Ethernet Connections .......................................................... 1178
31.23.5 Sensor Bus Connections ..................................................... 1179
31.23.6 Room Bus Connections ....................................................... 1179
31.23.7 Modbus Network Connections ............................................. 1180
31.24 RJ45 Pinout for the RS-485 Ports of the RP-C Controller ..... 1182
32 RS-485 Communications ........................................ 1185

32.1 RS-485 Communications ....................................................... 1189
32.1.1 Generic RS-485 Network Devices ....................................... 1189
32.1.2 b3 BACnet Devices .............................................................. 1189
32.1.3 MNB BACnet Devices .......................................................... 1189
32.1.4 Legrand Power Meters ......................................................... 1190
32.1.5 Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx Series Devices ............................. 1190
32.2 Generic RS-485 Network Devices ......................................... 1191
32.2.1 Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485
Devices ................................................................................ 1192
32.2.2 Configuration Selection for Generic RS-485 Network
Devices ................................................................................ 1192
32.2.3 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1192
32.2.4 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only 1192
32.2.5 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1193
32.2.6 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1193
32.3 Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485
Devices .................................................................................. 1194
32.4 Configuration Selection for Generic RS-485 Network
Devices .................................................................................. 1196
32.4.1 Flowcharts ........................................................................... 1196
32.4.2 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 1 ................ 1198
32.4.10 Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device
Configuration 7 and 8 ........................................................... 1200
32.5 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 1 .................. 1201

34
32.13 Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device
Configuration 7 and 8 ............................................................. 1226
32.14 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices) ......... 1228
32.15 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (MNB
and Generic RS-485 Devices) ............................................... 1230
32.16 Cable Routing ........................................................................ 1231
32.17 Cable Selection ...................................................................... 1232
32.18 b3 BACnet Devices ................................................................ 1235
32.18.1 General b3 BACnet Device Properties ................................. 1235
32.18.2 b3 BACnet Device Configuration ......................................... 1235
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1235
32.18.4 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1236
32.18.5 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1236
32.19 General b3 BACnet Device Properties ................................... 1237
32.20 b3 BACnet Device Configuration ........................................... 1238
Excess Unit Load (b3 BACnet Devices) ................................. 1241
32.22 MNB BACnet Devices ............................................................ 1243
32.22.1 General MNB BACnet Device Properties ............................. 1243
32.22.2 MNB Configurations ............................................................. 1243
32.22.3 Existing MNB Systems Transition ........................................ 1243
32.22.4 Network Check-Up (Examination and Monitoring) ............... 1243
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1244
32.22.7 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1245
32.22.8 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1245
32.23 General MNB BACnet Device Properties ............................... 1246
32.24 MNB Configurations ............................................................... 1247
32.24.1 MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point Bias (MNB Source) ... 1247
32.24.2 MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply
Source) ................................................................................ 1247
32.24.3 MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias ................................... 1247
32.24.4 Power Supply Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3 .. 1248
32.24.5 MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point Bias (Automation Server
Provided Source) ................................................................. 1248
32.24.6 MS/TP Data and Shield Connections ................................... 1248
32.25 MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point Bias (MNB Source) ..... 1249

35
32.26 MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply
Source) .................................................................................. 1253
32.27 MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias ..................................... 1256
32.28 Power Supply Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3 .... 1259
32.29 MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point Bias (Automation Server
Provided Source) .................................................................. 1261
32.30 MS/TP Data and Shield Connections ..................................... 1264
32.31 Existing MNB Systems Transition .......................................... 1265
32.31.1 Guidelines on the Use of Legacy Cable Types .................... 1265
32.32 Network Check-Up (Examination and Monitoring) ................. 1267
32.33 Legrand Power Meters ........................................................... 1268
32.33.1 General Legrand Power Meter Properties ........................... 1268
32.33.2 Legrand Configurations ........................................................ 1268
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1268
32.33.5 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1269
32.33.6 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1269
32.34 General Legrand Power Meter Properties .............................. 1270
32.35 Legrand Configurations ......................................................... 1271
32.35.1 Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus with No Bias
Requirement ........................................................................ 1271
32.35.2 Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus with Minimal
Bias ...................................................................................... 1271
32.35.3 Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with Single End-point
Bias ...................................................................................... 1271
32.35.4 Legrand Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-point
Bias ...................................................................................... 1271
32.35.5 Power Supply Selection for Legrand Configuration 4 ........... 1272
32.35.6 Configuration Summary ....................................................... 1272
32.36 Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus with No Bias
Requirement .......................................................................... 1274
32.37 Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus with Minimal
Bias ........................................................................................ 1277
32.38 Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with Single End-point
Bias ........................................................................................ 1280
32.39 Legrand Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-point
Bias ........................................................................................ 1283
32.40 Power Supply Selection for Legrand Configuration 4 ............. 1286
Excess Unit Load (Legrand Power Meters) ............................ 1288
32.42 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only
(Legrand Power Meters) ........................................................ 1290
32.43 Cable Selection (Legrand Power Meters) .............................. 1291
32.44 Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx Series Devices ............................... 1293
32.44.1 General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device Properties .................. 1293
32.44.2 VT/VZ7xxx Configurations ................................................... 1293
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1294

36
32.44.5 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1294
32.44.6 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1294
32.45 General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device Properties .................... 1296
32.46 VT/VZ7xxx Configurations ..................................................... 1298
32.46.1 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-point Bias (Automation
Server Provided Source) ...................................................... 1298
32.46.2 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External
Supply Source) .................................................................... 1298
32.46.3 Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2 ...... 1298
32.47 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-point Bias (Automation
Server Provided Source) ........................................................ 1299
32.48 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply
Source) .................................................................................. 1302
32.49 Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2 ........ 1305
Excess Unit Load (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices) .................. 1307
32.51 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only
(Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices) ............................................... 1309
33 Hardware Troubleshooting ..................................... 1311

33.1 General Hardware Configuration Problem ............................. 1313
33.1.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1313
33.2 No Communication with Automation Server .......................... 1314
33.2.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1314
33.3 No Communication with Central IO Module ........................... 1315
33.3.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1315
33.4 Unexpected I/O Values .......................................................... 1316
33.4.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1316
33.5 Unexpected I/O Values .......................................................... 1317
33.5.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1317
33.6 Power Supply Overload ......................................................... 1318
33.6.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1318
33.7 No Power or MP-C Does Not Turn On ................................... 1319
33.7.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1319
33.8 No Power or MP-V Does Not Turn On ................................... 1321
33.8.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1321
33.9 No Power or IP-IO Module Does Not Turn On ....................... 1322
33.9.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1322
33.10 No Power or RP-C Does Not Turn On ................................... 1324
33.10.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1324
33.11 MP-C or MP-V Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation Software ................................................................ 1325
33.11.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1325
33.12 IP-IO Module Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
Software ................................................................................. 1326
33.12.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1326
33.13 RP-C Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
Software ................................................................................. 1328

37
33.13.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1328
33.14 Equipment Connected to an MP Controller Is Not Properly
Controlled .............................................................................. 1330
33.14.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1330
33.15 Equipment Connected to an IP-IO Module Is Not Properly
Controlled .............................................................................. 1331
33.15.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1331
33.16 Equipment Connected to an RP-C Controller Is Not Properly
Controlled .............................................................................. 1332
33.16.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1332
33.17 Date and Time Is Not Accurate .............................................. 1333
33.17.1 Solution ................................................................................ 1333
33.18 MP-V Damper Actuator Does Not Move or Respond to Position
Commands ............................................................................ 1334
33.18.1 Solution ................................................................................ 1334
33.19 VAV Box Controls to Full Open State with Maximum Air
Flow ....................................................................................... 1335
33.19.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1335
33.20 Air Flow Rate Higher or Lower Than Expected ...................... 1336
33.20.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1336
33.21 No Air Flow or Air Flow Is Not Changing ................................ 1338
33.21.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1338
33.22 SpaceLogic Sensor or MP Controller Sensor Bus Is Not
Operational ............................................................................ 1340
33.22.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1340
33.23 SpaceLogic Sensor or RP-C Controller Sensor Bus Is Not
Operational ............................................................................ 1342
33.23.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1342
33.24 SpaceLogic Sensor Offline .................................................... 1344
33.24.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1344
33.25 Sensor Bus Communication Problems .................................. 1345
33.25.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1345
33.26 RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Is Not
Operational ............................................................................ 1346
33.26.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1346
33.27 RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Offline ....... 1349
33.27.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1349
33.28 Room Bus Communication Problems .................................... 1351
33.28.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1351
33.29 AD v1 or AD v2 Does Not Turn On or Battery Does Not
Charge ................................................................................... 1352
33.29.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1352
33.30 AD v3 Does Not Turn On or Operate Correctly ...................... 1353
33.30.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1353
33.31 AD v1 or AD v2 Battery Does Not Fully Charge ..................... 1354
33.31.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1354
33.32 USB Data Communication is Lagging or Data is Lost ............ 1355
33.32.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1355

38
33.33 Network Unavailable .............................................................. 1356
33.33.1 Solution ................................................................................ 1356

39
Introduction
The Introduction part contains information on the purpose of

this guide, how this guide is organized, where to find more
information, and information on safety.
1 About This Guide
Topics
Purpose of This Guide
How This Guide is Organized
Safety Information
Consignes de sécurité
1 About This Guide
1.1 Purpose of This Guide
1.1 Purpose of This Guide

This guide provides information about the SpaceLogic devices, such as
automation servers, BACnet/IP controllers (MP and RP controllers), IP-IO
modules, RP controller expansion modules, power supplies, and Central IO
modules. This information is intended to help you understand the different types
of hardware that can be in an EcoStruxure BMS, as well as how to use the
hardware.

45
1 About This Guide
1.2 How This Guide is Organized
1.2 How This Guide is Organized

This EcoStruxure Building Guide is divided into the following parts:
Introduction
The Introduction part contains information on the purpose of this guide, how this
guide is organized, where to find more information, and information on safety.
Reference
The Reference part contains conceptual information, procedures, user interface
descriptions and troubleshooting information. If you want more information, see
WebHelp or the other EcoStruxure Building guides.

46
1 About This Guide
1.3 Safety Information

Read this information carefully and look at the equipment to become
familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain
it.
1.3.1 Important Information

The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the
equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal
injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Please Note
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only
by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the
construction, installation, and operation of electrical equipment and has received
safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.

47
1 About This Guide
1.3.2 Cybersecurity Safety Notice

NOTICE
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
• Change default passwords at first use to help prevent unauthorized access to
device settings, controls, and information.
• Change passwords regularly to help prevent unauthorized access to device
settings, controls, and information.
• Do not share accounts. Each user must have their own account.
• When creating user and display names, it is important to avoid using personal
information, and to consider regional privacy policies. Display names will
appear in event logs to identify who performed operations on the device.
• It is recommended that log files be encrypted before transmission to help with
security and privacy.
• Disable unused ports, services, and default accounts to help minimize
pathways for malicious attackers.
• Place networked devices behind multiple layers of cyber defenses (such as
firewalls, network segmentation, and network intrusion detection and
protection).
• Use the recommended cybersecurity safety measures (for example, least
privilege, separation of duties) to help prevent unauthorized exposure, loss,
modification of data and logs, or interruption of services.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data, unauthorized
system access, or equipment damage.

48
1 About This Guide
1.4 Consignes de sécurité
1.4 Consignes de sécurité

Informations importantes
Lisez attentivement ces directives et examinez l'appareillage pour vous
familiariser avec son fonctionnement avant de faire son installation ou son
entretien. Les messages spéciaux suivants peuvent apparaître dans les
présentes directives ou sur l'appareil pour avertir l'utilisateur de dangers
potentiels ou pour attirer l'attention sur des informations qui clarifient ou
simplifient une procédure.
La présence de ce symbole sur une étiquette « Danger » ou «

Avertissement » signale un risque d'électrocution qui provoquera des
blessures physiques en cas de non-respect des consignes de sécurité.
Ce symbole est le symbole d'alerte de sécurité. Il vous avertit d'un risque

de blessures corporelles. Respectez scrupuleusement les consignes de
sécurité associées à ce symbole pour éviter de vous blesser ou de
mettre votre vie en danger.
Veuillez noter
Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l'installation, l'exploitation, l'entretien et
la maintenance du matériel électrique. Schneider Electric n'assume aucune
responsabilité des conséquences éventuelles découlant de l'utilisation de cette
documentation.
Une personne qualifiée est une personne qui a les compétences et le savoir-faire
relatifs à la construction, l'installation et l'exploitation d'équipements électriques
et qui a reçu une formation à la sécurité lui permettant de reconnaître et d'éviter
les risques encourus.

49
2 Additional Information
Topics
Where to Find Additional Information
2.1 Where to Find Additional Information

All the technical EcoStruxure BMS information is available online, on WebHelp.
WebHelp is a web-based help system for the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software and SpaceLogic devices, the software and hardware that powers the
EcoStruxure BMS.
By pressing F1 or clicking a Help button in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software your web browser opens WebHelp with the latest, up-to-date, technical
documentation.
Figure: Help in EcoStruxure Building Operation software
Some EcoStruxure Building Operation software products give you context-

sensitive help by opening a WebHelp page that explains the view or dialog box
you have in focus. Some programs open up an overview page. From these
pages, you can follow the links to get more detailed information.
WebHelp contains all the technical information that is in the guides, specification
sheets, and installation sheets.
The WebHelp site

One of the advantages with WebHelp is that you can reach Help without having
the EcoStruxure Building Operation software installed on your computer. By
entering the URL address help.sbo.schneider-electric.com you can access
WebHelp from any computer, smartphone, or tablet connected to the internet.
Finding information
The easiest way to find information on WebHelp is to search for it.
Figure: Home page search
All technical information is gathered in one place, so you do not need to know
which guide, specification sheet, or installation sheet the information is in.
Filtering the information

To narrow down the search results, you can use these filters:
• Product
• Functionality
• Information type

53
Figure: Search filters

54
Reference
The Reference part contains conceptual information,

procedures, user interface descriptions and troubleshooting
information. If you want more information, see WebHelp or
the other EcoStruxure Building guides.
3 Hardware
Topics
Hardware Overview
3 Hardware
3.1 Hardware Overview

The Schneider Electric hardware devices for the EcoStruxure BMS include
terminal bases, PS-24V power supplies, Central IO modules, automation servers
such as AS-P servers and AS-B servers, BACnet/IP devices such as MP-Cs,
MP-Vs, IP-IO modules, and RP-Cs, SpaceLogic Sensor devices, Advanced
Display devices, and Operator Display devices.
3.1.1 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).
For more information, see section 7.3 “Terminal Bases” on page 134.
3.1.2 PS-24V Power Supplies

PS-24V is the power supply for the AS-P servers and Central IO modules. The
PS-24V power supply requires an input voltage of either 24 VAC +/–20 % or
24–30 VDC.
For more information, see section 5.1.5 “” on page 96.
3.1.3 AS-P Servers

The AS-P server offers enhanced processor performance, increased memory
size, dual Ethernet ports, and high-speed USB interfaces. The AS-P server is a
Schneider Electric manufactured embedded device that generally serves as the
lowest tier EcoStruxure BMS server within the EcoStruxure BMS. The AS-P
controls and supervises equipment, typically HVAC equipment. AS-P servers use
Central IO module with connected field devices, such as sensors and actuators,
to do that.
3.1.4 Central IO Modules

By adding a variety of Central IO and power supply modules, you can use the
AS-P server to tailor the Intelligent Building Management System to your unique
requirements.
For more information, see section 7.1 “Central IO Modules” on page 129.

59
3 Hardware
3.1.5 AS-B Servers

An AS-B server is a powerful automation server that features both onboard I/O
and built-in power supply. Like the other automation servers, the AS-B server is a
lowest tier EcoStruxure BMS server within the EcoStruxure BMS. The
automation server controls and supervises equipment, typically HVAC
equipment. The AS-B server uses its onboard I/O with connected field devices,
such as sensors and actuators, to do that.
3.1.6 MP-C Controllers

The MP-C controller is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller. The MP-C models offer a flexible mix of I/O point types that suits a
wide range of HVAC applications. MP-C is a native SpaceLogic device, which
can either be used as a standalone BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an
EcoStruxure BMS with a AS-P or AS-B server, or an Enterprise Server, as the
parent server.
3.1.7 MP-V Controllers

The MP-V controller is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller dedicated for VAV applications. MP-V integrates a controller, a damper
actuator, and an air flow sensor in a single package for ease of installation. MP-V
is a native SpaceLogic device, which can either be used as a standalone
BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS with a AS-P or AS-B
server, or an Enterprise Server, as the parent server.
3.1.8 IP-IO Modules

The IP-IO module provides I/O expansion to your HVAC application over
BACnet/IP and can share their I/O resources across applications running in
automation servers, BACnet/IP controllers, or third-party systems. The IP-IO
module can be installed near facilities in the field, away from the automation
server or the BACnet/IP controller.

60
3 Hardware
3.1.9 RP-C Controllers

The RP-C controller is a room-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller. The RP-C models offer a flexible mix of I/O point types that suit a wide
range of HVAC applications. The controller can either be used as a standalone
BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS with an AS-P or AS-
B server or an Enterprise Server as the parent server. The RP-C features a
wireless chip that allows a mobile device running the Commission mobile
application to connect directly to the controller.
3.1.10 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-

sensors
The RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors provide a range of
devices that can be combined to form a connected room solution. The RP
controller expansion modules and multi-sensors are connected to the RP-C room
bus and provide the RP-C room controllers with I/O expansion and sensors that
enable lighting and blind control.
For more information, see section 17.1 “RP Controller Expansion Modules and
Multi-sensors” on page 651.
3.1.11 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules provide devices that can be used to
form a connected room solution. The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules
are connected to the RP-C room controllers through the ZigbeeTM wireless
protocol and provide the controllers with I/O expansion that enable lighting
control.
For more information, see section 18.1 “RP Controller Expansion Zigbee
Modules” on page 845.
3.1.12 Remote Control

The RP-C-RC-BLE remote control connects wirelessly to the RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE
multi-sensor and enables the occupants of modern office buildings to control the
comfort level of their space.
3.1.13 KNX Modbus Gateway

The KNX Modbus gateway RP-C-EXT-KNX connects to the RP-C controllers and
provides an interface between the controller and KNX devices such as push-
buttons, sensors, and control units for lights, blinds, and room temperature.

61
3 Hardware
3.1.14 SpaceLogic Sensors

SpaceLogic Sensors are a family of living space sensors designed for BACnet/IP
controllers using the EcoStruxure Building Operation user interface. These
sensors use an RJ-45 sensor bus that provides communication and power from
the BACnet/IP controller.
For more information, see section 21.1 “SpaceLogic Sensors” on page 935.
3.1.15 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter

The SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter is plugged into a SpaceLogic Sensor to
provide a wireless Bluetooth connection to the BACnet/IP controller (Sensor Bus
compliant controller) for commissioning, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the
controller and the sensor.
3.1.16 SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter

The SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter is a USB-based wireless adapter that enables
ZigbeeTM wireless connectivity with an RP-C controller, AS-P server, or AS-B
server, extending the controller's or server's point count and bringing flexibility in
retrofit applications.
3.1.17 AD v1
AD v1 provides a Human Machine Interface (HMI) for local access to the
EcoStruxure BMS servers.
3.1.18 AD v2
AD v2 is the successor to AD v1, and offers several improvements such as
higher display resolution, enhanced processor performance, and increased
memory size. Like AD v1, AD v2 provides a Human Machine Interface (HMI) for
local access to the EcoStruxure BMS servers.
3.1.19 AD v3
Advanced Display v3 (AD v3) is the successor to AD v2. AD v3 provides an
industrial grade Human Machine Interface (HMI), with battery-free power supply,
for local access to the EcoStruxure BMS servers.

62
3 Hardware
3.1.20 Operator Display

SpaceLogic* Operator Display is a touch-screen Human Machine Interface (HMI)
for SpaceLogic controllers and servers, designed for local monitoring of building
controllers in small and medium-sized buildings, as well as in large buildings with
comprehensive building management systems. Operator Display is specifically
designed for equipment rooms and it simplifies operations, service, and
troubleshooting for System Integrators and Service Engineers, as well as for non-
technical users (notably Facility Managers and Janitors).
* Formerly known as SmartX.
3.1.21 Wiring
The wiring recommendations provide guidance regarding wiring of the Central IO
modules, automation servers, BACnet/IP devices, RP controller expansion
modules, and Operator Display.
For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

63
4 Terminal Bases
Topics
Terminal Bases
Backplane Board
Device Addressing
Device Installation
Installing a Terminal Base on a DIN-rail
Connecting Terminal Bases
Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus
Wiring a Terminal Base
Installing an Electronics Module on a Terminal Base
Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels
Powering Up a Device
I/O Bus
I/O Bus Parts
I/O Bus Restrictions
4 Terminal Bases
4.1 Terminal Bases
4.1 Terminal Bases

There are three different types of terminal bases for the SpaceLogic device
devices:
• PS-24V power supply: one terminal block
• AS-P servers: no terminal block
• Central IO module: two terminal blocks
Figure: Terminal base for Central IO module
The terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO module have the same
backplane boards, which are connecting the power bus, the address bus, and
communication bus from the left bus connector to the right bus connector. A
common name for these buses is the I/O bus.
Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO
module

67
4 Terminal Bases
4.1 Terminal Bases
The terminal base for the PS-24V power supplies has a different backplane
board, which does not pass through the power bus input from the left connector.
The PS-24V power supply supplies power to the server and Central IO module
installed to the right. The ground connection is connected from the left bus
connector to the right bus connector in all terminal bases, because it is used as a
common signal ground for the address bus as well as the communication bus.
Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal base for the power supply
4.1.1 Backplane Board

A backplane board is mounted in the terminal base for the W1 width devices. The
backplane board is equipped with two 2x5-pin bus connectors, a 2x6-pin
electronics module connector, address logic circuitry, and a device label.
For more information, see section 4.2 “Backplane Board” on page 69.
4.1.2 Device Addressing

Each device can detect its order in the chain of connected devices and assigns
itself an address accordingly. This auto-addressing feature is provided by the
terminal base backplane.
For more information, see section 4.3 “Device Addressing” on page 73.
4.1.3 Device Installation

The devices are designed mainly for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.
4.1.4 I/O Bus

The I/O bus is a common bus that delivers power, address information, and
communication to all devices connected to the bus. The I/O bus is provided to the
devices through the backplane in the terminal bases. The term I/O bus also
denotes the chain of devices that are connected together.
For more information, see section 4.12 “I/O Bus” on page 89.

68
4 Terminal Bases
4.2 Backplane Board
4.2 Backplane Board

Figure: Backplane board
There are two versions of the backplane board:

• The AS-P server and Central IO module version passes power through from
the left to the right connector.
• The power supply version does not pass power through from the left to the
right connector.
The two backplane board versions incorporate different locations of the 2x6
electronics module connector. This arrangement prevents power interference
problems if one or more power supplies are unintentionally installed on terminal
bases that are designed for the AS-P servers or Central IO modules.
4.2.1 2x5 Connector

The right connector establishes connection with the left connector of the next
terminal base when the terminal bases are connected together.
Figure: Pinout for the left and right 2x5 connectors, seen from the outside
The pins are used as follows:
Table: Backplane Connector Pin Usage

Pin number Pin number
5 Address bit #4 10 +24 V backplane

(MSB) power

69
4 Terminal Bases
4.2 Backplane Board
Continued
4 Address bit #3 9 +24 V bus power
3 Address bit #2 8 GND
2 Address bit #1 7 RS-485 – bus

communication
1 Address bit #0 6 RS-485 + bus

communication
4.2.2 2x6 Connector

The internal connector fetches or supplies power from/to the electronics module
that is installed on the terminal base.
Figure: Pinout for the 2x6 connector
Figure: The 2x6 connector and its two positions
For the power supply, the connector resides in the left position and the pins are
used as follows:
Table: MB-1X-PS: Power Supply

12 +24 V power to bus 11 GND
10 +24 V power to bus 9 GND
8 +24 V backplane 7 Address bit #3

power

70
4 Terminal Bases
4.2 Backplane Board
Continued
6 Address bit #4 5 Address bit #2

(MSB)
4 RS-485 – bus 3 Address bit #1

communication
2 RS-485 + bus 1 Address bit #0

communication
For the AS-P servers and Central IO modules, the connector resides in the right
position and the pins are used as follows:
Table: MB-1X: AS-P Servers and Central IO modules

12 GND 11 +24 V bus power
10 GND 9 +24 V bus power
8 Address bit #3 7 GND
6 Address bit #2 5 Address bit #4

(MSB)
4 Address bit #1 3 RS-485 – bus

communication
2 Address bit #0 1 RS-485 + bus

communication
4.2.3 Address Logic Circuitry

The backplane board includes circuitry that provides the electronics module that
is installed on the terminal base with a 5-bit address. The address circuitry on the
backplane receives its power from the +24 V backplane power. This is separated
from the +24 V bus power.
4.2.4 Central IO Module Address Calculation

An I/O modue 5-bit address is generated on the backplane Printed Circuit Board
(PCB), which is mounted in the terminal base. 5-bits are required to generate
physical addresses 0 to 31. The AS-P server and Central IO module read the
physical address and add 1 internally to yield logical addresses from 1 to 32,
which display as slot IDs in the EcoStruxure Building Operation software. The 5-
bit address defines the maximum of 32 modules in a system. Although the Power
Supply (PS-24V) uses an address, the device is not "smart." Therefore, the
Power Supply does not communicate on the I/O bus or respond to packets on the
I/O bus but consumes an address on the I/O bus.

71
4 Terminal Bases
4.2 Backplane Board
The vertical 2x6 PCB connector on the backplane PCB provides power, ground,
communication, and the 5-bit address to a Central IO module plugged into the
terminal base.
The backplane PCB accepts an input address from the male connector located
on the left side of the terminal base. The backplane PCB circuitry adds 1 to the
address passed to it from the left connector and outputs it on the female
connector on the right side. As more terminal bases are added to a system, the
address increases from left to right.
The AS-P server and Central IO module read the address by way of the vertical
backplane female connector. The address read by the I/O electronics is also
output on the right-hand side female connector.
The first terminal base on an I/O bus cannot have another terminal base plugged
into its male backplane connector. Therefore, internal programming resistors
force the first physical address to be zero (0) at the female connector, which is
the logical address 1. For pin usage, refer to the 2x5 and 2x6 connector tables in
this topic.
4.2.5 Device Label

The device label on the backplane board is used for writing down what type of
electronics module is intended to be connected to the terminal base.

72
4 Terminal Bases
4.3 Device Addressing

In EcoStruxure Building Operation WorkStation, you create a logical Central IO
module to be associated with the physical Central IO module on the I/O bus. You
specify the Central IO module type and name. Initially, the module ID is Null,
which means that the Central IO module is non-operational. You assign a module
ID that is equal to the address (position) of the Central IO module on the I/O bus.
You can configure the module ID either when you create the logical Central IO
module or later. When the Central IO module is plugged into the system at the
intended position on the bus, the EcoStruxure Building Operation software
automatically associates the physical Central IO module with the logical Central
IO module that has a matching module ID and type.
Central IO module address calculation

The backplane generates a 5-bit address corresponding to the order (position) of
the terminal base in the chain and passes this address through the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base (base plate). For more
information, see section 4.2 “Backplane Board” on page 69.
The leftmost device in the chain gets the address (position) 1. The next device
gets the address 2, and so on, up to 32.

73
4 Terminal Bases
Figure: Device addressing
NOTE: Position 1 is reserved for a power supply. Position 2 is reserved for

an AS-P server. Although the power supply device gets an address, the PS-
24V does not use it. For more information, see section 4.14 “I/O Bus
Restrictions” on page 92.
When you replace an electronics module, the new module automatically picks up
the same address. If you remove an electronics module from its terminal base,
the addresses of the following devices are not affected.

74
4 Terminal Bases
4.4 Device Installation

Consider a simple example:
Figure: System ex. 1. A Power supply, an automation server, and two Central IO modules
Each device consists of two parts:

• Terminal base
• Electronics module
Figure: A hardware device: the electronics module and the terminal base
A separate terminal base means the terminal base can be installed and wired
before the electronics module with the application program and data is supplied.
The terminal base is usually installed on a DIN rail, but it can also be mounted
directly on the wall. The electronics module is easily plugged in to the terminal
base and firmly locked by pushing the handles in place.
Replacing an electronics module is done in seconds because no terminal wiring
is affected.

75
4 Terminal Bases
4.4.1 DIN Rail Installation

Install the terminal bases on a horizontal DIN rail.
Figure: Terminal base installed on a horizontal DIN rail
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing a SpaceLogic

device along with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most
efficient ventilation is achieved with the wall-mounted DIN rail oriented
horizontally and with adequate space provided between the SpaceLogic device
rail and adjacent rails or other panel-mounted devices.
NOTICE
• For AS-P servers: Always install the terminal base on a horizontal DIN rail.
This position is required to provide sufficient cooling air flow through the
electronics module. Installation on a vertical DIN rail can significantly reduce
the life span of the module.
• For Central IO modules and PS-24V power supply: Install the terminal base
on a horizontal DIN rail. This position provides proper cooling air flow through
the electronics module.
The terminal bases are connected to each other by sliding the terminal bases
together using the built-in connectors.
To ensure that the correct electronics module is used with the correct terminal
base, you must always check that the warning label on the terminal base
backplane indicates which module type is to be connected. Write the intended
module type, if it is not already printed, on the label.

76
4 Terminal Bases
Figure: Terminal base with label for intended module type
Install only the module type that is indicated on the label on the terminal base
backplane. A mismatch can cause electric shock and damage the electronics
module.
WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
backplane.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
If the label does not indicate the intended module type, consult the control panel
documentation to determine the intended module type.
To prevent the modules from sliding sideways on the DIN rail, fix an end clamp
for DIN 35 (part number SXWDINEND10001) tightly against the rightmost device
on the rail. The end clamp is easily removed if you bend the snap lock open with
a screwdriver.
Figure: End clamp for DIN 35 fixed across the DIN rail
The chain of devices can be split on multiple DIN rails (rows) by using an
extension cord called S-cable. Maximum five S-cables are allowed per system.
The S-cable connects the last (rightmost) device on one DIN rail with the first
(leftmost) device on the next DIN rail. The complete chain of devices must remain
within one cabinet for EMC reasons.
The following figure shows an example of how you can use an S-cable to connect
devices that are installed on separate DIN rails in a cabinet. For sufficient cooling
air flow through the devices, the DIN rails and the devices are installed
horizontally in the cabinet.

77
4 Terminal Bases
Figure: Devices installed on separate, horizontal rails and connected using an S-cable
The S-cable is available with right angle connectors and in 1.5 m (5 ft) and 0.75
m (2 ft 5 in) lengths. You can serially connect up to two S-cables to extend the
length.
The following image shows the minimum space required for plugging/unplugging
the S-cable from the device but also provides information on the minimum bend
radius required to reduce the stress of the cable. The S-cable with straight
connectors is a discontinued product, which can no longer be ordered from
Schneider Electric.

78
4 Terminal Bases
Figure: S-cable connecting devices on separate rails
4.4.2 Device Order

The order in which the devices are installed in the chain (I/O bus) is important.
The devices should be installed in the following order:
• Position 1 (leftmost): Power supply (mandatory)
• Position 2: AS-P server (mandatory)
• Position 3 to 32: Central IO modules and extra power supplies as needed
based on power budget. One power supply can supply power for loads up to
30 W. For more information, see section 5.5 “Power Budget” on page 105.
NOTE: There is a limit of one automation server per I/O bus.
The rules are summarized in the following illustration.

79
4 Terminal Bases
Figure: Order of devices on the I/O bus

80
4 Terminal Bases
4.5 Installing a Terminal Base on a DIN-rail
4.5 Installing a Terminal Base on a DIN-rail

You install a terminal base on a horizontal DIN-rail prior to connecting it to its
neighboring terminal bases.
To install a terminal base on a DIN-rail

1. Ensure that the DIN-rail is horizontal.
NOTICE
• For AS-P servers: Always install the terminal base on a horizontal DIN
rail. This position is required to provide sufficient cooling air flow through
the electronics module. Installation on a vertical DIN rail can significantly
reduce the life span of the module.
• For Central IO modules and PS-24V power supply: Install the terminal
base on a horizontal DIN rail. This position provides proper cooling air
flow through the electronics module.
2. Pull down the DIN-rail clip.
3. Hook the terminal base onto the top of the DIN-rail.

4. Push the terminal base fully onto the DIN-rail and release the DIN-rail clip.

81
4 Terminal Bases
4.6 Connecting Terminal Bases
4.6 Connecting Terminal Bases

You connect terminal bases together to provide continuity of the power supply
and the address bus.
To connect terminal bases

1. Ensure that each terminal base is clipped to the DIN-rail.
2. Push each terminal base firmly against its neighbor to the left, ensuring that
the power supply and address bus connector is properly mated.
3. On the backplane label of each terminal base, write the type of module to be
connected to that terminal base.
You can now wire the terminal base.

82
4 Terminal Bases
4.7 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus

You print an I/O wiring list for the I/O bus that describes which I/O points are
associated with each Central IO module. You use the printed copy of this list to
help wire the I/O bus network.
NOTE: If a Module ID is Null, you cannot print the wiring list. If a channel is
Null, the I/O point labels do not display in the wiring list.
For more information, see section 4.13 “I/O Bus Parts” on page 90.
To print a wiring list for the I/O bus

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, click the IO Bus on an
automation server.
2. On the Actions menu, click Print IO wiring list.
3. In the Print IO Wiring List dialog box, click the Printer icon .
4. To print a wiring list for a single Central IO module, right-click the selected
Central IO module.
5. Click Print IO wiring list.
6. Click the Printer icon .

Observe that the complete path to the Central IO module is displayed on the title
bar for the I/O wiring list.

83
4 Terminal Bases
4.8 Wiring a Terminal Base
4.8 Wiring a Terminal Base

You can wire a terminal base prior to installing an electronics module.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Disconnect the power supply and other high voltage equipment before wiring.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Always use the recommended cables (or wires with larger cross-sectional
area). For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
NOTE: Wiring can also be carried out after a module has been installed in
its terminal base.
To wire a terminal base

1. To access the terminal block screws, remove the electronics module or
open the clear plastic label carrier.
2. Loosen the screws of the terminal block.

3. Strip approximately 7 mm (0.3 inch) of the insulation from the end of each
wire.
4. Insert the stripped end of each wire fully into its intended terminal. Ensure
that no bare wire strands extend from the terminal.
5. Tigthen the screws using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the
screws are fully tightened. Use the following recommended screw tightening
torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in).
6. Close the top clear plastic label carrier or refit the electronics module.

84
4 Terminal Bases
4.9 Installing an Electronics Module on a Terminal Base
4.9 Installing an Electronics Module on a

Terminal Base
You install an electronics module directly onto the relevant terminal base, where
it will connect to the power supply and address bus.
WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
backplane.
equipment damage.
To install an electronics module on a terminal base

1. Pull out the two handles on the left and right sides of the module.
2. Plug in the module to the terminal base, ensuring that the PCB header pins
align correctly with the backplane socket, and press firmly.
3. Push the handles in firmly to lock the module in place.
2.
1.
2.
3.
1.
3.
Continued on next page

85
4 Terminal Bases
4.9 Installing an Electronics Module on a Terminal Base
4. Open the clear plastic label carriers.
5. Write and insert the labels.

6. Close the label carriers.
You can now power up the device.

86
4 Terminal Bases
4.10 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels

You print labels to identify I/O channels on the placard of a Central IO module
much the same way you label circuits on an electrical panel. You accept the
default names for the I/O point labels or customize the I/O point names for your
own application.
NOTE: If a Module ID is Null, you cannot print the label. If a channel is Null,
the I/O point labels do not display in the Print IO Module Labels dialog box.
To print a label to identify I/O channels

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the IO Bus on an
automation server.
2. In the List View, right-click the Central IO module, onboard IO module, the
entire IO Bus folder, or multiple Central IO modules.
3. Click Print IO module labels.
4. In the Print IO Module Labels dialog box, select Blank Label Text to print
labels with only the channel number with no additional label text.
NOTE: The label text prints in red if the text is too long to fit on the
label.
5. In the Paper Type box, select a paper type.
6. Click Print to print the Central IO module label or Save to save any changes
to the point’s label text property.
7. For an AS-B server onboard Central IO module, cut along the dotted lines
and fold the label along the fold edge to fit on the placard.
The label is properly sized to fit on the placard of the Central IO module.

87
4 Terminal Bases
4.11 Powering Up a Device
4.11 Powering Up a Device

You perform the following steps to power up a device.
To power up a device
1. Check that the device is properly seated in its terminal base.
2. Check that all wiring is correct.
3. Ensure that power is supplied to the backplane.
4. After powering up, check that the Status LED changes to a constant green
light after about a minute (can also be off briefly during each period of
activity).

88
4 Terminal Bases
4.12 I/O Bus
4.12 I/O Bus

4.12.1 I/O Bus Parts

The I/O bus consists of the following parts:
• Power bus
• Address bus
• Communication bus
4.12.2 I/O Bus Restrictions

The I/O bus imposes restrictions on the number of devices that can be connected
to the bus and what type of devices that are allowed on certain positions.
For more information, see section 4.14 “I/O Bus Restrictions” on page 92.

89
4 Terminal Bases
4.13 I/O Bus Parts
4.13 I/O Bus Parts

The I/O bus consists of the following parts:
• Power bus
• Address bus
• Communication bus
Figure: I/O bus parts
Power bus
The power bus distributes 24 VDC power from the power supply to the AS-P
server and the Central IO modules.
Use the power budget to calculate the maximum number of devices that the
power supply can supply. If more devices are used, additional power supplies
must be added to the I/O bus.
For more information, see section 5.5 “Power Budget” on page 105.
Address bus
The address bus is used to pass the address from the terminal base backplane to
the electronics module that is installed on the terminal base to the next terminal
base on the I/O bus. Typically, the physical position (address) of the devices on
the I/O bus should match the module IDs in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software. For more information, see section 4.3 “Device Addressing” on page 73.

90
4 Terminal Bases
4.13 I/O Bus Parts
Continued
Electronics Module Physical Position Number EcoStruxure Building
Operation Module ID
Power Supply 1 Number is hidden in

WorkStation
AS-P server 2 Number is hidden in

WorkStation
Central IO module 3 3
Central IO module n n <=32
Communication bus
The communication bus enables serial (RS-485) communication between the
AS-P server and the Central IO modules. The AS-P server controls and
supervises the communication on the communication bus. The Central IO
modules also monitor their communication status. When a new Central IO
module is configured and connected to the I/O bus, the automation server
automatically detects the new Central IO module.
NOTE: All the buses use a common ground, which is connected to the
signal return paths with terminals called “RET”. The signal return path is also
called signal ground.

91
4 Terminal Bases
4.14 I/O Bus Restrictions
4.14 I/O Bus Restrictions

The I/O bus imposes restrictions on the number of devices that can be connected
to the bus and what type of devices that are allowed on certain positions.
The following restrictions apply to the I/O bus:
• Position 1 reserved for a power supply
• Position 2 reserved for a AS-P server
• Maximum one AS-P server per I/O bus
• Maximum 32 devices per I/O bus
NOTE: Even when connected by an S-cable, no more than 32 devices are
allowed on the I/O bus.

92
5 Power Supplies
Topics
PS-24V Power Supplies
Electronics Modules
Terminal Bases
Power Supply PS-24V LEDs
Power Budget
5 Power Supplies
5.1 PS-24V Power Supplies

PS-24V is the power supply for the AS-P servers and Central IO modules. The
PS-24V power supply requires an input voltage of either 24 VAC +/–20 % or
24–30 VDC.
The PS-24V power supply is based on the patented two-piece design. Each PS-
24V device consists of an electronics module and a terminal base.
PS-24V is usually installed on a DIN rail in a cabinet and provides power to the
subsequent devices in the chain through the terminal base backplane. A PS-24V
power supply consumes one address position, even though the address is not
used.
A system may contain more than one PS-24V to supply the power needed,
depending on the type and number of connected devices. A power budget table
can be used for proper calculations. For more information, see section 5.5
“Power Budget” on page 105.
The output voltage is 24 VDC supplied on the backplane, maximum 30 W. If the
output is overloaded, the power is automatically shut down and the Status LED
turns red. At an interval of a couple of seconds the power supply retries to switch
on the power output. This is sometimes called ‘the hiccup mode’. For more
information, see section 33.6 “Power Supply Overload” on page 1318.
The power supply has galvanic isolation between the primary (input power) and
secondary (output power) side of the power supply.
Figure: Power supply PS-24V
5.1.1 Electronics Modules

The electronics module is the main component of SpaceLogic devices that are
based on the patented two-piece design. The electronics module is installed on a
terminal base, which constitutes the second component of the device.

95
5 Power Supplies
For more information, see section 7.2 “Electronics Modules” on page 132.

5.1.3 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs

There are two LEDs on the front panel of the PS-24V. The LEDs indicate status
for input and output power.
For more information, see section 5.4 “Power Supply PS-24V LEDs” on page
103.
5.1.4 Power Budget

5.1.5 Specifications
DC output
Voltage 24 VDC
Accuracy +/-1 VDC
Maximum power 30 W
AC input
Nominal voltage 24 VAC
Operating voltage range +/- 20 %
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum current 2.5 A rms
Recommended transformer rating 60 VA or higher

96
5 Power Supplies
DC input
Nominal voltage 24 to 30 VDC
Operating voltage range 21 to 33 VDC
Maximum power consumption 40 W
Terminals
Environment
Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)
Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing
Material
Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB
Enclosure PC/ABS
Ingress protection rating IP 20
Mechanical
Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)
Weight including terminal base 0.285 kg (0.63 lb)
Weight excluding terminal base 0.186 kg (0.41 lb)

97
5 Power Supplies
5.1.6 Internal Configuration

The PS-24V power supply module does not connect to the address and communication busses in the
terminal base. The AC/DC converter terminals L/+ and N/- are isolated from the circuits on the
secondary side of the converter. You can wire these terminals without concern for polarity matching, but
it is good practice to connect the positive supply voltage to L/+ and the negative supply voltage to N/- in
order to prevent confusion.
Figure: PS-24V internal configuration
The earth ground terminal ( ) on the PS-24V power supply is connected to signal ground, which is the
same as the negative output from the power supply. The purpose of this connection is to comply with
EMC directives.

98
5 Power Supplies
5.2 Electronics Modules

The electronics module has two handles, which have to be pulled out when
removing the module from or inserting the module to the terminal base. In their
inner position, the handles lock the module to the terminal base. This effectively
helps prevent unintentional separation. Two plastic label carriers can carry labels
that show field markings. Wiring connections are made at terminal blocks
contained on the terminal base. The terminal screws are accessible without
removing the module. Power for all devices is taken from the 24 VDC rails of the
backplane that is part of the terminal base.
Figure: General assembly
Number Device Parts
Electronics module
Terminal block
Terminal base
Ventilation slot
Label carrier
DIN rail
Backplane board with device label
LEDs

99
5 Power Supplies
Continued
Number Device Parts
Handle

100
5 Power Supplies
5.3 Terminal Bases
5.3 Terminal Bases

devices:
module

101
5 Power Supplies
5.3 Terminal Bases



5.3.4 I/O Bus


102
5 Power Supplies
5.4 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs

There are two LEDs on the front panel of the PS-24V. The LEDs indicate status
for input and output power.
Figure: PS-24V power supply LEDs
Table: Power Supply PS-24V LEDs

Function Color
Main power Green
Status Green/red
5.4.1 Main Power LED

The Main Power LED indicates status for input power. The Main Power LED
indicates the condition.
Table: Main Power LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition
Green, constant Input power

103
5 Power Supplies
Continued
No light No input power
5.4.2 Status LED

The PS-24V power supply Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: Power Supply Status LED Patterns

Green, constant Output voltage and load OK
Red/green, flashing Output slightly overloaded
Red, constant Output overloaded

104
5 Power Supplies
5.5 Power Budget
5.5 Power Budget

The power supply delivers and output voltage of 24 VDC +/– 1 V at an output
current of about 1.25 A. The power supply can supply power for loads up to 30
W.
NOTE: The number of devices that the power supply can supply is 30 W
based on the individual wattage requirements of each device installed in a
system.
To determine the number and position of the power supplies, use the following
power budget table.
Table: Power Budget Table

Device Power (W)
AS-P server 10.0
UI-16 1.8
DI-16 1.6
RTD-DI-16 1.6
DO-FA-12 1.8
DO-FA-12-H 1.8
DO-FC-8 2.2
DO-FC-8-H 2.2
AO-8 4.9
AO-8-H 4.9
AO-V-8 0.7
AO-V-8-H 0.7
UI-8-DO-FC-4 1.9
UI-8-DO-FC-4-H 1.9
UI-8-AO-4 3.2
UI-8-AO-4-H 3.2
UI-8-AO-V-4 1.0
UI-8-AO-V-4-H 1.0

105
6 AS-P Servers
Topics
AS-P Servers
Electronics Modules
Terminal Bases
AS-P Server Communication Ports
AS-P Server Screw Terminals
AS-P Server LEDs
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers

The AS-P server offers enhanced processor performance, increased memory
size, dual Ethernet ports, and high-speed USB interfaces. The AS-P server is a
lowest tier EcoStruxure BMS server within the EcoStruxure BMS. The AS-P
controls and supervises equipment, typically HVAC equipment. AS-P servers use
Central IO module with connected field devices, such as sensors and actuators,
to do that.
AS-P servers are based on the patented two-piece design. Each AS-P server
consists of an electronics module and a terminal base.
The AS-P server is installed with the Central IO modules on DIN rails in cabinets.
The AS-P server electronics module uses a W1 enclosure. Power is supplied
through the terminal base backplane.
Figure: AS-P server



109
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers
6.1.3 AS-P Server Models

The AS-P server comes in four models that offer support for different functions.
Model LonWorks Secure Boot
AS-P Yes No
AS-P-NL No No
AS-P-S Yes Yes
AS-P-NLS No Yes
The AS-P-S and AS-P-NLS models are hardware only. An AS-P software
package needs to be purchased separately. For more information, see the AS-P
Specification Sheet.
6.1.4 Memory
An AS-P server has two types of memory:
• 512 MB DDR3 SDRAM (for program execution)
• 4 GB eMMC memory (for storage)
If a power outage occurs, all important variables are automatically saved to the
eMMC memory before complete shutdown. When power returns, this data
retention function helps ensure that the AS-P server can continue to run with the
correct set of values.
6.1.5 Supported Building Standards

The AS-P server natively communicates with three of the most popular
communication protocols:
• BACnet: The AS-P server directly communicates to BACnet/IP and BACnet
MS/TP networks, which provides access to MP and RP controllers, b3
BACnet devices, and BACnet devices. The AS-P server also supports
BACnet/SC applications as a BACnet/SC node or BACnet/SC router, which
allows the AS-P server to be in BACnet/SC networks and support
applications that connect BACnet/IP or MS/TP networks with BACnet/SC
networks.
• LonWorks: The AS-P server has a built-in FTT-10 port, which enables
access to Xenta devices and LonWorks devices.
• Modbus: The AS-P server natively integrates Modbus RS-485 master and
slave configurations, as well as IP client and server. This integration
provides access to devices that communicate on the Modbus protocol, such
as power meters, circuit breakers, and lighting controllers.

110
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers
NOTE: The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not support
LonWorks.
6.1.6 AS-P Server Communication Ports

An AS-P server has the following communication ports:
• 2 Ethernet 10/100 megabit ports
• 2 RS-485 ports
• 2 LonWorks (TP/FT and RS-485) ports (not available on the AS-P-NL and
AS-P-NLS models)
• 1 USB host port
• 1 USB device port
• 1 backplane I/O bus port
For more information, see section 6.4 “AS-P Server Communication Ports” on
page 120.
6.1.7 AS-P Server Screw Terminals

There are pluggable screw terminals at the top of an AS-P server.
For more information, see section 6.5 “AS-P Server Screw Terminals” on page
121.
6.1.8 AS-P Server LEDs

There are several LEDs on the front panel of an AS-P server.
For more information, see section 6.6 “AS-P Server LEDs” on page 124.
6.1.9 Reset Functions

There are four different types of reset for the automation servers: warm start, cold
start, reset, and reset to DFU mode. Depending on the type of reset, the
automation server can be reset using the reset button or a command from
WorkStation.
For more information, see section 9.2 “Automation Server Reset Functions” on
page 277.

111
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers
6.1.10 Communication Port Wiring

The wiring recommendations for the communication ports on the automation
servers, BACnet/IP devices, RP controller expansion modules, and Operator
Display devices apply to wires and cables used for RS-485 communications,
LonWorks communications, USB connections, Ethernet connections, sensor bus
connections, room bus connections, and RP controller Modbus network
connections. Always use the recommended cables and wires.
For more information, see section 31.23 “Communication Port Wiring” on page
1177.
6.1.11 AS-P Server Software

Before you engineer an AS-P server, install the AS-P server software on the
server using Device Administrator. The software is not pre-loaded on the AS-P
servers.
For more information, see the Installing AS-P or AS-B Software topic on
WebHelp.
6.1.12 Automation Server Replacement Using

Restore
Backup and Restore helps assure that automation server data can be restored to
a replacement automation server in the event of detected failure, or to the same
automation server in the event of data loss. As a precaution, you back up your
automation servers regularly so that you can use the most current backup to
restore the automation server data to a replacement automation server. You also
configure the new automation server to match the name and the network settings
of the replaced automation server so the system can identify this automation
server when online.
For more information, see the Automation Server Replacement Using Restore
topic on WebHelp.
Electrical
DC input supply power 10 W
DC input supply voltage 24 VDC
Environment

112
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Real-time clock
Accuracy in runtime mode NTP server
Accuracy in backup mode, at 25 °C (77 °F) +/-52 seconds per month
Backup time, at 25 °C (77 °F) 10 days
Communication ports
Ethernet Dual 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
USB 1 USB 2.0 device port (mini-B)

1 USB 2.0 host port (type-A), 5 VDC, 2.5 W
RS-485 Dual 2-wire ports, bias 5.0 VDC
LonWorksa TP/FT-10
a) AS-P-NL (SXWASPXXX10002) and AS-P-NLS (SXWASPSBX10002) do not support LonWorks.

113
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers
Communications
BACnet BACnet/IP and MS/TP, port configurable, default 47808

BACnet/SC, port configurable, no default port
BTL B-BC (BACnet Building Controller)a
a) See the BTL Product Catalog for up-to-date details on BTL listed firmware revisions on BACnet
International's home page.
Modbus Modbus TCP, client and server

Serial, RS-485, master or slave
TCP Binary, port fixed, 4444
HTTP Non-binary, port configurable, default 80
HTTPS Encrypted supporting TLS 1.3, 1.2, 1.1a, and 1.0a, port configurable default 443
a) Disabled by default.
SMTP Email sending, port configurable, default 25
SNMP version 3
Network supervision using poll and trap
Application alarm distribution using trap
LNS
LNS version OpenLNS

Installed on WorkStation PC
LonMark
Resource files version 14.00
CPU
Frequency 500 MHz
Type SPEAr1380, ARM Cortex-A9 dual-core
DDR3 SDRAM 512 MB
eMMC memory 4 GB
Memory backup Yes, battery-free, no maintenance

All serial communication ports of the AS-P server module refer to signal ground
as shown in the figure below.

114
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers
Figure: AS-P server internal configuration
NOTE: The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not have
LonWorks (LON) communication ports.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the AS-P server module with power
and an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

115
6 AS-P Servers

Number Device Parts
Electronics module
Terminal block
Terminal base
Ventilation slot
Label carrier
DIN rail
LEDs

116
6 AS-P Servers
Continued
Number Device Parts
Handle

117
6 AS-P Servers
6.3 Terminal Bases
6.3 Terminal Bases

devices:
module

118
6 AS-P Servers
6.3 Terminal Bases



6.3.4 I/O Bus


119
6 AS-P Servers
6.4 AS-P Server Communication Ports
6.4 AS-P Server Communication Ports

An AS-P server has the following communication ports:
• 2 RS-485 ports
• 2 LonWorks (TP/FT and RS-485) ports (not available on the AS-P-NL and
AS-P-NLS models)
• 1 USB host port
• 1 backplane I/O bus port
Table: AS-P Server Communication Ports

Communication port Connection
Ethernet 1 10/100 IP, LAN/WAN, Modbus, BACnet
RS-485 COM A Modbus, BACnet
RS-485 COM B Modbus, BACnet
LonWorks (TP/FT and RS-485)a LonWorks
USB host Advanced Display (AD), Zigbee Adapter
USB device Device Administrator
Backplane I/O bus Internal power supply and I/O addressing
a) The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not support LonWorks.
The Ethernet communication is performed over a 10/100BaseTX, 10 or 100

Mbit/s, twisted pair network. The AS-P servers have two Ethernet ports with RJ45
connectors.
The two Ethernet ports can be configured in three different modes: switching
enabled, second port disabled, or dual IP networks. One port should be
connected to the site network. When switching between the two ports is enabled,
the other port can be used to connect computers running WorkStation or
WebStation, Modbus TCP units, or BACnet/IP devices such as MP controllers,
but not another EcoStruxure BMS server. To limit access to the system, you can
disconnect the second port. When the two ports are configured in dual IP mode,
you can connect a separate network of IP devices to the second port. The
automation server has the option to act as a DHCP server on this network. You
can lock the DHCP network and only allow current DHCP clients to communicate
with the automation server.
The USB host port (facing down) can be used for connecting devices such as the
Advanced Display (AD) and Zigbee Adapter. For more information, see section
29.6 “Connecting AD v3 to an Automation Server and a 24 VDC Power Supply”
on page 1091. For more information, see section 26.1.1 “” on page 1026.
The USB device port on the front is intended for program download from a PC by
means of Device Administrator. It is connected to a PC or a downstream port of a
hub.

120
6 AS-P Servers
6.5 AS-P Server Screw Terminals

There are pluggable screw terminals at the top of an AS-P server.
The AS-P server comes in different models. The AS-P and AS-P-S models have
three screw terminal blocks (with 4, 3, and 5 poles) whereas the AS-P-NL and
AS-P-NLS models have two screw terminal blocks (with 4 and 3 poles).
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)
AS-P and AS-P-S models
Figure: AS-P and AS-P-S models, screw terminals and other connectors
Table: Top Side Screw Terminals, AS-P and AS-P-S Models

Terminal number Designation Usage
COM A
1 TX/RX + RS-485 communication
2 TX/RX – RS-485 communication
3 RET Internally connected to

ground
4 Bias + 5.0 VDC, 25 mA output for

RS-485 biasing
COM B

121
6 AS-P Servers
Continued

ground
LON
8 TX/RX + RS-485 LonWorks
9 TX/RX – RS-485 LonWorks

ground
11 LON-1 TP/FT-10 Free topology

LonWorks network, 78 kbps
12 LON-2 TP/FT-10 Free topology

LonWorks network, 78 kbps
The screw terminals 1 to 7, intended for RS-485 communication, act as

connectors to the AS-P server and are easily inserted/removed without disrupting
the network. Doing so may help in isolating possible RS-485 communication
problems.
AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS models
Figure: AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS models, screw terminals and other connectors

122
6 AS-P Servers
Table: Top Side Screw Terminals, AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS Models

COM A

ground
4 Bias + 5.0 VDC, 25 mA output for

RS-485 biasing
COM B

ground
Other
8 NC Not connected
9 NC Not connected

ground
11 NC Not connected
12 NC Not connected

connectors to the AS-P server and are easily inserted/removed without disrupting
problems.

123
6 AS-P Servers
6.6 AS-P Server LEDs

There are several LEDs on the front panel of an AS-P server.
The AS-P server comes in different models. The AS-P and AS-P-S models have
nine LEDs whereas the AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS models have seven LEDs.
Figure: AS-P server LEDs
Table: The Nine LEDs

Function Color
RS-485 A, Tx Yellow
RS-485 A, Rx Green
RS-485 B, Tx Yellow
RS-485 B, Rx Green
Ethernet 1, Link/Act/Speed Green/Yellow
Ethernet 2, Link/Act/Speed Green/Yellow
LON, Txa Yellow

124
6 AS-P Servers
Continued
Function Color
LON, Modea Red
Status (AS-P server) Green/Red
a) The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not have LEDs for LonWorks (LON).
NOTE: The AS-P server Ethernet and Status indicators comprise two LEDs
(green/yellow and green/red respectively) in one structure. Normally, when
one LED is lit, the other is not lit and vice versa, that is, the indicator will
show one color at a time.
The LEDs indicate status of the AS-P server and the ongoing communication.
6.6.1 Status LED

The automation server Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: Automation Server Status LED Patterns

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK
Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait
Red, constant Detected error, attention required
Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention
Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) Firmware being downloaded, wait
Red/green, vague Device firmware upgrade mode, wait
6.6.2 RS-485 LEDs

The RS-485 (COM A and COM B) LEDs indicate the condition of the RS-485
communication.
Table: RS-485 LED Patterns

Yellow, flashing (Tx) Transmit data
Green, flashing (Rx) Receive data

125
6 AS-P Servers
6.6.3 Ethernet LEDs

The Ethernet (1 and 2) LEDs indicate the condition of the Ethernet
communication.
Table: Ethernet LED Patterns

Green, flashing 10 Mbit communication
Yellow, flashing 100 Mbit communication
6.6.4 LON LEDs

The LON LEDs indicate the condition of the LonWorks RS-485 communication.
Table: LON LED Patterns

Yellow, flashing (Tx) LON communication RS-485
Red, short flash (Mode) During start-up; otherwise for future use
NOTE: The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not have
LonWorks (LON) LEDs.

126
7 Central IO Modules
Topics
Central IO Modules
Electronics Modules
Terminal Bases
Central IO Module LEDs
Override Switches and Potentiometers
Input Modules
DI-16 Central IO Module
UI-16 Central IO Module
RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module
Output Modules
DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules
DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules
AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules
AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules
Mixed Modules
UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules
UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules
UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules
7.1 Central IO Modules

By adding a variety of Central IO and power supply modules, you can use the
AS-P server to tailor the Intelligent Building Management System to your unique
requirements.
Power and communications are delivered to the automation server and its family
of Central IO modules in a common bus, thus allowing them to be plugged
together without tools. This simple one-step process involves sliding the modules
together using their built-in connectors.
The available Central IO modules are designed to accommodate a fixed number
of inputs and outputs. For example, several Central IO modules, such as digital
inputs, only support a single electrical type. Other modules, such as digital inputs
mixed with digital outputs, support a combination of electrical types. The various
modules enable you to select the right combination of points necessary for your
project.
The Central IO modules are based on the patented two-piece design. Each
Central IO module consists of an electronics module and a terminal base.
Figure: Central IO module, DO-FC-8-H


129

7.1.3 Central IO Module LEDs

The Central IO modules have the following status indicator LEDs on the front of
the module:
• I/O Module Status LED
• I/O Channel Status LEDs
For more information, see section 7.4 “Central IO Module LEDs” on page 136.
7.1.4 Override Switches and Potentiometers

For Central IO modules with outputs, the following components on the front
provide control of the output channels:
• Override switches
• Potentiometers
For more information, see section 7.5 “Override Switches and Potentiometers” on
page 138.
7.1.5 External Device Connections

There are many different kinds of external devices from different vendors that can
be connected to an EcoStruxure BMS.
For more information, see section 31.12 “External Device Connections” on page
1155.
7.1.6 Grounding and Power

It is important to perform the grounding correctly for the following reasons:
• To design a system that is not harmed by detected minor connection errors.
• To design a system that works well and is resistant to EMI.
• To minimize the effects of ground currents that can cause unstable
measurements.
For more information, see section 31.3 “Grounding and Power” on page 1132.

130
7.1.7 Input Modules

Input modules support a single electrical type, such as digital or universal inputs.
The available input modules include the following:
• DI-16
• UI-16
• RTD-DI-16
For more information, see section 7.6 “Input Modules” on page 141.
7.1.8 Output Modules

Output modules support a number of electrical types, such as digital, tristate, and
pulsed digital outputs. The available output modules include the following:
• DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H
• DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H
• AO-8 and AO-8-H
• AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H
For more information, see section 7.10 “Output Modules” on page 166.
7.1.9 Mixed Modules

Mixed modules support a combination of electrical types, such as universal
inputs mixed with digital outputs. The available mixed modules include the
following:
• UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DOFC-4-H
• UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H
• UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H
For more information, see section 7.15 “Mixed Modules” on page 185.

131

Number Device Parts
Electronics module
Terminal block
Terminal base
Ventilation slot
Label carrier
DIN rail
LEDs

132
Continued
Number Device Parts
Handle

133
7.3 Terminal Bases
7.3 Terminal Bases

devices:
module

134
7.3 Terminal Bases



7.3.4 I/O Bus


135
7.4 Central IO Module LEDs

The Central IO modules have the following status indicator LEDs on the front of
the module:
• I/O Module Status LED
• I/O Channel Status LEDs
Figure: Central IO module LEDs
7.4.1 Central IO Module Status LED

Each Central IO module contains a green/red Status LED that indicates the
status of the module in relationship to the automation server. The LED is labeled
Status and is located on the lower right side of the Central IO module placard.
The Central IO module Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: Central IO Module Status LED Patterns

Green, constant Online and configured (at least one

channel/point downloaded successfully)
Green, flashing (200 ms ON, 200 ms OFF) Online and unconfigured (physical module
that either matches/mismatches logical
module)
Green, slow flashing (approximately every Low power mode (saves energy)
3 s)
Red, constant Error requiring attention (for example, the

input voltage is too low)

136
Continued
Red, flashing (100 ms ON, 100 ms OFF) Offline with respect to the automation
server (both configured and unconfigured
modules)
Red/Green, flashing (green 100 ms, red Bootloader mode (downloading data)
100 ms)
7.4.2 I/O Channel Status LEDs

Each digital input (DI) channel, digital output (DO) channel, and Universal Input
(UI) channel contains a green I/O channel status LED. This LED indicates the
On/Off state of the digital input or output.
You can also configure I/O channel status LEDs as an invert, so that either a
HIGH or LOW voltage level can turn the LED ON.
NOTE: For Universal Inputs, the I/O Channel Status LED is active only if the
channel is configured as a digital input or as a counter input.

137
7.5 Override Switches and Potentiometers

For Central IO modules with outputs, the following components on the front
provide control of the output channels:
• Override switches
• Potentiometers
Figure: Override switches and potentiometers
7.5.1 Override Switches

Central IO modules with analog or digital outputs are available with Hand-Off-
Auto (HOA) override switches on the front of the Central IO module. The switches
provide override control of the output channels. The analog and digital output
channels operate differently depending on the type of output:
• Analog outputs work in conjunction with the potentiometers to manually
adjust the voltage or current output by the channel.
• Digital outputs are used with Form A or Form C relays to open and close
relay contacts.

138
Figure: Form A and Form C relays
The output of the channel can be directed from program control or manual
control. The output can be disabled as well.
The following table describes the actions associated with each position of the
analog override switch.
Table: Analog Override Switch

Switch Position Action
HAND Using the potentiometer, you can manually

adjust the voltage or current of the output.
Programs have no effect on the output
when the switch is in this position.
AUTO Programs control the output.
OFF The voltage or current is set to zero scale.

Programs have no effect on the output
when the switch is in this position.
The following table describes the actions associated with each position of the
digital override switch.
Table: Digital Override Switch

Switch Position Action
HAND The output relay is energized to an ON

state. Programs have no effect on the
output when the switch is in this position.
AUTO Programs control the output.
OFF The output relay is de-energized to an OFF

state. Programs have no effect on the
output when the switch is in this position.

139
7.5.2 Potentiometers
Each analog output channel contains a potentiometer that allows you to manually
adjust the voltage or current output by the channel. These potentiometers are
one-turn with a range of values from zero to full-scale.
Figure: Potentiometers
The potentiometers are used in conjunction with the override switches to

manually adjust the current or voltage output of the analog output channel.

140
7.6 Input Modules
7.6 Input Modules

Input modules support a single electrical type, such as digital or universal inputs.
The available input modules include the following:
• DI-16
• UI-16
• RTD-DI-16
7.6.1 DI-16 Central IO Module

The DI-16 Central IO module is a digital input, 16-channel I/O module. You can
use the DI-16 Central IO module for sensing of multiple dry digital inputs in
applications such as equipment status or alarm point monitoring.
The maximum counter frequency is 25 Hz on all sixteen inputs. This input type is
useful in metering applications.
The following input types are supported:
• Digital input
• Dry contact, Open Collector, or Open Drain
7.6.2 UI-16 Central IO Module

The UI-16 Central IO module is a 16-channel universal input I/O module with
status indicators for each of the inputs. You can use this module for any mix of
temperature, pressure, flow, status points, and similar inputs in a control system
with a 0-10 V input range and a 12-bit A/D conversion. You can also make
adjustments for various sensor types using the available pull-up resistors.
• Dry contact closing
• Voltage 0–10 V
• Current 0–20 mA
• Thermistor– 10k Type I (Continuum), 10k Type II (I/NET), 10k Type III
(Satchwell), 10k Linearized (Satchwell D?T), 10k Type IV (FD), and 10k
Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt)
• Thermistor– 1.8k (Xenta)
• Thermistor– 1k (Balco)
• Thermistor- 20k (Honeywell)
• Thermistor- 2.2k (Johnson Controls)
• Supervised

141
7.6 Input Modules
7.6.3 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

A Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) is a sensing element that uses the
change in the resistance of a metal, such as platinum or nickel, to measure
temperature ranges from -50C to 150C. Due to their accuracy and repeatability,
RTDs are used in scientific and industrial applications to measure temperature
for kilns, gas turbine exhaust, diesel engines, and other industrial processes as
well as for room temperature measurement.
The RTD-DI-16 Central IO module is a 16-channel I/O module with 1 return per 2
inputs. It supports the following input types:
• RTD Temperature including:
– Pt100
– Pt1000
– Ni1000
– LG-Ni1000
– JCI-Ni1000
• RTD Resistance including:
– 100 ohms
– 1,000 ohms
• Resistance including 0 to 15,000 ohms
• Digital
• Counter
The RTD connection type is either a 2-wire or 3-wire configuration with a 3-wire
RTD using 2 inputs. For more information, see section 7.9.2 “” on page 162.

142
7.7 DI-16 Central IO Module

The DI-16 Central IO module is a digital input, 16-channel I/O module. Each
channel has a dedicated two-color (red and green) status LED that provides local
monitoring of digital and counter input types.
You can configure the channel status LED to display either red or green for each
input state. The front panel contains both the I/O channel and module status
LEDs.
Figure: DI-16 Central IO module
7.7.1 Inputs
The inputs of the DI-16 Central IO module are designed to read two different
types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter

143
Figure: Internal configuration
Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings cause over current in the
protection component DZ.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure:
Figure: Digital input external connection
K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

144
Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.
Input channels 16
DC input supply power 1.6 W
Environment
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Terminal base TB-IO-W1
Terminals

145
All inputs
Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA
Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC
LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low
LED color Red or green, software selectable
Digital
Minimum pulse width 120 ms
Counter
Maximum frequency 25 Hz

146
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

The UI-16 Central IO module is a universal input, 16-channel I/O module. Each
channel has a dedicated status two-color LED that provides local monitoring of
digital, counter, and supervised input types. The front panel shows the module
status LED and the I/O channel status LEDs.
Figure: UI-16 Central IO Module
7.8.1 Universal inputs

The universal inputs of the UI-16 Central IO module are designed to read several
different types of inputs.
Input types:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive

147
Figure: Universal input internal configuration
Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings will cause over current in
the protection component DZ.
an address.
Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

148
Counter inputs
Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.
Figure: Series only external connection

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

149
Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a fault and the shorted wiring shows as
an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only supervised input
connection is shown in the following figure.
Figure: Parallel only external connection

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.
Figure: Series and parallel external connection

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

150
Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.
Figure: Voltage input external connection
VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.
Figure: Current input external connection
IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited to
40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.
Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

151
Figure: Temperature input external connection
RT is the monitored external thermistor.

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU
20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm
The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.
Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.
Figure: Resistive input external connection
RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

152
Input channels 16
Environment
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Universal inputs

153
A/D converter resolution 12 bits
Digital
Counter
Supervised
5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel
Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %
Voltage
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)
Resolution 2.7 mV
Impedance 100 kohm

154
Reliability check Yes
Current
Range 0 to 20 mA
Accuracy +/-(0.03 mA + 0.4 % of reading)
Resolution 5.6 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive
10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm
10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

Temperature
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Supported thermistors
Honeywell 20 kohm
Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm
Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm
Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm
Type IV (FD) 10 kohm
Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm
Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm
Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm
Xenta 1.8 kohm
Balco 1 kohm
Measurement accuracy
20 kohm, 10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-2.7 °F)

155
Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-3.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-5.4 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.8 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.3 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.5 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-2.0 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-3.6 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-2.7 °F)

156
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

The RTD-DI-16 module is an RTD temperature, RTD resistance, digital, counter,
or resistance input, 16-channel I/O module. Each channel has a dedicated two-
color (red and green) status LED.
You can configure the channel status LED to display either red or green for each
input state. The front panel contains both the I/O channel and module status
LEDs.
Figure: RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module
7.9.1 Inputs
The inputs of the RTD-DI-16 Central IO module are designed to read seven
different types of inputs:
• 2-wire RTD temperature
• 3-wire RTD temperature
• 2-wire RTD resistive
• 3-wire RTD resistive
• Digital
• Counter
• Resistive

157
Figure: Internal configuration
In a 2-wire configuration, the leads are connected to IN and RET or RET and
IN/3W. This provides up to 16 inputs for 2-wire configurations.
In a 3-wire configuration, the leads are connected to IN, RET, and IN/3W. This
provides up to 8 inputs for 3-wire configurations.
an address.
2-wire RTD temperature inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD temperature input is shown in the
following figure.
Figure: 2-wire temperature input external connection
RT is the monitored external RTD.

158
RW is the wiring resistance.

In the internal configuration of the RTD temperature input, IS is used according to
the following table.
RTD type IS
Pt100 1.5 mA
Pt1000 750 µA
Ni1000 750 µA
LG-Ni1000 750 µA
JCI-Ni1000 750 µA
The current source nominal duty cycle is 5 %. The current to the RTD is pulsed to
minimize self-heating.
When an input is used as a 2-wire RTD temperature input, you need to specify
the wiring resistance in the software.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.

following figure.

In the internal configuration of the RTD temperature input, IS is used according to
the following table.
RTD type IS
Pt100 1.5 mA
Pt1000 750 µA
Ni1000 750 µA

159
Continued
RTD type IS
LG-Ni1000 750 µA
JCI-Ni1000 750 µA
When an input is used as a 3-wire RTD temperature input, the Central IO module
automatically compensates for the wiring resistance using the third wire.
value.
2-wire RTD resistive inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD resistive input is shown in the following
figure.
Figure: 2-wire RTD resistive input external connection
RT is the monitored external resistance.

In the internal configuration of the RTD resistive input, IS is used according to the
following table.
RTD type IS
100 ohm 1.5 mA
1,000 ohm 750 µA
value.
The RTD resistive input type is used to measure the resistance of an RTD other
than the supported types. The resistance to temperature conversion must be

160
performed in a function block or script program in the automation server. The

resistance to temperature conversion must take into account the wiring
resistance.

figure.

In the internal configuration of the RTD resistive input, IS is used according to the
following table.
RTD type IS
100 ohm 1.5 mA
1,000 ohm 750 µA
When an input is used as a 3-wire RTD resistive input, the Central IO module
automatically compensates for the wiring resistance using the third wire.
value.
performed in a function block or script program in the automation server.
Digital inputs

161

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10.1 kohm
Counter inputs
A counter input utilizes the same hardware configuration as the digital input as
Resistive inputs

IS = 100 µA
Input channels 16
3-wire RTDs require 2 inputs

162
Environment
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Universal inputs

163
RTD temperature
Supported RTDs Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, LG-Ni1000, and JCI-Ni1000
Pt100
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Measurement accuracy +/-0.3 °C (+/-0.54 °F)
Resolution 0.03 °C (0.05°F)
Pt1000
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Resolution 0.03 °C (0.05 °F)
Ni1000
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
LG-Ni1000
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
JCI-Ni1000
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Measurement accuracy +/- 0.1 °C (+/- 0.18 °F)
RTD temperature wiring
Maximum wire resistance 20 ohm/wire (40 ohm total)
Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

The wire resistance and capacitance typically corresponds to a 200 m wire.
RTD resistive

164
100 ohm
Range 50 to 220 ohm

Including wiring resistance
Measurement accuracy +/-(0.08 + 2 x 10-4 x R) ohm

R = resistance in ohm
Resolution 0.01 ohm
1,000 ohm
Range 500 to 2,200 ohm

Measurement accuracy +/-(0.3 + 2 x 10-4 x R) ohm

Resolution 0.1 ohm
RTD resistive wiring
Digital
Counter
Resistive
Accuracy +/-(3 + 6 x 10-4 x R) ohm

Resolution 1 ohm

165
7.10 Output Modules
7.10 Output Modules

Output modules support a number of electrical types, such as digital, tristate, and
pulsed digital outputs. The available output modules include the following:
• DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H
• DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H
• AO-8 and AO-8-H
• AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.
7.10.1 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO

Modules
The DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO modules are digital output, Form A
relay, 12-channel I/O modules.
The supported output types include the following:
• Digital Form A
• Tristate
The Form-A relays in the DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H modules are designed for
direct load applications for up to 2 A loads. For more information, see section
7.11.2 “” on page 169.
7.10.2 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO

Modules
The DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO modules are digital output, Form C
The supported output types include the following:
• Digital Form C
• Tristate
The Form-C relays in the DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H modules are designed for
direct load applications for up to 3 A loads. For more information, see section
7.12.2 “” on page 173.
7.10.3 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

The AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO modules are analog output, 8-channel I/O
modules. Each channel contains both voltage and current outputs.
The following output types are supported:
• Voltage 0–10 VDC

166
7.10 Output Modules
Since the AO-8 and AO-8-H modules control 0-10 VDC outputs, the modules
support a wide range of devices, such as valves and actuators. You can use the
AO-8 and AO-8-H modules to drive 0-20 mA currents on any of its eight
channels. For more information, see section 7.13.2 “” on page 178.
7.10.4 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules

The AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO modules are analog output, 8-channel I/O
modules that contain only voltage outputs.
The supported output type is Voltage 0–10 VDC, so the AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H
modules support a wide range of devices, such as valves and actuators. For
more information, see section 7.14.2 “” on page 182.

167
7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules
7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO

Modules
The DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO modules are 12-channel, Form A
relay, digital output I/O modules.
override switches.
The front panel includes a dedicated two-color status LED that provides local
monitoring of the digital outputs. You can configure the LED to display either red
or green for each output state.
Figure: DO-FA-12-H Central IO module
7.11.1 Digital outputs

The Form A digital outputs of the DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO
modules are normally open contacts with one common terminal (C) and one
normally open terminal (NO). The terminals are isolated from signal ground.

168
Figure: Form A digital output internal configuration
an address.
Output channels 12
Environment
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS

169
Mechanical
Digital outputs
Contact rating 250 VAC/30 VDC, 2 A, Pilot Duty (Power Factor 0.35)
Switch type Form A Relay

Single Pole Single Throw
Normally Open
Isolation contact to system ground 3000 VAC
Cycle life (Resistive load) At least 100,000 cycles
LED polarity energized relay On
LED polarity non-energized relay Off

170
LED color Green

171
7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules
7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO

Modules
The DO-FC-8 and and DO-FC-8-H Central IO modules are digital output, Form C
override switches.
The front panel includes dedicated two-color (red and green) status LEDs for
local monitoring of digital outputs. You can configure these LEDs to display either
red or green for each output state.
Figure: DO-FC-8-H Central IO module

The Form C digital outputs of the DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO modules
are switching contacts with one common terminal (C), one normally open
terminal (NO), and one normally closed terminal (NC). The terminals are isolated
from signal ground.

172
Figure: Form C digital output internal configuration
an address.
Output channels 8
Environment
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS

173
Mechanical
Digital outputs
Switch type Form C Relay

Single Pole Double Throw
Normally Open or Normally Closed

174
LED color Green

175
7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

The AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO modules are analog output, 8-channel I/O
modules.
override switches.
The front panel shows the module status LED, override switches, and adjustable
potentiometers.
Figure: AO-8-H Central IO module
7.13.1 Analog outputs

The analog outputs of the AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO modules are designed to
be used for voltage or current outputs.
an address.

176
Voltage outputs
Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load
ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.
RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.

177
Current outputs
Figure: Current output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load
IOUT range is 0 to 20 mA.

RLOAD maximum is 650 ohm.
Output channels 8
Environment
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS

178
Mechanical
Analog outputs, AO
Voltage
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-100 mV
Resolution 42 mV
Minimum load resistance 5 kohm
Load range -1 to +2 mA
Terminals Voltage Output (VO), Return (RET)

179
Current
Range 0 to 20 mA
Accuracy +/-0.2 mA
Resolution 0.1 mA
Load range 0 to 650 ohm
Terminals Current Output (CO), Return (RET)

180
7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules
7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO

Modules
The AO-V-8 and and AO-V-8-H Central IO modules are analog output, 8-channel
I/O modules.
override switches.
The front panel shows the module status LED, override switches, and adjustable
potentiometers.
Figure: AO-V-8-H Central IO Module

The analog outputs of the AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO modules are
designed to be used for voltage outputs.

181

an address.
Output channels 8
Environment

182
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Analog outputs, AO
Voltage
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-100 mV
Resolution 42 mV

183

184
7.15 Mixed Modules
7.15 Mixed Modules

Mixed modules support a combination of electrical types, such as universal
inputs mixed with digital outputs. The available mixed modules include the
following:
• UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DOFC-4-H
• UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H
• UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H
override switches.
7.15.1 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central

IO Modules
The UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO modules combine 8 universal
inputs and 4 digital Form C relay outputs. You can use these modules when an
application requires only a few points of each type.
• Thermistor – 10k Type 1 (Continuum), 10k Type II (I/NET), 10k Type III
Type V (FD w/11k shunt)
• Thermistor – 1.8k (Xenta)
• Thermistor – 1k (Balco)
• Thermistor – 20k (Honeywell)
• Thermistor – 2.2k (Johnson Controls)
• Supervised
• Counter inputs
• Digital Form C
• Tristate
The Form-C relays in the UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H modules are
designed for direct load applications for up to 3 A loads. For more information,
see section 7.16.3 “” on page 193.
7.15.2 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO

Modules
The UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO modules are combination I/O
modules, consisting of 8 universal input channels and 4 analog output channels.

185
7.15 Mixed Modules
You can use these modules when an application requires only a few points of
each type.
• Supervised
• Counter inputs
7.15.3 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO

Modules
The UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO modules are combined input and
output I/O modules that support 8 universal input channels and 4 analog output
channels.
• Supervised
• Counter inputs
The supported output type is Voltage 0–10 VDC. For more information, see
section 7.18.3 “” on page 216.

186
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H

Central IO Modules
The UI-8/DO-FC-4 and and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO modules combine 8
universal inputs and 4 digital Form C relay outputs.
override switches.
The front panel includes a dedicated two-color (red and green) status LED for
local monitoring of digital inputs and outputs. You can configure the LED to
display either red or green for each input or output state.
Figure: UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Module

The universal inputs of the UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO
modules are designed to read several different types of inputs.
Input types:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive

187
an address.
Digital inputs

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

188
Counter inputs
Supervised inputs
the I/O.
• Series only
• Parallel only

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

189

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
following figure.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

190
Voltage inputs

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs

RSH = 47 ohm
Temperature inputs

191

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

Resistive inputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

192

The Form C digital outputs of the UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO
modules are switching contacts with one common terminal (C), one normally
open terminal (NO), and one normally closed terminal (NC). The terminals are
isolated from signal ground.
an address.
Input channels 8
Output channels 4
Environment

193
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Universal inputs
Digital

194
Counter
Supervised

Voltage
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Resolution 2.7 mV
Impedance 100 kohm
Current
Range 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 5.6 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive


Temperature
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

195
Honeywell 20 kohm
Xenta 1.8 kohm
Balco 1 kohm
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.8 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.3 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.5 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-2.0 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-3.6 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-2.7 °F)
Digital outputs

Normally Open or Normally Closed

196
LED color Green

197
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO

Modules
The UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO modules combine 8 universal inputs
and 4 analog outputs.
override switches.
local monitoring of contact, counter, and supervised input types. You can
configure the LED to display either red or green for each input or output state.
Figure: UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Module

The universal inputs of the UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO modules are
designed to read several different types of inputs.
Input types:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive

198
an address.
Digital inputs

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

199
Counter inputs
Supervised inputs
the I/O.
• Series only
• Parallel only

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

200

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
following figure.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

201
Voltage inputs

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs

RSH = 47 ohm
Temperature inputs

202

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

Resistive inputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

203

The analog outputs of the UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO modules are
designed to be used for voltage or current outputs.
an address.
Voltage outputs


204
Current outputs

Input channels 8
Output channels 4
Environment
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS

205
Mechanical
Universal inputs
Digital
Counter

206
Supervised

Voltage
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Resolution 2.7 mV
Impedance 100 kohm
Current
Range 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 5.6 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive


Temperature
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Honeywell 20 kohm

207
Xenta 1.8 kohm
Balco 1 kohm
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.8 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.3 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.5 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-2.0 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-3.6 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-2.7 °F)
Analog outputs, AO
Voltage
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-100 mV
Resolution 42 mV
Current
Range 0 to 20 mA
Accuracy +/-0.2 mA

208
Resolution 0.1 mA

209
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central

IO Modules
The UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4 Central IO modules combine 8 universal inputs
and 4 analog outputs.
override switches.
local monitoring of contact, counter, and supervised input types. You can
configure the LED to display either red or green for each input or output state.
Figure: UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Module

The universal inputs of the UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO modules
are designed to read several different types of inputs.
Input types:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive

210
an address.
Digital inputs

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

211
Counter inputs
Supervised inputs
the I/O.
• Series only
• Parallel only

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

212

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
following figure.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

213
Voltage inputs

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs

RSH = 47 ohm
Temperature inputs

214

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

Resistive inputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

215

The analog outputs of the UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO modules
are designed to be used for voltage outputs.

an address.
Input channels 8
Output channels 4
Environment

216
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Universal inputs
Digital

217
Counter
Supervised

Voltage
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Resolution 2.7 mV
Impedance 100 kohm
Current
Range 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 5.6 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive



218
Temperature
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Honeywell 20 kohm
Xenta 1.8 kohm
Balco 1 kohm
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.8 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.3 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.5 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-2.0 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-3.6 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-2.7 °F)
Analog outputs, AO
Voltage
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-100 mV
Resolution 42 mV

219

220
8 AS-B Servers
Topics
AS-B Servers
AS-B Server Communication Ports
AS-B Server Screw Terminals
Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points
Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points
AS-B Server LEDs
AS-B Server Onboard I/O
Universal Inputs/Outputs
Digital Inputs
Relay Outputs
Triac Outputs
AS-B Server Device Installation
Installing an AS-B Server on a DIN Rail
Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server
Removing a Terminal Block from an AS-B Server
Wiring a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server
Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus
Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels
Powering Up an AS-B Server
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

An AS-B server is a powerful automation server that features both onboard I/O
and built-in power supply. Like the other automation servers, the AS-B server is a
lowest tier EcoStruxure BMS server within the EcoStruxure BMS. The
automation server controls and supervises equipment, typically HVAC
equipment. The AS-B server uses its onboard I/O with connected field devices,
such as sensors and actuators, to do that.
The AS-B server is installed on DIN rails in cabinets.
Figure: AS-B server
8.1.1 AS-B Server Models

The AS-B server comes in eight models that offer two different sets of I/O point
count and I/O mix.
Model I/O Points
AS-B-24 24
AS-B-24H 24
AS-B-24-P 24
AS-B-24H-P 24
AS-B-36 36
AS-B-36H 36
AS-B-36-P 36
AS-B-36H-P 36

223
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers
AS-B servers with “H” in the product name are equipped with a display for output
override.
AS-B servers with “P” in the product name are hardware only. An AS-B software
package needs to be purchased separately. For more information, see the AS-B
Specification Sheet.
AS-B servers with 36 I/O points have the same small footprint as AS-B servers
with 24 I/O points.
8.1.2 AS-B Server Onboard I/O

The AS-B server offers a mix of I/O point types that match a wide variety of
HVAC applications. Most of the I/O points are universal inputs/outputs, which are
highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
For more information, see section 8.7 “AS-B Server Onboard I/O” on page 243.
8.1.3 Output Override Function

The output override function allows you to manually override outputs. This
function can be used for testing, commissioning, and maintenance of equipment.
8.1.4 Built-in Power Supply

The device has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC or 24
VDC input power. The main AC/DC input (L/+ and N/-) is galvanically isolated
from the electronics. This removes the risk of damage due to earth currents and
permits the input power to be wired without concern for polarity matching.
8.1.5 Memory
An AS-B server has two types of memory:
• 256 MB DDR2 SDRAM (for program execution)
• 4 GB eMMC memory (for storage)
If a power outage occurs, all important variables are automatically saved to the
eMMC memory before complete shutdown. When power returns, this data
retention function helps ensure that AS-B can continue to run with the correct set
of values.
8.1.6 Supported Building Standards

The AS-B server natively communicates with two of the most popular
communication protocols:
• BACnet: The AS-B server directly communicates to BACnet/IP and BACnet
MS/TP networks, which provides access to MP and RP controllers, b3

224
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers
BACnet devices, and BACnet devices. The AS-B server also supports
BACnet/SC applications as a BACnet/SC node or BACnet/SC router, which
allows the AS-B server to be in BACnet/SC networks and support
applications that connect BACnet/IP or MS/TP networks with BACnet/SC
networks.
• Modbus: The AS-B server natively integrates Modbus RS-485 master and
slave configurations, as well as IP client and server. This integration
provides access to devices that communicate on the Modbus protocol, such
as power meters, circuit breakers, and lighting controllers.
8.1.7 AS-B Server Communication Ports

AS-B has the following communication ports:
• 1 RS-485 port
• 1 USB host port
For more information, see section 8.2 “AS-B Server Communication Ports” on
page 230.
8.1.8 AS-B Server Screw Terminals

AS-B servers use pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and
remove from the device. The terminal blocks are delivered with the device.
For more information, see section 8.3 “AS-B Server Screw Terminals” on page
231.
8.1.9 AS-B Server LEDs

There are five LEDs on the front panel of the AS-B server.
For more information, see section 8.6 “AS-B Server LEDs” on page 241.
8.1.10 Reset Functions

WorkStation.
page 277.

225
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

The AS-B servers are designed for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
For more information, see section 8.12 “AS-B Server Device Installation” on page
260.
8.1.12 Wiring
8.1.13 AS-B Server Software

Before you engineer an AS-B server, install the AS-B server software on the
server using Device Administrator. The software is not pre-loaded on the AS-B
servers.
For more information, see the Installing AS-P or AS-B Software topic on
WebHelp.
8.1.14 Server Replacement Using Restore

Backup and Restore helps assure that automation server data can be restored to
a replacement automation server in the event of detected failure, or to the same
automation server in the event of data loss. As a precaution, you back up your
automation servers regularly so that you can use the most current backup to
restore the automation server data to a replacement automation server. You also
configure the new automation server to match the name and the network settings
of the replaced automation server so the system can identify this automation
server when online.
For more information, see the Automation Server Replacement Using Restore
topic on WebHelp.
AC input
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum current 0.5 A rms

226
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers
Recommended transformer rating ≥15 VA
DC input
Environment
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Dimensions 198 W x 110 H x 64 D mm (7.8 W x 4.3 H x 2.5 D in.)
Weight, including terminal blocks 0.504 kg (1.111 lb)a

a) The weight includes the display and keys, which are 0.022 kg (0.049 lb).
Weight, excluding terminal blocks 0.420 kg (0.926 lb)a

a) The weight includes the display and keys, which are 0.022 kg (0.049 lb).
Real-time clock
Accuracy in runtime mode NTP server
Accuracy in backup mode, at 25 °C (77 °F) +/-52 seconds per month
Backup time, at 25 °C (77 °F) 10 days

227
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers
Communication ports

RS-485 2-wire port, bias 5.0 VDC
Communications
BACnet BACnet/IP and MS/TP, port configurable, default 47808

BACnet/SC, port configurable, no default port
BTL B-BC (BACnet Building Controller)a
Modbus Modbus TCP, client and server

Serial, RS-485, master or slave
TCP Binary, port fixed, 4444
HTTP Non-binary, port configurable, default 80
HTTPS Encrypted supporting TLS 1.3, 1.2, 1.1a, and 1.0a, port configurable default 443
a) Disabled by default.
SMTP Email sending, port configurable, default 25
SNMP version 3
Network supervision using poll and trap
Application alarm distribution using trap
CPU
Frequency 333 MHz
Type SPEAr320S, ARM926 core
DDR2 SDRAM 256 MB
eMMC memory 4 GB
Memory backup Yes, battery-free, no maintenance

The AS-B servers internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is
shown in the following figure.

228
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers
Figure: AS-B server internal configuration
The earth ground terminal ( ) of the built-in power supply is connected to signal
ground, which is the same as the negative output from the power supply. The
purpose of this connection is to comply with EMC directives.

229
8 AS-B Servers
8.2 AS-B Server Communication Ports
8.2 AS-B Server Communication Ports

AS-B has the following communication ports:
• 1 RS-485 port
• 1 USB host port
Table: AS-B Server Communication Ports

Communication port Connection
RS-485 Modbus, BACnet
USB host Advanced Display (AD), Zigbee Adapter
USB device Device Administrator
The Ethernet communication is performed over a 10/100BaseTX, 10 or 100

Mbit/s, twisted pair network. The AS-B servers have two Ethernet ports with RJ45
connectors.
The two Ethernet ports can be configured in three different modes: switching
enabled, second port disabled, or dual IP networks. One port should be
connected to the site network. When switching between the two ports is enabled,
the other port can be used to connect computers running WorkStation or
WebStation, Modbus TCP units, or BACnet/IP devices such as MP controllers,
but not another EcoStruxure BMS server. To limit access to the system, you can
disconnect the second port. When the two ports are configured in dual IP mode,
you can connect a separate network of IP devices to the second port. The
automation server has the option to act as a DHCP server on this network. You
can lock the DHCP network and only allow current DHCP clients to communicate
with the automation server.
The USB host port can be used for connecting devices such as the Advanced
Display (AD) and Zigbee Adapter. For more information, see section 29.6
“Connecting AD v3 to an Automation Server and a 24 VDC Power Supply” on
page 1091. For more information, see section 26.1.1 “” on page 1026.
The USB device port is intended for program download from a PC by means of
Device Administrator. The port is connected to a PC or a downstream port of a
hub.

230
8 AS-B Servers
8.3 AS-B Server Screw Terminals
8.3 AS-B Server Screw Terminals

AS-B servers use pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and
remove from the device. The terminal blocks are delivered with the device.
Spare terminal blocks can be ordered using the part number
SXWASBCON10001.
The wiring recommendations are provided separately. For more information, see
section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
8.3.1 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24

I/O Points
AS-B servers with 24 I/O points use nine pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed
terminal block.
For more information, see section 8.4 “Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24
I/O Points” on page 232.
8.3.2 Screw Terminals for AS-B servers with 36

I/O Points
terminal block.
For more information, see section 8.5 “Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36
I/O Points” on page 236.

231
8 AS-B Servers
8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points
8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with

24 I/O Points
terminal block.
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, AS-B server with 24 I/O points
The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• One 2-position fixed terminal block for the two return (RET) terminals 4 and 5
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for RS-485 communication
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four digital inputs
• One 8-position pluggable terminal block for the four relay outputs
• Four 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 12 universal inputs/outputs
of type Ua
Table: Screw Terminals, AS-B Server with 24 I/O Points

Power input

232
8 AS-B Servers
Continued
1 L/+ Line (L) lead when operating

the device from 24 VAC,
50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Positive (+) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 10 W
2 N/– Neutral (N) lead when

operating the device from 24
VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Negative (–) lead when
24-30 VDC, 10 W
3 Earth ground
Return terminals

terminal 3 (earth ground)

RS-485
6 Bias + 5.0 VDC, RS-485 bias

supply, current limited 40
mA

Universal inputs/outputs
10 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub


Ub

Ub


Ub
Digital inputs

233
8 AS-B Servers
Continued
16 DI1 Digital input


Relay outputs
22 DO1 Relay output, type Form A
Universal inputs/outputs,
type Ua

31 Ua1 Universal input/output, type

Ua


Ua


Ua


Ua

234
8 AS-B Servers
Continued


Ua


Ua


Ua


Ua


Ua


Ua


Ua


Ua

connectors to the AS-B server and are easily inserted/removed without disrupting
problems.

235
8 AS-B Servers
8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with

36 I/O Points
terminal block.
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, AS-B server with 36 I/O points

• One 2-position fixed terminal block for the two return (RET) terminals 4 and 5
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for the RS-485 communication
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the six universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four triac outputs
of type Ua
One of the terminal blocks also accomodates two terminals for universal
inputs/outputs of type Ub.
Table: Screw Terminals, AS-B Server with 36 I/O Points

Power input

236
8 AS-B Servers
Continued
1 L/+ Line (L) lead when operating

the device from 24 VAC,
50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Positive (+) lead when
24-30 VDC, 10 W
2 N/– Neutral (N) lead when

operating the device from 24
VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
24-30 VDC, 10 W
3 Earth ground
Return terminals


RS-485
6 Bias + 5.0 VDC, RS-485 bias

supply, current limited 40
mA

type Ub

Ub

Ub

Ub

Ub

Ub

Ub

237
8 AS-B Servers
Continued
Triac outputs
16 DO5 Triac output
17 COM1 Common connection for

DO5 and DO6
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.
18 DO6 Triac output
19 DO7 Triac output

DO7 and DO8
ground for low-side
switching.
21 DO8 Triac output
Relay outputs
type Ub

Ub

Ub
type Ua

Ua

238
8 AS-B Servers
Continued

Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua


Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua


Ua

Ua

Ua

Ua

239
8 AS-B Servers
Continued

Ua

connectors to the AS-B server and are easily inserted/removed without disrupting
problems.

240
8 AS-B Servers
8.6 AS-B Server LEDs

There are five LEDs on the front panel of the AS-B server.
Figure: AS-B server LEDs
Table: The Five LEDs

Function Color
Status (AS-B) Green/Red
RS-485 Tx Yellow
RS-485 Rx Green
Ethernet 1 Green/Yellow
NOTE: The AS-B server Ethernet and Status indicators comprise two LEDs
(green/yellow and green/red respectively) in one structure. Normally, when
one LED is lit, the other is not lit and vice versa, that is, the indicator will
show one color at a time.
The LEDs indicate status of the AS-B server and the ongoing communication.
8.6.1 Status LED



attention

241
8 AS-B Servers
Continued
8.6.2 RS-485 LEDs

The RS-485 LEDs indicate the condition of the RS-485 communication.
Table: RS-485 LED Patterns

8.6.3 Ethernet LEDs

communication.


242
8 AS-B Servers
8.7 AS-B Server Onboard I/O
8.7 AS-B Server Onboard I/O

The AS-B server offers a mix of I/O point types that match a wide variety of
HVAC applications. Most of the I/O points are universal inputs/outputs, which are
AS-B servers with 36 I/O points have the following types:
• 20 Universal inputs/outputs, Ua type
• 8 Universal inputs/outputs, Ub type
• 4 Triac outputs
• 4 Relay outputs
AS-B servers with 36 I/O points have the following types:
• 20 Universal inputs/outputs, Ua type
• 8 Universal inputs/outputs, Ub type
• 4 Triac outputs
• 4 Relay outputs
8.7.1 Universal Inputs/Outputs

The universal inputs/outputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow,
status points, and similar point types in a building control system.
8.7.2 Digital Inputs

The digital inputs can be used for sensing of multiple dry contact digital inputs in
applications, such as equipment status monitoring or alarm point monitoring.
8.7.3 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs support digital Form A point types. The Form A relays are
designed for direct load applications.
8.7.4 Triac Outputs

The triac outputs can be used in many applications to switch 24 VAC on or off for
external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. Triacs are silent and do
not suffer from relay contact wear.

243
8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

As counter inputs, the universal inputs/outputs are commonly used in energy
metering applications. As RTD inputs, they are ideal for temperature points in a
building control system. As supervised inputs, they are used for security
applications where it is critical to know whether or not a wire has been cut or
shorted. These events provide a separate indication of alarms and events in the
system.
The universal inputs/outputs are capable of supporting analog outputs of type
voltage outputs. Therefore, the universal inputs/outputs support a wide range of
devices, such as actuators.
The AS-B server's universal inputs/outputs consist of two types: Ua and Ub. The
difference between the two types of universal inputs/outputs is that the Ub type
supports current inputs.
8.8.1 Inputs
The universal inputs/outputs can be configured to read several different types of
inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current (Ub only)
• Temperature
• Resistive
• 2-Wire RTD temperature
• 2-Wire RTD resistive
Digital inputs

244
8 AS-B Servers

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Counter inputs
Supervised inputs
the I/O.
• Series only
• Parallel only

245
8 AS-B Servers
RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
following figure.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V

246
8 AS-B Servers
RPU = 10 kohm
Voltage inputs

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs

RSH = 47 ohm
order to help protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited
to 40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
Temperature inputs

247
8 AS-B Servers

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

Resistive inputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

248
8 AS-B Servers

following figure.

VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
value.

figure.

VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm

249
8 AS-B Servers
value.
performed in a function block or script program in the device. The resistance to
temperature conversion must take into accoundtthe wiring resistance.
8.8.2 Outputs
Voltage outputs
The universal inputs/outputs can be configured as voltage outputs.

Channels, AS-B servers with 24 I/O points 12 Ua, Ua1 to Ua12
4 Ub, Ub1 to Ub4
Channels, AS-B servers with 36 I/O points 20 Ua, Ua1 to Ua20,

8 Ub, Ub1 to Ub8
Digital inputs
Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

250
8 AS-B Servers
Counter inputs
mA
Supervised inputs

Voltage inputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Resolution 0.5 mV
Impedance 100 kohm
Current inputs
Range 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 1 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive inputs


Temperature inputs (thermistors)
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Honeywell 20 kohm

251
8 AS-B Servers
Xenta 1.8 kohm
Balco 1 kohm
20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)
RTD temperature
Supported RTDs Pt1000, Ni1000, LG-Ni1000, and JCI-Ni1000
Pt1000
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Measurement accuracy -50 to +70 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-58 to +158 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
70 to 150 °C: +/-0.7 °C (158 to 302 °F: +/-1.3 °F)
Ni1000
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
LG-Ni1000
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
JCI-Ni1000
Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

252
8 AS-B Servers
Measurement accuracy +/- 0.5 °C (+/- 0.9 °F)

RTD resistive
1,000 ohm

Measurement accuracy +/-(0.2 + 1.5 x 10-3 x R) ohm

Resolution 0.1 ohm
RTD resistive wiring
Voltage outputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-60 mV
Resolution 10 mV

253
8 AS-B Servers
8.9 Digital Inputs
8.9 Digital Inputs

As counter inputs, digital inputs are commonly used in energy metering
applications.
8.9.1 Inputs
The DI digital inputs are designed to read two different types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
Figure: Digital input internal configuration
Digital inputs

VS = 24 V

254
8 AS-B Servers
8.9 Digital Inputs
RPU = 10 kohm
Counter inputs
Channels, AS-B servers with 24 I/O points 4, DI1 to DI4
Channels, AS-B servers with 36 I/O points 0
mA
Digital inputs
mA
Counter inputs
mA

255
8 AS-B Servers
8.10 Relay Outputs
8.10 Relay Outputs

The outputs can be configured as one of the following types:
• Digital output
• Digital pulsed output
• Tristate output
• Tristate pulsed output
Consider the expected number of operation cycles specified for the relay output
(cycle life rating) when configuring the period for a pulse width modulated (PWM)
output point.
8.10.1 Outputs
The DO relay outputs are Form A digital outputs, which means the outputs are
normally open contacts with one common terminal (C) and one normally open
terminal (NO). The terminals are isolated from other circuits of the device and
from signal ground.
Channels, AS-B servers with 24 I/O points 4, DO1 to DO4
Contact rating 250 VAC/30 VDC, 2 A, Pilot Duty (C300)

Normally Open

256
8 AS-B Servers
8.10 Relay Outputs

257
8 AS-B Servers
8.11 Triac Outputs
8.11 Triac Outputs

• Digital output
• Tristate output
8.11.1 Outputs
The DO triac outputs are designed to switch 24 VAC. The common terminals
COM1 and COM2 can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground. DO5 and DO6
share common terminal COM1. DO7 and DO8 share common terminal COM2.
The terminals are opto-isolated from the controller.
Figure: Triac output internal configuration
RV1 and RV2 are varistors (95 V, 2 J) for protection of the triac.
R1 = 47 ohm
C1 = 22 nF
Channels, AS-B servers with 24 I/O points 0
Output rating Max. 0.8 A

258
8 AS-B Servers
8.11 Triac Outputs
Voltage 24 VAC +/-20 %
Commons COM1 for DO5 and DO6

COM2 for DO7 and DO8
The common terminals COM1 and COM2 can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground.
Common voltage, high side output 24 VAC
Common voltage, low side output 0 VAC (ground)

259
8 AS-B Servers
8.12 AS-B Server Device Installation

The AS-B servers are designed for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing an automation
server along with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most
efficient ventilation is achieved with the wall-mounted DIN rail oriented
horizontally and with adequate space provided between the automation server
rail and adjacent rails or other panel-mounted devices.
The AS-B server must be installed on a horizontal DIN rail (going from left to
right), with the device label text in the upright position reading left to right.
Figure: AS-B server installed on a horizontal DIN rail
NOTICE
Install the device on a horizontal DIN rail. This position provides sufficient
cooling air flow through the device. Installation on a vertical DIN rail can reduce
the life span of the device.
Install the AS-B servers horizontally in the cabinet with ample space between the
DIN rails and devices for sufficient cooling air flow through the devices.

260
8 AS-B Servers
Figure: AS-B servers installed on horizontal DIN rails in a cabinet
a screwdriver.
The terminal blocks are removable, which means that they can be wired before
the AS-B server is supplied. Replacing am AS-B server is done in seconds
because no terminal wiring is affected. The terminal blocks are delivered with the
device. Use only terminal blocks delivered with the device or ordered from
Schneider Electric. Spare terminal blocks can be ordered from Schneider Electric
using the part number SXWASBCON10001.
You can use the AS-B installer kit (part number SXWASBINS10001) to wire the
terminal blocks before the AS-B server is supplied. The kit consists of an AS-B
server enclosure without electronics inside.
Install only a wired terminal block that matches the labeling of the terminals on
the device. A mismatch can cause electric shock and damage the electronics in
the device.

261
8 AS-B Servers
WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR DEVICE ELECTRONICS DAMAGE
the device.
equipment damage.
If the labels on the wires do not indicate the intended terminals, consult the
control panel documentation to determine the intended terminals.

262
8 AS-B Servers
8.13 Installing an AS-B Server on a DIN Rail
8.13 Installing an AS-B Server on a DIN Rail

You install an AS-B server on a horizontal DIN rail to ensure that the device is
securely fastened and to allow sufficient cooling air flow through the device.
260.
To install an AS-B server on a DIN rail

1. Ensure that the DIN rail is horizontal.
NOTICE
Install the device on a horizontal DIN rail. This position provides sufficient
cooling air flow through the device. Installation on a vertical DIN rail can
reduce the life span of the device.
2. Pull down the DIN rail clips.
3. Hook the device onto the top of the DIN rail.

4. Push the device fully onto the DIN rail and release the DIN rail clips.

263
8 AS-B Servers
8.14 Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server
8.14 Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B

Server
You install the terminal blocks on an AS-B server to add or enable wiring for the
device.
260.
WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR DEVICE ELECTRONICS DAMAGE
the device.
equipment damage.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use only terminal blocks delivered with the device or ordered from Schneider
Electric using the part number SXWASBCON10001.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not push the terminal block straight down into the connector header as this
may crack the header.
To install a terminal block on an AS-B server

1. Ensure that you have the correct terminal blocks.
2. If the terminal block is wired, ensure that the labels on the wires match the
labeling of the terminals on the device.
3. Insert the terminal block at an angle against the back wall of the connector
header.
4. Press and roll the terminal block into the connector header.

264
8 AS-B Servers
8.14 Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server
5. Continue until you hear a click sound, which indicates that the terminal block
is fully engaged with the connector header.

265
8 AS-B Servers
8.15 Removing a Terminal Block from an AS-B Server
8.15 Removing a Terminal Block from an AS-

B Server
You remove a terminal block from an AS-B server to replace the device.
260.
DANGER
De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs before
removing the terminal block. More than one disconnect switch may be required
to de-energize the equipment before servicing.
To remove a terminal block from an AS-B server

1. Insert a small screwdriver in the slot between the terminal block and the
connector header.
2. Gently pry the terminal block at an angle away from the connector header.
3. Remove the terminal block from the connector header.

266
8 AS-B Servers
8.16 Wiring a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server
8.16 Wiring a Terminal Block on an AS-B

Server
You wire the terminal blocks installed on an AS-B server to connect I/O devices,
RS-485 network devices, and power.
260.
DANGER
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
NOTE: You can use the AS-B installer kit (part number SXWASBINS10001)
to wire the terminal blocks before the AS-B server is supplied. The kit
consists of an AS-B server enclosure without electronics inside.
To wire a terminal block on an AS-B server

1. Disconnect the mains supply and other high voltage equipment.
2. Ensure that the correct terminal block is used and that it is properly installed
on the AS-B server. For more information, see section 8.14 “Installing a
Terminal Block on an AS-B Server” on page 264.
wire.
6. Tigthen the screws using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the

267
8 AS-B Servers

You print an I/O wiring list for the I/O bus that describes which I/O points are
associated with each Central IO module. You use the printed copy of this list to
help wire the I/O bus network.
NOTE: If a Module ID is Null, you cannot print the wiring list. If a channel is
Null, the I/O point labels do not display in the wiring list.
To print a wiring list for the I/O bus

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, click the IO Bus on an
automation server.
2. On the Actions menu, click Print IO wiring list.
3. In the Print IO Wiring List dialog box, click the Printer icon .
4. To print a wiring list for a single Central IO module, right-click the selected
Central IO module.
5. Click Print IO wiring list.
6. Click the Printer icon .

Observe that the complete path to the Central IO module is displayed on the title
bar for the I/O wiring list.

268
8 AS-B Servers

You print labels to identify I/O channels on the placard of a Central IO module
much the same way you label circuits on an electrical panel. You accept the
default names for the I/O point labels or customize the I/O point names for your
own application.
NOTE: If a Module ID is Null, you cannot print the label. If a channel is Null,
the I/O point labels do not display in the Print IO Module Labels dialog box.
To print a label to identify I/O channels

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the IO Bus on an
automation server.
2. In the List View, right-click the Central IO module, onboard IO module, the
entire IO Bus folder, or multiple Central IO modules.
3. Click Print IO module labels.
4. In the Print IO Module Labels dialog box, select Blank Label Text to print
labels with only the channel number with no additional label text.
NOTE: The label text prints in red if the text is too long to fit on the
label.
5. In the Paper Type box, select a paper type.
6. Click Print to print the Central IO module label or Save to save any changes
to the point’s label text property.
7. For an AS-B server onboard Central IO module, cut along the dotted lines
and fold the label along the fold edge to fit on the placard.
The label is properly sized to fit on the placard of the Central IO module.

269
8 AS-B Servers
8.19 Powering Up an AS-B Server
8.19 Powering Up an AS-B Server

You perform the following steps to power up an AS-B server.
260.
To power up an AS-B server

2. Ensure that 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24-30 VDC power is supplied to terminal
numbers 1 to 2.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect 230 VAC or 110 VAC to any terminal.
3. Ensure that the ground cable is connected to terminal number 3.

light after about a minute.

270
9 SpaceLogic Device General
Information
Topics
Status LEDs
Automation Server Reset Functions
Resetting a Automation Server to DFU Mode
9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.1 Status LEDs
9.1 Status LEDs

The Status LED on the front of the automation devices changes color and flashes
to indicate the status of the device.
Figure: . Location of the Status LED on different SpaceLogic device models
The remaining LEDs on the front differ in number and meaning for the different
devices and are explained in the sections about the specific device.
9.1.1 Automation Server Status LED



attention

273
9.1 Status LEDs
9.1.2 Central IO Module Status LED

The Central IO module Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: Central IO Module Status LED Patterns

Green, constant Online and configured (at least one

channel/point downloaded successfully)
Green, flashing (200 ms ON, 200 ms OFF) Online and unconfigured (physical module
that either matches/mismatches logical
module)
Green, slow flashing (approximately every Low power mode (saves energy)
3 s)
Red, constant Error requiring attention (for example, the

input voltage is too low)
Red, flashing (100 ms ON, 100 ms OFF) Offline with respect to the automation
server (both configured and unconfigured
modules)
Red/Green, flashing (green 100 ms, red Bootloader mode (downloading data)
100 ms)
9.1.3 PS-24V Power Supply Status LED

The PS-24V power supply Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: Power Supply Status LED Patterns

Green, constant Output voltage and load OK
Red/green, flashing Output slightly overloaded
Red, constant Output overloaded
9.1.4 MP Controller Status LED

The MP controller Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

274
9.1 Status LEDs
Table: MP Controller Status LED Patterns


MP controller firmware application running


attention
Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) MP controller I/O board receiving software

upgrade, wait
Amber, constant MP controller firmware boot applet running
Amber, flash Device restarting, wait

MP controller firmware boot applet started
9.1.5 IP-IO Module Status LED

The IP-IO module Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: IP-IO Module Status LED Patterns


IP-IO module firmware application running


attention
Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) IP-IO module I/O board receiving software
upgrade, wait
Amber, constant IP-IO module firmware boot applet running

IP-IO module firmware boot applet started
9.1.6 RP Controller Status LED

The RP controller Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

275
9.1 Status LEDs
Table: RP Controller Status LED Patterns


RP controller firmware application running
No Bluetooth activity
Blue, constant Normal operation, status OK

Bluetooth connection is active
Green 3 seconds, blue 1 second Normal operation, status OK

Bluetooth advertising is active


attention
Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) RP I/O board receiving software upgrade,

wait
Amber, constant RP controller firmware boot applet running

RP controller firmware boot applet started
White, transient Device starting, wait
White, constant RP controller firmware not running,

attention required (contact product support)

276
9.2 Automation Server Reset Functions

WorkStation.
Figure: . Location of reset button and USB device port on different server models
You can use a straigthened segment of a paper clip or a similar tool to press the
reset button.
Table: Automation Server Reset Functions

Type Triggered by Description Variable values Configuration, IP settings
Historic
database
Warm start Command from Stops the Affected Retained Retained

WorkStation automation according to the
server configured retain
application and levels for the
then restarts the variables
application.
Cold start Command from Stops the Affected Retained Retained

WorkStation automation according to the
then restarts the variables
application.

277
Continued
Type Triggered by Description Variable values Configuration, IP settings
Historic
database
Reset Short push on Stops the Affected Retained Retained

Reset button automation according to the
Power return
the operating variables
system and then
restarts the
operating system
and the
application.
Reset to DFU 3 pushes on Puts the Not applicable Not retained Not retained
mode Reset button automation
within 2 seconds server into DFU
mode, which
enables Device
Administrator to
communicate
with the server.
Parameters and variables that are used to define the system or contain important
data in the automation server can be retained in a permanent memory. These
parameters and variables are automatically saved in the event of power failure,
or request for restart and are reloaded after startup.
You can define what kind of events that retention for the parameters and
variables should apply.
9.2.1 Retain Levels for Variables

Variables have a configurable retain level, which controls if the value of the
variable is retained after a restart of the automation server. There are three retain
levels:
• No
• Warm start
• Cold start
The following table lists what is retained after a warm start, cold start, or reset
based on the configured retain level.

278
Table: Retained Variable Values Depending on Reset Type and Retain Level
Reset type Retain level: Retain level: Retain level:
No Warm start Cold start
Warm start Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last
value configured by value configured by
Values configured a user. a user.
by a user or
application are lost. Values configured Values configured
by an application are by an application are
retained. retained.
Cold start Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
lost. retained.
Reset Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last

Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
retained. retained.
a) Default value is the value the variable gets when it is created.
For more information, see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.
9.2.2 Configuration and Historic Database

A number of parameters describe the current configuration. The historic
database contains information collected from different sources. Parameters and
historic database are retained at both Warm and Cold start.
9.2.3 DFU Mode

The Device Firmware Upgrade mode can be used if the automation server does
not communicate in its normal operating mode. In the DFU mode, with a PC
connected to the USB device port on the automation server, the Device
Administrator can be used to update the firmware. For more information, see
section 9.3 “Resetting a Automation Server to DFU Mode” on page 280.

279
9.3 Resetting a Automation Server to DFU Mode
9.3 Resetting a Automation Server to DFU

Mode
If the automation server firmware is damaged, the automation server can be put
in DFU (Device Firmware Upgrade) mode to be able to communicate on the USB
device port.
After the reset operation and the initial boot process, the upgrade process can be
started, using the USB device port. It is also possible to retrieve debug
information from the device.
page 277.
To reset a Automation Server to DFU mode

1. Start the Device Administrator. For more information, see the Connecting to
an Automation Server Using the USB Device Port topic on WebHelp.
2. On the automation server, press the Reset button 3 times within 2 seconds.
3. Use a USB cable to connect the USB device port on the automation server
with a USB port on the PC.
4. Ensure that the automation server is displayed in the list and DFU mode is
displayed in the Device status column.
The automation server is now ready for the upgrade procedure. For more
information, see the Uploading and Upgrading a SmartX Server topic on
WebHelp.
Alternatively, the Device Administrator can now be used to fetch saved debug
data. For more information, see the Getting Automation Server Debug
Information topic on WebHelp.

280
10 MP-C Controllers
Topics
MP-C Controllers
MP-C Models
MP-C Onboard I/O
MP-C Built-in Power Supply
MP-C Screw Terminals
MP-C-15A Screw Terminals
MP-C-18B Screw Terminals
MP-C Device Installation
Installing MP-C on a DIN Rail
Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface
Installing MP-C Display
Installing a Terminal Block on MP-C
Removing a Terminal Block from MP-C
Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C
Powering Up MP-C
Relay Outputs
High Power Relay Outputs
10 Triac Outputs
10 MP-C Controllers
10.1 MP-C Controllers

The MP-C controller is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller. The MP-C models offer a flexible mix of I/O point types that suits a
wide range of HVAC applications. MP-C is a native SpaceLogic device, which
can either be used as a standalone BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an
EcoStruxure BMS with a AS-P or AS-B server, or an Enterprise Server, as the
parent server.
MP-C allows for flexible control solutions due to the dual Ethernet ports, the
interface to SpaceLogic Sensors, and the versatile mix of universal
inputs/outputs, triac outputs, relay outputs, and high power relay outputs.
When MP-Cs are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, you can take full advantage of the
existing EcoStruxure Building Operation engineering tools.
The MP-C can be installed on a DIN rail or other flat surface inside a cabinet.
All MP-C models can be equipped with MP-C Display, which is an optional add-
on module for output override. The MP-C Display can also be used to view and
locally configure inputs and outputs.
Figure: MP-C
10.1.1 MP-C Models

The MP-C comes in five models with different I/O point count and different I/O
point mix.
For more information, see section 10.2 “MP-C Models” on page 290.

283
10 MP-C Controllers
10.1.2 MP-C Onboard I/O

The MP-C models offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match a wide
variety of applications. Most of the I/O points are universal inputs/outputs, which
are highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
For more information, see section 10.3 “MP-C Onboard I/O” on page 291.
10.1.3 Output Override Function (Optional)

10.1.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply

The MP-C has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC at
50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC input power.
For more information, see section 10.4 “MP-C Built-in Power Supply” on page
293.
10.1.5 BACnet/IP Device Memory

BACnet/IP devices have three types of memory:
• Flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application software, and
configuration storage
• RAM: for runtime operation
• FRAM non-volatile memory: for data retention in the case of power outage
For more information, see section 16.5 “BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory” on
page 574.
10.1.6 BACnet/IP Controller Supported Building

Standards
One of the cornerstones of the EcoStruxure BMS is support for open standards.
As a result, the BACnet/IP controller complies with the BACnet open standard,
one of the most popular standards for buildings.
For more information, see section 16.6 “BACnet/IP controller Supported Building
Standards” on page 575.
10.1.7 MP Controller Communication Ports

The MP controller contains a combination of Ethernet, USB, and SpaceLogic
Sensor communication ports.

284
10 MP-C Controllers
For more information, see section 12.3 “MP Controller Communication Ports” on
page 411.
10.1.8 BACnet/IP Controller Sensor Bus

The BACnet/IP controller provides a sensor bus, which allows SpaceLogic
Sensors to be connected to the controller.
For more information, see section 12.4 “MP Controller Sensor Bus” on page 412.
10.1.9 MP-C Screw Terminals

The MP-C is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The MP-C
uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and remove from the
device.
For more information, see section 10.5 “MP-C Screw Terminals” on page 294.
10.1.10 MP Controller LEDs

There are five LEDs on the front panel of the MP controller.
For more information, see section 12.6 “MP Controller LEDs” on page 419.
10.1.11 MP Controller Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the MP controllers in different ways depending on how
long you press the reset button. The resets and restarts can affect the retention
of values after restart based on the retain levels configured for the variables.
For more information, see section 12.7 “MP Controller Reset Modes” on page
421.
10.1.12 MP-C Device Installation

For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.
10.1.13 Wiring

285
10 MP-C Controllers
10.1.14 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management

Using WorkStation, you can update the firmware of multiple BACnet/IP devices
and their attached SpaceLogic Sensor devices at the same time with minimum
downtime. In particular, the universal upgrade package simplifies the update
process and requires minimal user involvement and coordination.
TIP: SpaceLogic Sensor devices are supported by the BACnet/IP controllers
- MP and RP controllers.
For more information, see section 18.17 “BACnet/IP Device Firmware
Management” on page 882.
AC input
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption (MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B) 22 VA
Maximum power consumption (MP-C-24A) 28 VA
Maximum power consumption (MP-C-36A) 33 VA
Power input protection MOV suppression and internal fuse
DC input
Maximum power consumption (MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B) 12 W
Maximum power consumption (MP-C-24A) 15 W
Maximum power consumption (MP-C-36A) 18 W
Environment
Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) at normal operationa

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) for rooftop applications, horizontal installation onlya
a) MP-C Display has an operating temperature range of -30 to +60 °C (-22 to +140 °F).

286
10 MP-C Controllers
Material
Plastic flame rating UL94-5V
Mechanical
Dimensions (MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B) 153 W x 110 H x 64 D mm (6.0 W x 4.3 H x 2.5 D in.)
Dimensions (MP-C-24A, -36A) 234 W x 110 H x 64 D mm (9.2 W x 4.3 H x 2.5 D in.)
Weight, MP-C-15A
Including terminal blocks 0.358 kg (0.789 lb)
Weight, MP-C-18A
Weight, MP-C-18B

287
10 MP-C Controllers
Weight, MP-C-24A
Weight, MP-C-36A
Installation DIN rail or other flat surface inside a cabinet
Terminal blocks Removable
Real-time clock
Accuracy, at 25 °C (77 °F) +/-1 minute per month
Backup time, at 25 °C (77 °F) 7 days minimum
Communication ports

Sensor bus 24 VDC, 2 W, RS-485 (RJ45)
Sensor bus protection Transient voltage suppressors on communication and power signals
Communications
BACnet BACnet/IP, port configurable, default 47808

BTL B-AAC (BACnet Advanced Application Controller)a
CPU
Frequency 500 MHz
Type ARM Cortex-A7 dual-core
DDR3 SDRAM 128 MB
NOR flash memory 32 MB
Memory backup 128 kB, FRAM, non-volatile
MP-C Display (Optional)
Removable No
Display size 36 W x 17 H mm (1.4 W x 0.7 H in.)
Display resolution 128 x 64 pixels
Display type FSTN monochrome LCD, white color transflective backlight
Power consumption max. 0.15 W (45 mA at 3.3 V)
Ambient temperature, operating -30 to +60 °C (-22 to +140 °F)

288
10 MP-C Controllers
Weight 0.035 kg (0.077 lb)

The MP-C internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is shown in the
following figure.
Figure: MP-C internal configuration

289
10 MP-C Controllers
10.2 MP-C Models
10.2 MP-C Models

The MP-C comes in five models with different I/O point count and different I/O
point mix.
For more information, see section 10.3 “MP-C Onboard I/O” on page 291.
Model I/O Points
MP-C-15A 15
MP-C-18A 18
MP-C-18B 18
MP-C-24A 24
MP-C-36A 36
MP-C-15A, MP-C-18A, and MP-C-18B have the same small footprint. MP-C-24A
and MP-C-36A have a slightly larger footprint.

290
10 MP-C Controllers
10.3 MP-C Onboard I/O

The MP-C models offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match a wide
variety of applications. Most of the I/O points are universal inputs/outputs, which
are highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
Table: I/O Point Types by MP-C Models
I/O Point Types MP-C-15A MP-C-18A MP-C-18B MP-C-24A MP-C-36A
Universal I/O 8 10 10 16 20
Type Ub
Universal I/O - - - 4 8
Type Uc
Triac outputs 6 4 8 - -
Relay outputs - 3 - 4 8
Form A
High power relay 1 1 - - -

outputs
Form A
By utilizing its onboard I/O with connected field devices, such as sensors and
actuators, the MP-C controls and supervises equipment that can be used to suit a
wide range of HVAC applications.

10.3.2 Relay Outputs

10.3.3 High Power Relay Outputs

The main application of the high power relay output is to power an electrical
heating element directly.

291
10 MP-C Controllers
10.3.4 Triac Outputs


292
10 MP-C Controllers
10.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply
10.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply

The MP-C has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC at
50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC input power.
The built-in power supply is based on a half-wave rectified, non-isolated design,
which is complemented with electronic protection components for transient
protection, overload protection, and EMC compliance.
To power the controller, you can use a transformer or a DC power supply:
• Class 2 (EN 60742) transformer supplying a nominal 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz
• DC power supply supplying a nominal 24 to 30 VDC with the required output
power
A separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer is recommended to power each
BACnet/IP device. The transformer with appropriate VA rating may also be used
to power the locally connected I/O devices. The separate transformer helps to
avoid problems with ground loops, 24 VAC induced EMI on LAN, low or distorted
AC voltage level at the controller, and excess transformer load due to the half-
wave power supply, which can result in intermittent equipment detected faults,
loss of communications, or equipment damage.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use a separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer to power each BACnet/IP
device.
NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not power the SpaceLogic device with a 24 VAC transformer that is used to
power devices that contain non-isolated full-wave rectifier power supplies.

293
10 MP-C Controllers
10.5 MP-C Screw Terminals

The MP-C is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The MP-C
device.
The only exception is the high power relay outputs on the MP-C-15A and MP-C-
18A models, which use a two-position fixed terminal block due to current
requirements.
Spare terminal blocks can be ordered separately using the part number
SXWMPCCON1.
10.5.1 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals

MP-C-15A has 15 I/O points and the controller is equipped with six pluggable
terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
For more information, see section 10.6 “MP-C-15A Screw Terminals” on page
296.

MP-C-18A has 18 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
299.
10.5.3 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals

MP-C-18B has 18 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 10.8 “MP-C-18B Screw Terminals” on page
302.

terminal blocks.
306.

294
10 MP-C Controllers

MP-C-36A has 36 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 10 pluggable
terminal blocks.
310.

295
10 MP-C Controllers
10.6 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals

MP-C-15A has 15 I/O points and the controller is equipped with six pluggable
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-C-15A

• Three 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the six triac outputs
• One 2-position fixed terminal block for the high power relay output
• Two 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the eight universal
inputs/outputs of type Ub
Table: Screw Terminals, MP-C-15A

Power input
1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA

Positive lead (+) when
24-30 VDC, 12 W

296
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued
2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
24-30 VDC, 12 W
3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Triac outputs
4 DO1 Triac output

DO1 and DO2
ground for low-side
switching.
6 DO2 Triac output
7 DO3 Triac output

DO3 and DO4
ground for low-side
switching.
9 DO4 Triac output
10 DO5 Triac output

DO5 and DO6
ground for low-side
switching.
12 DO6 Triac output
High power relay outputs

297
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued
16 DO7 High power relay output,

type Form A

type Form A

Ub
19 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

298
10 MP-C Controllers


• Two 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the four triac outputs
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the three relay outputs
• Two 6-position plus one 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 10
universal inputs/outputs of type Ub

Power input
1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA

24-30 VDC, 12 W

299
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

24-30 VDC, 12 W

(optional).
Triac outputs
4 DO1 Triac output

DO1 and DO2
ground for low-side
switching.
6 DO2 Triac output
7 DO3 Triac output

DO3 and DO4
ground for low-side
switching.
9 DO4 Triac output
Relay outputs

300
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

type Form A

type Form A

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

301
10 MP-C Controllers
10.8 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals

MP-C-18B has 18 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
terminal blocks.
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-C-18B

• Two 3-position plus one 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the eight
triac outputs
Table: Screw Terminals, MP-C-18B

Power input
1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA

24-30 VDC, 12 W

302
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

24-30 VDC, 12 W

(optional).
Triac outputs
4 DO1 Triac output

DO1 and DO2
ground for low-side
switching.
6 DO2 Triac output
7 DO3 Triac output

DO3 and DO4
ground for low-side
switching.
9 DO4 Triac output
10 DO5 Triac output

DO5 and DO6
ground for low-side
switching.
12 DO6 Triac output
13 DO7 Triac output

303
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

DO7 and DO8
ground for low-side
switching.
15 DO8 Triac output

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

304
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

Ub

305
10 MP-C Controllers

terminal blocks.

• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four universal inputs/outputs
of type Uc
of type Ub

Power input
1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 28 VA

24-30 VDC, 15 W

24-30 VDC, 15 W

306
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

(optional).
4 Uc1 Universal input/output, type

Uc

terminals

Uc

Uc

terminals

Uc
Relay outputs

Ub

terminals

Ub

307
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

308
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

Ub

terminals

Ub

309
10 MP-C Controllers

MP-C-36A has 36 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 10 pluggable
terminal blocks.

• Two 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the eight universal
inputs/outputs of type Uc
• Two 8-position pluggable terminal blocks for the eight relay outputs
• Five 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 20 universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub

Power input
1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 33 VA

24-30 VDC, 18 W

24-30 VDC, 18 W

310
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

(optional).

Uc

terminals

Uc

Uc

terminals

Uc

Uc

terminals

Uc

Uc

terminals

Uc
Relay outputs

311
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

312
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

313
10 MP-C Controllers
Continued

terminals

Ub

314
10 MP-C Controllers
10.11 MP-C Device Installation

A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing the MP-C along
with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most efficient
ventilation is achieved with the wall-mounted DIN rail oriented horizontally and
with adequate space provided between the MP-C rail and adjacent rails or other
devices.
The MP-C is typically installed horizontally (on a DIN rail going from left to right),
with the device label text in the upright position reading left to right.
Figure: MP-C installed on a horizontal DIN rail
The restrictions on installing the device in other orientations differ depending on

the operating conditions.
NOTICE
Follow the installation orientation restrictions that apply to the specific
BACnet/IP device.
Under normal operating conditions of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F), the MP-C can be
installed in the following orientations:
• Horizontally (on a DIN rail going from left to right), with the device label text
in the upright position reading left to right. See “a” in the following figure.
• Vertically (on a DIN rail going from top to bottom), which means that the
device is rotated +90 degrees or -90 degrees from the horizontal position.
See “b” and “c” in the following figure.
Installing the MP-C rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal position with device
label text up and down (“e” in the figure), face down from a ceiling (“d” in the
figure), or face up on a horizontal surface (“f” in the figure) is not supported.

315
10 MP-C Controllers
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for the MP-C operated in normal conditions, 0 to
50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
When the MP-C is used for rooftop applications, -40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F),
the device should be installed horizontally, with the device label text in the upright
position reading left to right. See “a” in the following figure. Any other installation
orientation (“b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, and “f” in the figure) may exceed the controller's
thermal specifications, which can damage the controller.
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for the MP-C operated at -40 to +60 °C (-40 to
+140 °F)
The MP-C can be installed in a standard DIN enclosure.

When installing MP-Cs in a cabinet, it is recommended to provide ample space
between the DIN rails and controllers for sufficient ventilation.

316
10 MP-C Controllers
Figure: MP-Cs installed on horizontal DIN rails in a cabinet
To help prevent the device from sliding down or sideways on the DIN rail, install
an end clip for DIN 35 (part number SXWDINEND10001) tightly against the
bottom or rightmost device on the rail. The end clip is easily removed if you bend
the snap lock open with a screwdriver.
NOTICE
Use an end clip (part number SXWDINEND10001) when you install the
BACnet/IP Controller device on a vertical DIN rail.
The MP-C is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. Spare
terminal blocks can be ordered separately using the part number
SXWMPCCON10001.
The terminal blocks are removable. You can replace an MP-C in seconds
because no terminal wiring is affected. The only exception is the high power relay

317
10 MP-C Controllers
outputs on the MP-C-15A and MP-C-18A models, which use a two-position fixed
terminal block due to current requirements.
All MP-C models can be equipped with MP-C Display (part number
SXWMPCDSP10001), which is an add-on module that enables manual override
control of analog and digital outputs. The module consists of an LCD display and
keys. The module is designed for permanent installation.
Figure: MP-C Display installed on MP-C
Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module as it may damage the enclosure
and the module. Once installed, the MP-C Display module cannot be removed.
NOTICE
Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module.

318
10 MP-C Controllers
10.12 Installing MP-C on a DIN Rail
10.12 Installing MP-C on a DIN Rail

You install MP-C on a DIN rail inside a cabinet to ensure that the device is
securely fastened and to allow for sufficient ventilation.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use an end clip (part number SXWDINEND10001) when you install the device
on a vertical DIN rail.
To install MP-C on a DIN rail

1. Push the DIN rail clip.

3. Push the device fully onto the DIN rail.
4. Release the DIN rail clip.
5. For a vertical DIN rail, install an end clamp below the device.

319
10 MP-C Controllers
10.13 Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface

You install MP-C on a flat surface inside a cabinet to ensure that the device is
securely fastened and to allow for sufficient ventilation.
To install MP-C on a flat surface

1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the MP-C.
2. Ensure that you have the proper mounting hardware and anchoring system.
3. Check the weight-bearing load before choosing your mounting hardware.
4. Find a suitable location and surface on which to mount the MP-C.

320
10 MP-C Controllers
5. Drill three mounting holes that fit number 8 or M4 screws (or anchors):
• Two holes for the top two screws on which you hang the MP-C
• One hole for the screw at the bottom that prevents the device from
being lifted off the top two screws
Use the following drawing to measure out the location of the three holes for
MP-C-15A, MP-18A, and MP-C-18B.
Use the following drawing for MP-C-24A and MP-C-36A.
NOTE: You can also use the 1:1 drill template in the installation sheet
that comes with each controller.

321
10 MP-C Controllers
6. Install number 8 or M4 (4 mm) pan head self-tapping screws (or anchors) in

the two top holes, leaving approximately 5 mm (0.2 inch) space between the
head of the screw (or anchor) and the flat surface to accommodate the MP-
C material thickness.
7. Fit the two keyhole slots on the back of the MP-C enclosure to the heads of
the mounted screws (or anchors) and then slide the MP-C down in place on
the screws (or anchors).

322
10 MP-C Controllers
8. Fit the bottom screw (or anchor) to the hole at the bottom of the MP-C and
tighten the screw (or anchor).

323
10 MP-C Controllers
10.14 Installing MP-C Display

You install an MP-C Display module on the MP-C or IP-IO module to enable
manual override control of the analog and digital outputs. The MP-C Display
module cannot be removed.
NOTICE
Take proper precautions before handling the display module to prevent
damage from electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Disconnect power to the MP-C or IP-IO module before installing the MP-C
Display module. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.
To install MP-C Display

1. Disconnect power to the MP-C or IP-IO module.
2. Locate the blank face plate on the MP-C or IP-IO module.

324
10 MP-C Controllers
3. Push and hold the two tabs on the blank face plate.
4. Remove the blank face plate by pulling it straight out.

325
10 MP-C Controllers
5. Install the MP-C Display module in place of the blank face plate.
NOTICE

326
10 MP-C Controllers
10.15 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-C

You install the terminal blocks on the MP-C to add or enable wiring for the device.
To install a terminal block on MP-C

NOTICE
Use only terminal blocks delivered with the MP-C or ordered from
Schneider Electric using the part number SXWMPCCON10001. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
NOTICE
The terminal blocks must be plugged into the correct connector headers
on the device. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.
header.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not push the terminal block straight down into the connector header as
this may crack the header.

327
10 MP-C Controllers

328
10 MP-C Controllers
10.16 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-C
10.16 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-C

You remove a terminal block from MP-C in order to replace the controller.
DANGER
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment before removing the terminal block.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
To remove a terminal block from MP-C

1. De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs of
the controller.
This applies to all MP-C controllers except the MP-C-18B model, which
does not have relay outputs.
2. Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment that is connected to the controller.
connector header.

329
10 MP-C Controllers
10.17 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C
10.17 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C

You wire the terminal blocks installed on the MP-C to connect I/O devices and
power.
DANGER
wiring. More than one disconnect switch may be required to de-energize the
equipment.
CAUTION
equipment before wiring.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
To wire a terminal block on MP-C

the controller.
This applies to all MP-C controllers except the MP-C-18B model, which
does not have relay outputs.
on the MP-C. For more information, see section 10.15 “Installing a Terminal
Block on MP-C” on page 327.
wire.
7. Tighten the screws using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the

330
10 MP-C Controllers
10.18 Powering Up MP-C

You perform the following steps to power up an MP-C.
For more information, see section 10.4 “MP-C Built-in Power Supply” on page
293.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
device.
To power up MP-C
2. Ensure that the 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24-30 VDC power is supplied to
terminals 1 and 2.
NOTICE
The controller input power polarity and voltage level must be strictly
observed. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

331
10 MP-C Controllers
NOTICE
Earth ground must be properly connected to avoid damage to the device
and to ensure proper operation of the device.

332
10 MP-C Controllers

system.
The MP-C universal inputs/outputs consist of two types: Ub and Uc. The
difference between the two types of universal inputs/outputs is that the Uc type
can also be configured as current outputs.
10.19.1 Inputs
inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive
Digital inputs

333
10 MP-C Controllers
VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Counter inputs
Supervised inputs
the I/O.
• Series only
• Parallel only

RS = 1 to 10 kohm

334
10 MP-C Controllers
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
following figure.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

335
10 MP-C Controllers
Voltage inputs

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs

RSH = 47 ohm
Temperature inputs

336
10 MP-C Controllers

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

Resistive inputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

337
10 MP-C Controllers

following figure.

VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
value.
10.19.2 Outputs
Voltage outputs

338
10 MP-C Controllers

Current outputs
The universal inputs/outputs of type Uc can also be configured as current
outputs.

Channels, MP-C-15A 8 Ub, Ub1 to Ub8
Channels, MP-C-18B 10 Ub, Ub1 to Ub10

4 Uc, Uc1 to Uc4

8 Uc, Uc1 to Uc8
Universal input/output protection Transient voltage suppressor on each universal input/output
Digital inputs
mA

339
10 MP-C Controllers
Counter inputs
mA
Supervised inputs

Voltage inputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Resolution 1.0 mV
Impedance 100 kohm
Current inputs
Range 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 1 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive inputs


Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Honeywell 20 kohm

340
10 MP-C Controllers
Xenta 1.8 kohm
Balco 1 kohm
20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)
RTD temperature inputs
Supported RTDs Pt1000, Ni1000, and LG-Ni1000
Pt1000
Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP device environment Sensor range Measurement accuracy
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +70 °C (-58 to +158 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) 70 to 150 °C (158 to 302 °F) +/-0.7 °C (+/-1.3 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-1.0 °C (+/-1.8 °F)
Ni1000

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

341
10 MP-C Controllers
LG-Ni1000

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

Voltage outputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-60 mV
Resolution 10 mV
Current outputs (Uc only)
Range 0 to 20 mA
Accuracy +/-0.2 mA
Resolution 21 µA

342
10 MP-C Controllers
10.20 Relay Outputs
10.20 Relay Outputs

• Digital output
• Pulse width modulated output
• Tristate output
output point.
10.20.1 Outputs
from signal ground.
Channels, MP-C-15A 0
Channels, MP-C-18A 3, DO5 to DO7
Channels, MP-C-18B 0

343
10 MP-C Controllers
10.20 Relay Outputs

Normally Open

344
10 MP-C Controllers
10.21 High Power Relay Outputs

• Digital output
output point.
10.21.1 Outputs
The DO high power relay outputs are Form A digital outputs, which means the
outputs are normally open contacts with one common terminal (C) and one
Channels, MP-C-15A 1, DO7
Channels, MP-C-18A 1, DO8
Channels, MP-C-18B 0
Contact rating 250 VAC/24 VDC, 12 A, Pilot Duty (B300)

Normally Open

345
10 MP-C Controllers

346
10 MP-C Controllers
10.22 Triac Outputs
10.22 Triac Outputs

• Digital output
• Tristate output
10.22.1 Outputs
The DO triac outputs are designed to switch 24 VAC. The common terminals can
be connected to 24 VAC or to ground. The DO triac outputs share common
terminals as follows:
• DO1 and DO2 share common terminal COM1 (on MP-C-15A, -18A, and
-18B).
• DO3 and DO4 share common terminal COM2 (on MP-C-15A, -18A, and
-18B).
• DO5 and DO6 share common terminal COM3 (on MP-C-15A and -18B).
• DO7 and DO8 share common terminal COM4 (on MP-C-18B).
The terminals are opto-isolated from the controller.
R1 = 47 ohm
C1 = 22 nF

347
10 MP-C Controllers
10.22 Triac Outputs
NOTE: Optionally, to protect the triac outputs from damage in the event of
external wiring short circuit, you can connect an in-line fuse (3 A) in series
with the COM terminal.
Channels, MP-C-18B 8, DO1 to DO8
Output rating (for each triac output) Max. 0.5 A
Commons COM1 for DO1 and DO2 (on MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B)
COM2 for DO3 and DO4 (on MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B)
COM3 for DO5 and DO6 (on MP-C-15A, -18B)
COM4 for DO7 and DO8 (on MP-C-18B only)
The common terminals can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground.
Triac output protection MOV and snubber across each triac output
MOV from triac COM to ground

348
11 MP-V Controllers
Topics
MP-V Controllers
MP-V Models
MP-V Onboard I/O
MP-V Damper Actuator
MP-V Air Flow Sensor
MP-V Built-in Power Supply
MP-V Screw Terminals
MP-V-7A Screw Terminals
MP-V-9A Screw Terminals
MP-V Device Installation
Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to
Open
Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-
Clockwise (CCW) to Open
Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting Screws to the
Alternative Positions
Installing an AM-135 Shaft Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch)
Diameter Damper Shaft
Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the MP-V Air Flow
Sensor
Installing a Terminal Block on MP-V
Removing a Terminal Block from MP-V
11 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V
Powering Up MP-V
Universal Inputs
Triac Outputs
Analog Outputs
11 MP-V Controllers
11.1 MP-V Controllers

The MP-V controller is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller dedicated for VAV applications. MP-V integrates a controller, a damper
actuator, and an air flow sensor in a single package for ease of installation. MP-V
is a native SpaceLogic device, which can either be used as a standalone
BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS with a AS-P or AS-B
server, or an Enterprise Server, as the parent server.
MP-V allows for flexible control solutions due to the dual Ethernet ports, the
interface to SpaceLogic Sensors, and the mix of universal inputs, triac outputs,
and analog outputs.
When MP-Vs are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, you can take full advantage of the
Figure: MP-V
11.1.1 MP-V Models

The MP-V comes in two models with a different I/O point count and different I/O
point mix.
For more information, see section 11.2 “MP-V Models” on page 358.
11.1.2 MP-V Onboard I/O

The MP-V models offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match a wide variety
of VAV applications.
For more information, see section 11.3 “MP-V Onboard I/O” on page 359.

351
11 MP-V Controllers
11.1.3 MP-V Damper Actuator

The MP-V has an integrated damper actuator, which allows for simplified
installation of MP-V directly over the damper shaft.
For more information, see section 11.4 “MP-V Damper Actuator” on page 360.
11.1.4 MP-V Air Flow Sensor

The MP-V uses a digital pressure sensor to measure the air velocity pressure
signal from the velocity probe in the inlet of the VAV box. The measured value is
used by the controller to position the VAV damper actuator for the required air
flow.
For more information, see section 11.5 “MP-V Air Flow Sensor” on page 361.
11.1.5 MP-V Built-in Power Supply

The MP-V has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC at
50/60 Hz input power.
For more information, see section 11.6 “MP-V Built-in Power Supply” on page
362.
11.1.6 BACnet/IP Device Memory

page 574.

Standards

352
11 MP-V Controllers
11.1.8 MP Controller Communication Ports

For more information, see section 12.3 “MP Controller Communication Ports” on
page 411.
11.1.9 BACnet/IP Controller Sensor Bus

The BACnet/IP controller provides a sensor bus, which allows SpaceLogic
Sensors to be connected to the controller.
11.1.10 MP-V Screw Terminals

The MP-V is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The MP-V
device.
For more information, see section 11.7 “MP-V Screw Terminals” on page 363.
11.1.11 MP Controller LEDs

11.1.12 MP Controller Reset Modes

For more information, see section 12.7 “MP Controller Reset Modes” on page
421.
11.1.13 MP-V Device Installation

The MP-V incorporates an integral actuator and the device is designed for over-
the-shaft damper installation.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

353
11 MP-V Controllers
11.1.14 Wiring

AC input
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption (MP-V-7A) 21 VA
Maximum power consumption (MP-V-9A) 22 VA
Environment
Material
Plastic flame rating UL94 V-0
Mechanical

354
11 MP-V Controllers
Weight 1.13 kg (2.5 lb)
Installation Over the damper shaft
Real-time clock
Communication ports

Sensor bus 24 VDC, 2 W, RS-485 (RJ45)
Sensor bus protection Transient voltage suppressors on communication and power signals
Communications

CPU
Frequency 500 MHz

355
11 MP-V Controllers
DDR3 SDRAM 128 MB
Damper actuator
Torque rating 6 Nm (53 lbf.in)
Stroke 0° to 90°, fully adjustable
Timing Approximately 2 seconds/degree at 60 Hz and 2.4 seconds/degree at 50 Hz for 90° rotation

at 24 VAC
Position indication Visual indication
Damper position feedback Yes
Manual override Push-button clutch release
Damper shaft diameter 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) or 9.5 mm (0.375 inch)

Adapter kit AM-135 is required for 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) diameter shafts.
Damper shaft minimum length (from VAV box) 22.2 mm (0.875 inch)
Air flow sensor
Range 0 to 249 Pa (0 to 1 inH2O)
Resolution 0.33 Pa (0.001 inH2O) at 25°C (77°F)
Accuracy ±5% of 249 Pa (1.00 inH2O) span at 25°C (77°F)

The MP-V internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is shown in the
following figure.

356
11 MP-V Controllers
Figure: MP-V internal configuration

357
11 MP-V Controllers
11.2 MP-V Models
11.2 MP-V Models

The MP-V comes in two models with a different I/O point count and different I/O
point mix.
For more information, see section 11.3 “MP-V Onboard I/O” on page 359.
Model I/O Points
MP-V-7A 7
MP-V-9A 9
The MP-V-7A and MP-V-9A have the same compact design and dimensions as a
majority of the Schneider Electric VAV controller models from Andover
Continuum, TAC Vista, TAC I/A Series, and TAC I/NET product lines. You can
use the MP-V-7A and MP-V-9A for both cooling and heating applications.

358
11 MP-V Controllers
11.3 MP-V Onboard I/O
11.3 MP-V Onboard I/O

The MP-V models offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match a wide variety
of VAV applications.
Table: I/O Point Types by MP-V Models
I/O Point Types MP-V-7A MP-V-9A
Universal inputs 3 4
Triac outputs 3 3
Analog outputs 1 2
11.3.1 Universal Inputs

The universal inputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow, status
points, and similar point types in a building control system.
11.3.2 Triac Outputs

11.3.3 Analog Outputs

The analog outputs are capable of supporting analog voltage or current point
types. Therefore, analog outputs support a wide range of devices, such as
actuators.

359
11 MP-V Controllers
11.4 MP-V Damper Actuator
11.4 MP-V Damper Actuator

The MP-V has an integrated damper actuator, which allows for simplified
installation of MP-V directly over the damper shaft.
The integrated damper actuator eliminates the need for separate installation,
wiring, and positioning of the damper motor.
MP-V uses the same actuator mechanics as many Schneider Electric VAV
controller models from Andover Continuum, TAC Vista, TAC I/A Series, and TAC
I/NET product lines.
The feedback signal from the actuator makes it possible to determine the exact
position of the damper.
The actuator also features a push button for manual positioning of the damper
during commissioning and two stop screws for adjustment of the travel range.

360
11 MP-V Controllers
11.5 MP-V Air Flow Sensor
11.5 MP-V Air Flow Sensor

The MP-V uses a digital pressure sensor to measure the air velocity pressure
signal from the velocity probe in the inlet of the VAV box. The measured value is
used by the controller to position the VAV damper actuator for the required air
flow.
The sensor is an integrated diaphragm-based pressure sensor, which means that
it requires no air flow from the velocity probe.
As there is no air flow through the sensor, the sensor is not susceptible to
maintenance and performance issues caused by accumulation of dust and
particles in the sensor and tubing, and the error (reduction) of the actual pressure
level seen on the test/balance taps of the velocity probe. The sensor does not
require maintenance.
The pressure sensor also offers the ability to connect a local digital manometer to
the same probe when you want to obtain accurate measurements that can be
used for cross-check verifications.
The sensor is factory-calibrated and requires a minimum of field adjustments.
Field air balance calibration is typically only needed when adjusting for anomalies
and inaccuracies introduced from the local duct and air flow situations.

361
11 MP-V Controllers
11.6 MP-V Built-in Power Supply
11.6 MP-V Built-in Power Supply

The MP-V has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC at
50/60 Hz input power.
To power the controller, use a Class 2 (EN 60742) transformer supplying a
nominal 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz. For more information, see section 11.1.16 “” on
page 354.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
device.
NOTICE

362
11 MP-V Controllers
11.7 MP-V Screw Terminals
11.7 MP-V Screw Terminals

The MP-V is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The MP-V
device.
Spare terminal blocks can be ordered separately using the part number
SXWMPVCON10001.
11.7.1 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals

MP-V-7A has seven I/O points and the controller is equipped with four pluggable
terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 11.8 “MP-V-7A Screw Terminals” on page 364.
11.7.2 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals

MP-V-9A has nine I/O points and the controller is equipped with four pluggable
terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 11.9 “MP-V-9A Screw Terminals” on page 366.

363
11 MP-V Controllers
11.8 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals

MP-V-7A has seven I/O points and the controller is equipped with four pluggable
terminal blocks.
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-V-7A

• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for the three universal inputs
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for the three digital (triac) outputs
• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the analog (voltage or current)
output
Table: Screw Terminals, MP-V-7A

Power input
1 24 VAC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 21 VA
2 Earth ground lead of 24

to terminal 2.
Universal inputs
3 UI1 Universal input

364
11 MP-V Controllers
Continued

terminals
Analog outputs

terminals
12 CO1 Current output
13 VO1 Voltage output
Digital (Triac) outputs
15 DO3 Triac output
16 DO2 Triac output
17 DO1 Triac output
18 COM Common connection for

DO1, DO2, and DO3
ground for low-side
switching.

365
11 MP-V Controllers

MP-V-9A has nine I/O points and the controller is equipped with four pluggable
terminal blocks.
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-V-9A

• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four universal inputs
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for the three digital (triac) outputs
• One 5-position pluggable terminal block for the two analog (voltage or
current) outputs
Table: Screw Terminals, MP-V-9A

Power input
1 24 VAC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA
2 Earth ground lead of 24

to terminal 2.
Universal inputs

366
11 MP-V Controllers
Continued

terminals

terminals
Analog outputs

terminals
Digital (Triac) outputs
15 DO3 Triac output
16 DO2 Triac output
17 DO1 Triac output
18 COM Common connection for

DO1, DO2, and DO3
ground for low-side
switching.

367
11 MP-V Controllers
11.10 MP-V Device Installation

The MP-V incorporates an integral actuator and the device is designed for over-
the-shaft damper installation.
Figure: MP-V installed over the damper shaft
The MP-V can be used with dampers that are opened in clockwise (CW) position
as well as dampers opened in counter-clockwise (CCW) position. You use
WorkStation or the Commission mobile application to configure the MP-V
actuator direction of rotation accordingly.
Figure: MP-V components

368
11 MP-V Controllers
The MP-V is typically installed with the air flow sensor barbed fittings pointing
down (orientation B in the figure below). The MP-V can also be installed with the
barbed fittings pointing left (A), right (C), or up (D).
Figure: Supported installation orientations
With a downward extension, the available area around the damper shaft must
measure:
• 160 mm (6 inches) down from the lower edge of the shaft,
• 120 mm (4.5 inches) to the right,
• 45 mm (1.75 inches) to the left, and
• 45 mm (1.75 inches) above the shaft.
Ensure that the location allows enough clearance for servicing.
The MP-V actuator is designed to be installed over a 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) diameter
round damper shaft with a minimum of 54 mm (2.125 inches) exposed damper
shaft length.
When the damper shaft diameter is less than 12.7 mm (0.5 inch), an adapter is
required. An adapter with part number AM-135 can be ordered from Schneider
Electric to enable installation on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inches) diameter damper shaft.
Figure: AM-135 damper shaft adapter
IMPORTANT: The cutout section of the shaft adapter must be positioned

such that the damper shaft mounting screws are tightened against the
damper shaft and not the adapter cylinder.
When the exposed damper shaft length is less than 54 mm (2.125 inches) but
greater than 22.2 mm (0.875 inch), you move the damper shaft mounting screws
from the actuator collar to the alternative screw holes on the MP-V actuator.

369
11 MP-V Controllers
Figure: Alternative position of the mounting screws for shorter damper shaft lengths
The MP-V also has two mounting brackets, which allow you to choose the
mounting bracket that best accomodates the available access space in the VAV
mounting area. You position the anti-rotation clip in the desired mounting bracket.
Figure: Two mounting brackets
The MP-V onboard air flow sensor is connected to an air velocity probe in the
VAV box using two tubes. A dip in the tubing helps prevent moisture from
entering the MP-V and damaging the air flow sensor. The dip should extend
below the elevation of the barbed fittings. This applies to all MP-V orientations,
but especially C and D.
Figure: Tubing dip
The MP-V is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. Spare
terminal blocks can be ordered separately using the part number
SXWMPVCON10001.
The terminal blocks are removable. You can quickly and easily replace an MP-V
because no terminal wiring is affected.
When the MP-V is powered up for the first time, the MP-V software automatically
performs an actuator travel and damper position calibration. The calibration

370
11 MP-V Controllers
operation drives the damper actuator in the close direction and registers the
position when the actuator encounters the stop. The software then drives the
actuator in the open direction and registers the position when the stop is
encountered. The software uses that information to scale the 0 to 100% span.
Mechanical obstructions hindering the damper actuator rotation during the
calibration process can adversely affect the calibration results and thus the VAV
damper operation. In that case, you can manually run a recalibration. For more
information, see the Configuring an MP-V Damper Command topic on WebHelp.
IMPORTANT: Initial calibration of actuator travel and damper position is
performed automatically when the MP-V is powered up for the first time. If
you subsequently press the manual override button, you must recalibrate the
MP-V manually. For more information, see the Configuring an MP-V Damper
Command topic on WebHelp.
NOTICE
VAV DAMPER NOT PROPERLY CONTROLLED
• Ensure that the MP-V is properly installed and secured prior to application of
the 24 VAC power.
• Ensure that the MP-V damper actuator can rotate freely between the fully
open and fully closed positions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in the VAV damper not being
properly controlled by the MP-V.

371
11 MP-V Controllers
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that

Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open
You install the MP-V directly over the VAV damper shaft for damper positioning
control and air flow sensing. When you install the MP-V on a damper that rotates
clockwise (CW) to open, use WorkStation or the Commission mobile application
to ensure that the configured direction of the actuator rotation matches the
damper type.
To install MP-V on a damper that rotates clockwise (CW) to

open
1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the MP-V.
2. Ensure that the damper is of the type that opens by turning the damper shaft
clockwise (CW).

372
11 MP-V Controllers
3. Determine the damper shaft length (L) and diameter (D).
4. When the exposed damper shaft length (L) is less than 54 mm (2.125
inches) but greater than 22.2 mm (0.875 inch), move the two damper shaft
mounting screws to the alternative screw holes for shorter damper shaft
lengths.
For more information, see section 11.13 “Moving the Damper Shaft
Mounting Screws to the Alternative Positions” on page 384.
5. When the damper shaft diameter (D) is equal to 9.5 mm (0.375 inch), install
an AM-135 shaft adapter on the damper shaft.
For more information, see section 11.14 “Installing an AM-135 Shaft
Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) Diameter Damper Shaft” on page 386.
6. Rotate the damper shaft to fully closed (CCW) position.
7. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the actuator collar to
fully closed (CCW) position.
8. Release the manual override button. If necessary, rotate the actuator collar
slightly to make the button return to the fully extended position.

373
11 MP-V Controllers
9. Loosen the two damper shaft mounting screws using a 1/8-inch hex key and
slide the controller over the damper shaft until the anti-rotation clip comes in
close contact with the mounting area on the VAV box.
IMPORTANT: When necessary due to mounting area restrictions or
obstacles, the anti-rotation clip can be moved from the mounting
bracket at the bottom of the controller (factory delivered location) to the
mounting bracket on the side of the controller (alternative location).
10. To preload the damper for closed position, rotate the controller clockwise
(CW) about three degrees or 10 mm (0.4 inch) off centerline of the damper.

374
11 MP-V Controllers
11. Tighten the two damper shaft mounting screws to the recommended torque
using a torque wrench. For steel damper shafts, 6.8 to 7.9 Nm (60 to 70
lbf.in) is recommended. For aluminum damper shafts, 4.0 to 5.1 Nm (35 to
45 lbf.in) is recommended.
IMPORTANT: When using the alternative positions for shorter damper
shaft lengths, tighten the damper shaft mounting screws to the following
recommended torque:
• Steel damper shafts: 4.5 to 5.6 Nm (40 to 50 lbf.in)
• Aluminum damper shafts: 4.0 to 5.1 Nm (35 to 45 lbf.in)
IMPORTANT: When using an AM-135 shaft adapter, position the
cutout section of the adapter cylinder to match the damper shaft
mounting screw positions, before you tighten the screws against the
damper shaft through the cutout section. Do not tighten the screws
against the adapter cylinder.
12. Rotate the controller counter-clockwise (CCW) back into alignment with the
centerline of the damper. The damper should now be tightly closed.

375
11 MP-V Controllers
13. Using the controller's anti-rotation clip as a template, mark and drill a pilot
hole in the VAV box.
14. Ensure the mounting hole position does not affect the performance of the
VAV terminal unit. If the damper movement is affected, install the anti-
rotation clip in the mounting bracket on the side of the controller (alternative
location).
15. Secure the anti-rotation clip to the VAV box using a #10 self-tapping sheet
metal screw.
16. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the damper clockwise
(CW) to fully open position by rotating the damper shaft.

376
11 MP-V Controllers
18. Loosen the CW travel adjustment screw using a 1/4-inch hex key, slide the
screw to the damper position indicator, and tighten the screw to 1.4 to 2.0
Nm (12 to 18 lbf.in) using a torque wrench.
19. Verify that damper can rotate freely between the fully open and fully closed
positions. There must be no binding between the actuator and damper, or
obstructions hindering the damper operation.
20. In WorkStation, ensure that Clockwise to open is the chosen direction of

the actuator rotation to open the damper.
For more information, see the Configuring Flow Balance Data topic on
WebHelp.
NOTE: In the Commission mobile application, ensure that CW is the
chosen direction of rotation to open the damper. For more information,
see the Manually Verifying the Direction of Damper Rotation topic on
WebHelp.

377
11 MP-V Controllers
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to Open
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that

Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to
Open
You install the MP-V directly over the VAV damper shaft for damper positioning
control and air flow sensing. When you install the MP-V on a damper that rotates
counter-clockwise (CCW) to open, use WorkStation or the Commission mobile
application to ensure that the configured direction of the actuator rotation
matches the damper type.
To install MP-V on a damper that rotates counter-clockwise

(CCW) to open
1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the MP-V.
2. Ensure that the damper is of the type that opens by turning the damper shaft
counter-clockwise (CCW).

378
11 MP-V Controllers
3. Determine the damper shaft length (L) and diameter (D).
4. When the exposed damper shaft length (L) is less than 54 mm (2.125
inches) but greater than 22.2 mm (0.875 inch), move the two damper shaft
mounting screws to the alternative screw holes for shorter damper shaft
lengths.
For more information, see section 11.13 “Moving the Damper Shaft
Mounting Screws to the Alternative Positions” on page 384.
5. When the damper shaft diameter (D) is equal to 9.5 mm (0.375 inch), install
an AM-135 shaft adapter on the damper shaft.
For more information, see section 11.14 “Installing an AM-135 Shaft
Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) Diameter Damper Shaft” on page 386.
6. Rotate the damper shaft to fully closed (CW) position.
7. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the actuator collar to
fully closed (CW) position.

379
11 MP-V Controllers
9. Loosen the two damper shaft mounting screws using a 1/8-inch hex key and
slide the controller over the damper shaft until the anti-rotation clip comes in
close contact with the mounting area on the VAV box.
IMPORTANT: When necessary due to mounting area restrictions or
obstacles, the anti-rotation clip can be moved from the mounting
bracket at the bottom of the controller (factory delivered location) to the
mounting bracket on the side of the controller (alternative location).
10. To preload the damper for closed position, rotate the controller counter-
clockwise (CCW) about three degrees or 10 mm (0.4 inch) off centerline of
the damper.

380
11 MP-V Controllers
11. Tighten the two damper shaft mounting screws to the recommended torque
using a torque wrench. For steel damper shafts, 6.8 to 7.9 Nm (60 to 70
lbf.in) is recommended. For aluminum damper shafts, 4.0 to 5.1 Nm (35 to
45 lbf.in) is recommended.
shaft lengths, tighten the damper shaft mounting screws to the following
recommended torque:
IMPORTANT: When using an AM-135 shaft adapter, position the
cutout section of the adapter cylinder to match the damper shaft
mounting screw positions, before you tighten the screws against the
damper shaft through the cutout section. Do not tighten the screws
against the adapter cylinder.
12. Rotate the controller clockwise (CW) back into alignment with the centerline
of the damper. The damper should now be tightly closed.

381
11 MP-V Controllers
13. Using the controller's anti-rotation clip as a template, mark and drill a pilot
hole in the VAV box.
14. Ensure the mounting hole position does not affect the performance of the
VAV terminal unit. If the damper movement is affected, install the anti-
rotation clip in the mounting bracket on the side of the controller (alternative
location).
15. Secure the anti-rotation clip to the VAV box using a #10 self-tapping sheet
metal screw.
16. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the damper counter-
clockwise (CCW) to fully open position by rotating the damper shaft.

382
11 MP-V Controllers
18. Loosen the CCW travel adjustment screw using a 1/4-inch hex key, slide the
screw to the damper position indicator, and tighten the screw to 1.4 to 2.0
Nm (12 to 18 lbf.in) using a torque wrench.
19. Verify that damper can rotate freely between the fully open and fully closed
positions. There must be no binding between the actuator and damper, or
obstructions hindering the damper operation.
20. In WorkStation, ensure that Counterclockwise to open is the chosen

direction of the actuator rotation to open the damper.
WebHelp.
NOTE: In the Commission mobile application, ensure that CCW is the
chosen direction of rotation to open the damper. For more information,
see the Manually Verifying the Direction of Damper Rotation topic on
WebHelp.

383
11 MP-V Controllers
11.13 Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting Screws to the Alternative Positions
11.13 Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting

Screws to the Alternative Positions
You move the two damper shaft mounting screws to the alternative positions to
be able to install the MP-V over a damper shaft with an exposed length that is
less than 54 mm (2.125 inches) but greater than 22.2 mm (0.875 inch).
To move the damper shaft mounting screws to the alternative

positions
1. Remove the two damper shaft mounting screws from the MP-V actuator
collar using a 1/8-inch hex key.
2. Remove the actuator collar.

384
11 MP-V Controllers
11.13 Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting Screws to the Alternative Positions
3. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the actuator counter-
clockwise (CCW) until the two screw holes for short damper shafts
(alternative positions) become accessible.
4. Install the damper shaft mounting screws in the two screw holes for short
damper shafts.
You can now install MP-V.

IMPORTANT: When using the alternative positions for shorter damper shaft
lengths, tighten the damper shaft mounting screws to the following
recommended torque:

385
11 MP-V Controllers
11.14 Installing an AM-135 Shaft Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) Diameter Damper Shaft
11.14 Installing an AM-135 Shaft Adapter on a

9.5 mm (0.375 inch) Diameter Damper
Shaft
You install an AM-135 shaft adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) diameter damper
shaft to be able the use the MP-V for a damper with that shaft diameter.
To install an AM-135 shaft adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch)

diameter damper shaft
1. Slide the AM-135 shaft adapter onto the 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) diameter
damper shaft with the cutout section pointing away from the VAV box.
shaft lengths, slide the AM-135 shaft adapter onto the damper shaft
with the cutout section facing the VAV box.
You can now install MP-V.

IMPORTANT: When using an AM-135 shaft adapter, position the cutout
section of the adapter cylinder to match the damper shaft mounting screw
positions, before you tighten the screws against the damper shaft through
the cutout section. Do not tighten the screws against the adapter cylinder.

386
11 MP-V Controllers
11.15 Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the MP-V Air Flow Sensor
11.15 Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the

MP-V Air Flow Sensor
You connect an air velocity probe installed in the duct inlet to the MP-V onboard
air flow sensor (differential velocity pressure sensor) to measure the air flow in
the VAV terminal unit.
NOTICE
Do not expose the MP-V air flow sensor inputs to moisture during installation or
operation. Moisture in the sensor can cause measurement errors.
To connect an air velocity probe to the MP-V air flow sensor

1. Connect tubing to the air velocity probe in the inlet section of the VAV box.
NOTE: A maximum length of 1.2 m (4 ft) FRPE polyethylene tubing
with 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) outside diameter and 4.3 mm (0.17 inches)
inside diameter is recommended for the typical plenum applications.
The MP-V air flow sensor input also supports flexible Tygon tubing
(when plenum rating is not required), using tubes with size of 6.4 mm
(0.25 inches) outside diameter and 4.8 mm (0.19 inches) inside
diameter.
2. Connect the tube from the low pressure side of the air velocity probe to the
barbed fitting labeled (Low) on the MP-V air flow sensor input.
3. Connect the tube from the high pressure side of the air velocity probe to the
barbed fitting labeled (High) on the MP-V air flow sensor input.
IMPORTANT: Ensure you connect the correct tube from the air velocity
probe to the correct air flow sensor input on the MP-V, to avoid
incorrect control of the VAV terminal unit.

387
11 MP-V Controllers
11.15 Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the MP-V Air Flow Sensor
4. Create a tubing dip that extends at least 75 mm (3 inches) below the barbed
fittings.
NOTICE
Create a tubing dip to help prevent moisture from entering the MP-V. This
applies to all MP-V orientations, but especially orientations with the
barbed fittings pointing right or up. Failure to follow these instructions can
damage the air flow sensor.

388
11 MP-V Controllers
11.16 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-V

You install the terminal blocks on the MP-V to add or enable wiring for the device.
To install a terminal block on MP-V

NOTICE
Use only terminal blocks delivered with the MP-V or ordered from
Schneider Electric using the part number SXWMPVCON10001. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
NOTICE
damage.
header.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

389
11 MP-V Controllers

390
11 MP-V Controllers
11.17 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-V
11.17 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-V

You remove a terminal block from MP-V in order to replace the controller.
CAUTION
Disconnect the 24 VAC power supply and other electrically powered equipment
before removing the terminal block.
To remove a terminal block from MP-V

1. Disconnect the 24 VAC power supply and other electrically powered
connector header.

391
11 MP-V Controllers
11.18 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V
11.18 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V

You wire the terminal blocks installed on the MP-V to connect I/O devices and
power.
CAUTION
before wiring.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
To wire a terminal block on MP-V

1. Disconnect the 24 VAC power supply and other electrically powered
on the MP-V. For more information, see section 11.16 “Installing a Terminal
Block on MP-V” on page 389.
wire.

392
11 MP-V Controllers
11.19 Powering Up MP-V

You perform the following steps to power up MP-V.
For more information, see section 11.6 “MP-V Built-in Power Supply” on page
362.
NOTICE
The MP-V must be properly installed and secured prior to application of the 24
VAC power. Failure to follow these instructions adversely affects the damper
position calibration that the controller automatically runs after the first
application of power.
The user may request a Recalibrate function later from the properties of the
VAV damper object in the MP-V device using EcoStruxure Building Operation
WorkStation (after communication is set up). For more information, see the
Configuring an MP-V Damper Command topic on WebHelp.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
device.
To power up MP-V
1. Ensure that the MP-V is properly installed and secured.

393
11 MP-V Controllers
3. Ensure that terminal number 1 is connected to the 24 VAC input lead from a
separate, isolated 24 VAC transformer.
NOTICE
The controller input power polarity and voltage level must be strictly
damage.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
4. Ensure that terminal number 2 is connected to the same earth ground

connection as the common (low/ground) lead from the 24 VAC transformer
secondary.
NOTICE
Earth ground must be connected to avoid damage to the MP-V and to
ensure proper operation of the controller. The earth ground wire must be
connected to the equipment chassis, the 24 VAC transformer secondary
lead, and the MP-V terminal number 2.

394
11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

The universal inputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow, status
points, and similar point types in a building control system.
As counter inputs, they are commonly used in energy metering applications. As
RTD inputs, they are ideal for temperature points in a building control system. As
supervised inputs, they are used for security applications where it is critical to
know whether or not a wire has been cut or shorted. These events provide a
separate indication of alarms and events in the system.
11.20.1 Inputs
The universal inputs can be configured to read several different types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive
Digital inputs

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Counter inputs

395
11 MP-V Controllers
Supervised inputs
the I/O.
• Series only
• Parallel only

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

396
11 MP-V Controllers


RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
following figure.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Voltage inputs

397
11 MP-V Controllers

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs

RSH = 47 ohm
Temperature inputs

398
11 MP-V Controllers
20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

Resistive inputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

following figure.

399
11 MP-V Controllers

VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
value.
Channels, MP-V-7A 3, UI1 to UI3
Channels, MP-V-9A 4, UI1 to UI4
Universal input protection Transient voltage suppressor on each input
Digital inputs
mA
Counter inputs
mA

400
11 MP-V Controllers
Supervised inputs

Voltage inputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Resolution 1.0 mV
Impedance 100 kohm
Current inputs
Range 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 1 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive inputs


Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Honeywell 20 kohm
Xenta 1.8 kohm

401
11 MP-V Controllers
Balco 1 kohm
20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)
Pt1000

BACnet/IP Controller device Sensor range Measurement accuracy
environment
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +70 °C (-58 to +158 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) 70 to 150 °C (158 to 302 °F) +/-0.7 °C (+/-1.3 °F)
Ni1000

environment
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
LG-Ni1000

environment
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)


402
11 MP-V Controllers
11.21 Triac Outputs
11.21 Triac Outputs

• Digital output
• Tristate output
11.21.1 Outputs
The DO triac outputs are designed to switch 24 VAC. The common terminal COM
can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground. DO1, DO2, and DO3 share the
common terminal COM. The terminals are opto-isolated from the controller.
R1 = 47 ohm
C1 = 22 nF
NOTE: Optionally, to protect the triac outputs from damage in the event of
external wiring short circuit, you can connect an in-line fuse (3 A) in series
with the COM terminal.

403
11 MP-V Controllers
11.21 Triac Outputs
Channels, MP-V-7A 3, DO1 to DO3
Channels, MP-V-9A 3, DO1 to DO3
Output rating (for each triac output) Max. 0.5 A
Commons COM (terminal number 18)

The common terminal COM can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground.
Triac output protection MOV and snubber across each triac output
MOV from triac COM to ground

404
11 MP-V Controllers
11.22 Analog Outputs

The analog outputs are capable of supporting analog voltage or current point
types. Therefore, analog outputs support a wide range of devices, such as
actuators.
11.22.1 Outputs
Voltage outputs
The analog outputs can be configured as voltage outputs.

Current outputs
The analog outputs can also be configured as current outputs.


405
11 MP-V Controllers
Channels, MP-V-7A 1, VO1/CO1
Channels, MP-V-9A 2, VO1/CO1 and VO2/CO2
Analog output protection Transient voltage suppressor on each output
Voltage outputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-60 mV
Resolution 10 mV
Minimum load resistance 5 kohm to ground
Load range 0 to +2 mA
Current outputs
Range 0 to 20 mA
Accuracy +/-0.2 mA
Resolution 21 µA

406
12 MP Controller General
Information
Topics
BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory
BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards
MP Controller Communication Ports
MP Controller Sensor Bus
Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP Controller
MP Controller LEDs
MP Controller Reset Modes
12 MP Controller General Information
12.1 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory

You can manually back up or restore BACnet/IP controller devices to a storage
location on a PC or network. For more information, see the BACnet Backup and
Restore topic on WebHelp.
When BACnet/IP controller devices are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the
configuration data automatically resides in the parent EcoStruxure BMS server.
The EcoStruxure Building Operation database and the BACnet/IP controller
device database are synchronized to help ensure there is always one backup
available that can be used to restore the BACnet/IP controller device memory.
Scheduled backups can provide additional protection against application and
data loss. In addition, device-specific values (for example, AHU or heat pump
data) are duplicated in the parent server to facilitate device replacement
scenarios.

409
12.2 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards
12.2 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building

Standards
The BACnet/IP controller can natively communicate with BACnet/IP networks.
When the BACnet/IP controller is part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the BACnet
protocol is used for communication between the device and its parent
EcoStruxure BMS server and other BACnet devices on the IP network, including
BACnet/IP controllers. As a native BACnet/IP device, the BACnet/IP controller
supports BACnet services such as trends, schedules, and alarms, and the
controller can communicate with other BACnet devices on a BACnet/IP network.
BACnet/IP controller controller conforms to the BACnet Advanced Application
Controller (B-AAC) device profile.

410
12.3 MP Controller Communication Ports
12.3 MP Controller Communication Ports

This combination includes the following ports:
• Two 10/100 Ethernet ports
• One USB host port
• One USB device port
• One sensor bus port
When both Ethernet ports are enabled, they function as an onboard Ethernet
switch. Disabling the second Ethernet port disables the switching function. The
switching function enables flexible network topologies. For more information, see
the BACnet/IP Controller Network Topologies topic on WebHelp. The second
port also provides a connection point for a laptop running the Commission mobile
application.
The two USB ports are reserved for future use.
The sensor bus port is designed for connection of SpaceLogic Sensor devices.

411
12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus

The MP controller sensor bus allows SpaceLogic Sensor devices to be
connected to the controller.
The sensor bus is a proprietary RS-485 bus, which provides both 24 VDC power
supply (2 W) and communications for the sensors.
The maximum total length of the sensor bus is 61 m (200 ft). The sensor bus
uses a Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded, straight-through wired cable with eight
conductors (four twisted pairs) and RJ45 connectors. The wire size (cross-
sectional area) should be 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²). When the MP
controller is installed in a space that handles conditioned air or return air, the
sensor bus cables and IP network cables frequently must be plenum-rated to
meet applicable building codes. For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring”
on page 1129.
NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
• Ensure that the total length of the sensor bus does not exceed 61 m (200 ft).
• Use a Cat 5 or higher unshielded twisted pair cable with eight conductors
(four twisted pairs), a cross-sectional area of 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14
mm2), and a rating that meets the requirements of the target environment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of communication.
Figure: Location of the Sensor Bus port on different MP controllers
You can connect a single SpaceLogic Sensor to the sensor bus, or you can
connect two to four SpaceLogic Sensor devices in a daisy-chain configuration.
NOTE: When connecting SpaceLogic Sensor devices to the sensor bus
through a daisy-chain configuration, it does not matter if the incoming and

412
outgoing cables are connected to one or the other sensor bus port on the
SpaceLogic Sensor.
The maximum number of SpaceLogic Sensor devices that can be connected to
the sensor bus is variable depending on the power consumption for the selected
SpaceLogic Sensor model and the combination of cover and sensor base type.
When calculating the power consumption to validate your sensor bus
configuration, ensure that you add the power consumption (mW) for all
SpaceLogic Sensor models, sensor bases, and covers used on the sensor bus to
determine the total power consumption. The sensor bus can supply maximum
2000 mW. SpaceLogic Sensor combinations totalling more than 2000 mW are
not supported. The following table can be used for calculating the total power
consumption.
Description Model Number Power (mW)
Sensor base with temperature SXWSBTXXXSXX 90

sensor
Sensor base with temperature and SXWSBTHXXSXX 90

humidity sensors
Sensor base with temperature and SXWSBTXCXSXX 490

CO2 sensors
Sensor base with temperature, SXWSBTHCXSXX 490

humidity, and CO2 sensors
Blank cover SXWSCBXSELXna 0
Blank cover with occupancy sensor SXWSCBPSELXna 20
3-button cover (buttons for override SXWSC3XSELXna 190

and setpoint control)
3-button cover (buttons for override SXWSC3PSELXna 210

and setpoint control) with occupancy
sensor
Touchscreen display cover SXWSCDXSELXna 190
Touchscreen display cover with SXWSCDPSELXna 210

occupancy sensor
Touchscreen display cover with light SXWSC2XSELXna 190

control buttons
Touchscreen display cover with light SXWSC2PSELXna 210

control buttons and occupancy
sensor

and blind control buttons

and blind control buttons and
occupancy sensor

413
Continued
Complete SpaceLogic Sensor model SXWSATXXXSLna 80

with temperature sensor, buttons for
override and setpoint control, and
LCD display cover
Complete non-communicatingb SLAnXXXc 0

SpaceLogic Sensor model with
resistive temperature sensor (10 SXWSATXXXRXXd
kohm type 3 thermistor) and blank
cover
SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adaptere SXWBTAECXX10001 300
a) The last character (“n”) of this model number indicates the housing: X (Medium matte white), W (Optimum glass white), or B
(Optimum glass black).
b) The SpaceLogic resistive temperature sensor is not designed to be connected to the sensor bus, but instead is connected to
I/O points/terminals on the BACnet/IP controller using a two-wire connection.
c) The fourth character (“n”) of this model number indicates the housing: S (Medium matte white), W (Optimum glass white), or B
d) The model number SXWSATXXXRXX is replaced by SLASXXX.
e) Connect the SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter to the SpaceLogic Sensor for temporary commissioning and servicing only.
To summarize the power conditions, the sensor bus supports the following key
SpaceLogic Sensor combinations:
• Blank covers: Up to four sensors of any combination of sensor base types
• 3-button and touchscreen covers:
– Up to two sensor bases with CO2 option
– Up to four sensor bases without CO2 option
• SpaceLogic LCD temperature sensors: Up to four sensors are supported

414
Figure: Examples with one SpaceLogic Sensor and four SpaceLogic Sensor devices
connected to an MP controller in a daisy-chain configuration
Each SpaceLogic Sensor has two 2-position DIP switches, which are used to
give the sensor a unique address on the sensor bus. An incorrectly configured or
improper DIP switch can cause two sensors to have the same address on the
sensor bus, which means that both sensors will be offline. For more information,
see section 21.1 “SpaceLogic Sensors” on page 935.
NOTICE
Ensure that the address DIP switches on the SpaceLogic Sensor are
configured to give the sensor a unique address on the sensor bus.
NOTE: SpaceLogic Sensor devices connected to the sensor bus through a

daisy-chain configuration can be assigned addresses regardless of the order
in which the sensors appear in the daisy chain. For example, sensor number

415
1 can have the address 6, sensor number 2 can have the address 4, and so
on.

416
12.5 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP Controller
12.5 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an

MP Controller
You connect SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP controller to provide the sensors with
power and communication from the controller.
NOTICE
Locate the sensor bus wiring away from external electromagnetic noise
sources such as high voltage cables and Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) for
AC motors.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect an Ethernet cable from the controller's Sensor Bus port directly
to an external Ethernet switch or router.
To connect SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP controller

1. Install the SpaceLogic Sensor and connect a Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded,
straight-through wired cable with eight conductors (four twisted pairs) to one
of the two RJ45 receptacles on the sensor. Use a cable with the wire size
(cross-sectional area) 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²).
For more information, see SpaceLogic Sensors - SXWS Sensor Base -
Installation Instructions
For more information, see SpaceLogic Sensors - SXWS LCD Temperature
Sensors - Installation Instructions
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the Sensor Bus port on the MP
controller.

417
12.5 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP Controller
3. When an additional SpaceLogic Sensor is needed, install the sensor and

connect the other end of the cable to the unused RJ45 receptacle on the
previous sensor.
NOTE: When connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to the MP controller's
sensor bus through a daisy-chain configuration, it does not matter if the
incoming and outgoing cables are connected to one or the other sensor
bus port on the SpaceLogic Sensor.
4. Repeat step 3 to install a third and fourth SpaceLogic Sensor, if the power
constraints of the sensor bus allow this for the selected combination of cover
and sensor base type.
5. Ensure that the two 2-position address DIP switches on each SpaceLogic
Sensor are configured to give the sensor a unique address on the sensor
bus.
For more information, see the Configuring a SmartX Sensor topic on
WebHelp.

418
12.6 MP Controller LEDs

Figure: MP controller LEDs
Table: MP Controller LEDs

Function Color
Status (MP controller) Green/Red
Sensor Bus Tx Yellow
Sensor Bus Rx Green
NOTE: The MP controller Ethernet and Status indicators comprise two

LEDs (green/yellow and green/red respectively) in one structure.
The LEDs indicate status of the MP controller and the ongoing communication.
12.6.1 Status LED

The MP controller Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: MP Controller Status LED Patterns




attention

419
Continued
Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) MP controller I/O board receiving software

upgrade, wait
Amber, constant MP controller firmware boot applet running

MP controller firmware boot applet started
12.6.2 Sensor Bus LEDs

The Sensor Bus LEDs indicate the condition of the sensor bus data
communication.
Table: Sensor Bus LED Patterns

12.6.3 Ethernet LEDs

communication.

Green/yellow, constant 10/100 Mbit link connected, no activity
No light No link, no activity

420
12.7 MP Controller Reset Modes

Figure: Location of the reset button on different MP controller models
You can use a straightened segment of a paper clip or a similar tool to press the
reset button.
Table: Reset Modes

Mode Description
Warm start Press and release the reset button in less

than 5 seconds.
Performing a power cycle in a BACnet/IP
controller is analogous to a hardware warm
start.
Cold start Press and hold the reset button for more
than 5 seconds but less than 9 seconds.
Network reset Press and hold the reset button for 10 to 19

seconds.
Perform a network reset in WorkStation in
order to reset the IP address settings to
DHCP with a failover to Auto-IP.
Factory reset Press and hold the reset button for 20 to 29

seconds.
Consult the following Factory Reset
subsection for more details.
Erase database Press and hold the reset button for 30 to 39

seconds.

421
Continued
Mode Description
Cancel reset action Press and hold the reset button for more
than 40 seconds and then release the
button.
Performing this action cancels the reset
request that would be initiated by any of the
shorter button press durations.
TIP: If the MP-C is equipped with the MP-C Display add-on module, a count-
up timer and progress bar are displayed to assist in reset selection. There is
also a reset mode indicator that lets you know which reset occurs if you
release at that time.
12.7.1 Factory Reset

In WorkStation, if your BACnet/IP controller device seems completely
unresponsive, perform a factory reset to restore the device to a state where it can
be successfully commissioned. After you release the reset button, a factory reset
may take up to 30 seconds to process. All diagnostic logs and the database are
erased during a factory reset. By contrast, controller firmware does not revert and
remains at the same active level.
TIP: After a physical reset in a BACnet/IP controller, any controller proxy
object in the EcoStruxure BMS database that carries the serial number of
that controller may trigger an automatic association. This association occurs
between the reset physical controller and the controller proxy object in the
EcoStruxure BMS database.
For more information, see the Automatic Association after a Factory Reset in
a SmartX IP Controller topic on WebHelp.

variable is retained after a restart of the MP controller. There are three retain
levels:
• No
• Warm start
• Cold start
The following table lists what is retained after a warm start or cold start based on
the configured retain level.

422
Table: Retained Variable Values Depending on Restart Mode and Retain Level
Restart mode Retain level: Retain level: Retain level:
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
retained. retained.
Cold start Default valuea Variable loses last Variable retains last
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
lost. retained.
a
Default value is the value the variable gets when it is created.
TIP: Although variable values in BACnet/IP controllers are retained in
accordance with this matrix, automation server retention behaves differently.
As a result, variable values retained in the server that are not retained in the
controller may be restored to the controller during a download command. For
more information, see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.
12.7.3 Value Retention on Restarts Using

Command Priority Levels
When you configure the restart retain level for an object with command priority
levels, it is recommended that you base retention exclusively on either of the
following:
• The value property configured by using the Configure button for that
property in the Basic tab of the object.
• The command priorities configured by the Configure button for the

appropriate command priority levels in the Command tab of the object.
Do not configure retention for both the value property on the Basic tab and the
command priorities of the object because doing so may result in unexpected
behavior following a controller restart. For example, if the value property is
configured to retain during a restart, then that value is written to priority 16
following the restart, regardless of the retain level of priority 16.
For more information, see the Binding Value and Priority Properties in a SmartX
IP Controller topic on WebHelp.

423
13 Output Override
Topics
Output Override Function
User Experience
Keys
Basic Operation
Override Outputs
Overriding an Analog Output
Overriding a Digital Output
Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output
Overriding Tristate Outputs
Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs
Removing an Override for an Output
View Inputs and Outputs
Viewing Inputs and Outputs
Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use
Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Ua or Ub Type as an
Analog Output
Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Uc Type as an
Analog Output
Configuring a Universal Input/Output as an Input
Configuring a Digital Output
Configuring a Digital Input
13 Removing a Configuration for an Input or Output
Exiting Configuration Mode
13 Output Override
13.1 Output Override Function

An override display unit consisting of an LCD display and five keys is provided for
override control of the output channels.
Figure: Override display unit
The override display also enables you to perform the following actions:
• View inputs and outputs
• Configure inputs and outputs
13.1.1 User Experience

The override display has a menu-driven user interface, which facilitates
overriding of the outputs, local configuration of inputs and outputs, and other
tasks.
For more information, see section 13.2 “User Experience” on page 429.
13.1.2 Keys
You use the keys on the override display to navigate the screens of the user
interface and to select options on menus and lists.
For more information, see section 13.3 “Keys” on page 431.
13.1.3 Basic Operation

The basic operation of the user interface includes the following actions:
• Highlight an option on a menu or list
• Select an option on a menu or list
• Change a value

427
13 Output Override
For more information, see section 13.4 “Basic Operation” on page 432.
13.1.4 Override Outputs

You use the override display to manually override digital outputs as well as
analog outputs.
For more information, see section 13.5 “Override Outputs” on page 435.
13.1.5 View Inputs and Outputs

Using the override display, you can view the configuration and the present values
for inputs and outputs, and for outputs you can also view the override status.
For more information, see section 13.12 “View Inputs and Outputs” on page 452.
13.1.6 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary

Use
In configuration mode, you can locally configure inputs and outputs for temporary
use during commissioning of the device. You can configure inputs and outputs
that have not been configured through WorkStation.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.
Display

428
13 Output Override
13.2 User Experience

The override display has a menu-driven user interface, which facilitates
overriding of the outputs, local configuration of inputs and outputs, and other
tasks.
The main screens of the user interface are briefly described below.
Home screen
The Home screen is displayed when the device is powered on. To go to the next
screen, press the Enter key .
Figure: Home screen (AS-B server example)
For more information, see section 14.2 “Home Screen on AS-B Servers” on page
477.
For more information, see section 14.3 “Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module”
on page 478.
I/O Filter screen

The I/O Filter screen provides an overview of the number of I/O points and
enables you to filter the I/O List screen on inputs, outputs, and overriden outputs.
Figure: I/O Filter screen
For more information, see section 14.4 “I/O Filter Screen” on page 479.
I/O List screen

The I/O List screen presents the I/O points in a list. You use the screen to view an
I/O point, to select an output that you want to override, or to select an I/O point to
be locally configured.

429
13 Output Override
Figure: I/O List screen
For more information, see section 14.5 “I/O List Screen” on page 480.
Output Override screen

The Output Override screen enables you to manually override an output and to
remove an override for an output. The screen looks similar for the different types
of outputs.
Figure: Output Override screen
For more information, see section 14.6 “Output Override Screen” on page 481.
I/O Configuration screen

The I/O Configuration screen is the starting point to locally configure inputs and
outputs. To make this screen appear, press and hold down Home key for
three seconds.
Figure: I/O Configuration screen (AS-B server example)
For more information, see section 14.7 “I/O Configuration Screen” on page 482.

430
13 Output Override
13.3 Keys
13.3 Keys
You use the keys on the override display to navigate the screens of the user
interface and to select options on menus and lists.
Table: Keys
Key Description
Home
Press to go to the Home screen.
Press and hold down for three seconds to
enter the configuration mode and go to the
I/O Configuration screen. For more
information, see section 14.7 “I/O
Configuration Screen” on page 482.
Back
Press to return to the previous screen.
Up/previous
Press to scroll in a menu or list and to
highlight an option.
Press to increase a value.
Down/next
Press to scroll in a menu or list and to
highlight an option.
Press to decrease a value.
Enter
Press to go to from the Home screen to the
I/O Filter screen. For more information, see
section 14.4 “I/O Filter Screen” on page
479.
Press to select an option in a menu or list
and go to the next screen.
TIP: Press and hold down the Up/previous key or Down/next key
to speed up scrolling in the override display menus and lists.

431
13 Output Override
13.4 Basic Operation

The basic operation of the user interface includes the following actions:
• Highlight an option on a menu or list
• Select an option on a menu or list
• Change a value
13.4.1 Highlight an Option

You highlight an option on a menu or list using the Up/previous key or
Down/next key .
Figure: Highlighted menu option
13.4.2 Select an Option

You select a highlighted option by pressing the Enter key . A small dot in a
radio button indicates the selected or active menu option.

432
13 Output Override
Figure: Radio button indicates the selected menu option
13.4.3 Change a Value

To change a value you first need to get the value in edit mode. To do this you
highlight the present value and then press the Enter key . A value within
angle brackets indicates that the value is in edit mode. You select a new value
using the Up/previous key or Down/next key and then press the Enter
key to leave the edit mode.

433
13 Output Override
Figure: Angle brackets indicate a value in edit mode

434
13 Output Override
13.5 Override Outputs

You use the override display to manually override digital outputs as well as
analog outputs.
There are basically two control modes:
• Hand mode
• Auto mode
You place an output in Hand mode when you want to manually override the
output. Programs have no effect on the output in this mode. The meaning of the
Hand mode for the different output types are described below.
You switch back to Auto mode when you want to remove the manual override. In
Auto mode, programs control the output.
The Output Override screen is similar for the different output types. For more
information, see section 14.6 “Output Override Screen” on page 481.
Figure: Output override screen for a digital pulsed output
The Hand icon indicates that an output point is manually overridden. For
more information, see section 14.1 “Icons” on page 475.
13.5.1 Override Analog Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually adjust the analog value of an analog output.
13.5.2 Override Digital Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually activate or deactivate a digital output by
selecting one of the following options:
• Hand On makes the output activated (on).
• Hand Off makes the output manually deactivated (off).
13.5.3 Override Digital Pulsed Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually adjust the duty cycle value of a digital pulsed
output.

435
13 Output Override
13.5.4 Override Tristate Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually control a pair of tristate outputs by selecting
one of the following override values:
• On makes the first output active (on).
• Off makes both outputs inactive (off).
• -On makes the second output active (on).
Figure: I/O list screen showing override value -On for tristate output points DO1 and DO2
13.5.5 Override Tristate Pulsed Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually adjust the duty cycle value of a pair of tristate
pulsed outputs by selecting one of the following override values:
• [Value] percent makes the first output active (on) in [Value] percent of the
pulse period.
• 0 percent makes both outputs inactive (off).
• -[Value] percent makes the second output active (on) in [Value] percent of
the pulse period.
For example, if you select 10 percent, the first output is active (on) in 10 percent
of the pulse period. If you select -10 percent, the second output is active (on) in
10 percent of the pulse period.
Figure: I/O list screen showing override value 10 percent for tristate pulsed output points
DO1 and DO2

436
13 Output Override
13.6 Overriding an Analog Output

You override an analog output to manually control the analog value of the output.
To override an analog output
1. With the Home screen displayed, press the Enter key .

2. Highlight OUT.
3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the analog output point.

6. Highlight the override value (Hand value).


437
13 Output Override
8. Select the override value that you want to use initially when switching to the
override mode (Hand mode).

10. Highlight HAND.
11. Press the Enter key to switch to the override mode (Hand mode).


438
13 Output Override
14. Adjust the override value.

439
13 Output Override
13.7 Overriding a Digital Output

You override a digital output to manually control the digital value of the output.
To override a digital output

2. Highlight OUT.

4. Highlight the digital output point.

6. Highlight one of the following override options:
• Highlight HAND ON to turn on the output.
• Highlight HAND OFF to turn off the output.

440
13 Output Override

441
13 Output Override
13.8 Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output

You override a digital pulsed output to manually control the duty cycle of the
output.
To override a digital pulsed output

2. Highlight OUT.

4. Highlight the digital pulsed output point.



442
13 Output Override
8. Select the duty cycle value that you want to use initially when switching to
the override mode (Hand mode).

10. Highlight HAND.


443
13 Output Override
14. Adjust the duty cycle value.

444
13 Output Override
13.9 Overriding Tristate Outputs

You override a pair of tristate output points to manually control the value of the
outputs.
To override tristate outputs

2. Highlight OUT.

4. Highlight the first tristate output point, which has an icon with a plus sign
( or ).

6. Highlight the current override value (Hand value).

445
13 Output Override

8. Select one of the following override options:
• Select On to make the first tristate output point active (on).
• Select Off to make both tristate output points inactive (off).
• Select -On to make the second tristate output point active (on).

10. Highlight HAND.

446
13 Output Override
13.10 Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs

You override a pair of tristate pulsed output points to manually control the duty
cycle of the outputs.
To override tristate pulsed outputs

2. Highlight OUT.

4. Highlight the first tristate pulsed output point, which has an icon with a plus
sign ( ).


447
13 Output Override

8. Select the duty cycle value that you want to use initially when switching to
the override mode (Hand mode):
• Select [Value] percent to make the first tristate pulsed output point
active (on) in [Value] percent of the pulse period.
• Select 0 percent to make both tristate pulsed output points inactive
(off).
• Select -[Value] percent to make the second tristate pulsed output point
active (on) in [Value] percent of the pulse period.

10. Highlight HAND.


448
13 Output Override
14. Adjust the duty cycle value.

449
13 Output Override
13.11 Removing an Override for an Output

You remove an override for an output when you no longer want to manually
control the value of the output.
To remove an override for an output

2. Highlight HAND.

4. Highlight the output point for which you want to remove the override.

6. Highlight AUTO.

450
13 Output Override

451
13 Output Override
13.12 View Inputs and Outputs
13.12 View Inputs and Outputs

Using the override display, you can view the configuration and the present values
for inputs and outputs, and for outputs you can also view the override status.
Icons on the screens indicate the configuration and override status for the inputs
and outputs. For more information, see section 14.1 “Icons” on page 475.
The value presented for an input or output equals the value transferred in or out
to/from the physical device. So even if WorkStation is configured to invert a value
from a counter input, digital input, digital output, or digital pulsed output, the
override display presents the not inverted value.
Figure: I/O List screen showing configuration, values, and override status for digital
outputs

452
13 Output Override
13.13 Viewing Inputs and Outputs
13.13 Viewing Inputs and Outputs

You view inputs and outputs to get information on their configuration or their
present values, or to check whether an output is overridden.
For more information, see section 13.12 “View Inputs and Outputs” on page 452.
To view inputs and outputs

2. Highlight ALL.

4. Scroll up/down to the input or output point that you want to view.

453
13 Output Override
13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use
13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for

Temporary Use
In configuration mode, you can locally configure inputs and outputs for temporary
use during commissioning of the device. You can configure inputs and outputs
that have not been configured through WorkStation.
You can reconfigure, unconfigure, and override a locally configured I/O point
using the override display. The I/O configuration is locally stored in the device.
The local I/O configuration is not uploaded to the Enterprise Server database and
the local I/O configuration does not appear in WorkStation. You can change the
I/O configuration using WorkStation. The final I/O configuration must always be
done in WorkStation.
To enter the configuration mode, you press and hold down the Home key for
three seconds.
The icons on the I/O List screen indicate which I/O points you can configure,
reconfigure, or unconfigure. For more information, see section 14.1 “Icons” on
page 475. The highlighted I/O point is flashing to indicate that you are in
configuration mode.
The Unconfigured icon indicates an I/O point that you can configure locally.
The Input locally configured icon and Output locally configured icon
indicate locally configured I/O points, which you can reconfigure or unconfigure.
Figure: I/O list screen showing two unconfigured outputs and two locally configured
outputs
13.14.1 Configure a Universal Input/Output

There are three universal input/output types: Ua, Ub, and Uc. Depending on
which of these three types you have, you can locally configure different types of
inputs and analog outputs.
Analog output types
Table: Analog Output Types Supported by Ua, Ub, and Uc Universal I/O Types
Analog Output Ua Ub Uc
Type
Voltage output X X X

454
13 Output Override
Continued
Analog Output Ua Ub Uc
Type
Current output - - X
Input types
Table: Input Types Supported by Ua, Ub, and Uc Universal I/O Types
Input Type Ua Ub Uc
Digital input X X X
Counter input X X X
Voltage input X X X
Temperature input X X X
Resistive input X X X
2-Wire RTD input X X X
Supervised input X X X
Current input - X X
Thermistor types for temperature inputs

You can configure a temperature input for use with one of the following thermistor
types:
• 10K ACC: 10 kohm Type I (Continuum) thermistor or SpaceLogic Resistive
Temperature Sensor
• 1.8K TAC: 1.8 kohm Xenta thermistor
• 10K CSI: 10 kohm Type II (I/NET) thermistor
• 10K Satchwell: 10 kohm Type III (Satchwell) thermistor
• 10K S-well linear: 10 kohm linearized (Satchwell D?T) thermistor
• 10K Invensys: 10 kohm Type IV (FD) thermistor
• 10K I-sys: 10 kohm linearized Type V (FD with 11 kohm shunt) thermistor
• 1K Balco: 1 kohm Balco thermistor
• 20K Honeywell: 20 kohm Honeywell thermistor
• 2.2K J Controls: 2.2 kohm Johnson Controls thermistor
Circuit types and resistors for supervised inputs

You can configure a supervised input for use with one of the following supervised
circuit types:
• NO Series: Normally Open (NO) circuit with a resistor connected in series
with the switch

455
13 Output Override
• NC Series: Normally Closed (NC) circuit with a resistor connected in series

with the switch
• NO Parallel: Normally Open (NO) circuit with a resistor connected in parallel
with the switch
• NC Parallel: Normally Closed (NC) circuit with a resistor connected in
parallel with the switch
• NO Series/Parallel: Normally Open (NO) circuit with one resistor connected
in series with the switch and one resistor connected in parallel with the
switch
• NC Series/Parallel: Normally Closed (NC) circuit with one resistor connected
in series with the switch and one resistor connected in parallel with the
switch
You also configure the resistor value for the supervised circuit.
13.14.2 Configure a Digital Output

There are three digital output types: relay output, triac output, and high power
relay output. Depending on which of these three types you have, you have
different options for locally configuring the digital output.
Table: Digital Output Types Supported by Relay, Triac, and High Power Relay
Outputs
Digital Output Type Relay Output Triac Output High Power Relay
Output
Digital Output X X X
Digital Pulsed X X X
Output
Tristate Output X X -
Tristate Pulsed X X -
Output
When you configure a digital output as a tristate output, the selected output point
and the next output point form a pair.
Figure: A pair of tristate output points
Similarly, when you configure a digital output as a tristate pulsed output, the
selected output point and the next output point form a pair.

456
13 Output Override
Figure: A pair of tristate pulsed output points
13.14.3 Configure a Digital Input

A digital input can be locally configured as one of the following types:
• Digital input
• Counter input

457
13 Output Override
13.15 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Ua or Ub Type as an Analog Output
13.15 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of

Ua or Ub Type as an Analog Output
You use the override display to locally configure a universal input/output point of
Ua or Ub type as an analog output when the I/O point has not been configured
through WorkStation.
To configure a universal input/output of Ua or Ub type as an

analog output
1. Press and hold down the Home key for three seconds.
2. Highlight IO Configuration.

4. Highlight the universal input/output point of Ua or Ub type that you want to
configure.


458
13 Output Override
13.15 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Ua or Ub Type as an Analog Output
6. Highlight OUT.

459
13 Output Override
13.16 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Uc Type as an Analog Output
13.16 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of

Uc Type as an Analog Output
You use the override display to locally configure a universal input/output point of
Uc type as an analog output when the I/O point has not been configured through
WorkStation.
To configure a universal input/output of Uc type as an analog

output

4. Highlight the universal input/output point of Uc type that you want to
configure.


460
13 Output Override
13.16 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Uc Type as an Analog Output
6. Highlight OUT.

8. Highlight an analog output type. For more information, see section 13.14
“Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use” on page 454.

461
13 Output Override
13.17 Configuring a Universal Input/Output as an Input
13.17 Configuring a Universal Input/Output as

an Input
You use the override display to locally configure a universal input/output point as
an input when the I/O point has not been configured through WorkStation.
To configure a universal input/output as an input

4. Highlight the universal input/output point that you want to configure.

6. Highlight IN.

462
13 Output Override

8. Highlight an input type. For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure
Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use” on page 454.

10. If you select Temp Sensor, highlight a thermistor type. For more
information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary
Use” on page 454.

12. If you select Supervised, highlight a supervised circuit type. For more
information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary
Use” on page 454.


463
13 Output Override
14. If you select Supervised, select also the resistor value.

464
13 Output Override
13.18 Configuring a Digital Output

You use the override display to locally configure a digital output when the output
has not been configured through WorkStation.
To configure a digital output

4. Highlight the digital output point that you want to configure.

6. Highlight OUT.


465
13 Output Override
8. Highlight an output type. For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure

10. If you select Digital Pulsed or Tristate Pulsed, select the pulse period
value.

466
13 Output Override
13.19 Configuring a Digital Input

You use the override display to locally configure a digital input when the input has
not been configured through WorkStation.
To configure a digital input

4. Highlight the digital input point that you want to configure.

6. Highlight IN.


467
13 Output Override
8. Highlight an input type. For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure

468
13 Output Override
13.20 Removing a Configuration for an Input or Output
13.20 Removing a Configuration for an Input

or Output
You use the override display to remove a local configuration for an input or output
when you no longer need the configuration.
To remove a configuration for an input or output

4. Highlight the locally configured input or output point for which you want to
remove the configuration.


469
13 Output Override
13.20 Removing a Configuration for an Input or Output
6. Highlight Unconfigured.

470
13 Output Override
13.21 Exiting Configuration Mode
13.21 Exiting Configuration Mode

You exit the configuration mode when you do not want to configure any more
inputs or outputs.
To exit configuration mode
1. Press the Back key until the I/O Configuration screen appears.
2. Highlight Exit.

471
14 Output Override User
Interface
Topics
Icons
Home Screen on AS-B Servers
Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module
I/O Filter Screen
I/O List Screen
Output Override Screen
I/O Configuration Screen
I/O Selection Screen
Digital Output Configuration Screen
Pulse Period Configuration Screen
Digital Input Configuration Screen
Analog Output Configuration Screen
Universal Input/Output Configuration Screen
Temperature Input Configuration Screen
Supervised Input Configuration Screen
Supervised Resistor Configuration Screen
Status Screen on AS-B Servers
About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display
About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module
14
14 Output Override User Interface
14.1 Icons
14.1 Icons
Use the icons on the override display screens to view the configuration and the
present values of the I/O points.
Table: Icons
Icon Description
Input
Indicates that an I/O point is configured as
an input point.
Output
Indicates that an I/O point is configured as
an output point.
Unconfigured
Indicates that an I/O point is unconfigured.
Input locally configured

Indicates that an input point is locally
configured through the override display.
Output locally configured

Indicates that an output point is locally
configured through the override display.
Open
Indicates that a digital input point or digital
output point is inactive (off).
Closed
Indicates that a digital input point or digital
output point is active (on).
Short-circuit
Indicates a short-circuit for a universal
input/output that is configured as a
supervised input point.
Open circuit
Indicates an open circuit for a universal
input/output that is configured as a
supervised input point.
Digital pulsed output

Indicates that a digital output is configured
as a digital pulsed output point.
Tristate outputs: On
Indicates that a pair of digital outputs is
configured as tristate output points and that
the first output point is active (on) and the
second output point is inactive (off).

475
14.1 Icons
Continued
Icon Description
Tristate outputs: Off

both the first and second output point are
inactive (off).
Tristate outputs: -On

the first output point is inactive (off) and the
second output point is active (on).
Tristate pulsed outputs

configured as tristate pulsed output points.
Hand
Indicates that an output point is manually
overridden.
Edit
Indicates that an output point's control
mode and override value can be changed.

476
14.2 Home Screen on AS-B Servers
14.2 Home Screen on AS-B Servers

Use the Home screen to get information on the AS-B server host name and IP
address.
Figure: Home screen on AS-B servers
Table: Home screen on AS-B Servers

Component Description
[Host name] Displays the AS-B server host name.
eth1:[IP address] Displays the AS-B server IP address.

477
14.3 Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module
14.3 Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module

Use the Home screen to get information on the MP-C or IP-IO module model
name, BACnet ID, and TCP/IP configuration settings.
Figure: Home screen on MP-C or IP-IO module
Table: Home screen on MP-C or IP-IO module

[Model name] Displays the MP-C or IP-IO module model

name.
BACnet ID: [BACnet ID] Displays the MP-C or IP-IO module BACnet
ID.
IP Assign: [Assignment method] Displays the IP address assignment

method used for assigning an IP address to
the MP-C or IP-IO module. For more
information, see the IP Address
Assignment for SmartX IP Controllers topic
on WebHelp.
IP: [IP address] Displays the MP-C or IP-IO module IP

address.
SM: [Subnet mask] Displays the subnet mask, which is used to

determine what subnet the MP-C or IP-IO
module belongs to.
GW: [Default gateway] Displays the default gateway (router)

address.
MAC: [MAC address] Displays the MP-C or IP-IO module MAC

address.

478
14.4 I/O Filter Screen
14.4 I/O Filter Screen

Use the I/O Filter screen to get information on the number of inputs, outputs, and
manually overridden outputs, and to filter the I/O List screen on inputs, outputs,
and manually overridden outputs.
Figure: I/O filter screen
Table: I/O Filter Screen

IN Select to filter the I/O List screen on inputs.
OUT Select to filter the I/O List screen on

outputs.
HAND Select to filter the I/O List screen on

manually overridden outputs.
ALL Select to display all inputs and outputs on

the I/O List screen.
Count Displays the following numbers:

• IN: The number of I/O points that are
configured as inputs.
• OUT: The number of I/O points that
are configured as outputs.
• HAND: The portion of the outputs that
are manually overriden.
• ALL: The total number of I/O points,
including unconfigured I/O points.

479
14.5 I/O List Screen
14.5 I/O List Screen

Use the I/O List screen to navigate through the list of I/O points, identify their
configuration, view their present values, and identify if an I/O point has a manual
override or not.
Figure: I/O list screen
Table: I/O List Screen

I/O point Displays the I/O points in a list.

Displays a flashing highlighted I/O point
when you are in configuration mode.
Configuration Indicates if and how the I/O point is

configured. For more information, see
section 14.1 “Icons” on page 475.
Active value Displays the present value of the I/O point.
Manual override Indicates if an output has a manual

override or not.
Scroll bar Indicates where on the I/O list you are

located.

480
14.6 Output Override Screen
14.6 Output Override Screen

Use the Output Override screen to manually override an output or to remove an
override for an output.
Figure: Output override screen
Table: Output Override Screen

I/O point Displays the selected I/O point.
Active value Displays the present value of the I/O point.
Configuration Indicates that the I/O point is an output.
Edit Indicates that the control mode and

override value can be changed.
Active mode Indicates what control mode the I/O point is

in.
Mode Displays the available control modes.
Manual override Indicates if an output has a manual

override or not.
Hand value Select the manual override value.
Auto value Displays the program controlled value.

481
14.7 I/O Configuration Screen
14.7 I/O Configuration Screen

Use the I/O Configuration screen to locally configure inputs and outputs, to go to
the About screen or Status screen, and to exit the configuration mode.
Figure: I/O configuration screen
Table: I/O Configuration Screen

IO Configuration Select to locally configure inputs and

outputs.
About Select to go to the About screen.

For more information, see section 14.18
“About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display”
on page 493.
“About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module”
on page 494.
Status Select to go to the Status screen (on AS-B

servers). For more information, see section
14.17 “Status Screen on AS-B Servers” on
page 492.
Exit Select to exit the configuration mode and

return to the Home screen.

482
14.8 I/O Selection Screen
14.8 I/O Selection Screen

Use the I/O Selection screen to locally configure an input or output or to remove
a local configuration for an input or output.
Figure: I/O selection screen
Table: I/O Selection Screen

Unconfigured Select to remove a local configuration for

an input or output.
IN Select to locally configure an input.
OUT Select to locally configure an output.

483
14.9 Digital Output Configuration Screen
14.9 Digital Output Configuration Screen

Use the Digital Output Configuration screen to configure a digital output point,
a digital pulsed output point, a pair of tristate output points, or a pair of tristate
pulsed output points.
Figure: Digital output configuration screen
Table: Digital Output Configuration Screen

Digital Select to configure a digital output point.
Digital Pulsed Select to configure a digital pulsed output

point.
Tristate Select to configure the selected output

point and the next output point as a pair of
tristate output points.
Tristate Pulsed Select to configure the selected output

point and the next output point as a pair of
tristate pulsed output points.

484
14.10 Pulse Period Configuration Screen
14.10 Pulse Period Configuration Screen

Use the Pulse Period Configuration screen to configure a pulse period for a
digital pulsed output or tristate pulsed output.
Figure: Pulse period configuration screen
Table: Pulse Period Configuration Screen

Period Select a pulse period in seconds to use for

the digital pulsed output or tristate pulsed
output.

485
14.11 Digital Input Configuration Screen
14.11 Digital Input Configuration Screen

Use the Digital Input Configuration screen to configure a digital input or
counter input.
Figure: Digital input configuration screen
Table: Digital Input Configuration Screen

Digital Select to configure a digital input.
Counter Select to configure a counter input.

486
14.12 Analog Output Configuration Screen
14.12 Analog Output Configuration Screen

Use the Analog Output Configuration screen to configure a voltage output or
current output.
Figure: Analog output configuration screen
Table: Analog Output Configuration Screen

Voltage Select to configure a voltage output.
Current Select to configure a current output.

487
14.13 Universal Input/Output Configuration Screen
14.13 Universal Input/Output Configuration

Screen
Use the Universal Input/Output Configuration screen to locally configure a
digital input, counter input, voltage input, temperature input, resistive input, 2-wire
RTD input, supervised input, or current input.
Figure: Universal input/output configuration screen
Table: Universal Input/Output Configuration Screen

Digital Select to configure a digital input.
Counter Select to configure a counter input.
Voltage Select to configure a voltage input.
Temp Sensor Select to configure a temperature input.
Resistance Select to configure a resistive input.
2-Wire RTD Select to configure a 2-wire RTD input.
Supervised Select to configure a supervised input.
Current Select to configure a current input.

488
14.14 Temperature Input Configuration Screen
14.14 Temperature Input Configuration Screen

Use the Temperature Input Configuration screen to configure a thermistor type
to use for a temperature input.
Figure: Temperature input configuration screen
Table: Temperature Input Configuration Screen

10K ACC Select to use a 10 kohm Type I

(Continuum) thermistor or SpaceLogic
Resistive Temperature Sensor
(SLAnXXXa).
1.8K TAC Select to use a 1.8 kohm Xenta thermistor.
10K CSI Select to use a 10 kohm Type II (I/NET)

thermistor.
10K Satchwell Select to use a 10 kohm Type III

(Satchwell) thermistor.
10K S-well linear Select to use a 10 kohm linearized

(Satchwell D?T) thermistor.
10K Invensys Select to use a 10 kohm Type IV (FD)

thermistor.
10K I-sys linear Select to use a 10 kohm linearized Type V

(FD with 11 kohm shunt) thermistor.
1K Balco Select to use a 1 kohm Balco thermistor.
20K Honeywell Select to use a 20 kohm Honeywell

thermistor.
2.2K J Controls Select to use a 2.2 kohm Johnson Controls

thermistor.
a) The fourth character (“n”) of this model number indicates the housing: S (Medium matte white), W
(Optimum glass white), or B (Optimum glass black). The model number SXWSATXXXRXX is
replaced by SLASXXX

489
14.15 Supervised Input Configuration Screen
14.15 Supervised Input Configuration Screen

Use the Supervised Input Configuration screen to configure a supervised
circuit type to use for a supervised input.
Figure: Supervised input configuration screen
Table: Supervised Input Configuration Screen

NO Series Select to use a Normally Open (NO) circuit

with a resistor connected in series with the
switch.
NC Series Select to use a Normally Closed (NC)

circuit with a resistor connected in series
with the switch.
NO Parallel Select to use a Normally Open (NO) circuit

with a resistor connected in parallel with the
switch.
NC Parallel Select to use a Normally Closed (NC)

circuit with a resistor connected in parallel
with the switch.
NO Series/Parallel Select to use a Normally Open (NO) circuit

with one resistor connected in series with
the switch and one resistor connected in
parallel with the switch.
NC Series/Parallel Select to use a Normally Closed (NC)

circuit with one resistor connected in series
with the switch and one resistor connected
in parallel with the switch.

490
14.16 Supervised Resistor Configuration Screen
14.16 Supervised Resistor Configuration

Screen
Use the Supervised Resistor Configuration screen to configure a resistor
value of a supervised circuit for use with a supervised input.
Figure: Supervised resistor configuration screen
Table: Supervised Resistor Configuration Screen

Resistor Select a resistor value in ohm to use for the

supervised input.

491
14.17 Status Screen on AS-B Servers
14.17 Status Screen on AS-B Servers

The Status screen on AS-B servers displays deep technical information that is
useful for R&D and debug purposes only. The displayed information is not
intended to be used for operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the
system.
Figure: Status screen on AS-B servers

492
14.18 About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display
14.18 About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display

Use the About screen to get information on the firmware for the AS-B server I/O
CPU.
Figure: About screen on AS-B servers
Table: About Screen on AS-B Servers

IOCPU Firmware: [Version] Displays the firmware version for the AS-B
server I/O CPU.
[Date and time] Displays the date and time when the
firmware version was created.

493
14.19 About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module
14.19 About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module

Use the About screen to get information on the firmware for the MP-C or IP-IO
module I/O CPU and main CPU.
Figure: About screen on MP-C or IP-IO module
Table: About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module

IO Firmware: Displays the firmware version for the MP-C

or IP-IO module I/O CPU.
[Version]
CPU Firmware: Displays the firmware version for the MP-C

or IP-IO module main CPU.
[Version]

494
15 IP-IO Modules
Topics
IP-IO Modules
IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types
IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply
IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards
IP-IO Module Communication Ports
IP-IO Module Screw Terminals
IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals
IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals
IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals
IP-IO Module LEDs
IP-IO Module Reset Modes
IP-IO Module Device Installation
Installing an IP-IO Module on a DIN Rail
Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface
Installing MP-C Display
Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module
Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-IO Module
Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module
Powering Up an IP-IO Module
Digital Inputs
15 Universal Inputs/Outputs
Relay Outputs
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules

The IP-IO module provides I/O expansion to your HVAC application over
BACnet/IP and can share their I/O resources across applications running in
automation servers, BACnet/IP controllers, or third-party systems. The IP-IO
module can be installed near facilities in the field, away from the automation
server or the BACnet/IP controller.
The IP-IO module allows for flexible control options due to the dual Ethernet ports
and the versatile mix of digital inputs, universal inputs/outputs, relay outputs, and
high power relay outputs.
When IP-IO modules are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, you can take full
advantage of the existing EcoStruxure Building Operation engineering tools.
The IP-IO module device can be installed on a DIN rail or other flat surface inside
a cabinet.
All IP-IO models can be equipped with MP-C Display, which is an optional add-on
module for output override. The MP-C Display can also be used to view and
locally configure inputs and outputs.
Figure: IP-IO module
15.1.1 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types

The IP-IO module comes in three models with different I/O point count and
different I/O point types.
For more information, see section 15.2 “IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point
Types” on page 503.
15.1.2 Output Override Function (Optional)


497
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules
15.1.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply

The IP-IO module has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC
at 50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC input power.
For more information, see section 15.3 “IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply” on
page 505.
15.1.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory

page 574.
15.1.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards

As a result, the IP-IO module complies with the BACnet open standard, one of
the most popular standards for buildings.
For more information, see section 15.5 “IP-IO Module Supported Building
15.1.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports

The IP-IO module contains a combination of Ethernet and USB communication
ports.
For more information, see section 15.6 “IP-IO Module Communication Ports” on
page 508.
15.1.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals

The IP-IO module is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The
IP-IO module uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and
remove from the device.
For more information, see section 15.7 “IP-IO Module Screw Terminals” on page
509.

498
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules
15.1.8 IP-IO Module LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front panel of the IP-IO module.
For more information, see section 15.11 “IP-IO Module LEDs” on page 518.
15.1.9 IP-IO Module Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the IP-IO modules in different ways depending on how
For more information, see section 15.12 “IP-IO Module Reset Modes” on page
520.
15.1.10 IP-IO Module Device Installation

a cabinet.
page 523.
15.1.11 Wiring


499
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules
AC input
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption 17 VA
DC input
Maximum power consumption 9W
Environment
Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) at normal operationa

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) for rooftop applications, horizontal installation onlya
a) MP-C Display has an operating temperature range of -30 to +60 °C (-22 to +140 °F).
Material
Plastic flame rating UL94-5V
Mechanical

500
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules
Weight, IP-IO-DI10
Weight, IP-IO-UIO10
Weight, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4
Installation DIN rail or other flat surface inside a cabinet
Real-time clock
Communication ports

Communications

BTL B-ASC (BACnet Application Specific Controller)a
CPU
Frequency 500 MHz
DDR3 SDRAM 128 MB

501
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules
MP-C Display (Optional)
Removable No
Power consumption max. 0.15 W (45 mA at 3.3 V)
Ambient temperature, operating -30 to +60 °C (-22 to +140 °F)
Weight 0.035 kg (0.077 lb)

The IP-IO module internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is
Figure: IP-IO module internal configuration

502
15 IP-IO Modules
15.2 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types
15.2 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point

Types
The IP-IO module comes in three models with different I/O point count and
different I/O point types.
Model I/O Points
IP-IO-DI10 10
IP-IO-UIO10 10
IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 9
All IP-IO module models have the same small footprint.

The versatile mix of I/O point types match a wide variety of applications. The
universal inputs/outputs are highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs
or outputs.
Table: I/O Point Types by IP-IO Models

I/O Point Types IP-IO-DI10 IP-IO-UIO10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4
Digital inputs 10 - -
Universal I/O - 10 5
Type Ub
Relay outputs - - 3
Form A
High power relay outputs - - 1

Form A



503
15 IP-IO Modules
15.2 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types



504
15 IP-IO Modules
15.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply
15.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply

The IP-IO module has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC
at 50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC input power.
To power the IP-IO module, you can use a transformer or a DC power supply:
power
For more information, see the SmartX IP Controller - IP-IO Modules topic on
WebHelp.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
device.
NOTICE

505
15 IP-IO Modules

scenarios.

506
15 IP-IO Modules
15.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards
15.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building

Standards
As a result, the IP-IO module complies with the BACnet open standard, one of
the most popular standards for buildings.
The IP-IO module can natively communicate with BACnet/IP networks. When the
IP-IO module is part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the BACnet protocol is used for
communication between the device and its parent EcoStruxure BMS server and
other BACnet devices on the IP network, including BACnet/IP controllers. As a
native BACnet/IP device, the IP-IO module supports BACnet services such as
trends and alarms, and the IP-IO module can communicate with other BACnet
devices on a BACnet/IP network. The IP-IO module conforms to the BACnet
Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) device profile.

507
15 IP-IO Modules
15.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports
15.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports

The IP-IO module contains a combination of Ethernet and USB communication
ports.
This combination includes the following ports:
• Two 10/100 Ethernet ports
• One USB host port
• One USB device port
When both Ethernet ports are enabled, they function as an onboard Ethernet
switch. Disabling the second Ethernet port disables the switching function. The
switching function enables flexible network topologies. For more information, see
the Advantages to Using External Bindings topic on WebHelp. The second port
also provides a connection point for a laptop running the Commission mobile
application.
The two USB ports are reserved for future use.

508
15 IP-IO Modules
15.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals
15.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals

The IP-IO module is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The
IP-IO module uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and
remove from the device.
The only exception is the high power relay output on the IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4
model, which uses a two-position fixed terminal block due to current
requirements.
15.7.1 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-DI10 has 10 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 15.8 “IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals” on page
510.
15.7.2 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-UIO10 has 10 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
For more information, see section 15.9 “IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals” on page
512.
15.7.3 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 has 9 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
For more information, see section 15.10 “IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals”
on page 515.

509
15 IP-IO Modules
15.8 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-DI10 has 10 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, IP-IO-DI10

digital inputs
Table: Screw Terminals, IP-IO-DI10

Power input
1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 17 VA

24-30 VDC, 9 W

510
15 IP-IO Modules
Continued

24-30 VDC, 9 W

(optional).
Digital inputs

terminals

terminals

terminals

terminals

terminals

511
15 IP-IO Modules
15.9 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-UIO10 has 10 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, IP-IO-UIO10

Table: Screw Terminals, IP-IO-UIO10

Power input
1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 17 VA

24-30 VDC, 9 W

512
15 IP-IO Modules
Continued

24-30 VDC, 9 W

(optional).

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

513
15 IP-IO Modules
Continued

Ub

terminals

Ub

514
15 IP-IO Modules
15.10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 has 9 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4

• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the three relay outputs
• One 6-position plus one 2-position pluggable terminal blocks for the five
Table: Screw Terminals, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4

Power input
1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 17 VA

24-30 VDC, 9 W

515
15 IP-IO Modules
Continued

24-30 VDC, 9 W

(optional).
Relay outputs

type Form A

type Form A

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

516
15 IP-IO Modules
Continued

Ub

Ub

terminals

517
15 IP-IO Modules
15.11 IP-IO Module LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front panel of the IP-IO module.
Figure: IP-IO module LEDs
Table: IP-IO Module LEDs

Function Color
Status (IP-IO module) Green/Red
NOTE: The IP-IO module Ethernet and Status indicators comprise two
LEDs (green/yellow and green/red respectively) in one structure.
The LEDs indicate status of the IP-IO module and the ongoing communication.
15.11.1 Status LED

The IP-IO module Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: IP-IO Module Status LED Patterns




attention
Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) IP-IO module I/O board receiving software
upgrade, wait
Amber, constant IP-IO module firmware boot applet running

518
15 IP-IO Modules
Continued

IP-IO module firmware boot applet started
15.11.2 Ethernet LEDs

communication.

Green/yellow, constant 10/100 Mbit link connected, no activity
No light No link, no activity

519
15 IP-IO Modules
15.12 IP-IO Module Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the IP-IO modules in different ways depending on how
Figure: Location of the reset button on the IP-IO module
reset button.
Table: Reset Modes

Mode Description

than 5 seconds.
start.

seconds.

seconds.

seconds.

520
15 IP-IO Modules
Continued
Mode Description
button.
TIP: If the IP-IO module is equipped with the MP-C Display add-on module,
a count-up timer and progress bar are displayed to assist in reset selection.
There is also a reset mode indicator that lets you know which reset occurs if
you release at that time.

In WorkStation, if your BACnet/IP device seems completely unresponsive,
perform a factory reset to restore the device to a state where it can be
successfully commissioned. After you release the reset button, a factory reset
TIP: After a physical factory reset in a BACnet/IP controller, any controller
proxy object in the EcoStruxure BMS database that carries the serial number
of that controller may trigger an automatic association. This association
occurs between the reset physical controller and the controller proxy object
in the EcoStruxure BMS database.

variable is retained after a restart of the IP-IO module. There are three retain
levels:
• No
• Warm start
• Cold start

521
15 IP-IO Modules
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
retained. retained.
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
lost. retained.
a
TIP: Although variable values in IP-IO modules are retained in accordance
with this matrix, automation server retention behaves differently. As a result,
variable values retained in the server that are not retained in the IP-IO
module may be restored to the module during a download command. For

following:


522
15 IP-IO Modules
15.13 IP-IO Module Device Installation

a cabinet.
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing the IP-IO module
along with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most efficient
with adequate space provided between the IP-IO module rail and adjacent rails
or other panel-mounted devices.
The IP-IO module is typically installed horizontally (on a DIN rail going from left to
right), with the device label text in the upright position reading left to right.
Figure: IP-IO module installed on a horizontal DIN rail
The restrictions on installing the device in other orientations differ depending on

the operating conditions.
NOTICE
Follow the installation orientation restrictions that apply to the specific
BACnet/IP device.
Under normal operating conditions of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F), the IP-IO module
can be installed in the following orientations:
Installing the IP-IO module rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal position with
device label text up and down (“e” in the figure), face down from a ceiling (“d” in
the figure), or face up on a horizontal surface (“f” in the figure) is not supported.

523
15 IP-IO Modules
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for the IP-IO module operated in normal
conditions, 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
When the IP-IO module is used for rooftop applications, -40 to +60 °C (-40 to
+140 °F), the device should be installed horizontally, with the device label text in
the upright position reading left to right. See “a” in the following figure. Any other
installation orientation (“b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, and “f” in the figure) may exceed the IP-IO
module's thermal specifications, which can damage the module.
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for the IP-IO module operated at -40 to +60 °C (-
40 to +140 °F)
The IP-IO module can be installed in a standard DIN enclosure.

When installing IP-IO modules in a cabinet, it is recommended to provide ample
space between the DIN rails and modules for sufficient ventilation.

524
15 IP-IO Modules
Figure: IP-IO modules installed on horizontal DIN rails in a cabinet
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Figure: End clip for DIN 35 fixed across the DIN rail
The IP-IO module is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device.
The terminal blocks are removable. You can replace an IP-IO module in seconds
because no terminal wiring is affected. The only exception is the high power relay
output on the IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 model, which uses a two-position fixed terminal
block due to current requirements.

525
15 IP-IO Modules
All IP-IO module models can be equipped with MP-C Display (part number
SXWMPCDSP10001), which is an add-on module that enables manual override
control of analog and digital outputs. The module consists of an LCD display and
keys. The module is designed for permanent installation.
Figure: MP-C Display installed on an IP-IO module
Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module as it may damage the enclosure
and the module. Once installed, the MP-C Display module cannot be removed.
NOTICE

526
15 IP-IO Modules
15.14 Installing an IP-IO Module on a DIN Rail
15.14 Installing an IP-IO Module on a DIN Rail

You install an IP-IO module on a DIN rail inside a cabinet to ensure that the
device is securely fastened and to allow for sufficient ventilation.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
page 523.
To install an IP-IO module on a DIN rail


5. For a vertical DIN rail, install an end clip (stop) below the device.

527
15 IP-IO Modules
15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface
15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat

Surface
You install an IP-IO module on a flat surface inside a cabinet to ensure that the
device is securely fastened and to allow for sufficient ventilation.
page 523.
To install an IP-IO module on a flat surface

1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the IP-IO module.
4. Find a suitable location and surface on which to mount the IP-IO module.

528
15 IP-IO Modules
• Two holes for the top two screws on which you hang the IP-IO module
• One hole for the screw at the bottom that prevents the device from
the IP-IO module.
NOTE: You can also use the 1:1 drill template in the installation sheet
that comes with each IP-IO module.

529
15 IP-IO Modules

head of the screw (or anchor) and the flat surface to accommodate the IP-IO
module material thickness.
7. Fit the two keyhole slots on the back of the IP-IO module enclosure to the
heads of the mounted screws (or anchors) and then slide the IP-IO module
down in place on the screws (or anchors).

530
15 IP-IO Modules
8. Fit the bottom screw (or anchor) to the hole at the bottom of the IP-IO
module and tighten the screw (or anchor).

531
15 IP-IO Modules

You install an MP-C Display module on the MP-C or IP-IO module to enable
manual override control of the analog and digital outputs. The MP-C Display
module cannot be removed.
NOTICE
Take proper precautions before handling the display module to prevent
damage from electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Disconnect power to the MP-C or IP-IO module before installing the MP-C
Display module. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.
page 523.
To install MP-C Display

1. Disconnect power to the MP-C or IP-IO module.
2. Locate the blank face plate on the MP-C or IP-IO module.

532
15 IP-IO Modules
3. Push and hold the two tabs on the blank face plate.
4. Remove the blank face plate by pulling it straight out.

533
15 IP-IO Modules
5. Install the MP-C Display module in place of the blank face plate.
NOTICE

534
15 IP-IO Modules
15.17 Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module
15.17 Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO

Module
You install the terminal blocks on an IP-IO module to add or enable wiring for the
device.
page 523.
To install a terminal block on an IP-IO module

NOTICE
Use only terminal blocks delivered with the IP-IO module. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in equipment damage.
NOTICE
damage.
header.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

535
15 IP-IO Modules
15.17 Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module

536
15 IP-IO Modules
15.18 Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-IO Module
15.18 Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-

IO Module
You remove a terminal block from an IP-IO module in order to replace the
module.
page 523.
DANGER
CAUTION
equipment before removing the terminal block.
To remove a terminal block from an IP-IO module

the IP-IO module.
This only applies to the IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 model, which has relay outputs.
equipment that is connected to the IP-IO module.
connector header.

537
15 IP-IO Modules
15.18 Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-IO Module

538
15 IP-IO Modules
15.19 Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module
15.19 Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO

Module
You wire the terminal blocks installed on the IP-IO module to connect I/O devices
and power.
page 523.
DANGER
equipment.
CAUTION
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
To wire a terminal block on an IP-IO module

the IP-IO module.
This only applies to the IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 model, which has relay outputs.
equipment that is connected to the IP-IO module.
on the IP-IO module. For more information, see section 15.17 “Installing a
Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module” on page 535.
wire.

539
15 IP-IO Modules
15.19 Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module

540
15 IP-IO Modules
15.20 Powering Up an IP-IO Module

You perform the following steps to power up an IP-IO module.
page 523.
For more information, see section 15.3 “IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply” on
page 505.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
device.
To power up an IP-IO module

terminals 1 and 2.
NOTICE
The IP-IO module input power polarity and voltage level must be strictly
damage.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE

541
15 IP-IO Modules
NOTICE
Earth ground must be properly connected to avoid damage to the device
and to ensure proper operation of the device.

542
15 IP-IO Modules
15.21 Digital Inputs

As counter inputs, digital inputs are commonly used in energy metering
applications.
15.21.1 Inputs
The DI digital inputs are designed to read two different types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
Digital inputs

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Counter inputs
Channels, IP-IO-DI10 10, DI1 to DI10
Channels, IP-IO-UIO10 0
Channels, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 0

543
15 IP-IO Modules
mA
Digital inputs
mA
Counter inputs
mA

544
15 IP-IO Modules

system.
The IP-IO-UIO10 and IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 models have universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub.
15.22.1 Inputs
inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive
Digital inputs

545
15 IP-IO Modules
VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Counter inputs
Supervised inputs
the I/O.
• Series only
• Parallel only

RS = 1 to 10 kohm

546
15 IP-IO Modules
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a detected fault and the shorted wiring
shows as an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only
supervised input connection is shown in the following figure.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
following figure.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

547
15 IP-IO Modules
Voltage inputs

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs

RSH = 47 ohm
Temperature inputs

548
15 IP-IO Modules

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

Resistive inputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

549
15 IP-IO Modules

following figure.

VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
value.
15.22.2 Outputs
Voltage outputs

550
15 IP-IO Modules

Channels, IP-IO-DI10 0
Channels, IP-IO-UIO10 10 Ub, Ub1 to Ub10
Channels, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 5 Ub, Ub1 to Ub5
Digital inputs
mA
Counter inputs
mA
Supervised inputs

Voltage inputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Resolution 1.0 mV
Impedance 100 kohm
Current inputs
Range 0 to 20 mA

551
15 IP-IO Modules
Resolution 1 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive inputs


Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Honeywell 20 kohm
Xenta 1.8 kohm
Balco 1 kohm
20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)

552
15 IP-IO Modules
Pt1000

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +70 °C (-58 to +158 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) 70 to 150 °C (158 to 302 °F) +/-0.7 °C (+/-1.3 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-1.0 °C (+/-1.8 °F)
Ni1000

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
LG-Ni1000

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

Voltage outputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-60 mV
Resolution 10 mV

553
15 IP-IO Modules
15.23 Relay Outputs
15.23 Relay Outputs

• Digital output
• Tristate output
output point.
15.23.1 Outputs
from signal ground.
Channels, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 3, DO1 to DO3

Normally Open

554
15 IP-IO Modules
15.23 Relay Outputs

555
15 IP-IO Modules

• Digital output
output point.
15.24.1 Outputs
The DO high power relay outputs are Form A digital outputs, which means the
outputs are normally open contacts with one common terminal (C) and one
Channels, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 1, DO4
Contact rating 250 VAC/24 VDC, 12 A, Pilot Duty (B300)

Normally Open

556
15 IP-IO Modules

557
16 RP-C Controllers
Topics
RP-C Controllers
RP-C Models
RP-C Onboard I/O
RP-C Built-in Power Supply
BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards
RP-C Wireless Connectivity
RP-C Communication Ports
RP-C Sensor Bus
Connecting SpaceLogic Sensor Devices to an RP-C
Controller
RP-C Room Bus
RP-C Modbus
RP-C Screw Terminals
RP-C-12A Screw Terminals
RP-C-12B Screw Terminals
RP-C-12C Screw Terminals
RP-C-16A Screw Terminals
RP-C LEDs
RP Controller Reset Modes
RP-C Device Installation
16 Installing RP-C on a DIN Rail
Installing RP-C on a Flat Surface
Wiring a Screw Terminal on RP-C
Powering Up an RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C Controller
Powering Up an RP-C-16A Controller
Installing the Optional Covers on the RP-C
Removing an Optional Cover from the RP-C
24 VAC Output on the RP-C-16A Controller
Solid-state Relay (SSR) Outputs
Relay Outputs
RP-C Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
16 RP-C Controllers
16.1 RP-C Controllers

The RP-C controller is a room-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller. The RP-C models offer a flexible mix of I/O point types that suit a wide
range of HVAC applications. The controller can either be used as a standalone
BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS with an AS-P or AS-
B server or an Enterprise Server as the parent server. The RP-C features a
wireless chip that allows a mobile device running the Commission mobile
application to connect directly to the controller.
The RP-C allows for flexible control solutions due to the dual Ethernet ports, the
interface to SpaceLogic Sensor devices, the interface for support of Connected
Room Solution (CRS) devices, and the versatile mix of universal inputs/outputs,
solid-state relay (SSR) outputs, relay outputs, and high power relay outputs.
When RP-Cs are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, you can take full advantage of the
Figure: RP-C
16.1.1 RP-C Models

The RP-C comes in four different models, which offer four different sets of I/O
point types, named 12A, 12B, 12C, and 16A.
For more information, see section 16.2 “RP-C Models” on page 570.
16.1.2 RP-C Onboard I/O

The RP-C-12A, -12B, -12C, and -16A models provide 12 or 16 I/O points,
consisting of four different sets of I/O point types. The versatile mix of I/O point
types match a wide variety of applications. The universal inputs/outputs are
For more information, see section 16.3 “RP-C Onboard I/O” on page 571.

561
16 RP-C Controllers
16.1.3 RP-C Built-in Power Supply

The RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C models have a built-in power supply designed to
accommodate a nominal operating voltage of 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 to 30
VDC input power. The RP-C-16A model's power supply is designed for a nominal
operating voltage of 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz.
For more information, see section 16.4 “RP-C Built-in Power Supply” on page
573.
16.1.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory

page 574.

Standards
16.1.6 RP-C Wireless Connectivity

RP-C is a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) enabled product. You can use this
wireless connectivity option for connecting a smartphone or tablet running the
Commission mobile application to the RP-C.
For more information, see section 16.7 “RP-C Wireless Connectivity” on page
576.
16.1.7 RP-C Communication Ports

The RP-C provides the following combination of communication ports:
• Two Ethernet ports
• Two USB ports
• Two RS-485 ports

562
16 RP-C Controllers
For more information, see section 16.8 “RP-C Communication Ports” on page
578.
16.1.8 RP-C Sensor Bus

The RP-C sensor bus allows SpaceLogic Sensor devices to be connected to the
controller.
For more information, see section 16.9 “RP-C Sensor Bus” on page 580.
16.1.9 RP-C Room Bus

The RP-C room bus allows RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors
to be connected to the controller for motion detection, luminosity measurements,
communication with remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE), and control of electric lights
and window blinds.
For more information, see section 17.35 “RP-C Room Bus” on page 779.
16.1.10 RP-C Modbus

The RP-C Modbus network allows standard Modbus devices and the KNX
Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) to be connected to the controller.
For more information, see section 20.2 “RP-C Modbus” on page 914.
16.1.11 RP-C Screw Terminals

The RP-C has fixed screw terminals for the power input, SSR outputs, relay
outputs, high power relay outputs, and universal inputs/outputs.
For more information, see section 16.13 “RP-C Screw Terminals” on page 592.
16.1.12 RP-C LEDs

There is one LED on the front panel of the RP-C.
For more information, see section 16.18 “RP-C LEDs” on page 605.
16.1.13 RP Controller Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the RP controllers in different ways depending on how
For more information, see section 16.19 “RP Controller Reset Modes” on page
607.

563
16 RP-C Controllers
16.1.14 RP-C Device Installation

The RP-C can be installed on a DIN rail or flat surface.
For more information, see section 16.20 “RP-C Device Installation” on page 610.
16.1.15 24 VAC Output on RP-C-16A Model

The RP-C-16A model has a 24 VAC (19 VA) Class 2 output that can be used to
power external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. The external loads
can be controlled using the controller's solid-state relay (SSR) or relay outputs.
For more information, see section 16.28 “24 VAC Output on the RP-C-16A
Controller” on page 626.
16.1.16 Wiring
16.1.17 BACnet/IP Controller Device Firmware

Management
and their attached SpaceLogic Sensor devices, RP controller expansion
modules, and multi-sensors at the same time with minimum downtime. In
particular, the universal upgrade package simplifies the update process and
requires minimal user involvement and coordination.
TIP: SpaceLogic Sensor devices, RP controller expansion modules, and
multi-sensors are supported by the RP controller.
16.1.18 RP-C Regulatory Compliance and Approvals

This section provides information on regulatory compliance and approvals for the
RP-C controllers.
For more information, see section 16.33 “RP-C Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals” on page 644.

564
16 RP-C Controllers
AC input
RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C models
Operating voltage range +/-15 %
Frequency 50/60 Hz
RP-C-16A model
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption without load 5 VA

Separate PTC thermistor used as a resettable fuse for 24 VAC Out only
Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2
DC input
AC output
RP-C-16A model
Type Isolated Class 2 output
Frequency Same frequency as the power supply (50/60 Hz)

565
16 RP-C Controllers
Output power rating 19 VA
Environment
Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) at normal operation

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) for rooftop applications, horizontal installation only
RP-C-16A model
Material
Mechanical
Weight, RP-C-12A model 0.370 kg (0.816 lb)
Weight, RP-C-12B and -12C models 0.390 kg (0.860 lb)
Weight, RP-C-16A model 0.720 kg (1.587 lb)
Weight, optional covers 0.070 kg (0.154 lb)
Installation DIN rail or flat surface

566
16 RP-C Controllers
Terminal blocks Fixed
Optional covers
Real-time clock
Communication ports

RS-485 port “Sensor Bus” (Com A) 24 VDC, 2 W, RS-485 (RJ45)

Transient voltage suppressors on communication and power signals
RS-485 port “Room Bus” (Com B) 24 VDC, 3 W, RS-485 (RJ45)

Transient voltage suppressors on communication and power signals
Communications

Wireless connectivity
Bluetooth Low Energy
Communication protocol Bluetooth® 5.0 Low Energy compliant

567
16 RP-C Controllers
Frequency 2.402 to 2.480 GHz
Maximum output power 10 dBm
Maximum communication distance Line-of-sight: 100 m (328 ft)
Antenna Integrated antenna
RF connector for optional external antenna SMA connector
External antenna (optional) Restricted to the approved antenna type listed below (used in
certification)
Manufacturer Model (Part number) Gain Type Impedance
Linx Technologies ANT-2.4-WRT-MON- 0.8 dBi Monopole 50 ohm

SMA
CPU
Frequency 500 MHz
Type ARM Cortex-A7 single-core
Internal SRAM 6 MB

The RP-C internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is shown in the following figures.

568
16 RP-C Controllers
Figure: RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C models, internal configuration
Figure: RP-C-16A model, internal configuration

569
16 RP-C Controllers
16.2 RP-C Models
16.2 RP-C Models

The RP-C comes in four different models, which offer four different sets of I/O
point types, named 12A, 12B, 12C, and 16A.
The RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C models support 24 VAC/DC input power,
whereas the RP-C-16A model supports 230 VAC input power.
Figure: RP-C model number structure
Model I/O Set Input Power
RP-C-12A-F-24V 12A 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 to

30 VDC
RP-C-12B-F-24V 12B 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 to

30 VDC
RP-C-12C-F-24V 12C 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 to

30 VDC
RP-C-16A-F-230V 16A 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz
For more information, see section 16.3 “RP-C Onboard I/O” on page 571.
For more information, see section 16.4 “RP-C Built-in Power Supply” on page
573.
All RP-C models have the same small footprint.

570
16 RP-C Controllers
16.3 RP-C Onboard I/O

The RP-C-12A, -12B, -12C, and -16A models provide 12 or 16 I/O points,
consisting of four different sets of I/O point types. The versatile mix of I/O point
types match a wide variety of applications. The universal inputs/outputs are
Table: I/O Point Types by RP-C Models

I/O Point Types RP-C-12A model RP-C-12B model RP-C-12C model RP-C-16A model
Universal I/O 8 8 4 8
Type Ub
Solid-state relay 4 - 4 4
outputs
(MOSFET)
Relay outputs - 3 3 3
Form A
High power relay - 1 1 1

outputs
Form C
By utilizing its onboard I/O with connected field devices, such as sensors and
actuators, the RP-C controls and supervises equipment that can be used to suit a
wide range of HVAC applications.

16.3.2 Solid-state Relay (SSR) Outputs

The solid-state relay (SSR) outputs can be used in many applications to switch
24 VAC or 24 VDC on or off for external loads such as actuators, relays, or
indicators. SSRs are silent and are not adversely affected by relay contact wear.


571
16 RP-C Controllers


572
16 RP-C Controllers
16.4 RP-C Built-in Power Supply
16.4 RP-C Built-in Power Supply

The RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C models have a built-in power supply designed to
accommodate a nominal operating voltage of 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 to 30
VDC input power. The RP-C-16A model's power supply is designed for a nominal
operating voltage of 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz.
16.4.1 RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C Models (24

VAC/DC)
To power the controller, you can use a transformer or a DC power supply:
power
NOTICE
16.4.2 RP-C-16A Model (230 VAC)

The built-in power supply is based on a full-wave rectified, isolated design, which
is complemented with electronic protection components for transient protection,
overload protection, and EMC compliance.
With the 230 VAC input (L and N) electronically isolated from the electronics, the
risk of damage due to earth ground currents is reduced and allows the input
power to be wired without concern for polarity matching.

573
16 RP-C Controllers

scenarios.

574
16 RP-C Controllers
16.6 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards
16.6 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building

Standards
The BACnet/IP controller can natively communicate with BACnet/IP networks.
When the BACnet/IP controller is part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the BACnet
protocol is used for communication between the device and its parent
EcoStruxure BMS server and other BACnet devices on the IP network, including
BACnet/IP controllers. As a native BACnet/IP device, the BACnet/IP controller
supports BACnet services such as trends, schedules, and alarms, and the
controller can communicate with other BACnet devices on a BACnet/IP network.
BACnet/IP controller controller conforms to the BACnet Advanced Application
Controller (B-AAC) device profile.

575
16 RP-C Controllers
16.7 RP-C Wireless Connectivity

RP-C is a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) enabled product. You can use this
wireless connectivity option for connecting a smartphone or tablet running the
Commission mobile application to the RP-C.
RP-C has an integrated antenna. An optional external antenna can be connected
to the RF connector to improve the reception quality, for example, when the
controller is installed inside a metal cabinet. The RF connector is an SMA female
connector.
Figure: RF connector for connection of an optional external antenna
In addition to the integrated antenna, the RP-C controllers have also been
approved to operate with the external antenna type listed below with the
maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for the antenna type
indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the
maximum gain indicated for that type, are prohibited for use with the controllers.
Manufacturer Model (Part Gain Type Impedance

number)
Linx Technologies ANT-2.4-WRT-MON- 0.8 dBi Monopole 50 ohm

SMA
The RP-C controller (with its integrated antenna) and the optional external
antenna must be professionally installed to comply with the following rules and
regulations:
• Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules
• Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED) licence-
exempt Radio Standards Specifications (RSSs)

576
16 RP-C Controllers
• 2014/53/EU Radio Equipment Directive (RED) of the European Union (EU)


577
16 RP-C Controllers
16.8 RP-C Communication Ports

The RP-C provides the following combination of communication ports:
• Two USB ports
• Two RS-485 ports
16.8.1 Ethernet Ports

The two Ethernet ports are labelled:
• Ethernet 1
• Ethernet 2
The two Ethernet ports are 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45) ports. When both Ethernet
ports are enabled, they function as an onboard Ethernet switch. Disabling the
second Ethernet port disables the switching function. The switching function
enables flexible network topologies. For more information, see the BACnet/IP
Controller Network Topologies topic on WebHelp. The second port also provides
a connection point for a laptop running the Commission mobile application.
1177.
16.8.2 USB Ports

The two USB ports are of different types:
• USB host port
• USB device port
The USB host port is a USB 2.0 type-A port, which is rated 2.5 W. The USB host
port can be used for connection of the Zigbee Adapter to add ZigbeeTM wireless
connectivity to the RP-C controller. The Zigbee Adapter can be used to extend
the controller's point count and bring flexibility in retrofit applications. For more
information, see section 26.1.1 “” on page 1026.
The USB device port is a USB 2.0 mini-B port. The USB device port is reserved
for future use.
1177.
16.8.3 RS-485 Ports

The two RS-485 ports (RS-485 Com A and Com B) are labelled:
• Sensor Bus
• Room Bus
The Sensor Bus port (RS-485 Com A) is rated 2 W (24 VDC). The Room Bus port
(RS-485 Com B) is rated 3 W (24 VDC).

578
16 RP-C Controllers
The two RS-485 ports are RJ45 ports. For more information, see section 31.24
“RJ45 Pinout for the RS-485 Ports of the RP-C Controller ” on page 1182.
Each port can be configured to use one of the following three communication
protocols for different types of networks:
• Sensor bus
• Room bus
• Modbus
NOTE: An RP-C can have only one of each network type.
The sensor bus is designed for communication with SpaceLogic Sensor devices.
The room bus is designed for communication with RP controller expansion
modules and multi-sensors for connected room solutions. For more information,
see section 17.35 “RP-C Room Bus” on page 779.
The Modbus (RTU) network can be used for communication with the KNX
Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) and standard Modbus devices. For more
information, see section 20.2 “RP-C Modbus” on page 914.
Default configurations:
• Sensor bus on the Sensor Bus port (RS-485 Com A)
• Room bus on the Room Bus port (RS-485 Com B)
1177.

579
16 RP-C Controllers
16.9 RP-C Sensor Bus

The RP-C sensor bus allows SpaceLogic Sensor devices to be connected to the
controller.
The sensor bus is a proprietary RS-485 bus, which provides both 24 VDC power
supply and communications for the sensors.
The maximum total length of the sensor bus is 61 m (200 ft). The sensor bus
uses a Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded, straight-through wired cable with eight
conductors (four twisted pairs) and RJ45 connectors. The wire size (cross-
sectional area) should be 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²). When the RP-C
controller is installed in a space that handles conditioned air or return air, the
sensor bus cables and IP network cables frequently must be plenum-rated to
meet applicable building codes. For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring”
on page 1129.
NOTICE
By default, the RP-C controller's Sensor Bus port (RS-485 Com A) is configured
and allocated for the sensor bus. For more information, see section 16.8 “RP-C
Communication Ports” on page 578.
Figure: Location of the Sensor Bus port (RS-485 Com A) on the RP-C controllers
You can connect a single SpaceLogic Sensor to the sensor bus, or you can
connect two to four SpaceLogic Sensor devices in a daisy-chain configuration.
NOTE: When connecting SpaceLogic Sensor devices to the sensor bus
through a daisy-chain configuration, it does not matter if the incoming and

580
16 RP-C Controllers
outgoing cables are connected to one or the other sensor bus port on the
SpaceLogic Sensor.
The maximum number of SpaceLogic Sensor devices that can be connected to
the sensor bus is variable depending on the power consumption for the selected
SpaceLogic Sensor model and the combination of cover and sensor base type.
When calculating the power consumption to validate your sensor bus
configuration, ensure that you add the power consumption (mW) for all
SpaceLogic Sensor models, sensor bases, and covers used on the sensor bus to
determine the total power consumption. The sensor bus can supply maximum
2000 mW. SpaceLogic Sensor combinations totalling more than 2000 mW are
not supported. The following table can be used for calculating the total power
consumption.
Sensor base with temperature SXWSBTXXXSXX 90

sensor
Sensor base with temperature and SXWSBTHXXSXX 90

humidity sensors
Sensor base with temperature and SXWSBTXCXSXX 490

CO2 sensors
Sensor base with temperature, SXWSBTHCXSXX 490

humidity, and CO2 sensors
Blank cover SXWSCBXSELXna 0
Blank cover with occupancy sensor SXWSCBPSELXna 20
3-button cover (buttons for override SXWSC3XSELXna 190

and setpoint control)
3-button cover (buttons for override SXWSC3PSELXna 210

and setpoint control) with occupancy
sensor
Touchscreen display cover SXWSCDXSELXna 190
Touchscreen display cover with SXWSCDPSELXna 210

occupancy sensor

control buttons

control buttons and occupancy
sensor

and blind control buttons

and blind control buttons and
occupancy sensor

581
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued
Complete SpaceLogic Sensor model SXWSATXXXSLna 80

with temperature sensor, buttons for
override and setpoint control, and
LCD display cover
Complete non-communicatingb SLAnXXXc 0

SpaceLogic Sensor model with
resistive temperature sensor (10 SXWSATXXXRXXd
kohm type 3 thermistor) and blank
cover
SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adaptere SXWBTAECXX10001 300
a) The last character (“n”) of this model number indicates the housing: X (Medium matte white), W (Optimum glass white), or B
b) The SpaceLogic resistive temperature sensor is not designed to be connected to the sensor bus, but instead is connected to
I/O points/terminals on the BACnet/IP controller using a two-wire connection.
c) The fourth character (“n”) of this model number indicates the housing: S (Medium matte white), W (Optimum glass white), or B
d) The model number SXWSATXXXRXX is replaced by SLASXXX.
e) Connect the SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter to the SpaceLogic Sensor for temporary commissioning and servicing only.
To summarize the power conditions, the sensor bus supports the following key
SpaceLogic Sensor combinations:

582
16 RP-C Controllers
Figure: Examples with one SpaceLogic Sensor and four SpaceLogic Sensor devices
connected to an RP-C controller in a daisy-chain configuration
Each SpaceLogic Sensor has two 2-position DIP switches, which are used to
give the sensor a unique address on the sensor bus. An incorrectly configured or
improper DIP switch can cause two sensors to have the same address on the
sensor bus, which means that both sensors will be offline. For more information,
see section 21.1 “SpaceLogic Sensors” on page 935.
NOTICE
Ensure that the address DIP switches on the SpaceLogic Sensor are
configured to give the sensor a unique address on the sensor bus.
NOTE: SpaceLogic Sensor devices connected to the sensor bus through a

daisy-chain configuration can be assigned addresses regardless of the order
in which the sensors appear in the daisy chain. For example, sensor number
1 can have the address 6, sensor number 2 can have the address 4, and so
on.

583
16 RP-C Controllers
16.10 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensor Devices

to an RP-C Controller
You connect SpaceLogic Sensor devices to an RP-C controller to provide the
devices with power and communication from the controller.
NOTICE
Locate the sensor bus wiring away from external electromagnetic noise
sources such as high voltage cables and Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) for
AC motors.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect an Ethernet cable from the controller's Sensor Bus port (RS-
485 Com A) or Room Bus port (RS-485 Com B) directly to an external Ethernet
switch or router.
To connect SpaceLogic Sensor devices to an RP-C controller

1. Install the SpaceLogic Sensor and connect a Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded,
straight-through wired cable with eight conductors (four twisted pairs) to one
of the two RJ45 receptacles on the sensor. Use a cable with the wire size
(cross-sectional area) 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²).

584
16 RP-C Controllers
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RP-C controller's RS-485 port that
is configured for the sensor bus.
NOTE: By default, the Sensor Bus port (RS-485 Com A) is configured
for the sensor bus.
3. When an additional SpaceLogic Sensor is needed, install the sensor and

connect the other end of the cable to the unused RJ45 receptacle on the
previous sensor.
NOTE: When connecting SpaceLogic Sensor devices to the sensor
bus through a daisy-chain configuration, it does not matter if the
incoming and outgoing cables are connected to one or the other sensor
bus port on the SpaceLogic Sensor.
4. Repeat step 3 to install a third and fourth SpaceLogic Sensor, if the power
constraints of the sensor bus allow this for the selected combination of cover
and sensor base type.
5. Ensure that the two 2-position address DIP switches on each SpaceLogic
Sensor are configured to give the sensor a unique address on the sensor
bus.
For more information, see the Configuring a SpaceLogic Sensor topic on
WebHelp.

585
16 RP-C Controllers
16.11 RP-C Room Bus
16.11 RP-C Room Bus

and window blinds.
The room bus is a proprietary RS-485 bus, which is designed to provide both 24
VDC power supply and communications for the connected modules and multi-
sensors.
The maximum total length of the room bus is 72 m (236 ft). The room bus uses a
Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded, straight-through wired cable with eight conductors
(four twisted pairs) and RJ45 connectors. The wire size (cross-sectional area)
should be 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²). When the RP-C controller is
installed in a space that handles conditioned air or return air, the room bus cables
and IP network cables frequently must be plenum-rated to meet applicable
building codes. For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
NOTICE
• Ensure that the total length of the room bus does not exceed 72 m (236 ft).
By default, the RP-C controller's Room Bus port (RS-485 Com B) is configured
and allocated for the room bus. For more information, see section 16.8 “RP-C
Figure: Location of the Room Bus ports and address switches on the RP-C controllers and
RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors

586
16 RP-C Controllers
16.11 RP-C Room Bus
IMPORTANT: The restrictions listed below only apply to Connected Room

Solutions for Buildings. For information on what restrictions apply to
Connected Room Solutions for Hotels, see the supplementary document
Architecture Guidelines – Hotel Application.
You can connect a single RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor to the
room bus, or you can connect up to six devices in a daisy-chain configuration.
NOTE: When connecting devices to the RP-C room bus through a daisy-
chain configuration, it does not matter if the incoming and outgoing cables
are connected to one or the other room bus port on the device.
The RP-C room bus supports up to six connected RP controller expansion
modules with the following restrictions:
• Maximum of two DALI light modules
• Maximum of two SMI blind modules
• Maximum of four multi-sensors
Figure: Example of supported combination of RP controller expansion modules and multi-

sensors on the RP-C room bus
Each RP controller expansion module and multi-sensor has a rotary switch,

which is used to give the device a unique address on the room bus. An RP
controller expansion module or multi-sensor can be given any address in the
range of 1 to 6. Configuring the address 0 means that the device enters
maintenance mode and goes offline. Configuring an address in the range of 7 to
9 also means that the device goes offline. For more information, see the RP
Controller Expansion Module Room Bus Addressing topic on WebHelp. An
incorrectly configured switch can cause two devices to have the same address
on the room bus, which means that both devices will be offline.

587
16 RP-C Controllers
16.11 RP-C Room Bus
NOTICE
Ensure that the rotary switch on the RP controller expansion module or multi-
sensor is configured to give the device a unique room bus address in the range
of 1 to 6.
Table: Room Bus Addresses

Address Description
0 Maintenance mode. Device offline.
1 to 6 Valid addresses supported by the

EcoStruxure Building Operation software.
7 to 9 Reserved for future use. Addresses not

supported by the EcoStruxure Building
Operation software. Device offline.
NOTE: Devices connected to the RP-C room bus through a daisy-chain

configuration can be assigned addresses regardless of the order in which
the devices appear in the daisy chain. For example, device number 1 can
have the address 6, device number 2 can have the address 4, and so on.
NOTE: An RP controller expansion module and multi-sensor can be put into
different maintenance modes in which the device is either offline or online.
For more information, see section 17.58 “RP Controller Expansion Module
and Multi-sensor Maintenance Modes” on page 832.

588
16 RP-C Controllers
16.12 RP-C Modbus
16.12 RP-C Modbus

For the KNX Modbus gateway, the RP-C controller provides both 24 VDC power
supply and communications through the Modbus network connection.
For standard Modbus devices, a separate power supply unit (PSU) is needed to
power the Modbus devices on the network.
The Modbus RTU protocol is used for the communication. The RP-C controller
acts the Modbus master and the connected devices act as slaves.
The Modbus communication parameters can be freely configured regardless of
which RS-485 port on the RP-C controller that is used for the Modbus network.
578.
The maximum total length of the Modbus (RS-485) network is 72 m (236 ft). The
Modbus network uses a Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded, straight-through wired
cable with eight conductors (four twisted pairs) and RJ45 connectors. The wire
size (cross-sectional area) should be 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²). When
the RP-C controller is installed in a space that handles conditioned air or return
air, the Modbus network cables and IP network cables frequently must be
plenum-rated to meet applicable building codes. For more information, see
NOTICE
• Ensure that the total length of the RP-C Modbus network does not exceed 72
m (236 ft).
You need to configure which RS-485 (RJ45) port on the RP-C controller to use
for the Modbus network. You can configure to use either the Sensor Bus port
(RS-485 Com A) or Room Bus port (RS-485 Com B). For more information, see
section 16.8 “RP-C Communication Ports” on page 578.

589
16 RP-C Controllers
16.12 RP-C Modbus
Figure: Location of the Sensor Bus port (RS-485 Com A) and Room Bus port (RS-485
Com B) on the RP-C controllers
The maximum number of Modbus devices that can be connected to an RP-C

controller depends on the type of Modbus device and the number of Modbus
registers.
The maximum number of Modbus registers that can be connected to and
managed by an RP-C controller depends on the communication capacity of the
controller's Modbus network.
The RP-C Modbus network supports up to 10 connected Modbus devices with
the following restrictions:
• Maximum of one KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX)
• Maximum of 250 Modbus registers
NOTE: The RP-C Modbus network does not support 64-bit Modbus
registers.

590
16 RP-C Controllers
16.12 RP-C Modbus
Figure: Examples with one KNX Modbus gateway and several standard Modbus devices
The KNX Modbus gateway has the default Modbus address 1. The address can
be configured through the ETS. For more information, see the Configuring the
Modbus Device Settings in the KNX Modbus Gateway topic on WebHelp.

591
16 RP-C Controllers
16.13 RP-C Screw Terminals
16.13 RP-C Screw Terminals

The RP-C has fixed screw terminals for the power input, SSR outputs, relay
outputs, high power relay outputs, and universal inputs/outputs.
16.13.1 RP-C-12A Screw Terminals

The RP-C-12A model has 12 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 23
fixed screw terminals.
For more information, see section 16.14 “RP-C-12A Screw Terminals” on page
593.
16.13.2 RP-C-12B Screw Terminals

The RP-C-12B model has 12 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 24
For more information, see section 16.15 “RP-C-12B Screw Terminals” on page
596.
16.13.3 RP-C-12C Screw Terminals

The RP-C-12C model has 12 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 24
For more information, see section 16.16 “RP-C-12C Screw Terminals” on page
599.
16.13.4 RP-C-16A Screw Terminals

For more information, see section 16.17 “RP-C-16A Screw Terminals” on page
602.

592
16 RP-C Controllers
16.14 RP-C-12A Screw Terminals

DANGER
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 to 0.79 Nm (5 to 7 lbf.in)
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, RP-C-12A model
The 23 screw terminals are used as follows:

• Three screw terminals for the power input
• Two screw terminals for the return (RET) terminals 4 and 5
• Six screw terminals for the four solid-state relay (SSR) outputs
• 12 screw terminals for the eight universal inputs/outputs of type Ub
Table: Screw Terminals, RP-C-12A Model

Power input

593
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued
1 /+ 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 23 VA

24-30 VDC, 14 W

to terminal 2.
24-30 VDC, 14 W
3 RET Terminal 3 is provided for

(optional).
Return terminals

terminals

terminals
Solid-state relay (SSR)

outputs
6 DO1 SSR output

DO1 and DO2
connected to 0 to 24 VAC or
-30 VDC to +30 VDC.
8 DO2 SSR output
9 DO3 SSR output

DO3 and DO4
-30 VDC to +30 VDC.
11 DO4 SSR output

594
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

595
16 RP-C Controllers
16.15 RP-C-12B Screw Terminals

The RP-C-12B model has 12 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 24
DANGER
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, RP-C-12B model

• Four screw terminals for the three relay outputs
• Three screw terminals for the high power relay output
Table: Screw Terminals, RP-C-12B Model

Power input

596
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued
1 /+ 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 23 VA

24-30 VDC, 14 W

to terminal 2.
24-30 VDC, 14 W

(optional).
Return terminals

terminals

terminals
Relay outputs

DO1, DO2, and DO3
16 NC Normally Closed terminal.

High power relay output,
type Form C.
17 DO4 Common terminal. High

power relay output, type
Form C.
18 NO Normally Open terminal.

type Form C.

597
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

598
16 RP-C Controllers
16.16 RP-C-12C Screw Terminals

The RP-C-12C model has 12 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 24
DANGER
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, RP-C-12C model

• Six screw terminals for the four universal inputs/outputs of type Ub
Table: Screw Terminals, RP-C-12C Model

Power input

599
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued
1 /+ 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 23 VA

24-30 VDC, 14 W

to terminal 2.
24-30 VDC, 14 W

(optional).
Return terminals

terminals

terminals

outputs
6 DO1 SSR output

DO1 and DO2
-30 VDC to +30 VDC.
8 DO2 SSR output
9 DO3 SSR output

DO3 and DO4
-30 VDC to +30 VDC.
11 DO4 SSR output
Relay outputs

600
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued

DO1, DO2, and DO3

type Form C.

Form C.

type Form C.

Ub

terminals

Ub

Ub

terminals

Ub

601
16 RP-C Controllers

DANGER
Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, RP-C-16A model

• Two screw terminals for the 24 VAC output
Table: Screw Terminals, RP-C-16A Model

Power input

602
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued
1 L Line (L) lead, 230 VAC,

50/60 Hz, 65 VA
2 N Neutral (N) lead, 230 VAC,

50/60 Hz, 65 VA
3 Not connected internally
24 VAC output
4 24 VAC Out 24 VAC, 19 VA, isolated

output
For more information, see
section 16.28 “24 VAC
Output on the RP-C-16A
5 24 VAC Out 24 VAC, 19 VA, isolated

output
section 16.28 “24 VAC
Output on the RP-C-16A

outputs
6 DO1 SSR output

DO1 and DO2
-30 VDC to +30 VDC.
8 DO2 SSR output
9 DO3 SSR output

DO3 and DO4
-30 VDC to +30 VDC.
11 DO4 SSR output
Relay outputs

DO1, DO2, and DO3

603
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued

type Form C.

Form C.

type Form C.

Ub

RET terminals

Ub

Ub

RET terminals

Ub

Ub

RET terminals

Ub

Ub

RET terminals

Ub

604
16 RP-C Controllers
16.18 RP-C LEDs
16.18 RP-C LEDs

There is one LED on the front panel of the RP-C.
Figure: RP-C LEDs
Table: RP-C LEDs

Function Color
Status Red, Green, Blue (and combinations)
16.18.1 Status LED

The RP controller Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: RP Controller Status LED Patterns


No Bluetooth activity
Blue, constant Normal operation, status OK

Bluetooth connection is active
Green 3 seconds, blue 1 second Normal operation, status OK

Bluetooth advertising is active


605
16 RP-C Controllers
16.18 RP-C LEDs
Continued

attention
Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) RP I/O board receiving software upgrade,

wait
Amber, constant RP controller firmware boot applet running

RP controller firmware boot applet started
White, transient Device starting, wait
White, constant RP controller firmware not running,

attention required (contact product support)

606
16 RP-C Controllers
16.19 RP Controller Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the RP controllers in different ways depending on how
Figure: Location on the reset button on an RP controller
reset button.
Table: Reset Modes

Mode Description

than 5 seconds.
start.

seconds.

seconds.

607
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued
Mode Description

seconds.
button.

In WorkStation, if your BACnet/IP controller device seems completely
unresponsive, perform a factory reset to restore the device to a state where it can
be successfully commissioned. After you release the reset button, a factory reset
TIP: After a physical or logical factory reset in a BACnet/IP controller, any
controller proxy object in the EcoStruxure BMS database that carries the
serial number of that controller may trigger an automatic association. This
association occurs between the reset physical controller and the controller
proxy object in the EcoStruxure BMS database.

variable is retained after a restart of the RP controller. There are three retain
levels:
• No
• Warm start
• Cold start

608
16 RP-C Controllers
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
retained. retained.
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
lost. retained.
a
TIP: Although variable values in BACnet/IP controllers are retained in
accordance with this matrix, automation server retention behaves differently.
As a result, variable values retained in the server that are not retained in the
controller may be restored to the controller during a download command. For

following:


609
16 RP-C Controllers
16.20 RP-C Device Installation

The RP-C can be installed on a DIN rail or flat surface.
The RP-C must be professionally installed to comply with the following rules and
regulations:
• 2014/53/EU Radio Equipment Directive (RED) of the European Union (EU).
The RP-C and its antenna(s) must be installed to provide a separation distance of
at least 20 cm (8 in.) from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Information on recommended
RF exposure limits can be obtained from Health Canada's website,
www.canada.ca/en/health-canada.
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing the RP-C along
with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most efficient
with adequate space provided between the RP-C rail and adjacent rails or other
devices.
The RP-C is typically installed horizontally (on a DIN rail going from left to right),
with the device label text in the upright position reading left to right.
Figure: RP-C installed on a horizontal DIN rail
The restrictions on installing the device in other orientations differ between the
different RP-C controller models.
NOTICE
CONTROLLER DAMAGE
Follow the installation orientation restrictions that apply to the specific RP-C
controller model.

610
16 RP-C Controllers
Under normal operating conditions of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F), the RP-C-12A,

-12B, and -12C models can be installed in the following orientations:
• Face down from a ceiling. See “d” in the following figure.
• Face up on a horizontal surface. See “f” in the following figure.
The only installation orientation that is not supported for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and
-12C models is when the device is rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal
position, that is, with device label text up and down. See “e” in the following
figure. In the up and down position, the controller's thermal specifications may be
exceeded, which can damage the controller.
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C models operated
in normal conditions, 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
When the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C models are used for rooftop applications,
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F), the device should be installed horizontally, with
the device label text in the upright position reading left to right. See “a” in the
following figure. Any other installation orientation (“b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, and “f” in the
figure) may exceed the controller's thermal specifications, which can damage the
controller.

611
16 RP-C Controllers
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C models operated
at -40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F)
Under normal operating conditions of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F), the RP-C-16A

model can be installed in the following orientations:
Installing the RP-C-16A model rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal position is
not supported. See “e” in the following figure. Installing the RP-C-16A model face
down from a ceiling (“d” in the figure) or face up on a horizontal surface (“f” in the
figure) is only supported in the operating temperature range 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104
°F), but not in the temperature range 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F). Installing the
controller in an orientation that is not supported may cause the controller's
thermal specifications to be exceeded, which can damage the controller.
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for RP-C-16A model operated in normal

conditions, 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
When installing RP-Cs in a cabinet, it is recommended to provide ample space

between the DIN rails and controllers for sufficient ventilation.

612
16 RP-C Controllers
Figure: RP-Cs installed on horizontal DIN rails in a cabinet
NOTICE
All RP-C models have fixed screw terminals.

The RP-C has four anchor points that can be used to fasten cable ties or other
accessories for bundling wires.

613
16 RP-C Controllers
Figure: Anchor points for cable ties
All RP-C models can be equipped with optional covers to reduce access to the
screw terminals and wires if desired.
Figure: Optional cover

614
16 RP-C Controllers
16.21 Installing RP-C on a DIN Rail
16.21 Installing RP-C on a DIN Rail

You install RP-C on a DIN rail to properly fasten the device and to allow for
sufficient ventilation.
CAUTION
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) EXPOSURE
• Install the controller and its antenna at least 20 cm (8 in.) from all persons.
• Do not install the controller and its antenna near any other antenna or radio
transmitter.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
To install RP-C on a DIN rail



615
16 RP-C Controllers
16.22 Installing RP-C on a Flat Surface

You install RP-C on a flat surface to properly fasten the device and to allow for
CAUTION
• Install the controller and its antenna at least 20 cm (8 in.) from all persons.
• Do not install the controller and its antenna near any other antenna or radio
transmitter.
To install RP-C on a flat surface

1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the RP-C.
4. Find a suitable location and surface on which to mount the RP-C.

616
16 RP-C Controllers
• Two holes for the top two screws on which you hang the RP-C
• One hole for the screw at the bottom that helps prevent the device from
the RP-C.
You can also use the 1:1 drill template in the installation sheet that comes
with each controller.

617
16 RP-C Controllers

head of the screw (or anchor) and the flat surface to accommodate the RP-
C material thickness.
7. Fit the two keyhole slots on the back of the RP-C enclosure to the heads of
the mounted screws (or anchors) and then slide the RP-C down in place on
the screws (or anchors).

618
16 RP-C Controllers
8. Fit the bottom screw (or anchor) to the hole at the bottom of the RP-C and
tighten the screw (or anchor).

619
16 RP-C Controllers
16.23 Wiring a Screw Terminal on RP-C
16.23 Wiring a Screw Terminal on RP-C

You wire the screw terminals on the RP-C to connect I/O devices and power.
Always use the recommended wires (or wires with larger cross-sectional area).
DANGER
To wire a screw terminal on RP-C

1. Disconnect the power supply and other high voltage equipment connected
to the controller.
2. Loosen the screw of the terminal.
wire.
4. Insert the end of the wire fully into its intended terminal. Ensure that no bare
wire strands extend from the terminal.
5. Tighten the screw using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the
screw is fully tightened. Use the following recommended screw tightening
torque: 0.56 to 0.79 Nm (5 to 7 lbf.in).
6. Use appropriate cable strain relief methods, especially for wires that carry
30 VAC or 42.4 VDC or above, to help prevent any load applied to the cable
from being transferred to conductor terminations.
You can use the anchor points on the controller enclosure and cable ties to
fasten and fix the cables.

620
16 RP-C Controllers
16.24 Powering Up an RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C Controller
16.24 Powering Up an RP-C-12A, -12B, or

-12C Controller
You perform the following steps to power up an RP-C-12A, RP-C-12B, or RP-C-
12C controller.
NOTICE
• Ensure that the input power polarity is correct and that the voltage level
meets the specifications of the RP controller.
• Ensure that earth ground is properly connected to the RP controller.
To power up an RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C controller

2. Ensure that appropriate cable strain relief is provided, especially for wires
that carry 30 VAC or 42.4 VDC or above.
terminals 1 and 2.

5. After powering up, check that the Status LED changes as follows:
• Bluetooth interface enabled (default): Flashing blue/green light (Normal
operation, Bluetooth advertising)
• Bluetooth interface disabled: Constant green light, after about a minute
(Normal operation, No Bluetooth activity)

621
16 RP-C Controllers
16.25 Powering Up an RP-C-16A Controller
16.25 Powering Up an RP-C-16A Controller

You perform the following steps to power up an RP-C-16A controller.
NOTICE
Ensure that the input power voltage level meets the specifications of the RP
controller.
To power up an RP-C-16A controller

3. Ensure that the 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz is supplied to terminals 1 (Line lead)
and 2 (Neutral lead).
4. After powering up, check that the Status LED changes as follows:
• Bluetooth interface enabled (default): Flashing blue/green light (Normal
operation, Bluetooth advertising)
• Bluetooth interface disabled: Constant green light, after about a minute
(Normal operation, No Bluetooth activity)

622
16 RP-C Controllers
16.26 Installing the Optional Covers on the RP-C
16.26 Installing the Optional Covers on the

RP-C
You can install optional covers to the RP-C to reduce access to screw terminals
and wires.
To install the optional covers on the RP-C

1. Prior to installing the optional cover, you can break and/or cut the knockouts
with pliers to provide an opening for wires to exit.
2. Insert the tab as shown into the slot and gently press the optional cover
down to engage the clip on the opposite side of the RP-C device.
The clip is marked by an arrow.

623
16 RP-C Controllers
16.26 Installing the Optional Covers on the RP-C
3. Continue to press the cover down until the clip snaps into place and you
hear an audible click sound, which indicates that the cover is fully engaged
with the RP-C device.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to install the second cover.

624
16 RP-C Controllers
16.27 Removing an Optional Cover from the RP-C
16.27 Removing an Optional Cover from the

RP-C
You remove an optional cover from the RP-C when you want to gain access to
the screw terminals and wiring.
To remove an optional cover from the RP-C

1. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the cover up
as shown below.
The clip is marked by an arrow.
2. Remove the cover from the RP-C.

625
16 RP-C Controllers
16.28 24 VAC Output on the RP-C-16A Controller
16.28 24 VAC Output on the RP-C-16A

Controller
The RP-C-16A model has a 24 VAC (19 VA) Class 2 output that can be used to
power external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. The external loads
can be controlled using the controller's solid-state relay (SSR) or relay outputs.
The RP-C-16A controller uses an internal transformer to convert 230 VAC from
the power input (terminals 1 and 2) to 24 VAC (terminals 4 and 5). The
transformer provides galvanic isolation between the 24 VAC output and the 230
VAC power input as well as the controller electronics.
Figure: 24 VAC isolated output
The following wiring example shows how an actuator can be connected to the
controller's 24 VAC output and one of the SSR outputs. The example also shows
how the 24 VAC output terminals 4 and 5 are connected to terminals G0 and G
on a transmitter, for which the terminal M is connected to one of the RET
terminals of the controller's Universal Inputs/Outputs. G0 and M of the transmitter
may be interconnected internally or by a separate wire, which can introduce
disturbances. Sometimes there is only one common ground connection G0/M,
and this node must be connected to one of the 24 VAC output terminals and to a
RET terminal. In the example below, the transmitter can be replaced by a voltage
controlled actuator.

626
16 RP-C Controllers
16.28 24 VAC Output on the RP-C-16A Controller
Figure: 24 VAC output, wiring example
The polarity of the 24 VAC output terminals 4 and 5 is unknown, which means
that the phase of the output relative to the input of the transformer is also
unknown. For example, if you interconnect terminals 4 of two different controllers,
a phase difference can result in a voltage difference of 0 VAC to 48 VAC between
terminals 5 of the controllers. The primary side of the transformer has a PTC
thermistor, which acts as a resettable fuse and turns off the voltage to the
transformer in case of over current on the secondary side. However, the PTC
thermistor does not provide any protection for external equipment from being
exposed to 48 VAC.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Never connect the controller’s 24 VAC output in parallel with another controller.

627
16 RP-C Controllers

system.
Connect only devices with safe extra low voltage equipment (SELV/PELV)
inputs/outputs to the controller universal inputs/outputs. Connecting devices that
are not SELV/PELV poses an electrical hazard that will result in death or serious
injury. The controller inputs/outputs are not SELV/PELV.
DANGER
Connect only devices with safe extra low voltage equipment (SELV/PELV)
inputs/outputs to the controller universal inputs/outputs.
The RP-C-12A, -12B, -12C, and -16A models have universal inputs/outputs of
type Ub.
16.29.1 Inputs
inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive
Digital inputs

628
16 RP-C Controllers

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Counter inputs
Supervised inputs
the I/O.
• Series only
• Parallel only

629
16 RP-C Controllers

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a detected fault and the shorted wiring
shows as an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only
supervised input connection is shown in the following figure.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
following figure.

630
16 RP-C Controllers

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Voltage inputs

RIN = 100 kohm
Current inputs

RSH = 47 ohm

631
16 RP-C Controllers
Temperature inputs

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm
10 kohm 5V 10 kohm
1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

Resistive inputs

632
16 RP-C Controllers

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

following figure.

VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
value.

633
16 RP-C Controllers
16.29.2 Outputs
Voltage outputs

Channels, RP-C-12A model 8 Ub, Ub1 to Ub8
Channels, RP-C-12B model 8 Ub, Ub1 to Ub8
Channels, RP-C-12C model 4 Ub, Ub1 to Ub4
Channels, RP-C-16A model 8 Ub, Ub1 to Ub8
Digital inputs
mA
Counter inputs
mA

634
16 RP-C Controllers
Supervised inputs

Voltage inputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Resolution 1.0 mV
Impedance 100 kohm
Current inputs
Range 0 to 20 mA
Resolution 1 μA
Impedance 47 ohm
Resistive inputs


Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)
Honeywell 20 kohm

635
16 RP-C Controllers
Xenta 1.8 kohm
Balco 1 kohm
20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)
Pt1000

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +70 °C (-58 to +158 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) 70 to 150 °C (158 to 302 °F) +/-0.7 °C (+/-1.3 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-1.0 °C (+/-1.8 °F)
Ni1000

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
LG-Ni1000

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)
-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

636
16 RP-C Controllers

Voltage outputs
Range 0 to 10 VDC
Accuracy +/-60 mV
Resolution 10 mV

637
16 RP-C Controllers
16.30 Solid-state Relay (SSR) Outputs

The solid-state relay (SSR) outputs can be used in many applications to switch
24 VAC or 24 VDC on or off for external loads such as actuators, relays, or
indicators. SSRs are silent and are not adversely affected by relay contact wear.
• Digital output
• Tristate output
16.30.1 Outputs
The DO SSR outputs are Form A digital outputs, which means the outputs are
normally open contacts with one common terminal and one normally open
terminal. Each pair of SSR outputs share a common terminal but the outputs can
be controlled independently.
Figure: SSR digital output internal configuration
Channels, RP-C-12A model 4, DO1 to DO4
Channels, RP-C-12B model 0
Channels, RP-C-12C model 4, DO1 to DO4
Output rating Maximum 2 A load per output

Maximum 4 A total load for the 4 outputs
AC voltage range 24 VAC +/-20 %

638
16 RP-C Controllers
DC voltage range Maximum 30 VDC
Commons COM1 for DO1 and DO2 (on RP-C-12A, -12C, and -16A models)
COM2 for DO3 and DO4 (on RP-C-12A, -12C, and -16A models)
When the SSR outputs are used to switch AC, the common terminals can be connected to 0 to 30
VAC. When the SSR outputs are used to switch DC, the common terminals can be connected to -30
VDC to +30 VDC.
Common voltage range (AC) 0 to 30 VAC
Common voltage range (DC) -30 to +30 VDC
Solid-state relay output protection Transient voltage suppressor across each solid-state relay (SSR)
output

639
16 RP-C Controllers
16.31 Relay Outputs
16.31 Relay Outputs

• Digital output
• Tristate output
output point.
16.31.1 Outputs
from signal ground.
Three Form A relays share a common terminal but the outputs can be controlled
independently.
Channels, RP-C-12A model 0
Channels, RP-C-12B model 3, DO1 to DO3
Channels, RP-C-12C model 3, DO5 to DO7

640
16 RP-C Controllers
16.31 Relay Outputs
Contact rating Pilot Duty (C300)

Resistive load: 250 VAC/30 VDC, 4 A (cos phi = 1)
Inductive load: 250 VAC/30 VDC, 4 A (cos phi = 0.4)

Normally Open
Commons COM1 for DO1, DO2, and DO3 (on RP-C-12B model)
COM3 for DO5, DO6, and DO7 (on RP-C-12C and RP-C-16A models)
Isolation contact to system ground 3,000 VAC
Cycle life At least 100,000 cycles

641
16 RP-C Controllers

• Digital output
output point.
16.32.1 Outputs
The DO high power relay outputs are Form C digital outputs, which means the
outputs are switching contacts with one common terminal (C), one normally-open
terminal (NO), and one normally-closed terminal (NC). The terminals are isolated
from other circuits of the device and from signal ground.
Channels, RP-C-12A model 0
Channels, RP-C-12B model 1, DO4
Channels, RP-C-12C model 1, DO8
Channels, RP-C-16A model 1, DO8
Contact rating Pilot Duty (B300)

Minimum current: 100 mA (5 VDC)
Normally Open contact, resistive load: 250 VAC/24 VDC, 12 A (cos phi = 1)
Normally Closed contact, inductive load: 250 VAC/24 VDC, 3 A (cos phi = 0.4)

642
16 RP-C Controllers

Normally Open and Normally Closed
Isolation contact to system ground 5,000 VAC
Cycle life At least 100,000 cycles

643
16 RP-C Controllers
16.33 RP-C Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
16.33 RP-C Regulatory Compliance and

Approvals
RP-C controllers.
16.33.1 CE - European Union (EU)

RP-C-12A, -12B, -12C, and -16A controller models bear the CE mark and comply
with the following EU directives:
• 2014/53/EU Radio Equipment Directive (RED)
• 2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive
• 2011/65/EU Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive
• 2015/863/EU amending Annex II to Directive 2011/65/EU
16.33.2 Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

For the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C controller models (FCC ID: DVE-RPC24), the
following statements apply.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device, and the antenna used with the device, must be professionally
installed. This device may be operated only with the antenna with which it is
authorized (see list below). Any antenna that is of the same type and of equal or

644
16 RP-C Controllers
less directional gain as the antenna that is authorized with the device may be
used with the device.
Antenna Manufacturer Model (Part Gain Type Impedance

number)
Integrated NA NA 0.92 dBi Inverted-F 50 ohm
External Linx ANT-2.4-WRT- 0.8 dBi Monopole 50 ohm

Technologies MON-SMA
16.33.3 Innovation, Science and Economic

Development Canada (ISED)
For the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C controller models (ISED certification number:
24775-RPC24), the following statements apply.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio-noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations
of the Canadian Department of Communications (ICES-3).
Cet appareil numérique ne dépasse pas les limites de la classe B pour les
émissions radio bruit des appareils numériques, tel qu'énoncé dans le Règlement
sur le brouillage radioélectrique du ministère des Communications du Canada
(NMB-3).
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le présent appareil est
conforme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
• L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
• L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
This radio transmitter (24775-RPC24) has been approved by Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed
below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included
in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type
listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (24775-RPC24) a été approuvé par Innovation,
Sciences et Développement économique Canada pour fonctionner avec les
types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les
types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est supérieur au gain
maximal indiqué pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour
l'exploitation de l'émetteur.

645
16 RP-C Controllers
Continued
number)
External Linx ANT-2.4-WRT- 0.8 dBi Monopole 50 ohm

Technologies MON-SMA
16.33.4 eu.bac
For the RP-C-16A controller model, a eu.bac approved controller application
must operate in the controller to maintain compliance with the eu.bac
certification. Approved controller applications, which are pre-configured for fan
coil, ceiling systems, and other applications, can be downloaded from the
Schneider Electric BMS Applications website, bms-applications.schneider-
electric.com.

646
17 RP Controller Expansion
Modules and Multi-sensors
Topics
RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors
Light Modules
Blind Modules
Relay Modules
RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD
RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD
RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD
RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE
RP-C-EXT-DALI
RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD
RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD
RP-C-EXT-REL-4
CRS-HH-REL-10
DALI Inputs/Outputs with Power Distribution
0-10V Light Outputs with Power Distribution
High-Voltage Blind Outputs
Low-Voltage Blind Outputs
17 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power Distribution
0-10V Light Outputs without Power Distribution
SMI Blind Outputs
SMI LoVo Blind Outputs
Relay Outputs on RP-C-EXT-REL-4
Relay Outputs on CRS-HH-REL-10
RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs
RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply
RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering
Luminosity Measurement
Motion Detection
RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory
DALI Light Module Supported Building Standards
SMI Blind Modules Supported Building Standards
RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Wireless Connectivity
RP-C Room Bus
Connecting RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-
sensors to RP-C
Configuring the Room Bus Address for an RP Controller
Expansion Module
Configuring the Room Bus Address for an RP Controller
Expansion Multi-sensor
RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors
Plugging an External Connector into an RP Controller
Expansion Module
Removing an External Connector from an RP Controller
Expansion Module
RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs
RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED
RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button
RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Set Button
17 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation
Installing an RP Controller Expansion Module on a DIN Rail
Installing an RP Controller Expansion Module on a Flat
Surface
Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Light Module
Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Blind Module
Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Relay Module
Wiring a Screw Terminal on CRS-HH-REL-10
Powering Up an CRS-HH-REL-10 Relay Module
RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Device Installation
Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor into a
Dropped Ceiling Using the Mounting Springs
Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor on an
Octagon Junction Box Using the Mounting Ring
Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor on a
Ceiling Using the Mounting Ring
RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Maintenance Modes
Configuring an RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-
sensor into Online Maintenance Mode
RP Controller Expansion Modules Regulatory Compliance
and Approvals
RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Regulatory
Compliance and Approvals
Types of Blind Motors Supported by CRS-HH-REL-10
17 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors
17.1 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors
17.1 RP Controller Expansion Modules and

Multi-sensors
The RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors provide a range of
devices that can be combined to form a connected room solution. The RP
controller expansion modules and multi-sensors are connected to the RP-C room
bus and provide the RP-C room controllers with I/O expansion and sensors that
enable lighting and blind control.
The software application for lighting and blind control runs in the RP-C controller.
There is typically one RP-C controller per room. The RP-C controllers are
connected to an automation server, which controls and manages all the RP-C
controllers. There is typically one automation server per floor. The automation
servers are in turn typically connected to an Enterprise Server.
Figure: . RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors for a connected room solution

651
17.1 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors
The RP-C controllers can use input data from SpaceLogic Sensors to control the
lighting and blinds. The SpaceLogic Sensors are connected to the RP-C sensor
bus. The SpaceLogic Sensors provide sensors for temperature, humidity, CO2,
and occupancy in a room. SpaceLogic Sensor models with touchscreen display
enable users to adjust the lighting and blinds in a room. For more information,
see SpaceLogic Sensors - SXWS Sensors for MP and RP IP Controllers -
Specification Sheet
In addition, the EcoStruxure Building Engage mobile application allows building
occupants to adjust the room comfort settings (room temperature, fan speed,
lighting, and window blinds) using a smartphone connected to the RP-C
controller through Bluetooth Low Energy. For more information, see the Engage
topic on WebHelp.
17.1.1 Light Modules

The RP controller expansion light modules enable control of lights with electrical
ballasts and LED drivers.
For more information, see section 17.2 “Light Modules” on page 653.
17.1.2 Blind Modules

The RP controller expansion blind modules enable control of motorized window
blinds and shutters.
For more information, see section 17.3 “Blind Modules” on page 654.
17.1.3 Relay Modules

The RP controller expansion relay modules enable control of lights and motorized
window blinds and shutters.
For more information, see section 17.4 “Relay Modules” on page 655.
17.1.4 Multi-sensor
The RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE multi-sensor connects to the RP-C room controllers and
is used for infrared motion detection and luminosity measurements.
17.1.5 Remote Control


652
17.2 Light Modules
17.2 Light Modules

The RP controller expansion light modules enable control of lights with electrical
ballasts and LED drivers.
The light modules support different types of interfaces for lighting control. The
light modules also come in different models with or without support for power
distribution to the light control gear.
Module Interface Power Distribution
RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD DALI yes
RP-C-EXT-DALI DALI no
RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD 0-10V yes
RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 0-10V no
17.2.1 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD
The RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD light module connects to the RP-C room controllers
and provides I/O expansion for lighting control with DALI (Digital Addressable
Lighting Interface).
17.2.2 RP-C-EXT-DALI
The RP-C-EXT-DALI light module connects to the RP-C room controllers and
provides I/O expansion for lighting control with DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting
Interface).
17.2.3 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
The RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD light module connects to the RP-C room controllers
and provides I/O expansion for 0-10V lighting control.
17.2.4 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
The RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 light module connects to the RP-C room controllers and
provides I/O expansion for 0-10V lighting control.

653
17.3 Blind Modules
17.3 Blind Modules

The RP controller expansion blind modules enable control of motorized window
blinds and shutters.
The blind modules support blind motors that operate on AC mains voltage (230
VAC) as well as DC motors (24 VDC). The blind modules also come in different
models that support blind motor drives with Standard Motor Interface (SMI) as
well as conventional motor drives.
Module Blind Motor SMI-interface
RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV- 230 VAC yes

PD
RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD 24 VDC yes
RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD 230 VAC no
RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD 24 VDC no
17.3.1 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD
The RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD SMI blind module connects to the RP-C room
controllers and provides I/O expansion for control of AC mains-supplied motors
(drives) with SMI (Standard Motor Interface for AC applications).
17.3.2 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD
The RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD SMI blind module connects to the RP-C room
controllers and provides I/O expansion for control of DC low-voltage motors
(drives) with SMI LoVo (Standard Motor Interface for low-voltage applications).
17.3.3 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD
The RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD blind module connects to the RP-C room controllers
and provides I/O expansion for high-voltage blind control.
17.3.4 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD
The RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD blind module connects to the RP-C room controllers
and provides I/O expansion for low-voltage blind control.

654
17.4 Relay Modules
17.4 Relay Modules

The RP controller expansion relay modules enable control of lights and motorized
window blinds and shutters.
The relay modules come in different models with different support for control (and
power supply) of lights and blinds. The number of relays and type of connectors
also differs between the models.
Module Supported Control Power Distribution Number of Relays
RP-C-EXT-REL-4 Lights yesa 4b
CRS-HH-REL-10 Lights and blinds no 10c
a) The power supply voltage to the lights is the same as the module's power input voltage: 100 to
277 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
b) 4 x 3-pin Wieland GST15i3 connector
c) 10 x 2-pin screw terminal block
17.4.1 RP-C-EXT-REL-4
The RP-C-EXT-REL-4 relay module connects to the RP-C room controllers and
enables power supply and control of lights.
17.4.2 CRS-HH-REL-10
The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module connects to the RP-C room controllers and
enables the control of lights and blinds.

655
17.5 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD
The RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD light module connects to the RP-C room controllers
and provides I/O expansion for lighting control with DALI (Digital Addressable
Lighting Interface).
The DALI light module enables control of lights equipped with electronic ballasts,
LED drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface as well as connection of
DALI input devices such as sensors and push-buttons.
The power distribution capability means that the DALI light module can supply
the connected control gear with AC mains voltage (230 VAC) from the module's
power input.
The DALI light module is a DALI-2 certified control device (application controller)
with multi-master capability. DALI-2 compliance means benefits such as
improved interoperability and easier installation and maintenance. The DALI light
module can be used with DALI version-1 products because DALI-2 is designed to
be backward compatible with DALI version-1. The multi-master capability of the
DALI light module allows the module to function as a DALI master in a DALI
network and can thus work together with DALI-2 sensors and push-buttons.
The DALI light module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for
connected room solution and can be combined with other modules from this
product range.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD – DALI light module with power distribution capability
17.5.1 DALI Inputs/Outputs with Power Distribution

The DALI light modules have four DALI inputs/outputs, which are designed for
control and power supply of DALI light control gear such as lights with electronic
ballasts, LED drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface as well as
connection of DALI input devices such as sensors and push-buttons.

656
17.5.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital

Inputs
The RP controller expansion modules have digital inputs that can be used for
sensing of dry contacts:
• The light modules, blind modules, and the RP-C-EXT-REL-4 relay module
have four digital inputs, which can be used in applications such as interfacing
with light switches and window contacts.
• The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module has 12 digital inputs suitable for dry
contact monitoring of switches and push buttons used for lighting control,
window and door positions, and other functions in the hotel room.
17.5.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in

Power Supply
The RP controller expansion light modules with power distribution capability, low-
voltage blind modules, and SMI blind modules have a built-in power supply that
can accommodate a nominal input voltage of 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz. Light
modules without power distribution capability can accommodate a nominal input
voltage of 100 to 277 VAC at 50/60 Hz.
For more information, see section 17.27 “RP Controller Expansion Module Built-
in Power Supply” on page 769.
17.5.4 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy

Metering
RP controller expansion modules with power distribution capability support
energy metering, which means that the module can measure the electrical
energy consumption and power demand for the equipment connected to and
supplied by the module.
Energy Metering” on page 770.
17.5.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-

sensor Memory
RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensor have two types of memory,
flash memory and RAM.
For more information, see section 17.31 “RP Controller Expansion Module and
Multi-sensor Memory” on page 775.

657
17.5.6 DALI Light Module Supported Building

Standards
The DALI light module complies to version 2 of the IEC 62386 standard (DALI-2).
For more information, see section 17.32 “DALI Light Module Supported Building
Standards ” on page 776.

sensor Communication Ports
The RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors have two room bus
ports (RJ45 receptacles), which enable connection to the RP-C controller and
other expansion modules and multi-sensors on the room bus through a daisy-
chain configuration.

sensor Address Switch
which is used to give the device a unique address on the room bus.

and window blinds.
17.5.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable

Connectors
The RP controller expansion modules have PCB mounted connectors for the
power input, outputs, and digital inputs. The PCB mounted connectors mate with
pluggable connectors:
have mechanically keyed and color-coded connectors, which allows the
matching external connectors to be plugged in on site quickly and easily.
• The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module has PCB header connectors for
pluggable screw terminal blocks, which are easy to install and remove from
the device.

658
Pluggable Connectors ” on page 787.
17.5.11 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs

There is one or more LEDs on the front panel of the RP controller expansion
modules.
For more information, see section 17.42 “RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs”
on page 793.
17.5.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button

All RP controller expansion modules have a Set button on the front. The Set
button is reserved for future use.
For more information, see section 17.44 “RP Controller Expansion Module Set
Button” on page 799.
17.5.13 RP Controller Expansion Module Device

Installation
The RP controller expansion module can be installed on a DIN rail or flat surface.
Device Installation” on page 801.
17.5.14 Wiring

sensor Maintenance Modes
The RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors support different modes
that can be used for maintenance purposes.
Multi-sensor Maintenance Modes” on page 832.

659

17.5.17 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory

RP controller expansion modules.
For more information, see section 17.60 “RP Controller Expansion Modules
Regulatory Compliance and Approvals” on page 834.
Electrical
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum current consumption 10 A
Room bus power consumption 0.3 W (24 VDC)
Protection Maximum 16 A external fuse (circuit breaker) is needed
Environment
Humidity 20 to 90 % RH non-condensing
Pollution degree 2

660
Material
Mechanical
Weight 0.433 kg (0.955 lb)
Connectors Power input: 1 x 3-pin Wieland GST15i3 connector

DALI inputs/outputs: 4 x 5-pin Wieland GST15i5 connector
Digital inputs: 4 x 2-pin Wieland GST15i2 connector
Communication ports
Room bus RS-485

Dual RJ45 ports for daisy-chain configurations
Use a Cat 5 (or higher) cable
Maximum total length of the room bus: 72 m (236 ft)
Room bus protection Transient voltage suppressors on communication and power signals
Hardware
Main microcontroller
CPU type ARM Cortex-M4 single-core
Frequency 80 MHz
SRAM (embedded) 320 KB
Flash memory (embedded) 1024 KB

661
Memory
DALI microcontroller
Frequency 32 MHz
Additional hardware
Status indicator LED (green and red) that shows the status of the device
Light status indicator One status LED (green) for each DALI input/output
Address switch Rotary switch 0 to 9
Set button Push-button switch
Energy metering
Energy consumption measurement
The energy consumption is measured in Wh, shared by the four outputs.
Accuracy class (according to IEC 61557-12) Active energy measurement: Class 1
Typical measurement accuracy at room temperature 20 to 100 W: 5%

100 to 3000 W: 1%
DALI inputs/outputs
Inputs/outputs 4, Light 1 to Light 4

The four inputs/outputs share one DALI channel.
Input/output terminals N, PE, L, DA+, and DA-
DALI bus voltage 18 VDC
Maximum supply current 250 mA
Guaranteed supply current 64 mA
Maximum cable length See chapter Wiring.
Power distribution 230 VAC (same voltage as power supply)

Maximum 5 A load per output
Maximum 165 A inrush current (<20 ms) per output
Maximum 800 A inrush current (<200 µs) per output
Digital inputs
Inputs 4, DI1 to DI4

662
Range Dry contact, 0 to 5.0 VDC, 2.2 mA, SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage)

The RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD internal configuration with regards to the signal
ground is shown in the following figure.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD internal configuration

663
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
The RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD light module connects to the RP-C room controllers
and provides I/O expansion for 0-10V lighting control.
The 0-10V light module enables control of lights equipped with electronic
ballasts, LED drivers, and other 0-10V compatible control gear.
The power distribution capability means that the 0-10V light module can supply
the connected control gear with AC mains voltage (230 VAC) from the module's
power input.
The 0-10V light module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for
product range.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD – 0-10V light module with power distribution capability
17.6.1 0-10V Light Outputs with Power Distribution

The 0-10V light modules have four Light outputs, which are designed for control
(dimming) and power supply of lights with electronic ballasts, LED drivers, and
other 0-10V compatible control gear.

Inputs

664
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD

Power Supply

Metering

sensor Memory
17.6.6 0-10V Light Module Supported Building

Standards
The 0-10V light module supports 0-10 V lighting control according to both the
current sourcing and current sinking standards.

665
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD



and window blinds.

Connectors
the device.

modules.

666
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
on page 793.


Installation
17.6.14 Wiring


RP controller expansion modules with power distribution capability.

667
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD

Electrical
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Environment
Pollution degree 2
Material
Mechanical

668
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
Weight 0.418 kg (0.922 lb)

Light outputs: 4 x 5-pin Wieland GST15i5 connector
Communication ports
Room bus RS-485

Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz
Light status indicator One status LED (green) for each output

669
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
Energy metering

100 to 3000 W: 1%
0-10V light outputs
Outputs 4, Light 1 to Light 4
Output terminals N, PE, L, AOn (n: 1 to 4), and COM
Analog output voltage 0 to 10 VDC
Maximum source/sink current 10 mA per output

Digital inputs

The RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD internal configuration with regards to the signal

670
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
Figure: RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD internal configuration

671
17.7 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD
The RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD blind module connects to the RP-C room controllers
and provides I/O expansion for high-voltage blind control.
The high-voltage blind module enables control and power supply (230 VAC) of
motorized window blinds and shutters.
The blind module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for connected
room solution and can be combined with other modules from this product range.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD – High-voltage blind module
17.7.1 High-Voltage Blind Outputs

The high-voltage blind modules have four Blind outputs for control of motorized
window blinds that are powered by AC mains voltage (230 VAC).

Inputs

672

Metering

sensor Memory



and window blinds.

673

Connectors
the device.

modules.
on page 793.


Installation
17.7.12 Wiring

674



Electrical
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum current consumption 8A

675
Environment
Pollution degree 2
Material
Mechanical
Weight 0.437 kg (0.963 lb)

Blind outputs: 4 x 4-pin Wieland GST15i4 connector
Communication ports
Room bus RS-485


676
Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz
Blind status indicator One status LED (green) for each output
Energy metering

100 to 3000 W: 1%
Blind outputs
Motor control outputs for 230 VAC powered blind motors with automatic end stop detection. An end
stop at the top position is required. An end stop at the bottom position is recommended.
Outputs 4, Blind 1 to Blind 4
Output terminals N, PE, ↑ (UP), and ↓ (DOWN)

Digital inputs

The RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD internal configuration with regards to the signal

677
Figure: RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD internal configuration

678
17.8 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD
The RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD blind module connects to the RP-C room controllers
and provides I/O expansion for low-voltage blind control.
The low-voltage blind module enables control and power supply (24 VDC) of
motorized window blinds and shutters.
The blind module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for connected
Figure: RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD – Low-voltage blind module
17.8.1 Low-Voltage Blind Outputs

The low-voltage blind modules have two Blind outputs for control of motorized
window blinds that are powered by 24 VDC.

Inputs

679

Power Supply

Metering

sensor Memory



680

and window blinds.

Connectors
the device.

modules.
on page 793.


Installation

681
17.8.13 Wiring




682
Electrical
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 75 VA
Onboard 24 VDC power supply
RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD has an onboard 24 VDC power supply that is used to power the blind
outputs.
Nominal voltage 24 VDC
Maximum supply current 1.3 A
Protection Short-circuit protection
Environment
Pollution degree 2
Material
Mechanical

683
Weight 0.399 kg (0.880 lb)
Installation DIN rail or flat surfacea

a) For the low-voltage blind module certain restrictions apply to the installation orientation. For more
information, see section 17.46 “RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation” on page 801.

Communication ports
Room bus RS-485

Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz

684
Energy metering
The energy consumption is measured in Wh, shared by the two outputs.
Typical measurement accuracy at room temperature 0.5 to 2 W: 5%

2 to 30 W: 1%
Blind outputs
Motor control outputs for 24 VDC powered blind motors with automatic end stop detection. An end
stop at the top position is required. An end stop at the bottom position is recommended.
Output terminals M- and M+
Power distribution 24 VDC

Maximum 1.3 A total load for the 2 outputs
Maximum 2 A starting current (<100 ms) per output
Digital inputs

The RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD internal configuration with regards to the signal

685
Figure: RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD internal configuration

686
17.9 RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE
The RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE multi-sensor connects to the RP-C room controllers and
is used for infrared motion detection and luminosity measurements. The multi-
sensor supports Bluetooth Low Energy based applications such as beaconing
and remote control communication.
The multi-sensor is connected to the RP-C room controller using an RJ45 type
quick connector.
The multi-sensor's three flexible mounting brackets (springs) enable quick and
easy installation on a suspended ceiling tile. The multi-sensor also comes with a
mounting ring, which allows the sensor to be installed on a ceiling with drywall
anchors and a 76 mm (3 in.) clearance hole or to a 102 mm (4 in.) junction/gang
box.
The multi-sensor is a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) device. The multi-sensor
support for Bluetooth beacon enables nearby mobile devices with a specific app
installed to interact when in close proximity to the broadcasting multi-sensor. The
Bluetooth beacon can be used for services such as indoor positioning of the
mobile device. The service and mobile app need to be provided by a third party.
The Bluetooth connection can also be used for communication with the RP-C-
RC-BLE remote control, which makes it possible to control the lighting, blinds,
and air conditioning in a zone of an office building.
The multi-sensor is part of the RP controller expansion modules product range.
The multi-sensor can be combined with the RP controller expansion modules for
lighting and blind control to provide a connected room solution.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE
17.9.1 Motion Detection

The RP controller expansion multi-sensor supports motion detection through a
passive infrared sensor.
For more information, see section 17.30 “Motion Detection” on page 773.

687
17.9.2 Luminosity Measurement

The RP controller expansion multi-sensor supports luminosity measurements
through an ambient light sensor.
For more information, see section 17.29 “Luminosity Measurement” on page 772.

sensor Memory
17.9.4 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor

Wireless Connectivity
For more information, see section 17.34 “RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor
Wireless Connectivity” on page 778.




688

and window blinds.
17.9.8 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED

There is one LED on the RP controller expansion multi-sensor. The LED is
integrated with the Set button.
LED” on page 797.
17.9.9 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Set

Button
The RP controller expansion multi-sensor has a Set button on the front. The Set
Set Button” on page 800.

Device Installation
The RP controller expansion multi-sensor can be installed on a dropped
(suspended) ceiling, a drywall ceiling, or a junction (gang) box.
17.9.11 Wiring


689


Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
RP controller expansion multi-sensor.
Electrical

Powered by the RP-C through the room bus (RJ45)
Maximum power consumption 0.3 W
Environment
Material
Cover color Signal white (RAL9003)
Mechanical

690
Overall external diameter 97.5 mm (3.84 in.)
Diameter of mounting clearance hole 75.0 to 76.0 mm (2.95 to 3.00 in.)
External washer thickness 12 mm (0.47 in.)
Overall external thickness 19 mm (0.75 in.)
Internal thickness 20 mm (0.79 in.)
Overall internal depth 28 mm (1.10 in.)
Weight, multi-sensor with mounting springs (3x) 0.083 kg (0.183 lb)
Weight, multi-sensor with mounting ring 0.094 kg (0.207 lb)
Installation Plastic unit to be fitted flush in a suspended ceiling tile with a thickness of up to 45 mm
(1.77 in.)
Communication ports
Room bus RS-485


691
Frequency 2.402 to 2.480 GHz
Beacon protocol iBeacon
Hardware
Frequency 38.4 MHz
Flash memory (serial) 2 MB
Motion detection
Sensor Quad-type passive infrared (PIR) sensor with Fresnel lens
Detection range See image and table below.
Sensor mounting height Sensor detection range (diameter)
3.0 m (10 ft) 8.6 m (28 ft)
2.7 m (9 ft) 8.0 m (26 ft)
2.5 m (8 ft) 7.4 m (24 ft)

692
Luminosity measurements
Sensor Ambient Light Sensor (ALS)
Spectral response Human eye
Luminosity range 0 to 10,000 lux
Field of view 55 degrees from vertical

The RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is shown in the
following figure.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE internal configuration

693
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI
The RP-C-EXT-DALI light module connects to the RP-C room controllers and
provides I/O expansion for lighting control with DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting
Interface).
The DALI light module enables control of lights equipped with electronic ballasts,
LED drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface as well as connection of
DALI input devices such as sensors and push-buttons.
with multi-master capability. DALI-2 compliance means benefits such as
improved interoperability and easier installation and maintenance. The DALI light
module can be used with DALI version-1 products because DALI-2 is designed to
be backward compatible with DALI version-1. The multi-master capability of the
DALI light module allows the module to function as a DALI master in a DALI
network and can thus work together with DALI-2 sensors and push-buttons.
The DALI light module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for
product range.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-DALI – DALI light module without power distribution capability
17.10.1 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power

Distribution
control of DALI light control gear such as lights with electronic ballasts, LED
drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface as well as connection of DALI
input devices such as sensors and push-buttons.

694
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI

Inputs

Power Supply

sensor Memory
17.10.5 DALI Light Module Supported Building

Standards
For more information, see section 17.32 “DALI Light Module Supported Building

695
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI



and window blinds.

Connectors
the device.

modules.

696
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI
on page 793.


Installation
17.10.13 Wiring



697
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI

Electrical
Nominal voltage 100 to 277 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Environment
Pollution degree 2
Material
Mechanical

698
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI
Weight 0.352 kg (0.776 lb)

DALI inputs/outputs: 4 x 2-pin Wieland GST15i2 connector
Communication ports
Room bus RS-485

Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz
Memory
Frequency 32 MHz

699
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI
Additional hardware
DALI inputs/outputs

Input/output terminals DA+ and DA-
Digital inputs

The RP-C-EXT-DALI internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is

700
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI
Figure: RP-C-EXT-DALI internal configuration

701
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
The RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 light module connects to the RP-C room controllers and
provides I/O expansion for 0-10V lighting control.
The 0-10V light module enables control of lights equipped with electronic
ballasts, LED drivers, and other 0-10V compatible control gear.
The 0-10V light module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for
product range.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 – 0-10V light module without power distribution capability
17.11.1 0-10V Light Outputs without Power

Distribution
(dimming) of lights with electronic ballasts, LED drivers, and other 0-10V
compatible control gear.

Inputs

702
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4

Power Supply

sensor Memory
17.11.5 0-10V Light Module Supported Building

Standards
The 0-10V light module supports 0-10 V lighting control according to both the
current sourcing and current sinking standards.



703
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4

and window blinds.

Connectors
the device.

modules.
on page 793.


Installation

704
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
17.11.13 Wiring




705
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
Electrical
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Environment
Pollution degree 2
Material
Mechanical

706
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
Weight 0.438 kg (0.965 lb)

Light outputs: 4 x 2-pin Wieland GST15i2 connector
Communication ports
Room bus RS-485

Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz
0-10V light outputs
Output terminals AOn (n: 1 to 4) and COM
Digital inputs

The RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is

707
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
Figure: RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 internal configuration

708
17.12 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD
The RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD SMI blind module connects to the RP-C room
controllers and provides I/O expansion for control of AC mains-supplied motors
(drives) with SMI (Standard Motor Interface for AC applications).
The SMI high-voltage blind module enables control and power supply (230 VAC)
of motorized venetian blinds, roller shutters, awnings, and other shade products
(typically for exterior use).
The SMI blind module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for
product range.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD – SMI high-voltage blind module
17.12.1 SMI Blind Outputs

The SMI high-voltage blind modules have four Blind outputs for control of
motorized window blinds (drives) that are powered by AC mains voltage (230
VAC). The Standard Motor Interface (SMI), AC version for AC mains-supplied
drives, is used to control the blind motors.

Inputs

709

Power Supply

Metering

sensor Memory
17.12.6 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building

Standards
The SMI blind modules comply to version 3.0 of the SMI specification.
For more information, see section 17.33 “SMI Blind Modules Supported Building

710



and window blinds.

Connectors
the device.

modules.

711
on page 793.


Installation
17.12.14 Wiring



712

Electrical
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum current consumption 8A
Environment
Pollution degree 2
Material
Mechanical

713
Weight 0.405 kg (0.893 lb)

Communication ports
Room bus RS-485

Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz

714
Energy metering

100 to 3000 W: 1%
Blind outputs
SMI motor control outputs for 230 VAC powered blind motors.
Output terminals N, PE, L, I+, and I-
SMI version 3.0
Number of SMI channels 1
Maximum total number of blind motors (drives) 16

Digital inputs

The RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD internal configuration with regards to the signal

715
Figure: RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD internal configuration

716
17.13 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD
The RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD SMI blind module connects to the RP-C room
controllers and provides I/O expansion for control of DC low-voltage motors
(drives) with SMI LoVo (Standard Motor Interface for low-voltage applications).
The SMI low-voltage blind module enables control and power supply (24 VDC) of
motorized venetian blinds, roller blinds, pleated blinds, and other shade products
(typically for interior use).
The SMI blind module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for
product range.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD – SMI low-voltage blind module
17.13.1 SMI LoVo Blind Outputs

The SMI low-voltage blind modules have two Blind outputs for control of
motorized window blinds (drives) that are powered by 24 VDC. The Standard
Motor Interface (SMI), LoVo version for DC low-voltage drives, is used to control
the blind motors.

Inputs

717

Power Supply

Metering

sensor Memory
17.13.6 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building

Standards
For more information, see section 17.33 “SMI Blind Modules Supported Building

718



and window blinds.

Connectors
the device.

modules.

719
on page 793.


Installation
17.13.14 Wiring



720

Electrical
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Onboard 24 VDC power supply
RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD has an onboard 24 VDC power supply that is used to power the blind
outputs.
Maximum supply current 1.3 A
Protection Short-circuit protection
Environment
Pollution degree 2
Material

721
Mechanical
Weight 0.439 kg (0.968 lb)
Installation DIN rail or flat surfacea

a) For the SMI low-voltage blind module certain restrictions apply to the installation orientation. For
more information, see section 17.46 “RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation” on page
801.

Communication ports
Room bus RS-485

Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz

722
Energy metering
The energy consumption is measured in Wh, shared by the two outputs.
Typical measurement accuracy at room temperature 0.5 to 2 W: 5%

2 to 30 W: 1%
Blind outputs
SMI LoVo motor control outputs for 24 VDC powered blinds motors.
Output terminals I+, I-, 0 V, and 24 V
SMI version 3.0

Digital inputs

The RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD internal configuration with regards to the signal

723
Figure: RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD internal configuration

724
17.14 RP-C-EXT-REL-4
The RP-C-EXT-REL-4 relay module connects to the RP-C room controllers and
enables power supply and control of lights.
The relay module is part of the RP controller expansion modules for connected
Figure: RP-C-EXT-REL-4 – Relay module

The RP-C-EXT-REL-4 relay module has four Relay outputs, which are designed
for power supply and control of lights.

Inputs

725

Metering

sensor Memory



and window blinds.

726

Connectors
the device.

modules.
on page 793.


Installation
17.14.12 Wiring

727



Electrical
Frequency 50/60 Hz

728
Environment
Pollution degree 2
Material
Mechanical
Weight 0.378 kg (0.833 lb)

Relay outputs: 4 x 3-pin Wieland GST15i3 connector
Communication ports
Room bus RS-485


729
Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz
Relay status indicator One status LED (green) for each output
Energy metering
Voltage range 230 to 277 VAC +/-10 %

100 to 3000 W: 1%
Relay outputs
Relay outputs for lights powered by 100 to 277 VAC.
Outputs 4, Relay 1 to Relay 4
Output terminals N, PE, and L
Power distribution 100 to 277 VAC (same voltage as power supply)

Digital inputs

The RP-C-EXT-REL-4 internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is

730
Figure: RP-C-EXT-REL-4 internal configuration

731
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10
The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module connects to the RP-C room controllers and
enables the control of lights and blinds.
It is part of the EcoStruxure™ Connected Room Solutions for Hotels and can be
combined with other modules from this product range.
It is designed for hotel guest room applications.
The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module is an RP controller expansion module. This
means that it can also be combined with modules from the Connected Room
Solutions for Buildings.
Figure: CRS-HH-REL-10 – 10-channel relay module

The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module has 10 relay outputs, which are designed for
control of lights and blinds.


732
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10

sensor Memory



and window blinds.

Connectors
the device.

733
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10

modules.
on page 793.


Installation
17.15.11 Wiring


734
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10


17.15.15 Supported Types of Blind Motors

The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module supports blind motors with an operating
voltage of 120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
For more information, see section 17.62 “Types of Blind Motors Supported by
CRS-HH-REL-10” on page 839.
Electrical

Powered by the RP-C through the room bus (RJ45)
Environment
Pollution degree 2

735
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10
Material
Mechanical
Weight 0.476 kg (1.050 lb)
Terminal blocks Relay outputs: 10 x 2-pin screw terminal block

Digital inputs: 2 x 9-pin screw terminal block
Communication ports
Room bus RS-485

Hardware
Frequency 80 MHz

736
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10
Relay outputs
Outputs 10, DO1 to DO10
Relay output rating 24 to 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 30 VDC:

Resistive and incandescent: 10 A
Standard magnetic ballast: 5 A
LED driver: 5 A
1/2 HP, 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
1/4 HP, 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Maximum load current Maximum 50 A total load for the 10 outputs
Maximum inrush current Maximum 165 A inrush current (<20 ms) per output
Digital inputs

The CRS-HH-REL-10 internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is

737
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10
Figure: CRS-HH-REL-10 internal configuration

738
17.16 DALI Inputs/Outputs with Power Distribution
17.16 DALI Inputs/Outputs with Power

Distribution
control and power supply of DALI light control gear such as lights with electronic
ballasts, LED drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface as well as
connection of DALI input devices such as sensors and push-buttons.
The four DALI inputs/outputs are labeled Light 1 to Light 4.
The DALI inputs/outputs support:
• DALI lighting control
• Power distribution (230 VAC)
Figure: . DALI inputs/outputs with power distribution
DALI lighting control

The four DALI inputs/outputs share one logical DALI channel.
The 5-pole DALI input/output connector has two terminals for DALI lighting
control:
• DA+

739
• DA-
These two terminals are where the wires from the DALI bus are connected. The
DALI bus is a 2-wire bus, which is used for bi-directional communication. For
more information, see section 31.13 “Wire Sizes and Lengths” on page 1160.
The DALI light module monitors and controls the DALI control gear and input
devices on the DALI bus. Each DALI control gear device is assigned a unique
short address, which is used when communicating with the individual device on
the bus. The DALI control gear and input devices can be arranged into up to 16
groups. Each device can be a member of any combination of the 16 groups. For
example, a group can be used to change all LED drivers in a room from Off to
On.
Up to 32 DALI control gear devices can be connected to the DALI light module.
The maximum number of control gear devices per module and per DALI
input/output is also determined by the module's power distribution limitations. For
more information, see section “Specifications”.
Up to 16 DALI input devices in total can be connected to the DALI light module.
Each input device supports up to four sensors or buttons.
Power distribution
The power distribution capability means that the module distributes the AC mains
voltage (230 VAC) from the Power Input to the control gear connected to the four
DALI inputs/outputs.
The 5-pole DALI input/output connector has three terminals for power
distribution:
• N (Neutral)
• PE (Protective earth ground)
• L (Line)
The DALI light module uses a relay to control the power distribution to each DALI
input/output, by connecting or disconnecting the AC mains voltage to the output
(L terminal). In the figure above, the relay is named K1 for the Light 1 output, K2
for the Light 2 output, and so on.
In the event of a power outage, the relays are set in a predefined state so that the
AC mains voltage is connected to the four DALI inputs/outputs. The relays will
remain in that state at startup after a power outage.
The module's AC mains voltage side and low-voltage side (SELV side) are
galvanically separated by means of isolation circuitry.
The module also has energy metering circuitry that supports the measurement of
the energy consumption for the total load connected to the module. For more
information, see section 17.28 “RP Controller Expansion Module Energy
Metering” on page 770.
Input/output terminals N, PE, L, DA+, and DA-

740


741
17.17 0-10V Light Outputs with Power Distribution
17.17 0-10V Light Outputs with Power

Distribution
(dimming) and power supply of lights with electronic ballasts, LED drivers, and
other 0-10V compatible control gear.
The Light outputs support:
• 0-10V lighting control
• Power distribution (230 VAC)
Figure: . 0-10V light outputs with power distribution
0-10V lighting control

The 5-pole Light output connector has two terminals for 0-10V lighting control:
• Analog Output (AO1 to AO4)
• Common (COM)
The four analog outputs are independently controlled. The control signal is a DC
voltage that varies between 0 V and 10 V.

742
17.17 0-10V Light Outputs with Power Distribution
The 0-10V light module supports both the current sourcing and current sinking
standards.
The maximum number of control gear devices per module and per output is
determined by the module's power distribution limitations. For more information,
see section “Specifications”.
Power distribution
voltage (230 VAC) from the Power Input to the control gear connected to the four
Light outputs.
The 5-pole Light output connector has three terminals for power distribution:
• N (Neutral)
• L (Line)
The 0-10V light module uses a relay to control the power distribution to each
Light output, by connecting or disconnecting the AC mains voltage to the output
(L terminal). In the figure above, the relay is named K1 for the Light 1 output, K2
for the Light 2 output, and so on.
In the event of a power outage, the relays are set in a predefined state so that the
AC mains voltage is connected to the four Light outputs. The relays will remain in
that state at startup after a power outage.
Output terminals N, PE, L, AOn (n: 1 to 4), and COM


743
17.18 High-Voltage Blind Outputs

The high-voltage blind modules have four Blind outputs for control of motorized
window blinds that are powered by AC mains voltage (230 VAC).
The Blind output connector has four terminals for blind motor control and power
distribution:
• ↑ (UP)
• ↓ (DOWN)
• N (Neutral)
The connector has a 5-pole frame, but only four poles are used in this
application. For more information, see section 17.39 “RP Controller Expansion
Module Pluggable Connectors ” on page 787.
The four outputs are independently controlled. The blind module uses two relays
connected in series to control each output:
• One relay to select the ↑ (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) terminal
• One relay to connect or disconnect the AC mains voltage to the selected
terminal
In the figure below, the two relays are named K11 and K1 respectively for the
Blind 1 output, K12 and K2 for the Blind 2 output, and so on.
The relays can be inadvertently put in the On state due to mechanical shock
during transportation. Ensure that the blind module is powered up by the RP-C
room bus (24 VDC) before turning on the AC mains voltage (230 VAC) or
connecting the AC mains voltage to the blind module. Otherwise, there is a risk
that the blinds or awnings are driven to their end position and cannot be
retracted.
NOTICE
BLINDS/AWNINGS DAMAGE
Before turning on or connecting the AC mains power (230 VAC) to the high-
voltage blind module, ensure that the module is powered up by the RP-C room
bus (24 VDC).

744
At startup, the relays are set in a predefined state so that the AC mains voltage is
disconnected from the four Blind outputs.
Figure: . High-voltage blind outputs
The blind module is designed for use with blind motors with automatic end stop
detection. The blind module requires a defined end stop at the top position. An
end stop at the bottom position is recommended, but not required.
To move the blinds up or down, the blind module activates the two relays so that
the AC mains voltage is connected to either the ↑ (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) terminal. For
venetian blinds that use one motor to control both the position of the blinds and
the angle of the slats, the angle is also controlled through these two terminals.
The mechanics of the venetian blinds is such that the up/down movement of the
blinds begins with a rotation of the slats. This initial phase of the up/down
movement is used to control the angle of the slats, by connecting the AC mains
voltage to the ↑ (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) terminal only for a short time period.

745
To achieve absolute control of the position of the blinds and the angle of the slats,
measurements and calibration need to be performed during commissioning. The
time it takes for the blinds to travel from the bottom to top position, and from top
to bottom position, needs to be measured. The time it takes for the slats to fully
rotate in one direction, as well as the opposite direction, needs to be measured.
The results from the measurements are entered in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation software to calibrate the position of the blinds and angle of the slats.
For more information, see the Configuring Blinds in RP Series Expansion Blind
High Voltage Power Modules topic on WebHelp.
Output terminals N, PE, ↑ (UP), and ↓ (DOWN)
Output voltage 230 VAC (same voltage as power supply)
Maximum load current Maximum 2 A load per output


746
17.19 Low-Voltage Blind Outputs

The low-voltage blind modules have two Blind outputs for control of motorized
window blinds that are powered by 24 VDC.
The Blind output connector has two terminals for blind motor control and power
distribution:
• M+
• M-
The connector has a 5-pole frame, but only two poles are used in this application.
The two outputs are independently controlled. The blind module uses a motor
driver to control each output and drive the motor connected to the output. At
startup, the motor drivers are in low power standby mode with the outputs at high
impedance.
Figure: . Low-voltage blind outputs
galvanically separated through the AC/DC converter.

747

The blind module is designed for use with blind motors with automatic end stop
detection. The blind module requires a defined end stop at the top position. An
end stop at the bottom position is recommended, but not required.
To move the blinds up or down, the blind module controls the motor driver so that
the 24 VDC is connected to the blind motor with one polarity or the other polarity
to control the direction of the blinds. For venetian blinds that use one motor to
control both the position of the blinds and the angle of the slats, the angle is also
controlled through these two terminals. The mechanics of the venetian blinds is
such that the up/down movement of the blinds begins with a rotation of the slats.
This initial phase of the up/down movement is used to control the angle of the
slats, by connecting the 24 VDC to the blind motor only for a short time period.
To achieve absolute control of the position of the blinds and the angle of the slats,
measurements and calibration need to be performed during commissioning. The
time it takes for the blinds to travel from the bottom to top position, and from top
to bottom position, needs to be measured. The time it takes for the slats to fully
rotate in one direction, as well as the opposite direction, needs to be measured.
The results from the measurements are entered in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation software to calibrate the position of the blinds and angle of the slats.
For more information, see the Configuring Blinds in RP Series Expansion Blind
Low Voltage Power Modules topic on WebHelp.
Output terminals M- and M+
Output voltage 24 VDC
Maximum load current Maximum 1 A load per output


748
17.20 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power Distribution
17.20 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power

Distribution
control of DALI light control gear such as lights with electronic ballasts, LED
drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface as well as connection of DALI
input devices such as sensors and push-buttons.
The four DALI inputs/outputs are labeled Light 1 to Light 4.
The DALI inputs/outputs support DALI lighting control. Power distribution (100 to
277 VAC) to the control gear is not supported but needs to be accomplished with
an external power supply.
Figure: . DALI inputs/outputs without power distribution

The four DALI inputs/outputs share one logical DALI channel.
The 2-pole DALI input/output connector has two terminals for DALI lighting
control:
• DA+
• DA-

749
17.20 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power Distribution
These two terminals are where the wires from the DALI bus are connected. The
DALI bus is a 2-wire bus, which is used for bi-directional communication. For
The DALI light module monitors and controls the DALI control gear and input
devices on the DALI bus. Each DALI control gear device is assigned a unique
short address, which is used when communicating with the individual device on
the bus. The DALI control gear and input devices can be arranged into up to 16
groups. Each device can be a member of any combination of the 16 groups. For
example, a group can be used to change all LED drivers in a room from Off to
On.
Up to 32 DALI control gear devices can be connected to the DALI light module.
Up to 16 DALI input devices in total can be connected to the DALI light module.
Each input device supports up to four sensors or buttons.
Input/output terminals DA+ and DA-

750
17.21 0-10V Light Outputs without Power Distribution
17.21 0-10V Light Outputs without Power

Distribution
(dimming) of lights with electronic ballasts, LED drivers, and other 0-10V
compatible control gear.
The Light outputs support 0-10V lighting control. Power distribution (100 to 277
VAC) to the control gear is not supported but needs to be accomplished with an
external power supply.
Figure: . 0-10V light outputs without power distribution

The 2-pole Light output connector has two terminals for 0-10V lighting control:
• Analog Output (AO1 to AO4)
• Common (COM)
The four analog outputs are independently controlled. The control signal is a DC
voltage that varies between 0 V and 10 V.
The 0-10V light module supports both the current sourcing and current sinking
standards.

751
17.21 0-10V Light Outputs without Power Distribution
Output terminals AOn (n: 1 to 4) and COM

752
17.22 SMI Blind Outputs

The SMI high-voltage blind modules have four Blind outputs for control of
motorized window blinds (drives) that are powered by AC mains voltage (230
VAC). The Standard Motor Interface (SMI), AC version for AC mains-supplied
drives, is used to control the blind motors.
DANGER
Never connect an SMI LoVo motor to the RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD SMI
blind module.
The blind module provides one SMI channel. The blind module acts as a
controller for the blind motors.
A maximum of 16 blind motors can be controlled by a blind module. The
maximum number of blind motors per module and per output is also determined
by the module's power distribution limitations. For more information, see section
“Specifications”.
The Blind output connector has five terminals for SMI blind motor control and
power distribution:
• I+ (Control line +)
• I- (Control line -)
• N (Neutral)
• L (Line)
TIP: For information on the color coding of the wires for connecting SMI
systems, see the SMI Standard Motor Interface website, standard-motor-
interface.com

753
The four power outputs are independently controlled.
Figure: . SMI (high-voltage) blind outputs
Power distribution
The SMI high-voltage blind module uses one relay per output to connect or
disconnect the AC mains voltage to the L (Line) terminal and the connected blind
motor. In the figure above, the relays are named K1 for the Blind 1 output, K2 for
the Blind 2 output, and so on.
The relays are typically always switched On to power the blind motors being
controlled, but the relays can be switched Off for different reasons.
NOTE: The relays can be inadvertently put in the On state due to
mechanical shock during transportation. To put the relays in the Off state,
ensure that the blind module is powered up by the RP-C room bus (24 VDC)
before turning on or connecting the AC mains voltage (230 VAC).

754
SMI blind motor control

The SMI interface enables accurate positioning of window blinds. Accurate
positioning is necessary when several blinds, awnings, or roller shutters are to be
aligned. The blind module transmits the desired position through the control wires
(I+ and I-) in the form of a digital command, and the electrical motor moves the
blind accurately to the desired position using an internal regulator. The SMI blind
motors (drives) have the end stops at the top and bottom positions pre-
programmed.
The data transmission is bi-directional. The blind module transmits digital
commands to the blind motor (drive), and the drive provides feedback to the
module in the form of status messages. The feedback from the SMI blind motor
drives is necessary when large installations are to be operated efficiently.
Conventional blind motors do not support feedback.
The SMI interface supports not only commands for positioning of the blinds, but
also commands for querying their current positions, and for diagnosis. The
diagnostic commands can be used to detect non-operational blind motors.
For venetian blinds that use one motor drive to control both the position of the
blinds and the angle of the slats, the angle of the slats is controlled by sending a
command for changing the position of the blind. The mechanics of the venetian
blinds is such that the up/down movement of the blinds begins with a rotation of
the slats. To achieve absolute control of the angle of the slats, measurements
and calibration need to be performed during commissioning. The angle of rotation
for the slats, that is, the complete rotation, needs to be measured in degrees. The
result from the measurements is entered in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software to calibrate the angle of the slats. For more information, see the
Configuring Blinds in RP Series Expansion SMI High and Low Voltage Blind
Power Modules topic on WebHelp.
Output terminals N, PE, L, I+, and I-


755
17.23 SMI LoVo Blind Outputs

The SMI low-voltage blind modules have two Blind outputs for control of
motorized window blinds (drives) that are powered by 24 VDC. The Standard
Motor Interface (SMI), LoVo version for DC low-voltage drives, is used to control
the blind motors.
The blind module provides one SMI channel. The blind module acts as a
controller for the blind motors.
A maximum of 16 blind motors can be controlled by a blind module. The
maximum number of blind motors per module and per output is also determined
by the module's power distribution limitations. For more information, see section
“Specifications”.
The Blind output connector has four terminals for blind motor control and power
distribution:
• I+
• I-
• 0V
• 24 V
The connector has a 5-pole frame, but only four poles are used in this
application. For more information, see section 17.39 “RP Controller Expansion
Module Pluggable Connectors ” on page 787.

756
The two power outputs are independently controlled.
Figure: . SMI LoVo blind outputs
Power distribution
The blind module uses a 24 VDC supply to connect or disconnect the 24 VDC to
each blind motor (drive). In the figure above, the 24 VDC supplies are named 24
VDC Supply 1 for the Blind 1 output and 24 VDC Supply 2 for the Blind 2 output.
The 24 VDC supplies typically always connect 24 VDC to power the blind motors
being controlled, but the 24 VDC supplies can be put in low power standby mode
for different reasons.
galvanically separated through the AC/DC converter.
SMI blind motor control

The SMI interface enables accurate positioning of window blinds. Accurate
positioning is necessary when several blinds, awnings, or roller shutters are to be
aligned. The blind module transmits the desired position through the control wires
(I+ and I-) in the form of a digital command, and the electrical motor moves the

757
blind accurately to the desired position using an internal regulator. The SMI blind
motors (drives) have the end stops at the top and bottom positions pre-
programmed.
The data transmission is bi-directional. The blind module transmits digital
commands to the blind motor (drive), and the drive provides feedback to the
module in the form of status messages. The feedback from the SMI blind motor
drives is necessary when large installations are to be operated efficiently.
Conventional blind motors do not support feedback.
The SMI interface supports not only commands for positioning of the blinds, but
also commands for querying their current positions, and for diagnosis. The
diagnostic commands can be used to detect non-operational blind motors.
For venetian blinds that use one motor drive to control both the position of the
blinds and the angle of the slats, the angle is also controlled by sending a
command for changing the position of the blind. The mechanics of the venetian
blinds is such that the up/down movement of the blinds begins with a rotation of
the slats. To achieve absolute control of the angle of the slats, measurements
and calibration need to be performed during commissioning.The angle of rotation
for the slats, that is, the complete rotation, needs to be measured in degrees. The
result from the measurements is entered in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software to calibrate the angle of the slats. For more information, see the
Configuring Blinds in RP Series Expansion SMI High and Low Voltage Blind
Power Modules topic on WebHelp.
Output terminals I+, I-, 0 V, and 24 V


758
17.24 Relay Outputs on RP-C-EXT-REL-4

The RP-C-EXT-REL-4 relay module has four Relay outputs, which are designed
for power supply and control of lights.
When a relay module is moved from one installation and reused in another
installation, the module's “Cold start” and “System failure” values will be
unknown. These values are stored in the module's persistent memory. The
values control whether the relays will be on/active (energized) or off/inactive (de-
energized) when the module is powered on (during a cold start) or powered off
(due to a power outage). Connecting equipment to a relay module with unknown
values on these properties entails a risk that the equipment will be damaged. To
prevent this risk, the module's relay outputs need to be configured in EcoStruxure
Building Operation WorkStation before connecting the equipment. This
configuration means that the “Cold start” and “System failure” values for the
module's Relay objects are configured to match the equipment to be connected.
For more information, see the Configuring Relays in the RP Series Expansion
Relay Module topic on WebHelp.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Before reusing a relay module from one installation to another and connecting
equipment to the module, configure the module's relay outputs in EcoStruxure
Building Operation WorkStation to match the equipment in the new installation.
The relay module distributes the AC mains voltage (100 to 277 VAC) from the
Power Input to the light control gear connected to the four Relay outputs.
The Relay output connector has three terminals for power distribution:
• N (Neutral)

759
• L (Line)
Figure: . Relay outputs
The four outputs are independently controlled. The relay module uses a relay to
control the power distribution to each output, by connecting or disconnecting the
AC mains voltage to the output (L terminal). In the figure above, the relay is
named K1 for the Relay 1 output, K2 for the Relay 2 output, and so on.
The maximum number of connected light control gear devices per module and
per output is determined by the module's power distribution limitations. For more
information, see section “Specifications”.
You can configure the module's “Cold start” and “System failure” values, which
control whether the relays should be on/active (energized) or off/inactive (de-
energized) under non-normal operating conditions such as when the module cold
starts or loses communication with the RP-C controller. For more information,
see the Configuring Relays in the RP Series Expansion Relay Module topic on
WebHelp.
In the event of a power outage, the relays are set to the “System failure value”.
When the power supply returns, the relays are temporarily set to the “Cold start
value” before the relay module has all its properties reinforced by the parent RP-

760
C controller. For more information, see the RP Series Expansion Relay Module
Relay Properties - Basic Tab topic on WebHelp.
Outputs 4, Relay 1 to Relay 4
Output terminals N, PE, and L
Power distribution 100 to 277 VAC (same voltage as power supply)


761
17.25 Relay Outputs on CRS-HH-REL-10

The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module has 10 relay outputs, which are designed for
control of lights and blinds.
Do not connect high voltage (non-SELV/non-PELV) equipment and low voltage
(SELV/PELV) equipment to relay outputs next to each other, as the clearance
and creepage distance is not large enough for such connections. Connecting
high (mains) voltage and low voltage equipment to relay outputs next to each
other poses an electrical hazard that will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Do not connect high and low voltage next to each other for relay outputs.
Figure: Restrictions for relay output connections
There are six relay outputs on the upper side of the module, labeled DO1 to DO6,
and four relay outputs on the lower side, labeled DO7 to DO10. To prevent from
connecting high and low voltage next to each other, it is recommended not to mix
high and low voltage connections on the same side of the device. Connect the
high voltage equipment on the upper (DO1-DO6) or lower (DO7-DO10) side and
connect low voltage equipment on the opposite side.

762
Figure: Recommendations for relay output connections
To control blinds, the relay module uses two consecutive relay outputs. When
configuring a blind in EcoStruxure Building Operation WorkStation, two relay
outputs (DO terminals) are allocated. You can only select an odd terminal
number. This helps ensure that you do not connect a blind across sides, for
example, from DO6 to DO7. For more information, see the Relay 10 Module
Overview topic on WebHelp.
IMPORTANT: Connection of a blind motor can only be made starting from
an odd relay output terminal number.
NOTE: The Hotel Application of the Connected Room Solutions for Hotels
supports the use of a maximum of eight relay outputs (DOs) for blinds.
The relays can be inadvertently put in the On state due to mechanical shock
during transportation. Ensure that the relay module is powered up by the RP-C
room bus (24 VDC) before connecting the AC mains voltage to the loads (blind
motors). Otherwise, there is a risk that the blinds or awnings are driven to their
end position and cannot be retracted.
NOTICE
Before connecting the AC mains voltage to the blinds/awnings connected to the
relay outputs, ensure that the CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module is powered up by
the RP-C room bus (24 VDC).
When a relay module is moved from one installation and reused in another
installation, the module's “Cold start” and “System failure” values will be
unknown. These values are stored in the module's persistent memory. The
values control whether the relays will be on/active (energized) or off/inactive (de-
energized) when the module is powered on (during a cold start) or powered off
(due to a power outage). Connecting equipment to a relay module with unknown
values on these properties entails a risk that the equipment will be damaged. To
help prevent this risk, the module's relay outputs (DOs) need to be configured in

763
EcoStruxure Building Operation WorkStation before connecting the equipment.

The DOs are configured by binding the terminals to Blind or Relay objects. If a
Relay object is used for the DO, the module's “Cold start value” and “System
failure value” need to be configured to match the equipment to be connected. For
more information, see the Relay 10 Module Overview topic on WebHelp.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Before reusing a relay module from one installation to another and connecting
equipment to the module, configure the module's relay outputs in EcoStruxure
Building Operation WorkStation to match the equipment in the new installation.
You can connect LED drivers in parallel to a relay output. Before doing so,
ensure that the parallel connection of the LED drivers cannot cause the
maximum inrush current of the relay output to be exceeded. If the maximum
inrush current is exceeded, the relay can be damaged.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
When connecting LED drivers in parallel to a relay output, ensure that the
maximum inrush current of the relay output is not exceeded due to the parallel
connection of the LED drivers.

764
The 10 outputs are independent relay contacts. In the figure below, the relay
contact is named K1 for the DO1 relay output, K2 for the DO2 relay output, and
so on.
Figure: . Relay outputs on CRS-HH-REL-10
The module’s upper (DO1 to DO6) and lower (DO7 to DO10) load sides are
galvanically separated from each other and from the control side. The control
side is always SELV/PELV, and any or both load sides can be either mains
voltage or SELV/PELV.
For Relay objects, you can configure the “Cold start value” and “System failure
value”, which control whether the relays should be on/active (energized) or
off/inactive (de-energized) under non-normal operating conditions such as when
the module cold starts or loses communication with the RP-C controller. For more
information, see the Configuring Relays in RP Series Expansion Relay 10
Modules topic on WebHelp. WorkStation does not have these configuration
options for Blind objects. However, when a Blind object is bound to a terminal the
module will internally configure these values appropriately.
In the event of a power outage, the relays are set to the “System failure value”.
When the power supply returns, the relays are temporarily set to the “Cold start
value” before the relay module has all its properties reinforced by the parent RP-
C controller.

765
Outputs 10, DO1 to DO10
Relay output rating 24 to 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 30 VDC:

Resistive and incandescent: 10 A
Standard magnetic ballast: 5 A
LED driver: 5 A
1/2 HP, 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
1/4 HP, 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Maximum load current Maximum 50 A total load for the 10 outputs
Maximum inrush current Maximum 165 A inrush current (<20 ms) per output

766
17.26 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs
17.26 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital

Inputs
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
• Connect the digital inputs only to dry contacts (relays or open collector
outputs) that are galvanically isolated.
• Do not connect the RET terminals of one RP controller expansion module to
RET/G0 of another part of the system.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 2.2 kohm
Be careful when connecting the digital inputs. When connecting the digital inputs
to dry contact relays, the relays must be galvanically isolated from everything
else. You can use a common wire from RET to all dry contact relays connected to
the same RP controller expansion module. Do not connect RET from one RP
controller expansion module to anything else, including RET/G0 of another RP
controller expansion module or RP-C controller. The digital inputs may be
connected to open collector outputs provided that the open collector outputs
belong to circuits that are galvanically isolated from everything else.
If a RET terminal of one RP controller expansion module is connected to RET/G0
of another part of the system, it can cause problems in case there is an

767
17.26 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs
interruption in the G0 supply somewhere in the system. This is because the

system may get its G0 connection maintained by the ground connection through
the room bus (RS-485) interface, which is not designed for such a high current.
This means that connection of RET of an RP controller expansion module to any
part that is not galvanically isolated from everything else can damage the room
bus (RS-485) interface.
Light modules, blind modules, and RP-C-EXT-REL-4
CRS-HH-REL-10

768
17.27 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply
17.27 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in

Power Supply
The built-in power supply is an integrated AC/DC module, which features a full-
wave rectifier, a galvanically isolated DC output, and incorporated electronic
components for overvoltage protection, overload protection, and EMI filtering.
With the RP controller expansion module's Power Input galvanically isolated from
electronics of the module, the risk of damage due to earth ground currents is
reduced.
17.27.1 DALI Light Modules

For the DALI light modules, the built-in power supply is used to convert the AC
mains voltage to 18 VDC, which is supplied to the DALI inputs/outputs for control
of the lights.
17.27.2 0-10V Light Modules

For the 0-10V light modules, the built-in power supply is used to convert the AC
mains voltage to 10 VDC, which is supplied to the Light outputs for control of the
lights.
17.27.3 Low-voltage Blind Modules

For the low-voltage blind modules, the built-in power supply is used to convert the
AC mains voltage to 24 VDC, which is supplied to the Blind outputs for control of
the blinds.
17.27.4 SMI Low-voltage Blind Modules

For the SMI low-voltage blind modules, the built-in power supply is used to
convert the AC mains voltage to 24 VDC, which is supplied to the Blind outputs
for powering of the blind motors.
17.27.5 SMI High-voltage Blind Modules

For the SMI high-voltage blind modules, the built-in power supply is used to
convert the AC mains voltage to 18 VDC, which is the SMI control voltage.

769
17.28 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering
17.28 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy

Metering
The following RP controller expansion modules support energy metering:
• High-voltage modules:
– RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD
– RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
– RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD
– RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD
– RP-C-EXT-REL-4
• Low-voltage modules:
– RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD
– RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD
The RP controller expansion module measures the energy consumption and
power demand for the total load on the 230-277 VAC input. The energy
consumed by the module itself is not included.
EcoStruxure Building Operation WorkStation has pre-configured BACnet analog
input objects for measuring energy consumption and power demand, which can
be used for trend logging and monitoring of value changes. For more information,
see the Energy Metering Overview topic on WebHelp.

The RP controller expansion module measures the active energy. The
measurement is performed according to the active energy measurement class 1
of the IEC 61557-12 standard. The active energy consumption is measured in
Wh.
The typical measurement accuracy for the two categories of RP controller
expansion modules and for their different measurement ranges is specified
below.
Table: Typical Measurement Accuracy

Category of RP Controller Expansion Typical Measurement Accuracya
Module
High-voltage modules 20 to 100 W: 5%

100 to 3000 W: 1%
Low-voltage modules 0.5 to 2 W: 5%

2 to 30 W: 1%
a) At room temperature.

770
17.28 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering
Power demand measurement

The power demand is measured in W. The power demand value is calculated
once a minute.

771
17.29 Luminosity Measurement
17.29 Luminosity Measurement

The RP controller expansion multi-sensor supports luminosity measurements
through an ambient light sensor.
Figure: Ambient light sensor
The ambient light sensor measures the intensity of visible light. The spectral
response of the sensor matches the response of the human eye. The sensor's
luminosity range is 0 to 10,000 lux.
The sensor's field of view is 55 degrees from vertical.
It is recommended to install the multi-sensor at least 1 m (3.3 ft) from all windows
to help prevent strong sunlight from disturbing the sensor's luminosity
measurements.
Figure: Multi-sensor luminosity measurement
The multi-sensor luminosity measurements need to be calibrated on site during

commissioning. The calibration is done by measuring the light levels in the room
using a light meter and then entering a constant lighting reference value (lux) in
the EcoStruxure Building Operation software. For more information, see the
Configuring the RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Ambient Light Sensor topic
on WebHelp.

772
17.30 Motion Detection

The RP controller expansion multi-sensor supports motion detection through a
passive infrared sensor.
Figure: Passive infrared (PIR) sensor
The sensor is designed to detect the motion of people. For example, the sensor
can be used to automatically turn on the lights when a person enters a room and
to turn off the lights when the person has left the room.
The multi-sensor uses a quad-type passive infrared (PIR) sensor with Fresnel
lens. The sensor detects the amount of change in infrared radiation that occurs
when a person moves, by sensing the difference in temperature between the
human body and the floor, walls, and other objects in the background.
The sensor detection range depends on which height the sensor is mounted, as
shown in the following figure and table.
Figure: Multi-sensor detection range
3.0 m (10 ft) 8.6 m (28 ft)
2.7 m (9 ft) 8.0 m (26 ft)

773
Continued
2.5 m (8 ft) 7.4 m (24 ft)
The multi-sensor is designed to be installed with the passive infrared sensor

facing down. For example, the multi-sensor can be installed into a dropped
ceiling, on a drywall ceiling, or on a junction box (when there is no ceiling and
space is opened to plenum). For more information, see section 17.54 “RP
Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Device Installation” on page 819. Installing the
multi-sensor on a wall will reduce the coverage range of the passive infrared
sensor.
NOTICE
REDUCED SENSOR COVERAGE RANGE
Always install the device with the passive infrared (PIR) sensor facing down.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in reduced device
performance.
The motion detection sensitivity needs to be tuned on site during commissioning.

The tuning is done by measuring the sensitivity and then entering a sensitivity
value in the EcoStruxure Building Operation software. For more information, see
the Configuring the RP Series Expansion Multi-sensor Passive Infrared Sensor
topic on WebHelp.

774
17.31 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory
17.31 RP Controller Expansion Module and

Multi-sensor Memory
The flash memory is used as follows:
• Embedded flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application
software, and configuration storage
• NOR flash memory: for log files and default configuration storage
The RAM is used for runtime operation.
The configuration data for the RP controller expansion modules and multi-
sensors resides in the RP-C controller to which the devices are connected. When
the RP-C controller is part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the configuration data for the
controller, expansion modules, and multi-sensors automatically resides in the
parent EcoStruxure BMS server. Any configuration changes made through the
EcoStruxure Building Operation software are stored in the EcoStruxure BMS
server as well as the hosted RP-C controller and its subsystem. This means there
is always a backup available for restoring or replacing an RP-C controller.
NOTE: Configuration changes made through a third party BACnet Operator
Workstation (B-OWS) or the Commission mobile application are not
automatically part of the configuration data in the EcoStruxure BMS server.
You need to upload such configuration changes if you want the changes to
be stored in the EcoStruxure BMS server.
Scheduled backups of the EcoStruxure BMS server can provide additional
protection against application and data loss. You can also manually back up or
restore an EcoStruxure BMS server to a storage location on a PC or network.

775
17.32 DALI Light Module Supported Building Standards
17.32 DALI Light Module Supported Building

Standards
with multi-master capability.
DALI-2 compliance means benefits such as improved interoperability and easier
installation and maintenance. The DALI light module can be used with DALI
version-1 control gear because DALI-2 is designed to be backward compatible
with DALI version-1. The DALI light module supports electronic ballasts, LED
drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface that are fully compliant with
DALI version-1 or DALI-2. The multi-master capability allows the DALI light
module to function as a DALI master in a DALI network, which means that the
module works together with DALI-2 sensors and push-buttons.
For information on supported control gear device types and a list of supported
input devices, see the Product Database on the DiiA website, www.dali-
alliance.org
NOTE: It is recommended to always test control gear and input devices at
an early stage in a project.
The DALI light module provides one DALI channel (DALI bus), which is split into
four inputs/outputs, labeled Light 1 to Light 4. Up to 32 DALI control gear devices
in total can be connected to the DALI light module. Up to 16 DALI input devices in
total can be connected to the DALI light module, and each input device supports
up to four sensors or buttons.
The DALI light module supports up to 16 DALI groups of control gear and input
devices, which can be used for common control of the devices. DALI groups can
combine devices regardless of which inputs/outputs the devices belong to. For
example, a DALI group can include all lights on one of the inputs/outputs, or
some of the lights on one input/output, or some lights on all inputs/outputs or on a
few inputs/outputs.

776
17.33 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building Standards
17.33 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building

Standards
With SMI 3.0, the specification offers uniform properties to simplify
commissioning and maintenance, new functions for file transfer and speed
control, improved robustness over a larger temperature range, and high
compatibility.
The SMI blind module can be used with products of SMI version 2.0 because the
SMI interface is backward compatible.
The SMI high-voltage blind module is an actuator (controller) with SMI interface
for control of AC mains (230 VAC) powered blind motors (drivers).
The SMI low-voltage blind module is an actuator (controller) with SMI LoVo
interface for DC control of low-voltage (24 VDC) powered blind motors (drivers).
The SMI blind modules are certified and registered on the SMI Standard Motor
Interface web site www.Standard-Motor-Interface.com

777
17.34 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Wireless Connectivity
17.34 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor

Wireless Connectivity
The RP controller expansion multi-sensor is a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE)
device, which supports applications such as beaconing and remote control
communication.
The Bluetooth beacon support means that the multi-sensor broadcasts
information that enables nearby smartphones, tablets, and other mobile devices
with a specific app installed to interact when in close proximity to the multi-
sensor. The Bluetooth beacon can be used for services such as indoor
positioning of the mobile device. The service and mobile app need to be provided
by a third party.
For more information, see the RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Beacon
topic on WebHelp.
The Bluetooth wireless connection can also be used for communication with the
RP controller expansion remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE), through which the user
can control the lighting, window blinds, temperature, and fan speed in a room or
zone of an office building.
The multi-sensor has an integrated antenna.
The multi-sensor must be professionally installed to comply with the following
rules and regulations:

778
17.35 RP-C Room Bus
17.35 RP-C Room Bus

and window blinds.
The room bus is a proprietary RS-485 bus, which is designed to provide both 24
VDC power supply and communications for the connected modules and multi-
sensors.
The maximum total length of the room bus is 72 m (236 ft). The room bus uses a
Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded, straight-through wired cable with eight conductors
(four twisted pairs) and RJ45 connectors. The wire size (cross-sectional area)
should be 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²). When the RP-C controller is
installed in a space that handles conditioned air or return air, the room bus cables
and IP network cables frequently must be plenum-rated to meet applicable
building codes. For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
NOTICE
By default, the RP-C controller's Room Bus port (RS-485 Com B) is configured
and allocated for the room bus. For more information, see section 16.8 “RP-C
Figure: Location of the Room Bus ports and address switches on the RP-C controllers and
RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors

779
17.35 RP-C Room Bus
IMPORTANT: The restrictions listed below only apply to Connected Room

Solutions for Buildings. For information on what restrictions apply to
Connected Room Solutions for Hotels, see the supplementary document
Architecture Guidelines – Hotel Application.
You can connect a single RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor to the
room bus, or you can connect up to six devices in a daisy-chain configuration.
NOTE: When connecting devices to the RP-C room bus through a daisy-
chain configuration, it does not matter if the incoming and outgoing cables
are connected to one or the other room bus port on the device.
The RP-C room bus supports up to six connected RP controller expansion
modules with the following restrictions:
• Maximum of two DALI light modules
• Maximum of two SMI blind modules
• Maximum of four multi-sensors
Figure: Example of supported combination of RP controller expansion modules and multi-

sensors on the RP-C room bus

which is used to give the device a unique address on the room bus. An RP
controller expansion module or multi-sensor can be given any address in the
range of 1 to 6. Configuring the address 0 means that the device enters
maintenance mode and goes offline. Configuring an address in the range of 7 to
9 also means that the device goes offline. For more information, see the RP
Controller Expansion Module Room Bus Addressing topic on WebHelp. An
incorrectly configured switch can cause two devices to have the same address
on the room bus, which means that both devices will be offline.

780
17.35 RP-C Room Bus
NOTICE
Ensure that the rotary switch on the RP controller expansion module or multi-
sensor is configured to give the device a unique room bus address in the range
of 1 to 6.
Table: Room Bus Addresses

Address Description
0 Maintenance mode. Device offline.
1 to 6 Valid addresses supported by the

EcoStruxure Building Operation software.
7 to 9 Reserved for future use. Addresses not

supported by the EcoStruxure Building
Operation software. Device offline.
NOTE: Devices connected to the RP-C room bus through a daisy-chain

configuration can be assigned addresses regardless of the order in which
the devices appear in the daisy chain. For example, device number 1 can
have the address 6, device number 2 can have the address 4, and so on.
NOTE: An RP controller expansion module and multi-sensor can be put into
different maintenance modes in which the device is either offline or online.
and Multi-sensor Maintenance Modes” on page 832.

781
17.36 Connecting RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors to RP-C
17.36 Connecting RP Controller Expansion

Modules and Multi-sensors to RP-C
You connect RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors to the RP-C
room bus to provide the devices with power and communication from the RP-C
controller.
NOTICE
Locate the room bus wiring away from external electromagnetic noise sources
such as high voltage cables and Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) for AC
motors.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
switch or router.

782
To connect RP controller expansion modules and multi-

sensors to RP-C
1. Install the RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor and connect a
Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded, straight-through wired cable with eight
conductors (four twisted pairs) to one of the two RJ45 receptacles on the
module or multi-sensor. Use a cable with the wire size (cross-sectional
area) 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²).
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RP-C controller's RS-485 port that
is configured for the room bus.
NOTE: By default, the Room Bus port is configured for the room bus.

783
3. When an additional RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor is

needed, install the device and connect the other end of the cable to the
unused RJ45 receptacle on the previous module or multi-sensor.
NOTE: When connecting devices to the RP-C room bus through a
daisy-chain configuration, it does not matter if the incoming and
outgoing cables are connected to one or the other room bus port on the
device.
4. Repeat step 3 to install additional devices up to the maximum number of six

devices of the supported combination of RP controller expansion modules
and multi-sensors. For more information, see section 17.35 “RP-C Room
Bus” on page 779.
5. Ensure that the rotary switch on each RP controller expansion module and
multi-sensor is configured to give the device a unique room bus address in
the range of 1 to 6.
For more information, see section 17.37 “Configuring the Room Bus
Address for an RP Controller Expansion Module” on page 785.
Address for an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor” on page 786.
For more information, see the RP Controller Expansion Module Room Bus
Addressing topic on WebHelp.

784
17.37 Configuring the Room Bus Address for an RP Controller Expansion Module
17.37 Configuring the Room Bus Address for

an RP Controller Expansion Module
You configure the address for an RP controller expansion module to give the
module a unique address on the RP-C room bus.
To configure the room bus address for an RP controller

expansion module
1. On the RP controller expansion module, turn the address rotary switch to
configure the module's room bus address from 1 to 6.
NOTE: Devices connected to the RP-C room bus through a daisy-
chain configuration can be assigned addresses regardless of the order
in which the devices appear in the daisy chain. For example, device
number 1 can have the address 6, device number 2 can have the
address 4, and so on.
2. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the RP controller.

3. Under the IO Resources node, click Room Bus.
4. In the List View, select the RP controller expansion module you want.
5. On the File menu, click Properties.
6. Click the Basic tab.
7. In the Modbus address box, enter an address that matches the address of
the physical module in the address rotary switch.
8. Click OK.

785
17.38 Configuring the Room Bus Address for an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor
17.38 Configuring the Room Bus Address for

an RP Controller Expansion Multi-
sensor
You configure the address for an RP controller expansion multi-sensor to give the
multi-sensor a unique address on the RP-C room Bus.
To configure the room bus address for an RP controller

expansion multi-sensor
1. On the multi-sensor, turn the address rotary switch to configure the multi-
sensor's room bus address from 1 to 6.
NOTE: Devices connected to the RP-C room bus through a daisy-
chain configuration can be assigned addresses regardless of the order
in which the devices appear in the daisy chain. For example, device
number 1 can have the address 6, device number 2 can have the
address 4, and so on.
2. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the RP controller.

3. Under the IO Resources node, click Room Bus.
4. In the List View, select the RP controller expansion multi-sensor.
5. On the File menu, click Properties.
6. Click the Basic tab.
7. In the Modbus address box, enter an address that matches the address of
the physical multi-sensor in the address rotary switch.
8. Click OK.

786
17.39 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors
17.39 RP Controller Expansion Module

Pluggable Connectors
the device.
17.39.1 Light Modules, Blind Modules, and RP-C-

EXT-REL-4 Relay Module
The pluggable connectors mean time savings and cost reductions for the
installation, compared to wiring terminal blocks on site. The connectors can
quickly and easily be plugged together on site.
The RP controller expansion modules use 2, 3, 4 or 5 pole connectors for the
different inputs and outputs. The 4-pole connector has a 5-pole frame.
The connectors are mechanically keyed, which means the following connections
cannot be made:
• A connector for AC mains and high-voltage applications cannot be plugged
into a connector for low-voltage applications.
• A connector for low-voltage applications cannot be plugged into a connector
for AC mains and high-voltage applications.
The matching connectors are locked together.
The connectors are also color-coded to help the installers and electricians to
choose the correct, matching external connector. The connectors are color-
coded:
• Black: For AC mains power applications such as power supply input, blind
high-voltage outputs, SMI (HV) blind outputs, and relay outputs.
• Pastel blue: For dimming applications such as DALI inputs/outputs and 0-
10V light outputs with power distribution.
• Light blue: For low-voltage applications such as blind low-voltage outputs (24
VDC), 0-10V light outputs without power distribution, SMI LoVo (LV) blind
outputs, and digital inputs (5 VDC).

787
Figure: Color-coded connectors (example)
The matching external connectors are not provided but need to be ordered
separately from Schneider Electric. For more information, see section 31.19
“Required External Connectors for the RP Controller Expansion Modules” on
page 1169.
17.39.2 CRS-HH-REL-10 Relay Module

The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module uses pluggable screw terminal blocks, which
are easy to install and remove from the device.
The terminal blocks are delivered in a plastic bag with the device.
• 2-pole terminal blocks (x10) for the relay outputs
• 9-pole terminal blocks (x2) for the digital inputs
Table: Recommended Screw Tightening Torques

Terminal Block Connector Recommended Torque
2-pole 0.5 Nm (4.4 lbf.in)
9-pole 0.2 Nm (1.7 lbf.in)

788
Figure: Pluggable screw terminal blocks installed on the CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module

789
17.40 Plugging an External Connector into an RP Controller Expansion Module
17.40 Plugging an External Connector into an

RP Controller Expansion Module
You plug an external connector into an RP controller expansion module to
connect lights, blinds, dry contact digital inputs, or AC power to the module.
NOTICE
CONNECTOR OR CABLE ASSEMBLY DAMAGE
Anchor the excess cabling to alleviate all stresses on connectors and cable
assemblies.
To plug an external connector into an RP controller expansion

module
1. Ensure that you use the correct external connector, with a keying that
matches the keying of the mating connector on the module and with the
same color as the mating connector.
For more information, see section 31.19 “Required External Connectors for
the RP Controller Expansion Modules” on page 1169.
2. Align the connector locking latch (or tab) of the external connector with the
locking tab (or latch) of the mating connector.
3. Push the external connector into the mating connector until the connector
locking latch and locking tab engage (there will be an audible click sound).

790
17.41 Removing an External Connector from an RP Controller Expansion Module
17.41 Removing an External Connector from

an RP Controller Expansion Module
You remove an external connector from an RP controller expansion module to
disconnect lights, blinds, dry contact digital inputs, or AC power from the module.
To remove an external connector from an RP Controller

expansion module
1. Use a small screwdriver to press and hold down the connector locking tab
and then gently pull the external connector until the tab is released from the
locking latch (slot).

791
17.41 Removing an External Connector from an RP Controller Expansion Module
2. Pull the external connector straight away from the mating connector.

792
17.42 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs

modules.
Figure: RP controller expansion module LEDs (Example for RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD)
Table: RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs

Function Color
Status (RP controller expansion module) Red, Green
Light Statusa Green
Blind Status Green
Relay Statusb Green
a) Light Status LEDs are available on the RP controller expansion light modules with power
distribution capability.
b) Relay Status LEDs are available on the RP controller expansion relay modules of the 4-channel
model type (RP-C-EXT-REL-4). The 10-channel relay module (CRS-HH-REL-10) does not have
Relay Status LEDs.
The LEDs indicate the status of the RP controller expansion module and the
status of the relays or motor drivers used for controlling the power distribution to
the lights and blinds.
17.42.1 Status LED

The RP controller expansion module Status LED can be configured in the
following modes:
• Show status mode
• Off mode
You configure the Status LED mode in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software. For more information, see the Configuring RP Series Expansion
Modules topic on WebHelp.

793
Show status mode

The RP controller expansion module Status LED indicates the condition of the
device.
Table: RP Controller Expansion Module Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition Recommended action
Green, constant Normal operation, status No action required.

OK.
Green constant, with red Normal operation, status No action required.

flash (100 ms every 2 OK.
seconds)
However, the RP controller
expansion module has
detected and logged an
abnormal condition. When
the RP-C has retrieved the
diagnostics from the
module, the Status LED
returns to constant green
light. For more information,
see the RP Controller
Expansion Module
Diagnostics topic on
WebHelp.
Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device is starting or No action required.

restarting.
Green, flashing medium (~2 Device is in maintenance To exit the maintenance

Hz) mode. For more information, mode, configure a unique
see section 17.58 “RP device address in the range
Controller Expansion of 1 to 6 and then reset the
Module and Multi-sensor device by disconnecting and
Maintenance Modes” on reconnecting the device to
page 832. the RP-C room bus. For
more information, see
section 17.37 “Configuring
the Room Bus Address for
an RP Controller Expansion
Module” on page 785. For
section 17.36 “Connecting
RP Controller Expansion
to RP-C” on page 782.
Green, flashing fast (~5 Hz) Device is initializing. No action required.
Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device is non-operational Contact Schneider Electric

due to a detected error. Product Support Services
for assistance.
Device is forced into
maintenance mode.
Red, flashing fast (~5 Hz) Device is inoperable due to Contact Schneider Electric
a detected, non-recoverable Product Support Services
error. for assistance or return the
device to Schneider Electric.

794
Continued
Red, constant Device is inoperable due to Return the device to

a detected, non-recoverable Schneider Electric.
error.
Off mode
The RP controller expansion module Status LED is disabled.
17.42.2 Light Status LEDs

The Light Status LEDs indicate the condition of the light output relays, which
control the power distribution (230 VAC from the power supply) to the lights. The
LEDs are available on RP controller expansion light modules with power
distribution capability.
Table: Light Status LED Patterns

Green, constant Light output relay is active No action required.

(energized), power
distribution to the light is
enabled.
17.42.3 Blind Status LEDs

High-voltage blind modules
The Blind Status LEDs indicate the condition of the blind output relays, which
control the power distribution (230 VAC from the power supply) to the blind
motors.
Table: Blind Status LED Patterns for High-Voltage Blind Modules

Green, constant Blind output relay is active No action required.

(energized), power
distribution to the blind
motor is enabled.
Low-voltage blind modules

The Blind Status LEDs indicate the condition of the blind output motor drivers,
which control and drive the blind motors.

795
Table: Blind Status LED Patterns for Low-Voltage Blind Modules

Green, constant Blind output motor driver is No action required.

active.
17.42.4 Relay Status LEDs

The Relay Status LEDs indicate the condition of the output relays, which control
the power distribution (100 to 277 VAC from the power supply) to the lights.
Table: Relay Status LED Patterns

Green, constant Output relay is active No action required.

(energized), power
distribution to the light is
enabled.

796
17.43 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED

LED
There is one LED on the RP controller expansion multi-sensor. The LED is
integrated with the Set button.
Figure: Multi-sensor LED
Table: Multi-sensor LED

Function Color
Status Red, Green
17.43.1 Status LED

The multi-sensor Status LED can be configured in the following modes:
• Show status mode
• Off mode
You configure the Status LED mode in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software. For more information, see the Configuring RP Series Expansion
Modules topic on WebHelp.
Show status mode

The multi-sensor Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: Multi-sensor Status LED Patterns


OK.

797
17.43 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED
Continued
Green constant, with red Normal operation, status No action required.

flash (100 ms every 2 OK.
seconds)
However, the multi-sensor
has detected and logged an
abnormal condition. When
the RP-C has retrieved the
diagnostics from the multi-
sensor, the Status LED
returns to constant green
light. For more information,
see the RP Series
Expansion Module
Diagnostics topic on
WebHelp.
Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device is starting or No action required.

restarting.
Green, flashing medium (~2 Device is in maintenance To exit the maintenance

Hz) mode. For more information, mode, configure a unique
see section 17.58 “RP device address in the range
Controller Expansion of 1 to 6 and then reset the
Module and Multi-sensor device by disconnecting and
Maintenance Modes” on reconnecting the device to
page 832. the RP-C room bus. For
section 17.38 “Configuring
the Room Bus Address for
an RP Controller Expansion
Multi-sensor” on page 786.
section 17.36 “Connecting
RP Controller Expansion
to RP-C” on page 782.
Green, flashing fast (~5 Hz) Device is initializing. No action required.
Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device is non-operational Contact Schneider Electric

due to a detected error. Product Support Services
for assistance.
Device is forced into
maintenance mode.
Red, flashing fast (~5 Hz) Device is inoperable due to Contact Schneider Electric
a detected, non-recoverable Product Support Services
error. for assistance or return the
device to Schneider Electric.
Red, constant Device is inoperable due to Return the device to

a detected, non-recoverable Schneider Electric.
error.
Off mode
The multi-sensor Status LED is disabled.

798
17.44 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button
17.44 RP Controller Expansion Module Set

Button
Figure: RP controller expansion module Set button

799
17.45 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Set Button

Set Button
The RP controller expansion multi-sensor has a Set button on the front. The Set
Figure: Multi-sensor Set button

800
17.46 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation
17.46 RP Controller Expansion Module Device

Installation
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing the RP controller
expansion module along with other associated control and monitoring devices.
The most efficient ventilation is achieved with the wall-mounted DIN rail oriented
horizontally and with adequate space provided between the RP controller
expansion module rail and adjacent rails or other devices.
The RP controller expansion module is typically installed horizontally (on a DIN
rail going from left to right), with the device label text in the upright position
reading left to right.
Figure: RP controller expansion module installed on a horizontal DIN rail
The restrictions on installing the device in other orientations, as well as the

normal operating conditions, differ between different types of RP controller
expansion modules.
NOTICE
EXPANSION MODULE DAMAGE
Follow the installation orientation restrictions that apply to the specific RP
controller expansion module.
Table: Normal Operating Conditions for Different Types of RP Controller

Expansion Modules
Type of Module Ambient Temperature
Light modules, high-voltage blind modules, 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

and relay modules
Low-voltage blind modules 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)

801
Under normal operating conditions of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F), the light modules
and high-voltage blind modules can be installed in the following orientations:
• Rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal position with device label text up
and down. See “e” in the following figure.
• Face up on a horizontal surface. See “f” in the following figure.
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for light modules and high-voltage blind modules
in normal conditions
Under normal operating conditions of 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F), the low-voltage

blind modules can be installed in the following orientations:
• Rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal position with device label text up
and down. See “e” in the following figure.
The only installation orientation that is not supported for the low-voltage blind
modules is when the device is installed face up on a horizontal surface. See “f” in
the following figure. In the face up position, the low-voltage blind module's
thermal specifications may be exceeded, which can damage the module.

802
Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for low-voltage blind modules in normal

conditions
The RP controller expansion modules can be installed in a standard DIN

enclosure.
IMPORTANT: Local panel regulations should be followed when installing
the RP controller expansion modules in a distribution panel.
When installing RP controller expansion modules in a DIN enclosure or cabinet, it
is recommended to provide ample space between the DIN rails and modules for
Figure: RP controller expansion modules installed on horizontal DIN rails in a cabinet

803
NOTICE
Use an end clip (part number SXWDINEND10001) when you install the RP
controller expansion module on a vertical DIN rail.
The RP controller expansion light, blind, and RP-C-EXT-REL-4 relay modules

have connectors that allow the matching, external connectors (and cables) for the
power supply, outputs, and digitals input to be plugged in on site quickly and
easily. For more information, see section 17.39 “RP Controller Expansion Module
Figure: RP controller expansion module (example) with connectors for outputs, power
input, and digital inputs
The RP controller expansion CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module has connectors for

pluggable screw terminal blocks, which are delivered in a plastic bag with the
device. The terminal blocks are easy to install and remove from the device. For
more information, see section 17.39 “RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable
Connectors ” on page 787.

804
Figure: CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module with connectors for pluggable screw terminal
blocks
The RP controller expansion module has four anchor points that can be used to
fasten cable ties or other accessories for bundling light weight wires.
Figure: Anchor points for cable ties
It is recommended to always anchor excess cabling, in accordance with the local

regulations, to alleviate all stresses on connectors and cable assemblies. When
excess cabling is coiled and left suspended only from the module’s connectors,
damage can occur to connectors and/or cable assemblies.
NOTICE
CONNECTOR OR CABLE ASSEMBLY DAMAGE
Anchor the excess cabling to alleviate all stresses on connectors and cable
assemblies.

805
17.47 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Module on a DIN Rail
17.47 Installing an RP Controller Expansion

Module on a DIN Rail
You install an RP controller expansion module on a DIN rail to properly fasten the
device and to allow for sufficient ventilation.
NOTICE
Use the DIN rail end clip when you install the RP controller expansion module
To install an RP controller expansion module on a DIN rail



806
17.48 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Module on a Flat Surface

Module on a Flat Surface
You install an RP controller expansion module directly onto a flat surface to
properly fasten the device and allow for sufficient ventilation.
To install an RP controller expansion module on a flat surface

1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the RP controller
expansion module.
4. Find a suitable location and surface on which to mount the RP controller
expansion module.

807
5. Drill three mounting holes that fit number 8 or M4 screws (or anchoring
system per manufacturing specification):
• Two holes for the top two screws on which you hang the RP controller
expansion module
• One hole for the screw at the bottom that helps prevent the device from
the RP controller expansion module.
You can also use the 1:1 drill template in the installation sheet that comes
with each RP controller expansion module.

808
6. Install number 8 or M4 (4 mm) pan head self-tapping screws (with or without

anchors) in the two top holes, leaving approximately 5 mm (0.2 inch) space
between the head of the screw and the flat surface to accommodate the RP
controller expansion module material thickness.
7. Fit the two keyhole slots on the back of the RP controller expansion module
enclosure to the heads of the mounted screws and then slide the device
down in place on the screws.

809
8. Fit the bottom screw (with or without anchor) to the hole at the bottom of the
RP controller expansion module and tighten the screw.

810
17.49 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Light Module
17.49 Powering Up an RP Controller

Expansion Light Module
You perform the following steps to power up an RP controller expansion light
module.
NOTICE
Before powering up the RP controller expansion module, ensure that the input
power voltage level meets the specifications of the device.
To power up an RP controller expansion light module

3. Ensure that the address rotary switch on the device is configured to give the
device a unique address in the range of 1 to 6 on the room bus.
4. Ensure that the RP-C room bus (24 VDC) is connected to the RP controller
expansion module.
For more information, see section 17.36 “Connecting RP Controller
Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors to RP-C” on page 782.
5. After powering up the module through the room bus, check that the Status
LED changes to a constant green light after a few seconds.
LEDs” on page 793.

811
17.49 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Light Module
6. Ensure that the correct input power voltage level is supplied to the Power
Input of the module.
• 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz for RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD and RP-C-EXT-0-10V-
4-PD
• 100 to 277 VAC at 50/60 Hz for RP-C-EXT-DALI and RP-C-EXT-0-10V-
4

812
17.50 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Blind Module

Expansion Blind Module
You perform the following steps to power up an RP controller expansion blind
module.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Before turning on or connecting the AC mains power (230 VAC) to the high-
voltage blind module, ensure that the module is powered up by the RP-C room
bus (24 VDC).
To power up an RP controller expansion blind module

expansion module.

813
17.50 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Blind Module
6. Ensure that the 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz is supplied to the Power Input of the
module.

814
17.51 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Relay Module

Expansion Relay Module
You perform the following steps to power up an RP controller expansion relay
module.
NOTICE
To power up an RP controller expansion relay module

expansion module. For more information, see section 17.36 “Connecting RP
Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors to RP-C” on page 782.

815
17.51 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Relay Module
6. Ensure that the 100 to 277 VAC at 50/60 Hz is supplied to the Power Input
of the module.

816
17.52 Wiring a Screw Terminal on CRS-HH-REL-10
17.52 Wiring a Screw Terminal on CRS-HH-

REL-10
You wire the screw terminals on the CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module to connect
light and blind equipment to the relay outputs and to connect switches and push
buttons to the digital inputs. Always use the recommended wires (or wires with
larger cross-sectional area).
DANGER
Disconnect the high voltage equipment before wiring.
To wire a screw terminal on CRS-HH-REL-10

1. Disconnect the high voltage equipment connected to the relay module.
wire.
torques:
• Relay outputs, 2-pole connector: 0.5 Nm (4.4 lbf.in)
• Digital inputs, 9-pole connector: 0.2 Nm (1.7 lbf.in)
You can use the anchor points on the relay module enclosure and cable ties
to fasten and fix the cables.

817
17.53 Powering Up an CRS-HH-REL-10 Relay Module
17.53 Powering Up an CRS-HH-REL-10 Relay

Module
You perform the following steps to power up the CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module.
NOTICE
Before connecting the AC mains voltage to the blinds/awnings connected to the
relay outputs, ensure that the CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module is powered up by
the RP-C room bus (24 VDC).
To power up an CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module

4. Ensure that the RP-C room bus (24 VDC) is connected to the CRS-HH-
REL-10 relay module.
5. After powering up the relay module through the room bus, check that the
Status LED changes to a constant green light after a few seconds.
6. Connect the AC mains voltage (or DC supply voltage) to the loads (light
control gear and/or blind motors) connected to the relay outputs.

818
17.54 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Device Installation

Device Installation
The RP controller expansion multi-sensor can be installed on a dropped
(suspended) ceiling, a drywall ceiling, or a junction (gang) box.
The multi-sensor is designed to be installed with the passive infrared (PIR)
sensor facing down. Installing the multi-sensor on a wall will reduce the coverage
range of the PIR sensor.
NOTICE
performance.
The multi-sensor must be professionally installed to comply with the following

• 2014/53/EU Radio Equipment Directive (RED) of the European Union (EU).
The multi-sensor is typically installed on a dropped ceiling. For that reason, the
multi-sensor is delivered with three flexible mounting brackets (springs)
preinstalled on the device. The mounting springs enable quick and easy
installation of the multi-sensor on a dropped ceiling. The installation requires a
clearance hole with a diameter of 75 to 76 mm (2.95 to 3.00 inches) in the ceiling
tile.
Figure: Multi-sensor installed on a dropped ceiling

819
The multi-sensor also comes with a mounting ring, which enables the following
alternative installation methods:
• Installation on a junction box
• Installation on a drywall ceiling
The multi-sensor can be installed on a junction box when there is no ceiling and
space is opened to plenum. The installation requires an octagon junction box of
size 4.0 inches (102 mm) and a minimum depth of 1.0 inches (25.5 mm).
Figure: Multi-sensor installed on an octagon junction box
TIP: You can use the two alignment notches on the mounting ring to position
the device.
The mounting ring also makes it possible to install the multi-sensor on a drywall
ceiling using an appropriate anchoring system. The installation requires a
clearance hole with a diameter of 75 to 76 mm (2.95 to 3.00 inches) and two
mounting holes that fit number 6, 8, M3, or M4 screws (with or without anchors) in
the drywall ceiling. You can use the 1:1 drill template in the installation sheet,
which comes with each multi-sensor, to measure out the location of the holes.
You can also use the mounting ring to measure out the holes.

820
Figure: Multi-sensor installed on a drywall ceiling

821
17.55 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor into a Dropped Ceiling Using the Mounting Springs

Multi-sensor into a Dropped Ceiling
Using the Mounting Springs
You install an RP controller expansion multi-sensor into a dropped ceiling using
the mounting springs to properly fasten the device to a ceiling tile.
NOTICE
performance.
To install an RP controller expansion multi-sensor into a

dropped ceiling using the mounting springs
1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the multi-sensor.

822
17.55 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor into a Dropped Ceiling Using the Mounting Springs
2. Create a circular clearance hole with a diameter of 75 to 76 mm (2.95 to

3.00 inches) in the ceiling tile using a hole saw or ceiling tile hole cutter.
3. Connect the room bus cable(s) to the multi-sensor.

4. Configure the room bus address for the multi-sensor using the rotary switch
on the device.
5. Fold up the clips of the three mounting springs and insert the multi-sensor
through the hole in the ceiling tile.
6. Release the mounting spring clips to fasten the multi-sensor to the ceiling
tile.

823
17.56 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor on an Octagon Junction Box Using the Mounting Ring

Multi-sensor on an Octagon Junction
Box Using the Mounting Ring
You install an RP controller expansion multi-sensor on an octagon junction box
using the supplied mounting ring to properly fasten the multi-sensor to the
junction box.
NOTICE
performance.
IMPORTANT: The mounting ring supplied with the multi-sensor fits octagon
junction boxes that have a size of 4.0 x 4.0 inches (102 x 102 mm) and a
minimum depth of 1.0 inches (25.5 mm).
To install an RP controller expansion multi-sensor on an

octagon junction box using the mounting ring

824
2. Remove the three mounting springs from the multi-sensor. Push gently
against the tab with a tool such as a screw driver and then remove the
spring.
3. Align the keyholes slots on the mounting ring to the mounting screws
installed in the junction box and then rotate the mounting ring clock-wise
until the ring is retained. Tighten the screws to fasten the ring.

on the device.

825
6. Attach the multi-sensor to the mounting ring by inserting the locking tabs on
the mounting ring into the keyhole slots on the back of the multi-sensor.
Rotate the multi-sensor clock-wise until it locks into place.
TIP: You can use the two alignment notches on the mounting ring to
position the device.

826
17.57 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor on a Ceiling Using the Mounting Ring

Multi-sensor on a Ceiling Using the
Mounting Ring
You install an RP controller expansion multi-sensor on a ceiling using the
supplied mounting ring to properly fasten the multi-sensor on the ceiling.
NOTICE
performance.
To install an RP controller expansion multi-sensor on a ceiling

using the mounting ring
4. Find a suitable location and surface on which to mount the multi-sensor.

827
5. Use the 1:1 drill template in the installation sheet, which comes with each
multi-sensor, to measure out the location of the following holes:
• A clearance hole with a diameter of 75 to 76 mm (2.95 to 3.00 inches)
• Two mounting holes that fit number 6, 8, M3, or M4 screws (with or
without anchors)
You can also use the mounting ring to measure out the holes.
6. Create a circular clearance hole with a diameter of 75 to 76 mm (2.95 to
3.00 inches) in the ceiling using a hole saw or other tool.
7. Drill two mounting holes that fit number 6, 8, M3, or M4 screws (or anchoring
system per manufacturing specification).

828
8. Install number 6, 8, M3, or M4 pan head screws (with or without anchors) in

the two holes, leaving approximately 5 mm (0.2 inch) space between the
head of the screw and the ceiling to accommodate the mounting ring
material thickness.
9. Align the keyholes slots on the mounting ring to the mounting screws
installed in the ceiling and then rotate the mounting ring clock-wise until the
ring is retained. Tighten the screws to fasten the ring.

829
10. Remove the three mounting springs from the multi-sensor. Push gently
against the tab with a tool such as a screw driver and then remove the
spring.

on the device.

830
13. Attach the multi-sensor to the mounting ring by inserting the locking tabs on
the mounting ring into the keyhole slots on the back of the multi-sensor.
Rotate the multi-sensor clock-wise until it locks into place.
TIP: You can use the two alignment notches on the mounting ring to
position the device.

831
17.58 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance Modes
17.58 RP Controller Expansion Module and

Multi-sensor Maintenance Modes
The following maintenance modes are supported:
• Offline maintenance mode
• Online maintenance mode
The Status LED on the RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors
indicates when the device is in maintenance mode, provided that the LED is
configured in show status mode (default mode). For more information, see
section 17.42 “RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs” on page 793. For more
information, see section 17.43 “RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED” on
page 797.
Offline maintenance mode

The device enters maintenance mode and goes offline when you configure the
room bus address 0 for the device using its rotary switch.
Online maintenance mode

In online maintenance mode, the device will be online but without running any
software other than what makes it possible to read diagnostics from the device
and to upgrade the device.
For more information, see section 17.59 “Configuring an RP Controller
Expansion Module or Multi-sensor into Online Maintenance Mode” on page 833.

832
17.59 Configuring an RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor into Online Maintenance Mode
17.59 Configuring an RP Controller Expansion

Module or Multi-sensor into Online
Maintenance Mode
You configure an RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor into online
maintenance mode to read diagnostics from the device and to upgrade the
device with new firmware.
To configure an RP controller expansion module or multi-

sensor into online maintenance mode
1. Power off the RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor by
disconnecting the device from the RP-C room bus.
2. Configure the room bus address 0 for the device, by turning the rotary
switch on the device.
3. Power on the RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor by connecting
the device to the RP-C room bus.
4. Configure a unique room bus address in the range of 1 to 6 for the device.
You can now read diagnostic log files from the device and upgrade the device
with new firmware.

833
17.60 RP Controller Expansion Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
17.60 RP Controller Expansion Modules

Some of the RP controller expansion modules come in models with or without
power distribution capability.
The RP controller expansion modules with power distribution capability include
the following models:
• RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD (DALI light module)
• RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD (0-10V light module)
• RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD (High-voltage blind module)
• RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD (Low-voltage blind module)
• RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD (SMI high-voltage blind module)
• RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD (SMI low-voltage blind module)
• RP-C-EXT-REL-4 (4-channel relay module)
The RP controller expansion modules without power distribution capability
include the following models:
• RP-C-EXT-DALI (DALI light module)
• RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 (0-10V light module)
• CRS-HH-REL-10 (10-channel relay module)

The RP controller expansion modules bear the CE mark and comply with the
following EU directives:
• 2014/30/EU Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMCD)
• 2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
17.60.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK)

The RP controller expansion modules bear the UKCA mark and complies with
the following UK directives:
• S.I. 2016/1091 - Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
• S.I. 2016/1101 - Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
• S.I. 2012/3032 - Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in
Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012

834
17.60 RP Controller Expansion Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals

For the RP controller expansion modules, the following statements apply.

For the RP controller expansion modules, the following statements apply.
(NMB-3).

835
17.61 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Regulatory Compliance and Approvals

RP controller expansion multi-sensor.

The RP controller expansion multi-sensor (RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE) bears the CE
mark and complies with the following EU directives:

The RP controller expansion multi-sensor (RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE) bears the UKCA
mark and complies with the following UK directives:
• S.I. 2017/1206 - Radio Equipment Regulations 2017

For the RP controller expansion multi-sensor (FCC ID: DVE-MS1), the following
statements apply.

836

This device, and the antenna used with the device, must be professionally
authorized (see list below). Any antenna that is of the same type and of equal or
less directional gain as the antenna that is authorized with the device may be
used with the device.

number)

For the RP controller expansion multi-sensor (ISED certification number: 24775-
MS1), the following statements apply.
(NMB-3).
This radio transmitter (24775-MS1) has been approved by Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed
below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included
in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type
listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (24775-MS1) a été approuvé par Innovation, Sciences
et Développement économique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types
d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types

837
d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est supérieur au gain
maximal indiqué pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour
l'exploitation de l'émetteur.

number)

838
17.62 Types of Blind Motors Supported by CRS-HH-REL-10
17.62 Types of Blind Motors Supported by

CRS-HH-REL-10
The CRS-HH-REL-10 relay module supports blind motors with an operating
voltage of 120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
For more information, see the Selection of Light and Blind Equipment topic on
WebHelp.
Other types of blind motors are supported by means of external relays.
This section provides application examples that show how the following types of
blind motors can be connected to and controlled by the CRS-HH-REL-10 relay
module using external relays:
• 24 VDC motors controlled by reversing the polarity of the voltage
• 24 VDC and 120/240 VAC motors designed for dry contact control
IMPORTANT: Consult the blind motor documentation to select the
appropriate type of blind control. Low-voltage (24 VDC) motors controlled by
reversing the polarity of the voltage, and high-voltage (120/240 VAC)
up/down controlled blinds, are typically controlled using the blind objects in
the EcoStruxure Building Operation software. Dry contact controlled blinds
are typically controlled using the relay objects and require additional
programming. For more information, see the Relay 10 Module Overview
topic on WebHelp.
24 VDC motors controlled by reversing the polarity of the voltage

The following wiring diagram shows an example how a DPDT (Double Pole
Double Throw) relay can be used to connect a 24 VDC motor for which the
forward/reverse (clockwise/counterclockwise) control is done by changing the
polarity of the DC voltage. The DPDT relay used in this example is Schneider
Electric part number RSB2A080BDPV.

839
Figure: Example on how a DPDT relay (Schneider Electric RSB2A080BDPV) can be used
to connect the 24 VDC motor
24 VDC and 120/240 VAC motors designed for dry contact control
The following wiring diagram shows an example how two SSRs (Solid State
Relays), one SSR for up and one SSR for down, can be used to connect a 24
VDC motor that is designed for dry contact control (typically with a control voltage
of 5 VDC). 120/240 VAC motors designed for dry contact control can be
connected in a similar way. The SSR used in this example is Schneider Electric
part number SSM1D26BD. The contact rating for the internal relays (DO1 and
DO2) specifies a minimum applicable load of 0.5 W (minimum applied voltage is
12 VDC). An external resistor (R) may be needed to meet the contact rating
requirement.

840
Figure: Example on how two SSRs (Schneider Electric SSM1D26BD) can be used to
connect the 24 VDC motor with dry contact control voltage

841
18 RP Controller Expansion
Zigbee Modules
Topics
RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules
RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI
RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V
Zigbee DALI Light Output and Power Output
Zigbee 0-10V Light Output and Power Output
Zigbee Modules Power Distribution
Zigbee Modules Memory
Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity
Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals
Zigbee DALI Module Screw Terminals
Zigbee 0-10V Module Screw Terminals
Zigbee Modules LED
Zigbee Modules Reset Button
Zigbee Modules Device Installation
Installing an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Module on a
Ceiling
Wiring a Screw Terminal on an RP Controller Expansion
Zigbee Module
BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management
Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
18
18 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules
18.1 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules
18.1 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee

Modules
The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules provide devices that can be used to
form a connected room solution. The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules
are connected to the RP-C room controllers through the ZigbeeTM wireless
protocol and provide the controllers with I/O expansion that enable lighting
control.
Figure: . RP controller expansion Zigbee module connected to an RP-C controller equipped with a Zigbee adapter
18.1.1 RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI
The RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI Zigbee DALI module communicates with the RP-C
room controller over the ZigbeeTM wireless protocol and provides I/O expansion
for lighting control with DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface).

845
18.1 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules
18.1.2 RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V
The RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V Zigbee 0-10V module communicates with the RP-C
for 0-10V lighting control.

846
18.2 RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI
The RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI Zigbee DALI module communicates with the RP-C
for lighting control with DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface).
The Zigbee DALI module enables control of different types of lights equipped with
DALI electrical ballasts for 220–240 VAC line voltage. The Zigbee DALI module
can distribute power (220–240 VAC) from an external power supply to the lights
(DALI control gear).
The Zigbee DALI module supports LED lamp control gear (LED drivers) of
Device Type 6 (DT6) and fluorescent lamp control gear of Device Type 0 (DT0).
The Zigbee DALI module supports broadcast addressing of the DALI devices.
Using the DALI broadcast command, all lights connected to the output are
controlled simultaneously for switching on/off and dimming.
The Zigbee DALI module provides one DALI channel (DALI bus). Up to 20 DALI
control gear devices can be connected to the Zigbee DALI module.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI – Zigbee DALI module
18.2.1 Zigbee DALI Light Output and Power Output

The Zigbee DALI module has one DALI light output for control of lights with
electronic ballasts, LED drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface and
one power output for power distribution to the control gear.
18.2.2 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules have power distribution capability,
which means that the module distributes the AC mains voltage (220–240 VAC)
from the Power Input terminals to the light control gear connected to the Power
Output terminals.

847
18.2.3 Zigbee Modules Memory

RP controller expansion Zigbee modules have two types of memory, flash
memory and RAM.
For more information, see section 18.7 “Zigbee Modules Memory” on page 864.
18.2.4 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules are Zigbee Certified Products. The
Zigbee modules' wireless connectivity option is used for connecting to and
communicating with the RP controller.
For more information, see section 18.8 “Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity”
on page 865.
18.2.5 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules have fixed screw terminals for the
power input, power output, and light output.
For more information, see section 18.9 “Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals” on
page 866.
18.2.6 Zigbee Modules LED

There is one LED on the front panel of the RP controller expansion Zigbee
modules.
For more information, see section 18.12 “Zigbee Modules LED” on page 871.
18.2.7 Zigbee Modules Reset Button

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules have a Reset button on the front.
For more information, see section 18.13 “Zigbee Modules Reset Button” on page
872.
18.2.8 Zigbee Modules Device Installation

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules are designed to be installed on a
flat surface on a ceiling.
For more information, see section 18.14 “Zigbee Modules Device Installation” on
page 873.

848
18.2.9 Wiring

18.2.11 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and

Approvals
RP controller expansion Zigbee modules.
For more information, see section 18.18 “Zigbee Modules Regulatory
Compliance and Approvals” on page 887.
AC input
Rated voltage range 220 to 240 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Maximum load current 5A
Maximum power consumption <1 W
AC output
Rated voltage range 220 to 240 VAC (same as power supply)

849
Maximum inrush current 30 A (<5 ms)
Communication protocol Zigbee 3.0
Frequency band 2.4 GHz (ISM band), compliant with IEEE Standard 802.15.4
Effective indoor radio signal range 30 m (98 ft)
Environment
Ambient temperature, operating -20 °C to +50 °C (-4 °F to +122 °F)
Case temperature, maximum 75 °C (167 °F)
Humidity Maximum 85 % RH non-condensing
Material
Mechanical
Weight 0.126 kg (0.278 lb)
Installation Ceiling
Indoor use only
Output terminals Fixed

Left side: 1 x 6-pin terminal block
Right side: 1 x 2-pin terminal block
Hardware
Frequency 40 MHz

850
Memory
Frequency 32 MHz
Additional hardware
Reset button Push-button switch
DALI light output
Outputs 1 (1 DALI channel), terminals DA+ and DA-
DALI devices
Supported control gear See table below.

Device type number Type of control gear Supported
Device Type 0 (DT0) Fluorescent lamp control gear Yes
Device Type 6 (DT6) LED lamp control gear (LED drivers) Yes

851
18.3 RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V
The RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V Zigbee 0-10V module communicates with the RP-C
for 0-10V lighting control.
The Zigbee 0-10V module enables dimming of different types of lights equipped
with electrical ballasts for 220–240 VAC line voltage. The Zigbee 0-10V module
can distribute power (220–240 VAC) from an external power supply to the lights.
Figure: RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V – Zigbee 0-10V module
18.3.1 Zigbee 0-10V Light Output

The Zigbee 0-10V module has one 0-10V analog output for control (dimming) of
lights with electronic ballasts, LED drivers, and other 0-10V compatible control
gear and one power output for power distribution to the control gear.
18.3.2 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution

Output terminals.
18.3.3 Zigbee Modules Memory

memory and RAM.
For more information, see section 18.7 “Zigbee Modules Memory” on page 864.

852
18.3.4 Zigbee 0-10V Module Supported Building

Standards
The Zigbee 0-10V module supports 0-10 V lighting control according to the
current sinking standards.
18.3.5 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity

For more information, see section 18.8 “Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity”
on page 865.
18.3.6 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals

For more information, see section 18.9 “Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals” on
page 866.
18.3.7 Zigbee Modules LED

modules.
For more information, see section 18.12 “Zigbee Modules LED” on page 871.
18.3.8 Zigbee Modules Reset Button

For more information, see section 18.13 “Zigbee Modules Reset Button” on page
872.
18.3.9 Zigbee Modules Device Installation

page 873.

853
18.3.10 Wiring

18.3.12 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and

Approvals
AC input
Frequency 50/60 Hz
AC output

854
Effective indoor radio signal range 30 m (98 ft)
Environment
Ambient temperature, operating -20 °C to +50 °C (-4 °F to +122 °F)
Case temperature, maximum 75 °C (167 °F)
Material
Mechanical
Weight 0.126 kg (0.278 lb)
Installation Ceiling
Indoor use only
Output terminals Fixed

Left side: 1 x 6-pin terminal block
Right side: 1 x 2-pin terminal block
Hardware
Frequency 40 MHz

855
Reset button Push-button switch
0-10V light output
Outputs 1, terminals 0-10V AO and COM
Output voltage 0 to 10 VDC
Sink current 40 mA

856
18.4 Zigbee DALI Light Output and Power Output
18.4 Zigbee DALI Light Output and Power

Output
The Zigbee DALI module has one DALI light output for control of lights with
electronic ballasts, LED drivers, and other control gear with DALI interface and
one power output for power distribution to the control gear.
The Zigbee DALI module supports:
• DALI lighting control
• Power distribution (220–240 VAC)
Figure: Zigbee DALI module, DALI light output and power distribution

The DALI light output equals one logical DALI channel.
The DALI light output has two screw terminals for DALI lighting control:
• DA+
• DA-
These two screw terminals are where the wires from the DALI bus are connected.
The DALI bus is a 2-wire bus, which is used for bi-directional communication. For
The Zigbee DALI module monitors and controls all control gear devices on the
DALI bus. A broadcast address is used when communicating with the control
gear devices on the bus. For example, a broadcast command can be used to
change all LED drivers in a room from Off to On.
Up to 20 DALI control gear devices to can be connected to the Zigbee DALI
module. The maximum number of control gear devices per module is also

857
Power distribution
voltage (220–240 VAC) from the Power Input to the control gear connected to the
Power Output. For more information, see section 18.6.1 “” on page 862.
The Power Output has three screw terminals for power distribution:
• – Protective earth ground

• N (out) – Neutral
• L (out) – Line
The module uses a relay to control the power distribution, by connecting or
disconnecting the AC mains voltage to the Power Output's L (out) terminal. In the
figure above, the relay is named K1.
The module's energy metering circuitry is reserved for future use (power
consumption monitoring).
DALI light output
Outputs 1 (1 DALI channel), terminals DA+ and DA-
Power input
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power output

858

859
18.5 Zigbee 0-10V Light Output and Power Output
18.5 Zigbee 0-10V Light Output and Power

Output
The Zigbee 0-10V module has one 0-10V analog output for control (dimming) of
lights with electronic ballasts, LED drivers, and other 0-10V compatible control
gear and one power output for power distribution to the control gear.
The Zigbee 0-10V module supports:
• 0-10V lighting control
• Power distribution (220–240 VAC)
Figure: Zigbee 0-10V module, 0-10V light output and power distribution

The 0-10V light output has two screw terminals for 0-10V lighting control:
• 0-10V AO (Analog Output)
• COM (Common)
The control signal is a DC voltage that varies between 0 V and 10 V. The Zigbee
0-10V module supports the current sinking standard.
The maximum number of control gear devices per module and per output is
Power distribution
voltage (220–240 VAC) from the Power Input to the control gear connected to the
Power Output. For more information, see section 18.6.1 “” on page 862.
The Power Output has three screw terminals for power distribution:


860
18.5 Zigbee 0-10V Light Output and Power Output
The module uses a relay to control the power distribution, by connecting or

disconnecting the AC mains voltage to the Power Output's L (out) terminal. In the
figure above, the relay is named K1.
The module's energy metering circuitry is reserved for future use (power
consumption monitoring).
0-10V light output
Outputs 1, terminals 0-10V AO and COM
Output voltage 0 to 10 VDC
Sink current 40 mA
Power input
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power output

861
18.6 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution

Output terminals.
The Power Output terminals are marked:

Figure: Zigbee module power distribution
Power input

862
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power output

863
18.7 Zigbee Modules Memory
18.7 Zigbee Modules Memory

memory and RAM.
The flash memory is used as follows:
• Embedded flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application
software, and configuration storage
• NOR flash memory: for default configuration storage
The RAM is used for runtime operation.
The configuration data for the Zigbee modules resides in the RP-C controller to
which the devices are connected. When the RP-C controller is part of an
EcoStruxure BMS, the configuration data for the controller and Zigbee modules
automatically resides in the parent EcoStruxure BMS server. Any configuration
changes made through the EcoStruxure Building Operation software are stored
in the EcoStruxure BMS server as well as the hosted RP-C controller and its
subsystem. This means there is always a backup available for restoring or
replacing an RP-C controller.
NOTE: Configuration changes made through a third party BACnet Operator
Workstation (B-OWS) or the Commission mobile application are not
automatically part of the configuration data in the EcoStruxure BMS server.
You need to upload such configuration changes if you want the changes to
be stored in the EcoStruxure BMS server.
Scheduled backups of the EcoStruxure BMS server can provide additional
protection against application and data loss. You can also manually back up or
restore an EcoStruxure BMS server to a storage location on a PC or network.

864
18.8 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity
18.8 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity

The Zigbee modules use the Zigbee 3.0 communication protocol.
The Zigbee modules operate in the 2.4 GHz band (ISM band), in accordance with
the IEEE 802.15.4 radio specification.
The Zigbee modules have an integrated antenna.
The Zigbee modules must be professionally installed to comply with the following
• S.I. 2017/1206 - Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 of the United Kingdom
(UK)

865
18.9 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals
18.9 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals

18.9.1 Zigbee DALI Module Screw Terminals

The Zigbee DALI module is equipped with eight fixed screw terminals.
For more information, see section 18.10 “Zigbee DALI Module Screw Terminals”
on page 867.
18.9.2 Zigbee 0-10V Module Screw Terminals

The Zigbee 0-10V module is equipped with eight fixed screw terminals.
For more information, see section 18.11 “Zigbee 0-10V Module Screw Terminals”
on page 869.

866
18.10 Zigbee DALI Module Screw Terminals

The Zigbee DALI module is equipped with eight fixed screw terminals.
Recommended terminal screw tightening torque: 0.50 Nm (4.4 lbf.in)
The Zigbee modules are equipped with screw terminal covers (doors) to reduce
access to the screw terminals and wires. To access the screw terminals and
wires, you need to loosen the two screws that hold each door in place and then
open the door. These two screws are also used to fasten the cable to device,
using an upper clamping bar and two lower (removable) clamping bars located
under the door.
Recommended clamping screw tightening torque: 0.59 Nm (5.2 lbf.in)
DANGER
Figure: Screw terminals, Zigbee DALI module (with terminal covers removed)
The eight screw terminals are used as follows:

• Three screw terminals for the power output
• Two screw terminals for the DALI light output
An external power supply (220–240 VAC) is connected to the power input. The
power output is used for power distribution to the DALI control gear.
Table: Screw Terminals, Zigbee DALI Module

Terminal designation Usage
Power input
L (in) Line (L) lead, 220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

maximum 5 A
N (in) Neutral (N) lead, 220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

maximum 5 A
Protective earth ground

867
Continued
Power output
N (out) Neutral (N) lead, 220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

maximum 5 A
L (out) Line (L) lead, 220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

maximum 5 A
DALI light output
DA+ DALI bus line (+)
DA- DALI bus line (-)

868
18.11 Zigbee 0-10V Module Screw Terminals

The Zigbee 0-10V module is equipped with eight fixed screw terminals.
Recommended terminal screw tightening torque: 0.50 Nm (4.4 lbf.in)
The Zigbee modules are equipped with screw terminal covers (doors) to reduce
access to the screw terminals and wires. To access the screw terminals and
wires, you need to loosen the two screws that hold each door in place and then
open the door. These two screws are also used to fasten the cable to device,
using an upper clamping bar and two lower (removable) clamping bars located
under the door.
Recommended clamping screw tightening torque: 0.59 Nm (5.2 lbf.in)
DANGER
Figure: Screw terminals, Zigbee 0-10V module (with terminal covers removed)
The eight screw terminals are used as follows:

• Three screw terminals for the power output
• Two screw terminals for the 0-10V light output
An external power supply (220–240 VAC VAC) is connected to the power input.
The power output is used for power distribution to the 0-10V control gear.
Table: Screw Terminals, Zigbee 0-10V Module

Power input
L (in) Line (L) lead, 220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

maximum 5 A
N (in) Neutral (N) lead, 220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

maximum 5 A

869
Continued
Power output
N (out) Neutral (N) lead, 220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

maximum 5 A
L (out) Line (L) lead, 220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,

maximum 5 A
0-10V light output
0-10V AO 0-10 V analog output
COM Common terminal for the analog output

870
18.12 Zigbee Modules LED
18.12 Zigbee Modules LED

modules.
Figure: Zigbee Modules LED (Example for RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI)
Table: Zigbee Modules LED

Function Color
Status Red, Green
18.12.1 Status LED

The Zigbee modules Status LED indicates the condition of the device.
Table: Zigbee Modules Status LED Patterns


OK. Device is online.
During the initial device
power-up process, the LED
shows constant red light. As
soon as the device is online,
the LED returns to constant
green light.
Red, flashing fast (~5 Hz) Factory reset mode. No action required.
The device is being reset to
factory settings. When the
factory reset is completed,
the LED returns to constant
green light.
section 18.13 “Zigbee
Modules Reset Button” on
page 872.

871
18.13 Zigbee Modules Reset Button
18.13 Zigbee Modules Reset Button

Figure: Zigbee Modules Reset Button (Example for RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI)
You can reset the Zigbee modules depending on how long you press the reset
button.
Table: Reset Modes

Mode Description
Factory reset Press and hold the Reset button for 5

seconds.
The device is reset to factory settings.
During the reset process, the LED shows
fast flashing red light. When the reset is
completed, the LED returns to constant
green light. For more information, see
section 18.12 “Zigbee Modules LED” on
page 871.

872
18.14 Zigbee Modules Device Installation

The Zigbee modules must be professionally installed to comply with the following
• UK Statutory Instruments 2017 No. 1206 – The Radio Equipment
Regulations 2017
The Zigbee module and its integrated antenna must be installed to provide a
separation distance of at least 20 cm (8 in.) from all persons and must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Information on recommended RF exposure limits can be obtained from Health
Canada's website, www.canada.ca/en/health-canada.
CAUTION
• Install the Zigbee module and its antenna at least 20 cm (8 in.) from all
persons.
• Do not install the Zigbee module with its integrated antenna near any other
antenna or radio transmitter.
NOTICE
REDUCED RADIO COVERAGE RANGE
Do not route power or high-voltage cables close to the Zigbee module's
integrated antenna, which is in the lower right area of the device.
performance.
To install a Zigbee module on a ceiling, you drill two holes in the ceiling with a
distance of 121 mm (4.7 inches) between the holes, and fasten the device using
two M3 (3 mm) x 22 mm Phillips flat head self-tapping screws with a 5.8 mm
screw head diameter. The device has two holes in the back cover to facilitate
installation. The two screws are delivered with the device. For more information,
see section 18.15 “Installing an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Module on a
Ceiling” on page 876.

873
Figure: Installing a Zigbee module on a ceiling
The screw terminals on the left and right side of the Zigbee module are covered
by two terminal covers (doors), which are intended to reduce the access to the
screw terminals and wires. To open or close a terminal cover, you need to
unscrew or screw in the two clamping screws. These two screws are also used to
fasten the cables to the device. The device is equipped with an upper cable
clamping bar on the inside of the terminal covers, and four lower cable clamping
bars are delivered with the device, to facilitate the fastening of the cables. The
lower, removable cable clamping bars can be mounted or removed to fit cables of
smaller or larger diameter. For more information, see section 18.16 “Wiring a
Screw Terminal on an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Module” on page 879.
DANGER

874
Figure: Wiring a screw terminal on a Zigbee module

875
18.15 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Module on a Ceiling

Zigbee Module on a Ceiling
You install an RP controller expansion Zigbee module on a ceiling to properly
fasten the device.
page 873.
CAUTION
• Install the Zigbee module and its antenna at least 20 cm (8 in.) from all
persons.
• Do not install the Zigbee module with its integrated antenna near any other
antenna or radio transmitter.
NOTICE
REDUCED RADIO COVERAGE RANGE
Do not route power or high-voltage cables close to the Zigbee module's
integrated antenna, which is in the lower right area of the device.
performance.
To install an RP controller expansion Zigbee module on a

ceiling
1. Refer to the dimensional drawings before installing the Zigbee module.
4. Find a suitable location and surface on which to mount the Zigbee module.

876
5. Loosen the screws that hold the two green terminal covers (doors) in place
and then open the doors.
6. Hold the device in place against the ceiling.

7. Level the device.
8. Mark the place where the two drill holes (for attachment of the device)
should be on the ceiling.
The distance between the two holes is 121 mm (4.7 inches).
9. Remove the device.

10. Drill two holes that fit M3 (3 mm) x 22 mm screws (or anchoring system per
manufacturing specification).

877
11. Put the device in place on the ceiling and fasten the device using the two
screws delivered with the device.
The device is delivered with two M3 (3 mm) x 22 mm Phillips flat head self-
tapping screws with a 5.8 mm screw head diameter.
You can now wire the Zigbee module.

878
18.16 Wiring a Screw Terminal on an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Module
18.16 Wiring a Screw Terminal on an RP

Controller Expansion Zigbee Module
You wire the screw terminals on an RP controller expansion Zigbee module to
connect lights and LEDs as well as power (220–240 VAC) to the electrical
ballasts and drivers for the lights and LEDs. Always use the recommended wires
(or wires with larger cross-sectional area).
page 873.
DANGER
To wire a screw terminal on an RP controller expansion Zigbee

module
1. Disconnect the power supply and other high voltage equipment connected
to the Zigbee module.
2. Loosen the two screws that hold the green terminal cover in place and then
open the cover.

4. Strip approximately 8 to 9 mm (0.31 to 0.35 inch) of the insulation from the
end of each wire.

879
torque: 0.50 Nm (4.4 lbf.in).
7. Ensure that the cable outer sheath (insulation) is aligned with the upper and
lower cable clamping bars.
8. Remove the lower cable clamping bars to accommodate larger diameter
cables.

880
9. Close the cover and then tighten the two screws. Ensure that the screws are
fully tightened. Use the following recommended screw tightening torque:
0.59 Nm (5.2 lbf.in).

881
18.17 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management
18.17 BACnet/IP Device Firmware

Management
NOTE: Unlike previous individual upgrade packages which required you to
assign device-specific firmware packages, you can assign the universal
upgrade package to all BACnet/IP device models. This allows you to perform
a download and upgrade with a single selection and ultimately, simplifies the
update process by requiring minimal user involvement and coordination.
You have three options for updating the downloaded firmware:
• Schedule immediately
• Schedule manually
• Schedule at a specified time
18.17.1 Hosting Different Firmware Versions

The EcoStruxure BMS server keeps track of the installed firmware to support
backup, restore, and replacement of the BACnet/IP devices and their attached
SpaceLogic Sensor devices, RP controller expansion modules, and multi-
sensors. The EcoStruxure BMS server can host BACnet/IP devices of different
firmware versions. The BACnet/IP device firmware is version independent from
the server, however.
You use the BACnet/IP device Firmware Management view to view and manage
firmware that can be downloaded to devices from the server. This view shows a
sample MP controller.

882
Figure: Firmware management view
18.17.2 Firmware Upgrade Guidelines

Be aware of the following guidelines when downloading, activating, and
upgrading firmware in BACnet/IP devices:
• Attempting to download and activate the wrong device firmware is prohibited
by the EcoStruxure BMS.
• Downloading firmware packages twice, whether the same or dissimilar
package versions, with no activation in-between may cause the controller to
block additional updates.
It is recommended then that you always complete the firmware update,
including downloading and activating, before downloading any subsequent
firmware packages to the controller.
• Do not attempt to perform fast successive upgrades of the RP-C. Due to the
way in which the controller processes firmware files following the firmware
package deployment, any subsequent upgrade undertaken within 30
minutes of the first may result in a Failed to activate error.
• Deleting BACnet/IP device firmware that is in use by any other BACnet/IP
device is prohibited.
• Changing the name of the BACnet/IP device firmware in the EcoStruxure
BMS is prohibited.

883
• Align the EcoStruxure Building Operation and controller firmware versions to

achieve optimal functionality.
Following an upgrade of EcoStruxure BMS and/or the controller firmware,
execute a download command as a best pratice to ensure the available
functions are synchronized. If you want to uprade both the EcoStruxure BMS
and the firmware, perform both upgrades before issuing a download.
IMPORTANT:
• When attempting to downgrade the controller, be sure to do so only with
the guidance of Schneider Product Support Services.
• Initiating multiple firmware upgrades on a single daisy chain network may
introduce significant risks. The physical upgrade and restart of one group
of controllers may interfere with the firmware file transfer and/or activation
of another group. It is recommended then that you do not perform multiple
firmware upgrades on a single daisy-chain network (that is, initiate
multiple upgrade actions rather than upgrade multiple controllers in a
single action). Instead, you should allow any on-going firmware upgrades
to complete before initiating additional upgrades on the same daisy chain
(or RSTP ring) network.
18.17.3 Active and Inactive Memory for Firmware

The BACnet/IP device contains both an active and an inactive memory space for
firmware. The active firmware memory space contains the firmware version
currently in use. When you update the firmware, the new version is initially stored
in the inactive memory space. When you trigger the firmware to become active,
the active and inactive firmware memories are swapped. This allows you to
perform rapid updates that you can either execute immediately or defer to a
schedule date. Should an error occur, the firmware automatically reverts to the
previous version.
NOTE: The RP controllers do not support the inactive firmware image (dual
firmware images).
18.17.4 Firmware Recovery

If the BACnet/IP device detects an issue where it can no longer maintain control
or, repeatedly goes on and offline due to a firmware or database issue, a
recovery algorithm in the controller may initiate a number of corrective actions to
automatically restore or put the controller in a known state, thus allowing you to
manually recover the controller and its complete functions.
NOTE: Specific alarms for each recovery state are generated by the
BACnet/IP device and depend on communication between the controller and
EcoStruxure BMS server. If communication is compromised (for example, if
the controller is offline), EcoStruxure BMS issues a generic alarm for an
offline device.
Correction actions may include the following:
• Deleting the controller's database
The BACnet/IP device detects a problem in its database and deletes that
database to permit a correct boot operation. In this state, the controller may
appear online, but it no longer controls its connected equipment. An alarm
displays informing you about the state of the controller and requesting you

884
perform remedial action. In such cases, you should download the database
from WorkStation.
• Reverting the controller firmware (Not applicable in the RP controllers)
The recovery algorithm determines that the controller is experiencing issues
running the most recent (active) firmware. If so, the controller reverts to
running its previous (inactive) firmware version. This may occur in
conjunction with deleting the database, or independently. That is, the
database may remain intact if the algorithm determines that the database is
not at fault. An alarm displays informing you about the state of the controller
and requesting remedial action. Be sure to download the database from
WorkStation. You may also try upgrading the device to a different firmware
version if the reverted version is not optimal (for example, if more recent
security patches are required). For more information, see the Updating
Firmware in BACnet/IP Controllers topic on WebHelp.
• Recovering the firmware in recovery mode
Should either of the previous recovery methods fail to restore the controller,
this is the last line of defense. In the controller's Upgrade firmware context
menu, you perform a manual revert by selecting Revert device fimware.
This restarts the controller, deletes the controller's database, exchanges the
active and inactive firmware versions, and boots the controller from the now
active (reverted) firmware. Once you have taken this action, the controller
should boot to a fully functional condition. However, it is recommended that
you always select Download all objects following a manual revert in order
to return to full operation.
TIP: If Connected Services are active (requires registration), all such failures
and recovery actions are reported directly to Schneider Electric to help
improve reliability and recovery.
18.17.5 Impact of a Factory Reset on BACnet/IP

Controller Firmware
A factory reset affects the BACnet/IP controller’s firmware because the controller
upgrade includes not only firmware files that pertain to the controller itself, but
also firmware files to support the attached hardware. This hardware may include,
but is not limited to, equipment like the SpaceLogic Sensor devices, RP controller
expansion modules, and Zigbee radio USB adapters.
IMPORTANT: During a factory reset of the BACnet/IP controller, the file
system is erased. This deletes controller device configuration including
application database and firmware files held in the file system to support
upgrading the attached hardware. Although the controller firmware is not
affected, the ability of the BACnet/IP controller to support upgrading any
hardware attached to the controller is compromised because the required
firmware files are deleted.
Following a BACnet/IP controller factory reset, you should ensure that the
controller undergoes an upgrade to replace the missing files in order to
support the attached hardware upgrade. Although this upgrade may not
change the current version of the BACnet/IP controller, it ensures that the
stored firmware files are restored and made available to upgrade any
dependent hardware subsequently attached to the BACnet/IP controller.
After a physical or logical factory reset in a BACnet/IP controller, any controller
proxy object in the EcoStruxure BMS database that carries the serial number of
that controller may trigger an automatic association. This association occurs

885
between the reset physical controller and the controller proxy object in the
EcoStruxure BMS database.
For more information, see the Automatic Association after a Factory Reset in a
BACnet/IP Controller topic on WebHelp.
18.17.6 Firmware Compression for Transmission

In the Select Firmware dialog, you check the Compression for transmission
box to request that the firmware be compressed on download. Be aware that this
process cannot be forced.
Unchecking the box forces a non-compressed download. By default, the box is
checked. For more information, see the Select Firmware Dialog Box topic on
WebHelp.
TIP: The automation server may not compress for RP-X Advanced
controllers, regardless of the setting.
Compression causes extra filesystem space usage because after the
compressed file is delivered, its uncompressed counterpart must co-exist briefly
while decompression is taking place. This occurs until the compressed file is
deleted. This is why the RP-C Advanced controllers may not support it. They do
not have the extra filesystem space to accommodate this operation, so firmware
upgrades would routinely fail. Downloads to devices with limited filesystem size
are uncompressed whether the option is selected or not.
If you encounter repeated Download failed errors when performing a firmware
upgrade, try unchecking the Compression for transmission box. It is possible that
the repeat failures are caused by the lack of filesystem space. After the first failed
download, be sure to reattempt the firmware upgrade because the controller
automatically cleans up after a failed download caused by a lack of filesystem
space. It does this to help ensure that the next download attempt can succeed.

886
18.18 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
18.18 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance

and Approvals
The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules include the following models:
• RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI (Zigbee module with DALI interface)
• RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V (Zigbee module with 0-10V interface)

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules bear the CE mark and complies
• 2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules bear the UKCA mark and complies
with the following UK directives:
• S.I. 2016/1101 - Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016

887
19 Remote Control
Topics
RP-C-RC-BLE
Remote Control Safety Information
RP Controller Expansion Remote Control Wireless
Connectivity
RP Controller Expansion Remote Control Device Installation
Installing a Remote Control on a Wall
Remote Control User Interface
Remote Control Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
19 Remote Control
19.1 RP-C-RC-BLE
19.1 RP-C-RC-BLE
The remote control base can be easily mounted onto a wall or partition. If
required, the remote control can be permanently fixed into the base using
screws.
The remote control communicates with the multi-sensor using the Bluetooth Low
Energy wireless communication protocol and pairs with the multi-sensor in the
room.
Figure: RP-C-RC-BLE – Remote control
19.1.1 Remote Control Safety Information

This section provides safety information specific to the remote control (RP-C-RC-
BLE). Carefully read the instructions before trying to install, operate, service, or
maintain the equipment.
For more information, see section 19.2 “Remote Control Safety Information” on
page 895.

891
19 Remote Control
19.1 RP-C-RC-BLE
19.1.2 Remote Control Wireless Connectivity

The remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) is a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) enabled
product. You use the wireless connection for communication with the RP
controller expansion multi-sensor (RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE).
For more information, see section 19.3 “RP Controller Expansion Remote Control
Wireless Connectivity” on page 897.
19.1.3 Remote Control Device Installation

The remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) is delivered with a base that allows the
remote control to be installed on a wall or partition.
19.1.4 Remote Control User Interface

The remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) user inferface consists of an LCD display
and a keypad with 10 keys.
19.1.5 Remote Control Commissioning

The remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) is commissioned to make the device
operational. The pairing process enables the device to communicate with the
multi-sensor (RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE).
For more information, see the Commissioning the Remote Control topic on
WebHelp.
19.1.6 Remote Control Firmware Upgrade

The remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) firmware upgrade process is performed over
the air (OTA). The remote control firmware is included in the multi-sensor (RP-C-
EXT-MS-BLE) firmware. Once the remote control connects to a multi-sensor with
a different firmware version, an update is performed automatically with no user
intervention.
19.1.7 Remote Control Regulatory Compliance and

Approvals
remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE).

892
19 Remote Control
19.1 RP-C-RC-BLE
For more information, see section 19.7 “Remote Control Regulatory Compliance
and Approvals” on page 904.
Electrical
DC input supply voltage 3.0 VDC
DC input source 1 pcs of 3.0 V Lithium coin CR2450 batterya

a) The battery should only be replaced by qualified service personnel. Contact Schneider Electric to
replace the battery.
Battery operating life Minimum 5 yearsa

a) In an operating environment of 15 to 30 °C (59 to 86 °F) and normal office use.
Environment
Ambient temperature, storage 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Material
Mechanical
Dimensions, remote control 57 W x 143 H x 18 D mm (2.24 W x 5.63 H x 0.71 D in.)
Dimensions, base 62 W x 69 H x 21 D mm (2.44 W x 2.72 H x 0.83 D in.)

893
19 Remote Control
19.1 RP-C-RC-BLE
Weight, including battery 0.105 kg (0.231 lb)
Installation Partition or bearing wall using the base
Frequency band 2.4 GHz
Antenna Integrated chip antenna
Over-the-air (OTA) firmware update Yes
Display
Display type FSTN monochrome LCD
Keypad
Keys 3 context-sensitive keys for navigation and selecting options in the different screens
6 keys for controlling lights, blinds, temperature setpoint, and fan speed
1 key for selecting scenes

894
19 Remote Control
19.2 Remote Control Safety Information

This section provides safety information specific to the remote control (RP-C-RC-
BLE). Carefully read the instructions before trying to install, operate, service, or
maintain the equipment.
The RP-C-RC-BLE specific safety instructions below is used with the standard
safety information. For more information, see section 1.3 “Safety Information” on
page 47.
Never open the equipment. For safety reasons, the equipment should be opened
only by qualified service personnel. If one of the following situations arises, get
the equipment checked by service personnel:
• Liquid has penetrated into the equipment.
• The equipment has been exposed to moisture.
• The equipment does not work well, or you cannot get it to work according to
the user documentation.
• The equipment has been dropped and damaged.
• The equipment has obvious signs of breakage.
IMPORTANT: Opening the equipment to make any changes or
modifications to the equipment may invalidate all applicable regulatory and
agency certifications and approvals.
Do not leave this equipment in an environment where the storage temperature
may go below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F). This could damage the
equipment. The equipment should be in a controlled environment.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
may go below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F).
RP-C-RC-BLE contains a battery. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is

incorrectly replaced.
RP-C-RC-BLE contient une batterie. Il y a un risque d’explosion si la pile est
remplacée incorrectement.
WARNING
HAZARD OF EXPLOSION OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not replace the battery yourself. Contact Schneider Electric to replace the
battery.
equipment damage.

895
19 Remote Control

896
19 Remote Control
19.3 RP Controller Expansion Remote Control Wireless Connectivity
19.3 RP Controller Expansion Remote

Control Wireless Connectivity
The remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) is a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) enabled
product. You use the wireless connection for communication with the RP
controller expansion multi-sensor (RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE).
The remote control has an integrated antenna.
The remote control must be professionally installed to comply with the following

897
19 Remote Control
19.4 RP Controller Expansion Remote Control Device Installation
19.4 RP Controller Expansion Remote

Control Device Installation
The remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) is delivered with a base that allows the
remote control to be installed on a wall or partition.
The remote control must be professionally installed and serviced to comply with
the following rules and regulations:
• S.I. 2017/1206 - Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 of the United Kingdom
(UK)
The base supports the following alternative installation methods:
• Installation on a wall using adhesive tape
• Installation on a wall using two self-tapping screws with flat countersunk
screw heads
For example, you can use two Philips 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter self-
tapping screws with flat countersunk screw head of diameter 8.1 mm (0.319
in.).
The remote control can be fixed in the base. For example, you can use a Philips
2.2 mm (0.087 in.) diameter self-tapping machine screw with a 4.3 mm (0.169 in.)
diameter flat countersunk screw head and a maximum length of 13 mm (0.512
in.).
Figure: Remote control with base installed on a wall

898
19 Remote Control
19.5 Installing a Remote Control on a Wall

You install a remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) on a wall using the base delivered
with the device.
To install a remote control on a wall

1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the remote control.
2. Ensure that you have the proper mounting hardware.

3. Find a suitable location on the wall for mounting the remote control.

899
19 Remote Control
4. Hold the base against the wall and mark the place where the two drill holes
should be on the wall.
TIP: You can also install the remote control on a wall using adhesive
tape.
5. Fasten the base on the wall using two self-tapping screws with flat
countersunk screw heads and wall anchors (optional).
TIP: Use two Philips 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter self-tapping screws
with flat countersunk screw heads of diameter 8.1 mm (0.319 in.).

900
19 Remote Control
6. Mount the remote control into the base.
7. Fasten the remote control to the base using a self-tapping screw with a flat
countersunk screw head and a maximum length 13 mm (0.512 in.).
TIP: Use a Philips 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) diameter self-tapping machine
screw with a 4.3 mm (0.169 in.) diameter flat countersunk screw head.
You can now use the remote control.

901
19 Remote Control
19.6 Remote Control User Interface

The remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE) user inferface consists of an LCD display
and a keypad with 10 keys.
Figure: Remote control user interface with an LCD display and a keypad with 10 keys
Through the remote control user interface, you can perform the following actions:
• Commission the remote control (pair the device with a multi-sensor)
For more information, see the Commissioning the Remote Control topic on
WebHelp.
• Change the room comfort settings
For more information, see the Remote Control Overview topic on WebHelp.

902
19 Remote Control
Display
Display type FSTN monochrome LCD
Keypad
Keys 3 context-sensitive keys for navigation and selecting options in the different screens
6 keys for controlling lights, blinds, temperature setpoint, and fan speed
1 key for selecting scenes

903
19 Remote Control
19.7 Remote Control Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
19.7 Remote Control Regulatory Compliance

and Approvals
remote control (RP-C-RC-BLE).

RP-C-RC-BLE bears the CE mark and complies with the following EU directives:

RP-C-RC-BLE bears the UKCA mark and complies with the following UK
directives:

For RP-C-RC-BLE (FCC ID: QOQ13), the following statements apply.

904
19 Remote Control
19.7 Remote Control Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
This device must be professionaly installed. This device may be operated only
with the antenna with which it is authorized (see list below).

number)

For the RP-C-RC-BLE (ISED certification number: 5123A-13), the following
statements apply.
(NMB-3).
This radio transmitter (5123A-13) has been approved by Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below,
with the maximum permissible gain indicated.
Le présent émetteur radio (5123A-13) a été approuvé par Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne
énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal.

number)

905
20 KNX Modbus Gateway
Topics
KNX Modbus Gateway RP-C-EXT-KNX
RP-C Modbus
KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals and Connector
KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs
KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons
KNX Modbus Gateway Programming Mode
KNX Modbus Gateway Manual Operation Mode
KNX Modbus Gateway Device Installation
Installing a KNX Modbus Gateway on a DIN Rail
Performing a Factory Reset of the KNX Modbus Gateway
KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals
20.1 KNX Modbus Gateway RP-C-EXT-KNX

The KNX Modbus gateway RP-C-EXT-KNX connects to the RP-C controllers and
provides an interface between the controller and KNX devices such as push-
buttons, sensors, and control units for lights, blinds, and room temperature.
The KNX Modbus gateway allows bi-directional control and monitoring of all
parameters and functions of the connected KNX devices. Up to 250 KNX data
points (10 KNX devices) can be connected to the KNX Modbus gateway.
The KNX Modbus gateway is a Modbus to KNX interface that connects to one of
the RP-C controller's configurable RS-485 ports. The Modbus RTU protocol is
used for the communication between the RP-C controller and the KNX Modbus
gateway. The RP-C controller acts the Modbus master and the KNX Modbus
gateway as a slave. The RP-C controller also provides 24 VDC power supply to
the KNX Modbus gateway through the RS-485 interface. Maximum one KNX
Modbus gateway can be connected to each RP-C controller.
The KNX Modbus gateway provides a galvanic isolation between the RP-C
Modbus network and the KNX bus. The KNX Modbus gateway can be used with
a standard Schneider Electric KNX power supply to power the KNX devices on
the KNX bus.
The KNX Modbus gateway can be programmed through ETS© for installation,
configuration, and commissioning of KNX devices. The assignment between
KNX objects and Modbus registers is configured in ETS. The completed
configuration in ETS is exported to a JSON file, which is then imported into the
EcoStruxure Building Operation software to create the Modbus input and output
points for the Modbus device proxy object (representation of the KNX Modbus
gateway). For more information, see the ETS and the KNX Modbus Gateway
topic on WebHelp.
The KNX Modbus gateway is designed for installation on a DIN rail.
The KNX Modbus gateway has two push-buttons and three LEDs on the front to
enable local operation of the device and status indication.

909
Figure: KNX Modbus gateway RP-C-EXT-KNX
20.1.1 RP-C Modbus

For more information, see section 20.2 “RP-C Modbus” on page 914.
20.1.2 KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals and

Connector
The KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) is equipped with two 3-position
pluggable screw terminal blocks for connection to the RP-C Modbus (RS-485)
network and a 2-pole PCB connector for connection to the KNX bus.
For more information, see section 20.3 “KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals
and Connector” on page 917.
20.1.3 KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front of the KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX)
and one LED above the front. The LEDs indicate different types of status and
modes.
For more information, see section 20.4 “KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs” on page
919.

910
20.1.4 KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons

There are two push-buttons on the front of the KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-
EXT-KNX) and one button above the front. The buttons are used to activate or
deactivate various modes.
For more information, see section 20.5 “KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons” on page
922.
20.1.5 KNX Modbus Gateway Programming Mode

When the KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) is in programming mode, you
can assign an individual address to the device on the KNX bus.
For more information, see section 20.6 “KNX Modbus Gateway Programming
Mode” on page 925.
20.1.6 KNX Modbus Gateway Manual Operation

Mode
The manual operation mode enables you to perform two types of operations:
• KNX object synchronization
• KNX read operation
For more information, see section 20.7 “KNX Modbus Gateway Manual
Operation Mode” on page 926.
20.1.7 KNX Modbus Gateway Device Installation

The KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) is designed for installation on a DIN
rail. The width of the device is 1 unit (18 mm or 0.7 inch).
For more information, see section 20.8 “KNX Modbus Gateway Device
Installation” on page 927.
20.1.8 Wiring

911
20.1.9 KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory

KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX).
For more information, see section 20.11 “KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory
Electrical

Powered by the RP-C
Maximum power consumption <0.24 W from the KNX bus

<0.24 W from the RP-C
Environment
Ambient temperature, operating -5 °C to +45 °C (23 °F to +113 °F)
Material
Mechanical
Weight 50 g (1.76 oz)
Installation DIN rail

912
RP-C Modbus communications
Communication protocol (configurable) Modbus RTU
Electrical interface RS-485

Maximum total length of the RP-C Modbus (RS-485) network: 72 m (236 ft)
KNX bus communications
Transmission media Twisted pair (TP)
Maximum APDU length 55
Device model System B
Hardware
CPU type ARM Cortex-M0+ single-core
Frequency 14.7456 MHz
Status indicator LED (green and red) that shows the KNX communication status
LED (green and red) that shows the Modbus RTU communication status
LED (green and red) that shows the device mode (operating or programming mode)
One LED (red) for programming mode
Buttons One push-button for synchronization of KNX objects (writing all KNX group objects)
One push-button for reading all KNX group objects
One button for programming mode
Connectors 4-conductor KNX connectors with PUSH WIRE® connection, 2-pole, dark gray/red
Terminal blocks 3-position pluggable screw terminal block for power supply from the RP-C
3-position pluggable screw terminal block for Modbus communication with the RP-C
Wire cross-sectional area: 0.34 to 2.5 mm2 (22 to 14 AWG)

913
20.2 RP-C Modbus
20.2 RP-C Modbus

For the KNX Modbus gateway, the RP-C controller provides both 24 VDC power
supply and communications through the Modbus network connection.
For standard Modbus devices, a separate power supply unit (PSU) is needed to
power the Modbus devices on the network.
The Modbus RTU protocol is used for the communication. The RP-C controller
acts the Modbus master and the connected devices act as slaves.
The Modbus communication parameters can be freely configured regardless of
which RS-485 port on the RP-C controller that is used for the Modbus network.
578.
The maximum total length of the Modbus (RS-485) network is 72 m (236 ft). The
Modbus network uses a Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded, straight-through wired
cable with eight conductors (four twisted pairs) and RJ45 connectors. The wire
size (cross-sectional area) should be 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²). When
the RP-C controller is installed in a space that handles conditioned air or return
air, the Modbus network cables and IP network cables frequently must be
plenum-rated to meet applicable building codes. For more information, see
NOTICE
m (236 ft).
You need to configure which RS-485 (RJ45) port on the RP-C controller to use
for the Modbus network. You can configure to use either the Sensor Bus port
(RS-485 Com A) or Room Bus port (RS-485 Com B). For more information, see

914
20.2 RP-C Modbus
Figure: Location of the Sensor Bus port (RS-485 Com A) and Room Bus port (RS-485
Com B) on the RP-C controllers
The maximum number of Modbus devices that can be connected to an RP-C

controller depends on the type of Modbus device and the number of Modbus
registers.
The maximum number of Modbus registers that can be connected to and
managed by an RP-C controller depends on the communication capacity of the
controller's Modbus network.
The RP-C Modbus network supports up to 10 connected Modbus devices with
the following restrictions:
• Maximum of one KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX)
• Maximum of 250 Modbus registers
NOTE: The RP-C Modbus network does not support 64-bit Modbus
registers.

915
20.2 RP-C Modbus
Figure: Examples with one KNX Modbus gateway and several standard Modbus devices
The KNX Modbus gateway has the default Modbus address 1. The address can
be configured through the ETS. For more information, see the Configuring the
Modbus Device Settings in the KNX Modbus Gateway topic on WebHelp.

916
20.3 KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals and Connector
20.3 KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals

and Connector
The KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) is equipped with two 3-position
pluggable screw terminal blocks for connection to the RP-C Modbus (RS-485)
network and a 2-pole PCB connector for connection to the KNX bus.
You need to configure which RS-485 port (RJ45) on the RP-C controller to use
for the Modbus network. You can configure to use either the Sensor Bus port or
Room Bus port. For more information, see section 16.8 “RP-C Communication
Ports” on page 578.
Figure: Screw terminals and connector, KNX Modbus gateway
Screw terminals
The upper and lower screw terminal blocks are used as follows:
• Upper: Power input from the RP-C through the controller's RS-485 port
• Lower: Communication with the RP-C over the controller's Modbus network
Table: Screw Terminals, KNX Modbus Gateway

Terminal number Designation Usage RP-C RS-485 Port
RJ45 Pin
Power input

917
20.3 KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals and Connector
Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage RP-C RS-485 Port
RJ45 Pin
1 – Ground connection 5a
for supply voltage
from the RP-C.
2 – Ground connection -
for supply voltage.
Not connected to the
RP-C.
3 + Positive connection 4, 7
for supply voltage
(24 VDC) from the
RP-C.
Modbus
4 – Ground connection 8a
for Modbus
communication with
the RP-C.
5 A Data line A 3
(RS485+) for
Modbus
communication with
the RP-C.
6 B Data line B 6
(RS485–) for
Modbus
communication with
the RP-C.
a) RJ45 pins 5 and 8 are internally connected.
Connector
The KNX Modbus gateway uses a 4-conductor, 2-pole KNX connector for
connection to the KNX bus.
Table: Connector, KNX Modbus Gateway

Connector color Designation Usage
Red + Positive connection to KNX

bus
Dark gray – Ground connection to KNX

bus

918
20.4 KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front of the KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX)
and one LED above the front. The LEDs indicate different types of status and
modes.
Figure: KNX Modbus gateway LEDs
Table: KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs

Function Color
Programming Red
KNX Green/Reda
Mode (Status) Green/Reda
RTU (Modbus) Green/Reda
a) The indicator comprises two LEDs, green and red, in one structure. When both LEDs are
switched on at the same time, the colors blend and the result is amber (orange) light.
The LEDs indicate the status of the device, the programming mode, and the
status of the KNX and Modbus RTU communication on the KNX bus and RP-C
Modbus (RS-485) network respectively.

919
20.4.1 Programming LED

The Programming LED indicates whether the programming mode is active for the
device.
Table: Programming LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition Recommended Action
Red, constant Programming mode is No action required.

active
No light Programming mode is not No action required.

active
20.4.2 KNX LED

The KNX LED indicates the status of the data communication on the KNX bus.
Table: KNX LED Patterns

Green, flashing Transmitting and receiving No action required.

data (telegrams)
No light No data communication No action required.
20.4.3 Mode LED

The Mode LED indicates the status of the device.
Table: Mode LED Patterns


OK.
Green, flashing Configuration parameters No action required.

and application are currently
being downloaded from ETS
to the device.
When the download is
completed, the LED returns
to constant green light.
Amber, constant Manual operation mode is No action required.

active.a
Red, constant Programming mode is No action required.

active.

920
Continued
Red, flashing Device is not loaded Download application from

correctly (for example, ETS again.
because an ETS download
was interrupted).b
No light No power supply from the Check the KNX bus

KNX bus connection. connection.
a) Programming mode is not active.

b) Programming mode is not active. Manual operation mode is not active.
20.4.4 RTU LED

The RTU LED indicates the status of the Modbus RTU data communication over
the RP-C Modbus (RS-485) network.
Table: RTU LED Patterns

Green, flashing Transmitting and receiving No action required.

data
No light No data communication No action required.

921
20.5 KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons

There are two push-buttons on the front of the KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-
EXT-KNX) and one button above the front. The buttons are used to activate or
deactivate various modes.
Figure: KNX Modbus gateway buttons

922
Table: KNX Modbus Gateway Modes

Mode Description
Programming Press the Programming button to activate

or deactivate the programming mode. For
more information, see section 20.6 “KNX
Modbus Gateway Programming Mode” on
page 925.
When the device is in programming mode,
the Programming LED and Mode LED are
lit red. For more information, see section
20.4 “KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs” on
page 919.
The programming mode can also be
activated or deactivated, without opening
the switchboard/enclosure cover, by
pressing the KNX write and KNX read
buttons at the same time. This use of the
KNX write and KNX read buttons to put the
device in programming mode can be
enabled and disabled in ETS through the
Prog. mode on device front parameter.
For more information, see the ETS
Database for the KNX Modbus Gateway
topic on WebHelp.
KNX object synchronization (KNX write Press and hold the KNX write button for
operation) more than 2 seconds to synchronize (write)
all KNX group objects. For more
information, see section 20.7 “KNX Modbus
Gateway Manual Operation Mode” on page
926.
When the device is in manual operation
mode, the Mode LED is lit orange. For
Modbus Gateway LEDs” on page 919.
The synchronization can be cancelled by
pressing the KNX write and KNX read
buttons at the same time.
The use of the KNX write button for
synchronization can be enabled and
disabled in ETS through the Manual
operation (sync) on device parameter.
For more information, see the ETS
Database for the KNX Modbus Gateway
topic on WebHelp.

923
Continued
Mode Description
KNX read operation Press and hold the KNX read button for
more than 2 seconds to read all KNX group
objects. For more information, see section
20.7 “KNX Modbus Gateway Manual
Operation Mode” on page 926.
When the device is in manual operation
mode, the Mode LED is lit orange. For
Modbus Gateway LEDs” on page 919.
The KNX read operation can be cancelled
by pressing the KNX write and KNX read
buttons at the same time.
The use of the KNX read button can be
enabled and disabled in ETS through the
Manual operation (sync) on device
parameter. For more information, see the
ETS Database for the KNX Modbus
Gateway topic on WebHelp.

924
20.6 KNX Modbus Gateway Programming Mode
20.6 KNX Modbus Gateway Programming

Mode
When the KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) is in programming mode, you
can assign an individual address to the device on the KNX bus.
You put the KNX Modbus gateway in programming mode by either pressing the
Programming button or pressing the KNX write and KNX read buttons at the
same time. For more information, see section 20.5 “KNX Modbus Gateway
Buttons” on page 922.
When the device is in programming mode, the Programming LED and Mode LED
are lit red. For more information, see section 20.4 “KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs”
on page 919.
If required, the KNX Modbus gateway can be reset to factory default settings. For
more information, see section 20.10 “Performing a Factory Reset of the KNX
Modbus Gateway ” on page 930.

925
20.7 KNX Modbus Gateway Manual Operation Mode
20.7 KNX Modbus Gateway Manual

Operation Mode
The manual operation mode enables you to perform two types of operations:
• KNX object synchronization
• KNX read operation
The manual operation can be used, for example, during the commissioning and
configuration process to check that the device configuration is correct.
NOTE: The manual operation can be enabled and disabled in ETS through
the Manual operation (sync) on device parameter. For more information,
see the ETS Database topic on WebHelp.
KNX object synchronization (KNX write)

The KNX object synchronization affects all channels in the direction to KNX.
The synchronization is performed by a KNX write operation, which means that all
channels configured in ETS as Modbus to KNX send their current datapoint
values on the KNX bus.
You start the synchronization by pressing and holding the KNX write button for
more than 2 seconds. For more information, see section 20.5 “KNX Modbus
Gateway Buttons” on page 922.
When the device is in manual operation mode, the Mode LED is lit orange. For
more information, see section 20.4 “KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs” on page 919.
The synchronization can be cancelled by pressing the KNX write and KNX read
buttons at the same time. For more information, see section 20.5 “KNX Modbus
KNX read operation

The KNX read operation affects all channels in the direction to Modbus (RP-C
controller).
KNX read means that all datapoints of the channels configured as KNX to
Modbus receive the current value from the KNX bus. The Modbus KNX gateway
stores the received values and sends them to the RP-C controller (Modbus
master) only upon request.
NOTE: For KNX read, ensure that the following Flags are configured in the
ETS Settings for the group objects:
• For all channels configured as KNX to Modbus
(inputs): Communication (C), Write (W), Transmit (T), and Update (U).
• For the KNX devices that shall respond to the read
requests: Communication (C), Read (R), and Transmit (T).
You start the read operation by pressing and holding the KNX read button for
more than 2 seconds. For more information, see section 20.5 “KNX Modbus
When the device is in manual operation mode, the Mode LED is lit orange. For
more information, see section 20.4 “KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs” on page 919.
The read operation can be cancelled by pressing the KNX write and KNX read at
the same time. For more information, see section 20.5 “KNX Modbus Gateway
Buttons” on page 922.

926
20.8 KNX Modbus Gateway Device Installation
20.8 KNX Modbus Gateway Device

Installation
The KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) is designed for installation on a DIN
rail. The width of the device is 1 unit (18 mm or 0.7 inch).
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing the KNX Modbus
gateway, along with the RP-C controller and other associated control and
monitoring devices. The most efficient ventilation is achieved with the wall-
mounted DIN rail oriented horizontally and with adequate space provided
between the KNX Modbus gateway's rail and adjacent rails or other devices.
The KNX Modbus gateway is typically installed horizontally (on a DIN rail going
from left to right), with the device label text in the upright position reading left to
right.
Figure: KNX Modbus gateway installed on a horizontal DIN rail next to RP-C
When installing the KNX Modbus gateway together with RP-C controllers in a
cabinet, it is recommended to provide ample space between the DIN rails and the
devices for sufficient ventilation. For more information, see section 16.20 “RP-C
a screwdriver.

927
20.8 KNX Modbus Gateway Device Installation
The screw terminal blocks are removable, which means that they can be wired
before the KNX Modbus gateway is supplied. Replacing a KNX Modbus gateway
is done in seconds because no terminal wiring is affected. The terminal blocks
are delivered with the device. Use only terminal blocks delivered with the device
(or equivalent terminal blocks).
the device. If the labels on the wires do not indicate the intended terminals,
consult the control panel documentation to determine the intended terminals.

928
20.9 Installing a KNX Modbus Gateway on a DIN Rail
20.9 Installing a KNX Modbus Gateway on a

DIN Rail
You install a KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) on a DIN rail to properly
fasten the device and to allow for sufficient ventilation.
For more information, see section 20.8 “KNX Modbus Gateway Device
Installation” on page 927.
To install a KNX Modbus gateway on a DIN rail

2. Push the device fully onto the DIN rail until you hear a click sound, which
indicates that the DIN rail clip is fully engaged with the DIN rail.

929
20.10 Performing a Factory Reset of the KNX Modbus Gateway
20.10 Performing a Factory Reset of the KNX

Modbus Gateway
You perform a factory reset (recovery) of the KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-
KNX) to restore the device to factory default settings.
To perform a factory reset of the KNX Modbus gateway

1. Disconnect the KNX bus connector from the device.
2. Press and hold the Programming button.
For more information, see section 20.5 “KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons” on
page 922.
3. Connect the KNX bus connector to the device.
4. Keep the Programming button pressed for at least another 6 seconds.
NOTE: A short flashing of all LEDs indicates a successful reset of the
device to factory default settings.

930
20.11 KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
20.11 KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory

KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX).

The KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) bears the CE mark and complies

The KNX Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX) bears the UKCA mark and
complies with the following UK directives:
• S.I. 2016/1091 - Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016

931
21 SpaceLogic Sensors
Topics
SpaceLogic Sensors
SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and Covers
SpaceLogic Sensor Models
21.1 SpaceLogic Sensors

SpaceLogic Sensors are a family of living space sensors designed for BACnet/IP
controllers using the EcoStruxure Building Operation user interface. These
sensors use an RJ-45 sensor bus that provides communication and power from
the BACnet/IP controller.
The maximum number of SpaceLogic Sensor devices you can connect to a
BACnet/IP controller depends on the selected combination of cover and sensor
base types. The limit also depends on whether a SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter
is connected to the sensor. For more information, see the eCommission SmartX
Controllers Mobile Application and SmartX IP Controller Connections topic on
WebHelp.
IMPORTANT: The maximum cable length of the sensor bus end to end and
per segment is 61 m (200 ft).
21.1.1 SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and

Covers
SpaceLogic Sensor devices are modular and are ordered in two parts: the sensor
base and the cover. Four SpaceLogic communicating sensor base models are
available as well as a variety of covers.
Typically, you can match any base unit containing temperature, carbon dioxide
(CO2), and humidity sensor objects with any combination of front covers
including varied button counts, occupancy sensors, and displays. The exception
here is the LCD Temperature Sensor which includes its own unique sensor base
and cover. You cannot interchange it with other covers or bases.
For more information, see section 21.2 “SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and
Covers” on page 939.
21.1.2 SpaceLogic Sensor Models

SpaceLogic Sensor include blank cover and occupancy sensor-only cover
models, as well as several models with pushbutton or display-driven user
interfaces that allow you to control temperature, occupancy, overrides, and a
variety of other settings in a designated living space.

935
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor models
For more information, see section 21.3 “SpaceLogic Sensor Models” on page
944.
TIP: SpaceLogic Sensor models (SLASXXX, SLAWXX, and SLABXXX) are
non-communicating versions of the SpaceLogic Sensor that you connect
directly to the IO terminals of the controller rather than the serial bus. You
configure them using a temperature input object as per standard thermistor
types. For more information, see the Configuring a BACnet/IP Device
Temperature Input Point topic on WebHelp.
21.1.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Display Properties

You use the SpaceLogic Sensor Display property tabs in WorkStation to view
and configure the UI features of the various sensor models within your control
application.
For more information, see the SpaceLogic Display Properties topic on WebHelp.
21.1.4 Firmware Upgrade

The SpaceLogic Sensor upgrade process is automatic since its firmware is part
of the same package you use to upgrade the BACnet/IP controller. That firmware
package includes 3 overall files: the I/O board, the CPU board and the
SpaceLogic Sensor. Each individual BACnet/IP controller is responsible for
upgrading its own SpaceLogic Sensor.
Should you decide to replace or swap a SpaceLogic Sensor, the new unit is
automatically loaded with the last BACnet/IP controller firmware package
resident in the controller. The BACnet/IP controller saves that file and re-uses it
when a SpaceLogic Sensor is replaced.
NOTE: A factory reset affects the BACnet/IP controller’s firmware because
the controller upgrade includes not only firmware files that pertain to the
controller itself, but also firmware files to support the attached hardware.
This hardware may include, but is not limited to, equipment like the
SpaceLogic Sensor and RP controller expansion modules. For more

936
information, see section 18.17 “BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management”

on page 882.
21.1.5 Replacement
When replacing a SpaceLogic Sensor, you can replace the sensor with any
model of the same family. The BACnet/IP controller recognizes the model and
communicates with the replacement device. Additionally, if you decide to replace
a temperature and CO2 sensor and then later decide to replace only the
temperature sensor, the BACnet/IP controller still operates with only the
temperature sensor. Any application written to use the CO2 sensor is affected,
however, since the replacement unit causes EcoStruxure Building Operation
objects representing the CO2 sensor to be configured as out of service.
NOTE: It is the sensor object that is out of service here and not the entire
SpaceLogic Sensor.
When replacing a SpaceLogic Sensor, be sure to check the DIP switch address
to ensure that the system recognizes the fitted unit as replacement for one you
removed. Otherwise, the BACnet/IP controller does not interact with the same
unit. In order for the new unit to assume the identity of the old one, the DIP switch
settings must match.
During the replacement process, you can swap the faceplate on the sensor
model if you want. Even if the model sensor types and faceplate do not match,
EcoStruxure BMS still assumes it is the same unit and configures any absent or
deficient sensors or displays objects as out of service.
21.1.6 Addressing
When the BACnet/IP controller requires more than one SpaceLogic Sensor, be
sure to adjust the DIP switches of the devices to unique settings. You should also
ensure that at least two switches are present to provide the four unique settings
the product requires. The following table shows the mapping between each
unique DIP switch setting and SpaceLogic Sensor addressing. The default
setting for both DIP switches is OFF.
SW1-1 SW1-2 Address
OFF OFF 1
OFF ON 2
ON OFF 3
ON ON 4
TIP: Setting more than one SpaceLogic Sensor to the same address
(including not changing the factory default DIP switch setting) produces an
error and results in a communication failure to any units sharing that
address.

937
21.1.7 SpaceLogic Sensor Operation and

Calibration Modes
The CO2, temperature, and occupancy SpaceLogic Sensors provide a variety of
operation and calibration options.
For more information, see the SpaceLogic Sensor Operation and Calibration
Modes topic on WebHelp.
21.1.8 SpaceLogic Sensor Display Scene

Configuration
The SpaceLogic Sensor Display Scene Configuration page provides you with a
series of buttons and trigger function identifiers to use when programming the
Touchscreen Display model.
For more information, see the SpaceLogic Sensor Display Scene Configuration
topic on WebHelp.
21.1.9 Application and Scene Association

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Display object, the Selected scene property displays
the scene identifier corresponding to the user's scene button press. The control
application binds to this property, so the SpaceLogic Sensor button can act as an
application input.
For more information, see the Application and Scene Association topic on
WebHelp.
21.1.10 SpaceLogic Sensor HMI References

HMI references act as special two-way references that resolve the
synchronization problem for the local copy in the slave HMI device and
applications.
For more information, see the SpaceLogic Sensor HMI References topic on
WebHelp.

938
21.2 SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and Covers
21.2 SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and

Covers
SpaceLogic Sensor devices are modular and are ordered in two parts: the sensor
base and the cover. Four SpaceLogic communicating sensor base models are
available as well as a variety of covers.
Typically, you can match any base unit containing temperature, carbon dioxide
(CO2), and humidity sensor objects with any combination of front covers
including varied button counts, occupancy sensors, and displays. The exception
here is the LCD Temperature Sensor which includes its own unique sensor base
and cover. You cannot interchange it with other covers or bases.
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor Devices, Sensor Bases
Product Part Number EcoStruxure Building BACnet/IP Controller

Operation Software Firmware Compatibility
Compatibility
Sensor base with SXWSBTXXXSXX version 2.0.4 and later version 2.00.01 and later
temperature sensor
Sensor base with SXWSBTHXXSXX version 2.0.4 and later version 2.00.01 and later
temperature and humidity
sensors
Sensor base with SXWSBTXCXSXX version 2.0.4 and later version 2.00.01 and later
temperature and CO2
sensors
Sensor base with SXWSBTHCXSXX version 2.0.4 and later version 2.00.01 and later
temperature, humidity, and
CO2 sensors

939
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor Devices, Covers
Product Housing Part Number EcoStruxure BACnet/IP

Building Operation Controller Firmware
Software Compatibility
Compatibility
Blank cover Medium matte white SXWSCBXSELXX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
later later
Blank cover Optimum glass white SXWSCBXSELXW version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
later later
Blank cover Optimum glass black SXWSCBXSELXB version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
later later
Blank cover with Medium matte white SXWSCBPSELXX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
occupancy sensor later later
Blank cover with Optimum glass white SXWSCBPSELXW version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
Blank cover with Optimum glass black SXWSCBPSELXB version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
3-button cover Medium matte white SXWSC3XSELXX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
later later
3-button cover Optimum glass white SXWSC3XSELXW version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
later later
3-button cover Optimum glass black SXWSC3XSELXB version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
later later
3-button cover with Medium matte white SXWSC3PSELXX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
3-button cover with Optimum glass white SXWSC3PSELXW version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
3-button cover with Optimum glass black SXWSC3PSELXB version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
Touchscreen display Medium matte white SXWSCDXSELXX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
cover later later
Touchscreen display Optimum glass white SXWSCDXSELXW version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
cover later later
Touchscreen display Optimum glass black SXWSCDXSELXB version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
cover later later
Touchscreen display Medium matte white SXWSCDPSELXX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
cover with later later
occupancy sensor
Touchscreen display Optimum glass white SXWSCDPSELXW version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
occupancy sensor
Touchscreen display Optimum glass black SXWSCDPSELXB version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
occupancy sensor

940
Continued
Compatibility
Touchscreen display Optimum glass white SXWSC2XSELXW version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
cover with light later later
control buttonsa
Touchscreen display Optimum glass black SXWSC2XSELXB version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
control buttonsa
Touchscreen display Optimum glass white SXWSC2PSELXW version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
control buttons and
occupancy sensora
Touchscreen display Optimum glass black SXWSC2PSELXB version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
control buttons and
occupancy sensora
Touchscreen display Optimum glass white SXWSC4XSELXW version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
cover with light and later later
blind control buttonsa
Touchscreen display Optimum glass black SXWSC4XSELXB version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
blind control buttonsa
Touchscreen display Optimum glass white SXWSC4PSELXW version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
blind control buttons
and occupancy
sensora
Touchscreen display Optimum glass black SXWSC4PSELXB version 3.1.1 and version 3.01.01 and
blind control buttons
and occupancy
sensora
a) Touchscreen display covers with light control buttons, or light and blind controls buttons, are only used with the RP controllers.

941
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor Devices, Combination Models

Compatibility
Complete Medium matte white SXWSATXXXSLX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
SpaceLogic Sensor later later
model with
temperature sensor,
buttons for override
and setpoint control,
and LCD display
cover
Complete Optimum glass white SXWSATXXXSLW version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
model with
temperature sensor,
and LCD display
cover
Complete Optimum glass black SXWSATXXXSLB version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
model with
temperature sensor,
and LCD display
cover
Complete non- Medium matte white SLASXXXb version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
communicatinga later later
SpaceLogic Sensor
model with resistive
temperature sensor
(10 kohm type 3
thermistor) and blank
cover
Complete non- Optimum glass white SLAWXXX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
SpaceLogic Sensor
temperature sensor
(10 kohm type 3
cover
Complete non- Optimum glass black SLABXXX version 2.0.4 and version 2.00.01 and
SpaceLogic Sensor
temperature sensor
(10 kohm type 3
cover
a) The SpaceLogic resistive temperature sensor (SLA...) is not designed to be connected to the sensor bus. This sensor is
connected to I/O points/terminals on the BACnet/IP controller using a two-wire connection.

942
b) The part number SXWSATXXXRXX is replaced by SLASXXX.
21.2.1 Sensor Bus Configuration

When calculating power to validate your sensor bus configuration, be sure to add
power (mW) for all covers, combination units, and bases used on a single sensor
bus to determine the total sensor bus wattage. The sensor bus supports current
of up to 2000 mW. Device combinations totalling more than 2000 mW are not
supported.
21.2.2 Key Sensor Base and Cover Combinations

You can combine sensor bases and covers as follows:

943
21.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Models

SpaceLogic Sensor include blank cover and occupancy sensor-only cover
models, as well as several models with pushbutton or display-driven user
interfaces that allow you to control temperature, occupancy, overrides, and a
variety of other settings in a designated living space.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor models
21.3.1 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-button Cover Model

The 3-Button Cover model contains a passive, infrared sensor for occupancy
detection and a plus and minus button to adjust the temperature setpoint. There
is also an occupancy override button should the room occupant wish to confirm
their presence, turn on the lights, and change the setpoint to a comfortable level.
For more information, see section 22.1 “SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover
Model” on page 949.
21.3.2 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature

Sensor Model
The LCD Temperature Sensor model is the relatively inexpensive, mid-range
model with a small LCD display and three buttons to increment (plus), decrement
(minus) and then select options (middle button) as you scroll through its menus.
For more information, see section 23.1 “SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature
Sensor Model” on page 957.

944
21.3.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display

Model
The Touchscreen Display model provides a menu-driven interface with a main
menu and an optional default or home screen configurable through EcoStruxure
Building Operation.
For more information, see section 24.1 “SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen
Display Model” on page 975.

945
22 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button
Cover Model
Topics
SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
Changing the Temperature Setpoint
Overriding the Occupancy Setting
Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover
Model
SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface
22 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
22.1 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
22.1 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover

Model
The 3-Button Cover model contains a passive, infrared sensor for occupancy
detection and a plus and minus button to adjust the temperature setpoint. There
is also an occupancy override button should the room occupant wish to confirm
their presence, turn on the lights, and change the setpoint to a comfortable level.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor 3-button cover model
You enable the temperature setpoint feature by setting the Display object Allow
setpoint changes property to On and configuring the Setpoint high limit and
Setpoint low limit properties. You can control applications through the Display
object Setpoint property. If colored wall back lighting feedback is required, you
should also turn on Enable wall back lighting property.
For more information, see section 22.2 “Changing the Temperature Setpoint ” on
page 951.
You enable Occupancy override using the Display object Allow occupancy
override property. In occupied mode, a green back light turns on when the
Enable wall back lighting property is On. You can use the current occupancy
value to control applications through the Display object Occupancy override
property. When Occupancy override is turned on by pushing the button, it
remains on, until the control application sets the property to off.
For more information, see section 22.3 “Overriding the Occupancy Setting” on
page 952.

949
22.1 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
22.1.1 Discover Setpoint and Occupancy Override

Settings
Once you have changed the temperature setpoint, you can obtain data, such as
the setpoint the user requested. You may also be interested in finding out about
the occupancy override mode and whether the user requested the room or zone
be occupied.
To discover these settings, you can do the following:
• Drag the Setpoint and Occupancy override properties to the Watch
Window and see how they behave.
• Change the occupancy mode by clicking the button on the unit.
Then, you will see the green light turn on indicating the system is occupied
and that the occupancy override variable is now On.
If you have a program monitoring this, you can also see it is On. If your
program is designed to time out after a few seconds, it turns the light off
when that time expires. If your program is bound to the occupancy override
variable, that is part of the overall control application.
• Determine the actual setpoint by looking at the Watch Window.
You can see the setpoint incrementing every time you press the plus button
on the unit. The increments here are 1/10 of the total range. When you reach
the top, the red light does not get any brighter after a button push based on
the specified range. You can also see it does not increment beyond the
upper end of the range in the Watch Window.
22.1.2 Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-

Button Cover Model
When the room occupant presses the buttons on the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-
Button Cover model to increase or decrease the temperature setpoint, the
backlight changes from deep blue at the low end of the range, to deep red at the
top end of the range. Each button push causes a 10% increase or decrease in
the range. The backlight flashes rapidly three time to indicate the top or bottom of
range has been reached.
For more information, see section 22.4 “Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-
Button Cover Model” on page 953.
22.1.3 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model

Interface
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover model interface to change the
temperature setpoint to a comfortable level. You can also confirm your presence
in a room and turn on the lights with the occupancy override button.
For more information, see section 22.5 “SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover
Model Interface ” on page 954.

950
22.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint

In the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover mode, you change the temperature
setpoint to increase living space comfort by using the available buttons. You
enable the temperature setpoint by configuring the Display object Allow setpoint
changes, followed by the Setpoint high limit and Setpoint low limit properties.
In this way, you can use the desired setpoint to control applications through the
Setpoint property.
To change the temperature setpoint
1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model, press the button to

increase the temperature setpoint in the designated living space.
2. Press the button to decrease the temperature setpoint in the

designated living space.
IMPORTANT: With each consecutive button push, the temperature
setpoint increases or decreases by 10% within the specified setpoint
range. The back light flashes quickly three time to indicate the top or
bottom of range has been reached. Whenever possible, it is
recommended that you set the range relatively narrowly (+/- 10o) to
avoid wide temperature swings. With each button push, the back light
also changes from deep blue at the low end of the range, to deep red at
the top end of the range. For more information, see section 22.4
“Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model” on page
953.

951
22.3 Overriding the Occupancy Setting
22.3 Overriding the Occupancy Setting

In the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover model, you override the living space
occupancy setting, for example, so an after-hours occupant can change the
control setting to improve their comfort level. You enable occupancy override and
also use the current occupancy value to control applications using the Display
object Occupancy override property.
To override the occupancy setting
1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model, press the button to

override the occupancy setting in the designated living space.
In the Occupied mode, a button press turns on a green back light if the
Enable wall back lighting property is On. However, if the Occupancy
overrides property is OFF, the LED does not respond to a button press. For
more information, see section 22.4 “Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor
3-Button Cover Model” on page 953.
TIP: When Occupancy override is set to on by the room occupant
pushing the button, it remains on until the control application sets the
Occupancy override property to off.

952
22.4 Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model
22.4 Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor

3-Button Cover Model
When the room occupant presses the buttons on the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-
Button Cover model to increase or decrease the temperature setpoint, the
backlight changes from deep blue at the low end of the range, to deep red at the
top end of the range. Each button push causes a 10% increase or decrease in
the range. The backlight flashes rapidly three time to indicate the top or bottom of
range has been reached.
For example, the maximum setpoint is 75, the minimum is 65, the current setpoint
is 68 and the backlight is blue. Each time you press the button, the blue
backlight becomes fainter and the red backlight becomes brighter. If either the
upper or lower limits are reached, the backlight blinks rapidly three times.
If you are unable to change the setpoint, the backlight blinks rapidly three times in
the current setpoint color. For more information, see section 22.2 “Changing the
Temperature Setpoint ” on page 951.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor 3-button cover model LED behavior

953
22.5 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface
22.5 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover

Model Interface
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover model interface to change the
temperature setpoint to a comfortable level. You can also confirm your presence
in a room and turn on the lights with the occupancy override button.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover model interface
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface

Button Description
Press to increase the temperature.
Press to override current occupancy

settings.
Press to decrease the temperature.

954
23 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD
Temperature Sensor Model
Topics
SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
Changing the Fan Speed
Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings
Changing the Degree Type
Changing the Occupancy Mode
SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Home
Screen
SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model-
Default Screen
SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Fan
Speed Screen
Heating and Cooling Mode Screen
Degree Type Screen
Occupancy Mode Screen
23 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
23.1 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
23.1 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature

Sensor Model
The LCD Temperature Sensor model is the relatively inexpensive, mid-range
model with a small LCD display and three buttons to increment (plus), decrement
(minus) and then select options (middle button) as you scroll through its menus.
This model also contains an onboard temperature sensor that displays the
current temperature the living space occupant sees. The unit does not include
humidity or CO2 sensors. As a result, the Show CO2 and Show humidity
properties in the Advanced tab of the Display object are not applicable here.
Since it does not display time or the time format, the Show time and Time
format properties are also not applicable. Similarly, the Allow menu and Allow
information pages properties are invalid in this SpaceLogic Sensor model.
There is no display backlight, so the Enable wall back lighting property is also
invalid.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor 3-button display model
23.1.1 Display Object Setting Control

Using the Display object you can control the number of the settings the user sees
in the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model menus. For example,
you can configure valid HVAC modes in the Display object, such as Auto, Auto-
Cool, or Auto-Heat-Cool. You can also decide if you want to allow setpoint
changes or not, configure the high and low limits, and enable or disable fan
speed changes. Similarly, you can decide to allow or disallow occupancy
overrides.

957
23.1 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model
For more information, see the Configuring the Box Zero Flow Threshold topic on
WebHelp.
For more information, see section 23.2 “Changing the Temperature Setpoint ” on
page 959.
For more information, see section 23.3 “Changing the Fan Speed” on page 960.
For more information, see section 23.4 “Changing Heating and Cooling Mode
Settings ” on page 962.
For more information, see section 23.6 “Changing the Occupancy Mode” on page
965.
For more information, see section 23.5 “Changing the Degree Type ” on page
964.
23.1.2 Watch Window Property Monitoring

Once you configure the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model,
you can drag the setpoint, fan speed, occupany override, and HVAC mode
properties in the Display object Basic tab to the Watch Window to monitor them
as they change. For example, you may change the setpoint first. Notice that if
you leave the units in degrees F (as you change the setpoint), the data in the
Watch Window is degrees C. Once the data is in the system, it is converted to the
format (setting) that the user wants to see based on the specified preference in
WorkStation.
If you change the fan speed to off, you should see that change in the Watch
Window. You should also see the occupancy override change too. If it is Off, set it
to Yes in the Display Object, let it time out, and the Watch Window should now
say On.

958

In the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model, you change the
temperature setpoint to increase living space comfort by using the available
buttons. You enable the temperature setpoint by configuring the Display object
Allow setpoint changes, followed by the Setpoint high limit and Setpoint low
limit properties. In this way, you can use the desired setpoint to control
applications through the Setpoint property.

1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor, in the default
temperature menu, press the button.

The icon blinks to indicate that you are actively editing the temperature
setpoint.
2. In editing mode, press the or buttons to reach the desired

temperature setpoint.
TIP: The setpoint may differ from the actual temperature reading.
The icon continues to blink while you are in editing mode.
3. Wait for six seconds for the setpoint to return to temperature.
The icon returns to a normal, solid grey and the numbers now denote
temperature rather than setpoint.

959
23.3 Changing the Fan Speed

In the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model, you change the fan
speed to change the air flow in the designated living space. You enable this
feature by choosing the Display object Fan speed property and its appropriate
setting, such as Off, Level-1-Low-On, or Level-2-High.
NOTE: The specific setting depends on the type of fan located in your zone.
Typically, you only need to set this once because the zone equipment either
does, or does not include a fan. If it does, it only has so many speeds, further
limiting the available choices.
To change the fan speed

1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor default temperature
menu, press the button to advance to the fan speed menu.

960
2. Toggle between one of the available fan speed options using the
button.
3. Use the button to toggle through the options backwards.
4. Select the desired speed and press the button to return to the default
temperature menu.
This also confirms your fan speed changes.
TIP: If you return to the fan speed menu at some point, you will see
your selection displayed as the current fan speed.

961
23.4 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings
23.4 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode

Settings
heating and cooling mode settings to enhance living space comfort. You enable
this feature by choosing the Display object Heating cooling status property and
its relevant option.
To change heating and cooling mode settings

menu, press the button to advance to the heating and cooling mode
menu.
2. Toggle between one of the available heating and cooling options using the
button.


962
23.4 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings
4. Select the desired speed and press the button to return to the default
temperature menu.
This also confirms your fan speed changes.

963
23.5 Changing the Degree Type
23.5 Changing the Degree Type

degree type to either Celsius or Fahrenheit to view the temperature in the desired
units. You enable this feature by choosing the Display object Temperature units
property and its Fahrenheit or Celsius option.
To change the degree type

menu, press the button to advance to the degree type menu.
2. Toggle between one of the available options using the button.
4. Select the desired degree type and press the button to return to the
default temperature menu.
This also confirms your degree type changes.

964
23.6 Changing the Occupancy Mode

occupancy mode to tell the control system that the room is occupied or
unoccupied. Depending on how the control system has been designed, it may
respond by permanently or temporarily changing the setpoint, fan speed, HVAC
mode, and or lights. You enable the occupancy override feature using the Display
object Occupancy override property.
To change the occupancy mode

menu, press the button to advance to the occupancy mode menu.
2. Toggle between one of the available options using the button.

To show the occupancy mode change from unoccupied to occupied, the
button shows the figure in the room. Once occupied, the button then shows
the empty room to reflect what will happen if the button is pressed.
4. Select the desired mode and press the button to return to the default
temperature menu.
This also confirms your occupancy mode changes.

965
23.7 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Home Screen

Sensor Model- Home Screen
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model Home or default
screen to view the current temperature.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model - home screen
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Home Screen

Identifies the screen as the home screen

and includes the temperature display.
Temperature setting Displays the current temperature. You can

change the temperature setpoint to
increase living space comfort by using the
interface buttons.
“SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature
Sensor Model- Default Screen” on page
967.
“Changing the Temperature Setpoint ” on
page 959.

966
23.8 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Default Screen

Sensor Model- Default Screen
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model Default screen to
advance through the menus, increase and decrease temperature, change modes
and degree types, and perform occupany overrides.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model- default screen
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Default Screen

Button Description
Press to decrease the temperature.

Press to toggle backwards through menu
items, such as heating and cooling and
occupany modes.
Press to advance from the default menu

through items for heating and cooling and
occupancy, and changing humidity, and
Celsius and Fahrenheit degree types.
Press to increase the temperature.

Press to change the fan speed.
Press to toggle between heating and
cooling and occupied and unoccupied
modes.

967
23.9 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Fan Speed Screen

Sensor Model- Fan Speed Screen
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model Fan Speed screen
to view and configure the current fan speed.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model - fan speed screen
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Fan Speed Screen
Identifies the screen as the fan speed

screen.
Fan speed setting Displays the current fan speed:

• Off
• 1: Low speed
• 2: Medium speed
• 3: High speed
• 4: Automatic. Indicates that the fan
turns on automatically ONLY when the
system is heating or cooling the air.
You can change the fan speed by using the
interface buttons.
967.
“Changing the Fan Speed” on page 960.

968
23.10 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Heating and Cooling Mode Screen

Sensor Model- Heating and Cooling
Mode Screen
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model Heating and
Cooling Mode screen to view and configure the current heating or cooling setting.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model - heating and cooling mode
screen
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Heating and

Cooling Mode Screen
Identifies the screen as the heating and

cooling mode screen.
Heating and cooling mode setting Displays whether heating or cooling mode
is in operation:
• H: Heating
• C: Cooling
• A: Automatic. Indicates that heating or
air conditioning turns on automatically
ONLY when the system is heating or
cooling the air.
You can change heating and cooling mode
settings using the interface buttons.
967.
“Changing Heating and Cooling Mode
Settings ” on page 962.

969
23.11 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Degree Type Screen

Sensor Model- Degree Type Screen
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model Degree Type
screen to view and configure the degree type setting.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model - degree type screen
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Degree Type

Screen
Idenfies the screen as the degree type

screen.
Degree type setting Displays the current degree type setting:

• C: Celsius
• F: Fahrenheit
You can change the degree type to view
the temperature in the desired unit using
the interface buttons.
967.
“Changing the Degree Type ” on page 964.

970
23.12 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Occupancy Mode Screen

Sensor Model- Occupancy Mode
Screen
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor model Occupancy mode
screen to view and configure the room occupancy mode.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model - occupancy mode screen
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Occupancy Mode

Screen
Identifies the screen as the occupancy

mode screen.
Occupancy mode setting Displays the curent setting indicating

whether the room is occupied or
unoccupied:
• Yes: Occupied
• No: Unoccupied
You can change the occupancy mode
setting to tell the control system that the
room is occupied or unoccupied using the
interface buttons.
967.
“Changing the Degree Type ” on page 964.

971
24 SpaceLogic Sensor
Touchscreen Display Model
Topics
SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted Display
Selecting the Fan Speed
Selecting the Degree Type
Changing the Occupancy Mode
Changing the Heating and Cooling Mode
Accessing the Integrator Menu
Turning the Lights On and Off
Dimming the Lights
Fully Opening and Closing the Blinds
Incrementally Adjusting the Blinds
Selecting the Scenes Menu
SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Front
Menu Screen
SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Functions
Menu Screen
SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Setpoint
Adjustment Submenu
SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Integrator
24 Menu Pages
24 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
24.1 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model
24.1 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen

Display Model
The Touchscreen Display model provides a menu-driven interface with a front
menu and a functions menu screen that you configure through EcoStruxure
Building Operation.
The model has nine primary functions:
• Changing the temperature setpoint
For more information, see section 24.2 “Changing the Temperature
Setpoint ” on page 978.
• Selecting the fan speed
For more information, see section 24.4 “Selecting the Fan Speed ” on page
982.
• Selecting the degree type
For more information, see section 24.5 “Selecting the Degree Type ” on page
984.
• Changing the occupancy mode or overrides
For more information, see section 24.6 “Changing the Occupancy Mode ” on
page 986.
• Changing the heating or cooling mode
For more information, see section 24.7 “Changing the Heating and Cooling
Mode” on page 988.
• Accessing and configuring the integrator menu
For more information, see section 24.8 “Accessing the Integrator Menu” on
page 990.
• Controlling the lights
For more information, see section 24.9 “Turning the Lights On and Off” on
page 992.
For more information, see section 24.10 “Dimming the Lights ” on page 994.
• Controlling the blinds
For more information, see section 24.11 “Fully Opening and Closing the
Blinds” on page 996.
For more information, see section 24.12 “Incrementally Adjusting the Blinds ”
on page 998.
• Selecting scenes
For more information, see section 24.13 “Selecting the Scenes Menu” on
page 999.
24.1.1 Display Object

The vast majority of the properties in the Basic and Advanced tabs of the
Display object are used to turn on and off features in the SpaceLogic Sensor
Touchscreen Display model, including the setpoint, fan speed, occupancy
override and HVAC mode. For example, you can control access to all submenus
including the functions menu and any of its additional submenus using the Allow
menu page property on the Advanced page. Once you save your choice, those
menus are no longer accessible from the display. For more information, see the
Configuring SmartX Sensor Display Properties topic on WebHelp.

975
You can also also turn the time off on the Advanced page using the Show time
property. Once you save this choice, the display no longer shows the time.
Similarly, you can switch from the 12-hour to the 24-hour format using the Time
format property. You can also turn off CO2 and humidity on the display’s default
screen. For more information, see section 24.14 “SpaceLogic Sensor
Touchscreen Display Model- Front Menu Screen” on page 1001.
Fan Speed
You can select your specific fan type depending on the type of fan located in your
zone. Typically, you only need to set this once because the zone equipment
either does, or does not include a fan. If it does, it only has so many speeds,
further limiting the available choices.
For more information, see section 24.4 “Selecting the Fan Speed ” on page 982.
Blind Control
You can use the Allow blind control property to toggle on and off control for
blinds. You can then use the Blind control mode or Blind angle mode to
perform a digital toggle or analog adjustment for the blind control or blind angle
function. For example, you may want to open and close the blinds with a single
button click, or perhaps toggle the control to open and close the blinds more
gradually.
Button and Scene Configuration

You can use the Button 1-12 function properties in the Button and Scene
Configuration tab to select one of the functions or scenes to display for this button
on the SpaceLogic Sensor touchscreen display model screen. For example, the
integrator may wish to allow users to activate a projector scene with a single
button click on the Front or Functions menu instead of on the overall Scenes
menu. This single button click may turn the projector on, close the blinds, and
perhaps dim the lights.
You can use the Scene button 1-8 icon properties to allow the integrator to
select which icon to display for this particular scene. For example, the integrator
may display the presentation mode to allow the user to activate that mode and
turn on the projector.
24.1.2 Script Program Property Configuration

You can bind to the Display object properties and read them into your Script
programs. There are also properties that you might want to configure from your
Script programs. For instance, you can drive the heating and cooling status
indicator to show that you are actively heating or cooling and also animate the
background color of the display. Specifically, you may display a pink background
when actively heating and a blue background when actively cooling. Similarly,
you may want to drive the fan speed to show whether your program has
overridden the fan speed and if this is no longer what the user specified.
It can be difficult to drive a property from a program because reading and writing
to a program simultaneously can be challenging without overwriting objects.
There is a a technique for waiting and then writing a null back so you do not
overwrite your objects.

976
24.1.3 Integrator Menu Pages

A unique feature in the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model are the
integrator menu pages that allow users access to information about the on-board
sensors, the sensor device itself, the parent RP controller, and custom text
messages. Access to the integrator menu pages is controlled on an individual
page basis. You access each of the pages by clicking the icon which is enabled
by the Allow sensors information page, Allow device information page,
Allow parent information page, and Allow custom information page in the
Display object. If the individual pages are not visible in the integrator menu, the
property is not enabled and the page is not available to you.
IMPORTANT: System administrators or control system engineers may wish

to turn off access to these pages after the commissioning phase of a project
to prevent exposing internal data like Device IDs and IP addresses to room
occupants. There may be a perceived Cybersecurity risk with exposing this
information after the building has been commisionned and turned over. It
may also be sensitive information that system administrators and control
engineers may not want in user’s hands. As a result, they should evaluate
the information on these pages when the job is initially configured to decide
whether the information should be shown to users.

977

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model, you increase or decrease
the temperature setpoint to enhance living space comfort.

1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen model, click the temperature
adjustment setpoint button. In this case, the button is located on the Front
menu screen.

978
2. In the setpoint change menu, click the plus button + once for each full
degree Fahrenheit and one-half a degree Celsius of additional heat or
cooling you want.
NOTE: Clicking the back arrow or waiting three seconds confirms and
sends your menu change selection.
Depending on how the Heating cooling status property in the Display
object is configured, the Front menu screen now illuminates red if the
system is actively heating, blue if the system is actively cooling, or remains
white if neither of those conditions are in effect. The up or down arrow
indicates temperature direction, and the setpoint displays for positive
feedback.

979
24.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted Display
24.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a

Restricted Display
You change the temperature setpoint in a restricted display model to enhance
living space comfort. In order to do so, the SpaceLogic Sensor Display object
Allow setpoint changes property must be configured to allow setpoint changes.
The Setpoint high limit and Setpoint low limit properties then determine the
allowable range of temperatures. In this particular example, access is restricted
and the range of allowable temperatures is +1.5°C.
Changing the temperature setpoint in a restricted display

1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen model, click the temperature
adjustment setpoint button. In this instance, the button is located on the
Front menu screen.

980
24.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted Display
2. In the setpoint change menu, click the + button for each one-half a degree
Celsius of additional heat you want.
NOTE: You are locked out from advancing the setpoint any further than
the setpoint high limit.

981
24.4 Selecting the Fan Speed

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen model, you select the fan speed to
change the air flow in the designated living space. You enable this feature using
the Display object Allow fan speed changes property.
To select the fan speed

1. In the Front menu screen of the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display
model, click the menu button to view the Functions menu. In this
example, the button for the fan speed menu is located on that menu screen.
2. In the Functions menu screen, click the fan speed button.

982
3. In the fan speed menu, toggle to the desired fan state.
Other potential fan speed options include the following.
After you toggle the desired fan state, the screen returns to the Functions
menu. It also returns to the Functions menu after six seconds of inactivity.

983
24.5 Selecting the Degree Type

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model, you select the degree
type in order to see the temperature in the preferred units of the room occupant.
You enable this feature by choosing the Display object Allow temperature unit
changes property, followed by the Temperature units property and its
Fahrenheit or Celsius option.
To select the degree type

model, click the menu button to view the Functions menu screen. In
this example, the button for the degree type is located on that menu screen.

984
2. In the Functions menu screen, the temperature unit button shows the
anticipated degree type switch to Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Once you make the change, the button then shows the new type to reflect
what will happen when the button is pressed. As a result, the button reflects
the action rather than the current status.

985

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model, you change the
occupancy mode to tell the control system that the room is occupied or
unoccupied. You do so by enabling the Display object Occupancy override
property. Depending on the control system programming, it may respond in
various ways including changing the active setpoint from unoccupied to
occupied, turning on the lights, and/or starting a timer that expires when the
system becomes unoccupied again.
To change the occupancy mode

this example, the button for the occupancy mode is located on that menu
screen.

986
2. In the Functions menu screen, click the occupancy button to change the
mode from occupied to unoccupied.
The Functions screen goes into its preconfigured override state. In this
case, the override state is programmed to turn on the air conditioning to cool
the temperature in the room since it is no longer occupied.

987
24.7 Changing the Heating and Cooling Mode
24.7 Changing the Heating and Cooling

Mode
You configure valid HVAC modes in the Display object HVAC mode property
with values such as Auto, Heat, and Cool. The Display object Allowed HVAC
modes property determines what modes are available such as Auto, Auto-Heat,
Auto-Cool, and Auto-Heat-Cool. As long as this feature is supported by the
control application, this allows the room occupant to change the HVAC mode.
To change the HVAC mode

this example, the button for the heating and cooling menu is located on that
menu screen.
2. In the Functions menu screen, click the HVAC cooling button.

988
24.7 Changing the Heating and Cooling Mode
3. In the heating and cooling menu, toggle to the available choices: heating,
cooling, or automatic.
After you make your selection, the screen displays the new type and setting.
In this case, the heat turns on to raise the temperature in the room to the
programmed temperature setpoint when the room is occupied.

989
24.8 Accessing the Integrator Menu

You access the Integrator menu to view information pages in the SpaceLogic
Sensor Touchscreen Display Model. You enable the page individually with the
Allow sensors information page, Allow device information page, Allow
parent information page, and Allow custom information page in the Display
object. If the individual pages are not visible in the integrator menu, the property
is not enabled and you are not permitted to access that page.
To access the integrator menu

this example, the button for the integrator menu is located on that menu
screen.
2. In the Functions menu screen, click the integrator menu button.

990
3. Click the forward and backward buttons to navigate through the information
pages.

991
24.9 Turning the Lights On and Off

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model, you turn lights on and off
in order to increase or decrease living space illumination and conserve energy.
You enable this feature using the Allow light control property in the Display
object. You then use the Toggle lights, Button (1-12) function in the Button and
Scene Configuration page to toggle the lights on and off. You can also use the
Lighting mode property to allow the integrator to perform a Digital toggle for the
lighting control menu as described here.
topic on WebHelp.
To turn on an off the lights

1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen model, access the lighting control
menu by clicking the light bulb button. In this instance, the button is located
on the Front menu screen.
2. In the lighting control menu, click the light bulb button to fully illuminate the
lights in the room.

992
3. Click the minus button - to fully extinguish the lights in the room.

993
24.10 Dimming the Lights

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model, you dim the lights in
order to increase or decrease living space illumination and conserve energy. You
enable this feature using the Allow light control property in the Display object.
You then use the Lighting mode property to allow the integrator to select
Analog adjustable for the lighting control menu.
To dim the lights

1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen model, access the lighting control
menu by clicking the light bulb button. In this instance, the button is located
on the Front menu screen.
2. In the lighting control menu, click the minus - button to dim the lights in the
room.

994
3. Continue to click the minus button - or plus buttons + to increase or

decrease the lights in predefined increments until they reach the desired
level, such as 10%.

995
24.11 Fully Opening and Closing the Blinds

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model, you fully open and close
the blinds in order to increase or decrease living space illumination and conserve
energy. You enable this feature using the Allow blind control property in the
Display object. You then use the Toggle blinds, Button (1-12) function property
on the Button and Scene Configuration page to toggle the blinds fully open and
closed. You can also use the Blind control mode property to allow the integrator
to perform a Digital toggle control for the blind control menu as described here.
To fully open and close the blinds

1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen model, access the blind control
menu by clicking the blind button. In this instance, the button is located on
the Front menu screen.
2. In the blind control menu, click the blind button to fully open the blinds in the
room.

996
3. Click the minue button - to fully close the blinds in the room.

997
24.12 Incrementally Adjusting the Blinds
24.12 Incrementally Adjusting the Blinds

In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model, you incrementally adjust
the blinds in order to increase or decrease living space illumination and conserve
energy. You enable this feature using the Allow blind control property in the
Display object. You then use the Blind angle mode property to allow the
integrator to select Analog adjustable and manipulate the blind control menu.
To incrementally adjust the blinds

1. In the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen model, access the blind control
menu by clicking the blind button. In this instance, the button is located on
the Front menu screen.
2. In the blind deployment function menu, click the minus - or plus + buttons on
the bottom half of the menu to angle the room blinds.

998
24.13 Selecting the Scenes Menu

You can program lighting control to create special scenes that illuminate an area
based on the time of day, such as dimming the lights with the click of the night
light button.
You enable this feature using the Display object Scene Configuration page to
drag and drop the available night light button to program the Touchscreen
Display. You associate scenes with an application through a Script program. This
Script program reads the Display object Selected scene property and then uses
it to determine the levels and positions of lights and blinds, for example, along
with other outputs such switching a projector on or off.
topic on WebHelp.
For more information, see the Application and Scene Association topic on
WebHelp.
To select the scenes menu

model, click the menu button to view the Functions menu. In this
example, the button for the scenes menu is located on that menu screen.
2. In the Functions menu screen, access the scenes menu by clicking the
button.

999
3. In the Scenes submenu, click the button to initiate a series of specific,

predefined actions to occur with a single button click, such as the following
actions:
• Choosing Presentation mode to turn on a projector
• Choosing energy saving
• Specifying a perimeter
• Selecting a meeting
• Selecting occupied or unoccupied modes
The Selected scene property shows the scene identifier corresponding to
your scene button click. The control application binds to this property, so the
SpaceLogic Sensor button can act as an application input.

1000
24.14 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Front Menu Screen

Display Model- Front Menu Screen
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model front menu screen to
view and change the current settings and advance to the functions menu screen.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model - front menu screen
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Front Menu Screen

Button Description
Click this button to access the functions

menu screen. For more information, see
section 24.15 “SpaceLogic Sensor
Touchscreen Display Model- Functions
Menu Screen” on page 1003.
The Allow menu page property on the
SpaceLogic Sensor Display object property
controls access to all submenus including
the Functions menu and any of its
submenus. If this property is turned off, you
cannot access the functions menu and its
submenus.
Click this button to adjust the temperature

setpoint. For more information, see section
24.2 “Changing the Temperature Setpoint ”
on page 978.

1001
24.14 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Front Menu Screen
Continued
Button Description
Click this button to turn the lights on and

off. For more information, see section 24.9
“Turning the Lights On and Off” on page
992.
Click this button to open and close the

blinds. For more information, see section
24.11 “Fully Opening and Closing the
Blinds” on page 996.
Click this button to access the scenes

menu. For more information, see section
24.13 “Selecting the Scenes Menu” on
page 999.
Indicates that ECO mode heating or cooling

is in effect in the SpaceLogic Sensor
Touchscreen Display Model.
Specifies the relative humidity setting in the

room in which the SpaceLogic Sensor is
located.
Specifies the CO2 setting in the room in

which the SpaceLogic Sensor is located.

1002
24.15 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Functions Menu Screen

Display Model- Functions Menu Screen
Use the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model functions menu to
perform a variety of tasks. For example, with the functions menu configured as
shown, you can perform the following tasks:
• Change occupancy
• Change fan speed
• Change the degree type
• Change heating or cooling mode
• Adjust the temperature setpoint
• Control the lights
• Control the blinds
• Configure scenes
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model- functions menu screen
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Functions Menu Screen

Button Description
Click to return to the front menu screen.

1003
24.15 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Functions Menu Screen
Continued
Button Description
Click to change the occupancy mode. For

more information, see section 24.6
“Changing the Occupancy Mode ” on page
986.
Click to access the fan speed menu where

you can toggle to the desired fan state. For
more information, see section 24.4
“Selecting the Fan Speed ” on page 982.
Click to switch the degree type from

Fahrenheit to Celsius or Celsius to
Fahrenheit. For more information, see
section 24.5 “Selecting the Degree Type ”
on page 984.
Click to access the heating and cooling

menu, where you can toggle to the
available choices: heating, cooling, or
automatic. For more information, see
section 24.7 “Changing the Heating and
Cooling Mode” on page 988.
Click this button to adjust the temperature

setpoint. For more information, see section
24.2 “Changing the Temperature Setpoint ”
on page 978.
Click this button to turn the lights on or off,

or dim the lights.
“Turning the Lights On and Off” on page
992.
“Dimming the Lights ” on page 994.
Click this button to fully open and close the

blinds or incrementally adjust the blinds.
“Fully Opening and Closing the Blinds” on
page 996.
“Incrementally Adjusting the Blinds ” on
page 998.
Click this button to access the scenes

menu. For more information, see section
24.13 “Selecting the Scenes Menu” on
page 999.

1004
24.16 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Setpoint Adjustment Submenu

Display Model- Setpoint Adjustment
Submenu
When allowed, you can use the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model
setpoint adjustment submenu to increase or decrease temperature and enhance
living space comfort.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model- setpoint adjustment submenu
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Setpoint Adjustment

Submenu
Button Description
Click this button to return to the previous

menu screen.
Click to increase the temperature. Click

once for each full degree Fahrenheit and
one-half degree Celsius of additional heat
you want.
Click to decrease the temperature.

1005
24.16 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Setpoint Adjustment Submenu
Continued
Button Description
Indicates that you are restricted from

raising or lowering the setpoint beyond
three button clicks. For more information,
see section 24.3 “Changing the
Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted
Display” on page 980.

1006
24.17 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Integrator Menu Pages

Display Model- Integrator Menu Pages
When allowed, you use the SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model
integrator menu pages to access information about the on-board sensors, the
sensor device itself, the parent RP controller, and custom text messages.
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model- integrator menu sensors page

1007
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model- integrator menu device page
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model- integrator menu parent page

1008
Figure: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display model- integrator menu custom page
Table: SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Integrator Menu Pages

Button Description
Click to return to the previous menu.
Click to display the next page in the

integrator menu.
Click to display the previous page in the

integrator menu.

1009
25 SpaceLogic Bluetooth
Adapter
Topics
SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter
Installing SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter on a SpaceLogic
Sensor
Attaching a Lanyard to SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter
Connecting to a Controller with the SpaceLogic Bluetooth
Adapter
25 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter
25.1 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter

The SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter is plugged into a SpaceLogic Sensor to
provide a wireless Bluetooth connection to the BACnet/IP controller (Sensor Bus
compliant controller) for commissioning, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the
controller and the sensor.
NOTICE
SPACELOGIC SENSOR OR OTHER EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
• Plug in the adapter with the button to the front.
• Do not plug into any device other than a SpaceLogic Sensor.
Figure: SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter provides Bluetooth access to BACnet/IP controllers
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter provides a bridge between a Bluetooth

enabled mobile device running the Commission mobile application and the
Sensor Bus on the BACnet/IP controller. The Commission mobile application is
used to perform commissioning, flow balance, and checkout operations on
BACnet/IP controllers. For more information, see the Commission Mobile
Application Overview topic on WebHelp.
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth adapter is designed to be connected to a SpaceLogic
Sensor.
The SpaceLogic Sensor is in turn is connected to the BACnet/IP controller:
• On an MP controller, the SpaceLogic Sensor is connected to Sensor Bus
port.
• On an RP-C controller, the SpaceLogic Sensor is connected to the RS-485
port configured for the sensor bus.

1013
By default, the RP-C controller's Sensor Bus port is configured for the sensor
bus. For more information, see section 16.8 “RP-C Communication Ports” on
page 578.
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth adapter cannot be connected directly to the port on
the BACnet/IP controller. For more information, see section 12.4 “MP Controller
Sensor Bus” on page 412. For more information, see section 16.9 “RP-C Sensor
Bus” on page 580.
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth adapter is plugged into a connector on the upper-right
side of the SpaceLogic Sensor. For more information, see section 25.2 “Installing
SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter on a SpaceLogic Sensor” on page 1017. The
physical connector on the sensor is a USB style connector, but the electrical
interface and communication protocol are not USB. The SpaceLogic Bluetooth
adapter communicates with the Bacnet/IP controller over the Sensor Bus using
the RS-485 physical layer.
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth adapter PCB has a card-edge connector that
protrudes from the PCB and mates with the SpaceLogic Sensor connector.
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth adapter is powered by the SpaceLogic Sensor, which
also provides transient protection to the adapter.
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth adapter is housed in a plastic enclosure, which has a
protective cap to help protect the PCB card edge when the adapter is not
connected to a SpaceLogic Sensor. The protective cap has a hinge mechanism.
The cap can either hang down, or rotate to the back end and snap on, when the
adapter is connected to a SpaceLogic Sensor. The adapter is delivered with a
lanyard that can be attached to a loop on the protective cap. For more
information, see section 25.3 “Attaching a Lanyard to SpaceLogic Bluetooth
Adapter” on page 1019.
Figure: SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth adapter has a momentary push-button switch that is

used for pairing the adapter with a mobile device running the Commission mobile
application. For more information, see section 25.4 “Connecting to a Controller
with the SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter” on page 1020.The SpaceLogic Bluetooth
adapter sends out a unique signal that enables the mobile device to pair with the
correct adapter. A blue indicator LED on the adapter indicates the status.

1014
Table: SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition/Mode
Blue, flashing (2 s ON, 8 s OFF) Default Mode (No Bluetooth client

connection, no BACnet/IP controller
connection)
Blue, flashing (1 s ON, 1 s OFF) Advertising Mode (No Bluetooth client

connection, connection is possible)
Blue, constant (always ON) Connected Mode (Bluetooth client

connection)
Blue, ON when transmitting, OFF otherwise Active Mode (Bluetooth client connection,
BACnet/IP controller connection active)
Blue, flashing (2 s ON, 6 s OFF, 8 s ON, 4 s DFU Mode (Waiting for user to press and
OFF) hold push-button)
Electrical
DC input power consumption Maximum 0.25 W
DC input supply voltage 5.0 to 5.5 VDC (powered by the SpaceLogic Sensor)
Communications
Wireless communications Bluetooth® 4.2 Low Energy compliant

Bluetooth® 5 Advertising
Frequency: 2.4 GHz
Line-of-sight range: max. 50 m (164 ft)
SpaceLogic communications RS-485, proprietary Sensor Bus protocol
Operation environment
Mechanical
Weight 0.02 kg (0.05 lb) with lanyard

1015
Hardware
Frequency 38.4 MHz
Flash memory (serial) 1 MB
Status indicator LED (blue)
Button Momentary push-button switch

1016
25.2 Installing SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter on a SpaceLogic Sensor
25.2 Installing SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter

on a SpaceLogic Sensor
You install SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter on a SpaceLogic Sensor to provide a
wireless Bluetooth connection to a BACnet/IP controller for commissioning,
maintenance, and troubleshooting of the controller and the sensor.
NOTICE
To install SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter on a SpaceLogic

Sensor
1. Remove the protective cap from the adapter's male connector, rotate the
cap with its hinge mechanism to the back end of the adapter, and snap the
cap on to the back end.
NOTE: You can attach a lanyard to the adapter to help preventing loss
and dropping. For more information, see section 25.3 “Attaching a
Lanyard to SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter” on page 1019.

1017
25.2 Installing SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter on a SpaceLogic Sensor
2. With the adapter's button to the front, plug the adapter into the female
connector on the upper-right side of the SpaceLogic Sensor.
NOTE: The physical connector is a USB style connector, but the

electrical interface and communication protocol are not USB.
You can now pair the Bluetooth adapter with your mobile device running the
Commission mobile application.

1018
25.3 Attaching a Lanyard to SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter
25.3 Attaching a Lanyard to SpaceLogic

Bluetooth Adapter
You attach a lanyard to SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter to help keeping the
adapter securely on your wrist and to help preventing loss of the adapter.
NOTE: The lanyard is delivered with the adapter.
To attach a lanyard to SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter

1. Thread the thin loop of string at the end of the lanyard through the loop on
the protective cap of the adapter.
2. Thread the lanyard (larger loop) through the smaller loop.
3. Pull the lanyard to tighten the loop and secure the lanyard to the adapter's
protective cap.

1019
25.4 Connecting to a Controller with the SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter
25.4 Connecting to a Controller with the

SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter
The SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter allows you to establish a Bluetooth
connection to MP and RP controllers. To connect to a device through the
SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter, a SpaceLogic Sensor must be wired to the
controller.
For more information, see the Connection and Architecture Options topic on
WebHelp.
NOTICE
To connect to controller with the SpaceLogic Bluetooth

Adapter
1. In the Connect view, select Bluetooth.
2. Remove the protective cap from the Adapter. With the LED push button
facing you, plug the Adapter into the SpaceLogic Sensor.
NOTE: Should the adapter not turn on, be sure to consult the
troubleshooting topic. For more information, see the Bluetooth Adapter
Not Turning On topic on WebHelp.

1020
3. Press the LED push button to initiate the pairing (advertising) mode.
NOTE: Pairing mode lasts for 60 seconds. After that time, you will need
to press the LED push button again to initiate pairing (advertising)
mode.
The blue LED flashes rapidly On for 1 second and Off for 1 second in a
repeating pattern while in advertising mode. For more information, see the
Bluetooth LED Functionality topic on WebHelp.
4. In the Commission mobile application, in Bluetooth Devices page, select

the Adapter and then select Connect.
The blue LED changes to steady On (Connected Mode) when successfully
paired to the controller.
5. In the Bluetooth Device Management page, perform two optional tasks:
• Update Adapter firmware. Upgrading Adapter firmware is optional but
may improve Adapter performance. For more information, see the
Updating the SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter Firmware topic on
WebHelp.
• Change the Adapter PIN. If this is the first time using the Adapter,
change the default PIN to a secure code. For more information, see the
Changing the PIN of the SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter topic on
WebHelp.
6. Select Discover Device.
7. Your mobile device or Windows 10 laptop prompts you for the Adapter PIN.
Enter the PIN and select Allow.
NOTE: Your mobile device or Windows 10 laptop will remember the
Adapter PIN after you connect to the Adapter. You will not need to enter
the PIN again unless you forget the Adapter or change the PIN.
8. When the PIN has been successfully entered, select Close.
9. In the Device List page, select the check box next to the controller and
select Next.

1021
When you see the Device Settings page, you have successfully connected to
the controller.
IMPORTANT: The Adapter must stay plugged into the corresponding
SpaceLogic Sensor during all device commissioning tasks. Removing the
Adapter disconnects you from the controller. Similarly, you are disconnected
from your mobile device should you close the Commission mobile
application or switch to another application on your device.

1022
26 Zigbee Adapter
Topics
SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter
Supported Wireless Devices
Installing Zigbee Adapter on an Enclosure Exterior
Installing Zigbee Adapter in a Dropped Ceiling
Installing Zigbee Adapter on a Wall
Zigbee Adapter Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
26 Zigbee Adapter
26.1 SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter

The SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter is a USB-based wireless adapter that enables
ZigbeeTM wireless connectivity with an RP controller, AS-P server, or AS-B
server, extending the controller's or server's point count and bringing flexibility in
retrofit applications.
The Zigbee Adapter is a Zigbee Certified Product when it is used with RP
controllers and automation servers. The adapter is compliant with Zigbee 3.0.
An automation server equipped with the Zigbee Adapter can communicate over
the Zigbee wireless protocol with up to 164 wireless devices, depending on the
type of Zigbee device and the radio bandwidth usage of the device. An RP
controller equipped with the Zigbee Adapter can communicate with up to 30
wireless devices.
For more information, see section 26.2 “Supported Wireless Devices” on page
1030.
The Zigbee Adapter works seamlessly within EcoStruxure Building Management
systems so that Zigbee objects become easily available to the user.
The Zigbee Adapter’s compact design allows it to plug in to RP controllers or
automation servers in tight spaces and the optional mounting cradle, wall plate,
and USB cable extension allow for the choice of a wall, ceiling, or exterior of the
enclosure mount to maximize the transmission and reception of signals from
distributed Zigbee devices.
Figure: Zigbee Adapter with mounting cradle and wall plate
The Zigbee Adapter is plugged into the USB host port on the RP controller, AS-P
server, or AS-B server. The Zigbee Adapter is powered by the RP controller or
automation server, which also provides transient protection to the adapter.

1025
26 Zigbee Adapter
Figure: Zigbee Adapter installed on an enclosure exterior and connected to the USB host
port of an RP controller
The Zigbee Adapter must be professionally installed to avoid harmful interference

to radio communications and to maintain the regulatory compliance and
approvals for the device. For more information, see section 26.6 “Zigbee Adapter
In WorkStation, the firmware of the Zigbee Adapter will be automatically updated
when you update the RP controller or automation server to which it is connected.
Electrical
DC input supply voltage 5 VDC (USB)a

a) Connected to and powered by the USB 2.0 host port on the RP controller or automation server.

1026
26 Zigbee Adapter
Maximum output power +10 dBm
Maximum total number of hops allowed in the wireless network 5
Wireless device limits for an RP controller
Maximum total number of wireless devices connected to the wireless network Up to 30a
a) The maximum number depends on the type of Zigbee device and the radio bandwidth usage of the
Zigbee device.
Maximum total number of SE8000 and VT8000 room controllers 4
Maximum total number of Zigbee end devices paired with an RP controller 20
Maximum total number of ASSA ABLOY VingCard electronic locks 1
Wireless device limits for an automation server
Maximum total number of wireless devices connected to the wireless network Up to 164a
a) The maximum number depends on the type of Zigbee device and the radio bandwidth usage of the
Zigbee device.
Maximum total number of Zigbee routers and Zigbee end devices 64
Maximum total number of Zigbee Green Power devices 100
Maximum total number of Zigbee end devices paired with an automation server 20
Environment
Material
Plastic flame rating UL94 HB
Plenum rating UL 2043
Mechanical
Dimensions, adapter See drawing below

1027
26 Zigbee Adapter
Dimensions, mounting cradle and wall plate See drawing below
Weight Adapter: 7.57 g (0.267 oz)

Cradle and nut: 21.35 g (0.753 oz)
Cradle, nut, and wall plate: 33.40 g (1.178 oz)
Installation Connection to USB host port on RP controller or automation server

Indoor use only
Installation options Enclosure exterior

Drop ceiling with mounting cradle (optional)
Wall with wall plate (optional)
Maximum USB 2.0 cable length 3 m (10 ft)

1028
26 Zigbee Adapter
Hardware
CPU type ARM Cortex-M4 with Floating Point Unit (FPU)
Frequency 38.4 MHz
Connectors USB 2.0, type-A connector

1029
26 Zigbee Adapter
26.2 Supported Wireless Devices

This section provides information on the wireless devices that are supported by
the wireless network.
In EcoStruxure Building Operation software version 4.0 and later, additional
Zigbee 3.0 wireless devices can be supported using the Zigbee Wireless Device
Support Service. For information on how support for Zigbee 3.0 devices can be
added in the EcoStruxure Building Operation software through this service, see
PA-00842.
SpaceLogic SE8000 and VT8000 controllers

The SE8000 and VT8000 controllers can be used for fan coil, roof top unit, heat
pump, indoor air quality, and VAV control applications.
The SE8000 and VT8000 controllers without built-in wireless networking
capability require the VCM8000V5045P Zigbee extended profile wireless
communication adapter to be installed to enable Zigbee wireless connectivity.
Support for SE8000 and VT8000 controllers under the RP controller Zigbee
wireless network is limited to display and sensor functionality. Under the RP
controller Zigbee network, they are not supported as HVAC controllers.
The following conditions apply to the support of SE8000 and VT8000 controllers
under an automation server Zigbee wireless network:
• In EcoStruxure Building Operation software version 3.3, when you connect
an SE8000 or VT8000 controller via Zigbee wireless network to the
automation server, you are not able to connect Zigbee devices to the
SE8000 or VT8000 controller. If you already have Zigbee devices connected
to the SE8000 or VT8000 controllers in the Zigbee network, you must either
re-connect them to the automation server or upgrade to EcoStruxure
Building Operation software version 4.0.
• When you connect SE8000 and VT8000 controllers via Zigbee wireless
network to the automation server, you are not able to use multiple SE8000 or
VT8000 controllers as sensors to control a single setpoint in a single zone.
The following conditions apply to the support of SE8000 and VT8000 controllers
under an RP controller Zigbee wireless network:
• In EcoStruxure Building Operation software version 3.3 and version 4.0,
when you connect an SE8000 or VT8000 controller via Zigbee wireless
network to the RP controller, you are not able to connect Zigbee devices to
the SE8000 or VT8000 controller. If you already have Zigbee devices
connected to the SE8000 or VT8000 controllers in the Zigbee network, you
must re-connect them to the RP controller.
• Support for SE8000 and VT8000 controllers under the RP controller Zigbee
wireless network is limited to display and sensor functionality. Under the RP
controller Zigbee network, they are not supported as HVAC controllers.
• When you connect SE8000 and VT8000 controllers via Zigbee wireless
network to the RP controller, you are not able to use multiple SE8000 or
VT8000 controllers as sensors to control a single setpoint in a single zone.
Product Part number
Low-Voltage Fan Coil Room & Zone Controller, RH SE8350U0Bxxa

sensor & control

1030
26 Zigbee Adapter
Continued
Product Part number
Low-Voltage Fan Coil Room & Zone Controller, RH SE8350U5Bxxa

sensor & control, PIR motion sensor
Low-Voltage Fan Coil Room & Zone Controller, ZigBee SE8350U5BxxPa

Embedded, RH sensor, PIR motion sensor
Roof Top Unit, Heat Pump & Indoor Air Quality SE8650U0Bxxa
Controller, RH sensor & control
Roof Top Unit, Heat Pump & Indoor Air Quality SE8650U5Bxxa
Controller, RH sensor & control, PIR motion sensor
Roof Top Unit, Heat Pump & Indoor Air Quality SE8650U5BxxPa
Controller, ZigBee Embedded, RH sensor & control,
PIR motion sensor
Line-Voltage Fan Coil Room Controller, RH sensor & SER8350A0Bxxa

control
Line-Voltage Fan Coil Room Controller, RH sensor & SER8350A5Bxxa

control, PIR motion sensor
Line-Voltage Fan Coil Room Controller, ZigBee SER8350A5BxxPa

Embedded, RH sensor & control, PIR motion sensor
Variable Air Volume Controller, PD/PI, RH sensor & SEZ8250U0Bxxa

control
Variable Air Volume Controller, PD/PI, RH sensor & SEZ8250U5Bxxa

control, PIR motion sensor
Variable Air Volume Controller, PD/PI, Embedded SEZ8250U5BxxPa

ZigBee Pro, RH sensor & control, PIR motion sensor
Low-Voltage Fan Coil Room Controller, White Case, VT8350U5x00Bb

White Fascia
Low-Voltage Fan Coil Room Controller, Embedded VT8350U5500BP

ZigBee Pro, RH sensor & control, PIR motion sensor,
White Case, White Fascia
Roof Top Unit, Heat Pump & Indoor Air Quality VT8650U5x00Bb
Controller, White Case, White Fascia
Roof Top Unit, Heat Pump & Indoor Air Quality VT8650U5500BP
Controller, Embedded ZigBee Pro, RH sensor & control,
PIR Motion Sensor, White Case, White Fascia
Fan Coil Room Controller, White Case, White Fascia VTR8350A5x00Bb
Fan Coil Room Controller, Embedded ZigBee Pro, RH VTR8350A5500BP

sensor & control, PIR Motion Sensor, White Case,
White Fascia
Variable Air Volume Controller, PD/PI, White Case, VZ8250U5x00Bb

White Fascia

1031
26 Zigbee Adapter
Continued
Product Part number
Variable Air Volume Controller, PD/PI, Embedded VZ8250U5500BP

ZigBee Pro, RH sensor & control, PIR motion sensor,
White Case, White Fascia
a) The two characters “xx” of the part number indicate the color of the case and fascia: 00 (Silver Case, Silver Fascia), 11 (White
Case, White Fascia)
b) The character “x” of the part number indicates the sensor type of the controller: 0 (RH sensor & control), 5 (RH sensor &
control, PIR motion sensor)
Wireless sensors
The wireless sensors can be used for indoor air quality, motion and occupancy,
window and door status, and water leakage monitoring.
Product Part number
CO2 with Temperature and Humidity Sensor SED-CO2-G-5045
Temperature and Humidity Sensor SED-TRH-G-5045
Window/Door Contact Sensor SED-WDC-G-5045
Motion with Temperature and Humidity Sensor SED-MTH-G-5045
Water Leak Sensor SED-WLS-G-5045
SpaceLogic RP controller expansion Zigbee modules

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules can be used for lighting control
applications.
Product Part number
RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V, Zigbee 0-10V module (230 VAC) SXWREZB010110001
RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI, Zigbee DALI module (230 VAC) SXWREZBDALI110001
SpaceLogic TH900 Series thermostats

The TH900 Series thermostats can be used for packaged terminal air conditioner
(PTAC), fan coil, heat pump, and gas and oil furnace control applications. The
TH900 Series thermostats are only supported for the automation servers.
Product Part number
TH903 Thermostat, LCD/Buttons, Zigbee, Occupancy TH903-ZP-W

Sensor, Auxiliary Input, White
TH903 Thermostat, LCD/Buttons, Zigbee, Occupancy TH903-ZPM-W

Sensor, Modbus, Auxiliary Input, White
TH907 Thermostat, Touchscreen, Zigbee, Occupancy TH907-ZP-W

Sensor, Auxiliary Input, White

1032
26 Zigbee Adapter
Continued
Product Part number
TH907 Thermostat, Touchscreen, Zigbee, Occupancy TH907-ZPM-W

Sensor, Modbus, Auxiliary Input, White
TH907 Thermostat, Touchscreen, Zigbee, Occupancy TH907-ZP-Ba

Sensor, Auxiliary Input, Black
TH907 Thermostat, Touchscreen, Zigbee, Occupancy TH907-ZPM-Ba

Sensor, Modbus, Auxiliary Input, Black
a) This model is manufactured on a custom basis only.
PowerLogic™ PowerTag energy sensors

The PowerTag energy sensors can be used for energy metering and monitoring,
load monitoring and power availability for products and installations rated up to
2000 A.
Product Part number
PowerTag Energy M63 1P+Wire A9MEM1520
PowerTag Energy M63 1P+N TOP A9MEM1521
PowerTag Energy M63 1P+N BOTTOM A9MEM1522
PowerTag Energy M63 3P A9MEM1540
PowerTag Energy M63 3P+N TOP A9MEM1541
PowerTag Energy M63 3P+N BOTTOM A9MEM1542
PowerTag Energy M63 3P 230V LL A9MEM1543
PowerTag Energy P63 1P+N TOP A9MEM1561
PowerTag Energy P63 1P+N BOTTOM RCBO 18mm A9MEM1562
Powertag Energy P63 1P+N BOTTOM A9MEM1563
PowerTag Energy P63 3P+N TOP A9MEM1571
PowerTag Energy P63 3P+N BOTTOM A9MEM1572
PowerTag Energy F63 1P+N A9MEM1560
PowerTag Energy F63 1P+N 110V LL A9MEM1564
PowerTag Energy F63 3P+N A9MEM1570
PowerTag Energy F63 3P A9MEM1573
Powertag Energy F63 3P+N 127V/220V A9MEM1574
PowerTag Energy F160 3P/3P+N A9MEM1580
PowerTag Energy M250 3P LV434020

1033
26 Zigbee Adapter
Continued
Product Part number
PowerTag Energy M250 3P+N LV434021
PowerTag Energy M630 3P LV434022
PowerTag Energy M630 3P+N LV434023
PowerTag Energy R200 3P/3P+N A9MEM1590
Easergy wireless sensors

The Easergy wireless sensors can be used for environmental condition
monitoring for enclosures and continuous thermal monitoring of critical power
connections of indoor installations.
Product Part number
Easergy CL110 Wireless Environmental Sensor EMS59443a
Easergy TH110 Wireless Thermal Sensor EMS59440b
a) Set of two pieces.

b) Set of three pieces.
Wiser micro module switches and dimmers

The Wiser micro module switches and dimmers can be used for lighting control
applications.
Product Part number
Wiser 1 Gang Micro Module Switch CCT5011-0001_AS
Wiser Micro Module Light Switch CCT5011-0002
Wiser 1 Gang Micro Module Dimmer CCT5010-0001_AS
Wiser Micro Module Dimmer CCT5010-0002
ASSA ABLOY electronic locks

The ASSA ABLOY electronic locks can be used for hotel applications with
electronic door locks.
Product Part number
Electronic Locks - VingCard Allure See the ASSA ABLOY web site

1034
26 Zigbee Adapter
Continued
Product Part number
Electronic Locks - VingCard Essence See the ASSA ABLOY web site
Electronic Locks - VingCard Signature See the ASSA ABLOY web site
Electronic Locks - VingCard Classic See the ASSA ABLOY web site
Electronic Locks - VingCard Flex See the ASSA ABLOY web site

1035
26 Zigbee Adapter
26.3 Installing Zigbee Adapter on an Enclosure Exterior
26.3 Installing Zigbee Adapter on an

Enclosure Exterior
You install Zigbee Adapter on the exterior of a metal enclosure and connect the
adapter to an RP-C controller, AS-P server, or AS-B server to add Zigbee
wireless connectivity to the controller or server.
To install Zigbee Adapter on an enclosure exterior

1. Refer to the dimensional drawings before installing the Zigbee Adapter.

3. Find a suitable location on the enclosure for mounting the Zigbee Adapter.

1036
26 Zigbee Adapter
4. Make a hole to mount and fasten the cradle using one of the following
methods:
• Create a 32 mm (1.250 inches) diameter mounting hole in the front
panel of the metal enclosure.
• Remove a pre-punched knockout, a punched out, removable disc on
the sides of the metal enclosure.
TIP: You can use a metal hole punch to create the hole in the front
panel.
TIP: You can use a screwdriver and hammer to break out the knockout,
then twist off the knockout with pliers.

1037
26 Zigbee Adapter
5. Mount the cradle and fasten it using the thumb nut.
6. Install the Zigbee Adapter in the cradle.

1038
26 Zigbee Adapter
7. Connect the USB extension cable to the Zigbee Adapter.
IMPORTANT: Use one of the following USB cables ordered from

Schneider Electric:
• USB extension cable of length 1 m (3 ft) (part number
SXWUSBCBL10001)
• Plenum rated USB extension cable of length 3 m (10 ft) (part number
SXWUSBCBL10002)
8. Connect the USB extension cable to the USB host port on the RP-C
controller or server.
You can now use the Zigbee Adapter.

1039
26 Zigbee Adapter
26.4 Installing Zigbee Adapter in a Dropped Ceiling
26.4 Installing Zigbee Adapter in a Dropped

Ceiling
You install Zigbee Adapter in a dropped ceiling and connect the adapter to an
RP-C controller, AS-P server, or AS-B server to add Zigbee wireless connectivity
to the controller or server.
To install Zigbee Adapter in a dropped ceiling


3. Find a suitable location on the ceiling for mounting the Zigbee Adapter.
4. Mark the place where the hole should be in the ceiling tile.
5. Remove the ceiling tile.


1040
26 Zigbee Adapter
6. Create a 32 mm (1.250 inches) diameter mounting hole in the ceiling tile.
TIP: Use a hole saw or ceiling tile hole cutter to create the hole in the
ceiling tile.

1041
26 Zigbee Adapter
IMPORTANT: Use the following USB cable ordered from Schneider

Electric:
SXWUSBCBL10002)
controller or automation server.
11. Reinstall the ceiling tile.


1042
26 Zigbee Adapter
26.5 Installing Zigbee Adapter on a Wall

You install Zigbee Adapter on a wall using the mounting cradle and wall plate and
connect the adapter to an RP-C controller, AS-P server, or AS-B server to add
Zigbee wireless connectivity to the controller or server.
To install Zigbee Adapter on a wall


3. Find a suitable location on the wall for mounting the Zigbee Adapter.

1043
26 Zigbee Adapter
4. Hold the wall plate against the wall and mark the place where the two drill
holes should be on the wall.
5. Fasten the wall plate on the wall using two number 6 or M3.5 (3.5 mm) pan
head self-tapping screws and wall anchors (optional).
NOTE: The screws and wall anchors are not included.

1044
26 Zigbee Adapter

1045
26 Zigbee Adapter
IMPORTANT: Use one of the following USB cables ordered from

Schneider Electric:
• USB extension cable of length 1 m (3 ft) (part number
SXWUSBCBL10001)
SXWUSBCBL10002)
controller or automation server.

1046
26 Zigbee Adapter
26.6 Zigbee Adapter Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
26.6 Zigbee Adapter Regulatory Compliance

and Approvals
This section provides information on regulatory compliance and approvals for
Zigbee Adapter.

The Zigbee Adapter bears the CE mark and complies with the following EU
directives:

The Zigbee Adapter bears the UKCA mark and complies with the following UK
directives:

For the Zigbee Adapter (FCC ID: QOQ13), the following statements apply.

1047
26 Zigbee Adapter
26.6 Zigbee Adapter Regulatory Compliance and Approvals
This device, and the antenna used with the device, must be professionaly
authorized (see list below).

number)

For the Zigbee Adapter (ISED certification number: 5123A-13), the following
statements apply.
(NMB-3).
This radio transmitter (5123A-13) has been approved by Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below,
with the maximum permissible gain indicated.
Le présent émetteur radio (5123A-13) a été approuvé par Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne
énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal.

number)

1048
27 AD v1
Topics
AD v1
AD v1 Communication and Power
Installing the AD v1 Base on a Cabinet
Installing the AD v1 Base on a Wall
Installing the AD v1 Tablet and Frame
Connecting Advanced Display to a Power Adapter
Connecting an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B
server
27 AD v1
27.1 AD v1
27.1 AD v1
AD v1 provides a Human Machine Interface (HMI) for local access to the
EcoStruxure BMS servers.
AD v1 is based on an Android platform with a high-resolution touchscreen
display. The display size is 10 inches.
Figure: AD v1
27.1.1 Stationary HMI Terminal

AD v1 is intended to be used as a stationary HMI terminal. For example, AD v1
can be installed on a control cabinet in a plant room or it can be installed on a
wall in a hospital.
27.1.2 Kiosk Mode

AD v1 is preinstalled with SmartXKiosk, which allows you to lock AD v1 into Kiosk
mode to prevent users from accessing other apps than the one you have
downloaded and selected. For more information, see the SmartXKiosk Overview
topic on WebHelp.
27.1.3 AD v1 Bundle
AD v1 is delivered in a bundle, which contains a protective frame. When
assembled, the frame protects against dust, moisture, and mechanical damage.
The USB cable is ordered separately from Schneider Electric.
NOTE: The frame and its base do not provide protection against theft.

1051
27 AD v1
27.1 AD v1
27.1.4 Installation Options

The protective frame has a base, which is equipped with hole mount patterns to
support a variety of installation options. For example, AD v1 can be installed on a
control cabinet, on a wall, or on a VESA stand that fits devices with a 100 x 100
mm (3.94 x 3.94 in.) hole pattern.
27.1.5 AD v1 Communication and Power

AD v1 can use either a wired (USB) connection or a wireless (WiFi) connection to
communicate with EcoStruxure BMS servers. AD v1 can be powered either by a
AS-P server, AS-B server, or USB power adapter.
For more information, see section 27.2 “AD v1 Communication and Power” on
page 1054.
27.1.6 Preinstalled Apps

AD v1 is delivered with the following set of preinstalled apps:
• SmartXKiosk for locking AD v1 into Kiosk mode
• AD-Link for enabling IP over USB communication
For more information, see the SmartX AD-Link Overview topic on WebHelp.
• Technician Tool for operation and maintenance of EcoStruxure BMS servers
For more information, see the Technician Tool Overview topic on WebHelp.
Electrical
DC input current consumption 500 mA to 1.3 A
DC input supply voltage 5 VDC (USB)
Environment
Material
Enclosure UV stable ABS
Mechanical
Dimensions (W x H x D) 266 x 203 x 19 mm (10.5 x 8.0 x 0.75 in.)

1052
27 AD v1
27.1 AD v1
Weight 0.656 kg (1.446 lb)
Communications
USB 1 USB 2.0 port
WiFi 802.11 a/b/g/n 2.4 + 5 GHz
CPU
Frequency 1.2 GHz
Type Quad-core
Internal memory 1.5 GB RAM, 16 GB ROM
Operating system
Supported versions Android 4.4 to 4.4.4 (KitKat)

Android 4.4W to 4.4W.2 (KitKat)
Android 5.0 to 5.1 (Lollipop)
Display
Display size 10.1 inches (256 mm)
Display type TFT LCD, touchscreen

1053
27 AD v1
27.2 AD v1 Communication and Power

AD v1 can use either a wired (USB) connection or a wireless (WiFi) connection to
communicate with EcoStruxure BMS servers. AD v1 can be powered either by a
AS-P server, AS-B server, or USB power adapter.
27.2.1 Communication over a USB Connection

The preinstalled AD-Link application enables AD v1 to communicate with
EcoStruxure BMS servers over a USB connection.
When AD v1 is connected to a AS-P server or AS-B server, AD v1 can be
powered by the automation server through the USB cable. The screen must not
be turned on constantly because this may drain the battery.
NOTICE
LOSS OF DATA OR POWER
• Use only USB cables ordered from Schneider Electric.
• Use only USB cables that are designed for AD.
• Do not use USB cables that exceed 3 m (10 ft).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data or power.
Figure: USB connection to a AS-P server or AS-B server
27.2.2 Communication over a Wireless Connection

AD v1 can communicate with EcoStruxure BMS servers through a wireless
access point (AP), which is connected to the same network as the EcoStruxure
BMS servers. When used as a stationary HMI terminal, AD v1 is connected to a
USB power adapter to ensure that its battery is charged.
WARNING
HAZARD OF EXPLOSION OR DEVICE DAMAGE
Use only Samsung-approved power adapters.
equipment damage.

1054
27 AD v1
Figure: Wireless communication and power from a USB power adapter

1055
27 AD v1
27.3 Installing the AD v1 Base on a Cabinet

You install the AD v1 protective frame with its base on a control cabinet to use
AD v1 for locally accessing the automation servers. You attach the base on the
cabinet using the dedicated holes in the base.
To install the AD v1 base on a cabinet

1. Hold the base in place against the cabinet.
2. Mark the place where the center hole (cable insertion hole) should be on the
cabinet.
3. Remove the base.
4. Create a 22 mm (0.87 in.) diameter hole in the cabinet.
TIP: Use a metal hole punch to create the hole in the cabinet.
5. Fit the cable grommet into the center hole in the base.
6. Turn the cable grommet counterclockwise until it snaps into place in the
base.
7. Put the base on the cabinet with the cable grommet inserted through the
center hole in the cabinet.
8. Thread the nut onto the cable grommet.
9. Level the base.
10. Mark the place where the four drill holes (for attachment of the base) should
be on the cabinet.
NOTE: Use the holes in the corners of the base to mark the place
where the drill holes should be.
11. Remove the nut.
12. Remove the base.
13. Drill four holes in the cabinet.
14. Put the base on the cabinet and fasten the base using four screws.

1056
27 AD v1
15. Thread the nut onto the cable grommet and then tighten the nut.
You can now continue by installing the tablet in the frame.

1057
27 AD v1
27.4 Installing the AD v1 Base on a Wall

You install the AD v1 protective frame with its base on a wall to use AD v1 for
accessing the automation servers. You attach the base on the wall and to the
electrical box using the dedicated holes and hole patterns in the base.
To install the AD v1 base on a wall

1. Hold the base against the wall and adjust its position so that the hole pattern
around the center hole of the base fits the hole pattern of the electrical box.
2. Mark the place where the four drill holes should be on the wall.
3. Drill the four holes in the wall for attachment of the base on the wall.
4. Fasten the base to the electrical box.
5. Fasten the base on the wall using four screws.
You can now continue by installing the tablet in the frame.

1058
27 AD v1
27.5 Installing the AD v1 Tablet and Frame

You install the AD v1 tablet and the frame on the base to install AD v1 on a
control cabinet or a wall and to provide the tablet with a protective frame.
To install the AD v1 tablet and frame

1. Insert the USB cable into the tablet's charger/accessory port.
NOTICE
2. Tilt the tablet and fit the top of the tablet to the ribs inside the frame.
3. Push the tablet into place inside the frame.
4. Fit the mounting brackets and the pan head screws (M4 x 0.7 x 8 mm) to the
screw inserts inside the frame and tighten the screws.
5. Thread the USB cable through the center hole (cable grommet) in the base
and through the hole in the cabinet.

1059
27 AD v1
6. Fit the ribs inside the top of the frame to the base and hook the frame
assembly onto the base.
7. Push the frame assembly onto the base.
8. Fit the security screws (M4 x 0.7 x 10 mm) to the screw inserts at the bottom
of the frame assembly and tighten the screws using a T20 Security TORX
screwdriver or bit.
You can now make the required connections for power supply and
communication with the automation servers.

1060
27 AD v1
27.6 Connecting Advanced Display to a Power Adapter
27.6 Connecting Advanced Display to a

Power Adapter
You connect Advanced Display to a USB power adapter in order to supply
Advanced Display with power and to ensure that its battery is charged.
page 1068.
WARNING
equipment damage.
To connect Advanced Display to a power adapter

1. Insert the USB cable from Advanced Display into the power adapter.
2. Plug the power adapter into the standard AC power outlet.
You can now turn on Advanced Display.

1061
27 AD v1
27.7 Connecting an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B server
27.7 Connecting an Advanced Display to an

AS-P server or AS-B server
You connect an Advanced Display to a AS-P server or AS-B server in order to
communicate with EcoStruxure BMS servers over a USB connection, to supply
the Advanced Display with power, and to ensure that its battery is charged.
page 1068.
To connect an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B

server
1. Insert the USB cable from the Advanced Display into the USB host port on
the AS-P server or AS-B server.
NOTICE
Connect only one Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B server.
The USB host port can supply only one Advanced Display with power.
Connecting several Advanced Displays to an AS-P server or AS-B server
can cause the Advanced Displays to lose performance, shut down, or
discharge their batteries.
2. If an Attention message “Unable to find software on your computer that can

recognize your device...” appears on the Advanced Display, ignore the
message and tap OK.
3. Ensure that the screen timeout is configured to automatically turn off the
screen when you are not using the device, because the sleep mode is used
to fully charge the battery.

1062
28 AD v2
Topics
AD v2
Installing the AD v2 Base on a Cabinet
Installing the AD v2 Base on a Wall
Installing the AD v2 Tablet and Frame
Connecting Advanced Display to a Power Adapter
Connecting an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B
server
28 AD v2
28.1 AD v2
28.1 AD v2
AD v2 is the successor to AD v1, and offers several improvements such as
higher display resolution, enhanced processor performance, and increased
memory size. Like AD v1, AD v2 provides a Human Machine Interface (HMI) for
local access to the EcoStruxure BMS servers.
display. The display size is 10.1 inches.
Figure: AD v2
28.1.1 AD v2
can be installed on a control cabinet in a plant room.
28.1.2 Kiosk Mode

AD v2 is preinstalled with SmartXKiosk, which allows you to lock AD v2 into Kiosk
mode to prevent users from accessing other apps than the one you have
selected. For more information, see the SmartXKiosk Overview topic on
WebHelp.
28.1.3 AD v2 Bundle
AD v2 is delivered in a bundle, which contains a protective frame. When
assembled, the frame protects against dust, moisture, and mechanical damage.
The USB cable is ordered separately from Schneider Electric.

1065
28 AD v2
28.1 AD v2
28.1.4 Installation Options

The protective frame has a base, which is equipped with hole mount patterns to
support a variety of installation options. For example, AD v2 can be installed on a
control cabinet, on a wall, or on a VESA stand that fits devices with a 100 x 100
mm (3.94 x 3.94 in.) hole pattern.

AD v2 uses a wired (USB) connection to communicate with EcoStruxure BMS
servers. During installation and commissioning, you can use a wireless access
point to establish communication between AD v2 and EcoStruxure BMS servers.
AD v2 can be powered either by a AS-P server, AS-B server, or USB power
adapter.
page 1068.
28.1.6 Preinstalled Software

AD v2 is delivered with the following preinstalled software:
• SmartXKiosk for locking AD v2 into Kiosk mode
For more information, see the SmartXKiosk Overview topic on WebHelp.
• AD-Link for enabling IP over USB communication
For more information, see the SmartX AD-Link Overview topic on WebHelp.
Electrical
DC input current consumption 500 mA to 1.3 A
DC input supply voltage 5 VDC (USB)
Environment
Ambient temperature, storage -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Material
Enclosure UV stable ABS

1066
28 AD v2
28.1 AD v2
Mechanical
Weight 0.743 kg (1.638 lb)
Communications
USB 1 USB 2.0 port
WiFi 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac 2.4 + 5 GHz, VHT80
CPU
Frequency 1.6 GHz
Type Octa-core (8-core)
Internal memory 2 GB RAM, 32 GB ROM
Operating system
Supported versions Android 8.1 (Oreo)
Display
Display resolution 1,920 x 1,200 pixels
Display aspect ratio 16:10

1067
28 AD v2

AD v2 uses a wired (USB) connection to communicate with EcoStruxure BMS
servers. During installation and commissioning, you can use a wireless access
point to establish communication between AD v2 and EcoStruxure BMS servers.
AD v2 can be powered either by a AS-P server, AS-B server, or USB power
adapter.
28.2.1 Communication over a USB Connection

The preinstalled AD-Link application enables AD v2 to communicate with
EcoStruxure BMS servers over a USB connection.
When AD v2 is connected to a AS-P server or AS-B server, AD v2 can be
powered by the automation server through the USB cable. The screen must not
be turned on constantly because this may drain the battery.
NOTICE
Figure: USB connection to a AS-P server or AS-B server

1068
28 AD v2

You install the AD v2 protective frame with its base on a control cabinet to use
AD v2 for locally accessing the automation servers. You attach the base on the
cabinet using the dedicated holes in the base.
To install the AD v2 base on a cabinet

1. Hold the base in place against the cabinet.
2. Mark the place where the center hole (cable insertion hole) should be on the
cabinet.
3. Remove the base.
4. Create a 22 mm (0.87 in.) diameter hole in the cabinet.
TIP: Use a metal hole punch to create the hole in the cabinet.
5. Fit the cable grommet into the center hole in the base.
6. Turn the cable grommet counterclockwise until it snaps into place in the
base.
7. Put the base on the cabinet with the cable grommet inserted through the
8. Thread the nut onto the cable grommet.
9. Level the base.
10. Mark the place where the four drill holes (for attachment of the base) should
be on the cabinet.
11. Remove the nut.
12. Remove the base.
13. Drill four holes in the cabinet.
14. Put the base on the cabinet and fasten the base using four screws.

1069
28 AD v2
15. Thread the nut onto the cable grommet and then tighten the nut.
You can now continue by installing the tablet in the base.

1070
28 AD v2

You install the AD v2 protective frame with its base on a wall to use AD v2 for
accessing the automation servers. You attach the base on the wall and to the
electrical box using the dedicated holes and hole patterns in the base.
To install the AD v2 base on a wall

1. Hold the base against the wall and adjust its position so that the hole pattern
around the center hole of the base fits the hole pattern of the electrical box.
2. Mark the place where the four drill holes should be on the wall.
3. Drill the four holes in the wall for attachment of the base on the wall.
4. Fasten the base to the electrical box.
5. Fasten the base on the wall using four screws.
You can now continue by installing the tablet in the base.

1071
28 AD v2

You install the AD v2 tablet and the frame on the base to install AD v2 on a
control cabinet or a wall and to provide the tablet with a protective frame.
To install the AD v2 tablet and frame

1. Thread the USB cable through the hole in the cabinet or wall and through
the center hole (cable grommet) in the base.
2. Route the cable from the center hole to the left side of the base.
3. Carefully insert the tablet into the base from above and then slide the tablet
completely into the base.

1072
28 AD v2
4. Insert the USB cable into the tablet's charger/accessory port.
NOTICE
5. Fit the ribs inside the top of the frame to the base and hook the frame onto
the base.
6. Push the frame onto the base.

1073
28 AD v2
7. Fit the security screws (M4 x 0.7 x 10 mm) to the screw inserts at the bottom
of the frame and tighten the screws using a T20 Security TORX screwdriver
or bit.

1074
28 AD v2
28.6 Connecting Advanced Display to a Power Adapter
28.6 Connecting Advanced Display to a

Power Adapter
You connect Advanced Display to a USB power adapter in order to supply
Advanced Display with power and to ensure that its battery is charged.
page 1068.
WARNING
equipment damage.
To connect Advanced Display to a power adapter

1. Insert the USB cable from Advanced Display into the power adapter.
2. Plug the power adapter into the standard AC power outlet.
You can now turn on Advanced Display.

1075
28 AD v2
28.7 Connecting an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B server
28.7 Connecting an Advanced Display to an

AS-P server or AS-B server
You connect an Advanced Display to a AS-P server or AS-B server in order to
communicate with EcoStruxure BMS servers over a USB connection, to supply
the Advanced Display with power, and to ensure that its battery is charged.
page 1068.
To connect an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B

server
1. Insert the USB cable from the Advanced Display into the USB host port on
the AS-P server or AS-B server.
NOTICE
Connect only one Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B server.
The USB host port can supply only one Advanced Display with power.
Connecting several Advanced Displays to an AS-P server or AS-B server
can cause the Advanced Displays to lose performance, shut down, or
discharge their batteries.
2. If an Attention message “Unable to find software on your computer that can

recognize your device...” appears on the Advanced Display, ignore the
message and tap OK.
3. Ensure that the screen timeout is configured to automatically turn off the
screen when you are not using the device, because the sleep mode is used
to fully charge the battery.

1076
29 AD v3
Topics
AD v3
AD v3 Safety Information
AD v3 Installation
Installing AD v3 on a Cabinet
Connecting AD v3 to an Automation Server and a 24 VDC
Power Supply
AD v3 Power Button
Performing a Recovery (Factory Reset) of AD v3
AD v3 Regulatory and Agency Compliance and Approvals
29 AD v3
29.1 AD v3
29.1 AD v3
Advanced Display v3 (AD v3) is the successor to AD v2. AD v3 provides an
industrial grade Human Machine Interface (HMI), with battery-free power supply,
for local access to the EcoStruxure BMS servers.
display. The display size is 10.1 inches.
Figure: AD v3

can be installed on a control cabinet in a plant room. AD v3 has an IP54 rated
frame that helps protect against dust and moisture.
29.1.1 Kiosk Mode

AD v3 is preinstalled with HMI Kiosk, which allows you to lock AD v3 into Kiosk
mode to help prevent users from accessing other apps than the one you have
downloaded and selected. For more information, see the HMI Kiosk Overview
topic on WebHelp.
29.1.2 AD v3 Bundle
AD v3 is delivered in a bundle, which includes a paper template to help making
the required holes in a control cabinet and an earth ground screw with washer
(M4 x 10 mm Phillips pan head machine screw with external tooth washer)
intended for the grounding of the device. The cable is ordered separately from
Schneider Electric.

1079
29 AD v3
29.1 AD v3
29.1.3 AD v3 Safety Information

This section provides safety information specific to AD v3. Carefully read the
instructions before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain the equipment.
For more information, see section 29.2 “AD v3 Safety Information” on page 1083.
29.1.4 AD v3 Installation
AD v3 is installed on a control cabinet using a 22 mm (0.87 inch) cable fitting
(gland) and a nut. AD v3 is delivered with the cable fitting integrated on the back
cover. The position of AD v3 on the cabinet is fixed by the earth ground screw
and the nut fastens the device to the cabinet.
For more information, see section 29.3 “AD v3 Installation” on page 1085.

AD v3 uses a wired (USB) connection to communicate with automation servers
and the device must be powered by a 24 VDC power supply.
page 1090.
29.1.6 Preinstalled Software

AD v3 is delivered with the following preinstalled software:
• HMI Kiosk for locking AD v3 into Kiosk mode
For more information, see the HMI Kiosk Overview topic on WebHelp.
• USBnet driver for enabling IP over USB communication
29.1.7 AD v3 Power Button

AD v3 has a power button that is used to power on the device, to turn off or
reboot the device, and to perform other actions.
For more information, see section 29.7 “AD v3 Power Button” on page 1092.
29.1.8 AD v3 Regulatory Compliance and

Approvals
This section provides information on regulatory and agency compliance and
approvals for the Advanced Display v3 (AD v3).
For more information, see section 29.9 “AD v3 Regulatory and Agency

1080
29 AD v3
29.1 AD v3
DC input
24 VDC input
AD v3 can be powered by a 24 VDC power supply connected to the USB-C connector using the Y-
shaped cable (SXWADUSBC10002 or SXWADUSBC10003). The Y-shaped cable is used for power
supply and data communication.
Typical example of 24 VDC power supply ABLM1A24012 (Schneider Electric)
Maximum power consumption 17.3 W (0.72 A at 24 VDC)
20 VDC or 15 VDC input (per USB Power Delivery specification)
AD v3 can be powered by a USB-C power supply providing 20 VDC (1 A) or 15 VDC (1.5 A). For
information on the use of 15 VDC or 20 VDC USB-C power supply to power AD v3, contact
Schneider Electric.
Nominal voltage 20 VDC (USB-C)

15 VDC (USB-C)
Operating voltage range +/-5 % (USB-C)
Recommended USB power supply ratings 20 VDC, 1 A (20 W)

15 VDC, 1.5 A (22.5 W)
Maximum power consumption 17.6 W (0.88 A at 20 VDC)

19.0 W (1.27 A at 15 VDC)
Environment
Ambient temperature, storage -20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Material
Enclosure PC/ABS
Mechanical
Dimensions (W x H x D) 258 x 195.6 x 25 mm (10.2 x 7.7 x 1.0 in.)

1081
29 AD v3
29.1 AD v3
Earth ground screw M4 x 10 mm Phillips pan head machine screw with external tooth washer
Weight (excluding nut) 0.933 kg (2.056 lb)
Installation On control cabineta

a) The installation requires a 22 mm (0.87 in.) diameter hole in the cabinet.
Communications
USB USB 2.0, 1 USB Type-C port
Hardware
DDR3 SDRAM 2 GB
eMMC memory 8 GB
Button Power button
Expansion slot M.2 2230 connector, key E, PCI Express interface
Operating system
Supported versions Android 8.1 (Oreo)
Display
LED lifetimea 12,000 hours

a) The LED lifetime is defined as the time when the LED continues to operate at the ambient
temperature 25 °C +/-2 °C (77 °F +/- 3.6 °F) until the brightness is reduced to 50% of its original
value.

1082
29 AD v3
29.2 AD v3 Safety Information

This section provides safety information specific to AD v3. Carefully read the
instructions before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain the equipment.
The AD v3 specific safety instructions below is used with the standard safety
information. For more information, see section 1.3 “Safety Information” on page
47.
• The power cord or plug is damaged.
may go below -20 °C (-4 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F). This could damage the
equipment. The equipment should be in a controlled environment.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
may go below -20 °C (-4 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
AD v3 contains a battery that provides power to the internal real-time clock

(RTC). There is a risk of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
AD v3 contient une pile qui alimente l’horloge en temps réel interne. Il y a un
risque d’explosion si la pile est remplacée incorrectement.
WARNING
• Replace the battery only with same or equivalent battery type recommended
by the manufacturer.
• Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
equipment damage.

1083
29 AD v3

1084
29 AD v3
29.3 AD v3 Installation
AD v3 is installed on a control cabinet using a 22 mm (0.87 inch) cable fitting
(gland) and a nut. AD v3 is delivered with the cable fitting integrated on the back
cover. The position of AD v3 on the cabinet is fixed by the earth ground screw
and the nut fastens the device to the cabinet.
AD v3 comes with a rubber gasket for IP 54 preinstalled on the back cover. The
rubber gasket is used to help prevent against dust and moisture from entering the
control cabinet through the 22 mm (0.87 inch) hole. The rubber gasket also helps
prevent the device from rotating when the nut is screwed onto the cable fitting.
Figure: AD v3 with cable fitting, rubber gasket, earth ground screw hole, and nut
AD v3 is delivered with a template to facilitate making a 22 mm (0.87 inch) hole

and a 4.5 mm (0.18 inch) hole for the earth ground screw on the cabinet.
When you have installed AD v3 on the control cabinet and fastened the device to
the cabinet using the nut, you adjust the position of the device and use the earth
ground screw to fix the position. You then connect the earth ground wire to the
screw. Finally, you connect the AD v3 cable to the female USB-C connector on
the cable fitting. The cable's angled connector helps prevent downward stress of
the cable.

1085
29 AD v3
Figure: AD v3 cable and earth ground wire connected to AD v3

1086
29 AD v3
29.4 Installing AD v3 on a Cabinet

You install AD v3 on a control cabinet to use AD v3 for locally accessing the
automation servers.
For more information, see section 29.3 “AD v3 Installation” on page 1085.
To install AD v3 on a cabinet
1. Use adhesive tape to attach the template onto the cabinet.
2. Mark the place where the center hole for the cable fitting and the hole for
earth ground screw should be on the cabinet.
3. Make a 22 mm (0.87 inch) diameter center hole in the cabinet.
You can use a metal hole punch to make the hole in the cabinet.
4. Make a 4.5 mm (0.18 inch) diameter hole for the earth ground screw in the
cabinet.
5. Put the device on the cabinet with the cable fitting inserted through the

1087
29 AD v3
6. Thread the nut onto the cable fitting and then loosely tighten the nut.
7. Adjust the position of the device so that the hole for the earth ground screw
on the device aligns with the corresponding hole in the cabinet.
8. Fit the earth ground wire and the earth ground screw (M4 x 10 mm Phillips
pan head machine screw with external tooth washer) to the hole in the
cabinet, tighten the screw so that the wire cannot be pulled loose, and then
tighten the nut.

1088
29 AD v3
9. Plug the AD v3 cable's angled male USB-C connector into the USB-C
female connector on the cable fitting.

1089
29 AD v3

AD v3 uses a wired (USB) connection to communicate with automation servers
and the device must be powered by a 24 VDC power supply.
AD v3 has a screw hole on the back cover and the device is delivered with a
screw and a washer (M4 x 10 mm Phillips pan head machine screw with external
tooth washer) for connection of an earth ground wire.
29.5.1 Communication over a Wired (USB)

Connection
The preinstalled USBnet driver enables AD v3 to communicate with automation
servers over a wired (USB) connection.
24 VDC power supply

AD v3 must be powered by a 24 VDC power supply. The Y-shaped cable
(SXWADUSBC10002 or SXWADUSBC10003) enables data communication and
power supply over a single cable. Only cables designed for AD v3 must be used.
The required cables can be ordered from Schneider Electric.
NOTICE
USB DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not use the Y-shaped cable to power any USB devices other than AD v3.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in USB device damage.
NOTICE
• Use only cables ordered from Schneider Electric.
• Use only cables that are designed for AD v3.
• Do not use cables that exceed 3 m (10 ft).
Figure: Wired (USB) connection to an automation server and power from a 24 VDC power
supply

1090
29 AD v3
29.6 Connecting AD v3 to an Automation Server and a 24 VDC Power Supply
29.6 Connecting AD v3 to an Automation

Server and a 24 VDC Power Supply
You connect AD v3 to an automation server in order to communicate with the
automation server over a wired (USB) connection. You connect AD v3 to a 24
VDC power supply in order to supply AD v3 with power. You use the Y-shaped
cable (SXWADUSBC10002 or SXWADUSBC10003) to connect AD v3 to both
the automation server and the power supply.
NOTICE
USB DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not use the Y-shaped cable to power any USB devices other than AD v3.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in USB device damage.
page 1090.
To connect AD v3 to an automation server and a 24 VDC power

supply
1. Insert the USB Type-A connector (male) of the Y-shaped cable from AD v3
into the USB host port (female) on the automation server.
2. Insert the 3-pin terminal block (female) of the Y-shaped cable into the
intended male connector on the 24 VDC power supply.
NOTE: The Y-shaped cables are delivered with a 3-pin mating (male)
connector.
Wire Color Function
Red Positive (+)
White Negative (-)
Black Ground (GND)
You can now turn on AD v3.

1091
29 AD v3
29.7 AD v3 Power Button

AD v3 has a power button that is used to power on the device, to turn off or
reboot the device, and to perform other actions.
The power button is located centrally, on the top of the device.
Figure: Power button
The action of the AD v3 power button depends on which mode the device is in
and how long the power button is pressed.
Table: Power Button Action

Mode Power Button Action
Device turned off Short press Device starts
Device turned off Long press (more than 10 Recovery (factory reset)
seconds)
On home screen Long press (more than 3 Dialog box to turn off or
seconds) reboot device
HMI Kiosk open Short or long press Message that the action is
blocked
App in Kiosk modea Short press (less than 3 Prompt to enter password to
seconds) exit app and return to HMI
Kiosk
Any other app openb Short press Exit app and return to home
screen
Any other app openb Long press (more than 3 Dialog box to turn off or
seconds) reboot device
Time out (sleep) Short press (less than 3 Wake up

seconds)
a) WebStation is typically the app running in Kiosk mode.

1092
29 AD v3
b) Any app not running in Kiosk mode.

1093
29 AD v3
29.8 Performing a Recovery (Factory Reset) of AD v3
29.8 Performing a Recovery (Factory Reset)

of AD v3
You perform a recovery (factory reset) of AD v3 to restore the device to factory
default settings.
For more information, see section 29.7 “AD v3 Power Button” on page 1092.
NOTE: The recovery (factory reset) will erase all user settings.
To perform a recovery (factory reset) of AD v3

1. Turn off the power to AD v3 and then turn on the power again.
2. Press the AD v3 power button for more than 10 seconds.
3. Tap anywhere on the screen to select and highlight RECOVERY.
NOTE: To cancel and reboot, tap again on the screen to select and
highlight REBOOT.
4. Tap and hold on the screen until the highlight color turns green, and then
release.

1094
29 AD v3
29.9 AD v3 Regulatory and Agency Compliance and Approvals
29.9 AD v3 Regulatory and Agency

approvals for the Advanced Display v3 (AD v3).

AD v3 bears the CE mark and complies with the following EU directives:
Compliance with these EU directives implies conformity to harmonized European
standards that are noted in the EU Declaration of Conformity. The EU
Declaration of Conformity can be accessed on the Schneider Electric Exchange
Extranet website, ecobuilding.schneider-electric.com

For AD v3, the following statements apply.
This equipment has been verified to comply with the limits for a class B
computing device, pursuant to FCC Rules. In order to maintain compliance with
FCC regulations, shielded cables must be used with this equipment. Operation

1095
29 AD v3
29.9 AD v3 Regulatory and Agency Compliance and Approvals
with non-approved equipment or unshielded cables is likely to result in

interference to radio and TV reception. The user is cautioned that changes and
modifications made to the equipment without the approval of manufacturer could
void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

For AD v3, the following statements apply.
of the Canadian Department of Communications.
sur le brouillage radioélectrique du ministère des Communications du Canada.
Canada ICES-003 (B) / NMB-003 (B)
29.9.4 UL
AD v3 is a UL Listed product for the United States and Canada.
AD v3 complies with the following UL standard:
• UL 60950-1 (2nd Edition, 2014-10-14)
Any changes or modifications to the product may invalidate the certificate.

1096
30 Operator Display
Topics
Operator Display
Operator Display Safety Information
Operator Display LED
Operator Display Communication Ports
Operator Display Hardening
Operator Display Installation
Installing Operator Display on a Panel
Connecting Operator Display to a 24 VDC Power Supply
Removing Operator Display
Replacing the Installation Gasket on Operator Display
Replacing the Battery on Operator Display
Operator Display Regulatory and Agency Compliance and
Approvals
30 Operator Display
30.1 Operator Display

SpaceLogic* Operator Display is a touch-screen Human Machine Interface (HMI)
for SpaceLogic controllers and servers, designed for local monitoring of building
controllers in small and medium-sized buildings, as well as in large buildings with
comprehensive building management systems. Operator Display is specifically
designed for equipment rooms and it simplifies operations, service, and
troubleshooting for System Integrators and Service Engineers, as well as for non-
technical users (notably Facility Managers and Janitors).
* Formerly known as SmartX.
The simplified user interface and the intuitive touch-screen navigation make it
easy to operate and maintain the system. Operator Display communicates
quickly over BACnet/IP open protocol with a direct connection to SpaceLogic MP
or RP controllers, IP-IO modules, AS-B or AS-P servers. Only one Operator
Display is required per cabinet in the equipment room, so there is no need for
more displays when a controller is added (up to seven controllers). The operator
can view and acknowledge alarms, edit schedules, and adjust setpoint
temperatures. Authorized operators can also view and override inputs, outputs,
and other virtual points.
Figure: HMIST6400SL
30.1.1 Operator Display Bundle

Operator Display is delivered in a bundle, which includes an installation gasket,
installation fasteners, screws, and a DC power supply connector. The USB
transfer cable is ordered separately from Schneider Electric.

1099
30 Operator Display
30.1.2 Operator Display Safety Information

This section provides safety information specific to Operator Display. Carefully
read the instructions before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain the
equipment.
For more information, see section 30.2 “Operator Display Safety Information” on
page 1104.
30.1.3 Operator Display LED

There is one LED on the front of Operator Display.
For more information, see section 30.3 “Operator Display LED” on page 1106.
30.1.4 Operator Display Communication Ports

Operator Display has a status LED, a battery slot, a hook, Ethernet ports, serial
interface ports, a power plug connector, and USB ports.
For more information, see section 30.4 “Operator Display Communication Ports”
on page 1107.
30.1.5 Operator Display Hardening

There are specific security hardening recommendations to follow when installing
Operator Display.
For more information, see section 30.5 “Operator Display Hardening” on page
1110.
30.1.6 Operator Display Installation

Operator Display is panel-mounted in equipment rooms using installation
fasteners.
For more information, see section 30.6 “Operator Display Installation” on page
1112.
30.1.7 Wiring

1100
30 Operator Display
30.1.8 Operator Display Regulatory Compliance

and Approvals
approvals for the SpaceLogic Operator Display.
For more information, see section 30.12 “Operator Display Regulatory and
Agency Compliance and Approvals” on page 1125.
DC input
Inrush current 30 A or less
Maximum power consumption 9W
Immunity to microbreaks 5 ms
Environment
Physical environment
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude 800 to 1,114 hPa (2,000 m (6,561 ft) or lower)
Mechanical environment
Vibration resistance IEC/BS/EN 61131-2 compliant

5 to 9 Hz Single amplitude 3.5 mm (0.14 in)
9 to 150 Hz Fixed acceleration: 9.8 m/s2
X, Y, Z directions for 10 cycles (approximately 100 minutes)
Shock resistance IEC/BS/EN 61131-2 compliant: 147 m/s2, X, Y, Z directions for 3 times
Electrical environment
Electrical fast transient/burst IEC/BS/EN 61000-4-4, 2 kV: Power port (display unit), 1 kV: Signal
ports
Electrostatic discharge immunity IEC/BS/EN 61000-4-2 Level 3, Contact discharge method: 6 kV, Air
discharge method: 8 kV

1101
30 Operator Display
Material
Enclosure Polycarbonate (PC)
Front Aluminum
Ingress protection rating IP 65 (front of product that is exposed, on panel-mounted installation)
NEMA rating NEMA 4 (front, indoor use)

NEMA 13 (front, in enclosure)
Mechanical

See drawing below:
Weight 0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
Installation Mounted to the panel using 4 screws (included), conforming to UL 61010-1, CSA C22.2
No 61010-1, UL 61010-2-201, CSA C22.2 No 61010-2-201 (1.6 to 5 mm (0.1 to 0.2 in) thick panel),
BS/EN 61131-2, and BS/EN 61000-6-2
Real-time clock
Power Battery (CR2032)
Accuracy +/- 20 ppm

1102
30 Operator Display
Communication ports
Ethernet Dual 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45)a

a) Only one port is used; the second one is inactive.
USB 1 USB 2.0 host port (type-A), 5 VDC, 2.5 W

1 USB 2.0 device port (micro-B)
RS-232C 1 COM1 (D-Sub, 9-pin, female) - Inactive
RS-485 1 COM2 (RJ45, female) - Inactive
Hardware
CPU type ARM Cortex-A8 single-core
Frequency 800 MHz
Device memory (NAND Flash) 1 GB (including 180 MB for user data)
Backup memory (MRAM) 512 KB
Status indicator LED (green, orange, and red)

Buzzer (not used)
Display
Display resolution 800 x 480 pixels (WVGA)
Display size 7 inches (178 mm)

Single touch analog resistive panel
Color 16 million colors
Display languages Czech, Danish, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish,
Portuguese, Russian, Slovak, Spanish, Swedish
Brightness control 400 cd/m2

16 levels
LED lifetimea 50,000 hours

a) The LED lifetime is defined as the time when the LED continues to operate at the ambient
temperature 25 °C +/-2 °C (77 °F +/- 3.6 °F) until the brightness is reduced to 25% of its original
value.

1103
30 Operator Display
30.2 Operator Display Safety Information

This section provides safety information specific to Operator Display. Carefully
read the instructions before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain the
equipment.
The Operator Display specific safety instructions below are used with the
standard safety information. For more information, see section 1.3 “Safety
Information” on page 47.
• The power cord or plug is damaged.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
• Do not leave this equipment in an environment where the storage
temperature may go below -20 °C (-4 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
• Ensure this product is not in permanent and direct contact with oils.
• Do not press on the display of this product with excessive force or with a hard
object.
• Do not press on the touch screen with a pointed object, such as the tip of a
mechanical pencil or a screwdriver.
Operator Display contains a battery that provides power to the internal real-time
clock (RTC). There is a risk of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Operator Display contient une pile qui alimente l’horloge en temps réel interne. Il
y a un risque d’explosion si la pile est remplacée incorrectement.
WARNING
• Replace the battery only with same or equivalent battery type recommended
by the manufacturer.
• Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
equipment damage.

1104
30 Operator Display

1105
30 Operator Display
30.3 Operator Display LED
30.3 Operator Display LED

Operator Display is equipped with an LED to communicate specific messages to
the user.
Figure: Operator Display LED
Table: LED Patterns

Orange, flashing Operator Display is starting up.
Green, constant (while running) There are no active alarms.
Red, flashing (while running) There is at least one active alarm that is not
acknowledged.
Red, constant (while running) There is at least one active alarm but all
alarms are acknowledged.

1106
30 Operator Display
30.4 Operator Display Communication Ports

Operator Display provides the following combination of communication ports:
• Two USB ports
• One RS-232C port
• One RS-485 port
WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE
• Make a direct connection between the functional ground (FG) terminal and
ground.
• Do not connect other devices to ground through the functional ground (FG)
terminal of this device.
• Install all cables according to local codes and requirements. If local codes do
not require grounding, follow a reliable guide such as the US National
Electrical Code, Article 800.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
• Do not put excessive stress on the communication ports of any connection.
• Securely attach communication cables to the panel wall or cabinet.
• Use a RJ45 connector that has a functional locking tab.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of communication or
equipment damage.
Table: Operator Display Communication Ports

Side Identification
Bottom A: Ethernet interface (ETH2) – Inactive

B: Ethernet interface (ETH1)
C: Serial interface (RJ-45, RS-485)
(COM2) – Inactive
D: Serial interface (RS-232C) (COM1) –
Inactive

1107
30 Operator Display
Continued
Side Identification
Rear E: USB (Type A) interface (USB1)

F: USB (micro-B) interface (USB2)
30.4.1 Ethernet Ports

The two Ethernet ports are labelled:
• ETH1
• ETH2
The two Ethernet ports are 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45) ports. They are used to
connect Operator Display to the BACnet/IP network. ETH1 is the only port used;
ETH2 is inactive.
NOTE: Use only the SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) circuit to connect the
Ethernet ports.
1177.
30.4.2 USB Ports

The two USB ports are of different types:
• USB host port (labelled USB-1)
• USB device port (labelled USB-2)
The USB host port is a USB 2.0 type-A port, which is rated 2.5 W. This port is
used to transfer data to and from Operator Display using a USB stick (FAT
formatted).
The USB device port is a USB 2.0 mini-B port. This port is used as a temporary
connection only during maintenance and setup of the device.
NOTE: Use only the SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) circuit to connect the
USB ports.
1177.

1108
30 Operator Display
30.4.3 RS-232C Port

The RS-232C port is a D-Sub 9-pin plug connector, and labelled as COM1. This
port is inactive on Operator Display.
30.4.4 RS-485 Port

The RS-485 port is an RJ45 port (modular jack), and labelled as COM2. This port
is inactive on Operator Display.

1109
30 Operator Display
30.5 Operator Display Hardening

There are specific security hardening recommendations to follow when installing
Operator Display.
30.5.1 Hardening Specifics

The Operator Display touch screen is used to authenticate users via user name
and password.
NOTICE
CONFIDENTIALITY
Do not install the device where password entry may be monitored by humans
or cameras.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data or unauthorized
system access.
30.5.2 Product Defense in Depth

Operator Display communicates via BACnet/IP over Ethernet cabling. BACnet
relies on the physical security of the Ethernet network. Ethernet cabling must not
be physically accessible to possible attackers. The rear of Operator Display
contains ports that must not be physically accessible to the public.
NOTICE
CONFIDENTIALITY
• Install the Ethernet cables inside wall cavities, or in conduit.
• Install Operator Display in a way that only authorized people can access the
rear of the device, for example, on a locked cabinet or using a secure wall
box.
system access.
30.5.3 System Defense in Depth

All system components that may be used to integrate Operator Display must be
secured.

1110
30 Operator Display
NOTICE
CONFIDENTIALITY
Install routers, switches, or hubs that may be needed for interconnection of
Operator Display to be accessible by authorized personnel only.
system access.

1111
30 Operator Display
30.6 Operator Display Installation

Operator Display is panel-mounted in equipment rooms using installation
fasteners.
Operator Display is designed for use on flat surfaces of IP 65F, Type 1, Type 4X
(indoor use only) and Type 13 enclosures.
Be aware of the following when building Operator Display into an end-user
product:
• The rear of Operator Display is not approved as an enclosure.
• When building Operator Display into an end-user product, use an enclosure
that satisfies standards as the end-user product’s overall enclosure.
• Install Operator Display in an enclosure with mechanical rigidity.
• Operator Display is not designed for outdoor use. UL certification obtained is
for indoor use only.
• Install and operate Operator Display with its front facing outward.
NOTE:
• The necessary torque is 0.5 Nm (4.4 lbf.in).
• IP 65F is not part of the UL certification.
30.6.1 Installation Requirements

Read the specific security hardening recommendations before installing Operator
Display. For more information, see section 30.5 “Operator Display Hardening” on
page 1110.
CAUTION
RISK OF BURNING INJURY
Do not touch the bezel or rear chassis during operation.
Before installing Operator Display, read the following list of installation

requirements:
• Check that the installation wall or cabinet surface is flat, in good condition
and has no jagged edges. Metal reinforcing strips may be attached to the
inside of the wall, near the panel-cut, to increase its rigidity.
• Decide on the thickness of the enclosure wall, based on the level of strength
required. Even if the installation wall thickness is within the recommended
range for the panel cut dimensions, depending on wall’s material, size, and
installation location of Operator Display and other devices, the installation
wall could warp. To help prevent warping, the installation surface may need
to be strengthened.
• Check that the ambient air temperature and the ambient humidity are within
their specified ranges in environmental specifications. When installing
Operator Display in a cabinet or enclosure, the ambient air temperature is
the cabinet’s or enclosure’s internal temperature. For more information, see
section 30.1.9 “” on page 1101.

1112
30 Operator Display
1. Internal temperature
2. External temperature
• Ensure that heat from surrounding equipment does not cause this product to
exceed its standard operating temperature.
• When installing this product in a slanted position, the product front should not
be inclined by more than 30 degrees.
• For easier maintenance, operation and improved ventilation, install this

product at least 100 mm (3.94 in) away from adjacent structures and other
equipment as shown in the following illustration:

1113
30 Operator Display
Pressure Differences
When applying and installing this product, it is important that steps are taken to
help eliminate any pressure difference between the inside and the outside of the
enclosure in which this product is mounted. Higher pressure inside the enclosure
can cause delamination of the front membrane of the display. Even a small
pressure difference inside the enclosure will act on the large area of the
membrane and can result in sufficient force to delaminate the membrane and
thus cause the failure of the touch capability. Pressure differences can often
occur in applications where there are multiple fans and ventilators moving air at
different rates in different rooms. Follow these techniques to help ensure that this
product's function is not affected by this misapplication:
• Seal all conduit connections inside of the enclosure, especially those that
lead to other rooms that may be at a different pressure.
• Where applicable, install a small weep hole at the bottom of the enclosure to
allow equalization of the internal and external pressure.
Panel Cut Dimensions

Specific measurements must be taken into consideration when preparing to
install Operator Display on a panel.
Figure: Panel cut dimensions
A B C
190 mm (+1/0 mm) 135 mm (+1/0 mm) 1.6 to 5 mm

(7.48 in [+0.04/0 in]) (5.31 in [+0.04/0 in]) (0.06 to 0.2 in)

1114
30 Operator Display
30.7 Installing Operator Display on a Panel

You install Operator Display on a panel in equipment rooms and small buildings
to simplify operations, service, and troubleshooting.
1112.
WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Remove all power from the device before removing any covers or elements of
the system, and prior to installing or removing any accessories, hardware, or
cables.
• Unplug the power cable from both this product and the power supply.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.
• Replace and secure all covers or elements of the system before applying
power to this product.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Keep this product stabilized in the panel-cutout while you are installing or
removing the screw fasteners.
To install Operator Display on a panel

1. Place this product on a clean and level surface with the screen facing down.
2. Check that this product’s gasket is seated securely into the bezel’s groove,
which runs around the perimeter of the display frame.
NOTE: Always use the installation gasket, since it absorbs vibration in
addition to repelling water. For more information, see section 30.10
“Replacing the Installation Gasket on Operator Display ” on page 1121.

1115
30 Operator Display
3. Based on this product’s panel cut dimensions, open a mount-hole on the

panel and attach this product to the panel from the front side. For more
information, see section 30.6 “Operator Display Installation” on page 1112.
NOTE: This product has a hook on the top to help prevent falling during
installation. Insert this product into the panel at an angle to avoid hitting
the hook.
1. Hook
4. Insert the installation fastener hooks into the insertion slots of this product.
1. Insertion slots
2. Installation fastener
3. Installation panel
5. In a clockwise direction, tighten the installation fastener’s screws with a
screwdriver. The recommended torque is 0.5 Nm (4.4 lbf.in).
NOTE: The installation fasteners can be screwed by hand as well.

1116
30 Operator Display
communication with the devices it is meant to monitor.

1117
30 Operator Display
30.8 Connecting Operator Display to a 24 VDC Power Supply
30.8 Connecting Operator Display to a 24

VDC Power Supply
You connect Operator Display to a 24 VDC power supply in order to supply
Operator Display with power.
For more information, see section 31.11 “Grounding and Power for Systems with
Operator Display” on page 1151.
DANGER
SHORT CIRCUIT, FIRE, OR UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Avoid excessive force on the power cable to help prevent accidental
disconnection.
• Securely attach power cables to an installation panel or cabinet.
• Install and fasten this product on an installation panel or cabinet prior to
connecting the power supply and communication lines.
To connect Operator Display to a 24 VDC power supply

1. Carefully read the safety information before trying to connect the DC power
cord. For more information, see section 31.11 “Grounding and Power for
Systems with Operator Display” on page 1151.
2. Read the guidelines and recommendations for DC power supply
connections, grounding, and improving noise/surge resistance. For more
information, see section 31.11 “Grounding and Power for Systems with
3. Prepare the DC power cord. For more information, see section 31.11
“Grounding and Power for Systems with Operator Display” on page 1151.
4. Confirm the power cord is not connected to the power supply.
5. Check the rated voltage.
6. Remove the DC power supply connector from this product.
7. Strip the membrane of the power cord, and twist the wire ends.
8. Insert each power cord wire into its corresponding hole. Fasten the screws
of the DC power supply connector to clamp the wire in place.
NOTE:
• The recommended torque is 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in).
• Do not solder the cable connection.
9. After inserting all three power cord wires, insert the DC power supply
connector into the power connector on this product.
You can now turn on Operator Display.

1118
30 Operator Display
30.9 Removing Operator Display

You remove Operator Display to gain access to the screw terminals and wiring.
1112.
WARNING
cables.
• Unplug the power cable from both this product and the power supply.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.
CAUTION
RISK OF INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not drop this product when you remove it from the panel:
• Hold this product in place after removing the fasteners.
• Use both hands.
• While pushing on the hook, be careful not to hurt your fingers.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
• Keep this product stabilized in the panel-cutout while you are installing or
removing the screw fasteners.
• To avoid damage, remove this product while pushing the hook.

1119
30 Operator Display
To remove Operator Display

1. Loosen the screws of the installation fasteners, remove the product slowly
from the panel while pressing the hook.

1120
30 Operator Display
30.10 Replacing the Installation Gasket on Operator Display
30.10 Replacing the Installation Gasket on

Operator Display
You replace the installation gasket to help ensure Operator Display is protected
against dust and moisture.
1112.
NOTICE
GASKET AGING
• Inspect the gasket periodically as required by your operating environment.
• Change the gasket at least once a year, or as soon as scratches or dirt
become visible.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Be careful not to stretch the gasket unnecessarily.
To replace the installation gasket on Operator Display

1. Place this product on a flat, level surface, with the display face pointing
down.
2. Remove the gasket from this product.

1121
30 Operator Display
30.10 Replacing the Installation Gasket on Operator Display
3. Attach the new gasket to this product. Insert the protrusions from the four
corners of the gasket into the corresponding holes in the corners of this
product. Refer to the figure on the right and insert the protrusions
accordingly.
NOTE: When using a tool to insert the gasket, make sure the tool does
not catch the rubber gasket and cause a tear.
1. Installation gasket
2. Protruding point
NOTE: The gasket must be inserted correctly into the groove for
moisture resistance for this product.

1122
30 Operator Display
30.11 Replacing the Battery on Operator Display
30.11 Replacing the Battery on Operator

Display
You replace the battery to help ensure the data backup of the Operator Display
memory and internal clock is not lost.
1112.
DANGER
• Follow the procedures step by step to replace the battery correctly and safely.
• Before replacing the battery, turn off this product’s power.
DANGER
EXPLOSION, FIRE, OR CHEMICAL HAZARD
• Use only the identical replacement battery for this product (CR2032).
• Do not cause a short circuit.
• Recycle or properly dispose of used batteries.
• Do not recharge, disassemble or heat above 80 °C (176 °F).
• Use your hands or insulated tools to remove or replace the battery.
• Maintain proper polarity when inserting and connecting a new battery.
NOTICE
LOSS OF DATA
• Replace the battery regularly every five years after you purchase this
product.
• Allow only qualified personnel to change the battery.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data.
To replace the battery on Operator Display

1. Disconnect the power supply from this product.
2. Touch the housing or ground connection to discharge any electrostatic
charge from your body.
3. Place this product on a flat, level surface, with the front side pointing up.

1123
30 Operator Display
30.11 Replacing the Battery on Operator Display
4. Open the battery slot on the top of this product.
1. Battery slot
2. Safety alert symbol (see the safety messages stated above)
5. Remove the spent battery from the tray by touching the battery from the
bottom.
6. Put the new battery (CR2032) on the tray in accordance with the polarity
markings in the tray and on the battery.
7. Insert the tray into the battery slot.
8. Reconnect the power supply to this product.
9. Configure the date and time. For more information, see the Configuring
Date and Time topic on WebHelp.Refer to your screen editing software
manual on how to set up the clock.

1124
30 Operator Display
30.12 Operator Display Regulatory and Agency Compliance and Approvals
30.12 Operator Display Regulatory and

Agency Compliance and Approvals
approvals for the SpaceLogic Operator Display.

Operator Display bears the CE mark and complies with the following EU
directives:
• 2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
Compliance with these EU directives implies conformity to harmonized European
standards that are noted in the EU Declaration of Conformity. The EU
Declaration of Conformity can be accessed on the Schneider Electric Exchange
Extranet website, ecobuilding.schneider-electric.com
30.12.2 WEEE - European Union (EU)

The Operator Display and its packaging carry the waste of electrical and
electronic equipment (WEEE) label, in compliance with EU directive 2012/19/EU,
governing the disposal and recycling of electrical and electronic equipment in the
European community.

For Operator Display, the following statements apply.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. Schneider Electric is not responsible for any radio or

1125
30 Operator Display
30.12 Operator Display Regulatory and Agency Compliance and Approvals
television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and

connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.

For Operator Display, the following statements apply.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Cet appareil numérique ne dépasse pas les limites de la Classe A pour les
sur le brouillage radioélectrique du ministère des Communications du Canada.
Canada ICES-003 (A) / NMB-003 (A)
30.12.5 UL
Operator Display is a UL Listed product for the United States and Canada.
Operator Display complies with the following UL standards:
• UL CSA 22.2 61010-1
• UL CSA 22.2 61010-2-201
Any changes or modifications to the product may invalidate the certificate.
30.12.6 UK Conformity Assessed

S.I. 2016/1091 - Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
S.I. 2016/1101 - Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
S.I. 2012/3032 - Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in
This equipment complies with the rules, of the UK regulations, for governing the
UKCA Marking for the United Kingdom specified in the above directive(s).

1126
31 Wiring
Topics
Wiring
I/O Wiring
Grounding and Power
Grounding and Power for Systems with Central IO Modules
and PS-24V Units
Grounding and Power for Systems with AS-B Servers
Grounding and Power for Systems with MP Controllers
Grounding and Power for Systems with IP-IO Modules
Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-12A, -12B, or
-12C Controllers
Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A Controller
Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A and
Expansion Modules
Grounding and Power for Systems with Operator Display
External Device Connections
Wire Sizes and Lengths
Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C
Controllers
Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A Controller
Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital Inputs of the RP
Controller Expansion Modules
Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the RP
31 Controller Expansion DALI Light Modules
Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI Interface of the RP
Controller Expansion SMI Blind Modules
Required External Connectors for the RP Controller
Expansion Modules
Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP Controller Expansion
Zigbee Modules
Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the Zigbee DALI
Module
Wire Sizes and Lengths for the KNX Modbus Gateway
Communication Port Wiring
RJ45 Pinout for the RS-485 Ports of the RP-C Controller
31 Wiring
31.1 Wiring
31.1 Wiring
31.1.1 I/O Wiring

The I/O wiring recommendations provide guidance on what type of wires should
be used for the different Central IO modules, AS-B server onboard I/O, and
BACnet/IP device onboard I/O, how to perform grounding, and how to connect
different external devices to the inputs and outputs. This section also provides
information on the external connectors required for the RP controller expansion
modules. Always use the recommended cables and wires.
For more information, see section 31.2 “I/O Wiring” on page 1130.
31.1.2 Communication Port Wiring

1177.

1129
31 Wiring
31.2 I/O Wiring
31.2 I/O Wiring

The I/O wiring recommendations provide guidance on what type of wires should
be used for the different Central IO modules, AS-B server onboard I/O, and
BACnet/IP device onboard I/O, how to perform grounding, and how to connect
different external devices to the inputs and outputs. This section also provides
information on the external connectors required for the RP controller expansion
modules. Always use the recommended cables and wires.
For the Central IO modules, most of the wiring is made to the terminal base, and
can be done before the electronics module is installed.
For the AS-B server onboard I/O, MP controller onboard I/O, and IP-IO modules,
the wiring is made to the removable terminal blocks, and can be done before the
AS-B server, MP controller, and IP-IO module are installed on the DIN rail.
For the RP-C controller onboard I/O, the wiring is made to fixed terminal blocks.
Some relay output terminals, Central IO modules, or terminal bases may carry
lethal voltages. Always disconnect the power supply and other high voltage
equipment connected to the device before wiring.
DANGER
power input, outputs and digital inputs. The connectors are mechanically keyed
and color-coded, which allows the matching external connectors to be plugged in
on site quickly and easily.
31.2.1 Shielded Wires

For digital inputs and outputs, you can use shielded or unshielded wire.
Unshielded wires are usually sufficient.
For analog inputs and outputs, you can use shielded or unshielded wire. Shielded
wires are recommended if the wiring is placed in a noisy electrical environment.
Connect the shield to ground only at a RET terminal.
If the wiring is placed in a noisy electrical environment, shielded wires are
recommended for RTD-DI-16 Central IO modules, AS-B server onboard I/Os,
and BACnet/IP device onboard I/Os that have the following external connections:
• RTD temperature input
• RTD resistive input
• Resistive input
31.2.2 Grounding and Power


1130
31 Wiring
31.2 I/O Wiring

measurements.
For more information, see section 31.3 “Grounding and Power” on page 1132.
31.2.3 External Device Connections

For more information, see section 31.12 “External Device Connections” on page
1155.
31.2.4 Wire Sizes and Lengths

This section provides recommendations on minimum wire sizes (cross-sectional
areas) and maximum wire lengths for the wires connected to the screw terminals
of Central IO modules, AS-B servers, and BACnet/IP devices. Recommendations
on minimum wire size and maximum cable length for the digital inputs of the RP
controller expansion modules, the DALI bus of the DALI light modules, and the
Zigbee DALI and 0-10V modules are also provided. The recommendations are
for guidance only. Other wire sizes and lengths may be used, depending on
wiring rules and when appropriate.
For more information, see section 31.13 “Wire Sizes and Lengths” on page 1160.
31.2.5 Required External Connectors for the RP

Controller Expansion Modules
This section provides information on the external connectors that are required for
the power supply input, outputs, and digital inputs of the RP controller expansion
modules.
For more information, see section 31.19 “Required External Connectors for the
RP Controller Expansion Modules” on page 1169.

1131
31 Wiring
31.3 Grounding and Power

measurements.
The following sections provide recommendations for designing a good working
system.
31.3.1 Grounding and Power for Systems with

Central IO Modules and PS-24V Units
This section provides grounding and power recommendations for system
configurations with Central IO modules and PS-24V units.
Central IO Modules and PS-24V Units” on page 1134.
31.3.2 Grounding and Power for Systems with AS-B

Servers
configurations with AS-B servers.
AS-B Servers” on page 1136.
31.3.3 Grounding and Power for Systems with MP

Controllers
configurations with MP controllers.
MP Controllers” on page 1138.
31.3.4 Grounding and Power for Systems with IP-IO

Modules
configurations with IP-IO modules.
IP-IO Modules” on page 1141.

1132
31 Wiring
31.3.5 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-

C-12A, -12B, or -12C Controllers
configurations with the RP-C controller models RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C, which
are models that support 24 VAC/DC input power.
RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C Controllers” on page 1143.

C-16A Controller
configurations with the RP-C controller model RP-C-16A, which is a model that
supports 230 VAC input power.
RP-C-16A Controller” on page 1146.

C-16A and Expansion Modules
configurations with an RP-C and RP controller expansion modules.
RP-C-16A and Expansion Modules” on page 1148.
31.3.8 Grounding and Power for Systems with

Operator Display
configurations with Operator Display, which supports 24 VDC input power.

1133
31 Wiring
31.4 Grounding and Power for Systems with Central IO Modules and PS-24V Units
31.4 Grounding and Power for Systems with

Central IO Modules and PS-24V Units
configurations with Central IO modules and PS-24V units.
Use the following recommendations to design a good working system:
• It is preferable to have one signal ground rail long enough to cover all signal
ground connections. If several ground rails are used, connect them in a tree
configuration with wires of at least 4 mm2 copper areas. This corresponds to
AWG 12.
• Connect at least one RET pin from every Central IO module to the signal
ground rail (SGR) using a 1.3 mm² (16 AWG) or larger wire. This
recommendation applies to all Central IO modules, except digital output
Central IO modules.
• Connect the root of the signal ground tree to cabinet ground and protective
earth (PE).
• Connect the signal output (Y-terminals) from external devices such as
transmitters to the universal inputs.
For isolated devices, connect the signal common from the transmitter to the
corresponding RET pin on the same Central IO module as the universal
input.
For non-isolated devices, connect the signal common from the transmitter to
the SGR in the panel.
• Connect the signal input (X-terminals) of external devices such as actuators
to the analog outputs.
For isolated devices, connect the signal common from the actuator to the
corresponding RET pin on the same Central IO module as the analog output.
For non-isolated devices, connect the signal common from the actuator to
• Connect the G0 (Power Ground/Common) of external devices, such as
actuators and transmitters, to the SGR in the panel.
• Connect thermistors to the universal input and corresponding RET terminal
on the same Central IO module as the universal input.
• One or several 24 V power transformers can be used to supply the system.
• Connect different loads to different fuses in order to limit short circuit
currents, but keep in mind that some of the signal ground wires will carry the
sum of all load currents.
• Use different fuses for connecting the current limited power source to the
PS-24V units than for connecting the current limited power source to the field
devices.
• For UL listing compliance (Class 2 power), the fuses (circuit breakers) must
be rated not more than 4A. For other regions that do not require UL
compliance, fuses (circuit breakers) may be rated up to 6A.
• For UL compliance, a UL Class 2 (100 VA or less) transformer may be used
instead of the fuse/breaker limited transformer arrangement shown.

1134
31 Wiring
31.4 Grounding and Power for Systems with Central IO Modules and PS-24V Units
Figure: System configuration with Central IO modules and PS-24V units

1135
31 Wiring
31.5 Grounding and Power for Systems with AS-B Servers

AS-B Servers
configurations with AS-B servers.
• It is preferable to have one signal ground rail long enough to cover all signal
ground connections. If several ground rails are used, connect them in a tree
configuration with wires of at least 4 mm2 copper areas. This corresponds to
AWG 12.
• Connect the RET terminal number 4 or 5 from every AS-B server to the
signal ground rail (SGR) using a 2.5 mm² (13 AWG) or larger wire.
• Connect the root of the signal ground tree to cabinet ground and protective
earth (PE).
transmitters to the universal inputs.
corresponding RET pin on the same AS-B server as the universal input. This
recommendation applies to AS-B servers with 24 I/O points.
For AS-B servers with 36 I/O points, connect the signal common from the
isolated or non-isolated transmitter to the SGR in the panel.
to the analog outputs.
corresponding RET pin on the same AS-B server as the analog output. This
recommendation applies to AS-B servers with 24 I/O points.
For AS-B servers with 36 I/O points, connect the signal common from the
isolated or non-isolated actuator to the SGR in the panel.
• Connect thermistors to the universal input and corresponding RET terminal
on the same AS-B server as the universal input. This recommendation
applies to AS-B servers with 24 I/O points.
For AS-B servers with 36 I/O points, connect thermistors to the universal
input and to the SGR in the panel.
• Connect different loads to different fuses in order to limit short circuit
currents, but keep in mind that some of the signal ground wires will carry the
sum of all load currents.
• Use different fuses for connecting the current limited power source to the
AS-B servers than for connecting the current limited power source to the field
devices.

1136
31 Wiring
31.5 Grounding and Power for Systems with AS-B Servers

Figure: System configuration with AS-B servers

1137
31 Wiring
31.6 Grounding and Power for Systems with MP Controllers

MP Controllers
configurations with MP controllers.
• The Signal Ground Rail (SGR) shown in the diagram below is considered
optional when the number of ground connections is small and ground
connections can be achieved with a simple chassis ground post (a ground
lug post suitable for the capacity is required). In a control panel application
with many external non-isolated field devices, the SGR is recommended.
• The return/common side of the transformer secondary, the ground symbol
terminal on the MP controller, and the metal chassis/enclosure must be
connected to a protective earth (PE) ground.
transmitters to the universal inputs of the MP controller.
corresponding RET pin on the same MP controller as the universal input.
to the analog outputs (or MP-C universal outputs configured for analog
output mode).
corresponding RET pin on the same MP controller as the analog output.
• Connect thermistors and dry contact devices to the universal input and
corresponding RET terminal on the same MP controller as the universal
input.
• When the MP-C is configured in large I/O applications with powered field
devices, the power delivered to the field devices should be power limited
(such as Class 2 for UL applications) with individual power limited
transformers or fuses (circuit breakers) to limit circuit fault currents. Common
signal ground wires share the sum of load currents for multiple connected
devices and should be sized appropriately for the combined current.
• When powering externally located field devices, use separate fuses (circuit
breakers) for supplying power limited source to the MP controllers, rather
than for connecting the power limited source to the field devices.
• Fuses and circuit breakers must be sized appropriately to support the
maximum rated controller power rating. Care must be taken when using fast-

1138
31 Wiring
acting fuses or circuit breakers due to inrush currents on controller start-up

due to input capacitance.
Figure: System configuration with MP controllers
Powering more than one MP controller from a single transformer is acceptable

when the controllers are installed within the same cabinet, or directly adjacent
cabinets connected with conduit. When the controllers are separated in a facility,
a separate 24 VAC step-down transformer is recommended to power each
controller. The transformer with appropriate VA rating may also be used to power
the locally connected I/O devices. The separate transformer helps to avoid
problems with ground loops, 24 VAC induced EMI on LAN, low or distorted AC
voltage level at the controller, and excess transformer load due to the half-wave
power supply, which can result in intermittent equipment detected faults, loss of
communications, or equipment damage. Because multiple MP-V controllers are
never installed in the same cabinet or adjacent cabinets, all MP-V controllers are
recommended to be powered by separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformers.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
device.
Distribution of 24 VAC from a central transformer to multiple separated MP

controllers is not recommended. If you choose to use a central transformer,
regardless of this recommendation, the installation of 24 V to 24 V isolation

1139
31 Wiring
transformers at each controller is recommended to help avoid problems with

ground loops. The use of isolation transformers does not help to avoid problems
with 24 VAC induced EMI on LAN, low or distorted AC voltage level at the
controller, and excess transformer load due to the half-wave power supply.

1140
31 Wiring
31.7 Grounding and Power for Systems with IP-IO Modules

IP-IO Modules
configurations with IP-IO modules.
• The Signal Ground Rail (SGR) shown in the diagram below is considered
optional when the number of ground connections is small and ground
connections can be achieved with a simple chassis ground post (a ground
lug post suitable for the capacity is required). In a control panel application
with many external non-isolated field devices, the SGR is recommended.
• The return/common side of the transformer secondary, the ground symbol
terminal on the IP-IO module, and the metal chassis/enclosure must be
connected to a protective earth (PE) ground.
transmitters to the universal inputs of the IP-IO module.
corresponding RET pin on the same IP-IO module as the universal input.
to the universal outputs of the IP-IO module.
corresponding RET pin on the same IP-IO module as the universal output.
• Connect thermistors and dry contact devices to the universal or digital input
and corresponding RET terminal on the same IP-IO module as the universal
or digital input.
• When the IP-IO module is configured in large I/O applications with powered
field devices, the power delivered to the field devices should be power
limited (such as Class 2 for UL applications) with individual power limited
transformers or fuses (circuit breakers) to limit circuit fault currents. Common
signal ground wires share the sum of load currents for multiple connected
devices and should be sized appropriately for the combined current.
• When powering externally located field devices, use separate fuses (circuit
breakers) for supplying power limited source to the IP-IO modules, rather
than for connecting the power limited source to the field devices.
• Fuses and circuit breakers must be sized appropriately to support the
maximum rated controller power rating. Care must be taken when using fast-
acting fuses or circuit breakers due to inrush currents on controller start-up
due to input capacitance.

1141
31 Wiring
31.7 Grounding and Power for Systems with IP-IO Modules
Figure: System configuration with IP-IO modules
Powering more than one IP-IO module from a single transformer is acceptable
when the IP-IO modules are installed within the same cabinet, or directly
adjacent cabinets connected with conduit. When the IP-IO modules are
separated in a facility, a separate 24 VAC step-down transformer is
recommended to power each IP-IO module. The transformer with appropriate VA
rating may also be used to power the locally connected I/O devices. The separate
transformer helps to avoid problems with ground loops, 24 VAC induced EMI on
LAN, low or distorted AC voltage level at the IP-IO module, and excess
transformer load due to the half-wave power supply, which can result in
intermittent equipment detected faults, loss of communications, or equipment
damage.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
device.
Distribution of 24 VAC from a central transformer to multiple separated IP-IO

modules is not recommended. If you choose to use a central transformer,
regardless of this recommendation, the installation of 24 V to 24 V isolation
transformers at each IP-IO module is recommended to help avoid problems with
ground loops. The use of isolation transformers does not help to avoid problems
with 24 VAC induced EMI on LAN, low or distorted AC voltage level at the IP-IO
module, and excess transformer load due to the half-wave power supply.

1142
31 Wiring
31.8 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C Controllers

RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C Controllers
configurations with the RP-C controller models RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C, which
are models that support 24 VAC/DC input power.
System with a local transformer

You can use one local transformer for each RP-C controller (with its connected
devices) to minimize any problems with ground loops and disturbances.
• Select any of terminals 4 or 5 to be used as G0 (Power Ground/Common).
• G0 (terminal 4 or 5) can be connected to RET. Avoid this if not necessary.
• The fuse (circuit breaker) F11 must be rated 3 A or higher.
Figure: System configuration with a RP-C-12C controller powered by a local transformer

1143
31 Wiring
It is important to know that several nodes are internally interconnected to the

common signal ground. This is important for safety reasons and to help avoid
ground loops and incorrect supply of G0. The following nodes are all
interconnected:
• All RET terminals (4, 5, 20, 23, 26, and 29)
• Antenna connector
• USB connector shields
• Ethernet network connector shields
• RS-485 (Room bus and Sensor bus) ground reference
• Terminal 2 (N/G0 input)
In case several RP-Cs are supplied from one common 24 V transformer,
terminal 2 is interconnecting all internal grounds for all RP-Cs.
System with a common transformer

Powering more than one RP-C controller from a common transformer is
acceptable when the controllers are installed within the same cabinet, or directly
adjacent cabinets connected with conduit.
• Use the same recommendations regarding G0, terminals 4 and 5, and fuse
(circuit breaker) ratings, as provided for a system with a local transformer
above.
• Do not interconnect the RP-C controllers and their groups of connected
devices, such as actuators and transmitters, beyond what is shown in the
figure below to minimize potential problems with ground loops.
• It is recommended to use separate fuses (circuit breakers), F11 and F21, for
the power supply to each RP-C controller so that a problem with one RP-C
controller does not affect another RP-C controller.
If you use a common fuse (circuit breaker) for two RP-C controllers, and
there is a problem with one of the controllers, the troubleshooting may be
more difficult than if there is a problem only with one actuator or transmitter.
the power supply to actuators and transmitters connected to different RP-C
controllers so that a problem with an actuator or transmitter connected to one
RP-C controller does not affect an actuator or transmitter connected to
another RP-C controller.
the power supply to heaters connected to different RP-C controllers so that a

1144
31 Wiring
problem with a heater connected to one RP-C controller does not affect a
heater connected to another RP-C controller.
Figure: . System configuration with two RP-C-12C controllers powered by a common transformer

1145
31 Wiring
31.9 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A Controller

RP-C-16A Controller
configurations with the RP-C controller model RP-C-16A, which is a model that
supports 230 VAC input power.
• Select any of terminals 4 or 5 to be used as G0 (Power Ground/Common).
• G0 (terminal 4 or 5) can be connected to RET. Avoid this if not necessary.
• G0 and/or RET can be connected to protective earth ground (PE). Avoiding
this connection is preferable, as it can cause circulating ground currents.
• Do not connect RET to terminal 3 as the creepage distance must be at least
5.5 mm from mains voltage to RET.
• The fuse (circuit breaker) F1 must be rated 3 A or higher.
Interconnecting RP-C-16A controllers

When interconnecting several RP-C-16A controllers:
• Avoid interconnection of local grounds (G0/RET) for different RP-Cs by using
non-shielded Ethernet network cables. Avoid shielded Ethernet network
cables. Also, do not connect G0/RET from one RP-C with G0/RET of a
different RP-C.
• If the local grounds (G0/RET) of different RP-Cs are interconnected, every
RP-C with local ground connection to another device must be grounded to
PE.
It is necessary to connect RET to PE because the RP-C is supplied from
mains voltage and a small touch current (<0.2 mA) is generated by the RP-
C's internal AC/DC converter. If several RP-Cs are interconnected, the sum
of all touch currents can be high, making it dangerous to touch parts such as
the antenna or other parts connected to the internal ground.
WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Do not connect signal ground (RET terminals, USB shield, Ethernet network
shield, or antenna shield) between RP-C controllers without connecting at least
one of the RET terminals to protective earth ground.
equipment damage.
It is important to know that several nodes are internally interconnected to the

common signal ground. This is important for safety reasons and to help avoid
ground loops and incorrect supply of G0. The following nodes are all
interconnected:
• All RET terminals (20, 23, 26, and 29)
• Antenna connector
• USB connector shields
• Ethernet network connector shields
• RS-485 (Room bus and Sensor bus) ground reference

1146
31 Wiring
31.9 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A Controller
Figure: System configuration with RP-C-16A controller

1147
31 Wiring
31.10 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A and Expansion Modules

RP-C-16A and Expansion Modules
configurations with an RP-C and RP controller expansion modules.
DANGER
De-energize the high-voltage relay contacts before wiring. More than one
disconnect switch may be required to de-energize the equipment before
servicing.
System configuration with separate power supplies to RP-C-16A and

RP controller expansion modules with power distribution capability
You can use separate power supplies, with separate fuses (circuit breakers), to
power the RP-C-16A controller and the RP controller expansion modules to help
prevent a problem (such as a short-circuit) with one expansion module from
causing the RP-C to stop working.
• The fuse (circuit breaker) F1 must be rated 3 A or higher (maximum 16 A).
• The fuse (circuit breaker) F2 must be rated at maximum 16 A.
NOTE: To achieve load balancing, the Power Input terminal L (Line) for
different RP controller expansion modules can be connected to different
phases of the AC mains power supply.

1148
31 Wiring
Figure: System configuration with separate power supplies to RP-C and RP controller
expansion modules with power distribution capability, example
System configuration with a common power supply to RP-C-16A and

RP controller expansion modules with power distribution capability
You can use a common power supply, with a common fuse (circuit breaker), to
power the RP-C-16A controller and several RP controller expansion modules to
reduce the costs of wiring and fuses. However, if there is a problem such as a
short-circuit in one of the expansion modules, and the common fuse is blown, the
RP-C controller and all expansion modules connected to the same fuse will also
stop working. Furthermore, if several RP-C controllers are connected using a
daisy chain topology, a problem in one expansion module can in this way cause
all controllers downstream from RP-C controller that has stopped working to lose
communication to all upstream controllers.
• The fuse (circuit breaker) F1 must be rated 3 A or higher (maximum 16 A).

1149
31 Wiring
Figure: System configuration with a common power supply to RP-C and RP controller
expansion modules with power distribution capability, example

1150
31 Wiring
31.11 Grounding and Power for Systems with Operator Display

Operator Display
configurations with Operator Display, which supports 24 VDC input power.
31.11.1 DC Power Cord Connection

WARNING
cables.
• Unplug the power cable from both this product and the power supply prior to
installing or removing the product.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off
where and when indicated.
• Use only the specified voltage when operating this product. This product is
designed to use 24 VDC. Always check whether your device is DC-powered
before applying power.
• Since this product is not equipped with a power switch, connect a power
switch to the power supply.
• Ground this product’s Functional Ground (FG) terminal.
equipment damage.
NOTE:
• The SG (signal ground) and FG (functional ground) terminals are
separated inside this product.
• When the FG terminal is connected, ensure the wire is grounded. Not
grounding this product can result in excessive electromagnetic
interference (EMI).
31.11.2 DC Power Cord Preparation

• Make sure the ground wire is either the same or heavier gauge than the
power wires.
• Do not use aluminum wires in the power supply's power cord.
• If the ends of the individual wires are not twisted correctly, the wires may
create a short circuit.
• The conductor type is solid or stranded wire.
• Use copper wire rated for 75 °C (167 °F) or higher.

1151
31 Wiring
• Use the SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) circuit and LIM (Limited Energy)
circuit for DC input.
Table: DC Power Cord Preparation

Item Specification
Power cord diameter 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 (18 to 13 AWG)a
Conductor type Solid or stranded wire
Conductor length
Recommended driver Flat-head screwdriver, size 0.6 x 3.5 mm

(0.02 x 0.14 in)
a) For UL compatibility, use AWG 14 or AWG 13.
31.11.3 DC Power Supply Connector Specifications

Table: DC Power Supply Connector Specifications
Connection Wire
+ 24 Vdc
- 0 Vdc
FG Grounded terminal. Connect

the FG terminal properly to
the ground.
31.11.4 DC Power Supply Connection

DANGER
SHORT CIRCUIT, FIRE, OR UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Avoid excessive force on the power cable to help prevent accidental
disconnection.
• Securely attach power cables to an installation panel or cabinet.
• Install and fasten this product on an installation panel or cabinet prior to
connecting the power supply and communication lines.
Improving Noise/Surge Resistance

• This product’s power supply cord should not be bundled with or kept close to
main circuit lines(high voltage, high current), power lines, or input/output
lines, and their various systems should be kept separate. When power lines

1152
31 Wiring
cannot be wired via a separate system, use shielded cables for input/output
lines.
• Make the power cord as short as possible, and twist the ends of the wires
together (i.e. twisted-pair cabling) from close to the power supply unit.
• If there is an excess amount of noise on the power supply line, reduce the
noise with a noise filter before turning on the power.
• Connect a surge protection device to handle power surges.
• To increase noise resistance, attach a ferrite core to the power cable.
Power Supply Connections

• When supplying power to this product, connect the power as shown below.
• Use the SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) circuit and LIM (Limited Energy)
circuit for DC input.
• The following shows a surge protection device connection:
• Attach a surge protection device to help prevent damage to this product as a

result of a lightning-induced power surge from a large electromagnetic field
generated from a direct lightning strike. We also strongly recommend
connecting the crossover grounding wire of this product to a position close to
the ground terminal of the surge protection device. It is expected that there
will be an effect on this product due to fluctuations in grounding potential
when there is a large surge flow of electrical energy to the lightning rod
ground at the time of a lightning strike. Provide adequate distance between
the lightning rod grounding point and the surge protection device grounding
point.
• If the voltage variation is outside the prescribed range, connect a regulated
power supply.
1 Regulated power supply

2 Twisted-pair cord
3 This product

1153
31 Wiring
31.11.5 Grounding
Exclusive Grounding
Always ground the FG (functional ground) terminal. Separate this product from
the FG of other devices as shown below.
Precautions
• Check that the grounding resistance is 100 ohms or less.a
• The FG wire should have a cross-sectional area greater than 2 mm2
(AWG14).a Create the connection point as close to this product as possible
and make the wire as short as possible.
• When using a long grounding wire, replace the thin wire with a thicker wire,
and place it in a duct.
• When connecting the FG (functional ground) and the SG (signal ground),
ensure that no ground loop is formed.
a) Observe local codes and standards.
Common Grounding
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) can be created if devices are improperly
grounded. EMI cancause loss of communication. If exclusive grounding is not
possible, use a common grounding point as shown in the configuration below. Do
not use any other configuration for common grounding.
Correct grounding
Incorrect grounding

1154
31 Wiring
31.12 External Device Connections

It is important to know how different external devices cooperate with the devices
in the EcoStruxure BMS, so we present some different principles for those
external devices here. As a rule of thumb, try to avoid direct connections between
RET and G0 external to the control panel. As discussed below, if a signal ground
rail (SGR) is used, one RET pin on each Central IO module and BACnet/IP
device should be wired to the SGR in the control panel using 1.3 mm² (16 AWG)
or larger wire. For AS-B servers, the RET terminals 4 and/or 5 can be used for
connection of the SGR. For good performance, use as short and large wires as
possible.
31.12.1 Thermistors
Thermistors are connected directly between a universal input terminal and the
corresponding RET terminal.
Figure: Temperature input
31.12.2 Contacts
Digital inputs are controlled by contact closings to RET. The digital inputs are
normally quite immune to disturbance signals, so they can also detect contact
closings directly to the signal ground rail or G0. Even though RET is connected to
the signal ground rail, there might be a small voltage difference that could impact
results on analog inputs. Such small voltage differences are not enough to impact
digital inputs though.

1155
31 Wiring
Figure: Digital input
31.12.3 Actuators
Actuators are divided into two types: isolated and non-isolated control voltage
actuators. The non-isolated actuators are more commonly used. The two
actuator types work mostly in the same way, but the non-isolated actuators have
the signal ground M internally connected to power ground G0. In some cases,
they have only three terminals with one common terminal for M and G0.
Figure: Isolated actuator
Figure: Non-isolated actuator
Non-isolated actuators can be more sensitive to different kinds of disturbances,

and it is sometimes easier to design a more stable system using isolated
actuators. When the system uses a non-isolated actuator, care must be taken in
properly wiring the neutral wire back to the supply neutral for each actuator rather

1156
31 Wiring
than daisy chaining to help prevent large voltage drops that can affect input
signal accuracy.
Some actuator control signal inputs may be designed with a high impedance
differential input which helps prevent AC/DC supply currents from being shared in
the signal return path. Such actuators are as good as isolated actuators with
respect to disturbances and ground currents, so they can be connected as
isolated actuators.
The disturbance can be of two kinds: AC disturbance causing the actuator to
move quickly back and forth, and DC disturbance causing an offset. Both AC and
DC issues occur as a result of currents in the connection from M to RET.
The DC issue is a less severe problem because a DC error can be compensated
by the control loop as long as the error is quite small. If the DC error is big, the
actuator may not be able to turn off or on completely. Normally the actuator starts
to open when the control voltage is a few hundred millivolt, so a DC offset of 100
mV is probably not an issue.
The AC issue can be a more severe problem. If an AC disturbance is added to
the control signal, the actuator starts to travel back and forth and its dependability
may be affected.
If it is unknown whether an actuator is isolated or non-isolated, it should be
treated as non-isolated.
For non-isolated actuators, difficult problems with disturbances can sometimes
be solved by introducing a separate isolated transformer for the actuator. In this
way, you can obtain an isolated system with a non-isolated actuator.
Figure: Non-isolated actuator with separate power transformer
31.12.4 Transmitters
Transmitters are used to convert signals from sensors that cannot be connected
directly to a Central IO module, AS-B server, or BACnet/IP device. Transmitters
are divided into two types: isolated and non-isolated transmitters.

1157
31 Wiring
Figure: Isolated transmitter
Figure: Non-isolated transmitter
When the system uses a non-isolated transmitter, AC and DC bias issues may
occur.
The DC error from a voltage transmitter can never be compensated for by a
feedback loop. So, a DC current in the M conductor causes a DC error in the
reading value if the current and the resistance are large enough to cause a non-
negligible voltage drop, thus creating an error. An AC voltage drop caused by an
AC current in the conductor between M and RET results in unstable
measurements.
Selecting isolated transmitters solves the AC and DC bias issues, but the issues
can also be limited by good system design. For more information, see section
31.3 “Grounding and Power” on page 1132.
In isolated transmitters, the sensors are normally not isolated from the M
conductor, they are only isolated from the power supply of the transmitter. This is
not an issue, because the sensors are not connected to anything but the
transmitters.
Transmitters may have differential outputs. Transmitters with differential outputs
can be connected as isolated external devices.
If it is unknown whether a transmitter is isolated or non-isolated, it should be
treated as a non-isolated transmitter.
The use of current (4-20 mA) transmitters (instead of voltage output) avoids error
from DC voltage drop in the common M to RET return wiring and assists in
reducing signal reading instability from AC current in the return path.
For non-isolated transmitters, difficult problems with disturbances can sometimes
be solved by introducing a separate isolated transformer for the transmitter. In
this way, you can obtain an isolated system with a non-isolated transmitter.

1158
31 Wiring
Figure: Non-isolated transmitter with separate transformer
31.12.5 Loads Such as Relays

Relay outputs are isolated from the signal ground. Therefore, no special care
must be taken with respect to grounding in this case.

1159
31 Wiring
31.13 Wire Sizes and Lengths

This section provides recommendations on minimum wire sizes (cross-sectional
areas) and maximum wire lengths for the wires connected to the screw terminals
of Central IO modules, AS-B servers, and BACnet/IP devices. Recommendations
on minimum wire size and maximum cable length for the digital inputs of the RP
controller expansion modules, the DALI bus of the DALI light modules, and the
Zigbee DALI and 0-10V modules are also provided. The recommendations are
for guidance only. Other wire sizes and lengths may be used, depending on
wiring rules and when appropriate.
31.13.1 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A,

-12B, and -12C Controllers
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the RP-C
controller models RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C.
For more information, see section 31.14 “Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-
12A, -12B, and -12C Controllers” on page 1162.
31.13.2 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A

Controller
This section provides recommendations on wires sizes and lengths for the RP-C
controller model RP-C-16A.
For more information, see section 31.15 “Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-
16A Controller” on page 1164.
31.13.3 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital Inputs

of the RP Controller Expansion Modules
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the digital
inputs of the RP controller expansion modules.
For more information, see section 31.16 “Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital
Inputs of the RP Controller Expansion Modules” on page 1166.
31.13.4 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of

the RP Controller Expansion DALI Light
Modules
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the DALI
bus of the RP controller expansion DALI light modules.
For more information, see section 31.17 “Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI
Bus of the RP Controller Expansion DALI Light Modules” on page 1167.

1160
31 Wiring
31.13.5 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI Interface

of the RP Controller Expansion SMI Blind
Modules
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the SMI
interface of the RP controller expansion SMI blind modules.
For more information, see section 31.18 “Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI
Interface of the RP Controller Expansion SMI Blind Modules” on page 1168.
31.13.6 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP Controller

Expansion Zigbee Modules
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the RP
controller expansion Zigbee DALI and 0-10V modules.
For more information, see section 31.20 “Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP
Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules” on page 1174.
31.13.7 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of

the Zigbee DALI Module
bus of the Zigbee DALI module (RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI).
For more information, see section 31.21 “Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI
Bus of the Zigbee DALI Module” on page 1175.

1161
31 Wiring
31.14 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C Controllers
31.14 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-

12A, -12B, and -12C Controllers
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the RP-C
controller models RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C.
The recommendations are for guidance only. Other wire sizes and lengths may
be used, depending on wiring rules and when appropriate.
Table: Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C Controllers
Terminals Minimum Cross-sectional Area Maximum Cable Length
Power input terminals (1, 2) 0.75 mm² (18 AWG)a According to local wiring rules
Earth ground terminal (3) 0.75 mm² (18 AWG)a According to local wiring rules
Return (RET) terminals (4, 5), 1.3 mm² (16 AWG) 0.5 m (1.6 ft)
connected to ground rail
Universal inputs/outputs as digitalb 0.25 mm² (22 AWG) 200 m (650 ft)
inputs
Universal inputs/outputs as analogc 0.25 mm² (22 AWG) 100 m (330 ft)
inputs
Universal inputs/outputs as 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 75 m (250 ft)

temperature (thermistor) inputs, up
to 75 °C (167 °F)

to 75 °C (167 °F)

to 150 °C (302 °F)
Universal inputs/outputs, for 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 20 m (65 ft)

actuators and transmitters powered
from the same transformer as the
RP-C
from their own transformer (external
or internal)
Universal inputs/outputs as voltage 0.25 mm² (22 AWG) 200 m (650 ft)
outputs, for actuators powered from
their own transformer (external or
internal) or when the outputs have
isolated converters
Relay outputs According to local wiring rules According to local wiring rules
High power relay output According to local wiring rules According to local wiring rules
Solid-state relay (SSR) outputs 0.5 mm² (20 AWG) According to local wiring rules
a) Use wires rated for at least 90 °C (194 °F).

1162
31 Wiring
31.14 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C Controllers
b) Digital or counter inputs.

c) Supervised, voltage, current, resistive, or 2-wire RTD temperature inputs.

1163
31 Wiring
31.15 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A Controller
31.15 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-

16A Controller
This section provides recommendations on wires sizes and lengths for the RP-C
controller model RP-C-16A.
NOTE: Screw terminal number 3 differs between different hardware
versions of the RP-C-16A controller. For more information, see the
Differences Between RP-C Hardware Versions topic on WebHelp.
Table: Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A Controller

Power input terminals (1, 2) 0.75 mm² (18 AWG)a or larger According to local wiring rules
according to local wiring rules
Protective earth ground terminal (3) 0.75 mm² (18 AWG)a or larger According to local wiring rules
according to local wiring rules
24 VAC output terminals (4, 5) 0.5 mm² (20 AWG) According to local wiring rules
Universal inputs/outputs as digitalb 0.25 mm² (22 AWG) 200 m (650 ft)
inputs
Universal inputs/outputs as analogc 0.25 mm² (22 AWG) 100 m (330 ft)
inputs

to 75 °C (167 °F)

to 75 °C (167 °F)

to 150 °C (302 °F)

from the same transformer as the
RP-C
from their own transformer (external
or internal)
Universal inputs/outputs as voltage 0.25 mm² (22 AWG) 200 m (650 ft)
outputs, for actuators powered via
their own transformer (external or
internal) or when the outputs have
isolated converters
Relay outputs According to local wiring rules According to local wiring rules

1164
31 Wiring
31.15 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A Controller
Continued
High power relay output According to local wiring rules According to local wiring rules
Solid-state relay (SSR) outputs 0.5 mm² (20 AWG) According to local wiring rules
a) Use wires rated for at least 75 °C (167 °F).

b) Digital or counter inputs.
c) Supervised, voltage, current, resistive, or 2-wire RTD temperature inputs.

1165
31 Wiring
31.16 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital Inputs of the RP Controller Expansion Modules
31.16 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital

Inputs of the RP Controller Expansion
Modules
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the digital
inputs of the RP controller expansion modules.
Table: Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital Inputs of the RP Controller
Expansion Modules
Maximum Total Cable Resistance Typical Cable
50 ohm (2 x 25 ohm) 266 m (873 feet) long cable with an area of

0.2 mm2 (24 AWG) at 50 °C (122 °F)

1166
31 Wiring
31.17 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the RP Controller Expansion DALI Light Modules
31.17 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI

Bus of the RP Controller Expansion
DALI Light Modules
bus of the RP controller expansion DALI light modules.
The DALI bus is connected to the DALI inputs/outputs, labeled Light 1 to Light 4,
of the DALI light modules. The DALI inputs/outputs have two terminals, labeled
DA+ and DA-, to which the two-wire bus is connected.
Only copper wires should be used for the DALI bus.
Table: Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the RP Controller Expansion
DALI Light Modules
Minimum Cross-sectional Area Cable Length
0.5 mm² (20 AWG) Up to 100 m (328 ft)
0.75 mm² (18 AWG) Up to 150 m (492 ft)
1.5 mm² (15 AWG) Up to 300 m (984 ft)

1167
31 Wiring
31.18 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI Interface of the RP Controller Expansion SMI Blind Modules
31.18 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI

Interface of the RP Controller Expansion
SMI Blind Modules
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the SMI
interface of the RP controller expansion SMI blind modules.
The connecting cable is a 5-wire cable, which supplies both power and transmits
data. The Blind outputs of the SMI high-voltage blind module have five terminals,
labeled I+, I-, N, PE, and L, to which the cable is connected. The Blind outputs of
the SMI low-voltage (SMI LoVo) blind module have four terminals, labeled I+, I-, 0
V, and 24 V, to which the cable is connected. The connector for SMI LoVo has a
5-pole frame, but only four poles are used in this application.
DANGER
Never connect an SMI LoVo motor to the RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD SMI
blind module.
The maximum total cable length is 350 m, which means that distances of up to
350 m between the SMI blind module and the blind motor are possible.
Wire sizes (cross-sectional areas) from 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) to 2.5 mm² (14
AWG) can be used depending on the following factors:
• Total cable length
• Minimum voltage required by the blind motor
• Rated motor current
• Number of blind motors
Because up to 16 blind motors (drives) can be connected in parallel to one SMI
blind module (with a maximum of four blind motors per Blind output), you must
consider the number of blind motors connected to the SMI blind module when
dimensioning the cables. For example, blind motors that operate from mains
voltage (230 VAC) can typically handle a maximum voltage reduction of 10%
(207 VAC). When several blind motors are connected in parallel to the SMI
module, the cables must be dimensioned so that the voltage does not fall below
207 VAC at the last blind motor. For more information, see the SMI Standard
Motor Interface website www.standard-motor-interface.com
Only copper wires should be used for the connecting cables.
The cable type should be of the type without screen.

1168
31 Wiring
31.19 Required External Connectors for the RP Controller Expansion Modules
31.19 Required External Connectors for the

RP Controller Expansion Modules
This section provides information on the external connectors that are required for
the power supply input, outputs, and digital inputs of the RP controller expansion
modules.
The external connectors need to be ordered separately. The connectors can be
ordered in quantities of 50 or 100 from Schneider Electric using the below part
numbers. The connectors can also be ordered directly from Wieland using the
below reference numbers. For more information, see the Wieland Electric web
site.
Tighten the terminal screws and strain relief screws on the external connectors to
the tightening torque 0.3 to 0.5 Nm (2.7 to 4.4 lbf.in).
31.19.1 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD
Table: Required External Connectors
Use Part Reference Connecto Suitable Tightenin Marking Color of Minimum
number r type for cable g torque, coding order
diameters screws quantity
/housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)
Power SXWRPC 91.931.40 Female 5.6–11 0.3–0.5 L, PE, N Black 100

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
DALI SXWRPC 91.952.44 Male 8.5–12.5 0.3–0.5 N, PE, L, Pastel blue 50

inputs/outp CONWWLI 53.0 D2, D1
(0.34–0.49 (2.7–4.4) /White
uts GHTPD
) D2: DA+
D1: DA-
Digital SXWRPC 91.921.23 Female 3.4–5.5 0.3–0.5 1, 2 Light blue 100

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET

1169
31 Wiring
31.19.2 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD
/housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
Blind SXWRPC 91.942.40 Male 8.5–12.5 0.3–0.5 N, PE, 1, 2 Black 50

outputs CONWBL 53.1
(0.34–0.49 (2.7–4.4) 1: ↑ (UP) /Black
HV
)
2: ↓
(DOWN)

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET
31.19.3 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD
/housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
Blind SXWRPC 91.952.43 Male 8.5–12.5 0.3–0.5 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 Light blue 50

outputs CONWBLL 53.0
(0.34–0.49 (2.7–4.4) 5, 4, 3: Not /White
V
) used
2: M-
1: M+

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET

1170
31 Wiring
31.19.4 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD
/housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
Light SXWRPC 91.952.44 Male 8.5–12.5 0.3–0.5 N, PE, L, Pastel blue 50

outputs CONWWLI 53.0 D2, D1
(0.34–0.49 (2.7–4.4) /White
GHTPD
) D2: AO1..4
D1: COM

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET
31.19.5 RP-C-EXT-DALI
/ housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
DALI SXWRPC 91.922.34 Male 6–7.7 0.3–0.5 D2, D1 Pastel blue 100
inputs/outp CONWWLI 53.0
(0.24–0.30 (2.7–4.4) D2: DA+ /White
uts GHT
)
D1: DA-

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET

1171
31 Wiring
31.19.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4
/ housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
Light SXWRPC 91.922.33 Male 6–7.7 0.3–0.5 2, 1 Light blue 100

outputs CONWWLI 53.0
(0.24–0.30 (2.7–4.4) 2: AO1..4 /White
GHT2
)
1: COM

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET
31.19.7 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD
/housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
Blind SXWRPC 91.952.40 Male 8.5–12.5 0.3–0.5 N, PE, 1, Black 50

outputs CONWBL 53.1 2, 3
(0.34–0.49 (2.7–4.4) /Black
SMI
) 1: L
2: I+
3: I-

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET

1172
31 Wiring
31.19.8 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD
/housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
Blind SXWRPC 91.952.43 Male 8.5–12.5 0.3–0.5 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 Ligth blue 50

outputs CONWBLL 53.0
(0.34–0.49 (2.7–4.4) 5: I+ /White
V
)
4: I-
3: Not
used
2: 0 V
1: 24 V

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET
31.19.9 RP-C-EXT-REL-4
/housing
mm Nm (lbf.in)
(inches)

supply CONWWP 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
input OW
)
Relay SXWRPC 91.932.40 Male 5.6–11 0.3–0.5 N, PE, L Black 100

outputs CONWWR 53.1
(0.22–0.43 (2.7–4.4) /Black
EL
)

inputs CONWDI 53.0
(0.14–0.21 (2.7–4.4) 1: DI1..4 /White
)
2: RET

1173
31 Wiring
31.20 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules
31.20 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP

Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the RP
controller expansion Zigbee DALI and 0-10V modules.
Table: Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP Controller Expansion Zigbee DALI and 0-10V Modules
Terminals Minimum Cross- Maximum Cross- Maximum Cable Length
sectional Area sectional Area
Power input
L (in) 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) According to local wiring
rules
N (in) 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) According to local wiring
rules
0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) According to local wiring
rules
Power output
L (out) 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) According to local wiring
rules
N (out) 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) According to local wiring
rules
0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) According to local wiring
rules
DALI light output
DA+ 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) For more information, see
section 31.21 “Wire Sizes
and Lengths for the DALI
Bus of the Zigbee DALI
Module” on page 1175.
DA- 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) For more information, see
section 31.21 “Wire Sizes
and Lengths for the DALI
Bus of the Zigbee DALI
0-10V light output
0-10V AO 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) 100 m
COM 0.75 mm² (18 AWG) 1.5 mm² (15 AWG) 100 m

1174
31 Wiring
31.21 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the Zigbee DALI Module
31.21 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI

Bus of the Zigbee DALI Module
bus of the Zigbee DALI module (RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI).
The DALI bus is connected to the Light outputs of the Zigbee DALI module. The
Light outputs have two terminals, labeled DA+ and DA-, to which the two-wire
bus is connected.
Only copper wires should be used for the DALI bus.
Table: Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the Zigbee DALI Module
Minimum Cross-sectional Area Cable Length
0.75 mm² (18 AWG) Up to 150 m (492 ft)
1.0 mm² (17 AWG) Up to 200 m (656 ft)
1.5 mm² (15 AWG) Up to 300 m (984 ft)

1175
31 Wiring
31.22 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the KNX Modbus Gateway
31.22 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the KNX

Modbus Gateway
This section provides recommendations on wire sizes and lengths for the KNX
Modbus gateway (RP-C-EXT-KNX).
Table: Wire Sizes and Lengths for the KNX Modbus Gatway
Terminals Minimum Cross- Maximum Cross- Maximum Cable
sectional Area sectional Area Length
Power input 0.34 mm² (22 AWG) 2.5 mm² (14 AWG) No limit
terminalsa
Modbus terminalsb 0.34 mm² (22 AWG) 2.5 mm² (14 AWG) No limit
a) Upper 3-position screw terminal block.

b) Lower 3-position screw terminal block.
For more information, see section 20.3 “KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals
and Connector” on page 917.

1176
31 Wiring
31.23 Communication Port Wiring

For AS-P servers, the LonWorks wiring is made to the removable terminal blocks.
The connections for RS-485 are made to the removable terminal blocks, and the
connections for Ethernet and USB are made to the electronics module.
For AS-B servers, the connections for RS-485 are made to the removable
terminal blocks and can be done before the AS-B server is installed on the DIN
rail. The connections for Ethernet and USB are made directly to the device.
BACnet/IP Controller – MP controllers have communication ports for Ethernet
and USB as well as an RS-485 port dedicated for the sensor bus. All connections
are made directly to the device.
BACnet/IP Controller – IP-IO modules have communication ports for Ethernet
and USB. All connections are made directly to the device.
BACnet/IP Controller – RP controllers have communication ports for Ethernet
and USB, as well as two configurable RS-485 ports, which can be configured for
the sensor bus, room bus, or Modbus network. All connections are made directly
to the device.
RP controller expansion modules have communication ports for room bus. All
connections are made directly to the device.
Operator Display devices have communication ports for Ethernet and USB. All
connections are made directly to the device.
31.23.1 RS-485 Communications

The information in this section provides recommendations for the RS-485
interface port configuration between the automation server and RS-485 network
devices. This information is intended to supplement existing guides for the
automation server and for the various RS-485 network devices.
For more information, see section 32.1 “RS-485 Communications” on page 1189.
31.23.2 LonWorks Communications

Twisted pair cables should be used between the FTT-10 interface on the AS-P
server terminal base and the TP/FT-10 LonWorks network. The cables should
conform to the standard EN 50173-1.
31.23.3 USB Connections

Standard USB cables should be used for connection to the USB host and device
ports on the automation server, BACnet/IP device, and Operator Display. The
recommended maximum cable length is 3 m (10 ft).

1177
31 Wiring
NOTICE
Do not use a USB cable that exceeds 3 m (10 ft).
31.23.4 Ethernet Connections

Standard Ethernet cables with RJ45 connectors should be used for connection to
the Ethernet 10/100 port(s) on the automation server, BACnet/IP device, and
Operator Display.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect any type of Power over Ethernet (PoE) Power Sourcing
Equipment (PSE) to the Ethernet ports.
Unshielded cables
Standard UTP Ethernet cables are recommended for the network connections.
Shielded cables
Shielded network cables can be used on cable sections extending through noisy
electrical environments. However, shielded network cables cause ground loops.
The grounded RJ45 network connector passes the local ground from a device to
the shield of the cable, which in turn passes to the ground of the subsequent
device. The devices can be automation servers, BACnet/IP devices, or third-
party IP controllers, interface devices, network switches or routers, or telecom
switch equipment.
Shield-induced ground loops can cause the following problems:
• Degraded performance on communications network
• Interruption of communication-dependent process control execution
• Unstable operation and/or restart of the two devices
• Damage to one or both devices
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
• Ensure adequate electrical bonding is provided between the grounds serving
the two device locations to achieve and maintain equal potentials (0 V)
between the two devices.
• Confirm equal potential is maintained when equipment in both areas has
power applied and actively functioning.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage or loss
of communication.

1178
31 Wiring
The objective is to minimize the potential problems created with ground loops in
the facility. The effects and risks with ground loops are reduced when the devices
are served from the same AC power distribution panel and the devices are in the
same general area of the facilities' metal and grounding structure.
31.23.5 Sensor Bus Connections

Cat 5 (or higher) cables with eight conductors (four twisted pairs) and RJ45
connectors should be used for connection to the BACnet/IP controller's RS-485
port that is used for the sensor bus and the RJ45 port(s) on the SpaceLogic
Sensor devices. On an MP controller, the cable is connected to the Sensor Bus
port. On an RP-C controller, the cable is connected to the RS-485 port that is
configured for the sensor bus. By default, the RP-C controller's Sensor Bus port
(RS-485 Com A) is configured for the sensor bus. For more information, see
The wire size (cross-sectional area) should be 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²).
The sensor bus cables should be rated for the target environment. For example,
when the BACnet/IP controller is installed in space handling conditioned air or
return air, the cables must be plenum-rated to meet rigorous fire safety
standards. The cables should be located away from external electrical noise
sources such as high voltage cables or signal cables, which can cause data
communication problems. The maximum total length of the sensor bus is 61 m
(200 ft).
NOTICE
Unshielded cables
UTP (unshielded twisted pair) cables are recommended for the sensor bus.
Shielded cables
Shielded cables are not useful to use for the sensor bus, because the RJ45
receptacles on the BACnet/IP controllers and SpaceLogic Sensor devices do not
support grounding of the shield.
31.23.6 Room Bus Connections

and window blinds.
connectors should be used for connection to the RP-C controller's RS-485 port
that is configured for the room bus and the RJ45 port(s) on the RP controller

1179
31 Wiring
expansion modules and multi-sensors. By default, the RP-C controller's Room

Bus port (RS-485 Com B) is configured for the room bus. For more information,
see section 16.8 “RP-C Communication Ports” on page 578.
The room bus cables should be rated for the target environment. For example,
when the RP-C controller is installed in space handling conditioned air or return
air, the cables must be plenum-rated to meet rigorous fire safety standards. The
cables should be located away from external electrical noise sources such as
high voltage cables or signal cables, which can cause data communication
problems. The maximum total length of the sensor bus is 72 m (236 ft).
NOTICE
Unshielded cables
UTP (unshielded twisted pair) cables are recommended for the room bus.
Shielded cables
Shielded cables are not useful to use for the room bus, because the RJ45
receptacles on the RP-C controllers and RP controller expansion modules and
multi-sensors do not support grounding of the shield.
31.23.7 Modbus Network Connections

You need to configure which RS-485 port on the RP-C controller to use for the
Modbus network. You can configure to use either the Sensor Bus port (RS-485
Com A) or Room Bus port (RS-485 Com B). For more information, see section
16.8 “RP-C Communication Ports” on page 578.
connectors should be used for connection to the RP-C controller's RS-485
(RJ45) port. For more information, see section 31.24 “RJ45 Pinout for the RS-
485 Ports of the RP-C Controller ” on page 1182.
The room bus cables should be rated for the target environment. For example,
when the RP-C controller is installed in space handling conditioned air or return
air, the cables must be plenum-rated to meet rigorous fire safety standards. The
cables should be located away from external electrical noise sources such as
high voltage cables or signal cables, which can cause data communication
problems. The maximum total length of the Modbus (RS-485) network is 72 m
(236 ft).

1180
31 Wiring
NOTICE
m (236 ft).
Unshielded cables
UTP (unshielded twisted pair) cables are recommended for the RP-C Modbus
network.
Shielded cables
Shielded cables are not useful to use for the RP-C Modbus network, because the
RJ45 receptacles on the RP-C controllers do not support grounding of the shield.

1181
31 Wiring
31.24 RJ45 Pinout for the RS-485 Ports of the RP-C Controller
31.24 RJ45 Pinout for the RS-485 Ports of the

RP-C Controller
This section provides the RJ45 pinout for the RP-C controller's two RS-485 ports.
The RS-485 ports are labelled Sensor Bus (RS-485 Com A) and Room Bus (RS-
485 Com B). For more information, see section 16.8 “RP-C Communication
Ports” on page 578. The RJ45 pinout is identical for the two RS-485 ports.
Figure: RJ45 pinout for the RP-C controller RS-485 ports
Table: RJ45 Pinout for the RP-C Controller RS-485 Ports

RJ45 Pin Description
1 Not connected
2 Not connected
3 RS485+ (A)
4 +24 VDC
5 Ground
6 RS485– (B)
7 +24 VDC
8 Ground

1182
31 Wiring
31.24 RJ45 Pinout for the RS-485 Ports of the RP-C Controller
The wiring recommendations for the RS-485 ports depend on the type of network
the ports are used for. For more information, see section 31.23 “Communication
Port Wiring” on page 1177.

1183
32 RS-485 Communications
Topics
RS-485 Communications
Generic RS-485 Network Devices
Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic
RS-485 Devices
Configuration Selection for Generic RS-485 Network
Devices
Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 1
Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device
Configuration 7 and 8
Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)
Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only
(MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)
Cable Routing
Cable Selection
32 b3 BACnet Devices
General b3 BACnet Device Properties
b3 BACnet Device Configuration
Excess Unit Load (b3 BACnet Devices)
MNB BACnet Devices
General MNB BACnet Device Properties
MNB Configurations
MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point Bias (MNB Source)
MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply
Source)
MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias
Power Supply Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3
MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point Bias (Automation
Server Provided Source)
MS/TP Data and Shield Connections
Existing MNB Systems Transition
Network Check-Up (Examination and Monitoring)
Legrand Power Meters
General Legrand Power Meter Properties
Legrand Configurations
Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus with No Bias
Requirement
Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus with Minimal
Bias
Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with Single End-
point Bias
Legrand Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-
point Bias
Power Supply Selection for Legrand Configuration 4
32 Excess Unit Load (Legrand Power Meters)
(Legrand Power Meters)
Cable Selection (Legrand Power Meters)
Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx Series Devices
General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device Properties
VT/VZ7xxx Configurations
VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-point Bias
(Automation Server Provided Source)
VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External
Supply Source)
Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2
Excess Unit Load (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)
(Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)
32.1 RS-485 Communications

The information in this section provides recommendations for the RS-485
interface port configuration between the automation server and RS-485 network
devices. This information is intended to supplement existing guides for the
automation server and for the various RS-485 network devices.
The guidelines focus on the arrangement of the electrical interface to the RS-485
port in regard to biasing, termination, cable selection, cable length, and cable
routing. There are also guidelines presented for maximum unit load (node count)
and common mode voltage tolerance.
The guidelines are available through a collection of application notes. Most of the
application notes target specific product families such as the b3 BACnet devices,
MNB BACnet devices, Legrand power meters, and Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx
series devices. There is also an application note directed toward generic RS-485
network devices.
32.1.1 Generic RS-485 Network Devices

This application note provides recommendations and guidelines for the RS-485
interface port configuration between the automation server and generic RS-485
network devices (Modbus or MS/TP). This information is intended to supplement
the instructions you receive with the various RS-485 network devices. The
guidelines focus on the arrangement of the electrical interface to the automation
server's RS-485 port in regards to biasing, termination, cable selection, cable
lengths, and cable routing. The guidelines on maximum unit load (node count)
and common mode voltage tolerance are associated with AS-P and AS-B
servers.
For more information, see section 32.2 “Generic RS-485 Network Devices” on
page 1191.
32.1.2 b3 BACnet Devices

This application note provides recommendations and guidelines for the
configuration of RS-485 communications between the automation server and b3
BACnet devices. This information is intended to supplement the existing
configuration documents, such as the “b3 BACnet and b4920 Controller
Technical Reference (30-3001-862)”. The guidelines focus on the arrangement of
the electrical interface to the automation server's RS-485 port in regards to
biasing, termination, cable selection, cable lengths, and cable routing. The
guidelines on maximum unit load (node count) and common mode voltage
tolerance are associated with AS-P and AS-B servers.
For more information, see section 32.18 “b3 BACnet Devices” on page 1235.
32.1.3 MNB BACnet Devices

configuration of RS-485 communications between the automation server and
MNB BACnet devices. This information is intended to supplement the existing
configuration documents such as the “TAC I/A Series MicroNet BACnet Wiring

1189
and Networking Practices Guide (F-27360-10)”. The guidelines focus on the

arrangement of the electrical interface to the automation server's RS-485 port in
regards to biasing, termination, cable selection, cable lengths and cable routing.
The guidelines on maximum unit load (node count) and common mode voltage
For more information, see section 32.22 “MNB BACnet Devices” on page 1243.
32.1.4 Legrand Power Meters

configuration of RS-485 Modbus communications between the automation server
and Legrand power meters. The recommendations are based on an investigation
of Legrand meter models 04677, 04680, 04684, and 14669. The investigation
was used to discover isolation and unit load characteristics along with
requirements of the RS-485 transceiver for external failsafe biasing on the RS-
485 network and to test communications operation with the meters under
recommended configurations. This information is intended to supplement the
product information provided with the Legrand meters. The guidelines focus on
the arrangement of the electrical interface to the automation server's RS-485 port
in regards to biasing, termination, cable selection, cable lengths and cable
routing. The guidelines on maximum unit load (node count) and common mode
voltage tolerance are associated with AS-P and AS-B servers.
For more information, see section 32.33 “Legrand Power Meters” on page 1268.
32.1.5 Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx Series Devices

Viconics room controllers. The recommendations are associated with the
Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx series thermostats / room controllers configured with the
Viconics plug-on MS/TP network adapter. This information is intended to
supplement the instructions you receive with the various RS-485 network
devices. The guidelines focus on the arrangement of the electrical interface to the
automation server's RS-485 port in regards to biasing, termination, cable
selection, cable lengths, and cable routing. The guidelines on maximum unit load
(node count) and common mode voltage tolerance are associated with AS-P and
AS-B servers.
For more information, see section 32.44 “Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx Series
Devices” on page 1293.

1190
32.2 Generic RS-485 Network Devices

This application note provides recommendations and guidelines for the RS-485
interface port configuration between the automation server and generic RS-485
network devices (Modbus or MS/TP). This information is intended to supplement
the instructions you receive with the various RS-485 network devices. The
guidelines focus on the arrangement of the electrical interface to the automation
server's RS-485 port in regards to biasing, termination, cable selection, cable
lengths, and cable routing. The guidelines on maximum unit load (node count)
and common mode voltage tolerance are associated with AS-P and AS-B
servers.
Figure: RS-485 interface between an AS-P server and a generic RS-485 network device
The recommendations listed here pertain to the electrical load characteristics.

The node count limits are related to the electrical interface, termination, biasing
and cable characteristics. The final node count limit may be lower as a function of
individual product configurations, resources or performance limits. Consult with
the product reference manuals, installation instructions, and guidelines for the
various RS-485 network device products to determine the system configuration
and capacity objectives. This information is intended to supplement the existing
product documentation. The recommendations here will only maintain or reduce
the product documented node capacity (on a single bus) and/or the length of the
bus. The various capacities and distances described in the product can
frequently operate acceptably. However, some projects may encounter
environment and cabling characteristics where a reduction of tolerance presents
issues. The intention here is to adjust the configuration recommendations to
consider the influences on the network load and cable length with the objective of
operating within the margins defined by the TIA-485A standard and the
transceiver manufacturers' datasheets.

1191
32.2.1 Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus

with Generic RS-485 Devices
To make appropriate recommendations, it is necessary to first collect some
information about the intended configuration. The worksheet contains questions,
which identify some specific attributes that affect the proposed configuration.
Review the installation guide and manuals for the products to be connected to the
RS-485 port on the automation server. Use the product manuals along with your
project details to answer the questions in the worksheet.
For more information, see section 32.3 “Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485
Bus with Generic RS-485 Devices” on page 1194.
32.2.2 Configuration Selection for Generic RS-485

Network Devices
Use the answers from the worksheet together with these flowcharts to determine
the recommended RS-485 bus configuration for your generic RS-485 devices.
For more information, see section 32.4 “Configuration Selection for Generic RS-
485 Network Devices” on page 1196.
32.2.3 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network

Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load
According to the TIA-485A standard, a single unit load is equivalent to a 12 kohm
impedance attached to the + and – data lines (connected to ground or supply). A
1/8UL transceiver would have an impedance of 96 kohm. The TIA-485A defined
total network load limit of 32UL is based on a common mode load resistance of
375 ohm connecting both the + and – data lines to ground (or CMV source). The
standard requires the RS-485 drivers be capable of driving a network load of
32UL along with a Common-Mode Voltage (CMV) difference of -7 V to +12 V and
produce a guaranteed minimum of 1.5 V transmit signal level. Such a full UL load
with severe CMV conditions exhausts the maximum drive current of 60 mA
provided by all standard RS-485 drivers. The specified minimum of 375 ohm
resistance for the common mode load is the resulting resistance seen when 32
transceivers with 12 kohm input impedance are placed in parallel (12,000 / 375 =
32).
For more information, see section 32.14 “Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network
Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)” on
page 1228.
32.2.4 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated

Devices Only
If the network is comprised exclusively of devices with isolated RS-485 interfaces
with the only exception being the automation server, it is recommended that the
maximum unit load limit can be stretched higher. It is recommended that a
maximum load extension should be 16UL (50% overload) giving a total expanded

1192
unit load limit of 48UL. Using a maximum network load of 48UL and subtracting
the 24UL for the bias network and the automation server leaves 24UL available
for the RS-485 devices. With the example device load of 0.18UL each, it is
suggested that the isolated bus arrangement could support the full collection of
up to 127 devices.
For more information, see section 32.15 “Expanded Unit Load with Network of
Isolated Devices Only (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)” on page 1230.
32.2.5 Cable Routing

The RS-485 network cable should be routed in a continuous daisy chain bus
configuration. There should not be any stub connections, stars or ring
configurations. The bussed cable should pass through each node to be
connected with no splits or branches in the cable network.
For more information, see section 32.16 “Cable Routing” on page 1231.
32.2.6 Cable Selection

This is one of the most important selections having significant impact on the
performance and reliability of the RS-485 network being installed. An incorrect
cable selection can be difficult and expensive to reverse. The decision should not
be made on previous examples of seeing some alternate non-compliant cable
work.
For more information, see section 32.17 “Cable Selection” on page 1232.

1193
32.3 Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485 Devices
32.3 Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485

Bus with Generic RS-485 Devices
To make appropriate recommendations, it is necessary to first collect some
information about the intended configuration. The worksheet contains questions,
which identify some specific attributes that affect the proposed configuration.
Review the installation guide and manuals for the products to be connected to the
RS-485 port on the automation server. Use the product manuals along with your
project details to answer the questions in the worksheet.
After answering the questions on this worksheet, work through the configuration
selection flowcharts based on your answers. The flowcharts use your worksheet
answers to provide you with a recommended configuration. For more information,
see section 32.4 “Configuration Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Devices”
on page 1196.
Q1 Failsafe Receiver
Does the product use an RS-485 transceiver with integrated idle-state failsafe
receiver?
Integrated failsafe refers to a receiver that will provide the logic 1 level output
when presented with any voltage of 0 V or above from an idle and terminated
bus. This does not refer to transceivers with what is called open wire failsafe.
Those transceivers represent an earlier class of devices that simply provided a
small current pull-up and pull-down in the chip. That integrated bias will not
withstand DC termination and the resulting near 0 V level would again produce
indeterminate output. You must assume a basic transceiver and answer No to
this question (Q1) if the failsafe function cannot be confirmed as a feature of the
transceiver being used. This will be the case with many third-party RS-485
devices.
This is a very beneficial feature and worthy of pursuing confirmed answers. This
feature avoids the requirement for strong bias and the additional restrictions on
node count and distance.
If you have a mixture of devices connected to the automation server and any of
these do not have a failsafe receiver, answer No here. You must treat the entire
bus as a basic RS-485 and operate the bus with the basic rules and restrictions.
Q2 Data Transmission Speed

What data transmission speed will be used for the RS-485 bus?
This will normally be one of the following selections: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
or 76800 bps.
Data rates of 19200 bps and lower offer better immunity to transmission line
effects. These data rates allow flexibility with the bias and termination options to
avoid some of the guideline restrictions they inject.
Q3 Distance
What is the objective on maximum length of the RS-485 bus?
Q4 Isolated Interface
Does the device provide an isolated RS-485 interface?

1194
32.3 Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485 Devices
Most product installation guides will make reference to the feature of isolated RS-
485 interface if the product contains such a feature. It may be called galvanic
isolation.
Q5 Published Unit Load Value

What is the published unit load rating for the RS-485 device to be installed?
Many times this unit load rating is not provided and instead the guide will simply
identify the maximum number of devices that can be attached to a single copper
segment (without repeaters). Divide 32 by the listed maximum node count to
determine the implied unit load rating.
Many product guides do not include the unit load impact from local bias resistors
supplied within the product. While the local bias resistors are typically considered
weak (high resistance) bias sources with little impact, they actually can have a
significant contribution when used in conjunction with fractional unit load
transceivers (such as 1/4UL and 1/8UL). The following question (Q6) uses a
resistance measurement to determine the actual unit load presented by a sample
device. This will frequently show a higher unit load value than the published
number. It is recommended that you should use the higher UL of the two UL
values (published or measured).
Q6a Measured Resistance

With no electrical connections to the product, what is the measured resistance
between the RS-485 low-side (-) signal and the communications common?
On a standard non-isolated product, the communications common will typically
be the recommended ground connection on the product.
On an isolated RS-485 product, the common will typically be a third terminal on
the RS-485 interface, for example, REF, COMMON, SHLD, RETURN.
Q6b Measured/Calculated Unit Load Value

What is the measured/calculated unit load of the device?
Calculate the measured unit load by dividing 12,000 by the measured resistance
in ohm (from Q6a).
Example: On a sample b3865V controller, the resistance measured between
COM- (terminal 17) and the Ground connection (terminal 11) is 35,760 ohm
(12,000 / 35,760 = 0.336 UL).
Enter that calculated result as answer for Q6b.
For the proposed configurations, it is recommended that you use the larger of the
two unit load values (Q5 or Q6b).

1195
32.4 Configuration Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Devices
32.4 Configuration Selection for Generic RS-

485 Network Devices
Use the answers from the worksheet together with these flowcharts to determine
the recommended RS-485 bus configuration for your generic RS-485 devices.
For more information, see section 32.3 “Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485
Bus with Generic RS-485 Devices” on page 1194.
32.4.1 Flowcharts
Use Flowchart 1 below as a starting point for the selection of a recommended
configuration.
Figure: Flowchart 1

1196
Figure: Flowchart 2 – no failsafe receivers and the data rate is 19,200 bps or less
Figure: Flowchart 3 – no failsafe receivers and the data rate is greater than 19,200 bps

1197
32.4.2 Generic RS-485 Network Device

Configuration 1
This configuration is recommended if the following conditions apply to the RS-
485 network devices to be connected to the automation server's RS-485 port:
• All RS-485 network devices have failsafe receivers.
• Not all RS-485 network devices have isolated RS-485 interfaces.
For more information, see section 32.5 “Generic RS-485 Network Device
Configuration 1” on page 1201.

Configuration 2
• All RS-485 network devices have isolated RS-485 interfaces.

Configuration 3
485 network and the devices to be connected to the automation server's RS-485
port:
• Not all RS-485 network devices have failsafe receivers.
• The maximum data rate required is 19,200 bps or lower.
• The maximum network cable length required is 150 m (500 ft) or less.

Configuration 4
port:

1198

Configuration 5
port:
• The maximum data rate required is greater than 19,200 bps.
• The maximum network cable length required depends on the size of the
cable:
– 150 m (500 ft) or less with 24 AWG (0.20 mm²)

Configuration 6
port:
cable:

1199

Configuration 7
port:
cable:
– greater than 150 m (500 ft) with 24 AWG (0.20 mm²)

Configuration 8
port:
cable:
32.4.10 Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485

Network Device Configuration 7 and 8
The power required from the 5 V DC supply for the bias circuit is extremely small
(approximately 5 mA) so just about any small isolated 5 V DC supply will have
more than necessary power rating. A low noise power supply with an output
isolated from local ground is recommended to minimize the injection of
differential noise onto the bus.
For more information, see section 32.13 “Power Supply Selection for Generic
RS-485 Network Device Configuration 7 and 8” on page 1226.

1200
32.5 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 1
32.5 Generic RS-485 Network Device

Configuration 1
If all the devices being connected to the automation server's RS-485 port provide
failsafe receivers, the configuration becomes very simple and no node or
distance reductions are called for. The failsafe receivers can typically operate
with no added bias resistors.
Connect a 120 ohm termination resistor across the + and - data lines at the head
end of the bus (typically at the automation server). Connect another 120 ohm
termination resistor across the + and - data lines on the last node at the far end of
the bus.
Connect the shield drain wire to earth ground terminal rail in the panel with the
automation server. This is the only ground connection of the shield for the
complete cable segment. Connect the RET terminal (see the figure below) on the
automation server to the ground rail in the panel using a 12 AWG (3.31 mm²) to
18 AWG (0.82 mm²) wire.
If the network has a mix of isolated and non-isolated devices, the shield terminal
or communications ground terminal of the isolated devices should be connected
to the shield. Refer to the device specific instructions.
The shield drain wires are connected together at each device, allowing the shield
to continue on past the devices for the full length of the bus.
The example diagram below shows the alternate RS-485 terminal block
connections for the different automation server models.
The example diagram below shows the RS-485 Com B connections on the AS-P
and AS-B servers. The guidelines are the same for Com A.

1201
Figure: RS-485 generic device configuration 1 – terminated bus, no bias required, non-
isolated interfaces
The unit load rating will determine the recommended maximum number of nodes
you should install on this copper segment. Select the higher unit load value
between answers Q5 and Q6B. For more information, see section 32.3
“Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485 Devices” on
page 1194. The standard RS-485 unit load budget is 31.5 after subtracting the
0.5 for the automation server. Divide 31.5 by the UL value (from Q5 or Q6b). The
result is the maximum recommended node count in regards to bus loading.
Example: If the answer to Q5 is 0.25 and the answer to Q6b is 0.32, use the
value 0.32. Calculate the maximum recommended node count as 31.5 / 0.32 =

1202
98 nodes. It is recommended that you use the calculated 98 node maximum limit
instead of the 126 node value suggested by the 0.25UL published UL load rating.
It is likely that the node has added bias resistors that are not considered in the
0.25 published value.
IMPORTANT: The recommended limits on RS-485 bus node counts
discussed here pertain to hardware bias and unit load considerations only.
The recommended maximum node count may be further limited based on
product and system version.
For this terminated configuration with no biasing, the maximum cable length may
extend to the full standard length of 1200 m (4000 ft).

1203

Configuration 2
If all the devices being connected to the automation server's RS-485 port provide
failsafe receivers, the configuration becomes very simple and no node or
distance reductions are called for. The failsafe receivers can typically operate
with no added bias resistors.
the bus.
18 AWG (0.82 mm²) wire.
The shield drain wires from the cable segments are connected to the RS-485
reference/common terminal at each RS-485 network device.

1204
Figure: RS-485 generic device configuration 2 – terminated bus, no bias required, isolated
interfaces
The unit load rating will determine the recommended maximum number of nodes
you should install on this copper segment. Select the higher unit load value
between answers Q5 and Q6B. For more information, see section 32.3
“Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485 Devices” on
page 1194. If all devices on the bus segment are isolated RS-485 interfaces
(except the automation server), it is recommended that we can boost the starting
unit load budget from 32UL to 48UL. This extra UL capacity is related to the fact
that the isolated interfaces provide an avoidance of Common Mode Voltage. For
more information, see section 32.15 “Expanded Unit Load with Network of

1205
Subtracting the automation server unit load of 0.5 leaves 47.5 for the isolated RS-
485 nodes. Divide 47.5 by the UL value (from Q5 or Q6b). The result is the
maximum recommended node count in regards to bus loading.
If the answer to Q5 is 1.0 and the answer to Q6b is 1.25, use the value 1.25.
Calculate the maximum recommended node count as 47.5 / 1.25 = 38 nodes. It is
recommended that you use the calculated 38 node maximum limit instead of the
47.5 node value suggested by the 1.0 UL published UL load rating. It is likely that
the node has added bias resistors that are not considered in the 1.0 published
value.
For this terminated configuration with no biasing, the maximum cable length may
extend to the full standard length of 1200 m (4000 ft).

1206

Configuration 3
port:
For data rates of 19,200 bps or lower, and network lengths of 150 m (500 ft) or
less, it is suggested that termination can be omitted. Omission of termination
avoids the requirement to add strong (low resistance) network bias. Such bias
imposes reductions on the node capacity and also reduces cable length (if bias is
applied from a single end).
Connect a 3300 ohm bias resistor from the TX/RX+ terminal to the Bias+ terminal
on the automation server (see the figure below). Connect another 3300 ohm bias
resistor from the TX/RX- terminal to the RET terminal on the automation server.
complete cable segment. Connect the RET terminal on the automation server to
the ground rail in the panel using a 12 AWG (3.31 mm²) to 18 AWG (0.82 mm²)
wire.
and AS-B servers. The guidelines are the same for Com A. When failsafe bias
resistors are required on the Com A network, the pull-up voltage is obtained from
the Bias+ terminal.

1207
Figure: Generic RS-485 network device configuration 3 – non-terminated bus, 3300 ohm
bias, non-isolated interfaces
The unit load rating of the network product will determine the recommended
maximum number of nodes you should install on this copper segment. The
standard unit load budget for an RS-485 segment is 32UL.
We must determine the UL node budget available after subtracting the load
imposed by the bias resistors and the automation server. The recommended

1208
3300 bias resistors present a unit load of 3.6 (12,000 / 3,300). The automation
server adds 0.5UL.
For a bus with non-isolated interfaces, the remaining node budget is: 32 - 3.6 -
0.5 = 27.9UL
For the network device load, select the higher unit load value between answers
Q5 and Q6b. For more information, see section 32.3 “Worksheet for
Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485 Devices” on page 1194.
Divide the node budget value by the device UL value (Q5 or Q6b, whichever is
greater). The result is the maximum recommended node count in regards to bus
loading.
Example: If the answer to Q5 was 0.25 and the answer to Q6b was 0.32, use the
value 0.32.
For non-isolated interfaces, the maximum node count is: 27.9 / 0.32 = 87 nodes
In this unterminated configuration with a 3300 ohm bias, the extra 3.6UL unit load
(when combined with a full 32UL load of network devices) presents only a
minimal impact on the reduction of CMV. For more information, see section 32.14
“Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load
(MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)” on page 1228.

1209

Configuration 4
port:
For data rates of 19,200 bps or lower, and network lengths of 150 m (500 ft) or
less, it is suggested that termination can be omitted. Omission of termination
avoids the requirement to add strong (low resistance) network bias. Such bias
imposes reductions on the node capacity and also reduces cable length (if bias is
applied from a single end).
automation server This is the only ground connection of the shield for the
wire.
the Bias+ terminal.

1210
Figure: Generic RS-485 network device configuration 4 – non-terminated bus, 3300 ohm
bias, isolated interfaces
The unit load rating of the network product will determine the recommended
maximum number of nodes you should install on this copper segment. The
standard unit load budget for an RS-485 segment is 32UL. If all devices on the
bus segment are isolated RS-485 interfaces (except the automation server), it is
recommended that we can boost the starting budget to 48UL. This extra UL
capacity is related to fact that the isolated interfaces provide an avoidance of
Common Mode Voltage. For more information, see section 32.15 “Expanded Unit

1211
Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)”
on page 1230.
imposed by the bias resistors and the automation server. The recommended
3300 bias resistors present a unit load of 3.6 (12,000 / 3,300). The automation
server adds 0.5UL.
For a bus with all isolated interfaces, the remaining node budget is: 48 - 3.6 - 0.5
= 43.9UL
For the network device load, select the higher unit load value between answers
Q5 and Q6b. For more information, see section 32.3 “Worksheet for
loading.
value 0.32.
For all isolated interfaces, the maximum node count is: 43.9 / 0.32 = 137 nodes
In this unterminated configuration with a 3300 ohm bias, the extra 3.6UL unit load
(when combined with a full 32UL load of network devices) presents only a
minimal impact on the reduction of CMV. For more information, see section 32.14
“Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load
(MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)” on page 1228.

1212

Configuration 5
port:
cable:
The third condition indicates that network termination is needed. The first
condition indicates the termination will cause a need for strong bias.
A strong external resistor bias (low resistance pull-up and pull-down) is required
to create a minimum +200 mV level (plus noise margin) across the data+ and
data- conductors for the full length of the bus when the network is idle (in
between all packets). The low resistance bias is needed to overcome the voltage
drop created by the wire resistance and current pulled by the termination
resistors. This is referenced as failsafe bias and is required because the
transceiver is of the earlier type with no integrated failsafe receiver function.
With the first and third conditions defined, there are two bias configuration
options to choose from. The choice relates to simplicity of the arrangement and
the maximum cable length needed (the fourth condition). This configuration uses
single end-point biasing. Dual end-point biasing is required to support cable
lengths up to 1200 m (4000 ft). For more information, see section 32.11 “Generic
RS-485 Network Device Configuration 7” on page 1219.
This configuration uses the bias supply output from the automation server to
generate bias on the bus from the single location where the automation server is
located (typically at the head end of the bus). AS-P servers and AS-B servers
provide a 5 V bias voltage supply, which supports 120 ohm termination resistors
at the two ends of the bus.
on the automatin server (see the figure below). Connect another 510 ohm bias
end of the bus (typically at the automation server). Connect another termination
resistor across the + and - data lines on the last node at the far end of the bus.
wire.

1213
the Bias+ terminal.
Figure: Generic RS-485 network device configuration 5 – terminated bus, single end-point
510 ohm bias, non-isolated interfaces
The addition of termination resistors to a network requiring failsafe bias resistors

creates a continuous current flow through the network in the idle condition. The

1214
result is a voltage divider network where the termination resistors create a

voltage drop in the bias resistors and network wire. The bus biasing from the
single point presents cable length limitations based on wire size as seen in the
following table. This table indicates the wire lengths where the starting (head
end) bias voltage created by the 510 ohm resistors has dropped to the minimum
bias voltage level due to the wire resistance.
Table: Recommended Maximum Cable Lengths and Associated Wire Sizes

Maximum Length Wire Size
150 m (500 ft) 24 AWG (0.20 mm²)
240 m (800 ft) 22 AWG (0.33 mm²)
The recommended node count for the configuration shown in the figure above is
determined using the following process.
The unit load rating of the individual network devices along with the remaining
available unit load budget will determine the recommended maximum number of
nodes you should install on this copper segment. The total unit load budget
specified in the RS-485 standard for all components connected to a bus segment
(communicating devices and bias resistors) is 32UL.
imposed by the bias resistors and the automation server. The single end-point
bias configuration presents a unit load of 23.5UL (12,000 / 510 = 23.5). The
automation server adds 0.5UL.
For a bus with non-isolated interfaces, the remaining node budget is: 32 - 23.5 -
0.5 = 8UL
We must divide our node budget by the device load value to determine node
count. For the network device load, select the higher unit load value between
answers Q5 and Q6b. For more information, see section 32.3 “Worksheet for
loading.
value 0.32.
For a network with any non-isolated devices, the maximum node count is: 8 /
0.32 = 25 nodes

1215

Configuration 6
port:
cable:
The third condition indicates that network termination is needed. The first
condition indicates the termination will cause a need for strong bias.
A strong external resistor bias (low resistance pull-up and pull-down) is required
to create a minimum +200 mV level (plus noise margin) across the data+ and
data- conductors for the full length of the bus when the network is idle (in
between all packets). The low resistance bias is needed to overcome the voltage
drop created by the wire resistance and current pulled by the termination
resistors. This is referenced as failsafe bias and is required because the
transceiver is of the earlier type with no integrated failsafe receiver function.
With the first and third conditions defined, there are two bias configuration
options to choose from. The choice relates to simplicity of the arrangement and
the maximum cable length needed (the fourth condition). This configuration uses
single end-point biasing. Dual end-point biasing is required to support cable
lengths up to 1200 m (4000 ft). For more information, see section 32.12 “Generic
RS-485 Network Device Configuration 8” on page 1223.
This configuration uses the bias supply output from the automation server to
generate bias on the bus from the single location where the automation server is
located (typically at the head end of the bus). AS-P servers and AS-B servers
provide a 5 V bias voltage supply, which supports 120 ohm termination resistors
at the two ends of the bus.
wire.

1216
the Bias+ terminal.
Figure: Generic RS-485 network device configuration 6 – terminated bus, single end-point
510 ohm bias, isolated interfaces
The addition of termination resistors to a network requiring failsafe bias resistors

creates a continuous current flow through the network in the idle condition. The
result is a voltage divider network where the termination resistors create a
voltage drop in the bias resistors and network wire. The bus biasing from the
single point presents cable length limitations based on wire size as seen in the
following table. This table indicates the wire lengths where the starting (head

1217
end) bias voltage created by the 510 ohm resistors has dropped to the minimum
bias voltage level due to the wire resistance.

150 m (500 ft) 24 AWG (0.20 mm²)
240 m (800 ft) 22 AWG (0.33 mm²)
(communicating devices and bias resistors) is 32UL. If all devices on the bus
segment have isolated RS-485 interfaces (excluding the automation server), it is
recommended that we can boost the basic budget limit of 32UL up to 48UL. This
extra 16UL (50%) capacity allowance is related to fact that the isolated interfaces
provide an avoidance of Common Mode Voltage. For more information, see
section 32.15 “Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (MNB
and Generic RS-485 Devices)” on page 1230.
imposed by the bias resistors and the automation server. The single end-point
bias configuration presents a unit load of 23.5UL (12,000 / 510 = 23.5). The
For a bus with all isolated interfaces, the remaining node budget is: 48 - 23.5 - 0.5
= 24UL
loading.
value 0.32.
For a network with all isolated devices, the maximum node count is: 24 / 0.32 =
75 nodes

1218

Configuration 7
port:
cable:
The first and third conditions above together require the use of dual end-point
biasing. Dual end-point bias applies a separate 5 V DC supply at each end of the
network to generate the RS-485 bias.
When using a AS-P server or AS-B server positioned near the head end of the
network (within 60 m or 200 ft), you can use the 5 V available on the Bias+
terminal to provide the head-end bias. You use an external 5 V DC power supply
to provide the bias at the far end of the network. The recommended power
supplies are discussed separately. For more information, see section 32.13
“Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 7
and 8” on page 1226.
Instead of a single pair of 510 ohm resistors, the dual end-point scheme uses a
pair of 1000 ohm resistances at each end. The dual end-point bias is the best
technique for avoiding the drop in the bias voltage over extended cable lengths
as you move away from the bias connection location. By applying the bias at the
same two locations where the termination is located, the arrangement maintains
an equal bias across the complete length of the cable.
The recommended location for the 5 V bias supplies is at the two extreme ends of
the network cable, but the bias voltage remains effective when the bias is applied
within 60 m (200 ft) of the end of the cable. This dual end-point bias configuration
supports the preferred termination resistor values of 120 ohm with one positioned
at each end of the cable. The unit load imposed by the dual end-point bias is
24UL (12,000 / (1,000 / 2) = 24).
Connect a 1000 ohm bias resistor from the TX/RX+ terminal (see the figure
below) to the Bias+ terminal on the AS-P server or AS-B server. Connect another
1000 ohm bias resistor from the TX/RX- terminal to the RET terminal on the AS-P
server or AS-B server. Connect an external 5 V DC power supply to the RS-485
bus pair through two 1000 ohm bias resistors at the far end of the cable.
the bus.
wire.

1219

1220
Figure: Generic RS-485 network device configuration 7 – 120 ohm terminated bus, dual
end-point 1000 ohm bias, non-isolated interfaces
The configuration shown in the figure above supports the maximum cable length
of 1200 m (4000 ft).

1221
(communicating devices and bias resistors) is 32UL.
imposed by the bias resistors and the automation server. The dual end-point bias
configuration presents a unit load of 24UL (12,000 / (1,000 / 2) = 24). The
For a bus with non-isolated interfaces, the remaining node budget is: 32 - 24 - 0.5
= 7.5UL
loading.
value 0.32.
For a network with any non-isolated devices, the maximum node count is: 7.5 /
0.32 = 23.4 nodes

1222

Configuration 8
port:
cable:
The first and third conditions above together require the use of dual end-point
biasing. Dual end-point bias applies a separate 5 V DC supply at each end of the
network to generate the RS-485 bias.
When using a AS-P server or AS-B server positioned near the head end of the
network (within 60 m or 200 ft), you can use the 5 V available on the Bias+
terminal to provide the head-end bias. You use an external 5 V DC power supply
to provide the bias at the far end of the network. The recommended power
supplies are discussed separately. For more information, see section 32.13
“Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 7
and 8” on page 1226.
Instead of a single pair of 510 ohm resistors, the dual end-point scheme uses a
pair of 1000 ohm resistances at each end. The dual end-point bias is the best
technique for avoiding the drop in the bias voltage over extended cable lengths
as you move away from the bias connection location. By applying the bias at the
same two locations where the termination is located, the arrangement maintains
an equal bias across the complete length of the cable.
The recommended location for the 5 V bias supplies is at the two extreme ends of
the network cable, but the bias voltage remains effective when the bias is applied
within 60 m (200 ft) of the end of the cable. This dual end-point bias configuration
supports the preferred termination resistor values of 120 ohm with one positioned
at each end of the cable. The unit load imposed by the dual end-point bias is
24UL (12,000 / (1,000 / 2) = 24).
the bus.
wire.

1223
Figure: Generic RS-485 network device configuration 8 – 120 ohm terminated bus, dual
end-point 1000 ohm bias, isolated interfaces
The configuration shown in the figure above supports the maximum cable length
of 1200 m (4000 ft).

1224
(communicating devices and bias resistors) is 32UL. If all devices on the bus
segment have isolated RS-485 interfaces (excluding the automation server), it is
recommended that we can boost the basic budget limit of 32UL up to 48UL. This
extra 16UL (50%) capacity allowance is related to fact that the isolated interfaces
provide an avoidance of Common Mode Voltage. For more information, see
section 32.15 “Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (MNB
and Generic RS-485 Devices)” on page 1230.
imposed by the bias resistors and the automation server. The dual end-point bias
configuration presents a unit load of 24UL (12,000 / (1,000 / 2) = 24). The
For a bus with all isolated interfaces, the remaining node budget is: 48 - 24 - 0.5 =
23.5UL
loading.
value 0.32.
For a network with all isolated devices, the maximum node count is: 23.5 / 0.32 =
73.4 nodes

1225
32.13 Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 7 and 8
32.13 Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-

485 Network Device Configuration 7 and
8
Table: Recommended Supply Specifications

Characteristics Recommendations
Type 5 V DC output isolated from local ground or

equipment connections
Output Voltage 5.00 V DC +/- 5% (or better)
Maximum Output Current 0.1 A to 1.5 A (0.5 W to 7.5 W) Any model

in this popular range
Minimum Output Current Operates/regulates down to 0 current (no

load required)
Maximum Output Ripple/Noise 150 mVpp (or less)
Safety/EMC Agency Approvals Applicable approvals for country of

application
Frequently, the most convenient power source for the 5 V DC bias supply will be
the 24 V AC typically powering the various RS-485 device products. A couple
options for the 24 V AC to Isolated 5 V DC power supply would include the
models PS-200-3-A-3-L and PS-200-3-A-3-N from Mamac Systems and the
model DCP-524 from Kele. Another isolated 5 V supply option with a smaller
package/footprint and lower cost would be the combination of the Altronix model
VR1TM5 regulator and the small (20 VA) Veris Industries X020ADA 24 V AC to
24 V AC isolation transformer. The figure below shows the Veris/Altronix
configuration.

1226
32.13 Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 7 and 8
Figure: Isolated 5 V DC power supply using Veris X020ADA and Altronix VR1TM5
Other manufacturers/models of 24VAC/24VAC isolation transformers can be

substituted to accommodate preferred package, size, local availability, and
approvals.
If the use of 115/230 V AC line voltage for the + 5 V DC supply is preferred, the
Veris X020ADA transformer can be replaced with a common 115 V/24 V or 230
V/24 V transformer. This can be a separate transformer of the same type used to
power the 24 V AC devices. However, the transformer size used for this
application can be as small as you have available. In this application, the
VR1TM5 presents a load of less than 1 VA. The transformer output used to
power the VR1TM5 should not be connected to any other device.

1227
32.14 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)
32.14 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network

(MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)
32).
The TIA-485A standard does not accommodate any special allowance or
exclusion for the addition of bias resistors. If you add load to the data lines (for
whatever purpose), it is part of the common mode load and must be considered
in the calculation of unit load on the network. In the same manner that 375 ohm
equals 32UL, 510 ohm resistance equals 23.5UL.
The accumulation of RS-485 node counts in excess of the standard defined limit
of 32UL does not alone create a violation prompting immediate inoperability. The
primary performance parameter affected by network load is the ability of the RS-
485 transmitter to output the minimum specified signal level of 1.5 V. Reduction
in output signal level starts with the addition of the first load connected and
reduces further as additional load is added. The 32UL boundary is simply the
standardized guaranteed specification limit where the manufacturers guarantee
the signal level will not have reduced below 1.5 V. As mentioned above, the 1.5 V
signal output is guaranteed not only with a 32UL load, but also with an elevated
common mode voltage (CMV of -7 V to +12 V). As the network exceeds the 32UL
limit, the tolerance for this CMV will decay. The following graph from the TIA-
TSB-89-A standards document shows the expected reduction in CMV as a
function of unit load on the bus.

1228
32.14 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)
Figure: Maximum number of unit loads versus common-mode voltage and REQ (From TIA
TSB-89-A 485 application guidelines
The REQ legend in the figure above refers to the resulting parallel load
resistance of two termination resistors. The common 120 ohm termination
produces 60 ohm and is shown by the REQ=60 cyan colored line. The cyan line
indicates a standard UL load limit of 32 with a CMV between -7 V and +12 V.
Extra current is required from the transmitter to overcome the common mode
voltage seen through the common mode load impedance (unit load). As node
count elevates, the tolerance for CMV pulls in as seen in the graph.
For example, if we take the 24UL of the bias network and add a collection of 127
nodes with each rated at 0.18UL, we would have a total network load of 47UL.
From the figure above, you can see that the specified minimum -7 V CMV will be
reduced to around -2.5 V and the normal +12 V will reduce to about +6.5 V.
When operating in a situation where CMV is avoided, the reduction in transceiver
CMV performance can be better tolerated. An isolated RS-485 bus configuration
(such as with the MNB BACnet devices) allows the nodes to be insulated from
local ground voltage differences which are a main source of sustained CMV on
the bus. The isolated bus allows each of the transmitters to move up/down to the
idle voltage of the bus.

1229
32.15 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)
32.15 Expanded Unit Load with Network of

Isolated Devices Only (MNB and
Generic RS-485 Devices)
up to 127 devices.
The extra unit load accommodation is unique to the isolated interface
configuration. The configuration is operating with a single non-isolated node (the
automation server) which acts as the single point reference for the CMV of the
network pair as imposed by the bias arrangement. If this configuration of isolated
device nodes is intermixed with any other products that are not isolated, the
configuration rules on the network node count must fall back to the limits
produced with the standard 32UL maximum total unit load.
If the standard specified unit load limit of 32 is applied, the node count calculation
is as follows:
• Subtracting 24UL from the starting budget of 32 gives a node budget of 8UL.
• Each of the example devices (with isolated RS-485 interfaces) presents a
RS-485 network load of 0.18UL.
• The calculated node count that consumes the remainder of the budget is:
8UL / 0.18UL = 44 nodes.

1230
32.16 Cable Routing
32.16 Cable Routing

The network configuration diagrams below (with red Xs) show undesirable
arrangements of the connected copper cabling. Repeaters can be used to
achieve the star, distributed star (backbone with clusters), and stubs off of the
backbone. The repeater separates the cable and each side (or each port on a
multi-port repeater) starts a new wire segment. This avoids the effect of stub or
cluster/lump capacitance from distorting the data on the backbone. No more than
two repeaters should separate any two nodes on the network. This means after
you use a repeater to drop a branch leg off the backbone at multiple locations,
you cannot add another repeater on any branch. The additional repeater would
create a three repeater string to one or more nodes on the network.
Figure: Bus routing configurations to avoid

1231
32.17 Cable Selection

work.
With RS-485, two conductors are used to pass the differential data (A+ and B-
signals) from one node to the next. To maintain the balanced characteristics
between the two wires, the cable must provide twisted pairs and be specified for
data communications. As the twisted pair passes along side other cables and
equipment in the facility, there are a multitude of noise sources, radiated EMI and
electromagnetic fields that will impose noise on to the twisted pair cable.
The shield does not provide any form of total protection. The shield inhibits a
significant portion of high frequency radiated noise, but other fields may simply
pass through. As long as the twisted pair of wires remains balanced, the noise
will be imposed on the two wires equally. An imbalance of impedance to ground
of the differential pair determines in part the susceptibility of the network to
interference, regardless of it being inductive or capacitive coupled. When
balanced, a noise appearing equally on both wires is called common mode noise.
The RS-485 receiver only looks at the differential voltage seen between the two
conductors and ignores the common mode noise. This is true up to the common
mode voltage limits of the transceiver, which should be a minimum range of -7 V
to +12 V. A reduction in this range, such as from fully exhausting transmitter CMV
support with excess unit load, can make the bus susceptible to induced common
mode noise.
The balanced performance of the cable requires more than just the twisted pair
characteristics, although it is definitely the most important. The twisted pair cable
can become unbalanced when encountering discontinuities in the capacitance
between the two wires, or the capacitance from conductor to shield, or the
impedance of the wires. This makes it important to select quality cable specified
for RS-485 data communications. The cable supplier must provide cable
specification that includes all of the characteristics seen in the table below. The
recommended specification for these characteristics is also listed. These will
provide the best results. You should avoid a cable where the
manufacturer/supplier cannot provide the full cable specifications.
Table: Recommended Cable Characteristics

Type Shielded Twisted Pair Low Capacitance
Twisted Wire Size 22 AWG to 24 AWG (0.33 mm² to 0.20

mm²)
Impedance 120 ohm
Capacitance (wire to shield) <82 pF/m (<25 pF/ft)
Capacitance (wire to wire) <46 pF/m (<14 pF/ft)
Maximum Length 1200 m (4000 ft) depending on termination

and bias restrictions

1232
Table: Recommended Twisted Pair Cables

Cable Size Pairs Imp. Cap1a Cap2b Vel Plenum
Rated
Belden 22 AWG 1 120 ohm 36.1 68.6 78%

3105A Str (0.33 pF/m (11 pF/m
mm²) pF/ft) (20.9
pF/ft)
Belden 22 AWG 2 120 ohm 36.1 68.6 78%

3107A Str (0.33 pF/m (11 pF/m
mm²) pF/ft) (20.9
pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 1 120 ohm 42.0 75.5 66%

9841 Str (0.20 pF/m pF/m (23
mm²) (12.8 pF/ft)
pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 42.0 75.5 66%

9842 Str (0.20 pF/m pF/m (23
mm²) (12.8 pF/ft)
pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 1 120 ohm 39.4 72.2 76% Y

82841 Str (0.20 pF/m (12 pF/m (22
mm²) pF/ft) pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 39.4 72.2 76% Y

82842 Str (0.20 pF/m (12 pF/m (22
mm²) pF/ft) pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 1 120 ohm 39.4 72.2 76% Y

89841 Str (0.20 pF/m (12 pF/m (22
mm²) pF/ft) pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 39.4 72.2 76% Y

89842 Str (0.20 pF/m (12 pF/m (22
mm²) pF/ft) pF/ft)
Alpha 22 AWG 1 120 ohm 36.0 68.6 78%

Wire Str (0.33 pF/m (11 pF/m
6453 mm²) pF/ft) (20.9
pF/ft)
Alpha 22 AWG 2 120 ohm 36.0 68.6 78%

6455 mm²) pF/ft) (20.9
pF/ft)
Alpha 24 AWG 1 120 ohm 42.0 75.5

Wire Str (0.20 pF/m pF/m (23
6412 mm²) (12.8 pF/ft)
pF/ft)
Alpha 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 42.0 75.5

6413 mm²) (12.8 pF/ft)
pF/ft)

1233
Continued
Rated
General 24 AWG 1 120 ohm 46.6 84.0 66%

Cable Str (0.20 pF/m pF/m
C0841A mm²) (14.2 (25.6
pF/ft) pF/ft)
General 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 37.4 67.3 66%

C0842A mm²) (11.4 (20.5
pF/ft) pF/ft)
Connect- 24 AWG 1 120 ohm 35.8 64.3 78% Y

Air Str (0.20 pF/m pF/m
W241P2 mm²) (10.9 (19.6
050FRIB pF/ft) pF/ft)
Connect- 22 AWG 1 120 ohm 35.8 64.3 78% Y

Air Str (0.33 pF/m pF/m
W221P2 mm²) (10.9 (19.6
010FRIB pF/ft) pF/ft)
a) Cap1 = Capacitance between the two conductors of the pair(s)

b) Cap2 = Capacitance from each signal conductor to shield

1234
32.18 b3 BACnet Devices

configuration of RS-485 communications between the automation server and b3
BACnet devices. This information is intended to supplement the existing
configuration documents, such as the “b3 BACnet and b4920 Controller
Technical Reference (30-3001-862)”. The guidelines focus on the arrangement of
the electrical interface to the automation server's RS-485 port in regards to
biasing, termination, cable selection, cable lengths, and cable routing. The
guidelines on maximum unit load (node count) and common mode voltage
32.18.1 General b3 BACnet Device Properties

The b3 BACnet devices provide a RS-485 transceiver with unit load rating of
0.125 along with a weak bias resistance of 47 kohm creating a total unit load of
0.38.
For more information, see section 32.19 “General b3 BACnet Device Properties”
on page 1237.
32.18.2 b3 BACnet Device Configuration

The configuration for the b3 BACnet devices is simply the addition of a 120 ohm
(1/4W 1%) termination resistor across the TX/RX+ and TX/RX- signal pair
(assuming the automation server is located at one end of the bus).
For more information, see section 32.20 “b3 BACnet Device Configuration” on
page 1238.

32).
Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (b3 BACnet Devices)” on page 1241.

1235


work.

1236
32.19 General b3 BACnet Device Properties
32.19 General b3 BACnet Device Properties

The b3 BACnet devices provide a RS-485 transceiver with unit load rating of
0.125 along with a weak bias resistance of 47 kohm creating a total unit load of
0.38.
The transceiver used in the b3 BACnet devices includes an integrated failsafe
receiver function. This means strong network biasing resistors are not required
on the RS-485 bus to ensure the maintenance idle state (failsafe) voltage. This
integrated failsafe feature avoids the additional unit load caused by a strong bias
resistor network discussed in other application notes.
The RS-485 circuitry on the b3 BACnet devices is not an isolated interface. The
RS-485 network depends on the local device ground potentials being within the
-7V to +12V common mode voltage (CMV) range of the RS-485 transceivers.
The RS-485 interface provided by the b3 BACnet devices has the interface
attributes according to the table below.
Table: Interface attributes of the b3 BACnet devices

Transceiv Transceiv Transceiv Adapter Circuit Total Unit Isolated
er er Unit er Failsafe Circuit Bias Load Load 485 Bus
Load Bias
Multiple 0.125 Yes 47 kohm 0.255 0.38 No

Parts
The typical MS/TP data rates of 38.4 kbps or 76.8 kbps used with the b3 BACnet
devices make the installation of End Of Line (EOL) resistor termination
necessary. Because the b3 BACnet devices do not require network bias, there is
no negative effect from termination. The 120 ohm termination is recommended
regardless of the data rate used.
When it is necessary to combine one or more b3 BACnet family devices on the
same MS/TP bus segment with MS/TP devices that use isolated RS-485
interfaces (that require network bias), you should evaluate the impact such
combination can have on the recommended node counts for the two products.
Isolated RS-485 interface products have a tolerance for Common Mode Voltage
that allows them to have an expanded unit load budget within our
recommendations (48UL instead of 32UL). When the isolated interface product
needs bias, the expanded budget is more than consumed by the load. The
addition of any non-isolated devices to the bus (with exception of the automation
server) nullifies the recommended budget expansion returning the recommended
limit to 32UL. Review the load status of the isolated products to determine if they
can tolerate the standard 32UL budget.
For more information, see section 32.2 “Generic RS-485 Network Devices” on
page 1191.
For more information, see section 32.22 “MNB BACnet Devices” on page 1243.

1237
32.20 b3 BACnet Device Configuration

The configuration for the b3 BACnet devices is simply the addition of a 120 ohm
(1/4W 1%) termination resistor across the TX/RX+ and TX/RX- signal pair
(assuming the automation server is located at one end of the bus).
the bus.
18 AWG (0.82 mm²) wire.
The shield drain wires from the cable segments are connected to the SHLD
terminal at each b3 BACnet device.

1238
Figure: b3 BACnet device configuration
The b3 BACnet configuration supports the full recommended maximum cable

length of 1200 m (4000 ft). The network does not encounter distance reductions
and/or alternate configurations typical of networks requiring the addition of
failsafe bias circuits.
Installation of the network in some high electrical noise environments or use of
substandard cable may prompt differential noise levels on the bus sufficient to
exceed the integrated failsafe noise immunity level of the transceiver. If
encountered, the addition of a weak bias such as 3300 ohm pull-up (from the
TX/RX+ terminal to the Bias+ terminal) and 3300 ohm pull-down (from the

1239
TX/RX- terminal to the RET terminal) can be beneficial. The 3300 ohm bias
addition only adds 3.6UL to the unit load.
The TIA-485A standard specifies a maximum network load of 32UL (Unit Loads).
From the TIA-485A budget of 32UL, we must subtract the Unit Load (0.5UL) for
the automation server to calculate the node count:
• Subtracting 0.5UL from the starting budget of 32 gives a node budget of
31.5UL.
• Each of the b3 BACnet devices presents a RS-485 network load of 0.38UL.
• The calculated b3 BACnet node count that consumes the remainder of the
budget is 31.5UL / 0.38UL = 82 nodes.

1240
32.21 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (b3 BACnet Devices)

(b3 BACnet Devices)
32).
in the calculation of unit load on the network.

1241
32.21 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (b3 BACnet Devices)
Figure: Maximum number of unit loads versus common-mode voltage an REQ (From TIA
TSB-89-A 485 Application Guidelines)
For example, if we add the collective unit load for 127 b3 BACnet devices
(0.38UL each) along with a automation server (0.5UL) we have a total bus unit
load of 49UL. From the figure above you can see that the specified minimum -7 V
CMV will be reduced to around -3 V and the normal +12 V CMV will reduce to
about +6 V.
On a non-isolated RS-485 network, the CMV tolerance of the network is a much
more critical performance parameter. Reduction of the CMV tolerance to levels
less than the standard -7 V to +12 V range is not recommended. The maximum
recommended b3 BACnet device node count of 82 maintains the CMV range.

1242
32.22 MNB BACnet Devices

MNB BACnet devices. This information is intended to supplement the existing
configuration documents such as the “TAC I/A Series MicroNet BACnet Wiring
and Networking Practices Guide (F-27360-10)”. The guidelines focus on the
arrangement of the electrical interface to the automation server's RS-485 port in
regards to biasing, termination, cable selection, cable lengths and cable routing.
The guidelines on maximum unit load (node count) and common mode voltage
32.22.1 General MNB BACnet Device Properties

MNB BACnet devices use an RS-485 transceiver that provides integrated
galvanic isolation (NVE IL3286E). This transceiver has an RS-485 unit load rating
of 0.125 along with a weak bias resistance of 220 kohm creating a total unit load
of 0.18. This is a little better (lower) than the 0.25UL listed in “TAC I/A Series
MicroNet BACnet Wiring and Networking Practices Guide (F-27360-10)”.
For more information, see section 32.23 “General MNB BACnet Device
Properties” on page 1246.
32.22.2 MNB Configurations

The recommendations include five different configuration options to choose from
with differences in performance and/or resources required.
For more information, see section 32.24 “MNB Configurations” on page 1247.
32.22.3 Existing MNB Systems Transition

Many times the application of the EcoStruxure BMS will deal with existing MNB
systems. In many of those instances, the existing MNB system installation may
not be consistent with the network cable recommendations. For more
information, see section 32.17 “Cable Selection” on page 1232.Cable Selection
When dealing with an existing earlier installed system that has been operating for
an extended period with no signs of problems, there will be an expectation that
such a system can be effectively adapted to the EcoStruxure BMS with the
automation server picking up the existing MS/TP buses.
For more information, see section 32.31 “Existing MNB Systems Transition” on
page 1265.
32.22.4 Network Check-Up (Examination and

Monitoring)
When migrating an older system to a newer architecture or enhanced application
environment, there is the possibility the existing system will encounter closer

1243
examinations, be expected to perform in a more detailed coordination with the

larger system or be exercised in a more visible performance-sensitive manner by
new applications. While an existing system may be considered stable and error
free, the existing observations can sometimes be limited to the visibility offered
by the earlier system. Communications problems can exist but go unnoticed (or
masked) due by low level protocol retries. The typical MS/TP communications
protocol setup for example can mask severe levels of communications errors with
the retries not providing visibility of the issue until new dependencies on
command/request latency reveals notable delays.
For more information, see section 32.32 “Network Check-Up (Examination and
Monitoring)” on page 1267.

32).
Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices)” on
page 1228.

Devices Only
up to 127 devices.

1244


work.

1245
32.23 General MNB BACnet Device Properties
32.23 General MNB BACnet Device Properties

MNB BACnet devices use an RS-485 transceiver that provides integrated
galvanic isolation (NVE IL3286E). This transceiver has an RS-485 unit load rating
of 0.125 along with a weak bias resistance of 220 kohm creating a total unit load
of 0.18. This is a little better (lower) than the 0.25UL listed in “TAC I/A Series
MicroNet BACnet Wiring and Networking Practices Guide (F-27360-10)”.
The transceiver used in the MNB devices does not include an integrated failsafe
receiver function. This means network biasing resistors are required on the RS-
485 bus to insure the idle state of the bus is kept at a minimum of +200 mV
(target bias value +225 mV or higher for a noise buffer). The biasing of the
network has been a jumper selectable feature provided by several of the head-
end I/A series devices or routers in the family. The MNB-300, MNB-1000, and I/A
Series Network Controllers included the jumper enabled bias. If one or more of
these devices are present on the bus, one of these could continue to provide the
network bias function.
The MNB device's bias capability mentioned above provides the jumper selected
ability to connect 510 ohm pull-up resistor on the MSTP+ data line and 510 ohm
pull-down resistor on the MSTP- line.
Configurations 1 and 2 provide dual end-point bias supporting the maximum
1200 m (4000 ft) network length. Configurations 4 and 5 provide the common
single end-point bias which is simpler to implement and supports a shorter
network length, and frequently covers the distances required in the HVAC
applications. For more information, see section 32.24 “MNB Configurations” on
page 1247.
The RS-485 circuitry on the MNB devices provides an isolated interface. The
circuit common/reference used by the RS-485 transceiver is isolated from the
local ground potential. This isolated common created by the isolated DC power
supply on the adapter is presented on the terminal labeled SHLD on the three
position network terminal block.
In addition to the MSTP+ and MSTP- twisted pair signal conductors, the shield
drain wire in the RS-485 cable is also bussed in a daisy chain arrangement from
each device to the next. The shield conductor provides an isolated
reference/common for all MNB devices to use with their isolated RS-485
interfaces. The RS-485 interface provided by the MNB devices has the following
interface attributes, as shown in the table below.
Table: Interface Attributes of the MNB BACnet Devices

er er Unit er Failsafe Circuit Bias Load Load RS-485
Load Bias Bus
NVE 0.125 No 220 kohm 0.055 0.18 Yes

IL3286E
The typical MS/TP data rates of 38.4 kbps or 76.8 kbps used with the MNB
devices make the installation of EOL resistor termination necessary.

1246
32.24 MNB Configurations

The recommendations include five different configuration options to choose from
32.24.1 MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point Bias

(MNB Source)
Dual end-point bias applies a separate 5 V DC supply at each end of the network
to generate the RS-485 bias. Instead of a single pair of 510 ohm resistors, the
dual end scheme uses a pair of 1000 ohm resistors at each end. The dual end-
point is the best technique for avoiding the drop in the bias voltage over extended
cable lengths as you move away from the bias connection location. By applying
the bias at the same location as the termination, the arrangement maintains an
equal bias across the complete length of the cable. This technique avoids the
positional sensitivity of Configuration 3 in locating the middle point of the network
and provides a superior bias reliability. For more information, see section 32.27
“MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias” on page 1256. This Configuration 1 differs
from Configuration 2 only in the use of MNB-300 or MNB-1000 devices to provide
the bias supply source. For more information, see section 32.26 “MNB
Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply Source)” on page 1253.
For more information, see section 32.25 “MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point
Bias (MNB Source)” on page 1249.
32.24.2 MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias

(External Supply Source)
When MNB-300 or MNB-1000 devices are not available within 60 m (200 ft) of
the end of the cable, the dual end-point bias configuration can still be deployed
as seen here in Configuration 2 using a separate 5 V DC supply at each end of
the network to generate the RS-485 bias. The same as Configuration 1, this
arrangement provides the best performance on systems where bias is needed.
Bias (MNB Source)” on page 1249. The dual end-point avoids the drop in the
bias voltage seen with the single end-point bias arrangements. By applying the
bias at the same location as the termination, the arrangement maintains an equal
bias across the complete length of the cable. This technique does not encounter
the positional sensitivity of Configuration 3 in locating the middle point of the
network. For more information, see section 32.27 “MNB Configuration 3: Mid-
point Bias” on page 1256.
Bias (External Supply Source)” on page 1253.
32.24.3 MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias

Mid-point bias refers to the technique of using a separate 5 V DC power supply
and locating it at the middle of the total network cable length. This technique
takes advantage of the maximum DC differential resistance at the center to
maximize the bias voltage applied through the typical pair of 510 ohm resistors

1247
from the 5 V bias supply. The higher bias voltage level now applied in the center
can extend up to 600 m (2000 ft) in both directions from the center using 24 AWG
(0.20 mm²) size cable (or larger).
For more information, see section 32.27 “MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias”
on page 1256.
32.24.4 Power Supply Selection for MNB

Configuration 1, 2 and 3
For more information, see section 32.28 “Power Supply Selection for MNB
Configuration 1, 2 and 3” on page 1259.
32.24.5 MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point Bias

(Automation Server Provided Source)
This configuration applies to the situation where existing MNB devices with bias
capability (MNB-300 or MNB-1000) are not available on the network segment,
and it is preferred not to add external supplies.
For more information, see section 32.29 “MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point
Bias (Automation Server Provided Source) ” on page 1261.
32.24.6 MS/TP Data and Shield Connections

The cable shield drain wire is connected to each MNB device to provide a ground
reference to the isolated RS-485 interface in each of the MNB devices. This
shield connection on each MNB device is not a local ground connection. The
shield drain wire from the MS/TP bus cable must only connect to the specific
terminal designated to receive the shield for the MS/TP bus. The terminal
label/text reference varies a little in the device documentation between the MNB
devices. In all cases, it will be a third screw terminal in a set of three on a terminal
block identified for MS/TP communications.
For more information, see section 32.30 “MS/TP Data and Shield Connections”
on page 1264.

1248
32.25 MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point Bias (MNB Source)
32.25 MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point

Bias (MNB Source)
the bias at the same location as the termination, the arrangement maintains an
equal bias across the complete length of the cable. This technique avoids the
positional sensitivity of Configuration 3 in locating the middle point of the network
and provides a superior bias reliability. For more information, see section 32.27
“MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias” on page 1256. This Configuration 1 differs
from Configuration 2 only in the use of MNB-300 or MNB-1000 devices to provide
the bias supply source. For more information, see section 32.26 “MNB
Configuration 1 can be used when you have the following arrangement of bias
supply sources:
• MNB-300 or MNB-1000 device at the far end of the bus
• AS-P server or AS-B server at the head end of the bus
The bias supply sources must be located at the two ends of the MS/TP network
bus or within 60 m (200 ft) of the end of the cable. If an MNB-300 or MNB-1000
device is used for bias and the device is not positioned at the actual end of the
bus, the EOL termination jumper selection must not be used on the MNB device.
Only the biasing pin header/connector position will be used, and the EOL 120
ohm termination resistor must be attached across the + and – bus pair on the
device positioned at the actual end of the cable.
The recommended power supplies to use with the automation server are
discussed separately. For more information, see section 32.28 “Power Supply
Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3” on page 1259.
server or AS-B server.
the bus.
the ground rail in the control panel using a 12 AWG (3.31 mm²) to 18 AWG (0.82
mm²) wire. The shield drain wires from the cable segments are connected to the
RS-485 SHLD terminal at each MNB BACnet device.
Use only the terminal block designated for MS/TP communications for Shield
connection.

1249
Figure: MNB configuration 1 – dual end-point network bias (MNB source supply)
As an alternative to using the AS-P server or AS-B server Bias+ terminal to

provide the head-end bias (as shown in the figure above), the network bias can
be provided from an MNB-300 or MNB-1000 device located within 60 m (200 ft)
of the network head end.
NOTE: If an MNB-300 or MNB-1000 device is positioned at the end of the
bus, the termination option jumper on the device may be enabled, instead of

1250
attaching a 120 ohm resistor on the terminal block. This also applies to the
head end of the bus if a MNB-300 or MNB-1000 device is positioned there
instead of a typical automation server.
The recommended maximum cable length is 1200 m (4000 ft), if using a 24 AWG
(0.20 mm²) or larger cable.
The preferred location for the bias is at the two extreme ends of the network
cable, but the bias voltage remains effective if applied within 60 m (200 ft) from
the end. This configuration supports the preferred termination resistor values of
120 ohm with one positioned at each end of the cable. The unit load imposed by
the dual end-point bias is 23.5UL (12,000 / 510).
The MNB-300 or MNB-1000 devices being used to provide the network bias must
be configured with plug-on 510 ohm resistors instead of the typical plug-on
shorting connector. The plug-on resistors are available in packages of 50 with a
part number of MNB-BIAS510-50. Two of the plug-on resistors are attached to
each of the MNB devices. This arrangement creates a 1020 ohm bias from the
network end.
On the MNB-300 device, remove any existing plug-on shunt connectors from pin
header positions P202 and P203. Press a plug-on 510 ohm resistor onto the EN
(enable) position of pin headers P202 and P203. This is the top two pins on those
two headers as seen in the following diagram.
Figure: Bias resistor addition on MNB-300
On the MNB-1000 device, remove any existing plug-on shunt connectors from
pin header positions P102 and P105. Press a plug-on 510 ohm resistor onto the
EN (enable) position of pin headers P102 and P105. This is the right-hand two
pins on those two headers as seen in the following diagram.

1251
Figure: Bias resistor addition on MNB-1000

1252
32.26 MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply Source)
32.26 MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point

Bias (External Supply Source)
When MNB-300 or MNB-1000 devices are not available within 60 m (200 ft) of
the end of the cable, the dual end-point bias configuration can still be deployed
as seen here in Configuration 2 using a separate 5 V DC supply at each end of
the network to generate the RS-485 bias. The same as Configuration 1, this
arrangement provides the best performance on systems where bias is needed.
Bias (MNB Source)” on page 1249. The dual end-point avoids the drop in the
bias voltage seen with the single end-point bias arrangements. By applying the
bias at the same location as the termination, the arrangement maintains an equal
bias across the complete length of the cable. This technique does not encounter
the positional sensitivity of Configuration 3 in locating the middle point of the
network. For more information, see section 32.27 “MNB Configuration 3: Mid-
point Bias” on page 1256.
When using an AS-P server or AS-B server, and the server is positioned at the
head end of the network, you can use the 5 V available on the Bias+ terminal to
provide the head-end bias. You use an external 5 V DC power supply to provide
the bias at the far end of the network. The recommended power supplies are
discussed separately. For more information, see section 32.28 “Power Supply
Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3” on page 1259.
server or AS-B server. Connect an external 5 V DC power supply to the MS/TP
the bus.
Connect the shield drain wire to earth ground terminal rail in the control panel
with the automation server. This is the only ground connection of the shield for
the complete cable segment. Connect the RET terminal on the automation server
to the ground rail in the panel using a 12 AWG (3.31 mm²) to 18 AWG (0.82 mm²)
wire. The shield drain wire from the cable segments are connected to the RS-485
SHLD terminal at each MNB BACnet device.
connection.

1253
Figure: MNB configuration 2 – dual end-point network bias (external supply source)

The recommended location for the separate supply bias is at the two extreme
ends of the network cable, but the bias voltage remains effective with a 60 m (200

1254
ft) tolerance on the cable length from the end. This configuration supports the
preferred termination resistor values of 120 ohm with one positioned at each end
of the cable. The unit load imposed by the dual end-point bias is slightly higher
with 24UL (12,000 / (1,000 / 2) = 24) instead of 23.5UL (12,000 / 510).

1255
32.27 MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias

Mid-point bias refers to the technique of using a separate 5 V DC power supply
and locating it at the middle of the total network cable length. This technique
takes advantage of the maximum DC differential resistance at the center to
maximize the bias voltage applied through the typical pair of 510 ohm resistors
from the 5 V bias supply. The higher bias voltage level now applied in the center
can extend up to 600 m (2000 ft) in both directions from the center using 24 AWG
(0.20 mm²) size cable (or larger).
Position an external 5 V DC power supply at the middle of the total MS/TP
network length. Connect the supply to the MS/TP bus pair through two 510 ohm
resistors. The recommended power supplies are discussed separately. For more
information, see section 32.28 “Power Supply Selection for MNB Configuration 1,
2 and 3” on page 1259.
the bus.
wire. The shield drain wires from the cable segments are connected to the RS-
485 SHLD terminal at each MNB BACnet device.
connections.

1256
Figure: MNB configuration 3 – mid-point network bias

1257
As alternatives to using an external 5 V DC power supply to provide the mid-point

bias (as shown in the figure above), the following two bias supply options can be
used:
• If a bias-capable MNB-300 or MNB-1000 device is positioned at the middle
point in the network, the MNB device's bias option can be used to provide
the mid-point bias.
• If an AS-P server or AS-B server is positioned at the middle point in the
network, the server's 5 V bias supply output can be used to provide the mid-
point bias. The server is configured as in Configuration 2, except the cable
extends in both directions away from the server with equal lengths. ( For
more information, see section 32.26 “MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point
Bias (External Supply Source)” on page 1253.xref)
NOTE: If an MNB-300 or MNB-1000 is used to provide the single point bias,
the standard plug-on shunt connectors are used to achieve the bias. The
plug-on resistor (MNB-BIAS510-50) is only used in Configuration 1.
The mid-point location selected for the bias should be within ±60 m (±200 ft) of
true middle of the cable length. In other words, the mid-point bias divides the
network bus in two segments (named A and B in the above figure), which should
be approximately equal. The remote end bias voltage will drop significantly as the
bias location moves away from network center.
This configuration supports the preferred End Of Line (EOL) termination
resistance value of 120 ohm. The 120 ohm termination resistors must be
positioned on the two ends of the network. The unit load imposed by the mid-
point bias is the same as for Configuration 1, 2, 4 and 5, and the discussion on
node count calculation is the same. For more information, see section 32.24
“MNB Configurations” on page 1247.
IMPORTANT: Configurations 1 or 2 are preferred over Configuration 3 due
to the need for Configuration 3 to maintain a length balance on either side of
the bias location. Later network revisions can easily disrupt the bias
performance by either adding or reducing cable length on either side of the
bias location (without performing the same change on the other side). This
presents a counter-intuitive result from later work on the system. A person
would typically think that no harm could be encountered by reducing the
length of a network. In most cases, the system will probably continue to
operate, but the noise margin will have been reduced by less than specified
bias now presented to a collection of devices. Such scenarios offer a
tendency to go unnoticed and show up later as communications anomalies
possibly thought to be related to later actions that should not have such
impact, but are sufficient to compromise a situation that now is forgotten.
For more information, see section 32.25 “MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-
point Bias (MNB Source)” on page 1249.
For more information, see section 32.26 “MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-
point Bias (External Supply Source)” on page 1253.

1258
32.28 Power Supply Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3
32.28 Power Supply Selection for MNB

Configuration 1, 2 and 3




load required)

application
configuration.

1259
32.28 Power Supply Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3
The 1000 ohm resistors shown in the figure above represent the application in
Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 showing dual end-point bias. For more
information, see section 32.25 “MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point Bias (MNB
Source)” on page 1249. For more information, see section 32.26 “MNB
For single mid-point biasing such as configuration 3, the values would be 510
ohm. For more information, see section 32.27 “MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point
Bias” on page 1256.
approvals.

1260
32.29 MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point Bias (Automation Server Provided Source)
32.29 MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point

Bias (Automation Server Provided
Source)
This configuration applies to the situation where existing MNB devices with bias
capability (MNB-300 or MNB-1000) are not available on the network segment,
and it is preferred not to add external supplies.
The automation server should be configured with bias resistors (510 ohm) to
allow termination to be applied to each end of the network containing the MNB
devices. AS-P servers and AS-B servers provide a 5 V bias voltage supply, which
supports the use of 120 ohm termination resistors at the two ends of the bus.
The requirement for bias resistors to maintain an idle state voltage greater than
200 mV, and the bus current created by the termination resistors, presents a
limitation on the compliant wire length due to idle state voltage drop in the wire.
Unlike networks that do not require bias and the dual end-point bias
configurations, when delivering the bias from a single end, the wire size will have
a significant effect on the network distance over which the bias level can travel
and maintain compliance. This is due to the voltage divider network setup by the
wire resistance and the termination resistance. The bias is inducing a continuous
DC current flow of about 5 mA and this current induces a continuous escalating
voltage drop as you move down the cable away from the bias location toward the
far end termination where the worst case bias voltage will be seen. See table
below for recommended wire sizes and maximum distance.
Connect the shield drain wire directly to earth terminal rail in the panel with the
automation server. This is the only direct ground connection of the shield for the
complete segment. Connect the RET terminal on the automation server to the
ground rail in the panel using a 12 AWG (3.31 mm²) to 18 AWG (0.82 mm²) wire.
The shield drain wire from the cable segments are connected to the RS-485
SHLD terminal at each MNB BACnet device.
connection.
the Bias+ terminal.

1261
Figure: MNB configuration 4 – single end-point bias (automation server provided source)
The recommended maximum cable length and associated wire sizes are listed in
the following table. These wire size and lengths are selected to maintain the
minimum idle state voltage at the far terminated end of the network (away from
the head end of the bus where the bias is attached).

1262

150 m (500 ft) 24 AWG (0.20 mm²)
240 m (800 ft) 22 AWG (0.33 mm²)

1263
32.30 MS/TP Data and Shield Connections
32.30 MS/TP Data and Shield Connections

The cable shield drain wire is connected to each MNB device to provide a ground
reference to the isolated RS-485 interface in each of the MNB devices. This
shield connection on each MNB device is not a local ground connection. The
shield drain wire from the MS/TP bus cable must only connect to the specific
terminal designated to receive the shield for the MS/TP bus. The terminal
label/text reference varies a little in the device documentation between the MNB
devices. In all cases, it will be a third screw terminal in a set of three on a terminal
block identified for MS/TP communications.
The sequence of MSTP+, MSTP-, and Shield terminals are different from that
presented in the generic MNB configuration diagrams. For more information, see
section 32.24 “MNB Configurations” on page 1247. Be sure to observe the signal
name instructions for each of the specific products in their respective installation
guides.
Table: Terminal Numbers and References for Different MNB BACnet Devices
MNB Device Terminal MSTP+ MSTP- Shield Shield Label
Block Terminal Terminal Terminal Reference
Reference Number Number Number
MNB-70 TB1 3 2 1 SHLD
MNB-V1 / TB1 3 2 1 SHLD

MNB-V2
MNB-300 P102 1 2 3 SLD
MNB-1000 P103 1 2 3 SLD
IMPORTANT: There are two shield connection terminals on the MNB-1000

device. Both are referenced as SLD in the product data. The terminal block
identified as P102 (BACnet Network Communications) is the connection
serving the MS/TP bus and only the SLD terminal on this terminal block
should be used to connect the shield from the MS/TP cable. The other SLD
terminal is adjacent on terminal block TB101 and is used only for separate
I/O RS-485 Bus. This is also an isolated ground reference connection, but it
is a different isolated ground from the MS/TP bus.

1264
32.31 Existing MNB Systems Transition

Many times the application of the EcoStruxure BMS will deal with existing MNB
systems. In many of those instances, the existing MNB system installation may
not be consistent with the network cable recommendations. For more
information, see section 32.17 “Cable Selection” on page 1232.Cable Selection
When dealing with an existing earlier installed system that has been operating for
an extended period with no signs of problems, there will be an expectation that
such a system can be effectively adapted to the EcoStruxure BMS with the
automation server picking up the existing MS/TP buses.
These expectations need to be examined from two perspectives:
• Compare the MS/TP bus device loading on the automation server with the
architectural guidelines associated with the version of the EcoStruxure BMS
being deployed. For more information, see the Architectural Guidelines 3.3.1
topic on WebHelp.
• Examine the compliance of the existing physical network installation with the
recommendations provided regarding cable type, cable specifications,
lengths, and network unit load. You can then make the best judgment if the
installation should be considered suitable for expansion in cable lengths or
node counts. Performing a network check-up is recommended. For more
information, see section 32.32 “Network Check-Up (Examination and
Monitoring)” on page 1267. If the existing cable type or cable specifications
are not compliant with the recommended cable, you may want to avoid
committing to an expansion on the existing cable segment. The use of a
spare MS/TP port on an automation server to start another MS/TP network,
or addition of an automation server, may be a better choice.
32.31.1 Guidelines on the Use of Legacy Cable

Types
This section lists guidelines to consider when you connect an EcoStruxure BMS
and an existing MS/TP network that uses legacy cable types.
The existing MNB MS/TP networks typically use one of six cable types. These
cable types are listed in the “TAC IA Series MicroNet BACnet Wiring and
Networking Practices Guide” (F-27360-10). Five of the cable types are not
compliant with the latest cable recommendations. For more information, see
section 32.17 “Cable Selection” on page 1232.
Table: Legacy Cable Types

Non-compliant Compliant
Belden 864 Belden 89841
Belden 82641
Belden 82502
Connect-Air W241P-2000F
Connect-Air W241P-2000S

1265
Belden 8641, 82641, and 82502

When encountering systems constructed using any of the cables Belden 8641,
82641, 82502, or other cables with equal or less performance (higher
capacitance or unspecified capacitance or impedance), it is recommended that
the network composition be maintained as-is with only the required transitions to
connect with an automation server positioned in place of the previous head-end
device at the same location. If expansion on the bus segment is needed, it is
recommended that you stay within the reduced speed of 19,200 Baud or less and
the reduced node count of 32 devices or less (as recommended in the “TAC IA
Series MicroNet BACnet Wiring and Networking Practices Guide”). It is also
suggested that a network check-up should be used to judge if any expansion
should be performed.
Connect-Air W241P-2000F and W241P-2000S

The two cables Connect-Air W241P-2000F and W241P-2000S are cables that
offer a lower cost cable while providing low capacitance specifications and a
plenum rating. Both cable models have an impedance of 100 ohm.
The recommended cable list indicates preference for 120 ohm cable. For more
information, see section 32.17 “Cable Selection” on page 1232. This is the cable
impedance recommended in the RS-485 standard and specified in the data for all
of the RS-485 transceivers. The use of 100 ohm cable is a common practice
thought to be directly related to the lower price and availability of several cable
candidates. The use of 100 ohm cable is not optimum in regards to transmitter
loading, noise immunity, and signal quality, but the diversion from the specified
criteria is considered relatively small. The RS-485 interfaces have proven to be
very robust and this is one of the areas where deviations from the standard
frequently occur. The use of 120 ohm cable is recommended and may deserve
more attention when expecting to operate over long distances (>600 m or 2000
ft) or environments of high noise induction.
It is commonly understood that data transmission cable should typically be
terminated by a resistance equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable.
Belden 89841
The Belden 89841 cable is fully compliant with the latest recommendations. For
more information, see section 32.17 “Cable Selection” on page 1232.

1266
32.32 Network Check-Up (Examination and Monitoring)
32.32 Network Check-Up (Examination and

Monitoring)
When migrating an older system to a newer architecture or enhanced application
environment, there is the possibility the existing system will encounter closer
examinations, be expected to perform in a more detailed coordination with the
larger system or be exercised in a more visible performance-sensitive manner by
new applications. While an existing system may be considered stable and error
free, the existing observations can sometimes be limited to the visibility offered
by the earlier system. Communications problems can exist but go unnoticed (or
masked) due by low level protocol retries. The typical MS/TP communications
protocol setup for example can mask severe levels of communications errors with
the retries not providing visibility of the issue until new dependencies on
command/request latency reveals notable delays.
It is recommended that existing system MS/TP segments be examined with a
BACnet communications analysis tool prior to disrupting the operation of the
existing system. The objective is to capture some snapshots of the various
network segments in the existing system. You can easily attach such a
monitoring tool to an operating MS/TP network and capture statistics on the
operation of the network for an appropriate period of time. This offers visibility into
the actual performance and stability of the network targeted for migration to the
new system hierarchy. An indication of high error statistics may prompt a
decision for diagnostic effort on the existing network prior to the system
migration, or an understanding that investigative effort will play a role in the
system transition. Alternatively, the insight into actual system performance may
simply be used as an indication that performance expectations for specific
network segments of the system may need to be moderated. In any case, it
avoids a common post-update conclusion that the problems with the system
upgrade were solely a product of the new system products or installation
practices.
One easily available tool is the MS/TP data capture utility known as MSTPcap.
The primary purpose of the MSTPcap utility is a tool to capture BACnet MS/TP
communications traffic by listening to the bus and packaging the captured traffic
into data packets in a PCAP file format suitable for feeding into another tool
called Wireshark. Wireshark is another very useful tool for the detailed analysis of
network communications on a variety of systems. The later versions of Wireshark
now include the support for decoding BACnet protocol layers.
The Schneider Electric Lessons Learned article LL#5367 provides guidance on
use of the MSTPcap program for performing a network checkup.
http://buildingskb.schneider-electric.com/view.php?AID=5637

1267
32.33 Legrand Power Meters

configuration of RS-485 Modbus communications between the automation server
and Legrand power meters. The recommendations are based on an investigation
of Legrand meter models 04677, 04680, 04684, and 14669. The investigation
was used to discover isolation and unit load characteristics along with
requirements of the RS-485 transceiver for external failsafe biasing on the RS-
485 network and to test communications operation with the meters under
recommended configurations. This information is intended to supplement the
product information provided with the Legrand meters. The guidelines focus on
the arrangement of the electrical interface to the automation server's RS-485 port
in regards to biasing, termination, cable selection, cable lengths and cable
routing. The guidelines on maximum unit load (node count) and common mode
voltage tolerance are associated with AS-P and AS-B servers.
32.33.1 General Legrand Power Meter Properties

An important difference between the Legrand meters is that models 04677,
04680, and 04684 use transceivers with integrated failsafe receivers, whereas
the model 14669 uses a transceiver with no integrated failsafe function.
For more information, see section 32.34 “General Legrand Power Meter
32.33.2 Legrand Configurations

The recommendations include four different configuration options to choose from
For more information, see section 32.35 “Legrand Configurations” on page 1271.

32).
Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (Legrand Power Meters)” on page 1288.

1268

Devices Only
maximum unit load limit can be stretched higher. With a network comprised
exclusively of isolated interfaces connected to the automation server, the
standard unit load budget of 32UL can be increased by 50% to have an
expanded budget of 48UL. Using a maximum network load of 48UL and
subtracting the 24UL for the bias network resistors and the load of the automation
server leaves 24UL available for the nodes to be connected on the bus. With the
example device load of 1.32UL each, the expanded budget of 48UL supports 18
nodes (meters) on the bus.
Isolated Devices Only (Legrand Power Meters)” on page 1290.


work.
For more information, see section 32.43 “Cable Selection (Legrand Power
Meters)” on page 1291.

1269
32.34 General Legrand Power Meter Properties
32.34 General Legrand Power Meter

Properties
An important difference between the Legrand meters is that models 04677,
04680, and 04684 use transceivers with integrated failsafe receivers, whereas
the model 14669 uses a transceiver with no integrated failsafe function.
Review of the RS-485 interface provided by the Legrand meters yields the
following interface attributes:
Table: Interface Attributes of the Legrand Power Meters

Legrand Transcei Transcei Transcei Meter Circuit Total Isolated
Model ver ver Unit ver Circuit Bias Unit RS-485
Load Failsafe Bias Load Load Bus
04677 Exar 0.125 Yes 10 kohm 1.200 1.325 Yes

SP4082
04680 TI 0.125 Yes 10 kohm 1.200 1.325 Yes

SN65HV
D3082
04684 TI 0.125 Yes 10 kohm 1.200 1.325 Yes

SN65HV
D3082
14669a 16 kohmb 0.750

b
Exar 1.000 No 1.750 Yes
SP485E
a) The RS-485 interface on the model 14669 is provided by the model 14673 plug-in option module.
b) The 16 kohm network bias occurs with 14673 switches 1 and 2 in the OFF position, which is
recommended. Placing these two switches in the ON position changes the bias to 8 kohm (1.5UL)
and places a 120 ohm termination resistance across the network pair.
The provision of failsafe transceivers in the Legrand models 04677, 04680, and
04684 is a very beneficial feature. This type of transceiver with integrated failsafe
receiver allows recommendation for a terminated bus without the negative
limitation imposed with external bias resistors required to support termination.
Configuration 1 supports these three meter models. For more information, see
section 32.35 “Legrand Configurations” on page 1271.
The model 14669 uses an older transceiver with no integrated failsafe feature
and is rated for a full 1UL unit. This 1UL coupled with the internal bias resistance
pushes the unit load of the model 14669 to a very high value of 1.75UL. This
means each 14669 meter consumes almost two of the available 32 unit loads.
Without the failsafe feature, the use of one of the alternate configuration options
(2, 3, or 4) will be required. These configurations provide the required bias for the
model 14669, but have the side effect of reduced node count and/or distance. For
more information, see section 32.35 “Legrand Configurations” on page 1271.
The models 04677, 04680, and 04684 can be used in any of the four
configurations. If the network consists of only the models 04677, 04680, and/or
04684, Configuration 1 offers the best performance. If a single model 14669 is
included on the network bus, the bus must use Configuration 2, 3, or 4 and follow
the associated guidelines. For more information, see section 32.35 “Legrand
Configurations” on page 1271.

1270
32.35 Legrand Configurations

The recommendations include four different configuration options to choose from
32.35.1 Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus

with No Bias Requirement
This configuration is recommended when using any combination of Legrand
meter models 04677, 04680, and 04684. The configuration does not apply to the
model 14669. The configuration uses 120 ohm End Of Line (EOL) termination
resistors and requires no extra biasing.
For more information, see section 32.36 “Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated
Bus with No Bias Requirement” on page 1274.
32.35.2 Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus

with Minimal Bias
This configuration uses no bus termination, which means reduced data rates and
cable lengths. The configuration applies to any combination of Legrand meter
models 04677, 04680, 04684, or 14669.
For more information, see section 32.37 “Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated
Bus with Minimal Bias” on page 1277.

with Single End-point Bias
A third configuration option is available where low resistance bias is added to the
automation server to allow termination to be applied on a network containing one
or more model 14669 meters. The configuration applies to any combination of
Legrand models 04677, 04680, 04684, or 14669. AS-P and AS-B servers provide
a 5 V bias voltage supply, which supports 120 ohm termination resistors at the
two ends of the bus.
Bus with Single End-point Bias” on page 1280.

with Dual End-point Bias
A fourth configuration option is targeted at recovering the full 1200 m (4000 ft)
capability of the RS-485 network while accommodating the standard 120 ohm
End Of Line (EOL) terminations for better high speed data quality. This technique
applies a 5 V bias at each end of the network. Biasing the network from both
ends completely eliminates the dropping failsafe bias voltage as the cable length

1271
extends toward the remote terminator. This configuration option can be used for
any combination of Legrand models 04677, 04680, 04684, or 14669.
Bus with Dual End-point Bias” on page 1283.
32.35.5 Power Supply Selection for Legrand

Configuration 4
For more information, see section 32.40 “Power Supply Selection for Legrand
32.35.6 Configuration Summary

The four configuration options described above are summarized in the following
tables.
Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus with No Bias Requirement

Configuration 1 provides the best performance and simplest configuration, but it
is not applicable to the model 14669.
Table: Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus with No Bias Requirement

Model Max Cable Max Data Rate Max Node Max Node
Length Count, All Count, Any
Isolated Non-isolated
04677, 04680, 1200 m (4000 ft) 76,800 bps 35.8 23.7

04684
14699 1200 m (4000 ft) 76,800 bps Not supported Not supported
Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus with Minimal Bias

Configuration 2 is useful for lower data speed over shorter distances in low noise
environment.
Table: Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus with Minimal Bias

04677, 04680, 150 m (500 ft) 19,200 bps 33 20.9

04684
14699 150 m (500 ft) 19,200 bps 25 15.7

1272
Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with Single End-point Bias

Configuration 3 is a common configuration that supports full data speed over
shorter distances covering many application needs.
Table: Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with Single End-point Bias

04677, 04680, 150 m (500 ft) 76,800 bps 18.1 6

04684
14699 150 m (500 ft) 76,800 bps 13.7 4.5
Legrand Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-point Bias

Configuration 4 supports long length and maximum data rates with all four
models. Node count reduced due to bias requirements.
Table: Legrand Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-point Bias

04677, 04680, 1200 m (4000 ft) 76,800 bps 17.7 5.6

04684
14699 1200 m (4000 ft) 76,800 bps 13.4 4.2

1273
32.36 Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus with No Bias Requirement
32.36 Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated

Bus with No Bias Requirement
This configuration is recommended when using any combination of Legrand
meter models 04677, 04680, and 04684. The configuration does not apply to the
model 14669. The configuration uses 120 ohm End Of Line (EOL) termination
resistors and requires no extra biasing.
the bus.
Connect the two RS-485 common wire pair and the shield to earth ground
terminal rail in the panel with the automation server. This is the only ground
connection of the shield for these conductors. The shield drain wire from the
cable segments are twisted together and passed by each node.
Both conductors of the second twisted pair cable are used to connect RS-485
Common on the meters.
Use only twisted pair bus cable specified for use with RS-485 (for example,
Belden 9842 or equivalent). For more information, see section 32.43 “Cable
Selection (Legrand Power Meters)” on page 1291.

1274
Figure: Legrand configuration 1 – terminated bus with no bias requirement (for models
04677, 04680, or 04684)

1275
In this configuration, the failsafe feature of the transceivers allows the full RS-485
cable length to be supported with 24 AWG (0.20 mm²) wire size without the node
count and length reductions associated with failsafe bias load seen with
Configuration 2, 3, and 4. For more information, see section 32.35 “Legrand
Configurations” on page 1271.
With products such as these three models using integrated failsafe transceivers,
the addition of extra bias would typically only be applicable to system conditions
prompting high levels of differential noise. In a well balanced cable system the
differential noise is expected to be below 50 mV. With no added bias, the
automation server will accommodate noise of approximately 130 mVpp or more.
Additional biasing will typically not be needed. In a system with Legrand meters,
significant additional biasing is being supplied internal to the meters. This is what
elevates the Total Unit Load values. For more information, see section 32.34
“General Legrand Power Meter Properties” on page 1270. For example, with 10
Legrand meters, the equivalent of a 1 kohm bias is accumulated on the bus. This
alone increases the idle state line voltage by an additional 200 mV and presents
an additional 12UL of load.
Each of the models 04677, 04680, and 04684 presents an RS-485 network load
of 1.32UL. The automation server has a network load of 0.5UL. To determine the
number of nodes (meters) the bus will support, we first determine the remaining
available unit load capacity after subtracting the base load of the automation
server. This configuration does not require bias which would present a large
reduction.
For networks connecting only with Legrand meters, the initial unit load budget is
48UL. For networks with one or more other Modbus devices that are not isolated,
the initial unit load budget is 32UL. Subtracting the automation server load of
0.5UL, we have a remaining capacity of 47.5UL (all isolated) or 31.5UL (mixed).
For isolated network, the calculated maximum node count is 47.5 / 1.325 = 35.8
nodes (meters).
For mixed network, the calculated maximum node count is 31.5 / 1.325 = 23.7
nodes (meters).

1276
32.37 Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus with Minimal Bias
32.37 Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated

Bus with Minimal Bias
This configuration uses no bus termination, which means reduced data rates and
cable lengths. The configuration applies to any combination of Legrand meter
models 04677, 04680, 04684, or 14669.
When using any combination of Legrand models that include the model 14669
(with the 14673 RS-485 optional plug-in), Configuration 1 cannot be used. For
more information, see section 32.36 “Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus
with No Bias Requirement” on page 1274. The transceiver in the 14673 module
requires a minimum of +200 mV idle line voltage (plus 25-50 mV for noise
margin) to insure a known idle state data output when no transmitters are active.
Bias resistors must be added to the bus to pull the + and – lines apart. To
minimize load on the bus (lowering node count), higher resistance values are
preferred. However, a high resistance bias will not work if bus termination must
be applied. Configuration 2 omits the use of termination. With data rates of
19,200 bps and lower, and cable lengths of less than 150 m (500 ft), the
reflections from an unterminated bus can be tolerated. Without the 120 ohm
resistors at the ends of the bus, the differential signal voltage will expand to wider
level allowing higher noise immunity during the idle state.
the Bias+ terminal.

1277
Figure: Legrand configuration 2 – unterminated bus with minimal bias (for models 04677,
04680, 04684, or 14669)
In Configuration 2, the automation server is connected with 3.3 kohm failsafe bias
resistors. These resistors pull the + and – data lines apart during an idle bus
period. Without the termination resistors, this configuration will easily achieve the
minimum +225 mV level for the full length of the bus. The 3.3 kohm bias serves to

1278
override the faulty bias influence from a Legrand meter when one or more of the
meters lose power while they are still connected to the bus. The TIA-485A
specification on transceivers requires that they do not place any additional load
on the bus when they lose power. The addition of bias resistors within individual
RS-485 network products compromises that insulation from power loss affects.
Lower bias resistance values generate higher levels of bias current and produce
more ill effect from a power down situation.
of 1.32UL, and the model 14669 has a network load of 1.75UL. The automation
server has a network load of 0.5UL. To determine the number of nodes (meters)
the bus will support, we first determine the remaining available unit load capacity
after subtracting the base load of the automation server, and the load produced
by the bias resistors.
the initial unit load budget is 32UL. The automation server has a unit load of
0.5UL. The 3.3 kohm bias gives a unit load of 3.63UL (12,000 / 3,300).
Subtracting these two loads from the initial budget gives a remaining capacity of
43.8UL (all isolated) or 27.8UL (mixed).
For isolated network, the calculated maximum node count is:
• For models 04677, 04680, and 04684: 43.8 / 1.325 = 33 nodes (meters)
• For model 14669: 43.8 / 1.75 = 25 nodes (meters)
For mixed network, the calculated maximum node count is:
• For models 04677, 04680, and 04684: 27.8 / 1.325 = 20.9 nodes (meters)
• For model 14669: 27.8 / 1.75 = 15.7 nodes (meters)
You can accommodate the load from a mixed combination of model 14669
meters and the others by simply summing their individual Total Unit Load values.
Properties” on page 1270. The maximum recommended limit is reached when
that sum reaches 43.8 (for all isolated) or 27.87UL (for mixed network).

1279
32.38 Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with Single End-point Bias

Bus with Single End-point Bias
A third configuration option is available where low resistance bias is added to the
automation server to allow termination to be applied on a network containing one
or more model 14669 meters. The configuration applies to any combination of
Legrand models 04677, 04680, 04684, or 14669. AS-P and AS-B servers provide
a 5 V bias voltage supply, which supports 120 ohm termination resistors at the
two ends of the bus.
Low resistance bias configurations (with 5 V) add significant common mode load
on the network. The common mode load is a function of the bias resistor values
and not the voltage. Maintaining the minimum +225 mV idle voltage on a
terminated bus being biased from one end limits the network to shorter distances
(for a specific wire gauge). This limitation is caused by the voltage divider
network setup by the wire resistance and the termination resistance at the far
end. Larger wire can be used to reach longer distances. See table below.
Another option to achieve long distances is to bias the network from two ends,
according to Configuration 4. For more information, see section 32.39 “Legrand
Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-point Bias” on page 1283.
the Bias+ terminal.

1280
Figure: Legrand configuration 3 – terminated bus with single end-point bias (for models
04677, 04680, 04684, or 14669)
the following table. These wire size and lengths are selected to achieve
compliant idle state voltage at the far end of the network.

1281

150 m (500 ft) 24 AWG (0.20 mm²)
240 m (800 ft) 22 AWG (0.33 mm²)
0.5UL. The 510 ohm bias gives a unit load of 23.5UL (12,000 / 510). Subtracting
these two loads from the initial budget gives a remaining capacity of 24UL (all
isolated) or 8UL (mixed).
• For models 04677, 04680, and 04684: 24 / 1.325 = 18.1 nodes (meters)
• For model 14669: 24 / 1.75 = 13.7 nodes (meters)
• For models 04677, 04680, and 04684: 8 / 1.325 = 6 nodes (meters)
• For model 14669: 8 / 1.75 = 4.5 nodes (meters)
that sum reaches 24UL (for all isolated) or 8UL (for mixed network).

1282
32.39 Legrand Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-point Bias

Bus with Dual End-point Bias
A fourth configuration option is targeted at recovering the full 1200 m (4000 ft)
capability of the RS-485 network while accommodating the standard 120 ohm
End Of Line (EOL) terminations for better high speed data quality. This technique
applies a 5 V bias at each end of the network. Biasing the network from both
ends completely eliminates the dropping failsafe bias voltage as the cable length
extends toward the remote terminator. This configuration option can be used for
any combination of Legrand models 04677, 04680, 04684, or 14669.
With dual end-point bias, a strong and constant bias level is present over the
complete length of the bus. The dual end-point bias uses a pair of 1000 ohm
resistors at each end. This combined parallel resistance of 500 ohm still
encounters the significant unit load reduction as with Configuration 3, but now
supports the RS-485 maximum 1200 m (4000 ft) network length. For more
information, see section 32.38 “Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with
Single End-point Bias” on page 1280.
When using an AS-P server or AS-B server positioned at the head end of the
network, you can use the 5 V available on the Bias+ terminal to provide the head-
end bias. You use an external 5 V DC power supply to provide the bias at the far
end of the network. The recommended power supplies are discussed separately.
For more information, see section 32.40 “Power Supply Selection for Legrand
Configuration 4” on page 1286.Insert

1283
Figure: Legrand configuration 4 – terminated bus with dual end-point bias (for models
04677, 04680, 04684, or 14669)

1284
0.5UL. The dual 1000 ohm bias gives a unit load of 24UL (12,000 / 500).
Subtracting these two loads from the initial budget gives a remaining capacity of
23.5UL (all isolated) or 7.5UL (mixed).
that sum reaches 23.5UL (for all isolated) or 7.5UL (for mixed network).

1285
32.40 Power Supply Selection for Legrand Configuration 4
32.40 Power Supply Selection for Legrand

Configuration 4




load required)

application
configuration.

1286
32.40 Power Supply Selection for Legrand Configuration 4

approvals.

1287
32.41 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (Legrand Power Meters)

(Legrand Power Meters)
32).

1288
32.41 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (Legrand Power Meters)
TSB-89A 485 Application Guidelines)
For example, if we take the 24UL of the bias network seen in Configuration 3 (
Bus with Single End-point Bias” on page 1280.) and add a collection of 32 meter
nodes each rated at 1.325UL, we would have a total network load of 66.4UL (24
+ 42.4UL). In this 32 node configuration, the bus is loaded to 207% of the
standard RS-485 32UL load limit, From the graph above you can see that the
specified minimum -7 V CMV is expected to be reduced to 0 V and the normal
+12 V will pull back to about +3.5 V. Operation of the network with a unit load
twice the standard specified maximum load of 32UL is not recommended. When
operating in a situation where CMV is avoided, the reduction in transceiver CMV
performance can be better tolerated. An isolated RS-485 bus configuration (such
as with the Legrand meters) allows the nodes to be insulated from local ground
voltage differences which are a main source of sustained CMV on the bus. The
isolated bus allows each of the transmitters to move up and down to the idle
voltage of the bus.

1289
32.42 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (Legrand Power Meters)

Isolated Devices Only (Legrand Power
Meters)
maximum unit load limit can be stretched higher. With a network comprised
exclusively of isolated interfaces connected to the automation server, the
standard unit load budget of 32UL can be increased by 50% to have an
expanded budget of 48UL. Using a maximum network load of 48UL and
subtracting the 24UL for the bias network resistors and the load of the automation
server leaves 24UL available for the nodes to be connected on the bus. With the
example device load of 1.32UL each, the expanded budget of 48UL supports 18
nodes (meters) on the bus.
The excess unit load accommodation is unique to the isolated interface
configuration. Excluding the automation server, if a device with a non-isolated
RS-485 interface is connected to the bus, then the complete network must fall
back to comply with the RS-485 standard specified maximum budget of 32UL.

1290
32.43 Cable Selection (Legrand Power Meters)
32.43 Cable Selection (Legrand Power

Meters)
work.
With RS-485, two conductors are used to pass the differential data (A+ and B-
signals) from one node to the next. To maintain the balanced characteristics
between the two wires, the cable must provide twisted pairs and be specified for
data communications. As the twisted pair passes along side other cables and
equipment in the facility, there are a multitude of noise sources, radiated EMI and
electromagnetic fields that will impose noise on to the twisted pair cable.
The shield does not provide any form of total protection. The shield inhibits a
significant portion of high frequency radiated noise, but other fields may simply
pass through. As long as the twisted pair of wires remains balanced, the noise
will be imposed on the two wires equally. An imbalance of impedance to ground
of the differential pair determines in part the susceptibility of the network to
interference, regardless of it being inductive or capacitive coupled. When
balanced, a noise appearing equally on both wires is called common mode noise.
The RS-485 receiver only looks at the differential voltage seen between the two
conductors and ignores the common mode noise. This is true up to the common
mode voltage limits of the transceiver, which should be a minimum range of -7 V
to +12 V. A reduction in this range, such as from fully exhausting transmitter CMV
support with excess unit load, can make the bus susceptible to induced common
mode noise.
The balanced performance of the cable requires more than just the twisted pair
characteristics, although it is definitely the most important. The twisted pair cable
can become unbalanced when encountering discontinuities in the capacitance
between the two wires, or the capacitance from conductor to shield, or the
impedance of the wires. This makes it important to select quality cable specified
for RS-485 data communications. The cable supplier must provide cable
specification that includes all of the characteristics seen in the table below. The
recommended specification for these characteristics is also listed. These will
provide the best results. You should avoid a cable where the
manufacturer/supplier cannot provide the full cable specifications.
IMPORTANT: Multi-conductor cable with a twist of the conductors under the
jacket in not twisted pair cable. Such a casual twist of the wire bundle is a
characteristic on most cables. Such cable has no balanced pair
characteristics.
Table: Recommended Cable Characteristics

Type Shielded Twisted Pair Low Capacitance
Twisted Wire Size 22 AWG to 24 AWG (0.33 mm² to 0.20

mm²)
Impedance 120 ohm
Capacitance (wire to shield) <82 pF/m (<25 pF/ft)

1291
32.43 Cable Selection (Legrand Power Meters)
Continued
Capacitance (wire to wire) <46 pF/m (<14 pF/ft)
Maximum Length 1200 m (4000 ft) depending on termination

and bias restrictions
Belden 22 AWG 2 120 ohm 36.1 68.6 78%

3107A Str (0.33 pF/m (11 pF/m
mm²) pF/ft) (20.9
pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 42.0 75.5 66%

9842 Str (0.20 pF/m pF/m (23
mm²) (12.8 pF/ft)
pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 39.4 72.2 76% Y

82842 Str (0.20 pF/m (12 pF/m (22
mm²) pF/ft) pF/ft)
Belden 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 39.4 72.2 76% Y

89842 Str (0.20 pF/m (12 pF/m (22
mm²) pF/ft) pF/ft)
Alpha 22 AWG 2 120 ohm 36.1 68.6 78%

6455 mm²) pF/ft) (20.9
pF/ft)
Alpha 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 42.0 75.5

6413 mm²) (12.8 pF/ft)
pF/ft)
General 24 AWG 2 120 ohm 37.4 67.3 66%

C0842A mm²) (11.4 (20.5
pF/ft) pF/ft)
a) Cap1 = Capacitance between the two conductors of the pair(s)

b) Cap2 = Capacitance from each signal conductor to shield
All cables recommended for Legrand are two pair cables. This allocates one
twisted pair for data and one twisted pair for use in providing a large gauge
shielded RS-485 return conductor from the isolated commons on all of the
Legrand meters. This scheme is consistent with the recommendations detailed in
the Legrand communications guide. The Legrand guide recommends the use of
Belden 9842 cable (or equivalent twisted pair cable).

1292
32.44 Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx Series Devices

Viconics room controllers. The recommendations are associated with the
Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx series thermostats / room controllers configured with the
Viconics plug-on MS/TP network adapter. This information is intended to
supplement the instructions you receive with the various RS-485 network
devices. The guidelines focus on the arrangement of the electrical interface to the
automation server's RS-485 port in regards to biasing, termination, cable
selection, cable lengths, and cable routing. The guidelines on maximum unit load
(node count) and common mode voltage tolerance are associated with AS-P and
AS-B servers.
The general wiring of the BACnet MS/TP adapter is described in the following
Viconics documents:
• BACnet Integration Manual ITG-VT(R) 72_73-BAC-E11 (028-6009 R11,
2012-02-07)
• BACnet Integration Manual ITG-VT76xx-PIR-BAC-E02 (028-6015 R2, 2011-
01-23)
• BACnet Integration Manual ITG-VZ7xxx-BAC-E04 (028-6011 R4, 2012-05-
31)
• BACnet Zoning System Application Guide VBZS_Rel2_Application_Guide-
E04 (2012-01-10)
32.44.1 General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device

Properties
The RS-485 transceiver encountered on the Viconics MS/TP adapters reviewed
was the STM ST485C. This transceiver alone has a RS-485 unit load rating of
0.5. With consideration only for the transceiver unit load, the 0.5 unit load rating
would indicate up to 64 units transceivers could be attached to a single RS-485
network wire segment. This is the unit load and node limit described in Viconics'
documents. The network adapter includes an on-board weak bias resistor of 100
kohm on the A+ and B- bus signals. This added 100 kohm resistance presents an
additional unit load of 0.12UL making each of the controllers have an aggregate
unit load of 0.62. This is the value that should be used in totaling the network
load.
For more information, see section 32.45 “General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device
32.44.2 VT/VZ7xxx Configurations

The recommendations include two different configuration options to choose from
For more information, see section 32.46 “VT/VZ7xxx Configurations” on page
1298.

1293

32).
Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)” on page
1307.

Devices Only
maximum load extension should be 16UL (that is, 50% overload) giving a total
expanded unit load limit of 48UL. Using a maximum network load of 48UL and
subtracting the 24UL for the bias network and automation server leaves 24UL
available for the sensors/controllers. With the example device load of 0.62UL
each, it is suggested that the isolated bus arrangement could support the full
collection of up to 38 sensors.
Isolated Devices Only (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)” on page 1309.



1294

work.

1295
32.45 General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device Properties
32.45 General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device

Properties
The RS-485 transceiver encountered on the Viconics MS/TP adapters reviewed
was the STM ST485C. This transceiver alone has a RS-485 unit load rating of
0.5. With consideration only for the transceiver unit load, the 0.5 unit load rating
would indicate up to 64 units transceivers could be attached to a single RS-485
network wire segment. This is the unit load and node limit described in Viconics'
documents. The network adapter includes an on-board weak bias resistor of 100
kohm on the A+ and B- bus signals. This added 100 kohm resistance presents an
additional unit load of 0.12UL making each of the controllers have an aggregate
unit load of 0.62. This is the value that should be used in totaling the network
load.
Figure: Viconics BACnet MS/TP network adapter board
The transceiver used on the network adapter does not include an integrated
failsafe receiver function. This means network biasing resistors are required on
the RS-485 bus to insure the idle state of the bus is kept at a minimum of +200
mV (plus a noise buffer such as 25 to 50 mV). The recommended configuration of
bias resistors are not discussed in Viconics' documents with the exception of a
single line entry in the table referenced as Summary of Specifications for a
Viconics' EIA-485 Network.
Table: Excerpt from Summary of Specifications for a Viconics' EIA-485 Network

Parameter Details
Network Bias Resistors 510 ohm per wire (maximum of two sets
per segment)
A 510 ohm pull-up resistor on the RS-485 A+ line and a 510 ohm pull-down
resistor on the B- line is consistent with the typical recommendations when strong
biasing is required. A strong (low resistance) bias is required due to the
recommendation for bus termination resistors. The Viconics specification
summary mentions a maximum of two sets per segment. The connection of two
instances of 510 ohm is not recommended, due to loading issues. The single 510
ohm bias has significant negative affect with 24UL unit load consumption. Two
sets would consume 150% of standard unit load capacity without adding the first
controller. Dual end biasing with a higher resistance is a recommended. For more

1296
32.45 General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device Properties
information, see section 32.48 “VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias

(External Supply Source)” on page 1302.option
The RS-485 circuitry on the network adapter is found to provide an isolated
interface. The DC common used by the RS-485 transceiver is isolated from the
local ground potential. This isolated DC common created by the isolated DC
power supply on the adapter is presented on the terminal labeled REF on the
three-position terminal block provided on the edge of the adapter board.
In accordance with the specific instructions in Viconics' documents, the REF
terminal is not connected in the field. It is left OPEN and does not connect with
the cable or the local environment. This creates the situation where the local
isolated common is left to float to the common mode voltage level influenced by
the combined median voltage levels of the two differential RS-485 data signals
(A+ and B-). Viconics' documents contains the following instructions:
Figure: Viconics balanced pair and shield connections
IMPORTANT: The REF terminal should never be used to wire shields. The
two shields from each feed of the network connection to a thermostat should
be wired together in the back of the thermostat and properly protected to
prevent any accidental connection to the ground.
Review of the RS-485 interface provided on the network adapter yields the
following interface attributes:
Table: Interface Attributes of the Network Adapter

er er Unit er Failsafe Circuit Bias Load Load RS-485
Load Bias Bus
STM 0.500 No 100 kohm 0.120 0.620 Yes

ST485C
Viconics recommends a data rate of 38.4 kbps for most systems and notes that
the 76.8 kbps data rate is available for large networks (80+ devices). These rates
call for the recommended use of End Of Line (EOL) resistor termination.

1297
32.46 VT/VZ7xxx Configurations
32.46 VT/VZ7xxx Configurations

The recommendations include two different configuration options to choose from
32.46.1 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-point

Bias (Automation Server Provided Source)
This configuration is the simplest to arrange and supports bus lengths out to 150
m (500 ft) on 24 AWG (0.20 mm²). The automation server should be configured
with two 510 ohm bias resistors. One resistor connecting the + data line to the
Bias+ terminal on the automation server and the other resistor connecting the –
data line to the RET terminal on the automation server. The bias is required to
support the transceivers in the VT/VZ nodes and the termination of the bus. AS-P
servers and AS-B servers provide 5 V for bias, which supports 120 ohm
termination resistors at the two ends of the bus. This will achieve the minimum
idle line bias voltage of +200 mV required by the transceivers. Low resistance
bias configurations (with 5 V supplies) add significant common mode load on the
RS-485 network. The common mode load (Unit Load) of the bias network must
be summed with the accumulated unit load of the collection of VT/VZ
thermostats/controllers to identify the total unit load on the bus.
For more information, see section 32.47 “VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-
point Bias (Automation Server Provided Source)” on page 1299.
32.46.2 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-point

Bias (External Supply Source)
bias at the two termination points, the arrangement maintains an equal bias
across the complete length of the cable.
For more information, see section 32.48 “VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-
point Bias (External Supply Source)” on page 1302.
32.46.3 Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx

Configuration 2
For more information, see section 32.49 “Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx

1298
32.47 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-point Bias (Automation Server Provided Source)
32.47 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-

point Bias (Automation Server Provided
Source)
This configuration is the simplest to arrange and supports bus lengths out to 150
m (500 ft) on 24 AWG (0.20 mm²). The automation server should be configured
with two 510 ohm bias resistors. One resistor connecting the + data line to the
Bias+ terminal on the automation server and the other resistor connecting the –
data line to the RET terminal on the automation server. The bias is required to
support the transceivers in the VT/VZ nodes and the termination of the bus. AS-P
servers and AS-B servers provide 5 V for bias, which supports 120 ohm
termination resistors at the two ends of the bus. This will achieve the minimum
idle line bias voltage of +200 mV required by the transceivers. Low resistance
bias configurations (with 5 V supplies) add significant common mode load on the
RS-485 network. The common mode load (Unit Load) of the bias network must
be summed with the accumulated unit load of the collection of VT/VZ
thermostats/controllers to identify the total unit load on the bus.
The requirement for bias resistors to maintain an idle state voltage greater than
200 mV also presents a limitation on the wire length due to idle state voltage drop
produced by the wire resistance. The restricted length is due to the voltage
divider network setup by the wire resistance and the termination resistance at the
far end. See table below for recommended wire sizes and maximum distance.
Configuration 2 offers a superior alternative option if long cable lengths are
needed. For more information, see section 32.48 “VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2:
Dual End-point Bias (External Supply Source)” on page 1302.
Connect a termination 120 ohm resistor across the + and - data lines at the head
complete cable segment. The shield drain wire from the cable segments are
twisted together and passed by each node.
Selection” on page 1232.
the Bias+ terminal.

1299
Figure: VT/VZ7xxx configuration 1 – single end-point bias (automation server provided

source)
the following table. These wire size and lengths are selected to maintain the
minimum idle state voltage at the far terminated end of the network (away from
the automation server where the bias is provided).

1300

150 m (500 ft) 24 AWG (0.20 mm²)
240 m (800 ft) 22 AWG (0.33 mm²)
The maximum sensor/node count is 38 (using only the VT/VT7xxx devices). The
node count reduces if mixed network with non-isolated devices (such as b3
BACnet devices). Node count discussions and other limiting factors are
described separately. For more information, see section 32.51 “Expanded Unit
Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)” on
page 1309.

1301
32.48 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply Source)
32.48 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-

point Bias (External Supply Source)
bias at the two termination points, the arrangement maintains an equal bias
across the complete length of the cable.
When using a AS-P server or AS-B server, and the server is positioned near one
end of the network cable, you can use the 5 V available on the Bias+ terminal to
provide the network bias at the head end of the cable. You use a separate 5 V
DC power supply to provide the network bias at the far end of the cable. The
recommended power supplies are discussed separately. For more information,
see section 32.49 “Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2” on
page 1305.
server or AS-B server. Connect an external 5 V DC power supply to the MS/TP
the bus.
wire.
Selection” on page 1232.

1302
Figure: VT/VZ7xxx configuration 2 – dual end-point bias (external supply source)
The maximum sensor/node count is 38 (using only the VT/VT7xxx devices). The
node count reduces if mixed network with non-isolated devices (such as b3
BACnet devices). Node count discussions and other limiting factors are
described separately. For more information, see section 32.51 “Expanded Unit
Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)” on
page 1309.

1303
The recommended location for the bias is at the two extreme ends of the network
cable, but the bias voltage remains effective with a 60 m (200 ft) tolerance on the
cable length from the end. This configuration supports the preferred termination
resistor values of 120 ohm with one positioned at each end of the cable. The unit
load imposed by the dual end-point bias is 24UL (12,000 / (1,000 / 2)).

1304
32.49 Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2
32.49 Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx

Configuration 2




load required)

application
configuration.

1305
32.49 Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2

approvals.

1306
32.50 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)

(Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)
32).

1307
32.50 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of Excess Unit Load (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)
TSB-89A 485 Application Guidelines)
For example, if we accumulate the unit load from a collection of 63 RS-485
controller nodes each presenting a 0.62UL load, then we would have a device
load of 39.06UL. When we add that to the 24UL of the 510 ohm bias network with
the automation server, we now have a total network load of 63.06UL. In a
configuration with 63 VT7000 devices we would have a load almost twice (197%)
the standard recommended load limit of 32UL. From the figure above you can
see that the specified minimum -7 V CMV will be expected to reduce to 0 V and
the normal +12 V CMV support will reduce to about +3.5 V. All CMV reserve drive
capacity has been completely exhausted. When operating in a situation where
CMV is avoided, the reduction in transceiver CMV performance can be better
tolerated. An isolated RS-485 bus configuration (such as with the VT7xxx
sensors) allows the nodes to be insulated from local ground voltage differences
which are a main source of sustained CMV on the bus. The isolated bus allows
each of the transmitters to move up/down to the idle voltage of the bus.

1308
32.51 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices)

Isolated Devices Only (Viconics
VT/VZ7xxx Devices)
maximum load extension should be 16UL (that is, 50% overload) giving a total
expanded unit load limit of 48UL. Using a maximum network load of 48UL and
subtracting the 24UL for the bias network and automation server leaves 24UL
available for the sensors/controllers. With the example device load of 0.62UL
each, it is suggested that the isolated bus arrangement could support the full
collection of up to 38 sensors.
The extra unit load accommodation is unique to the isolated interface
configuration. The configuration is operating with a single non-isolated node (the
automation server) which acts as the single point reference for the CMV of the
network pair as imposed by the bias arrangement. If this configuration of isolated
device nodes is intermixed with any other products that are not isolated, the
configuration rules on the network node count must fall back to the limits
produced with the standard 32UL maximum total unit load.
If the standard specified unit load limit of 32 is applied, the node count calculation
is as follows:
• Subtracting 24UL from the starting budget of 32 gives a node budget of 8UL.
• Each of the Viconics sensors presents a RS-485 network load of 0.62UL.
• The calculated VT7xxx node count that consumes the remainder of the
budget is: 8UL / 0.62UL = 12.9 nodes

1309
33 Hardware Troubleshooting
Topics
General Hardware Configuration Problem
No Communication with Automation Server
No Communication with Central IO Module
Unexpected I/O Values
Unexpected I/O Values
Power Supply Overload
No Power or MP-C Does Not Turn On
No Power or MP-V Does Not Turn On
No Power or IP-IO Module Does Not Turn On
No Power or RP-C Does Not Turn On
MP-C or MP-V Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation Software
IP-IO Module Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation Software
RP-C Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
Software
Equipment Connected to an MP Controller Is Not Properly
Controlled
Equipment Connected to an IP-IO Module Is Not Properly
Controlled
Equipment Connected to an RP-C Controller Is Not Properly
33 Controlled
Date and Time Is Not Accurate
MP-V Damper Actuator Does Not Move or Respond to
Position Commands
VAV Box Controls to Full Open State with Maximum Air Flow
Air Flow Rate Higher or Lower Than Expected
No Air Flow or Air Flow Is Not Changing
SpaceLogic Sensor or MP Controller Sensor Bus Is Not
Operational
SpaceLogic Sensor or RP-C Controller Sensor Bus Is Not
Operational
SpaceLogic Sensor Offline
Sensor Bus Communication Problems
RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Is Not
Operational
RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Offline
Room Bus Communication Problems
AD v1 or AD v2 Does Not Turn On or Battery Does Not
Charge
AD v3 Does Not Turn On or Operate Correctly
AD v1 or AD v2 Battery Does Not Fully Charge
USB Data Communication is Lagging or Data is Lost
Network Unavailable
33.1 General Hardware Configuration Problem
33.1 General Hardware Configuration

Problem
The automation server or its Central IO modules respond erratically or not at all.
33.1.1 Solutions
The solutions are listed in order: the solution most likely to fix the problem is listed
first. Work through each solution until the problem is resolved.
• Ensure that all the devices are connected in the correct order:
Position 1: Power supply
Position 2: AS-P server
Positions 3 to 32: Central IO modules and additional power supplies
• Ensure that there is only one AS-P server on the I/O bus, and that it is in
position 2.
• Ensure that the total power consumption for each power supply is not
exceeded.

1313
33.2 No Communication with Automation Server
33.2 No Communication with Automation

Server
The automation server does not respond to any type of communication.
33.2.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the automation server has completed any firmware updates,
because no communication is possible before the update finishes.
For more information, see the Uploading and Upgrading a SmartX Server
topic on WebHelp.
For more information, see the Downloading an Upgraded Database to an
Automation Server topic on WebHelp.
• Ensure that the automation server has a correct IP address and host name.
For more information, see the Identifying the Automation Server IP Address
topic on WebHelp.
• Find out if the automation server IP address has been modified. If the IP
address has been assigned with the DHCP function, this address may have
been changed by the DHCP server. To avoid this problem, use the fully
qualified domain name instead of the dynamic IP address to connect to the
automation server.
For more information, see the Identifying the Automation Server IP Address
topic on WebHelp.
• Ensure that the AS-P server electronics module has been correctly installed
on the intended terminal base, in position 2 on the I/O bus. AS-P server
should be installed on the terminal base TB-ASP-W1.
For more information, see section 4.9 “Installing an Electronics Module on a
Terminal Base” on page 85.
• Ensure that no pins in the AS-P server electronics module have been bent
when connected to the terminal base.
Particularly, check the pins connecting to the backplane of the terminal base.
Check the two different positions (left and right) of the female 6x2 connector
on the backplane to distinguish the terminal base for the power supply from
the other devices.
• Restore the automation server firmware, if you suspect that it has been
damaged.
For more information, see the Restoring the Software of a Damaged SmartX
Server topic on WebHelp.

1314
33.3 No Communication with Central IO Module
33.3 No Communication with Central IO

Module
One or more Central IO modules do not respond to any type of communication.
33.3.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the Central IO module has been correctly installed on a Terminal
Base of the correct type, in position 3 or higher on the I/O bus. Other
Terminal Base types will not work.
For more information, see section 4.9 “Installing an Electronics Module on a
Terminal Base” on page 85.
• Ensure that the Central IO module has been assigned a Module number 3-
32 that corresponds to its position 3-32 on the I/O bus. When a new module
is created it is automatically assigned the Module no. 0 which is an invalid
number, and so you must assign a valid number to the module.
For more information, see the Central IO Modules in the Work Area topic on
WebHelp.
• Ensure that no pins in the Central IO module have been bent when
connected to the Terminal Base.
Particularly, check the pins connecting to the backplane of the Terminal
Base. Note also the two different positions (left and right) of the female 6x2
connector on the backplane to distinguish the Terminal Base for the power
supply from the other devices.

1315
33.4 Unexpected I/O Values

One or more observed I/O values differ from the expected values.
33.4.1 Solutions
• For Central IO modules with manual override capability, ensure that the
HAND/AUTO/OFF override switches and potentiometers are correctly
configured.
For more information, see section 7.5 “Override Switches and
Potentiometers” on page 138.
• Ensure that the inputs and outputs are correctly configured. This is
particularly important for the temperature inputs, which use specific
thermistor types.
For more information, see the I/O Point Properties – Basic Tab topic on
WebHelp.

1316

One or more observed I/O values differ from the expected values.
33.5.1 Solutions
• For AS-B servers with manual override capability, ensure that the output
override mode (Hand or Auto) and override values are correctly configured.
• Ensure that the inputs and outputs are correctly configured. This is
particularly important for the temperature inputs, which use specific
thermistor types.
For more information, see the I/O Point Properties – Basic Tab topic on
WebHelp.

1317
33.6 Power Supply Overload
33.6 Power Supply Overload

The PS-24V status LED indicates a power overload by turning red, and the power
supply shuts down.
33.6.1 Solutions
• Check if you have exceeded the total I/O Bus addressing power limits. For
more information, see section 5.5 “Power Budget” on page 105.
• If the power limit has been exceeded, insert another power supply in a
suitable position among the devices to reduce the power load on the original
power supply. See the illustration below.
• If you have NOT exceeded the power limits, inspect for failed Central IO
modules. A failed module could be drawing too much current and sending
the power supply into overcurrent protection mode.
• Remove/replace failed or less important Central IO modules until power
consumption has decreased to an acceptable level.
Figure: I/O Bus Addressing and Power Limits

1318
33.7 No Power or MP-C Does Not Turn On

The MP-C Status LED is not lit, which indicates that there is no power supply to
turn on the MP-C. For more information, see section 12.6 “MP Controller LEDs”
on page 419.
DANGER
equipment.
CAUTION
NOTICE
CONTROLLER DAMAGE
Ensure that the input power polarity is correct and that the voltage level meets
the specifications of the controller.
33.7.1 Solutions
• Verify that the input voltage is in range (24 VAC ±20 % or 21 VDC to 33
VDC) using a digital voltmeter.
• Ensure that the 3-position terminal block for the power supply is properly
installed on the MP-C terminal numbers 1, 2, and 3 and that it is wired
correctly according to existing wiring diagrams and wire labelling.
For more information, see section 10.15 “Installing a Terminal Block on MP-
C” on page 327.
For more information, see section 10.17 “Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C”
on page 330.
For more information, see section 10.18 “Powering Up MP-C” on page 331.
• Replace the 3-position terminal block if it is damaged.
For more information, see section 10.16 “Removing a Terminal Block from
MP-C” on page 329.
For more information, see section 10.17 “Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C”
on page 330.
C” on page 327.

1319
• If the MP-C has completely lost all electrical functions, replace the MP-C
controller.

1320
33.8 No Power or MP-V Does Not Turn On
33.8 No Power or MP-V Does Not Turn On

The MP-V Status LED is not lit, which indicates that there is no power supply to
turn on the MP-V. For more information, see section 12.6 “MP Controller LEDs”
on page 419.
CAUTION
before wiring.
NOTICE
CONTROLLER DAMAGE
the specifications of the controller.
33.8.1 Solutions
• Verify that the input voltage is in range (24 VAC ±20 %) using a digital
voltmeter.
installed on the MP-V terminal numbers 1 and 2 and that it is wired correctly
according to existing wiring diagrams and wire labelling.
V” on page 389.
For more information, see section 11.18 “Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V”
on page 392.
For more information, see section 11.19 “Powering Up MP-V” on page 393.
MP-V” on page 391.
For more information, see section 11.18 “Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V”
on page 392.
V” on page 389.
• If the MP-V has completely lost all electrical functions, replace the MP-V
controller.

1321
33.9 No Power or IP-IO Module Does Not Turn On
33.9 No Power or IP-IO Module Does Not

Turn On
The IP-IO module Status LED is not lit, which indicates that there is no power
supply to turn on the IP-IO module. For more information, see section 15.11 “IP-
IO Module LEDs” on page 518.
DANGER
equipment.
CAUTION
NOTICE
IP-IO MODULE DAMAGE
the specifications of the IP-IO module.
33.9.1 Solutions
• Verify that the input voltage is in range (24 VAC ±20 % or 21 VDC to 33
VDC) using a digital voltmeter.
installed on the IP-IO module terminal numbers 1, 2, and 3 and that it is
wired correctly according to existing wiring diagrams and wire labelling.
For more information, see section 15.17 “Installing a Terminal Block on an
IP-IO Module” on page 535.
For more information, see section 15.19 “Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-
IO Module” on page 539.
For more information, see section 15.20 “Powering Up an IP-IO Module” on
page 541.
an IP-IO Module” on page 537.
For more information, see section 15.19 “Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-
IO Module” on page 539.

1322
33.9 No Power or IP-IO Module Does Not Turn On
For more information, see section 15.17 “Installing a Terminal Block on an

IP-IO Module” on page 535.
page 541.
• If the IP-IO module has completely lost all electrical functions, replace the IP-
IO module.

1323
33.10 No Power or RP-C Does Not Turn On
33.10 No Power or RP-C Does Not Turn On

The RP-C Status LED is not lit, which indicates that there is no power supply to
turn on the RP-C. For more information, see section 16.18 “RP-C LEDs” on page
605.
DANGER
NOTICE
CONTROLLER DAMAGE
• Ensure that the input power voltage level meets the specifications of the
controller.
• For RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C, ensure that the polarity of the input power is
correct.
33.10.1 Solutions
• Verify that the input voltage is in range using a digital voltmeter.
• Ensure that the RP-C screw terminal numbers 1, 2, and 3 are wired correctly
according to existing wiring diagrams and wire labelling.
For more information, see section 16.23 “Wiring a Screw Terminal on RP-C”
on page 620.
For more information, see section 16.24 “Powering Up an RP-C-12A, -12B,
or -12C Controller” on page 621.
For more information, see section 16.25 “Powering Up an RP-C-16A
• If the RP-C has completely lost all electrical functions, replace the RP-C
controller.

1324
33.11 MP-C or MP-V Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation Software
33.11 MP-C or MP-V Is Not Visible in the

EcoStruxure Building Operation
Software
The MP controller is not visible or not available in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation software such as WorkStation. The Ethernet LED on the controller
indicates that there is no data communication on the Ethernet port. For more
information, see section 12.6 “MP Controller LEDs” on page 419.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
33.11.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the Ethernet cable is plugged into the Ethernet port labeled
Ethernet 1 or Ethernet 2 on the MP controller.
• When two or more MP controllers are connected in a daisy-chain

configuration, ensure that each Ethernet cable that connects two controllers
is properly connected to the Ethernet ports on the controllers.
• Check that the Ethernet cable and Ethernet port are not damaged or
defective.
• If the MP-C is equipped with the MP-C Display add-on module, use the
Home screen to verify that the controller's IP network settings, such as IP
address assignment method, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway,
are correct.
For more information, see section 14.3 “Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO

1325
33.12 IP-IO Module Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation Software
33.12 IP-IO Module Is Not Visible in the

EcoStruxure Building Operation
Software
The IP-IO module is not visible or not available in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation software such as WorkStation. The Ethernet LED on the IP-IO module
information, see section 15.11 “IP-IO Module LEDs” on page 518.
33.12.1 Solutions
Ethernet 1 or Ethernet 2 on the IP-IO module.
• When two or more IP-IO modules are connected in a daisy-chain

configuration, ensure that each Ethernet cable that connects two IP-IO
modules is properly connected to the Ethernet ports on the IP-IO modules.
defective.

1326
33.12 IP-IO Module Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation Software
• If the IP-IO module is equipped with the MP-C Display add-on module, use
the Home screen to verify that the IP-IO modules's IP network settings, such
as IP address assignment method, IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway, are correct.
For more information, see section 14.3 “Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO

1327
33.13 RP-C Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation Software
33.13 RP-C Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure

Building Operation Software
The RP-C controller is not visible or not available in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation software such as WorkStation. The Ethernet LED on the controller
information, see section 16.18 “RP-C LEDs” on page 605.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
switch or router.
33.13.1 Solutions
Ethernet 1 or Ethernet 2 on the RP-C controller.

1328
33.13 RP-C Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation Software
• When two or more RP-C controllers are connected in a daisy-chain

configuration, ensure that each Ethernet cable that connects two controllers
is properly connected to the Ethernet ports on the controllers.
inoperable.

1329
33.14 Equipment Connected to an MP Controller Is Not Properly Controlled
33.14 Equipment Connected to an MP

Controller Is Not Properly Controlled
Equipment connected to an MP controller output is not properly controlled by the
controller.
NOTICE
CONTROLLER DAMAGE
Ensure that the terminal blocks are plugged into the correct connector headers
on the controller.
33.14.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the terminal block for the power supply is installed on the correct
terminals on the MP controller. Check that the Status LED is lit, which
indicates that the controller is powered.
• When equipment connected to a universal input/output is not properly
controlled, ensure that the cables are correctly connected and not swapped.
• Check the polarity of wires connected to a universal input/output configured
as a voltage input, voltage output, or current output.
• When equipment connected to a triac output is not properly controlled,
ensure that the terminal block for the triac output are installed on the correct
terminals on the MP controller.
For more information, see section 10.5 “MP-C Screw Terminals” on page
294.
For more information, see section 11.7 “MP-V Screw Terminals” on page
363.
C” on page 327.
V” on page 389.

1330
33.15 Equipment Connected to an IP-IO Module Is Not Properly Controlled
33.15 Equipment Connected to an IP-IO

Module Is Not Properly Controlled
Equipment connected to an IP-IO module output is not properly controlled by the
IP-IO module.
NOTICE
IP-IO MODULE DAMAGE
Ensure that the terminal blocks are plugged into the correct connector headers
on the IP-IO module.
33.15.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the terminal block for the power supply is installed on the correct
terminals on the IP-IO module. Check that the Status LED is lit, which
indicates that the IP-IO module is powered.
For more information, see section 15.11 “IP-IO Module LEDs” on page 518.
page 541.
controlled, ensure that the cables are correctly connected and not swapped.
as a voltage input or voltage output.

1331
33.16 Equipment Connected to an RP-C Controller Is Not Properly Controlled
33.16 Equipment Connected to an RP-C

Controller Is Not Properly Controlled
Equipment connected to an RP-C controller output is not properly controlled by
the controller.
33.16.1 Solutions
• Check that the Status LED is lit, which indicates that the controller is
powered.
controlled, ensure that the wires are correctly connected and not swapped.
as a voltage input or voltage output.

1332
33.17 Date and Time Is Not Accurate
33.17 Date and Time Is Not Accurate

The BACnet/IP Controller device displays invalid or inaccurate date and time
after being powered down for more than 7 days.
33.17.1 Solution
Configure the BACnet/IP Controller device date and time using the Commission
mobile application. For more information, see the Configuring the BACnet/IP
Controller Date and Time topic on WebHelp.

1333
33.18 MP-V Damper Actuator Does Not Move or Respond to Position Commands
33.18 MP-V Damper Actuator Does Not Move

or Respond to Position Commands
The MP-V damper actuator does not move or respond to position commands
sent to the Damper Control object.
The problem is probably caused by a binding between the actuator and damper,
or other obstructions hindering the damper operation. The actuator collar must
rotate freely when pressing and holding the manual override button. If the
damper rotation is being impeded due to a binding condition and the rotation
requires a greater torque than the actuator can provide, the non-occurring
rotation adversely affects the automatic calibration performed during power-up.
An incorrect power-up calibration produces what appears to be a non-operational
actuator. The actuator does not move regardless of the 0 to 100% position
command sent to the Damper Control object.
33.18.1 Solution
• With the MP-V mounted to the VAV box, ensure that the damper can rotate
freely between the fully open and fully closed positions.
For more information, see section 11.12 “Installing MP-V on a Damper that
Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to Open” on page 378.
Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open” on page 372.
• In WorkStation, select the Damper Command object, select the
Recalibrate property, and select True.
For more information, see the Configuring an MP-V Damper Command topic
on WebHelp.
• Verify that the damper rotates freely between the fully open and fully closed
positions during recalibrate operation.

1334
33.19 VAV Box Controls to Full Open State with Maximum Air Flow
33.19 VAV Box Controls to Full Open State

with Maximum Air Flow
The VAV box controls to full open state with maximum air flow. The problem may
be due to the following reasons:
• Incorrect connection of the tubes from the velocity probe:
The tubes may be reversed in the connection to the High and Low pressure
input ports on the MP-V. Also, if the High side tube connection has a bad
connection, fallen off, or has a kink in the tubing, this can cause a low
velocity pressure reading and produce a maximum air flow condition.
• Incorrect air flow balancing of the VAV unit:
A significant error in the calibration process can cause a low velocity
pressure reading and therefore a high air flow condition.
• Incorrect installation of the MP-V actuator on the damper shaft:
A loose actuator can cause the damper to open due to air pressure, and
prevent the damper from closing properly.
NOTE: You can use the Commission mobile application I/O checkout
feature to help troubleshoot MP-V and the operation of the damper.
33.19.1 Solutions
• When a negative velocity pressure reading is observed in WorkStation or the
Commission mobile application, check the polarity of the High side and Low
side tubes from the velocity probe in the duct inlet. If the tubes are reversed,
swap the tubes connected to the MP-V air flow sensor inputs labeled (Low)
and (High).
For more information, see section 11.15 “Connecting an Air Velocity Probe
to the MP-V Air Flow Sensor” on page 387.
• Ensure that the High side tube is properly connected.
• Repeat the air flow balancing of the VAV unit.
For more information, see the Flow Balancer Workflow topic on WebHelp.
• Ensure that the two damper shaft mounting screws in the MP-V actuator
collar (or in the alternative positions on the MP-V) are securely tightened on
the damper shaft with the torque recommended for the damper shaft
material.

1335
33.20 Air Flow Rate Higher or Lower Than Expected
33.20 Air Flow Rate Higher or Lower Than

Expected
The air flow rate is higher or lower than expected, and the room temperature calls
for. The problem may be due to the following reasons:
• Incorrect or omitted air flow balancing of the VAV unit
• Insufficient straight duct extending upstream from the VAV duct inlet,
causing incorrect velocity pressure readings:
Bends in the air duct close to the VAV box inlet can cause the flow to
concentrate along the outer edge of the duct curve. This prompts the air flow
to be inconsistent across the pick-up probe and introduces an incorrect
(typically low) velocity pressure.
• Oversized VAV duct inlet diameter, causing too low air velocity pressure,
especially at low air flow setpoints
• Too low static pressure in the duct feeding the VAV inlet:
This can be a continuous or intermittent condition caused by other VAV
boxes on the supply duct requiring more air flow than supported by the AHU
design, or insufficient AHU supply for maximum cooling.
• Improper handling or aging of the system, causing a small shift of the
pressure signal over years
• Mispositioned travel adjustment screws
33.20.1 Solutions
• Repeat the air flow balancing of the VAV unit.
For more information, see the Flow Balancer Workflow topic on WebHelp.
• Ensure that there is sufficient straight duct extending upstream from the VAV
duct inlet.
• Ensure that air velocity pressure is not too low at low air flow setpoints. We
recommend controlling to air velocity pressures of 7.5 Pa (0.03 inH2O) or
higher.
• Ensure that the static pressure is not too low in the duct feeding the VAV
inlet.
The AHU control is managed by a different controller than the MP-V, based
on a static pressure sensor typically located 2/3 to 3/4 the distance down the
duct. The VAV box manufacturer specifies the minimum static pressure
required to achieve the rated air flow through the VAV box. The AHU control
is not described here.
• Monitor the zero (0) velocity pressure reading from the MP-V when the AHU
has been turned off at night. Ensure that the pressure signal is not changed
over time.
Any accumulated zero (0) velocity pressure reading can be corrected to
produce a 0 Pa (0 inH2O) reading by entering a velocity pressure offset
calibration value.

1336
33.20 Air Flow Rate Higher or Lower Than Expected
For more information, see the Configuring the Box Zero Flow Threshold topic
on WebHelp.
• Ensure that the travel adjustment screws are correctly positioned. The
screws must not obstruct the damper operation.

1337
33.21 No Air Flow or Air Flow Is Not Changing

There is no air flow or the air flow is not changing. The problem may be due to the
following reasons:
• Incorrect connection of the tubes from the velocity probe:
The tubes may have fallen off or not been properly connected to the High
and Low pressure input ports on the MP-V.
• No supply air inlet pressure
• Incorrect installation of the MP-V actuator on the damper shaft:
The MP-V actuator may have come loose or not been properly attached to
the damper shaft.
• Incorrect configuration of the MP-V actuator's direction of rotation
• Incorrect installation of the MP-V:
The installation of the MP-V, or some nearby obstacle, may have placed the
damper movement in a bind, not allowing free movement.
• MP-V actuator motor is not running or the damper is not moving:
The motor may be running, but the damper is not moving due to magnetic
clutch slipping when the maximum torque is reached, possible due to a
binding in the shaft mounting or malfunction of the damper shaft mechanics
or bearings.
33.21.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the tubes from the air velocity probe in the inlet section of the
VAV box are properly connected to the MP-V air flow sensor inputs labeled
(Low) and (High).
• Ensure that the AHU is active and delivering proper static pressure.
The AHU control is managed by a different controller than the MP-V, based
on a static pressure sensor typically located 2/3 to 3/4 the distance down the
duct. The VAV box manufacturer specifies the minimum static pressure
required to achieve the rated air flow through the VAV box. The AHU control
is not described here.
• Ensure that the two damper shaft mounting screws in the MP-V actuator
collar (or in the alternative positions on the MP-V) are securely tightened on
the damper shaft with the torque recommended for the damper shaft
material.
• Ensure that the MP-V is correctly configured with regards to the actuator's
direction of the rotation, Clockwise (CW) or Counterclockwise (CCW), to
open the damper.

1338
For more information, see the Manually Verifying the Direction of Damper
Rotation topic on WebHelp.
WebHelp.
• Ensure that the VAV box damper shaft can rotate freely between the fully
open and fully closed positions. There must be no binding between the MP-V
actuator and the damper, or obstructions hindering the damper operation.
• Ensure that the MP-V actuator motor is running. Ensure also that the
actuator and damper shaft is not binding with the actuator mounting and the
damper rotates freely by hand after pressing the gear release button.

1339
33.22 SpaceLogic Sensor or MP Controller Sensor Bus Is Not Operational
33.22 SpaceLogic Sensor or MP Controller

Sensor Bus Is Not Operational
The SpaceLogic Sensor or the MP controller sensor bus is not operational. The
Sensor Bus LEDs on the MP controller may indicate that there is no data
communication on the sensor bus. For more information, see section 12.6 “MP
Controller LEDs” on page 419. An alarm is triggered and presented in the
EcoStruxure Building Operation software when a SpaceLogic Sensor goes
offline.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
33.22.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the sensor bus cable is connected to the port labeled Sensor
Bus on the MP controller and that the cable is properly connected also to the
RJ45 receptacle on the printed circuit board of the SpaceLogic Sensor.
For more information, see section 12.5 “Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to
an MP Controller ” on page 417.
• Ensure that the number of SpaceLogic Sensor devices connected to the MP
controller does not exceed the maximum limit, which is varaible depending
on the selected SpaceLogic Sensor model and the combination of cover and
sensor base type.
For more information, see section 12.4 “MP Controller Sensor Bus” on page
412.
• When two to four SpaceLogic Sensor devices are connected in a daisy-chain
configuration, ensure that each cable that connects two sensors is properly
connected to the RJ45 receptacles on the printed circuit boards of the
sensors.
• Connect a known working SpaceLogic Sensor alone to the MP controller
sensor bus port to determine whether the problem is due to the controller,
sensor, or wiring.

1340
33.22 SpaceLogic Sensor or MP Controller Sensor Bus Is Not Operational
• Ensure that the SpaceLogic Sensor devices do not consume too much
power, causing a voltage drop on the sensor bus.
Use a digital voltmeter to check that the voltage on the sensor bus
(measured at the controller) is not below 20.4 VDC. A standard RJ45
breakout terminal block can be used to facilitate the measurement.
Measure the voltage on the following RJ45 connector pins:
– Pins 4 and 7: 24 VDC (>20.4 VDC)
– Pins 5 and 8: 0 V (Ground)

1341
33.23 SpaceLogic Sensor or RP-C Controller Sensor Bus Is Not Operational
33.23 SpaceLogic Sensor or RP-C Controller

Sensor Bus Is Not Operational
The SpaceLogic Sensor or the RP-C controller sensor bus is not operational. An
alarm is triggered and presented in the EcoStruxure Building Operation software
when a SpaceLogic Sensor goes offline.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
switch or router.
33.23.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the sensor bus cable is connected to the RP-C controller's RS-
485 port that is configured for the sensor bus and that the cable is properly
connected to the RJ45 receptacle on the printed circuit board of the
SpaceLogic Sensor. By default, the RP-C controller's Sensor Bus port (RS-
485 Com A) is configured for the sensor bus.
For more information, see section 16.10 “Connecting SpaceLogic Sensor
Devices to an RP-C Controller ” on page 584.
• Ensure that the number of SpaceLogic Sensor devices connected to the RP-
C controller does not exceed the maximum limit, which is varaible depending
on the selected SpaceLogic Sensor model and the combination of cover and
sensor base type.
• When two to four SpaceLogic Sensor devices are connected in a daisy-chain
configuration, ensure that each cable that connects two sensors is properly
connected to the RJ45 receptacles on the printed circuit boards of the
sensors.
• Connect a known working SpaceLogic Sensor alone to the RP-C controller's
RS-485 port (Sensor Bus port) to determine whether the problem is due to
the controller, sensor, or wiring.

1342
33.23 SpaceLogic Sensor or RP-C Controller Sensor Bus Is Not Operational
• Ensure that the SpaceLogic Sensor devices do not consume too much
power, causing a voltage drop on the sensor bus.
Use a digital voltmeter to check that the voltage on the sensor bus
(measured at the controller) is not below 20.4 VDC. A standard RJ45
breakout terminal block can be used to facilitate the measurement.
– Pins 4 and 7: 24 VDC (>20.4 VDC)

1343
33.24 SpaceLogic Sensor Offline
33.24 SpaceLogic Sensor Offline

The SpaceLogic Sensor is offline. The device is not visible or not available in the
EcoStruxure Building Operation software such as WorkStation.
In WorkStation, the Status property indicates the sensor bus communication
status of a given SpaceLogic Sensor. The status value Non-operational
indicates that there are communication problems on the sensors bus. For more
information, see the SpaceLogic Sensor Properties – Basic Tab topic on
WebHelp. An alarm is triggered and presented in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation software when a SpaceLogic Sensor goes offline.
33.24.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the address DIP switch on the offline SpaceLogic Sensor is
configured to give the sensor a unique address on the sensor bus. Change
the DIP switch address if another offline SpaceLogic Sensor on the sensor
bus has the same DIP switch address.
For more information, see the Configuring a SpaceLogic Sensor topic on
WebHelp.
• Ensure that Cat 5 (or higher) cables are used for the sensor bus. Ensure also
that the cables are properly straight-through wired by checking the color-
coding of the wires.
• Ensure that the address DIP switch on the offline SpaceLogic Sensor is
working properly, by verifying that the sensor gets online when only that
sensor is connected to the sensor bus. Replace the SpaceLogic Sensor if
the address DIP switch is inoperable.

1344
33.25 Sensor Bus Communication Problems
33.25 Sensor Bus Communication Problems

There are communication problems such as no communication or checksum
errors detected on the sensor bus. The problems can result in incorrect data and
operation of the SpaceLogic Sensor devices.
The Sensor Bus LEDs on the MP controller can also indicate that there is no data
communication on the sensor bus. For more information, see section 12.6 “MP
Controller LEDs” on page 419.
In case the communication problems cause the SpaceLogic Sensor to go offline,
an alarm is triggered and presented in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software. For more information, see section 33.24 “SpaceLogic Sensor Offline”
on page 1344.
33.25.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the sensor bus wiring is located away from external electrical
noise sources such as high voltage cables and Variable Frequency Drives
(VFDs) for AC motors.

1345
33.26 RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Is Not Operational
33.26 RP Controller Expansion Module or

Multi-sensor Is Not Operational
When the Status LED on the device is not lit, this indicates that the device is not
powered by the RP-C Room bus. An alarm is triggered and presented in the
EcoStruxure Building Operation software when a device goes offline.
NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect an Ethernet cable from the controller's RS-485 Com A port or
RS-485 Com B port directly to an external Ethernet switch or router.
33.26.1 Solutions
For a new installation:
• Ensure that the RP-C controller is powered on.
• Ensure that the room bus cable is connected to the RP-C controller's RS-485
port that is configured for the room bus and that the cable is properly
connected to the Room Bus 1 or Room Bus 2 port (RJ45 receptacle) on the
RP controller expansion module (or multi-sensor). By default, the RP-C
controller's RS-485 Com B port is configured for the room bus.
• Ensure that maximum six devices of the supported combination of RP
controller expansions and multi-sensors are connected to the RP-C
controller.
• When up to six devices are connected in a daisy-chain configuration to the
RP-C, and none of the connected devices is working, proceed as follows:
– Disconnect and reconnect the room bus connectors (RJ45 plugs) one
by one and check that there is no dust accumulated in the room bus
ports (RJ45 receptacles). Ensure also that the connector is properly
plugged into the port.
– Disconnect the cable between the first and the second RP controller
expansion module (or multi-sensor) in the daisy chain. If the RP
controller expansion module (or multi-sensor) still does not work, the
problem is probably due to the RP-C, the first RP controller expansion
module (or multi-sensor) in the daisy chain, or the first cable in the daisy
chain. If the problem disappears for the first RP controller expansion

1346
module (or multi-sensor) in the daisy chain, the problem may be due to
short-circuited cables or short-circuited RP controller expansion
modules (or multi-sensors). The latter case is not very likely.
– Repeat the actions above for the subsequent cables and devices in the
daisy chain.
• When some RP controller expansion modules (or multi-sensors) on a room
bus are working, while other RP controller expansion modules (or multi-
sensors) are not working, check which ones are working, and which are not
working. For example, when the last device in the daisy chain is working, all
cables must be working, then replace the nonfunctioning device.
• Connect a known working cable from the RP-C to the RP controller
expansion module (or multi-sensor) to determine whether the problem is due
to a damaged cable. If so, replace the damaged cable.
• Connect a known working RP controller expansion module (or multi-sensor)
alone to the RP-C controller's port that is configured for the room bus to
determine whether the problem is due to the controller, expansion module
(or multi-sensor), or wiring.
• Ensure that the RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors do not
consume too much power, causing a voltage drop on the room bus.
Use a digital voltmeter to check that the voltage on the room bus (measured
at the controller) is not below 20.4 VDC. A standard RJ45 breakout terminal
block can be used to facilitate the measurement.
– Pins 4 and 7: 24 VDC (>20.4 VDC)
For an installation that has worked before:
• Check the time stamp of the alarm in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software. Investigate whether any special events, such as burglary,
construction work, power outage, and overvoltage due to lightning
discharges, may have occurred in the building at that time and caused the
problem.
• Ensure that the RP-C controller is powered on.
• When up to six devices are connected in a daisy-chain configuration to the
RP-C, and none of the connected devices work, proceed as follows:
– Disconnect and reconnect the room bus connectors (RJ45 plugs) one
by one and check that there is no dust accumulated in the room bus
ports (RJ45 receptacles). Ensure also that the connector is properly
plugged into the port.
– Disconnect the cable between the first and the second RP controller
expansion module (or multi-sensor) in the daisy chain. If the RP
controller expansion module (or multi-sensor) still does not work, the
problem is probably due to the RP-C, the first RP controller expansion
module (or multi-sensor) in the daisy chain, or the first cable in the daisy
chain. If the problem disappears for the first RP controller expansion

1347
module (or multi-sensor) in the daisy chain, the problem may be due to
short-circuited cables or short-circuited RP controller expansion
modules (or multi-sensors). The latter case is not very likely.
– Repeat the actions above for the subsequent cables and devices in the
daisy chain.
• When some RP controller expansion modules (or multi-sensors) on a room
bus are working, while other RP controller expansion modules (or multi-
sensors) are not working, check which ones are working, and which are not
working. For example, when the last device in the daisy chain is working, all
cables must be working, then replace the nonfunctioning device.
• Connect a known working cable from the RP-C to the RP controller
expansion module (or multi-sensor) to determine whether the problem is due
to a damaged cable. If so, replace the damaged cable.
• Connect a known working RP controller expansion module (or multi-sensor)
alone to the RP-C controller's RS-485 port that is configured for the room
bus to determine whether the problem is due to the controller, expansion
module (or multi-sensor), or wiring. By default, the RP-C controller's RS-485
Com B port is configured for the room bus.

1348
33.27 RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Offline
33.27 RP Controller Expansion Module or

Multi-sensor Offline
When the Status LED on the device has a constant green light, normal operation
is indicated. In WorkStation, the Status property indicates the room bus
communication status of a given RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor.
The status value Offline indicates that the communication between the RP-C
controller and the RP controller expansion module or multi-sensor is disrupted.
For more information, see the RP Controller Expansion Module Properties -
Basic Tab topic on WebHelp. An alarm is triggered and presented in the
EcoStruxure Building Operation software when a device goes offline.
33.27.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the address rotary switch on the offline device is configured to
give the device a unique address in the range of 1 to 6 on the room bus.
Change the rotary switch address if another offline device on the room bus
has the same rotary switch address.
For more information, see section 17.37 “Configuring the Room Bus Address
for an RP Controller Expansion Module” on page 785.
For more information, see section 17.38 “Configuring the Room Bus Address
for an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor” on page 786.
• Ensure that there is no dust accumulated in the room bus ports (RJ45
receptacles) causing contact problems.
• Use a known working cable to determine whether the problem is due to a
damaged cable. If so, replace the damaged cable.
• Ensure that Cat 5 (or higher) cables are used for the room bus. Ensure also
that the cables are properly straight-through wired by checking the color-
coding of the wires.
• Ensure that the address rotary switch on the offline device is working
properly, by verifying that the device gets online when only that device is
connected to the room bus. Replace the device if the address rotary switch is
inoperable.
problem.
• Check whether there are any devices online on the same RP-C room bus. If
there are no devices online on the room bus, connect a known working RP
controller expansion module or multi-sensor with a known working cable to
the RP-C controller and check if that device goes online. The cables to the
devices that are offline must be disconnected for this test. If the device does
not go online, consider replacing the RP-C controller.

1349
33.27 RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Offline
• Connect a known working cable to the device that is offline to determine

whether the problem is due to a damaged cable. If so, replace the damaged
cable.
• If a new device has recently been connected to the room bus, ensure that
the new device does not have the same address as the device that is offline.
• If no device has recently connected to the room bus, ensure that the rotary
switch address is not changed for any of the devices connected to the room
bus.

1350
33.28 Room Bus Communication Problems
33.28 Room Bus Communication Problems

Communication problems such as no communication or checksum errors are
detected by the RP-C or the RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors.
In case the communication problems cause the RP controller expansion module
or multi-sensor to go offline, an alarm is triggered and presented in the
EcoStruxure Building Operation software. For more information, see section
33.27 “RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Offline” on page 1349.
33.28.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the room bus wiring is located away from external electrical
noise sources such as high voltage cables and Variable Frequency Drives
(VFDs) for AC motors.
communication problems.
• If no special event has occurred in the building at the time for the alarm, the
problem is probably due to a nonfunctional device. Perform the following
steps to determine whether that is the case:
– Connect the device with a known working cable to the RP-C room bus
and check whether that solves the problem.
– Connect the device to a different RP-C and check whether that solves
the problem.
• If the problem applies to more than one device on the same room bus, the
problem is probably due a nonfunctional RP-C controller or nonfunctional
cables. Then consider replacing the RP-C controller and replace the
nonfunctional cables.

1351
33.29 AD v1 or AD v2 Does Not Turn On or Battery Does Not Charge
33.29 AD v1 or AD v2 Does Not Turn On or

Battery Does Not Charge
AD v1 or AD v2 cannot be turned on or the battery indicator shows the battery is
not charging.
WARNING
equipment damage.
33.29.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the USB cable is correctly connected.
• When a USB power adapter is used to power AD v1 or AD v2, ensure that
the power adapter is correctly connected.
• Ensure that the USB cable is not damaged.
• Ensure that the USB cable length does not exceed 3 m (10 ft). Use only USB
cables ordered from Schneider Electric.
• Ensure that only one AD v1 or AD v2 is connected to the automation server.
The USB host port on an automation server can supply only one AD v1 or
AD v2 with power.
• When a USB power adapter is used to power AD v1 or AD v2, ensure that
the power adapter is approved by Samsung.

1352
33.30 AD v3 Does Not Turn On or Operate Correctly
33.30 AD v3 Does Not Turn On or Operate

Correctly
AD v3 cannot be turned on or the device does not operate correctly.
33.30.1 Solutions
• When using a wired (USB) connection for communication between AD v3
and the automation server:
– Ensure that the Y-shaped cable (SXWADUSBC10002 or
SXWADUSBC10003) is correctly connected to the automation server
and the 24 VDC power supply.
For more information, see section 29.6 “Connecting AD v3 to an
Automation Server and a 24 VDC Power Supply” on page 1091.
• Ensure that the cable is not damaged.
• Ensure that the cable length does not exceed 3 m (10 ft). Use only the
specified cables from Schneider Electric.
• Perform a recovery (factory reset) of AD v3.
For more information, see section 29.8 “Performing a Recovery (Factory
Reset) of AD v3” on page 1094.

1353
33.31 AD v1 or AD v2 Battery Does Not Fully Charge
33.31 AD v1 or AD v2 Battery Does Not Fully

Charge
When AD v1 or AD v2 is powered by an automation server or by a USB power
adapter through a USB “Y” cable, the battery indicator shows that the battery
does not fully charge up to 100 percent.
33.31.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the screen timeout is configured to automatically turn off the
screen when you are not using the device. During the sleep mode, the
battery is charging until it is fully charged.
• Decrease the brightness of the screen to save battery power.
• Ensure that the power-saving mode is activated.
• Ensure that all unused wireless functions are disabled to save battery power.

1354
33.32 USB Data Communication is Lagging or Data is Lost
33.32 USB Data Communication is Lagging or

Data is Lost
The USB data communication between Advanced Display and the automation
server is lagging or data is lost.
33.32.1 Solutions
• Ensure that the USB cable is correctly connected.
• Ensure that the USB cable is not damaged.
• Ensure that the USB cable length does not exceed 3 m (10 ft). Use only USB
cables ordered from Schneider Electric.

1355
33.33 Network Unavailable
33.33 Network Unavailable

You are having trouble connecting Operator Display to the network and
interacting with devices.
33.33.1 Solution
Ensure that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the ETH1 port of
Operator Display.
If Operator Display is on network but still having trouble interacting with devices:
• Check the Network configuration:
– If Static make sure the IP, netmask and gateway are correctly
configured.
– The IP are not hidden by other device netmasks.
– Netmasks are used to help ensure a device only sees network traffic
from specific IP ranges.
– If going through a gateway. make sure it is the right one.
• Check the BACnet configuration:
– It is using the correct port.
– Is has a unique ID within the BACnet network.

1356
Schneider Electric
www.se.com/buildings
© 2021 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
04-40001-01-en
December 2021

SpaceLogic - Hardware Reference Guide

Uploaded by

SpaceLogic - Hardware Reference Guide

Uploaded by

SpaceLogic™

2 Additional Information ................................................. 51

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

4 Terminal Bases ........................................................... 65

5 Power Supplies ........................................................... 93

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

6 AS-P Servers ............................................................ 107

7 Central IO Modules ................................................... 127

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

8 AS-B Servers ............................................................ 221

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

9 SpaceLogic Device General Information .................. 271

10 MP-C Controllers ...................................................... 281

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

11 MP-V Controllers ...................................................... 349

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

12 MP Controller General Information ........................... 407

13 Output Override ........................................................ 425

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

14 Output Override User Interface ................................. 473

15 IP-IO Modules ........................................................... 495

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

16 RP-C Controllers ....................................................... 559

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

17 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

18 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules ................ 843

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

19 Remote Control ......................................................... 889

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

20 KNX Modbus Gateway .............................................. 907

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

21 SpaceLogic Sensors ................................................. 933

22 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model ............... 947

23 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

24 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model ...... 973

25 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter ............................... 1011

26 Zigbee Adapter ....................................................... 1023

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

30 Operator Display ..................................................... 1097

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

31 Wiring ...................................................................... 1127

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

32 RS-485 Communications ........................................ 1185

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

33 Hardware Troubleshooting ..................................... 1311

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

The Introduction part contains information on the purpose of

1.1 Purpose of This Guide

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

1.2 How This Guide is Organized

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

1.3 Safety Information

1.3.1 Important Information

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

1.3.2 Cybersecurity Safety Notice

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

1.4 Consignes de sécurité